Strata CTX Programming Manual Ctx100 S 670 Prog

User Manual: Strata ctx100-s ctx100 ctx-670 Programming Manual www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 580 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

726+,%$ Telecommunication Systems Division
November 2003
CTX100-S, CTX100 and CTX670
Programming Manual
Digital Business Telephone Systems
Publication Information
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division,
reserves the right, without prior notice, to revise this information publication for any
reason, including, but not limited to, utilization of new advances in the state of
technical arts or to simply change the design of this document.
Further, Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems
Division, also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make such changes in
equipment design or components as engineering or manufacturing methods may
warrant.
© Copyright 2003
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Telecommunication Systems Division
All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights hereon, may be
reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic, electronic, or mechanical,
including recording, taping, photocopying, or information retrieval systems—without
express written permission of the publisher of this material.
Strata and SmartMedia are registered trademarks of Toshiba Corporation.
Stratagy is a registered trademark of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks are the property of their
respective owners.
CTX-MA-PRGRM-VF
4025120
Version F, November 2003
Strata CTX100 and CTX670
General End User Information
The Strata CTX100 or CTX670 Digital Business Telephone System is registered in
accordance with the provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Communications
Commission’s Rules and Regulations.
FCC Requirements
Means of Connection: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has
established rules which permit the Strata CTX100 or CTX670 system to be connected
directly to the telephone network. Connection points are provided by the telephone
company—connections for this type of customer-provided equipment will not be
provided on coin lines. Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs.
Incidence of Harm: If the system is malfunctioning, it may also be disrupting the
telephone network. The system should be disconnected until the problem can be
determined and repaired. If this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily
disconnect service. If possible, they will notify you in advance, but, if advance notice is
not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your
right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Service or Repair: For service or repair, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications
distributor. To obtain the nearest Toshiba telecommunications distributor in your area,
log onto www.toshiba.com/taistsd/locator.htm or call (800) 222-5805 and ask for a
Toshiba Telecom Dealer.
Telephone Network Compatibility: The telephone company may make changes in its
facilities, equipment, operations, and procedures. If such changes affect the
compatibility or use of the Strata CTX100 or CTX670 system, the telephone company
will notify you in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted
service.
Notification of Telephone Company: Before connecting a Strata CTX100 or CTX670
system to the telephone network, the telephone company may request the following:
1. Your telephone number.
2. FCC registration number:
• Strata CTX100 or CTX670 may be configured as a Key, Hybrid or PBX
telephone system. The appropriate configuration for your system is dependent
upon your operation of the system.
• If the operation of your system is only manual selection of outgoing lines, it may
be registered as a Key telephone system.
• If your operation requires automatic selection of outgoing lines, such as dial
access, Least Cost Routing, Pooled Line Buttons, etc., the system must be
registered as a Hybrid telephone system. In addition to the above, certain
features (tie Lines, Off-premises Stations, etc.) may also require Hybrid
telephone system registration in some areas.
• If you are unsure of your type of operation and/or the appropriate FCC
registration number, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor
for assistance.
CTX100 Registration Numbers
PBX: CJ6MUL-35931-PF-E, fully-protected PBXs
Hybrid: CJ6MUL-35930-MF-E, fully-protected multifunction systems
Key: CJ6MUL-35929-KF-E, fully-protected telephone key systems
CTX670 Registration Numbers
PBX: CJ6MUL-35934-PF-E, fully-protected PBXs
Hybrid: CJ6MUL-35933-MF-E, fully-protected multifunction systems
Key: CJ6MUL-35932-KF-E, fully-protected telephone key systems
• Ringer equivalence number: 0.3B. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is
useful to determine the quantity of devices which you may connect to your
telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your number is
called. In most areas, but not all, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to
one line should not exceed five (5.0B). To be certain of the number of devices
you may connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you should contact
your local telephone company to ascertain the maximum REN for your calling
area.
3. Network connection information USOC jack required: RJ11/14C,
RJ21/2E/2F/2G/2HX/RJ49C (see Network Requirements in this document). Items
2, 3 and 4 are also indicated on the equipment label.
4. Authorized Network Parts: 02LS2/GS2, 02RV2-T/O, OL13C/B, T11/12/31/32M,
04DU9-BN/DN/1SN, 02IS5, 04DU9-BN/DN/1SN1ZN
Radio Frequency Interference
Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if
not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual, may
cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference
when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case, the user, at his/her own
expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the
interference.
This system is listed with Underwriters Laboratory.
UL Requirement: If wiring from any telephone exits the building or is
subject to lightning or other electrical surges, then secondary protection
is required. Secondary protection is also required on DID, OPS, and Tie
lines. (Additional information is provided in this manual.)
Important Notice — Music-On-Hold
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from
the American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar
organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the music-on-hold
feature of this telecommunication system. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.,
hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.1
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification
means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective,
operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal
Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee
the Equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should
be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of
service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by
the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request
the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of
the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION! Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or
electrician, as appropriate.
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.2
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to
a telephone interface. The terminal on an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence
Numbers of all the Devices does not exceed 5.
UL
®
TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS, INC. (“TAIS”)
Telecommunication Systems Division License Agreement
IMPORTANT: THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (“YOU”) AND TAIS. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. USE OF ANY
SOFTWARE OR ANY RELATED INFORMATION (COLLECTIVELY, “SOFTWARE”) INSTALLED ON OR SHIPPED WITH A TAIS TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM PRODUCT OR OTHERWISE MADE
A
VAILABLE TO YOU BY TAIS IN WHATEVER FORM OR MEDIA, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS, UNLESS SEPARATE TERMS ARE PROVIDED BY THE SOFTWARE
SUPPLIER. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND PROMPTLY RETURN IT TO THE LOCATION
FROM WHICH YOU OBTAINED IT IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE RETURN POLICIES. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY TAIS, THIS SOFTWARE IS LICENSED FOR
DISTRIBUTION ONLY TO END-USERS PURSUANT TO THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
1. License Grant. The Software is not sold; it is licensed upon payment of applicable charges. TAIS grants to you a personal, non-transferable and non-exclusive right to use the copy of the Software
provided under this License Agreement. You agree you will not copy the Software except as necessary to use it on one TAIS system at a time at one location. Modifying, translating, renting, copying,
distributing, transferring or assigning all or part of the Software, or any rights granted hereunder, to any other persons and removing any proprietary notices, labels or marks from the Software is strictly
prohibited; You agree violation of such restrictions will cause irreparable harm to TAIS and provide grounds for injunctive relief, without notice, against You or any other person in possession of the Software.
You and any other person whose possession of the software violates this License Agreement shall promptly surrender possession of the Software to TAIS, upon demand. Furthermore, you hereby agree not
to create derivative works based on the Software. TAIS reserves the right to terminate this license and to immediately repossess the software in the event that You or any other person violates this License
A
greement.
2. Intellectual Property. You acknowledge that no title to the intellectual property in the Software is transferred to you. You further acknowledge that title and full ownership rights to the Software will remain
the exclusive property of TAIS and/or its suppliers, and you will not acquire any rights to the Software, except the license expressly set forth above. You will not remove or change any proprietary notices
contained in or on the Software. The Software is protected under US patent, copyright, trade secret, and/or other proprietary laws, as well as international treaties. Any transfer, use, or copying of the
software in violation of the License Agreement constitutes copyright infringement. You are hereby on notice that any transfer, use, or copying of the Software in violation of this License Agreement constitutes
a willful infringement of copyright.
3. No Reverse Engineering. You agree that you will not attempt, and if you employ employees or engage contractors, you will use your best efforts to prevent your employees and contractors from
attempting to reverse compile, reverse engineer, modify, translate or disassemble the Software in whole or in part. Any failure to comply with the above or any other terms and conditions contained herein will
result in the automatic termination of this license and the reversion of the rights granted hereunder back to TAIS.
4. Limited Warranty. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, TAIS AND ITS SUPPLIERS
DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS, THE WARRANTY OF YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE, AND THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU. NEITHER TAIS NOR ITS SUPPLIERS WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET
YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. HOWEVER, TAIS WARRANTS THAT ANY MEDIA ON WHICH THE
SOFTWARE IS FURNISHED IS FREE FROM DEFECTS IN MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP UNDER NORMAL USE FOR A PERIOD OF NINETY (90) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF DELIVERY TO YOU.
5. Limitation Of Liability. TAIS’ ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE AT TAIS’ OPTION REPLACEMENT OF THE MEDIA OR
REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES FOR PERSONAL INJURY, LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION/DATA, OR ANY
OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM BY A THIRD PARTY.
6. State/Jurisdiction Laws. SOME STATES/JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY MAY LAST, OR
THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO SUCH LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU
SPECIFIC RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE/JURISDICTION TO STATE/JURISDICTION.
7. Export Laws. This License Agreement involves products and/or technical data that may be controlled under the United States Export Administration Regulations and may be subject to the approval of the
United States Department of Commerce prior to export. Any export, directly or indirectly, in contravention of the United States Export Administration Regulations, or any other applicable law, regulation or
order, is prohibited.
8. Governing Law. This License Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of California, United States of America, excluding its conflict of law provisions.
9. United States Government Restricted Rights. The Software is provided with Restricted Rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government, its agencies and/or instrumentalities is
subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (October 1988) or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the
Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.
10. Severability. If any provision of this License Agreement shall be held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions hereof shall not in any way be
affected or impaired.
11. No Waiver. No waiver of any breach of any provision of this License Agreement shall constitute a waiver of any prior, concurrent or subsequent breach of the same or any other provisions hereof, and no
w
aiver shall be effective unless made in writing and signed by an authorized representative of the waiving party.
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AND THAT YOU UNDERSTAND ITS PROVISIONS. YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. YOU
FURTHER AGREE THAT THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTAINS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND TAIS AND SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR
A
GREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN, OR ANY OTHER COMMUNICATION RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Telecommunication Systems Division
9740 Irvine Boulevard
Irvine, California 92618-1697
United States of America
TSD 081601 5932
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Telecommunication Systems Division
Limited Warranty
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., (“TAIS”) warrants that this telephone equipment (except for fuses,
lamps, and other consumables) will, upon delivery by TAIS or an authorized TAIS dealer to a retail customer in new
condition, be free from defects in material and workmanship for twenty-four (24) months after delivery. This
warranty is void (a) if the equipment is used under other than normal use and maintenance conditions, (b) if the
equipment is modified or altered, unless the modification or alteration is expressly authorized by TAIS, (c) if the
equipment is subject to abuse, neglect, lightning, electrical fault, or accident, (d) if the equipment is repaired by
someone other than TAIS or an authorized TAIS dealer, (e) if the equipment’s serial number is defaced or missing, or
(f) if the equipment is installed or used in combination or in assembly with products not supplied by TAIS and which
are not compatible or are of inferior quality, design, or performance.
The sole obligation of TAIS or Toshiba Corporation under this warranty, or under any other legal obligation with
respect to the equipment, is the repair or replacement by TAIS or its authorized dealer of such defective or missing
parts as are causing the malfunction with new or refurbished parts (at their option). If TAIS or one of its authorized
dealers does not replace or repair such parts, the retail customer’s sole remedy will be a refund of the price charged by
TAIS to its dealers for such parts as are proven to be defective, and which are returned to TAIS through one of its
authorized dealers within the warranty period and no later than thirty (30) days after such malfunction, whichever
first occurs.
Under no circumstances will the retail customer or any user or dealer or other person be entitled to any direct, special,
indirect, consequential, or exemplary damages, for breach of contract, tort, or otherwise. Under no circumstances will
any such person be entitled to any sum greater than the purchase price paid for the item of equipment that is
malfunctioning.
To obtain service under this warranty, the retail customer must bring the malfunction of the machine to the attention
of one of TAIS’ authorized dealers within the twenty-four (24) month period and no later than thirty (30) days after
such malfunction, whichever first occurs. Failure to bring the malfunction to the attention of an authorized TAIS
dealer within the prescribed time results in the customer being not entitled to warranty service.
THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES FROM EITHER TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS,
INC., OR TOSHIBA CORPORATION WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE FACE OF THIS WARRANTY. ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND FITNESS FOR USE, ARE
EXCLUDED.
No TAIS dealer and no person other than an officer of TAIS may extend or modify this warranty. No such
modification or extension is effective unless it is in writing and signed by the vice president and general manager,
Telecommunication Systems Division.
Strata CTX Programming 11/03 i
Contents
Introduction
Organization...........................................................................................................................................xi
Part 1: Getting Started .....................................................................................................................xi
Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming............................................................................................xi
Part 3: Telephone Button Programming.........................................................................................xii
Part 4: Appendices..........................................................................................................................xii
Conventions..........................................................................................................................................xiii
Related Documents/Media...................................................................................................................xiv
General Description.......................................................................................................................xiv
Installation and Maintenance Manual............................................................................................xiv
User Guides ...................................................................................................................................xiv
Quick Reference Guide .................................................................................................................xiv
CD-ROMs......................................................................................................................................xiv
Part 1: Getting Started
Chapter 1 – Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up ..........................................................................2-1
Limitations.....................................................................................................................................2-2
Station and BIOU Auto-programming ..........................................................................................2-2
Station PDN Auto-programming...................................................................................................2-3
CO Line Auto-programming .........................................................................................................2-3
BIPU Settings ................................................................................................................................2-5
CTX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming ..........................................................2-8
Default Feature Access Codes.......................................................................................................2-9
Step 2: Plan Your System Requirements ...........................................................................................2-9
Step 3: Program CTX for First Time .................................................................................................2-9
Review Program Flow.................................................................................................................2-11
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences ................................................................................................2-12
Station Setup................................................................................................................................2-12
Trunk Setup – Analog..................................................................................................................2-12
Trunk Setup – T1.........................................................................................................................2-13
Trunk Setup – ISDN PRI.............................................................................................................2-13
Miscellaneous ..............................................................................................................................2-14
Contents
Chapter 2 – CTX WinAdmin Overview
ii Strata CTX Programming 11/03
Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming
Chapter 2 – CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Main Screen .............................................................................................................2-2
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens ..............................................................................................................2-3
Special Buttons..............................................................................................................................2-5
Table Views...................................................................................................................................2-6
Chapter 3 – Installation
PC Hardware Requirements.................................................................................................................3-1
PC Software Requirements ..................................................................................................................3-1
Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software ..........................................................................................3-2
Requirements Not Found...............................................................................................................3-3
Step 2: Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX ................................................................................3-5
Step 2A: Connect CTX WinAdmin PC to Strata CTX Processor NIC.........................................3-5
Step 2B: Set Up IP Address of CTX NIC .....................................................................................3-7
Step 2C: Set Up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC NIC (Windows XP) ...................................3-8
Step 2D: Set Up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC NIC (Windows 2000) ................................3-9
Step 3: Set up Modem Connection (Optional) .................................................................................3-10
Step 3A: Connect CTX WinAdmin PC to Strata CTX Modem..................................................3-10
Step 3B: Set up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC Modem (Windows XP).............................3-11
Step 3C: Verify Modem Hardware Settings................................................................................3-12
Step 3D: Set up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC Modem (Windows 2000)..........................3-13
Step 4: Establish Communication with Strata CTX .........................................................................3-14
Manual Dialing to Connect to the CTX Modem.........................................................................3-17
Step 5: Use Profile to Add Users and CTX Systems .......................................................................3-19
User Management........................................................................................................................3-19
Step 6: Set Up Users for CTX WinAdmin Access ..........................................................................3-21
Set Up Users for CTX WinAdmin Access..................................................................................3-21
Step 7: Exit CTX WinAdmin ...........................................................................................................3-21
Chapter 4 – System
100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments.....................................................................................................4-1
Dial Number Plan.................................................................................................................................4-2
102 Flexible Access Codes ..................................................................................................................4-3
Creating New Feature Codes.........................................................................................................4-4
Flexible Numbering Default Settings............................................................................................4-4
117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis ....................................................................................................4-7
103 Class of Service.............................................................................................................................4-8
104 System Timer ..............................................................................................................................4-10
105 System Data ................................................................................................................................4-12
System Call Forward..........................................................................................................................4-15
500 System Call Forward Assignment........................................................................................4-15
504 System Call Forward Operation Status ................................................................................4-16
System Call Forward Copy.........................................................................................................4-16
System Call Forward Table View......................................................................................................4-17
501 System Speed Dial ......................................................................................................................4-18
System Speed Dial Table View..........................................................................................................4-19
Contents
Chapter 5 – Station
Strata CTX Programming 11/03 iii
Day Night Service..............................................................................................................................4-19
112 Day/Night Mode Calendar....................................................................................................4-20
106 Day/Night Mode “Type of Day” Mapping Table Assignment.............................................4-20
113 Day/Night Mode Schedule per Tenant Assignment.............................................................4-21
PAD Table..........................................................................................................................................4-22
107 PAD Table Assignment........................................................................................................4-22
108 PAD Group Assignment.......................................................................................................4-23
114 PAD Conference Assignment...............................................................................................4-24
110 Password .....................................................................................................................................4-25
109 Music on Hold.............................................................................................................................4-26
I/O Device..........................................................................................................................................4-28
803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments...................................................................................4-28
801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment ..............................................................................4-30
804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port Setup ............................................................................................4-32
115 Advisory Messages .....................................................................................................................4-33
116 Data Initialize..............................................................................................................................4-34
120 Tenant Data Assignment.............................................................................................................4-35
Chapter 5 – Station
Assignment...........................................................................................................................................5-1
Basic/200 Station Data ..................................................................................................................5-1
Station PDN Selective Copy..........................................................................................................5-6
Station Extended List.....................................................................................................................5-6
204 DKT Parameters .....................................................................................................................5-7
214 DSS Console Assignment.....................................................................................................5-14
Key...............................................................................................................................................5-15
Timer ...........................................................................................................................................5-21
Emergency Ringdown Assignment .............................................................................................5-22
206 Phantom DN................................................................................................................................5-23
209 Hunt Group..................................................................................................................................5-25
218 Station Hunt Assignments ....................................................................................................5-26
Hunt Group Table View.....................................................................................................................5-27
Paging Group .....................................................................................................................................5-28
Paging Group Table View..................................................................................................................5-29
210 Pickup Group ..............................................................................................................................5-30
Pickup Group Table View..................................................................................................................5-30
Multiple Call Group...........................................................................................................................5-31
Incoming Call to MC Group........................................................................................................5-31
MCPN Owner Privileges.............................................................................................................5-31
Member Requirements ................................................................................................................5-31
Call Forward Activation..............................................................................................................5-32
517 Multiple Call Group Assignment .........................................................................................5-32
518 Multiple Calling Members Assignment ...............................................................................5-33
516 Station Speed Dial.......................................................................................................................5-34
Station Speed Dial Table View..........................................................................................................5-35
PDN Table View................................................................................................................................5-36
ISDN ..................................................................................................................................................5-36
202 ISDN BRI Station.................................................................................................................5-36
217 ISDN Station Data................................................................................................................5-40
Contents
Chapter 6 – Trunks
iv Strata CTX Programming 11/03
Setup Wizards ....................................................................................................................................5-41
PDN Range Setup Wizard...........................................................................................................5-41
Multiple DN Assignment Wizard................................................................................................5-42
VMID Range ...............................................................................................................................5-44
Chapter 6 – Trunks
304 Incoming Line Group....................................................................................................................6-1
304 Incoming Line Group Assignment .........................................................................................6-2
306 Outgoing Line Groups...................................................................................................................6-4
300 Trunk Assignment.........................................................................................................................6-6
313 Caller ID .................................................................................................................................6-8
308 Trunk Timer............................................................................................................................6-9
310 DIT Assignment ...................................................................................................................6-11
309 Direct Inward Dialing .................................................................................................................6-13
318 DID Intercept Assignments.........................................................................................................6-16
Service................................................................................................................................................6-19
311 DISA Security Code.............................................................................................................6-19
319 Intercept Treatment...............................................................................................................6-19
315 T1 Trunk Card.............................................................................................................................6-20
DID/DNIS Table View ......................................................................................................................6-21
ISDN ..................................................................................................................................................6-21
317 ISDN BRI Trunk ..................................................................................................................6-21
302 PRI and IP QSIG ..................................................................................................................6-25
Call-by-Call .................................................................................................................................6-29
320 B Channel .............................................................................................................................6-31
316 Shared D Channel.................................................................................................................6-32
Calling Number ...........................................................................................................................6-33
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard.........................................................................................................6-35
Chapter 7 – Attendant
404 Attendant Group Assignment........................................................................................................7-1
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment .....................................................................................7-3
Chapter 8 – IP Telephone Programming
150 System IP Data Assignment..........................................................................................................8-1
151 BIPU Configuration ......................................................................................................................8-4
152 Voice Packet Configuration Table Assignment............................................................................8-5
250 IPT Data Assignment ....................................................................................................................8-7
BIPU-M and IPT Program Update.......................................................................................................8-9
FTP Server Information.................................................................................................................8-9
BIPU Program Update.................................................................................................................8-10
IPT Program Update....................................................................................................................8-11
Chapter 9 – Services
540 Pilot DN Assignment ....................................................................................................................9-1
Maximum Pilot DNs......................................................................................................................9-1
579 System Voice Mail Data.........................................................................................................9-2
580 Voice Mail Port Data..............................................................................................................9-4
Contents
Chapter 9 – Services
Strata CTX Programming 11/03 v
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing.........................................................................................9-6
DR Overview.................................................................................................................................9-6
Destination Restriction Guide Page...................................................................................................9-10
DR Dialing Setup.........................................................................................................................9-10
DR Digit Table Setup ..................................................................................................................9-12
DR Class of Service Setup...........................................................................................................9-12
LCR Overview ...................................................................................................................................9-15
LCR Analysis Process .................................................................................................................9-15
DR................................................................................................................................................9-15
Route Analysis.............................................................................................................................9-16
Time of Day.................................................................................................................................9-16
Connection...................................................................................................................................9-16
LCR Guide Page ................................................................................................................................9-16
LCR Dialing Setup ......................................................................................................................9-17
LCR Route Plan Setup.................................................................................................................9-18
LCR Day of Week and Time Zone Setup....................................................................................9-21
LCR COS and Station Setup .......................................................................................................9-22
LCR/DR .............................................................................................................................................9-23
LCR Assignment .........................................................................................................................9-23
Route Define................................................................................................................................9-25
Route Schedule............................................................................................................................9-27
Public Holidays and LCR Time Zones........................................................................................9-29
LCR/DR Screening......................................................................................................................9-30
Destination Restriction ................................................................................................................9-32
DRL Table View .........................................................................................................................9-34
Centrex/PBX Screening Table View...........................................................................................9-34
Account Codes.............................................................................................................................9-35
509 DR Override by System Speed Dial.....................................................................................9-37
510 COS Override Assignment...................................................................................................9-38
Networking.........................................................................................................................................9-39
Strata Net Private Networking.....................................................................................................9-39
QSIG............................................................................................................................................9-39
Node ID .......................................................................................................................................9-39
Network Directory Number.........................................................................................................9-40
Network Feature Access Code ....................................................................................................9-40
Digit Manipulation ......................................................................................................................9-41
Traveling Class Mark ..................................................................................................................9-41
Path Replacement ........................................................................................................................9-41
Coordinated Numbering Plan......................................................................................................9-42
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ...............................................................................9-42
Centralized Voice Mail................................................................................................................9-43
Centralized Attendant..................................................................................................................9-43
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher).........................................................................9-44
Network Attendant Console BLF................................................................................................9-45
Network DSS/BLF for Digital Telephones .................................................................................9-48
Network DSS (R1.3 and higher)..................................................................................................9-50
Network Feature Content...................................................................................................................9-52
Contents
Chapter 10 – Operation
vi Strata CTX Programming 11/03
Configuration .....................................................................................................................................9-53
RPTU2 PCB ................................................................................................................................9-53
Circuits.........................................................................................................................................9-53
Strata Net Programming Overview....................................................................................................9-53
656 Node ID Assignment...................................................................................................................9-54
670 Remote Node Data Assignment..................................................................................................9-55
651 Private Routing Plan Analysis ....................................................................................................9-56
Private Route Choice Definition........................................................................................................9-56
654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment.........................................................................9-57
655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment.......................................................9-57
Mapping .............................................................................................................................................9-58
657 Network COS Mapping Table..............................................................................................9-58
658/659/660 Network DRL/FRL/QPL Mapping Tables.............................................................9-59
661 Network DN Table Assignment..................................................................................................9-59
219 Network DSS Notify Data Delete...............................................................................................9-60
Strata Net QSIG Over IP....................................................................................................................9-61
671 IP Address Convert Table.....................................................................................................9-61
672 Node ID Detail Information .................................................................................................9-62
Miscellaneous ..............................................................................................................................9-64
External Devices ................................................................................................................................9-68
Door Phones ................................................................................................................................9-68
515 View BIOU Control Relay Assignments..............................................................................9-72
503 Paging Devices Group Assignments ....................................................................................9-73
550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group........................................................................................9-74
Chapter 10 – Operation
System Setup......................................................................................................................................10-1
900 CTX Restart..........................................................................................................................10-2
901 Display Version....................................................................................................................10-3
902 Set Time and Date ................................................................................................................10-3
915 Regional Selection................................................................................................................10-4
908 SmartMedia.................................................................................................................................10-4
SmartMedia Card.........................................................................................................................10-4
CTX SmartMedia Folders ...........................................................................................................10-6
SmartMedia Errors ......................................................................................................................10-7
911 Remote Program Update.............................................................................................................10-7
Prerequisites.................................................................................................................................10-7
CTX Software Update Files ........................................................................................................10-7
CTX Software Identification .......................................................................................................10-7
910 Data Backup..............................................................................................................................10-13
916 IP Configuration........................................................................................................................10-14
FTP User Accounts ..........................................................................................................................10-15
File Information ...............................................................................................................................10-16
Community Name............................................................................................................................10-17
909 MAC Address............................................................................................................................10-18
Trap Destinations .............................................................................................................................10-19
License Control................................................................................................................................10-20
License Issue..............................................................................................................................10-20
License Activate ........................................................................................................................10-21
License Information .........................................................................................................................10-21
Contents
Chapter 11 – Maintenance
Strata CTX Programming 11/03 vii
Chapter 11 – Maintenance
Quality Of Service..............................................................................................................................11-1
Trace Function ...................................................................................................................................11-1
Trace Data....................................................................................................................................11-1
Event Trace Control...........................................................................................................................11-3
903 Start/Stop Trace....................................................................................................................11-3
904 ISDN Trace Location............................................................................................................11-4
905 All ISDN Trunk Trace Selection..........................................................................................11-4
906 Change Trace Side................................................................................................................11-4
Error Alarm Log.................................................................................................................................11-5
907 System Admin Log .....................................................................................................................11-6
Memory Access Operation.................................................................................................................11-6
Components........................................................................................................................................11-7
Chapter 12 – Tools and Profile
Tools...................................................................................................................................................12-1
Download.....................................................................................................................................12-1
Profile.................................................................................................................................................12-2
Customize....................................................................................................................................12-2
User Management........................................................................................................................12-2
Part 3: Telephone Button Programming
Chapter 13 – Telephone Button Programming
Record Sheet Overview......................................................................................................................13-1
Telephone Button Overview ..............................................................................................................13-2
Telephone Button Commands .....................................................................................................13-3
Button Programming Examples.........................................................................................................13-5
Program 100 ................................................................................................................................13-5
Program 200 ................................................................................................................................13-5
Program 204 ................................................................................................................................13-6
Program 205 ................................................................................................................................13-6
Program 208 ................................................................................................................................13-6
Button Programming Procedure.........................................................................................................13-7
100 Series Programs ........................................................................................................................13-11
200 Series Programs.........................................................................................................................13-28
300 Series Programs.........................................................................................................................13-52
400 Series Programs.........................................................................................................................13-73
500 Series Programs.........................................................................................................................13-74
600 Series Programs ........................................................................................................................13-91
800 Series Programs.........................................................................................................................13-94
900 Series Programs.........................................................................................................................13-96
System Initialize ........................................................................................................................13-96
Display Version .........................................................................................................................13-97
Set Time and Date .....................................................................................................................13-99
ISDN Trace Location...............................................................................................................13-101
All ISDN Trunk Trace.............................................................................................................13-102
Event Trace Side Change ........................................................................................................13-102
Contents
Chapter 14 – Maintenance
viii Strata CTX Programming 11/03
System Admin Log..................................................................................................................13-103
Format/Unmount SmartMedia.................................................................................................13-103
MAC Address (System Serial Number)..................................................................................13-105
Data Backup ............................................................................................................................13-105
Program Update.......................................................................................................................13-106
Make Busy Control..................................................................................................................13-107
Regional Selection...................................................................................................................13-109
IP Configuration ......................................................................................................................13-110
Chapter 14 – Maintenance
Data Backup.......................................................................................................................................14-1
Backup Progress and Completion Indicators...............................................................................14-1
Restoring Programmed Data..............................................................................................................14-2
Local Update......................................................................................................................................14-2
Prerequisites for CTX100 and CTX670 Local Update ...............................................................14-2
CTX Software Update Files ........................................................................................................14-2
CTX Software Identification .......................................................................................................14-2
Strata CTX100 Local Update ......................................................................................................14-4
Strata CTX670 Local Update ......................................................................................................14-6
Trace Function ...................................................................................................................................14-8
Part 4: Appendices
Appendix A – Applications, Tips and Tricks
Voice Mail Set Up...............................................................................................................................A-1
Analog Ports .................................................................................................................................A-1
Digital Ports..................................................................................................................................A-2
Telephone Station Ports................................................................................................................A-2
Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems .........................................................................................A-3
Call Record and Soft Keys ...........................................................................................................A-3
Strata CTX BRI Video Conferencing Programming ..........................................................................A-5
CTX IP Telephone Programming Guidelines.....................................................................................A-6
Basic CTX IP Setup Using WinAdmin........................................................................................A-6
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection setup...........................................................A-7
IPT1020-SD Telephone Network Settings..........................................................................................A-7
IPT-to-IP Network Connection Instructions.................................................................................A-8
Viewing IPT1020-SD Terminal Information .............................................................................A-10
Initializing the IPT1020-SD (Optional)......................................................................................A-10
IP Telephone Quality of Service (QoS) Programming .....................................................................A-11
General QoS Adjustments ..........................................................................................................A-11
Strata Net over IP Programming Guidelines.....................................................................................A-13
Example......................................................................................................................................A-13
Echo Cancellation and Volume Level Adjustments .........................................................................A-15
Dealing with Echo Problems in General ....................................................................................A-15
Echo Caused by Older CTX Analog PCBs ................................................................................A-15
Echo Reduction Adjustments .....................................................................................................A-15
Setting the IPT1020-SD Headset Transmit Volume ..................................................................A-16
Contents
Appendix B – System Error Codes
Strata CTX Programming 11/03 ix
Appendix B – System Error Codes
Common Error Code Table .................................................................................................................B-1
System Programming Error Codes......................................................................................................B-2
Station Programming Error Codes ......................................................................................................B-5
Trunk Programming Error Codes......................................................................................................B-13
Attendant Position Programming Error Codes..................................................................................B-20
Service Programming Error Codes....................................................................................................B-21
Networking Programming Error Codes ............................................................................................B-26
Equipment Programming Error Codes..............................................................................................B-27
Appendix C – Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX .....................................................................................................................C-1
Strata CTX to Strata DK ...................................................................................................................C-15
Appendix D – Record Sheets
System .................................................................................................................................................D-1
Card Assignment Record Sheets...................................................................................................D-1
Card Assignment Record Sheet – Strata CTX 100.......................................................................D-3
COS Record Sheet ........................................................................................................................D-4
System Data Record Sheet............................................................................................................D-5
System Call Forward Record Sheets ............................................................................................D-6
System Speed Dial Record Sheet..................................................................................................D-7
Day/Night Mode Record Sheet.....................................................................................................D-8
SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments ...........................................................................................D-9
BSIS RS-232 Serial Port Setup...................................................................................................D-10
Station................................................................................................................................................D-11
Basic Station Record Sheets .......................................................................................................D-11
DKT Parameters Record Sheet...................................................................................................D-12
Feature Button Record Sheet .....................................................................................................D-13
Record Sheets for 10-button and 20-button Telephones ............................................................D-14
Record Sheets for the DKT3014.................................................................................................D-15
Phantom DN Record Sheet.........................................................................................................D-16
Hunt Group Record Sheet...........................................................................................................D-17
Station Data Record Sheets.........................................................................................................D-18
ISDN BRI Station Record Sheets...............................................................................................D-19
ISDN Station Data Record Sheet................................................................................................D-20
Trunks................................................................................................................................................D-21
ILG Record Sheet .......................................................................................................................D-21
OLG Record Sheet......................................................................................................................D-22
Trunk Assignment Record Sheet................................................................................................D-23
Caller ID Assignment Record Sheet...........................................................................................D-24
DID Assignment Record Sheet...................................................................................................D-25
DID Intercept Assignment Record Sheet....................................................................................D-26
Trunk Timer/DIT Record Sheet..................................................................................................D-27
ISDN BRI Record Sheet.............................................................................................................D-28
PRI Trunks Record Sheet ...........................................................................................................D-29
Call-by-Call Record Sheet..........................................................................................................D-30
B Channel Select Record Sheet ..................................................................................................D-31
Shared D Channel Record Sheet.................................................................................................D-32
Calling Number Record Sheets...................................................................................................D-33
Contents
Appendix E – Software and Firmware Updates
xStrata CTX Programming 11/03
Attendant........................................................................................................................................... D-34
Attendant Group Record Sheet .................................................................................................. D-34
IP Telephone Programming.............................................................................................................. D-35
System IP Data Assignment.......................................................................................................D-35
Station IP Data Assignment....................................................................................................... D-36
Services............................................................................................................................................. D-37
Pilot DN Assignment Record Sheet........................................................................................... D-37
System Voice Mail Record Sheet .............................................................................................. D-38
Voice Mail Port Data Record Sheet........................................................................................... D-39
Routing Definition Record Sheets ............................................................................................. D-40
Route Schedule Record Sheets................................................................................................... D-41
LCR Assignment Record Sheets................................................................................................ D-42
LCR Time Zone Record Sheets ................................................................................................. D-43
DR LCR Screening Record Sheet.............................................................................................. D-44
DR Record Sheets ...................................................................................................................... D-45
COS Override Code Record Sheet............................................................................................. D-46
Node ID Assignment Record Sheet ........................................................................................... D-47
Private Routing Plan Analysis Table Record Sheet................................................................... D-48
Route Choice Definition Record Sheet...................................................................................... D-49
Network Mapping Record Sheets .............................................................................................. D-50
Call History Record Sheet.......................................................................................................... D-51
Behind Centrex Assignment Record Sheet................................................................................ D-52
Door Phone Assignment Record Sheet...................................................................................... D-53
Paging Device Group Assignment Record Sheet....................................................................... D-54
Emergency Call Group Assignment Record Sheet.................................................................... D-55
Appendix E – Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures..............................................................................E-1
Method 1: Update from CTX SmartMedia Card ...............................................................................E-1
Prerequisites..................................................................................................................................E-1
BIPU Update.................................................................................................................................E-2
IP Telephone Update....................................................................................................................E-3
Method 2: Update From a FTP Directory on the WinAdmin PC ......................................................E-4
Prerequisites..................................................................................................................................E-4
BIPU Update.................................................................................................................................E-5
IP Telephone Update.....................................................................................................................E-6
Method 3: Update from an External FTP Server ...............................................................................E-7
Prerequisites..................................................................................................................................E-7
BIPU Update.................................................................................................................................E-7
IP Telephone Update.....................................................................................................................E-8
Index .....................................................................................................................................................IN-1
Strata CTX Programming 11/03 xi
Introduction
This manual provides information required to program the Strata CTX100-S, CTX100 and
CTX670 business telephone systems using Toshiba’s CTX WinAdmin™ software or Button
Programming.
Important! Whenever the CTX100 is mentioned in this book, it applies to both the CTX100-S
and CTX100, unless specified otherwise.
This programming manual only applies to CTX WinAdmin version 2.20G. If you
have CTX WinAdmin versions 2.1D or lower, refer to previous versions of this
manual.
Note The features described in this document assume that the Strata CTX system has the current
software release installed. At the time of printing, Strata CTX R2.2 and CTX WinAdmin
R2.20 are the most current versions.
Organization
Part 1: Getting Started
Chapter 1 - Programming Guidelines describes auto-recognition features, order of
programming, and overview of general CTX WinAdmin and Button Programming operation.
Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming
Chapter 2 – CTX WinAdmin Overview provides general information about CTX WinAdmin’s
software capabilities.
Chapter 3 – Installation discusses system hardware and software requirements for
CTX WinAdmin and includes the installation steps needed to install CTX WinAdmin.
Chapter 4 – System provides system programming information.
Chapter 5 – Station discusses station and station feature programming.
Chapter 6 – Trunks explains trunk programming information including T1, ISDN Basic Rate
Interface (BRI) and Primary Rate Interface (PRI).
Chapter 7 – Attendant describes Attendant Console support and settings available in
CTX WinAdmin.
Chapter 8 – IP Telephone describes the programs required to program IP Telephone features.
Introduction
Organization
xii Strata CTX Programming 11/03
Chapter 9 – Services discusses programming of services available to Strata CTX through
CTX WinAdmin.
Chapter 10 – Operation explains system setup options available to CTX WinAdmin users.
System initialization, SmartMedia formatting, system software upgrades and Internet Protocol (IP)
configuration are among the topics discussed.
Chapter 11 – Maintenance provides system and component trace program information.
CTX WinAdmin Configuration and Flash Memory Testing are also described.
Chapter 12 – Tools and Profile discusses Strata CTX Tools and Utilities to help manage your
Strata CTX System more efficiently.
Part 3: Telephone Button Programming
Chapter 13 – Telephone Button Programming discusses the button programming interface
provided with Strata CTX.
Chapter 14 – Maintenance Procedures provides Strata CTX maintenance procedures that can be
activated from the programming telephone.
Part 4: Appendices
Appendix A – Applications, Tips and Tricks gives information on using multiple programs to
set up a feature.
Appendix B – System Error Codes is a reference for error codes encountered while
programming the Strata CTX.
Appendix C – Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference provides cross-reference tables that
compare Strata CTX and Strata DK programs that are similar in function.
Appendix D – Record Sheets contains all the record sheets required to program the Strata CTX.
Appendix E – Software and Firmware Updates contains IP Telephone and BIPU Firmware
update procedures.
Introduction
Conventions
Strata CTX Programming 11/03 xiii
Conventions
Conventions Description
Note
Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within some
tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered notes apply
to specific items.
Important! Calls attention to important instructions or information.
CAUTION! Advises you that hardware, software applications, or data could be
damaged if the instructions are not followed closely.
WARNING! Alerts you when the given task could cause personal injury or death.
[DN] Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an extension
or intercom number.
[PDN] Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension
number for the telephone).
[SDN] Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which appears
on another telephone is considered an SDN.
[PhDN] Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional DN).
$ULDO%ROG Represents telephone buttons.
Courier Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display.
“Type” Indicates entry of a string of text.
“Press” Indicates entry of a single key. For example: Type prog then press
Enter.
Plus (+)
Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries without
spaces between them show a simultaneous entry. Example:
Esc+Enter. Entries with spaces between them show a sequential
entry.
Example: # + 5.
Tilde (~) Means “through.” Example: 350~640 Hz frequency range.
➤Denotes the step in a one-step procedure.
➤Denotes a procedure.
Start > Settings >
Printers Denotes a progression of buttons and/or menu options on the screen you
should select.
See Figure 10
Grey words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the
electronic version of this document (Library CD-ROM or FYI Internet
download), cross-references appear in blue hypertext.
Introduction
Related Documents/Media
xiv Strata CTX Programming 11/03
Related Documents/Media
Note Some documents listed here may appear in different versions on the CD-ROM or in print.
To find the most current version, check the version/date in the Publication Information on
the back of the document’s title page.
General Description
• Strata CTX General Description
Installation and Maintenance Manual
• Strata CTX Installation and Maintenance
User Guides
• Strata CTX DKT/IPT Telephone
• Strata CTX DKT3001/2001 Digital Single Line Telephone
• Strata CTX Standard Telephone
• Strata CTX DKT2204-CT/DKT2304-CT Cordless Telephone
Quick Reference Guide
• Strata CTX DKT/IPT Telephone
CD-ROMs
• Strata CTX WinAdmin Application Software and CTX/DK/Partner Products Documentation
Library
• Strata CTX Call Center Solutions Application Software and Documentation Library (includes
Strata CTX ACD software and documentation, Net Server software and documentation, and
Voice Assistant software and documentation.
• OAISYS (includes software and documentation of OAISYS Chat, Call Router, and Net Phone)
For authorized users, Internet site FYI (http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com) contains all current Strata CTX
documentation and enables you to view, print and download current publications.
726+,%$ Telecommunication Systems Division
November 2003
Part 1: Getting Started
Digital Business Telephone Systems
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03 1-1
Strata CTX
Programming
Strata CTX Programming Guidelines 1
This chapter discusses Strata CTX programming basics and guides you through initial setup procedures. It
also describes auto-recognition features, order of programming, and overview of general CTX WinAdmin
and Button Programming operations. Programming sequence tables are provided to streamline your
programming tasks.
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to
Start Up
This feature reduces the programming time to install Strata CTX systems. The Strata CTX system will
automatically program specific default data in a number of programs based on the PCBs that are installed
in the system before processor initialization. The default data and procedure for auto-programming is
provided in this section.
1. Install all line, station and optional PCBs that should be recognized for auto programming.
2. Power-on the system and initialize auto-programming for the system (Program 900, Level 1).
3. Verify “Station and BIOU Auto-programming” on page 1-2.
4. Verify “Station PDN Auto-programming” on page 1-3.
5. Verify “CO Line Auto-programming” on page 1-3.
6. Verify “CTX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming” on page 1-8.
Notes
•The type of PCB, its cabinet and slot position are automatically recognized upon system initialization;
or, when powering the CTX processor for the first time.
•Each installed PCB circuit equipment number is set in numerical order based on the cabinet and slot
position of the PCB.
•Station Primary Directory Numbers (PDN) and CO line numbers are set in numerical order according
to their equipment cabinet/slot positions.
•Other default data, such as the Strata CTX LAN and modem interface IP address, station and line class
of service, outgoing and incoming line groups, etc., are automatically set for the optional hardware
originally installed.
Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
1-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03
Limitations
The following are the limitations of Strata CTX auto-programming.
• CTI programs are not programmed automatically.
• Strata CTX cannot configure unique LAN requirements automatically. Strata CTX’s LAN system data,
CTX IP address and Community Name are set to a default.
Note DND is only assigned on 20-button telephones.
• When the system is initialized, it takes a few minutes to recognize the mounted hardware.
• The Primary DN on the first button and DND on the last button are assigned telephone buttons; all other
buttons are not assigned automatically.
• Slot 101 must always have a BDKU, ADKU or PDKU. The BDKU is assigned if no PCB is installed.
Station and BIOU Auto-programming
Table 1-1 shows the Station and BIOU PCBs that will be recognized and set in Program 100 during auto-
programming.
Note No special assignments are set for BIOU during auto-programming.
Important! PCBs must be installed per the rules in the Strata CTX I&M manual, Configuration Chapter,
Worksheet 6 and Worksheet 7.
Table 1-1 Auto-Programming for Station and BIOU PCB Recognition (Program 100)
PCB Code PCB Name PCB Circuit Type Parameter
Setting Comments
000 No PCB or RRCU None or Remote Cabinets
002 RSTU 8 Standard Telephone
circuits Standard telephone no VM interface
settings
003 PDKU2 8 Digital Telephone PCM
Highway: 8
DKT2000 or DKT3000 without
S-OCA (DKT3000 limitations:
DKT2000, 16 character LCD display
on DKT3000, DKT3000 LCD Feature
key does not function, DKT3014
large screen LCD does not display).
004 Not used Not used
017 BDKU 8 digital telephones 8, 1B circuits DKT2000 or DKT3000 without
S-OCA
018 BDKU1+BDKS 16 digital telephones 16, 1B circuits DKT2000 or DKT3000 without
S-OCA
019 BIOU Page/MOH/Relay
interface#1 No functions assigned
020 BIOU2 Page/MOH/Relay
interface#2
No functions assigned. Strata CTX
100 assigns a virtual BIOU2 into a
virtual location, Cabinet 02, Slot 05,
to provide control of the ACTU relay.
Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03 1-3
Strata CTX
Programming
Station PDN Auto-programming
When auto programming recognizes installed station PCBs, it assigns PDNs in numerical order as follows:
• Auto programming assigns PDNs to station PCB equipment numbers (cabinet, slot, circuit) in
equipment number order. All installed station PCB circuits will be assigned a PDN regardless of the
circuit type, digital (BDKU/BDKS, PDKU) or analog (RSTU).
• PDN 200 or PDN 2000 (depending on the system size) is assigned to the station circuit having the
lowest equipment number in the system, then the PDN is incremented by one digit and assigned to the
next highest station equipment number and so on. See Table 1-2.
• Program 205 Feature Button Setting – A Primary DN (PDN) is assigned to )% on each digital
telephone according to its equipment number (cabinet, slot, circuit) position. DND is assigned to FB20
on 20-button telephones and is not assigned on 10- and 14-button telephones.
Table 1-2 Auto-Programming for Station Primary Directory Number
CO Line Auto-programming
Table 1-3 shows the CO line PCBs that will be recognized and set in Program 100 during auto-
programming. The default data for CO line Incoming Line Groups (ILG), Outgoing Line Groups (OLG),
and CO line service type is set as shown in Table 1-4.
Important! PCBs must be installed per the rules in the CTX I&M manual, Configuration Chapter,
Worksheet 6 and Worksheet 7.
First digit CTX100 and CTX670 without BBMS
and BEXS Installed on Processor CTX670 with BBMS and BEXS
Installed on Processor (First Digit is 2)
2
Primary DNs (3-digits)
200~299 depending on quantity of station
PCBs installed
Primary DNs (4-digit)
2000~2571 depending on qty. of station PCBs
installed
3
Primary DN (3-digits)
300~399 depending on qty. of station
PCBs installed
Table 1-3 Auto-Programming for CO line PCB Recognition (Program 100)
PCB
Code PCB Name PCB Circuit Type Parameter setting Comments
000 - No PCB or RRCU None or Remote cabinets
001 RCOU, RGLU 4 analog Loop or
ground start lines Direct Incoming Termination (DIT)
lines
005 RCOU+RCOS 8 analog loop start
lines Direct Incoming Termination (DIT)
lines
006 RDDU 4 analog DID lines Direct Inward Dial lines
007 RDTU2 16 or 24 digital T1
lines
PCM Highway:
16 or 241
T1 Direct Incoming Termination (DIT)
lines
008 RDSU 4 Standard telephone
and for digital
telephone
Standard telephone and DKT2000
and DKT3000 without S-OCA
(DKT3000 limitations: DKT2000, 16
character LCD display on DKT3000,
DKT3000 LCD Feature key does not
function, DKT3014 large screen LCD
does not display).
Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
1-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03
Table 1-4 Auto-Programming of Line Groups and Service Types
009 RCIU2+RCIS 4 or 8 Caller ID
interface
Caller ID interface for RCOU/RCOS
and RGLU analog CLID lines. Note:
The same Prg100 code (009) is used
for RCIU2 with or without RCIS.
010 RMCU+RCMS 2 or 4 E911 analog
CAMA lines
CAMA lines Note: The same Prg100
code (009) used for RCIU2 with or
without RCIS.
011 REMU, BVPU 4 analog Tie lines, 4
VoIP circuits Tie lines
012 RBSU 2 ISDN BRI (S/T)
circuits
TIE Type:
Two TIEs ISDN BRI CO lines
013 RBSU+RBSS 4 ISDN BRI (S/T)
circuits
TEI Type:
Two TIEs ISDN BRI CO lines
014 RPTU 16 or 24 ISDN PRI
channels
PCM Highway:
16 or 241ISDN BRI CO lines
015 RBUU 2 ISDN BRI (U)
circuits
TEI Type:
Two TIEs ISDN BRI CO lines
016 RBUU+RBUS 4 ISDN BRI (U)
circuits
TEI Type:
Two TIEs ISDN BRI CO lines
1. If the slot next to an installed RDTU or RPTU is vacant, 24 line or channels will be installed; If the slot next to
an installed RDTU or RPTU is occupied by another PCB, 16 lines or channels will be installed.
CO line type OLG
Prg 306 ILG
Prg. 304 CO Service Type
RCOU/RCOS and RGLU analog loop
and ground start 11
Direct In Termination (DIT) to the first PDN.
(200 or 2000 – see Table 5)
RDDU analog DID 1 2 DID, wink – no default DID numbers
RDTU (T1) 1 3 DID – no default DID numbers
RMCU/RMCS analog CAMA 1 - Direct In Termination (DIT) to the first PDN.
(200 or 2000 – see next table)
RBUU/RBUS and RBSU ISDN BRI -
set as CO side 2 4 DID – no default DID numbers
ISDN PRI 2 5 DID – no default DID numbers
REMU analog E&M 3 6 Non-QSIG
1. The line number is assigned to all lines in the numerical order according to the line PCB cabinet placements.
Example: Line number 1 will be on the first circuit of the line PCB placed in the lowest cabinet/slot number.
2. OLG:1 is created even if there is are no analog line PCBs installed.
Table 1-3 Auto-Programming for CO line PCB Recognition (Program 100) (continued)
PCB
Code PCB Name PCB Circuit Type Parameter setting Comments
Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03 1-5
Strata CTX
Programming
Table 1-5 Auto-Programming of Miscellaneous Line Parameters
The destination of Program 318, No Calling Party Number and Out Of Search for DID number, is assigned
to the first Primary DN of the system (200 or 2000) in the all system operating modes (Day1,Day 2, and
Night).
The DIT line (ground and loop) destinations of all trunks which generated automatically are set as the first
PDN 200 or 2000 depending on the system size – see Table 1-4.
BIPU Settings
Table 1-6 BIPU-M Automatic Settings
Item Settings
DIT line ringing assignment
Program 310
All of the ringing destinations of DIT lines are the first PDN:
PDN 200 for CTX100 and 2-cabinet CTX670
PDN2000 for 2~7 cabinet CTX670.
DID numbers - not assigned.
Program 309
The destination of DID is not assigned. DID numbers and ringing
destinations must be assigned manually from CTX WinAdmin or the
programming telephone.
Format Setting for DIT (T1) Zero Code Suppress = B8ZS, Frame Format = ESF.
Setting for CAMA The destination of internal notification is the first DN 200 or 2000 in the all
operation mode (DAY1, Day2, and Night).
Setting for ISDN BRI CO
Common D channel is not assigned. 1 channel group is assigned to each
BRI PCB installed. The channel group number is assigned in order to each
BRI interface in the order in which the BRI PCBs are installed. The
destination of DID is not assigned.
Setting for ISDN PRI CO
Common D channel is not assigned. 1 channel group is assigned to each
PRI PCB installed. The channel group number is assigned in order to each
PRI interface in the order in which the PRI PCBs are installed. The
destination of DID is not assigned.
Setting for E&M Tie lines The node number and the other setting for networking are not assigned
automatically
Item Description Settings
Card Type Card Type BIPU
IP Address (BIPU) IP address of BIPU
In the order of smallest number of the slot
where BIPU is inserted
192.168.254.200
.201
.202/.......
Private address will be set.
Subnet mask (BIPU) Subnet mask of BIPU
substrate 255.255.255.0
Default gateway Default gateway of BIPU
substrate 0.0.0.0
Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
1-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03
Table 1-7 IPT Automatic Settings
Table 1-8 System Related Basic Settings
BIPU-Q1A Initial Programming
After initializing the CTX System with BIPU for Strata Net over IP, Strata CTX detects the BIPU card for
Strata Net over IP and basic programming is set automatically.
Table 1-9 BIPU-Q1A Automatic Settings
Item Description Settings
DN Setting DN setting of the terminal
accommodated in BIPU
The number plan conforms to BDKU16.
Assigned in the order of the lowest slot
number.
Accommodated terminal setting
(Station ID) Parameter setting of Station
ID in BIPU Station ID = PDN
Accommodated terminal setting
(IP Address) Parameter setting of IP
address in BIPU IP address = 0.0.0.0
Accommodated terminal setting
(MAC addresses) Parameter setting of MAC
addresses in BIPU MAC addresses = (no data)
Item Description Settings
QOS Control Setting of priority control by
Diffserv/IEEE802.1p
Use of Diffserv: Not applicable
Set value of DSField = 0
Use of IEEE802.1p: Not applicable
Priority level: Voice
Station ID Automatic setting of Station
ID Not allowed
Terminal authentication setting Application or non application
of connection restriction
function using MAC address Not apply
Item Description Settings
Card Type Card Type BIPU-Q1A
IP Address (BIPU) IP address of BIPU-Q1A
In the order of smallest number of the slot
where BIPU is inserted
192.168.254.800 for 1st BIPU
.801 for 2nd BIPU
.802 for 3rd BIPU
Private address will be set.
Subnet mask (BIPU) Subnet mask of BIPU-Q1A 255.255.255.0
Default gateway Default gateway of BIPU-Q1A 0.0.0.0
Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03 1-7
Strata CTX
Programming
Table 1-10 IP-Trunk Information
Table 1-11 System Information
Program Description Settings
ILG
ILG Number 7
Kind of Trunk (Analog/ISDN) ISDN
Type of Trunk TIE
OLG
OLG Number 4
Kind of Trunk (Analog/ISDN) ISDN
Type of Trunk TIE
ISDN Trunk
CG Number
1: 1st BIPU
2: 2nd BIPU
3: 3rd BIPU
Type of Protocol IP
ILG 7
OLG 4
Voice Coding Procedure CODEC (G.711, G.729A) G.711
Index of Voice attribute table (1~256) 1
Parameter of voice attribute table -
Packet Interval: 20ms
Type of Jitter buffer: Fixed
Size of Jitter buffer: 1
Max Acceptable Delay: 1
Measure Time: 1000ms
Packet Loss Ratio: 5
Packet discard ratio: 5
D-ch Establish/Release D-ch Establish/Release D-ch Release by Call Released
Fast Connect Procedure - Apply
Negotiation Negotiation of H.245 Un-Apply
IP address for Node ID IP Address IP address
Item Description Settings
QoS Control Priority Control by Diffserv .
IEEE802.1p
Diffserv: Disable
DS Field: 0
IEEE802.1p Disable
Priority: Voice (6)
Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
1-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03
CTX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming
The following are the initial values of the LAN data that is automatically created for the system.
• Network TCP/IP. See “916 IP Configuration” on page 10-14.
• IP address – 192.168.254.253
• Sub network master – 255.255.255.0
• Default gateway – 0.0.0.0
• IP routing table – Not used.
• SNMP Agent settings
• Community name – communityName
• IP address – 0.0.0.0 (not restricted by the IP address of the access source)
• Privileges – WRITE
•community-id – 1
• User level – Super user
• Trap destination
• Community name – Nothing
• IP address – Nothing
• Modem PPP Server settings
• IP Address – 192.168.255.254 (Strata CTX modem fixed IP address for Dial-up connections).
Public Numbering Plan Analyzed Digit Numbers (Program 117)
E911 Emergency Call to Outgoing Line Group (Program 550)
E911 Emergency Call Destination (Program 400)
Public Numbering Plan
Analyzed Number Public Numbering Plan
Analyzed Digit Number
1NXX 11
N11 3
NXX 7
N = 2~9 and X = 0~9
Emergency Call Group
Number OLG1
11
System Mode Emergency Call Called Number
Index Emergency Call Called Number
DAY1 1 200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
DAY2 1 200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
NIGHT 1 200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
The emergency call destination is set for the first PDN as 200 or 2000 in the all operation mode (DAY1,
Day2, NIGHT).
Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 2: Plan Your System Requirements
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03 1-9
Strata CTX
Programming
Default Feature Access Codes
Refer to “102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3.
Note For DKTs, assign only the PDN numbers. Do not program any other Flexible Buttons or features in
to the phones. Strata CTX automatically recognizes and sets up digital telephone stations.
Step 2: Plan Your System Requirements
Plan for your Strata CTX system requirements in detail before beginning your installation. Use record
sheets wherever they are provided to document your installation requirements. The following are some
areas to consider:
•Flexible Numbering Plan (102) – Planning your Flexible Numbering requirements is essential to a
smooth installation. Trunk group access and station range requirements are especially important areas
of consideration.
•COS (103) – Determine the Class of Service (COS) requirements for your station and trunk groups.
There are up to 32 possible COS plans.
•DRL (111) – Define up to 16 Destination Restriction Level (DRL) assignments.
Important! Destination Restriction is an expanded feature of what has traditionally been known as Toll
Restriction. Toll Restriction is only one facet of Strata CTX’s Destination Restriction feature.
Refer to Destination Restriction in this manual when programming Toll Restriction
requirements.
•FRL and QPL (506) – Define up to 16 Facilities Restriction Level (FRL) and Queuing Priority Level
(QPL) assignments.
Step 3: Program CTX for First Time
Follow the steps below to program the Strata CTX for the first time. Following this initial setup procedure
enables you to perform a standard Strata CTX setup with common System and Station default assignments.
Toshiba recommends adherence to these procedures for initial setup.
1. Card Assignments (100) – Choose System > Card Assignment. It is not necessary to physically install
PCBs prior to programming Strata CTX.
If you physically install your PCBs prior to initial setup, CTX WinAdmin automatically recognizes
PDKU, BDKU/BDKS, RSTU, RCOU/RCOS and RGLU PCBs and assigns default stations and trunks
automatically. All other PCBs are assigned manually. See “100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments” on
page 4-1 for more details.
2. ILG Assignment (304) – Choose Trunk > ILG to assign Incoming Line Groups (ILG). See “304
Incoming Line Group Assignment” on page 6-2 for more details. ILGs enable line groupings of shared
Class of Service features for incoming call handling.
3. OLG Assignment (306) – Choose Trunk > OLG to assign Outgoing Line Groups (OLG). See “306
Outgoing Line Groups” on page 6-4 for more details.
Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 3: Program CTX for First Time
1-10 Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03
4. Trunk Assignment (300) – Choose Trunk > Basic. Set up your Trunks in the following order (see “300
Trunk Assignment” on page 6-6 for more details):
• Loop Start Trunks
• Ground Start Trunks
• T1 Trunks
• Tie lines
•FX lines
•PRI lines
• BRI lines
5. Station Assignment (200) – Choose Station > Basic. Set up your stations in the following order (see
“Assignment” on page 5-1 for more details):
• DKT Stations
• Standard Stations
• Voice Mail (VM) Ports
• Attendant Positions
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Pilot DNs
•Door Phones
6. Create Station Links – Create the following groups wherever applicable and set stations to link as
necessary.
• Hunt Groups using Programs 209 and 218
• Paging Groups using Program 502
• Call Pickup Groups using Program 210
• Park Orbits using Program 102
• Paging Devices using Program 503
7. Backup Data – Choose Operation\Data Backup. Make sure the SmartMedia card is properly formatted
(see “908 SmartMedia” on page 10-4) prior to running backup. See “910 Data Backup” on page 10-13
for details.
8. Continue programming Strata CTX details.
Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 3: Program CTX for First Time
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03 1-11
Strata CTX
Programming
Review Program Flow
The basic program flow needed to set up Strata CTX is shown below. The figure displays the most critical
programs in the left column and migrates right to optional programs. Also, programming flows from
specific (left) to general (right).
Recommended*
Planning the following before
proceeding.
Flexible Numbering Plan
(Program 102):
Trunk Group Access Plan
Station Range Plan
Create COS Plan (up to 32)
(Program 103)
Create DRL (up to 16)
(Program 111, 532~533)
Define FRL and QPL
meanings (up to 16)
Card Assignment
(Program 100)
Create ILGs
(Program 304)
Admin
Services
LCR/TR
System Program
5862
*Planning out these details
in advance enables Strata CTX
setup to proceed smoothly.
LS Trunks
GS Trunks
TI Trunks
Tie Lines
FX Lines
PRI Lines
BRI Lines
DKT Stations
STD Stations
VM Ports
Attd Positions
Pilot DN's (ACD)
Door Phones
BRI Lines
Create Station Links
Hunt Group
Paging Group
Call P.U. Group
Park Orbits
Paging Devices
Create OLGs
(Program 306)
Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
1-12 Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
Use the following tables to quickly identify the programs needed to fulfill your setup requirements. See the
Index to correlate program numbers and their functions.
Station Setup
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up Station requirements.
Trunk Setup – Analog
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up analog Trunk requirements.
Station
Type Assignment Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
DKT PDN 100 200 204 208 205
PhDN 205 206
DADM 204 213
DDSS 214 215
Attd 100 200 204 208
Ext 100 200 208
VM 100 200 204 206 209 218 579 580
ISDN Ext 100 202 217
Pilot DN 540
Station Hunting 209 218
Call Pickup Groups 210
Emergency Ringdown 216
Paging Groups 502
Station Speed Dial 516
Trunk
Type Assignment Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
LS/GS
Basic 100 304 306 300
Ring 310
Timer 308
DISA 311
Tie line
Basic 100 304 306 300
Timer 308
DISA 311
DID
Basic 100 304 306 300
Ring 309
Timer 308
DISA 311
DNIS/ANI 313
Intercept 318 319
Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03 1-13
Strata CTX
Programming
Trunk Setup – T1
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up T1 Trunk requirements.
Trunk Setup – ISDN PRI
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up ISDN PRI Trunk requirements.
Trunk
Type Assignment Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
LS/GS
Basic 100 304 306 300
Data 315
Ring 310
Timer 308
DISA 311
Tie line
Basic 100 304 306 300
Data 315
Timer 308
DISA 311
DID
Basic 100 304 306 300
Data 315
Ring 309
Timer 308
DISA 311
DNIS/ANI 313
Intercept 318 319
Trunk
Type Assignment Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
DID
Basic 100 304 306 302 320
Ring 309
Timer 308
DISA 311
DNIS/ANI 313
Intercept 318 319
CNIS 321 322
Tie line
Basic 100 304 306 302 320
Ring 309
Timer 308
D-share 100 304 306 302 320 316
CBC 100 304130613022320 3233
Notes
1. Each CBC Group may require one ILG and one OLG.
2. Do not assign ILG/OLG using this program.
3. Assign ILG and OLG using Program 323.
Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
1-14 Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03
Miscellaneous
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up other Strata CTX features.
Feature Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Account-Codes 570 571 103 506 306
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) 103 208 104
Automatic Call Back (ACB) 104
Automatic Camp-On 304
Auto-Release of CO 308
Background-Music (BGM) 102 103 109
Call Forwarding 103 200 217
Call History 204 205
Call Park Orbit 104 102
Call Xfer W/ Camp-On 103
COS-Station 200 202
COS-CO 304 306
Credit-Card Calling 105 111 306
Day/Night service 500 106 112 113 103 105
Identification Services 309 318 579
Digital PAD 107 114
Direct Inward Dialing 309 318 304
DISA 311
Direct Inward Termination 304 310
Do not Disturb (DND) 103 204 205 102
Door Lock Control 104 204 508 205
Door Phones 102 507 573
DTMF DP Compatible 104
DTMF BackTone 204
DTMF Signal Time 579 104
E911 105 200
202 217 550 104 306
Executive Override 103 105
External Ringing Repeat 300 204
Flash 308 205 102 103
Flexible Numbering 102
Group Paging 502 503 102
Least-Cost-Routing (LCR) 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 528 529 103
Line Group 304 305 306 307 317 302 323 300
Message-Waiting Light 204 102 579
Music-on-Hold 102 105 109 309 310
Off-Hook Camp-on 104 200 217
Network Call – Incoming 102 656
Network Call – Outgoing 102 651 653 654 655
Out-Going calls 200 217 104
Ringing-Transfer 105
SMDI 200 202 579 580
Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03 1-15
Strata CTX
Programming
Station CO Line Access 204
SMDR 512 513 514
Tandem Connection 103 104 300
DR Override by System’s
Speed Dial 105
Destination Restriction 200 202 306 650 530 531 532 533 534
Tone-First/Voice-First 204 206
Travelling COS 105 200 510
Voice-Mail Interface
See “Voice Mail Set Up” on
page A-1 100 200 209 218 579 580 803 804 309 318
Emergency Ring-Down 216
Relay Services 515
System Call-Forward 200 217 104 500 504
Call Pick Up 210 103 200 205 102
Feature Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
1-16 Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03
726+,%$ Telecommunication Systems Division
November 2003
Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming
Digital Business Telephone Systems
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 2-1
CTX WinAdmin
Overview
CTX WinAdmin Overview 2
CTX WinAdmin is a powerful Microsoft® Windows® based telephone system management tool used to
program, maintain and upgrade the Strata CTX Digital Business Telephone System. CTX WinAdmin uses
a variety of networking and software technologies as follows:
•Virtual Local Area Network (LAN) – System Administrators can connect their PC to
Strata CTX via a network interface jack or modem. CTX WinAdmin views the Strata CTX system as a
LAN providing a stable environment in which to program and access data.
•Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) – enables query-based information retrieval and
event notification. WMI is an access mechanism which enables CTX WinAdmin to access, monitor,
command and control Strata CTX.
•Virtual Web Server and Manager – creates a virtual World Wide Web environment in Strata CTX.
This technology enables CTX WinAdmin to view Strata CTX as if it were an Internet Service Provider
(ISP), providing secure passage for System Administrators.
•Microsoft Internet Explorer® browser access – Virtual Web Service enables System Administrators
to access Strata CTX using the Internet Explorer browser.
•CTX WinAdmin Graphical User Interface (GUI) – Sophisticated programming tasks are just a
click-of-the-mouse away with CTX WinAdmin’s GUI.
•Mobile Access – enables System Administrators to program, maintain, and/or upgrade a
Strata CTX from any mobile location with an Internet connection—without ever leaving the office.
•Internet Access – CTX WinAdmin uses Microsoft IP technology to enable access to your Strata CTX
as easy as browsing the World Wide Web.
• Personal Web Server and Manager – Microsoft’s Personal Web Server and Manager option package
enables you to build a web environment between your Strata CTX and your PC.
• Internet Explorer – provides a stable environment in which to program, maintain and upgrade your
Strata CTX.
CTX WinAdmin’s tight integration of the above technologies provide System Administrators with
convenient, stable, user friendly and comprehensive access to Strata CTX system information.
CTX WinAdmin can connect directly to your Strata CTX Digital Business Telephone System via Network
Interface (included with Strata CTX’s BECU board and required on your PC) and Modem Interface.
Mobile System Administrators can access a Strata CTX system from any location that provides Internet
access.
CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Main Screen
2-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
CTX WinAdmin Main Screen
After you start CTX WinAdmin, log in and connect to the CTX, the main screen (shown below) displays.
Verify the information on this screen. It contains the System type and Software version.
•Auto Flyover On/Off Button – You can click this toggle button to turn on or turn off flyovers.
•Program Menu – The primary tool used to navigate through CTX WinAdmin. Click the Expand or
Collapse buttons at the upper left corner to expand or collapse the Program menu.
•Program Viewer – This area is where the various programs and parameters are displayed as you
navigate through CTX WinAdmin.
Notes
•You can verify the Strata CTX system type (CTX100 or CTX670) and the software version on the Title
screen shown above.
•The software version is organized as follows:
●Example: AR1.01 M0010.00
●A = Country code (USA, Canada, Mexico).
●R1.01 = CTX Release 1.01
●M000xx.00 = Strata CTX software version.
Program Viewer
Program Menu
Auto Flyover On/Off Button
CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 2-3
CTX WinAdmin
Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens
The CTX WinAdmin operates in a user friendly Windows environment featuring interactive Graphical
User Interface (GUI) screens.The Program Viewer’s GUI is arranged to streamline the Strata CTX
programming process (see sample screen below).
Programming functions can be accessed by clicking on the appropriate link in the Program Menu. The Day
Night Service (Programs 112, 106 and 113) screen is shown in the sample below.
Program Menu
Toolbar
Program Details
Program Name Tabs
Special Buttons
Programming
Parameters
Program Blocks Program and Parameter Descriptions
Toolbar
Command Group Name
Command Table Button
Field Name
5698
CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens
2-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
The following features enable you to browse and program CTX WinAdmin efficiently.
•Program Blocks – CTX WinAdmin arranges many related programs in blocks to enable the
programmer to view essential and related programs on one screen.
•Program Tabs – You can access a variety of programs and features by clicking the Program Tabs found
on some of the CTX WinAdmin screens.
•Programming Parameters – Choose values from scroll down menus.
•Command Group Name – Each program number and title is prominently displayed for easy reference.
•Field Name – Each Field Name or parameter displays and is coded with a prefix ()%) number for easy
referencing.
•Program and Parameter Descriptions – Every program and parameter description displays in a
pop-up window by placing the mouse cursor over the program or parameter information.
•CTX WinAdmin Toolbar – The CTX WinAdmin Toolbar enables Strata CTX updates with a click of
your mouse button. The following options are provided.
•Edit – CTX WinAdmin defaults to the Edit mode used to program, maintain, or upgrade your Strata
CTX System.
•Cancel – Cancels the previous entry.
•Refresh – Displays the latest updates.
•Reset – Resets to set your Strata CTX to manufacturer’s default.
CAUTION! By pressing the Reset button, you are authorizing all data to be reset to manufacturing
defaults. Any custom data entered will be lost.
•Submit – New data is held in CTX WinAdmin’s memory. Your Strata CTX is not updated with the
new settings until the Submit button is clicked.
•Close – Exits CTX WinAdmin and return to CTX Management Console Menu.
•Disconnect – Disconnects CTX WinAdmin from Strata CTX and terminates TCP/IP
Communications.
•Help – Enables the CTX WinAdmin Help files.
CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 2-5
CTX WinAdmin
Overview
• Command Table Button – This button
enables you to locate programs by
number or category (shown right).
From this table, you can click on a
program to open it.
Special Buttons
These buttons appear on some of the CTX WinAdmin screens.
These buttons enable you to access the
most common programming tasks
quickly. For example, click on the List
button to view the Current Index Web
Page dialog box (shown right).
Clicking on any button lets you do the
following:
•Create – Create a new record using
system default values.
•Start – Starts a wizard.
•Add/Delete/Modify – Enables you to add/delete/modify entry(s). In some programs, click the Add or
Delete button for a dialog box to display. Enter the required data, then click Add or Delete.
•List – Lists all data.
•Copy – Enables you to copy all the information from one screen to another.
•Back/Next – Enables you to navigate forward and backward through the screens.
•Table View – Displays the appropriate table view. For example, clicking the DR Table View button
displays all the configured DRLs within the system.
•Print – Enables you to print to a local printer.
•Refresh – Enables you to get the most updated information.
CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens
2-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Table Views
Some programs contain supporting tables views. These tables can be accessed from the Program Menu or
from the program itself, by clicking the Table view button. For example, the System Speed Dial Table
View can be accessed by clicking System > System Speed Dial Table View or by clicking the System
Speed Dial Table View button under Program 501 System > System Speed Dial.
Notes
•Depending on the speed of your PC and the size of your database, the table may take several minutes
to download.
•Once table view displays, you can minimize the screen or send it to the background. It is an
independent window that can always be brought back to the front of the screen for reference.
The tables have the following functionality (See table view example below):
• Navigational controls – enable viewing or moving on a table by 25-entry screens. These controls help
sort information found in the table or view the table in full. These controls are found as Previous and
Next buttons above the header.
If you want to print or analyze the table, you can also select All from the Drop down between the
Previous and Next buttons to view the entire table in blocks of 25 entries.
In the Navigation Control bar, every button is dynamically activated or deactivated. For example, in the
figure above the Previous button is not active because the view starts with the first record. The Submit
is also not available because nothing has been changed.
• Sort – You can sort tables by clicking on the column header. The direction of the up/down toggles in an
Ascending or Descending sort. The color indicator pointing Up or Down in the Header row indicates
the column by which the sort is performed.
Column Headers
Sort Indicator
Book Mark
First 25 Entries Last 25 Entries
Previous Next
Navigation
Control Bar
6869
CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 2-7
CTX WinAdmin
Overview
• Bookmark – You can bookmark a row on some tables by clicking on the row. This enables you to move
forward and backward and come back to the original position with no problem.
Note The bookmark function is not provided in tables that have a Delete button, example “Hunt Group
Table View” on page 5-27. Tables that have a Delete button also have Select All and Unselect All
buttons.
• Edit/Refresh/Print buttons – You
can edit, refresh or print the table
by clicking the appropriate
buttons at the top of the screen.
In some tables the Edit button
toggles between View Collected
Data and Edit. Clicking the Edit
button displays the following
screen.
The Edit function works for the
Name, Number and Destination
columns.
Use the Refresh button if you
add, delete or make changes to
table entries, in Programs that
feed tables or in Guide pages.
The Print button enables you to
print tables. However, when you click the Print button, only the part of the table that is displayed on the
screen prints. Use the scroll bar to Print beyond what is displayed. It will then automatically print from
where the last screen ended.
CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens
2-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 3-1
Installation
Installation 3
This chapter shows you how to install CTX WinAdmin software on your PC and discusses how to connect
that PC to the Strata CTX system.
PC Hardware Requirements
The following table shows the minimum PC requirements for CTX WinAdmin and WinCTX to operate
properly:
PC Software Requirements
The “Install CTX WinAdmin...” selection on the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM runs a Pre-installation Check
to determine if your PC meets the minimum software requirements for CTX WinAdmin to operate
properly. The Pre-installation Check tests for the following:
•Windows Operating System – CTX WinAdmin requires a Microsoft Windows XP Professional or
Windows 2000 Operating System (OS).
•Windows Option Components – The Pre-installation Check tests to see if Windows Option
Components, such as Internet Information Services and Management and Monitoring Tools are
installed on your PC. If they are not installed, your Windows OS CD-ROM will be required; or if your
PC has an Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) version of Windows, you may need the CD-ROM
that came with your PC.
Disclaimer: CTX WinAdmin has not been tested with Windows NT 4.0. This OS is not recommended. We
recommend that you upgrade your OS to Windows XP Pro or Windows 2000 Pro.
Note CTX WinAdmin does not work on these operating systems: Windows XP Home, Windows ME,
Windows 98, Windows 95, and MS-DOS.
Hardware Windows XP Professional Windows 2000
Computer/Processor
300 MHz or higher processor clock
speed. Intel Pentium or Celeron
processors; or AMD K6, Athlon or
Duron processors are recommended.
300 MHz or higher Pentium
Memory 128MB RAM 128MB RAM
Hard Disk 1.5GB of available space 2GB hard drive with a minimum of
650MB of free space
SVGA Card and Monitor Yes Yes
CD-ROM Drive Yes Yes
Network Interface Card
(NIC) and/or PC Modem Yes Yes
Installation
Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software
3-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
• Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 (SP2) – If not found, follow the steps given on the CTX WinAdmin
CD-ROM to install SP2.
•Internet Explorer (IE) – If IE 5.5 or greater is not found, follow the steps given on the CTX
WinAdmin CD-ROM and install it from there.
Note Windows XP Professional automatically installs IE 6.0 so installing IE 5.5 is not needed.
CAUTION! Toshiba recommends not to install MS Network Monitor on WinAdmin PCs because
MS Network Monitor software which is provided on the Microsoft System
Management Server (SMS) production CD-ROM causes problems with the Windows
WMI SNMP component needed to run WinAdmin.
Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software
1. Insert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. Click “Install CTX WinAdmin...”. The
CD-ROM runs a Pre-installation check, determines the OS you have, then checks for all other software
requirements.
If the correct OS and all requirements were found on your PC, the “Pre-installation Check Complete!”
screen displays. This enables you to perform any of the following:
•First-time installation: click “Install Now”. Follow the prompts. Choose “Custom” to browse to
the drive on which you want to install the software or “Complete” to install immediately on the C:
drive.
•If upgrading from a previous version: click “Upgrade Now”. Select “Complete” to install the new
version on the C drive, select Custom to select another drive. The CTX WinAdmin Custom Profile
folders will remain on the C drive or copied to the selected drive.
•If installing over the same version: click Install Now. You will be prompted to “Repair” or
“Remove.” Repair fixes corrupted files and registry entries. Remove removes the existing version to
enable you to reinstall the same version as a new clean install.
•If your PC did not pass the Pre-installation check and a requirement was not found: see the
details in “Requirements Not Found” on page 3-3.
CAUTION! Do not open and/or run other applications during installation as this may corrupt the
installation and/or other software on your PC. Installation takes several minutes.
2. Once installation is complete, if the Windows Internet Wizard displays when you click on the CTX
WinAdmin icon, enter the settings below if using a NIC or modem connection. This establishes a
preliminary path to bring up the CTX WinAdmin log-in screen.
•Windows XP Pro: If the Windows “Welcome to the New Connection Wizard” comes up, you have
not yet configured your Internet connection. Follow the prompts and select: Next > Connect to
Internet > Next > Set up my connection manually > Next > Connect using broadband connect that is
always on > Finish. Exit the wizard screen.
•Windows 2000: If the Windows “Welcome to the Internet Connection Wizard” comes up, you have
not yet configured your Internet connection. Follow the prompts and select: I want to set up my
Internet connection manually > Next > I want to connect through a local area network > Next >
Automatic discovery of Proxy server > Next and No to Setup Your Internet Email Account > Next >
Finish.
3. Go on to “Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software” on page 3-5.
Installation
Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 3-3
Installation
Requirements Not Found
Service Pack 2 Not Found - Windows 2000
If Service Pack 2 was not found on your Windows 2000 OS, follow these steps.
1. Click the “Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 Not Found” line. A help screen appears. Locate and click the
“Install SP2 Now” link. SP2 installation will begin.
2. Follow the prompts to install SP2.
3. At the end of installation you will be prompted to restart your PC. Do so, log back into Windows 2000,
then reinsert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM and select “Install CTX WinAdmin...” from the Main
Menu.
Internet Explorer (IE) 5.5 or Greater Not Found - Windows 2000
1. Click the “Internet Explorer 5.5 or Greater Not Found” line. A help screen will appear. Locate and click
the “Upgrade to IE 5.5 Now”. The upgrade will begin. Follow the prompts to upgrade to IE 5.5.
2. At the end of installation you will be prompted to restart your PC. Do so, log back into Windows 2000.
3. Reinsert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM and select “Install CTX WinAdmin...” from the Main Menu.
Note We suggest using IE 6.0 or higher with CTX WinAdmin to enable lists to be displayed in numeric
order.
Internet Information Services (IIS) Not Found - Windows XP Pro/Windows 2000
If IIS was not found, follow the steps below.
CAUTION! Installing Internet Information Services (IIS) on PCs connected to a LAN and/or the
Internet may cause security issues - such as making your PC more susceptible to
intrusion and/or computer viruses. A direct connection between your PC and Strata
CTX reduces, but does not eliminate security issues.
• In all cases, always have a virus program with the latest virus tables running real-time on your PC.
• An NTFS file system is recommended if you are connected to a LAN and/or Internet. See your
Windows Help files for more details.
• Consult the Microsoft Knowledge Base on the Internet for updates on Windows security issues.
• Check if you have the I386 folder located on you PC, if not have your Windows OS CD-ROM ready as
you will be asked to insert it.
➤Installing IIS using Windows XP Pro or Windows 2000 CD-ROM
1. Windows XP Pro and Windows 2000: Click Start > Settings (2000 only)> Control Panel > Add/
Remove Programs > Add/Remove Windows Components. Checkmark Internet Information Services
(IIS). Under IIS option, check mark FTP and do not uncheck any items that are already checked. If
Management and Monitoring Tools were also Not Found you may checkmark this too. Click “Next”.
2. Follow the prompts and have your Windows OS CD-ROM ready as you will be asked to insert it. If the
Windows autoplay menu runs after inserting the CD-ROM, close this screen.
3. Once installation is complete, reinsert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM and select “Install WinAdmin...”
from the Main Menu.
Installation
Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software
3-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Note If your PC displays this error message
(shown right), insert the Windows OS
CD-ROM that came with your computer
(Recovery or Companion type) and not
the Service Pack2 CD-ROM. Follow the
prompts to browse, open and install files.
Management and Monitoring Tools Not Found - Windows XP Pro/Windows 2000
If Management and Monitoring Tools were not found, follow the steps below.
1. Windows XP Pro and Windows 2000: Click Start > Settings (2000 only)> Control Panel > Add/
Remove Programs > Add/Remove Windows Components. Checkmark Management and Monitoring
Tools. If Internet Information Services (IIS) were also Not Found you may checkmark this too. Click
“Next”.
2. Follow the prompts and have your Windows OS CD-ROM ready as you will be asked to insert it. If the
Windows autoplay menu runs after inserting the CD-ROM, close this screen.
3. Once installation is complete, reinsert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM and select “Install CTX
WinAdmin...” from the Main Menu.
WMI SNMP Provider Not Found - Windows 2000
If the WMI SNMP Provider was not found on your Windows 2000 PC, follow the steps below. Have your
Windows 2000 CD-ROM ready, you’ll be asked to insert it.
1. Click the “WMI SNMP Provider Not Found” line. A help screen appears.
2. Locate and click the “Install WMI SNMP Provider”. Follow the prompts to install WMI SNMP
Provider. Once complete, reinsert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM and select “Install CTX
WinAdmin...” from the Main Menu.
Important! Continue to choose “Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software” on page 3-5 and/or
“Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software” on page 3-10. You can choose either or both, but
you must choose one.
Installation
Step 2: Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 3-5
Installation
Step 2: Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
Step 2A: Connect CTX WinAdmin PC to Strata CTX
Processor NIC
1. Connect the RJ45 cable between your PC’s NIC jack and the Strata CTX Network Interface jack. If you
are connecting to Strata CTX directly without using a Network hub, use an RJ45 cross-pinned cable. If
you’re connecting to the Strata CTX via a hub, use a straight-pinned RJ45 cable. See Figures 3-1
and .
Figure 3-1 Direct Connection to Strata CTX
Figure 3-2 Network Interface Physical Jack Connection
Wide Area Networks and/or Internet Connections
• Connection of the Strata CTX and CTX WinAdmin over the Internet and/or Wide Area Network
(WAN) Enterprise Networks requires registration of a domain IP address or blocks of domain IP
addresses for CTX processors when using multiple Strata CTX and CTX WinAdmin connections.
6249
WinAdmin PC or Server, Direct Connection to Strata CTX
ACTU with AETS
or
BBCU Processor
Strata CTX
CTX WinAdmin
PC or Server
Cross-pinned, 8-wire Modular Cord
Network Interface with RJ45 Jack
Network Interface Card with RJ45 Jac
k
NIC
1
2
3
6
3
6
1
2
Pin Pin
TD+
TD-
RD- TD-
RD-
RD+ TD+
RD+
1
2
3
6
1
2
3
6
Pin Pin
TD+
TD-
RD- TD-
RD-
RD+ TD+
RD+
WinAdmin PC or Server, Network or HUB Connection to Strata CTX
6250
CTX WinAdmin
Application
ACTU with AETS
or BBCU
Processor
Strata CTX
Straight-pinned, 8-wire Modular Cord
Network Interface RJ45 Jack
PC or Server
LAN
(with/without
DHCP/VPN)
or
HUB
NIC Straight-pinned, 8-wire Modular Cord
Network Interface RJ45 Jack
Installation
Step 2: Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
3-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
• To setup CTX WinAdmin WAN and Internet connections using Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP), Virtual Private Networks (VPN), etc., the proper IP addresses and setup procedures
must be obtained from your Information Technology (IT) Administrator.
• We recommend using VPN networking. By using VPN networking, the content of SNMP messages
between WinAdmin PCs and CTX systems will be encrypted for security.
• When connecting CTX WinAdmin through Fire Walls, Routers, etc., which apply packet filtering,
make sure that the packets being sent between Strata CTX and CTX WinAdmin are not filtered.
• Strata CTX and CTX WinAdmin communicate using SNMP over User Datagram Protocol/Internet
Protocol (UDP/IP) and FTP protocols. The standard ports are used for each protocol (161 and 162 for
SNMP, 20 and 21 for FTP). These ports should not be blocked by firewalls.
• The default gateway IP address must be set up on CTX WinAdmin and on CTX processors per the
example in Figure 3-3. The figure below shows you how to connect the multiple CTX sites via the
WAN.
• The CTX processor requires the following IP addresses set in Program 916:
• Processor static domain IP address
• Processor subnet mask
• Processor default Gateway IP address
• The diagram below is only one example of many network configurations allowing remote maintenance
of CTX systems over the Internet and the WAN.
Figure 3-3 WAN Connection for Multiple Sites
WAN
Strata
CTX
Ethernet
Switch
WinAdmin
PC
WinAdmin
PC
WinAdmin
PC
WinAdmin
PC
LAN Backbone
Ethernet
Switch
LAN Backbone
LAN Backbone
Router
192.168.30.1
Default Gateway
192.168.10.1
Default Gateway
192.168.30.1
Default Gateway
192.168.20.1
Router
192.168.20.1
Router
192.168.10.1
SITE BSITE A
SITE C
6540
Strata
CTX
Strata
CTX
Installation
Step 2: Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 3-7
Installation
Step 2B: Set Up IP Address of CTX NIC
Note This setup is only for direct connection to the Strata CTX or for simple Hub or LAN connections.
For more complex LAN, WAN or Internet connections, refer to “Wide Area Networks and/or
Internet Connections” on page 3-5.
1. Connect a 20-button LCD DKT to the Strata CTX System.
2. Enter the programming mode by pressing +ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
3. At the PASSWORD= prompt, enter .
4. Press+ROG.
5. At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
6. Press Feature Button 1.
7. At the TCP IP1= prompt enter the Static IP address D6SNU, E6SNU, F6SNU, G +ROG.
Possible Values of CTX TCP/IP address octets a.b.c.d = 0~255.
Default = 192.168.254.253, where D = 192, E = 168, F = 254, G = 253
Example: At the TCP IP1= prompt the LCD displays 192. This is the first octet of the default CTX IP
address. Pressing Spkr key three more times will display the remaining octets in succession as follows:
192.168.254.253
8. Press Feature Button 2.
9. At the SNM IP1= prompt enter the subnet mask H 6SNU, I 6SNU, J 6SNU, K +ROG.
Possible Values of CTX Subnet mask octets e.f.g.h = 0~255
Default = 255.255.255.0, where H = 255, I = 255, J = 255, K = 0
10. Press Feature Button 3.
11. At the DGW IP1= prompt enter default gateway L 6SNU, M 6SNU, N 6SNU, O +ROG.
Possible Values for CTX Gateway octets i.j.k.l = 0~255
Default = 0.0.0.0, where L = 0, M = 0, N = 0, O = 0
12. Press +ROG(twice).
Important! Windows XP: Choose Step 2C; Windows 2000: Choose Step 2D.
Installation
Step 2: Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
3-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Step 2C: Set Up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC NIC
(Windows XP)
Follow the steps below to set up PC Network settings on your CTX WinAdmin PC.
Note This setup is only for direct connection to the Strata CTX or for simple Hub or LAN connections.
For more complex LAN, WAN or Internet connections, refer to “Wide Area Networks and/or
Internet Connections” on page 3-5.
1. Click Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > Network Connections > Broadband
Connection.
2. At the Broadband Connection screen, click the Properties tab, then click on the Networking tab.
3. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
4. Click on the Properties tab.
5. Select “Use the following IP Address.”
6. In the IP address field enter a.b.c.x
where a.b.c = 0~255 and x = 0~252.
Example: 192.168.254.x.
Note The first three octets a.b.c. have to be exactly the same as the first three octets of the CTX IP address
set in Sub-step 7 of Step 2B. X cannot be 253 or above and it cannot be equal to octet d of the CTX
TCP/IP address set in Sub-step 7 of Step 2B. This is the static IP Address of your PC.
7. Click OK and exit.
Installation
Step 2: Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 3-9
Installation
Step 2D: Set Up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC NIC
(Windows 2000)
Follow the steps below to set up PC Network settings on your WinAdmin PC.
Note This setup is only for direct connection to the Strata CTX or for simple Hub or LAN connections.
For more complex LAN, WAN or Internet connections, refer to “Wide Area Networks and/or
Internet Connections” on page 3-5.
1. Click Start > Settings > Network and Dial-up
Connections > Local Area Connections.
2. Right click on Local Area Connections to select
Properties.
3. Local Area Connection Properties Connection screen
displays. Ensure Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) is checked. Highlight TCP/IP, then click the
Properties button.
4. On the General tab click the “Use the following IP
Address” radio button (shown right).
5. In the IP address field enter a.b.c.x
where a.b.c = 0~255 and x = 0~252.
Example: 192.168.254.x.
Note The first three octets a.b.c. have to be exactly the
same as the first three octets of the CTX IP address
set in Sub-step 7 of Step 2B. x cannot be 253 or
above and it cannot be equal to octet d of the CTX
TCP/IP address set in Sub-step 7 of Step 2B. This is the static IP Address of your PC.
6. Enter e.f.g.h. in the Subnet Mask field. The Subnet Mask should be exactly the same as the CTX Subnet
Mask set in Sub-step 9 of Step 2B.
Possible Values of Subnet mask octets e.f.g.h = 0~255
Example: 255.255.255.0
7. Leave the DNS Server addresses blank.
8. Click OK (to accept all screens).
9. Go to “Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software” on page 3-14.
CTX WinAdmin is now ready to communicate and program your Strata CTX System.
Installation
Step 3: Set up Modem Connection (Optional)
3-10 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Step 3: Set up Modem Connection (Optional)
Step 3A: Connect CTX WinAdmin PC to Strata CTX Modem
Connect an RJ11 cable from your PC modem to an active phone line or RSTU port. See Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4 CTX WinAdmin Modem Interface Connection
CTX WinAdmin PC Modem to CTX Modem Call Setup – CTX Programming and Operation
• Direct ring connection over CO lines
• DID lines: in PRG 309, assign “Built-in Modem” as the Audio Day1, Day, and/or Night destination
type.
• DIT ground/loop start lines: in PRG 310 assign “Built-in Modem” as the Day1, Day2, and/or Night
destination type.
• Direct Ring when connected to RSTU or DISA line: put “#19” in CTX WinAdmin Phone Number
dial string.
• Transfer a CTX WinAdmin call to the Strata CTX modem from a CTX Auto Attendant or telephone
After receiving the call from the CTX WinAdmin user, press &QI7UQ or hook flash and dial #19 then
hang up after receiving CTX modem tone.
Note If calling an Auto Attendant put “xxxxxxx,,,,,,,, #19” in CTX WinAdmin Phone Number dial string.
Where “xxxxxxx” is the site phone number and each “,” adds a three-second delay before dialing
#19 to connect to the modem.
Important! Windows XP: Choose Step 3B; Windows 2000: Choose Step 3C.
Flash
or ROM
and
RAM
CO Line
Circuit Strata CTX
33.6 kbps v.34
Point-to-point TCP/IP
Dial #19
Time
Switch
Modem
RS-232 Cable
RS-232 Cable
Remote CTX
WinAdmin PC
CO LineCO Line Telephone
Network
5592
Local CTX
WinAdmin PC
Modem
BCTU,
BECU or
ACTU/
AMDS
Modem
RSTU
Installation
Step 3: Set up Modem Connection (Optional)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 3-11
Installation
Step 3B: Set up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC Modem
(Windows XP)
Note This setup is only for direct connection to the Strata CTX or for simple Hub or LAN connections.
For more complex LAN, WAN or Internet connections, refer to “Wide Area Networks and/or
Internet Connections” on page 3-5.
1. Set up PC modem settings for CTX WinAdmin. Click Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet
Connection > Network Connections > Create a New Connection (under Network Tasks).
2. At the New Connection screen, click Next. Select radio button “Connect to the network at my
workplace” and click Next.
3. Select radio button “Dial-up Connection” and click Next.
4. Enter the company name as “Remote CTX1”,
then click Next.
5. Leave the Phone Number to Dial field blank.
Click Next.
6. Click Finish.
7. At the Connect Remote CTX1 screen, click
Properties.
8. At the RemoteCTX1 Properties screen, select
the PC modem that should be used to connect
to the CTX modem.
9. Click the Networking tab.
10. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
11. Click Properties.
12. Select Use the following IP Address.
13. Enter an IP Address 192.168.255.x (where x can be 1~252. It cannot be 253 or above. It cannot be the
same as the CTX IP address in Program 916 for CTX NIC Connections). This is the static IP Address of
your PC when using the modem connection. Click OK.
14. At the CTX1 Properties screen, click the Options
tab and set up options to the recommended settings
shown as shown right.
15. Click OK. You can go back and change these
settings later if needed.
16. At the CTX1 Properties screen, click OK and exit.
17. Go to “Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software”
on page 3-14.
Installation
Step 3: Set up Modem Connection (Optional)
3-12 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Step 3C: Verify Modem Hardware Settings
Using the steps below verify that the modem hardware settings are set correctly to communicate with the
CTX built-in modem.
1. Go to Start > Settings (Windows 2000 only) >
Control Panel.
2. Click “Phone and Modem Options.”
3. Click the Modem tab.
4. Select the modem used by CTX WinAdmin.
5. Click the Properties button.
6. Click the Advanced tab to verify hardware settings on
the screen (shown right).
7. Click OK and exit.
Installation
Step 3: Set up Modem Connection (Optional)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 3-13
Installation
Step 3D: Set up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC Modem
(Windows 2000)
Note This setup is only for direct connection to the Strata CTX or for simple Hub or LAN connections.
For more complex LAN, WAN or Internet connections, refer to “Wide Area Networks and/or
Internet Connections” on page 3-5.
1. Setup PC modem settings for CTX WinAdmin. Click Start > Settings > Network and Dial-up
Connection > Make New Connection.
2. Click Next. Select radio button Dial-up to private network and click Next.
3. From the “Select a Device Screen” highlight the modem to be used to make a CTX WinAdmin dial-up
connection and click Next.
4. Do not enter Phone number, then click Next.
Note The phone number for Dial up is entered when setting up the Profile in Strata CTX WinAdmin. See
“User Management” on page 3-19.
5. Select radio button “For all users,” then click Next.
6. Use the recommended setting (Enable on-demand dialing) and click Next.
7. Type RemoteCTX1 as the name in
Connection Wizard (shown right), then click
Finish.
8. The Connect RemoteCTX1 screen displays.
Note The User name field on this screen will
automatically be populated.
9. Click on the Properties button of the Connect
RemoteCTX1 screen.
10. The RemoteCTX1 screen displays. Click on
the Networking tab and select Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) in the Components
checked are used by this connection box.
Then click Properties button.
11. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
screen displays. Select “Use the following IP Address” and enter
the IP address (192.168.255.x, where x can be 1~252. It cannot
be 253 or above. It cannot be the same as the CTX IP address in
Program 916 for CTX NIC Connections). This IP address is the
static IP address for the PC when using this modem connection.
Click OK.
12. The initial setup screen displays. Click Properties.
13. Click the Options tab and set up options to the recommended
settings (shown right).
Note Set “Idle time before hanging up” to more than one minute if
you are transferring CTX WinAdmin calls to the CTX built-
in modem versus direct calls to the modem.
14. The initial setup screen displays, click Ok and exit.
15. Go to Step 3C: Verify Modem Hardware Settings.
16. Go to “Establish Communication with Strata CTX” on page 3-14.
Installation
Step 4: Establish Communication with Strata CTX
3-14 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Step 4: Establish Communication with Strata CTX
Make sure you have completed the Strata CTX to CTX WinAdmin setup procedures described in the first
part of this chapter before proceeding.
➤To ensure your WinAdmin pages will automatically update
1. Open Internet Explorer.
2. Click on Tools > Internet Options...
3. Under Temporary Internet Files, click on
the Settings button.
4. Check for newer versions of stored
pages, set the radio button
to“Automatically.” Click OK. You only
need to perform these steps once (unless
the Settings are changed)
Installation
Step 4: Establish Communication with Strata CTX
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 3-15
Installation
➤To establish communication with Strata CTX
1. Open Internet Explorer and point the browser to http://localhost/Ctmc_Local/Default.htm as shown in
the figure below or click on the CTX WinAdmin desktop icon. If the Internet Connection Wizard
displays, refer to Step 2 under “Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software” on page 3-2.
2. Click Go. The Login screen
displays (shown right).
3. To log into CTX WinAdmin for
the first time, enter administrator
in User Name field and password
in the Password field.
4. Click on the Login button. The CTX
WinAdmin Title screen displays.
5. Click CTX (shown right) to go to the
connection setup screen.
Installation
Step 4: Establish Communication with Strata CTX
3-16 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
6. From the Connection Options Menu
(shown at right) enter the following:
• Community Name –
communityName (entry is case
sensitive). This is the default
community name for CTX
systems.
• CTX IP/Name – 192.168.254.253
(NIC). This is the default IP
Address of the CTX that is set in
CTX Program 916.
• IP Address –
192.168.255.254 This is
the CTX built-in modem fixed IP
address for
Dial-up connections. It cannot be
changed.
Notes
●If you are connecting to Strata CTX using your modem, click in the Use Dial-Up box and enter the
phone number to connect to your Strata CTX. The CTX IP address in the CTX IP Name field
automatically defaults to the Strata CTX modem’s static IP address.
●If you are calling in from a modem line which is already connected to the CTX through manual
dialing, check the Use Dial-Up box. You do not have to enter anything in the Phone Number box.
When you hear modem tone, click Connect Now, then hang up.
●If you have set up the Profile User Management screen with CTX site information, click on the CTX
Host name and IP address of the CTX listed in the box at the bottom of the screen.
●Adding and Saving a new CTX connection can be done by clicking Profile > User Management. For
details see “User Management” on page 3-19.
7. Click on Connect Now. For CTX WinAdmin V2.10G.1 and higher, you will see a small dialog box
appears. Ignore this box. It will close automatically after you see the Connection Complete window and
click OK.
Important! If you are not able to connect after clicking on the Connect Now button, then
re-check the set up steps described in this chapter.
6065
Installation
Step 4: Establish Communication with Strata CTX
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 3-17
Installation
Manual Dialing to Connect to the CTX Modem
If the CTX WinAdmin application is running in Windows operating systems and you want to dial in to
CTX manually with a bridged telephone (operator-assisted dialing) instead of having CTX WinAdmin dial
the phone number, perform the following:
Step 1: Connect to the CTX modem with manual dialing
1. Make sure that your dialing phone is bridge connected to your modem’s “Line” jack.
2. Set up your modem dialing for Windows Operator-Assisted Dialing by opening Network Connections
in the Control Panel.
3. On the Advanced menu at the top of the screen, select Operator-Assisted Dialing, then Exit.
Step 2: Make an operator-assisted call
1. Bring up the CTX
WinAdmin Connection
page (shown right).
2. Enter the CTX
Community Name (or
select a CTX Host
Name) and check Use
Dial-Up.
3. Enter a comma or a
phone number in this
box.
4. Click Connect Now.
5. Go off-hook with the
bridge telephone and
dial the CTX site
number.
6. When the call is
answered by a person or
Auto Attendant, ask to
be transfered to the CTX
modem number #19.
The called party should
then hang up.
7016
You must enter
a comma or a
phone number.
Installation
Step 4: Establish Communication with Strata CTX
3-18 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
7. When you hear the modem beep or
steady modem tone from the CTX
modem, click OK from the
Operator Assisted Manual Dial
message box and then hang up the
bridged telephone.
The WinAdmin and CTX modems
will communicate to start the
session and the dialing message
boxes will disappear.
8. Click OK.
7028
7027
Installation
Step 5: Use Profile to Add Users and CTX Systems
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 3-19
Step 5: Use Profile to Add Users and CTX
Systems
User Management
Prerequisite Program: None
This program lets only the Administrator add or remove users to CTX WinAdmin.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Profile > Users Management.
2. Enter new User Name, Password,
Confirm Password, and FAC
Group Level fields.
Note The Administrator screen will
displays (shown right). The
Administrator can add new
users using this screen. This
screen is only accessible when
logged in as Administrator
only.
3. Click Save.
4. Enter the remaining fields.
5. Click Add/Modify/Remove.
The screen (shown right) is
accessible to all users.
Installation
Step 5: Use Profile to Add Users and CTX Systems
3-20 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
FIELD DESCRIPTION
User Name Enter the new User name. The initial user name of the Administrator is administrator. This
name cannot be changed.
Possible values: Alpha characters.
Note The Administrator is the only user that can add new users. The administrator user
name cannot be changed.
Password Enter the new password. The initial password is password. This password can be changed
by the administrator or user. The password is case sensitive.
To protect User Passwords, open Internet Explorer and go to Tools > Internet Options >
Content > Autocomplete. Uncheck User Names and Password on forms, then click on Clear
Passwords.
CAUTION! Record all your passwords for CTX WinAdmin and passwords for any
other applications that use Internet Explorer.
Possible values: Alpha characters.
Confirm Password Repeat password entered in Password field.
Possible values: Alpha characters.
FAC Group Level Select the FAC Group Level.
Possible values: Level 1, Level 2, Level 3, Level 4 (default = No value.)
In the current version of CTX WinAdmin, all levels are the same and provide access to all
CTX WinAdmin functions.
CTX Host Name Enter CTX Host Name (name to identify the CTX or customer).
Possible values: Alpha characters.
CTX IP/Name Enter the IP Address of the CTX system. For the CTX NIC connection, enter the IP Address
of the CTX as set in Program 916. For Modem connections, always enter 192.168.255.254.
Possible values: Refer to “916 IP Configuration” on page 10-14.
Community Name Enter the Community Name of the host.
Possible values: Alpha characters (default = communityName).
communityName is the default community name for all CTX systems. CTX community names
are assigned in the Operation section of CTX WinAdmin.
DialUp Number Enter the telephone number for Dial Up access.
Possible values: Any telephone number (digits 0~9 and * or # and “,” for three-second
pauses.)
Note The CTX modem number is #19
Confirm Community
Name Re-enter the Community Name.
Possible values: Alpha characters.
Installation
Step 6: Set Up Users for CTX WinAdmin Access
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 3-21
Installation
Step 6: Set Up Users for CTX WinAdmin Access
Prior to CTX WinAdmin V2.10G, only Microsoft® Windows® XP or Windows 2000 Administrators
could use CTX WinAdmin to make changes. After CTX WinAdmin V2.10G has been installed, you can
enable CTX WinAdmin access to Windows Users who are members of the Windows Administrator’s
group.
Users who are logged in to Windows on accounts that are not members of the Administrators group will
also be able to use all features of the WinAdmin application including connection to CTX via dial-up
networking. The only exception is that these non-Administrator users cannot modify the User Profile.
Set Up Users for CTX WinAdmin Access
After CTX WinAdmin has been installed, you can enable CTX WinAdmin access to Windows Users who
are members of the Windows Administrator’s group. Prior to CTX WinAdmin V2.10G, only
Administrators could use CTX WinAdmin to make changes.
1. Go to the Windows Start button > Control Panel >
Administrative Tools > Component Services.
2. Locate and open My Computer >
COM+ Applications.
3. From the COM+ Applications folder, right click
on IIS-{default web site/root/ctmc_Local}. Select
Properties > Identity tab, then select “This User”
(change from Interactive User).
4. Enter or browse and locate a Windows User name
(User must be a member of the Windows
Administrator group). Enter a password, and re-
enter the password in the Confirm box. Click OK.
5. Click on “x” in the upper right corner to close out
of Windows. The Windows User entered in the
previous step can now access CTX WinAdmin.
Step 7: Exit CTX WinAdmin
1. From the Program Menu, click Home.
2. Click on Exit at the CTX Management Console page.
3. Close your browser.
Installation
Step 7: Exit CTX WinAdmin
3-22 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-1
System
System 4
This chapter provides Strata CTX system programming information for programmers using the CTX
WinAdmin programming interface.
100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments
Prerequisite Program: None
All Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs), excluding the system processors, are assigned to cabinet slots. The
processor PCBs have dedicated slots in the Base Cabinet which do not require this assignment. The system
provides one Base Cabinet and up to six Expansion Cabinets. The Base Cabinet provides eight slots and
each of the six Expansion Cabinets provide 10 slots for a total of 68 slots.
1. Fill out the “Card Assignment Record Sheets” on page D-1.
2. From the Program Menu click System >
Card Assignment. The Card Slot
Assignment screen displays (shown
right).
3. Cabinet (01~07) – Select the two digit
cabinet number to be assigned. The
cabinet and slot number appear in the
cab/slot field. Select 01 for Base and
Expansion cabinet (CTX100).
Select 01 for Base and 02~07
respectively for each Expansion cabinet
(CTX670).
4. Slot (01~10) – Select 01~04 for Base
Slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots
(CTX100).
Select 01~08 for Base Slots and 01~10
for Expansion Slots (CTX670).
Note The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this relay operation, BIOU2 is
installed as default in a virtual equipment position; Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20 in Program 100.
To install an actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the programming telephone to
remove the virtual BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2 in Cabinet 01/Slot 01~08 in the normal
manner.
5. Select the PCB Type. Use the drop down menu to select the PCB type. WinAdmin will start a refresh
cycle, watch the progress bar (lower right corner of PC screen) to verify when WinAdmin is complete.
The PCB type that was selected will appear in the PCB Type field.
6. Click Submit to save your data.
System
Dial Number Plan
4-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Dial Number Plan
Prerequisite Program: None
The Dial Number Plan lets you download all
current dialing numbers registered in the CTX
database.
The Numbering Plan screen (shown right) gives
you details on the different categories of
Numbers.
The table below contains the information shown
on the screen to the right.
➤Click Continue to view the next screen.
To the right is an example of all the
numbers programmed in the CTX
system.
You are able to view all the DNs, IPT
DNs and other numbers used.
Number Type Description
Digit Groups Lists all numbers that begin with each digit 0~9 separately.
DKT Prime DNs Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to a digital telephone in Program 200.
SLT Prime DNs Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to a standard telephone in Program 200.
ISDN DNs Lists all Directory Numbers assigned to ISDN telephones in Program 202.
Phantom DNs Lists all Phantom Directory Numbers assigned to digital telephones, Add-On-Modules
and DSS consoles in Programs 205, 213, 215 respectively.
IPT Prime DNs Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to BIPU-M card in Program 200 (requires
CTX and WinAdmin Release 2.1 and above).
ACD Pilot Lists all ACD Pilot Numbers assigned in Program 540.
Hunt Group Pilot Lists all Hunt Group Pilot Numbers assigned in Program 209.
Access Codes Lists all feature, line and line group access codes assigned in Program 102.
System
102 Flexible Access Codes
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-3
System
102 Flexible Access Codes
Prerequisite Program: None
Strata CTX comes with pre-assigned Flexible Access Codes that the telephone dials to access features.
This enables you to create customized Flexible Access Codes. The Strata CTX Flexible Numbering Plan
associates features stored in memory (i.e., “Store Code,” see Table 4-1) to a Flexible Numbering Code
assigned by the user.
Note Flexible Numbering Plan access codes cannot conflict with DN assignments.
1. Enter your customized Flexible Numbering Plan in the “Programmed Value” column of Table 4-1.
2. From the Program Menu click
System > Flexible Numbering
Plan. The Numbering Plan
Assignment screen displays
(shown at right).
3. 00 Flexible Numbering Plan –
Enter the digits to be dialed
(0~9,#,*) to access a feature or an
OLG. To delete, select “No Data”
in “01 Feature Name.” Conflict
with an assigned DN will produce
an error.
4. 01 Flexible Numbering Feature –
Select the Flexible Numbering
Feature (see Table 4-1) to see
which access code is being
assigned.
Note To assign an access code to an OLG, select “Line Group access code - one access code for each
OLG.” To assign the prefix digit(s) for the access code of individual lines, select “Line access code -
leading digit(s) to access individual lines”. Example: If #7 is selected as the line access prefix, the
users will dial #7xxx to access an individual line (where xxx is the line number).
5. 02 OLG Number – Enter the Outgoing Line Group number to which the OLG access code is being
assigned. This field is only required if you chose “Line Group Access Code – one access code for each
OLG” for the Flexible Numbering Feature in Step 4 above. Enter a 0 in this field if a Feature Code other
than 551 was selected.
Note 02 OLG Number (0~32 CTX100; 0~50 CTX670 Basic; 0~128 CTX670 Expanded) field appears
only when 01 Feature Name Line Group Access Code – one access code for each OLG is selected.
6. Click Submit.
➤To delete an access code assignment
➤Click the Create button and enter the access code in the index, select No Assignment, click Submit.
This clears the access code so that you can reassign it to another feature.
System
102 Flexible Access Codes
4-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Creating New Feature Codes
1. Click on the Create button.
2. Enter new feature/access code. Click Ok. WinAdmin will start a refresh cycle, when your complete
screen will change to a gray (edit mode) color and the feature/access code will be red.
3. From the Feature Name drop down menu select the feature to be assigned.
4. Submit your data.
Notes
• To range program feature/access codes use a “*” between a range of values and a “,” for an additional
entry not in a range.
•System Date and Time Access Codes – These functions require CTX R1.02, MA227 or higher
software. The system date adjust code and system time adjust code is different for every system. The
defaults are #651 and #652 respectively.
Important! If you backup a CTX database (default.dat) with a CTX software that does not support Time/
Date access codes and then restore it to a CTX software that supports these access codes,
you must use this program to set the Time/Date access codes. This must be done to allow end
users to set the Time/Date from their LCD digital telephones.
Flexible Numbering Default Settings
Table 4-1 shows the default Flexible Numbering Feature and Flexible Numbering Plan code relationships.
Pressing the Flexible Numbering Plan code from any station enables users to directly access the Flexible
Numbering Feature. The Feature Index Codes will display on the LCD of the telephone once the Default
Access Codes are entered.
Note These three-digit Feature Index Numbers should not be confused with the Program 205 three-digit
Button Codes.
Table 4-1 Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings
Flexible Numbering Feature Feature
Index Default
Access Code Programmed
Value
No Data
ABR - Activate 150
ABR - Cancel 151
Call Park Orbits - Activate 170
Call Park Orbits - Park Answer (Retrieve Parked Call) 173
System Orbit Number 174
DND -Local Activation 180
DND -Local Cancellation 181
DND -Remote Activation 182
DND -Remote Cancellation 183
Door Lock Control -Unlock 190
Door Phones -Call 191
Flash -short 200
Flash -long 210
Group Paging -Invoke All Group Paging 220
Group Paging -Invoke Individual Group Paging 230
Answer for External Group Paging 232
Emergency Page -Invoke All Emergency Paging 240
Emergency Page -Invoke Individual Emergency Paging 250
Originate Call by Terminal Speed Dial (Index: 00-99) 260
System
102 Flexible Access Codes
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-5
System
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 000-099) 261
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 100-199) 262
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 200-299) 263
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 300-399) 264
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 400-499) 265
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 500-599) 266
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 600-699) 267
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 700-799) 268
Register Speed Dial 269
Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Activation 340
Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Activation 341
Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Activation 342
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Activation 343
Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Activation 350
Call Forward CF-B; External Call) - Activation 351
Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Activation 352
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Activation 353
Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Remote Activation 360
Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Remote Activation 361
Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation 362
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation 363
Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Remote Activation 370
Call Forward (CF-B; External Call) - Remote Activation 371
Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Remote Activation 372
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Remote Activation 373
Call Forward (Any Call) - Cancellation 380
Call Forward (External Call) - Cancellation 390
Call Forward (Any Call) - Remote Cancellation 400
Call Forward (External Call) - Remote Cancellation 410
Change Password for Remote Activation/Cancellation 420
Input Account Code 530
Change DISA Security Code 540
Outgoing Call by Directing Individual Trunk 550
Outgoing Call by Directing Outgoing Line Group 551
Three Way Conferencing (Override to Tandem Connection) 560
Enter User Programming Mode 570
LCR -Outgoing Call 580
Set Voice Mail Message Waiting (activate MW without ringing for VM) 591
Release Received Message Waiting 592
Release Sent Message Waiting (Cancel MW without ringing for VM)) 593
MW Answer access code (Retrieve Received Message Waiting) 594
Cancel ACB 600
Start BGM 610
Stop BGM 611
Start BGM for External Paging Device 612
Stop BGM for External Paging Device 613
Built-in modem 630
Night Ring Answer 640
Travelling Class Override Code Input Number 650
Change Travelling Class Override Code 651
Table 4-1 Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)
Flexible Numbering Feature Feature
Index Default
Access Code Programmed
Value
System
102 Flexible Access Codes
4-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Activate System Call Forward 670
Cancel System Call Forward 671
Call Pickup -Directed DN Pickup of Ringing or Held DN calls and Call
Park Answer 678
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Group Pickup
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Terminal 681
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Group 682
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed DN 683
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Any External Call 684
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed CO Retrieve 685
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Local Retrieve 686
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Remote Retrieve 687
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed DN Retrieve 688
Call Pickup1 - Directed DN pickup for either Ringing or Held Calls (Release
2.0, MF017 or higher) 679
Transfer to Voice Mail 690
Repeat Last Number Dialed 700
Volume Control for BEEP 710
Change LCD Display Language 720
Advisory Message - Activation 730
Advisory Message - Cancellation 731
Emergency Call 740
Attendant Console Group Access Code 750
Operator Call Special Dial (for Tenant Service) 751
Private Network Access Code 760
Node ID (Coordinated Directory Number Prefix) 770
Substitution of Dial * 780
Substitution of Dial # 781
Originate Call with Sub Address -Outgoing Call/Internal Call 782
Application starting access code 800
Split (Conference) 860
System Date Adjust Code (Release 1.02, MA227 or higher) 910
System Time Adjust Code (Release 1.02, MA227 or higher) 911
1. Feature key is not provided for this Call Pickup. If you want a feature key, please use Single Touch Button that has
a feature access code for this call pickup.
Table 4-1 Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)
Flexible Numbering Feature Feature
Index Default
Access Code Programmed
Value
System
117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-7
System
117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis
Prerequisite Program: None
This program is used to prevent users from circumventing Destination Restriction (DR) by sending tones
directly to the PSTN before DR analysis is complete. It defines the number of digits expected in PSTN
numbers beginning with identified sequences.
For example, a number starting with the toll prefix “1” would be expected to be 11 digits long. Calls will
be cut through to the public network only after the expected number of digits have been received.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > Public Numbering Plan.
The Public numbering Plan
Analyzed Digit Number
Assignment screen displays (shown
at right).
2. Enter the Prefix Number used for
external calls.
3. Select Digits to Follow.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Prefix Number Enter the initial, identifying external digits. 1 to 7 digits may include wild cards
“X” and “N”.
Possible values: 1~7 (N = 2~9 and X = 0~9) (default = no value)
01 Digits to Follow Select the number of digits to follow the prefix number established above. It is
the total number of digits in a number beginning with the Prefix Number above.
Possible values: 0~64 (default = 0)
System
103 Class of Service
4-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
103 Class of Service
Prerequisite Program: None
Class of Service (COS) assignments are a registration of feature capabilities to a specific user or group of
users. Up to 32 COS feature sets can be registered.
1. Enter your COS assignments in the “COS
Record Sheet” on page D-4.
2. From the Program Menu click System >
Class of Service The Class of Service
Assignment screen displays (shown
right).
3. COS Number – Select the COS Number
(1~32).
4. Place a check mark in each of the
services you wish to enable.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 Auto Busy Redial Enable Automatic Busy Redial after dialing a busy outside destination.
02 Call Forward Override Enable Call Forward Override. If enabled, this station does not forward
calls from a calling station with System or Station Call Forward
activated. This includes when dialing from the dial pad or DSS button
located on the telephone or DSS console.
03 Call Transfer w/ Camp-on Allows a call transferred by a station to Camp-on to a busy destination.
04 Change DISA Codes Enable stations to change the DISA Security Code.
05 DND Override - Calling Party Permits a caller to override the DND status of a station.
06 DND Override - Called Party Permits calling parties with DND Override privileges to override DND
status.
07 Do Not Disturb Enables user to place stations on DND mode.
08 Remote Set/Reset DND Enables stations with the ability to set/reset DND on other phones.
09 Executive Override Enable Executive Override on a call.
10 Executive Override Allowed Permit Executive Override for incoming callers.
11 Offhook Camp-on Enable Off-hook Camp-on when encountering a busy destination.
12 Group Pickup Enable stations for Group Call Pickup within one’s own group.
13 Directed Station Pickup Enable stations to pick another specific ringing station.
14 Directed Group Call Pickup Enable stations to pick up a ringing station in a specified group.
System
103 Class of Service
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-9
System
15 Directed DN Call Pickup Enable stations to pick up a specified DN.
16 Ext Call Pickup Enable stations to pick up any incoming trunk call.
17 Directed CO Call Pickup Enable stations to pick up a specific incoming trunk call.
18 Remote Retrieve Call Pickup Enable stations to retrieve any call placed on Hold at a designated
terminal (PDN).
19 DN Retrieve Call Pickup Enable stations to retrieve a held call on another DN.
20 Handsfree Override Permit stations to override Hands Free Answerback with Ringing mode.
21 Privacy Override Enable stations to override a private call.
23 Invoke Emergency Page Enable the Emergency Page feature.
Note Not used in Release 1.
24 Join Feature Enable the Join feature (Attendant Feature).
25 Through Dialing Enable the Perform Through Dialing (Attendant Feature).
26 Tandem CO Connection Set up a Trunk-to-Trunk connection.
27 Day/Night Control Enable Day/Night Mode changing privilege.
28 Ext BGM Control Permit BGM over external speakers to be turned on/off.
29 LCR Feature Enable access to LCR.
30 Individual Trunk Access Enable Dial individual trunk access codes to access specific lines.
31 Trunk Access Allowed Enable Access trunk groups by trunk access codes.
32 Forced Account Codes Use Forced Account Codes for placing external calls.
33 Verified Account Codes Verify Account Codes before an external call is placed.
34 Allow Short Hook Flash Use a Short Flash signal over outside lines.
35 Allow Long Hook Flash Use a Long Flash signal over outside lines.
36 Allow Hook Flash Receive hook flash over CO Lines, and enable telephones and voice
mail ports to perform hook flashes.
38 Can Receive OCA Permission for others to call this station using Off-hook Call Announce.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
System
104 System Timer
4-10 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
104 System Timer
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns the system timers. System timers set a variety of times to control calls and features
for the Strata CTX.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > System Timer. System
Timer Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
2. Select the desired timer value for
each of the 19 fields.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 ACB Callback Timer The Automatic Callback timer sets the time (5 ~ 180 seconds) that the callback will
be attempted before being cancelled.
Possible values: 5~180 sec. (default = 30)
02 ACB Cancel Recall
Timer Select the ACB overall timer value. This value establishes a limit for registering a
callback. Once the timer expires, the callback will be cancelled.
Possible values: 5~180 min. (default = 30)
03 Park Recall Timer Select the Park timer value. This sets the length of time a call can remain in Park.
Possible values: 10~600 sec. (default = 120)
04 Camp-on Timer Select Camp-on timer value. This sets the time needed to remain off-hook prior to
Camp-on being automatically activated.
Possible values: 5~15 sec. (default = 10)
05 SMDR Valid Call Timer The length of time that a call should be active before being captured by SMDR. The
SMDR Answer timer sets a default time for when an outgoing call will be considered
to be answered for SMDR reporting when a true answer signal is not returned from
the public network. Setting the too time short will include calls that may not be
completed, setting the time too long may exclude short calls that are answered and
terminated in a short time.
Possible values: 0~180 sec. (default = 10)
06 Tandem Timer #1 Select timer for a Trunk-to-trunk connection for which neither CO Line has release
supervision, a timer is needed to release the call if no user monitoring has taken place.
Possible values: 0~3600 sec. (default = 300)
07 Tandem Timer #2 Provides the time to enable an external user to dial a digit to extend the disconnect
time when the connection is unsupervised. This feature is used primarily with DISA.
Possible values: 0~180 (default = 30)
08 Call Forward No Ans
Time The System Call Forward No Answer timer specifies the time period that a phone will
ring prior to invoking the Call Forward operation.
Possible values: 1~180 sec. (default = 30)
System
104 System Timer
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-11
System
09 Dial Input Timer Permits dialed input for a telephone and trunk using DTMF.
Possible values: 0~60 sec. (default = 20)
10 Delay 1 Ringing Timer Specifies the time to wait before applying ringing to the designated phones.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 12)
11 Delay 2 Ringing Timer Selects the time to wait before applying ringing to the designated phones.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 24)
12 Door Unlock Timer Select the length of time to send an electrical signal to a door for releasing the lock.
Possible values: 1~30 sec. (default = 6)
13 9+11 Judgement Timer The 9+11 Inter-digital timer provides a timing value (1~30 seconds) for the system to
wait for additional digits to be dialed looking for the 911 or 9+911 dialed codes for
treatment using the E911 procedures rather than normal dialing treatment.
Possible values: 1~30 sec. (default = 5)
14 Emergency Call Timer Sets a time for advancing the call to the next station in a list of destinations for the
call.
Possible values: 10~180 sec. (default = 30)
15 ABR Busy Detection
Time The Destination Busy Detection timer sets the time to wait while looking for a busy
condition on an external call. If detected, it will trigger the initiation of the Automatic
Busy Redial cycle.
Possible values: 1~30 sec. (default = 5)
16 Lost Call Timer The Lost Call timer sets the time that a failed transfer recall will ring on the
originating station prior to attempting to recall a secondary location.
Possible values: 1~600 sec. (default = 180)
17 Lost Call Final Timer The Lost Call Final timer sets the time that a failed transfer recall will ring on the
secondary location before being automatically disconnected.
Possible values: 1~600 sec. (default = 30)
18 DTMF Tone Sending
Time The DTMF tone sending duration for dialing on CO Lines.
Possible values: 80msec (default) or 160msec
19 Auto Disconnect Time after which an unsupervised trunk may be automatically released.
Possible values: 0~60 min. (default = 0)
23 System Timer Network
DSS Refresh Timer Select Network DSS Refresh Timer (20 -180 seconds). The time interval when all
Network DSS settings are refreshed system wide.
Note DSS button LEDs change state immediately when the status of the DSS
button changes - regardless of this timer value.
Possible values: 20~180 seconds (default = 30)
24 Outgoing Number
Display Timer This timer sets how long dialed numbers will display on telephone LCDs for outgoing
line calls. (This feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin
R2.2G.0 and higher.)
Possible values:1~120 seconds (default = 10)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
System
105 System Data
4-12 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
105 System Data
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns system settings for your Strata CTX.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > System Data. The
System Data Assignment screen
displays (shown right).
2. Enter System Parameter data
using the table below.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 Executive Override Enable break in warning tone for Executive Override.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
02 Station MOH Select MOH for private lines and stations.
Possible values: Quiet Tone, External 1 (default), External 2, External 3, External
4, External 5, External 6, External 7, External 8, External 9,
External 10, External 11, External 12, External 13, External 14 or
External 15
03 Ring Transfer Tone Select tones for the transferred party to hear after a ringing transfer takes place.
Possible values: RBT (default) or MOH
04 Transfer Privacy Transfer Privacy enabled: CO line buttons that have multiple appearances will only
flash and ring on the transferred-to telephone; the same CO line button on other
telephones will be red-busy.
Transfer Privacy Disabled: CO line buttons that have multiple appearances will flash
and ring on all telephones that have the CO line button appearance.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
05 Privacy Override Enable Privacy Override Attendant Monitor warning.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
06 Credit Card Code Enter Service Indentifier for Credit Card Calling. If no value is entered in this field
any previously programmed data is lost.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
07 Credit Card Digits Enter the Minimum Dial Digits for Credit Card Calling.
Possible values: 1~66 (default = 21)
08 E911 Service Enable E911 Service availability.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
System
105 System Data
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-13
System
09 DR Override by SSD Enable DR Override by System Speed Dial.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
10 Auto Station Release Enable Automatic Station Release.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
11 ISDN SPID Enable Auto Service Profile Identifier (SPID).
Possible values: Operable or Not Operable (default)
12 Night Mode Relay Assign BIOU Relay as the Night Relay. This relay activates when the system is in
the Night Mode.
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
BIUO1 provides relays 1 to 4; BIUO2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note On CTX100 the ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this
operation, in Program 100 the BIOU2 must be installed in Cabinet 2, Slot 5,
PCB code 20.
13 BGM External Paging Set the External Page Group Number that includes the external paging zones to
which BGM will be sent. See Program 503
Possible values: 0~4 (CTX100)
0~8 (CTX670 Basic)
0~16 (CTX670 Expanded) (default = 0)
14 Lost Call Destination Enter Lost Call Destination. If no value is entered in this field any previously
programmed data is lost.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
15 COS Override Code Class of Service Override Code Digits (1-8 digits). The digit length of COS override
codes. COS override codes are set in Program 510.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
16 Multi-Conference Enable Multi-Conference capabilities for Analog Internal Calls and Outgoing Calls.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
17 Caller Number Display Enable Caller Number Display. If a soft key display competes with a Caller ID, the
Caller ID displays.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
18 Night Bell Relay Assign BIOU Relay as the Night Bell Relay; this relay activates whenever Night
Ringing takes place.
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
BIUO1 provides relays 1 to 4; BIUO2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note On CTX100 the ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this
operation, in Program 100 the BIOU2 must be installed in Cabinet 2 Slot 5,
PCB code 20.
19 Display Preference Select Display Preference.
Possible values: DNIS (default) or Caller ID
20 Transit Counter Select the Networking Transit Counter. This device limits the number of nodes
through which a QSIG call can pass before being terminated as a lost call.
Possible values: 0~128 (default = 1)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
System
105 System Data
4-14 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
21 Primary Clock
22 Secondary Clock
Enter data as xxyyzz.
zz=channel 01 if clock source is RPTU or RDTU
zz=channel 01, 02, 03 , or 04 if clock source is RBUU/RBUS or RBSU
Example: If the Primary Clock Source should be a assigned to an RPTU in cabinet
5, slot 2, enter 050201.
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
23 Call History Prefix 1 Add the dialing prefix 1 when using the callback feature in Call History.
Possible values: Add (default) or Do Not Add
24 Emergency Digits Sent Enter an alternative emergency dialing string. If no value is entered in this field any
previously programmed value is overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = 911)
25 DP Make Ratio Select the Dial Pulse Make/Break ratio.
Possible values: 33% (default) or 40%
26 Call Button Jumping Select whether to execute Jumping LED.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
•If enabled, line calls move from a telephone DN button to a line button after they
are answered. After answering the call, the DN button is cleared to receive
another call.
With Call Jumping, the DN acts as an Answer button. This only applies if the line
that is answered has a CO/GCO/Pooled button appearance on the telephone.
•If disabled, line calls remain on the DN after they are answered.
39 Std. Tel. Ringing
Cadence Select the Ringing Cadence for Standard Telephone circuits. This parameter is
available only with CTX WinAdmin R2.1 and above.
Note This does not apply to Digital to IP telephones.
(Ringing Type1)
External Ring:20Hz, 1sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Internal Ring:20Hz, 0.4sec.ON - 0.2sec. OFF
- 0.4sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Recall:20Hz, 1sec. ON - 1sec. OFF
(Ringing Type2)
’Ringing Type2’ is the same Ringing Cadence as DK.
External Ring:20Hz, 0.4sec. ON - 0.2sec. OFF
- 0.4sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Internal Ring:20Hz, 1sec.ON - 3sec. OFF
Recall:20Hz, 1sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
41 CSTA B-Ch. Operation Enabled - CSTA shall provide full ’B’ Channel path information. Disabled - CSTA
shall provide channel group only.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
FIELD DESCRIPTION
System
System Call Forward
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-15
System
System Call Forward
Program Number(s): 500 and 504
Set up System Call Forward (SCF) parameters using the following programs.
1. Complete the “System Call Forward
Record Sheets” on page D-6.
2. From the Program Menu, click System >
System Call Forward. The System Call
Forward Destination screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter Program 500 data.
4. Enter Program 504 data.
5. Click Submit.
500 System Call Forward Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment is used to configure up to 32 system call forward patterns. Station DNs are assigned to
these patterns in the station COS assignments.
Note The Administrator programs the condition of transfer by setting Call Type, Period and Telephone
Status. Destinations 1 and 2 should be programmed after transfer conditions are set.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 SCF Number Select the SCF pattern number to configure.
Possible values: 1~4 (CTX100), 1~10 (CTX670 Basic),
1~32 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Call Type Select the type of call that should forward in this pattern.
Possible values: CO Loop or Grd, DID, Tie, Ring Transfer and Internal
(default = no value)
02 Period Select the system time period in which this SCF pattern should operate.
Possible values: Day1, Day2 or Night (default = no value)
03 Telephone Status Select the telephone DN status that should cause this SCF pattern to operate.
Possible values: Busy, No Answer, Busy No Answer or DND (default = no value)
04 Destination 1 Select the first destination to which the call should forward.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
05 Destination 2 Select an alternate destination to which the call should forward.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
System
System Call Forward
4-16 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
504 System Call Forward Operation Status
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns System Call Forward (SCF) Type for the pattern.
System Call Forward Copy
The copy function enables you to selectively copy SCF destinations to any or all SCF segments and any or
all SCF templates. It combines Program 500 and Program 504 on the same screen.
Note They were separate screens in previous versions of CTX WinAdmin.
1. Select System > System Call Forward > a SCF template (1-32) and then a Telephone Status (example
“Busy No Answer”). The System Call Forward screen displays (shown above) showing the status of the
first available call forwarding system.
2. Select the needed values from the drop-down menus for the System Call Forward and Telephone Status
fields. These fields are required. As soon as the second field is selected, the full page displays for
editing.
Note If it is not yet configured, the Telephone Status field indicates No Forwarding.
3. Select Call Type and Period by highlighting the desired line in the display.
4. Type the needed information into the Destination 1 and 2 fields. Destination 1 is always required,
Destination 2 is optional.
5. Click Submit to send the data to the CTX.
6. Click Submit to send the destination assignments to the CTX
...or click Copy to display the Copy dialog box. You can click on Copy at any time to copy Destinations
to any SCF template, Call type and period, including all SCF segments and templates.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 SCF Number Select the SCF pattern number to configure.
Possible values: 1~4 (CTX100), 1~10 (CTX670 Basic),
1~32 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Telephone Status Select the status or state in which the telephone should be for this system call
forward pattern to activate.
Possible values: No Data (default), Busy, No Answer, Busy No Answer or DND
System
System Call Forward Table View
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-17
System
Copy Dialog Box
➤To copy SCF Destinations to any selected SCF assignment
click Copy on the System Call Forward screen. The System
Call Forward Range Copy screen displays (shown right).
➤To select the Destination(s) that should be copied
1. You can remove a destination entry by removing the
checkmark from it.
2. Select the appropriate Period, Call type, Status and SCF
assignments to which the destination(s) should be copied.
3. Click Copy Now. Your entries are submitted to the CTX and
the destination(s) are copied to all assignments that you
selected.
Possible Errors
• If you attempt to remove Destination1 (only) when there is a
Destination2 assigned.
• If you attempt to assign Destination2 when Destination1 is not assigned.
Notes
• If you check “Prompt on Error,” the copy function stops if one of the above errors occurs, then you are
given a choice to continue or abort. Continue skips the error and does not perform the copy.
• If you do not check “Prompt on Error,” all errors, if any, are skipped and the copy is not executed.
• You can assign or remove both destinations at the same time without causing an error.
System Call Forward Table View
SCF Table View shows the entire set up of
all available system call forward levels.
➤To access the SCF Table View
➤Select System > SCF Table View.
See “Table Views” on page 2-6 for table
functionality.
System
501 System Speed Dial
4-18 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
501 System Speed Dial
Prerequisite Program: None
System Speed Dial consists of up to 800 pre-programmed numbers each containing up to 32 digits. If the
number being entered exceeds the 32 digits, the next speed dial location will automatically be appended to
create longer numbers. One other speed dial location can be nested within the number for dialing a
common routine with the number (see “516 Station Speed Dial” on page 5-34 for more information about
nesting).
1. Complete the “System Speed Dial
Record Sheet” on page D-7.
2. From the Program Menu, click System >
System Speed Dial. The System Speed
Dial screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter Program 501 data.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Speed Dial Bin Enter the speed dial bin location.
Possible values: 000~799 (default = no value)
01 Number This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, # and Pauses (default = no value)
To enter pauses enter Px, where x equals 1~9 (seconds), which is the length of
the pause.
02 Name This is the Name that appears on Telephone LCD dial directories.
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
System
System Speed Dial Table View
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-19
System
System Speed Dial Table View
System Speed Dial Table View
shows the entire set up for all
speed dial numbers.
➤To access the System Speed Dial
Table View
➤Select System > System Speed
Dial Table View.
See “Table Views” on page 2-6
for table functionality.
Day Night Service
Program Number(s): 112, 106 and 113
The programs that follow are used to set up Day and Night modes in Strata CTX.
1. Complete the “Day/Night Mode
Record Sheet” on page D-8.
2. From the Program Menu click
System > Day Night Services. The
Day Night Mode Assignment
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter the Calendar Day
(YYYYMMDD) to assign a
Working Day Type schedule
...or click on one of the following
buttons.
• List – View a summary list of
programmed Calendar days.
• Create – Assign a new Calendar
Day with custom settings.
• Copy – Copies the currently
viewed record to another record(s).
4. Enter remaining Program 112 data.
5. Enter Program 106 data.
6. Enter Program 113 data.
7. Click Submit.
System
Day Night Service
4-20 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
112 Day/Night Mode Calendar
Prerequisite Program: 106 on page 4-20
This program enables you to assign Working Day Types for up to 128 unique Calendar Days. These
settings override the default system schedules in Strata CTX to enable Day/Night scheduling for unique
circumstances.
106 Day/Night Mode “Type of Day” Mapping Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 113 on page 4-21
The Day of the Week schedule defines each day as the type of day the schedule shall follow. These types of
days are called Work Day, Non-work Day, and Holiday. Each day of the week can be classified.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Tenant Number Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured. (This
feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and
higher.)
Possible values:1~8.
00 Calendar Day Enter the Calendar Day for which to assign a Working Day Type schedule.
Possible values: YYYY = Year, MM = Month, DD = Day (default = no value)
01 Working Day Type Select the Working Day Type.
Possible values: Delete (default), Work Day, Non-Work Day or Holiday
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Tenant Number Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured. (This
feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and
higher.)
Possible values:1~8.
01 Monday Assign the type of day schedule that is to be used for each day of the week.
Possible values: Work Day (default), Non-work Day or Holiday
02 Tuesday
03 Wednesday
04 Thursday
05 Friday
06 Saturday Assign the type of day schedule that is to be used for each day of the weekend.
Possible values: Work Day, Non-work Day (default) or Holiday
07 Sunday
System
Day Night Service
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-21
System
113 Day/Night Mode Schedule per Tenant Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
The Day/Night Mode daily schedule defines the times for the start of the Work Day, Non-work Day, and
Holiday for each of the modes (Day, Day2. Night) per Tenant. Each “type of day” defined in “106 Day/
Night Mode “Type of Day” Mapping Table Assignment” on page 4-20 requires an assigned schedule.
Complete “Day/Night Mode Record Sheet” on page D-8.
Note The start time for Day 1 mode equals the end time for Night mode.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Tenant Number Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured. (This
feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and
higher.).
Possible values:1~8.
Work Day Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start time for Work Day day type.
Possible values: hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
(default = 9999)
Note 9999 deletes or skip modes.
•01 Day 1 Mode
•02 Day2 Mode
•03 Night Mode
Non-Work Day Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start times for Non-Work Day day type.
Possible values: hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
(default = 9999)
Note Enter 9999 deletes or skip modes.
•04 Day 1 Mode
•05 Day2 Mode
•06 Night Mode
Holiday Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start times for Holiday Day day type.
Possible values: hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
(default = 9999)
Note 9999 deletes or skip modes.
•07 Day 1 Mode
•08 Day2 Mode
•09 Night Mode
System
PAD Table
4-22 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
PAD Table
Program Number(s): 107, 108 and 114
Assign PAD groups, PAD Tables and PAD Conference Tables using these programs.
1. From the Program Menu click System >
PAD Table. The PAD Table Assignment
screen displays (shown right).
2. Enter Program 107 data.
3. Enter Program 108 data.
4. Enter Program 114 data.
5. Click Submit.
Note Clicking *Note displays Table 4-2 for
Program 107 and Table 4-3 for Program
108.
107 PAD Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns additional Sender and Receiver PAD values to PAD groups in the PAD table.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 Sender PAD Device
Number Enter Sender PAD Device Number from PAD Table.
Possible values: Up to 3 digits. 101~132 (CTX670 Expanded),
101~110 (CTX670)
101~106 (CTX100),(default = no value), see Table 4-2 below.
02 Receiver PAD Device
Number Enter Receiver PAD Device Number from PAD Table.
Possible values: Up to 3 digits. 101~132 (CTX670 Expanded),
101~110 (CTX670)
101~106 (CTX100)
(default = no value), see Table 4-2 below.
03 PAD Loss Enter PAD Value (See Table 4-2 below, or click on the drop down menu). The
value shown shows the net effect.
Note To pad is to insert loss; therefore, “negative loss” equals net gain.
Possible values: 1 = 6 dB Net Gain, 2 = 3dB Net Gain, 3 = 0dB, 4 = 3dB Net
Loss, 5 = 6dB Net Loss, 6 = 9dB Net Loss, 7 = 12dB Net Loss
or 8 = 15dB Net Loss (default = no value).
5699
System
PAD Table
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-23
System
108 PAD Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
You can enter up to 32 additional devices to the PAD table to deal with exceptions to the default table.
Table 4-2 PAD Table
PAD Device Number 12345678910 101 102
:
131 132
PAD Device Number
Receiver (Listener)
Analog Telephone
DKT
Analog Trunk
T1 Trunk
ISDN Station
ISDN Trunk
CONF Bridge
Music Source
Ext. Paging
IPT
PAD Group 1
PAD Group 2
:
PAD Group 31
PAD Group 32
Sender (Speaker)
1 Analog Telephone 0 0 0 6 6 6 X1-0000
2DKT 0006660-0000
3 Analog Trunk 0 0 6 6 6 6 X1-6000
4T1 Trunk 6660000-6300
5ISDN Station 6660000-6300
6ISDN Trunk 6660000-6300
7 Conference Bridge (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) 0 0 0
8Music Source 000000000000
9Ext. Paging 006666000000
10IPT -60-60 0 0-6--60 0 0
101 PAD Group 120 0 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 0 0
102 PAD Group 23333333333330
::
131 PAD Group 31
132 PAD Group 32
Notes
1. “X” data set for PAD Conference table Assignment
2. For IP QSIG only. The default values for PAD Group 1 is 0dB. dB is the value for attenuation level.
3. For PRI QSIG only.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 PAD Group Device Type Enter the Device Type from Table 4-3 below.
Possible values: Up to 6 digits.
x = Device Type; yyyyy = Device number
(default = no value)
01 PAD Group Number Enter the PAD Group Number
Possible values: 0~6 (CTX100), 0~6 (CTX100 Basic), 0~32 (CTX670 Exp.),
(default = 0)
System
PAD Table
4-24 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
114 PAD Conference Assignment
This program enables you to assign PAD values for combinations of analog trunks and telephones in
conference.
Table 4-3 PAD Group Device Type Examples
Device Name Device
Type Device Number Example
DKT, SLT, ISDN, Station 1 0~99999 (PDN) if DKT device = 200, value = 1200.
ISDN Trunk 2 1~128 (Channel Group Number) if Channel Group # = 10, value = 210.
Analog Trunk, T1 Trunk 3 1~264 (Trunk Number) if Trunk # = 120, value = 3120.
Conference Bridge 4none (Conference Bridge is only
one) value = 4.
Music Source 5 1~15 (Music Port) if Music port = 8, value = 58.
External Paging Device 6 1~8 (Zone Relay Number) if External Paging Device = 3, value = 63.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 PAD Conference Trunks Enter the number of analog trunks using Table 4-4 “PAD Conference Table” on
page 4-24.
Possible values: 0~6 (default = 0)
02 PAD Conference
Telephone Enter the number of analog telephones. See Table 4-4 below.
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
03 PAD Conference Value Enter the desired PAD Value for the combination of analog trunks and
telephones specified in PAD Conference Trunks and Telephones above. The
value shown shows the net effect.
Note To pad is to insert loss; therefore, “negative loss” equals net gain.
Possible values: 1 = 6 dB Net Gain, 2 = 3dB Net Gain, 3 = 0dB, 4 = 3dB Net
Loss, 5 = 6dB Net Loss, 6 = 9dB Net Loss, 7 = 12dB Net
Loss or 8 = 15dB Net Loss (default = no value).
Table 4-4 PAD Conference Table
Number of Analog Telephones
012345678
Number of Analog
Trunks
0000003366
100003336
23333366
3666669
499999
59999
6999
System
110 Password
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-25
System
110 Password
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns the password. The system has two passwords levels for. Logging into the system
with the Level 1 password enables the user to administer all system programs while the level 2 password
provides restricted program administration.
1. From the Program Menu click System >
Password.
2. Enter 00 Password Level.
3. Enter 01 Password.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Password Level Enter the digit 1 or 2 for the password as follows:
Possible values: Enter 1 to set the unrestricted administration password.
Enter 2 to set a restricted administration password.
Level 2 users can administer all programs but are restricted from
initializing the CTX and from updating the CTX software
(default = no value).
01 Password Enter the desired password.
Note Only one password can be set for each level.
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII character (default = no value)
System
109 Music on Hold
4-26 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
109 Music on Hold
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns external Music on Hold (MOH) and Background Music (BGM) sources.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > Music on Hold. The
External Music on Hold Source
Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
2. For fields 01~07, click in the
adjacent radio button to activate
MOH/BGM.
3. For fields 08~15, enter the
equipment location identifier and
check the Connected box to
activate.
4. Click Submit.
System
109 Music on Hold
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-27
System
FIELD DESCRIPTION
MOH/BGM #1 (BECU) For MOH/BGM #1~#7, click in the radio button to enable MOH/BGM for the
specified PCB.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
MOH/BGM #2 (BIOU1-J1)
MOH/BGM #3 (BIOU1-J2)
MOH/BGM #4 (BIOU1-J3)
MOH/BGM #5 (BIOU2-J1)
MOH/BGM #6 (BIOU2-J2)
MOH/BGM #7 (BIOU2-J3)
MOH/BGM #8 (RSTU) Enter the RSTU equipment number to which MOH/BGM source #8 or #9~#15
are connected. Enter data as xxyyzz:
Example: If the MOH/BGM source should be a assigned to an RSTU in cabinet
5, slot 2, circuit 3; enter 050203.
A PDN can not be assigned to an RSTU equipment number if it is to be a MOH
circuit. If a PDN is assigned to the circuit that will connect to a MOH/BGM
source, you must first delete it using PRG201
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
Notes
•A PDN can not be assigned to an RSTU equipment number if it is to be a
MOH circuit.
•If a PDN is assigned to an MOH/BGM circuit, you must first delete the PDN
using PRG201
MOH/BGM #9 (RSTU)
MOH/BGM #10 (RSTU)
MOH/BGM #11 (RSTU)
MOH/BGM #12 (RSTU)
MOH/BGM #13 (RSTU)
MOH/BGM #14 (RSTU)
MOH/BGM #15 (RSTU)
System
I/O Device
4-28 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
I/O Device
Program Number(s): 803, 801 and 804
These commands assign LAN devices, RS-232C devices and device relationships for I/O Logical Devices
SMDR, SMDI, CTI and physical ports.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > I/O Device. The
Equipment Assignment screen
displays (shown right).
2. Enter Program 803 data.
803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments
This program assigns one of the following:
• SMDR and Toshiba Proprietary Integration (TPI) to the logical device and BSIS, RS-232 port numbers.
• WinAdmin, ACD server, TPI and Attendant Console to BECU, Network Jack logical device and LAN
port numbers.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Logical Device Number Select the 3 digit logical device number for SMDR, SMDI, and LAN devices or Network
application. See Table 4-5.
Possible values: 100 = SMDR
200~208 = CTI LAN devices or PCs (default = no value)
300 = SMDI of TPI
400 = BLF (for CTX Attendant Console)
500 = DSS (for Telephone, DSS Console, and ADM DSS buttons)
Note BLF and DSS are available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software and
with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.
01 Device Connection 1. Select RS-232 for SMDR or SMDI devices or PCs. These devices are connected to
BSIS, RS-232 ports.
2. Select LAN for WinAdmin, ACD Server, TPI, and Attendant Console PC. These
devices are connected to the BECU Network Jack directly or via a HUB or LAN.
Possible values: None (default), LAN or RS-232
System
I/O Device
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-29
System
Device Port No. Select the Device Port numbers (one port per device).
Possible values: For a RS-232 connection: 1~4 (default = 1)
For an LAN connection: 1~9 (default = 1)
For BLF Networking: 11
For DSS Networking: 12
Notes
•SMDR and SMDI devices can be assigned to any BSIS RS-232 Port.
•BLF and DSS are available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software and with
CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.
•LAN devices and PCs can be assigned to logical Ports 1~9 according to the
following logical device number assignments:
LAN Port1 = device 200
LAN Port2 = device 201
LAN Port3 = device 202
LAN Port4 = device 203
LAN Port5 = device 204
LAN Port6 = device205
LAN Port7 = device206
LAN Port8 = device207
Table 4-5 Device Table
Logical
Device Logical Device
Serial Number
Physical Device Define I/O
Logical
Device
Number
LAN PPP RS-232C Smart
Media
SMDR 0--OK-100
CTI
0OK---200
1OK---201
2OK---202
3OK---203
4OK---204
5OK---205
6OK---206
7OK---207
8OK---208
SMDI 0OK-OK-300
1OK-OK-301
FIELD DESCRIPTION
System
I/O Device
4-30 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 803 on page 4-28 and 804 on page 4-32.
This screen assigns Strata CTX LAN
parameters, enabling PC applications
to connect to the BECU network jack.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > I/O Device. The
Equipment Assignment screen
displays.
2. Click the LAN Device tab. 801
Network Jack LAN Device
Assignments screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter Program 801 data.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 LAN Port Number Enter the port number of the LAN device to be assigned. Refer to “803 SMDR SMDI
CTI Port Assignments” on page 4-28.
Possible values: 1~12 (default = no value)
Notes
•Program the local port number for LCD Control of Voice Mail
•Use the same Device Port No. (11) for Network BLF.
•Use 10 for Network TPI
•Use 12 for Network DSS
•Network BLF and DSS are available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software
and with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.
01 Protocol Select communication Protocol.
Possible values: TCP (default) or UDP
Note Select UDP for Network DSS.
02 PC Operation Type Select the Operation Type.
•If Server is selected, enter 04 Server Port Number.
•If Client is selected, enter the 05 Client IP Address.
Possible values: Server (default) or Client
Note Select Client for TPI.
03 Data Flow Select the data flow protocol for CTX and PC communications.
Note If the logical device set up in “803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments” on
page 4-28 is set to CTI, this field must be set to Asynchronous data flow.
Possible values: Synchronization or Asynchronization (default = Asynchronization)
6538
System
I/O Device
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-31
System
04 Server Port Number Enter the Server Port Number and proceed to 07 Read Retry Number. This field is
required if Server was selected in 02 PC Operation Type above. If not, leave this field
blank and proceed to 05 Client IP Address.
Possible values: 0~65535 (default = 0)
Note Use 6000 for Network BLF, 3000 for Network DSS and 5000 for Network
TPI.
05~08 Client IP
Address Enter the Client LAN IP Address. This field is required if Client was selected in 02 PC
Operation Type above.
Possible values: 0~255 for each octet (default = 0)
Note Enter IP address of Stratagy iES32 or SES.
09 Client Port Number Enter the Client Port number. This field is required if Client was selected in 02 PC
Operation Type above.
Possible values: 0~65535 (default = 0)
10 Read Retry Number Select the Read Retry counter.
Possible values: 0~10 (default = 1)
11 Write Retry Number Select the Write Retry counter.
Possible values: 0~10 (default = 1)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
System
I/O Device
4-32 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port Setup
Prerequisite Program: None
Use this screen to setup the RS-232
serial ports on the BSIS PCB.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > I/O Device. The
Equipment Assignment screen
displays.
2. Click the RS232 Serial Port tab. 804
BSIS RS232 Serial Port Set Up
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter Program 804 data.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 BSIS Port (1~4) Enter the BSIS PCB port number.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = no value)
01 Port Speed Select the data speed for the BSIS port in bits per second (bps).
Possible values: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200, 38400 or 57600
Note The total combined maximum speed of BSIS ports cannot exceed 57,600 bps.
02 Port Parity Select the parity error checking method used by the BSIS port.
Possible values: None, Even or Odd (default)
03 Data Bits Select Data Length.
Possible values: 7 Bits (default) or 8 Bits
04 Flow Control This setting indicates the type of flow control used between the BSIS port and the SMDI
or SMDR device. To enable Strata CTX to buffer call records, set this field to Flow.
Possible values: None (default) or Flow
05 Wait Timer Select the maximum time to wait for connection. The Timer value can be one through
255 seconds. Select 0 to set to permanent waiting.
Possible values: 0~255 (default = 30)
6539
System
115 Advisory Messages
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-33
System
115 Advisory Messages
Prerequisite Program: None
This command specifies a set of messages that users may apply to their telephone to provide status
information when others call your station. These messages can be customized to include a directory
number, time or date as part of the message.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > Advisory Messages. The
Advisory Message Assignment
screen displays (shown right).
2. Select the Message Number.
3. Enter the desired message in 01
Message.
4. Select 02 Additional Digits Type.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Message Number Select from 5 pre-programmed messages or 5 custom messages. See Table 4-6
below for details.
Possible values: 0~4 = pre programmed messages, 5~9 = custom messages
(default = 0)
01 Message Enter the Advisory Message to be displayed on the receiving parties LCD.
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 User Entered Variable Select the type of Additional Digits that can be appended to complete the
Advisory Message. The total message cannot exceed 16 characters total.
Possible values: None (default), DN, Time or Date
Table 4-6 Advisory Message Default Code Table
#Advisory Message Type of Additional
0 OUT TO LUNCH None
1 IN A MEETING None
2 CALL Directory Number
3 BACK AT Time
4 RETURN ON Date
5 (No Data) None
6 (No Data) None
7 (No Data) None
8 (No Data) None
9 (No Data) None
System
116 Data Initialize
4-34 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
116 Data Initialize
Prerequisite Program: None
This program is used to initialize the tables of selected programs in the Strata CTX system.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > Data Initialize. The Data
Initialize screen displays (shown
right).
2. Select a Program to initialize from
the 01 Command No. dialog box.
3. Click Submit.
Table 4-7 Data Initialize Programs
Program
Numbers Program Name Page #
500 500 System Call Forward Assignment 4-15
520
LCR Guide Page 9-16
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
529
530
Destination Restriction Guide Page 9-10
531
533
534
651
531
533
534
651 651 Private Routing Plan Analysis 9-56
653 653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment 9-57
654 654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment 9-57
655 655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment 9-57
System
120 Tenant Data Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 4-35
120 Tenant Data Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to select an
Attendant or Night Bell to ring when
dialing 0 in Day 1, Day 2 or Day 3 mode for
up to eight different Tenants. You can also
assign the general purpose relay to the
Night Bell in this program. (This feature is
available with Strata CTX R2.2 or higher
and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G0 or higher.)
1. From the Program Menu, click System
> Tenant Data.
2. Enter the Tenant Number or use the
pull-down to select a number.
3. Enter data.
4. Click Submit.
6957
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Tenant Number Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured.
Possible values: 1~8. No Data (Default)
01 Dial 0 Call Day 1 Dst Type
02 Dial 0 Call Day 2 Dst Type
03 Dial 0 Call Night Dst Type
Select to call an Attendant or select to ring the Night Bell when dialing the
Tenant Attendant Access Code in the Day1, Day 2, or Day 3 mode for this
Tenant.
Important! The Tenant Attendant Access Code must be assigned in Prg
102. If it should be “0,” the Attendant Console Group Access
Code, which is “0,” must be deleted.
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, Night Bell
01 Dial 0 Call Day 1 Dst Digits
02 Dial 0 Call Day 2 Dst Digits
03 Dial 0 Call Night 3 Dst Digits
Enter the PDN of the Attendant (BATI) to ring when dialing Tenant Attendant
Access Code in Day, Day2, or Day 3 mode.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits for each Day Mode selected (default =
noData)
04 Night Mode Relay Enter the General Purpose relay number assigned to the Night Bell. BIOU
relays 1~8. This operation activates the relay continuously when the system is
in the night mode.
BIOU 1 = relay 1~4
BIOU 2 = relays 5~8
ACTU = relay 5
05 Night Bell Relay Enter the General Purpose relay number assigned to the Night Bell. BIOU
relays 1~8. This operation activates the relay when a CO line or DID rings
when the system is in night mode. The CO or DID line must be assigned to
ring the night bell.
BIOU 1 = relay 1~4
BIOU 2 = relays 5~8
ACTU = relay 5
System
120 Tenant Data Assignment
4-36 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-1
Station
Station 5
This chapter provides Strata CTX station programming information for programmers using the CTX
WinAdmin programming interface.
Assignment
Program Number(s): 200, 204, 214, 205, 213, 215, 208, 210, 216 and 502
The following programs assign station data.
Basic/200 Station Data
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
This command assigns stations to the system.
1. Use the “Basic Station Record Sheets” on page D-11 to record your desired Station settings.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the Basic tab (shown
right).
4. Enter a DN number in the
Primary DN field
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed DNs.
• Extended List – view a
detailed list of programmed
DNs.
• Create – Assign a new DN
with custom settings by
entering a DN value. Press
OK, assign the PDN
Equipment No. and click
Submit.
• Selective Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Selective Copy to make a new DN
assignment with settings copied from the DN entered in the Primary DN field.
• Delete – Enter a Primary DN or a range of Primary DNs to delete and click OK.
• Change DN – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN. Enter the new DN
assignment and click OK.
Station
Assignment
5-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
5. Setup the DN by adding values to the remaining fields.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 PDN Equipment No. Enter the PDN equipment number (xxyyzz). This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit
number of the ADKU, BDKU/BDKS, PDKU, or RSTU interface PCB to which the
the PDN is, or should be assigned.
Example: If the PDN should be a assigned to a BDKU in cabinet 5, slot 2, circuit 3;
enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
02 Station Type Select Station Type.
Possible values: DKT (default) or SLT
03 Circuit Type Select Extension or Assign Voice Mail attributes to analog circuits
Possible values: Extension (default) or Voice Mail
•Extension – Should be assigned to PDNs that are associated with Digital or
Standard telephones.
•Voice Mail – Should be assigned to PDNs associated with Voice Mail circuits.
•Announce – Not used in the U.S.A. or Canada. (This feature is available with
CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and higher.)
04 COS Day1
•Day2
•Night
Assign COS to Day1, Day 2 and Night modes.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
05 DRL Day1
•Day2
•Night
DRL for DAY1, Day 2 and Night
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
06 FRL Day1
•Day2
•Night
Assign FRL to Day1, Day 2 and Night modes. The higher the FRL number, the
more trunk access is available.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
07 LCR Group Station LCR Group Number
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
08 QPL Day1
•Day2
•Night
QPL for Day1, Day 2 and Night modes.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
09 Station Name Enter Station Name to be displayed on LCD.
Possible values: Up to eight ASCII characters (default = no value)
Station
Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-3
Station
10 Call Waiting Tone Select desired waiting tone for Offhook Campon.
Possible values: None (default), Singular or Continuity
11 Dialing Progress
Tone Select type of Tone to hear after dialing LCR access code
Possible values: Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or Silence
12 System Call
Forward. Select the System Call Forward Group number.
Possible values: 0~4 (CTX100), 0~10 (CTX670 Basic), 0~32 (CTX670 Exp.),
(default = 0)
13 Call Pickup The station privilege to activate Call Pickup.
Possible values: Permitted (default), Group Only or Not Permitted
14 Bearer Capability ISDN Bearer Capability the PSTN is expecting from non ISDN stations.
3.1kHzAudio (data and speech) or Speech.
Notes
•Standard telephone type data devices (modems, G3-Fax signals) must be set
for 3.1KHz audio on ISDN lines.
•The IP-QSIG network does not support 3.1KHz (data and speech), all standard
telephone equipment must be set to ’Speech’ if making calls over IP-QSIGs.
Possible values: 3.1kHzAudio (default) or Speech
15 Display DN Enter the number to be displayed on the calling telephone that rings this PDN
number. This number is will be overridden by Program 209, 04 (if assigned) and if
the PDN is in a hunt group.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
16 Caller Emergency
Service Identification
(CESID)
Enter the E911 Calling Party Information identifier for this station (CESID).
Possible values: Up to 16 digits (default = no value), however CESID should be
10 digits or less for Centralized Automatic Message Accounting
(CAMA) E911 trunk. PRI E911 allows upto 16 digits.
17 Emergency Call
Group Enter the Emergency call group that this station belongs to.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
18 Remote CF/DND
Password Enter password to set or cancel DND or station Call Forward from another CTX
station; or, for Call Forward only, from a external DSIA line.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Note DND can not be set/canceled remotely from a DISA line.
19 VMID Code SMDI Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PDN calls
voice mail; or, when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number
is prefixed by codes in Program 579, 11~16)
Possible values: Digits 0~9, * and #, up to 10 characters (default = no value).
Note This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF
tones on direct calls to voice mail from the PDN; and on calls to the PDN
that forward to voice mail. See Program 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice.
22 MW to VM Port Enter the Message Waiting center DN. For Remote CTXs, assign message center
including Node IP for TPI integration. This parameter enables Call Record function
too.
Possible values: Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Station
Assignment
5-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
23 Travelling COS
Change Enable this station with the privilege to change the Travelling COS Override Code.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
24 TGAC Override1Enable Trunk Group Access Code (TGAC) override (for Attendant console) from
this station.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
25 Service Tones Disable Service Tone for Data Privacy.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
Note Service tone such as Call Waiting should be disabled for modems, faxes,
and similar devices.
26 CW and ROB Tone Enable/Disable the station to receive Call Waiting (Campon) and Ring Over Busy
Tone.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
Notes
•CW tone is always two beeps.
•ROB tone can be two beeps or continuous as set in PRG 204, 27.
27 Name Display Enable this station with the privilege to put the user name in the Directory
Assistance display of a large LCD.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
28 Door Ovr DND Enable DND override by door phone.
Possible values: Override or Do not Override (default)
30 Chg Sys Speed Enable this parameter to program System Speed Dial.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
31 Network COS Select Network COS value.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
32 Auto OCA OCA occurs automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows OCA
calls to be received.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
33 Originate OCA Enable this station with the privilege to make OCA calls to other stations.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
34 RSTU Supervision This enables the auto disconnect Tandem timer in Program 104, FB06 for these
types of Connections.
Possible values: Received (default) or Not Received
Possible values: Devices connected to RSTU circuits that do not automatically
hang up, and connect to CO lines that do not provide disconnect
supervision, should be set with “Not Received.”
35 Station SpDial Bins The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station:
Possible values: 0~100 (default = 0)
36 Set SLT Dial Type Choose DP (Old style - dial pulse dialling) or DTMF (Newer type - tone dialling).
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Station
Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-5
Station
37 Set Call Forward
Dial Tone When the handset is picked up, the user will hear stutter dial tone if a call forward is
enabled.
38 Dialling Digit
Restriction After the Extension has made a call it can be prevented from dialling any
subsequent digits.
39 CO Park & Hold You can enable or disable CO Park and Hold.
Note This feature is available for CTX Software version R1.03 or higher.
Enabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked line
that appear on other stations will be on hold. This will allow the other stations to
press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Disabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked line
that appear on other stations will appear busy. This will prevent the other stations to
press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
40 MW & DND Dial
Tone Enable: When this station goes off hook, the station will receive stuttered dial tone
when it has a message waiting indication; and the station will receive a busy tone
burst before dial tone when in the DND mode.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a message waiting or
when it is in the DND mode.
41 Activate Message
Waiting This feature is available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software and with
CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.
Enable: This station is allowed to activate station-to-station message waiting on
other stations by dialing the other station number plus 7, 8 or 9; or, by pressing the
Msg key. This feature is available with Strata CTX R1.3 software.
Disable: This station cannot activate station-to-station message waiting on other
stations by dialing the station number plus 7, 8 or 9.
Notes
•When disabled, digital telephones are still allowed to activate station-to-station
message waiting by pressing the Msg button.
•This parameter does not apply to Voice Mail ports to use the special Message
Waiting access codes.
42 Tenant Number Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned. (This feature is
available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and higher.)
Possible values: 1~8.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Station
Assignment
5-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Station PDN Selective Copy
This screen provides you the option of selecting either all or some of the parameters to be copied to the
destination PDNs.
Using this screen you can do any of the following functions:
• Copy to multiple destination PDNs.
• Check All to highlight all the parameters
to be copied.
...or select individual/multiple
parameter(s) to be copied.
1. Select Station > Assignments. Enter the
Primary DN.
2. Click Submit > Copy. The Selective
Copy screen displays (shown right).
3. Check Highlight All to highlight all the
parameters to be copied.
...or select individual/multiple
parameter(s) to be copied.
Note If you want to copy almost all items
and leave out a few, you can check
Highlight All and then click on the items that you don’t want to copy to deselect them.
4. Click Copy Now to start the copying process.
5. When copy is complete, a dialog box displays that reads “End of Copy!”
Note You can return to the previous page and/or reselect copy to different destination PDNs by clicking
Back.
Station Extended List
The Extended List displays the following parameters that are set in Program 200—Station Equipment
Number, DKT/SLT, Extension/Voice Mail, Primary DN, User Name, PDN VMID, COS, DRL, FRL, LCR
Group, System Call Forward Template, Network COS and the quantity of Station Speed Dial bins.
➤To access the extended list
➤Select Station > Assignments > Extended List.
The Extended List spreadsheet displays after it downloads from the CTX (sample shown below). This
takes some time depending on the CTX connection speed and database size.
The screen may be kept up and moved around to use as a reference and can be printed. The Extended
List spreadsheet can be sorted by all 19 columns and sorting can be toggled between Ascending and
Descending order. The entire table can be printed using the Print button on the screen.
Station
Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-7
Station
204 DKT Parameters
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
This command is used to set up DKT digital telephones station parameters.
1. Use the “DKT Parameters Record Sheet” on page D-12 to record your desired DKT settings.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the DKT tab (shown
right).
4. Enter a DN number in the Primary
DN field
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed DKTs.
• PDN Table View – view a
detailed list of programmed
PDNs.
• Selective Copy – Enable you to
copy some or all of the
parameters to the destination
PDNs.
5. Setup the DKT by adding values to the remaining fields.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 Station Type Select the Station Type. When set to Attendant, the system can support four
circuits.
Possible values: Extension (default) or Attendant
02 Key Strip Pattern This option allows you select a pre-defined keystrip pattern and submit it to the
digital telephone. It does not display what pre-defined keystrip (if any) has been
assigned to the telephone.
Use the Key tab screen to view or edit telephone keystrip assignments.
CAUTION! Submitting a keystrip pattern will overwrite existing keys
programmed on a telephone.
Default key strip patterns for digital telephones. The selected Pattern is applied to
the ’Key Strip Type’ parameter.
None – applies PDN to button 01 and blank to all other buttons.
Pattern 1 – applies PDN to button 01, plus line buttons and DND.
Pattern 2 – applies PDN to button 01, plus line buttons, One-Touch buttons and
DND.
Pattern 3 – applies PDN to button 01 and blank to all other buttons. (DKT3014 uses
only Pattern 1 or None).
Possible values: Pattern 1, 2 or None (default)
Station
Assignment
5-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
03 Key Strip Type Select the number of feature buttons to assign to this station.
Note Although the scroll down menu enables you to choose any value from
1~24, valid values are 10, 14 and 20.
Possible values: 1, 3, 10, 14 or 20 (default)
Applies 1, 3, 10, 14, or 20 button keystrip type to digital telephones.
Possible values: 1 and 3 button keystrips apply to DKT2001 and DKT3001|
10 button keystrips apply to DKT2010 and DKT30010
14 button keystrips apply to the Large LCD DKT3014
20 button keystrips apply to DKT2020 and DKT3020.
04 Add on Modules Select the number of Add On Modules (ADM) assigned to this station. This field is
required if you want to program ADM FBs in Program 213. See “Key” on page 5-15.
Possible values: None (default), 1 unit, or 2 units
05 Tone First /Voice
First Set PDN to have Tone First or Voice First signaling when called.
For each iES32 PDN, set to “Tone First”, if set to Voice First iES32 will not answer.
Possible values: Tone or Voice (default)
06 OCA Type Select the OCA type. This field must be programmed with Auto OCA Originate
below.
Possible values: Handset (default) or Speaker
09 Handsfree MIC
Setting If you call a station configured for Voice First signalling, you can use this parameter
to enable the called parties microphone from your DKT.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
10 Handsfree Tone If you call a DKT configured for Voice First signalling, you can use this parameter to
send a splash tone to the called party.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
11 Ext. Ring Repeat Enable repetitive ringing for incoming CO / PBX / Centrex signals. Disabling this
parameter defaults to standard CO ringing pattern (1 sec on / 3 sec Off).
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Station
Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-9
Station
13 Off Hook
Preference Select Off Hook Preference.
Possible values: Idle, Ringing, Prime, No Preference, Prime and Idle, Prime and
Ringing or Ringing and Idle (default)
When a digital telephone user goes off hook, presses the Spkr Button or dials a
digit while the telephone is idle (Hot Dial Pad), the telephone will select an idle PDN
or Line button, or answer an incoming call, according to the preferences set in this
command.
This command works in conjunction with the “14 PDN/Line preference” and “15 Call
Answer Preference” programs.
The possible values are described as follows:
•Idle – The telephone will select and idle DN or Line button depending on the “14
PDN or Line preference” choice. In either case priority is always the lowest
numbered button that is idle. The telephone will not answer ringing calls
automatically.
•Ringing – The telephone will answer a ringing call (any PDN, secondary DN,
PhDN, or any Line type button) by call type or longest ringing button depending
on the “15 Call Answer Preference” choice. The telephone will not automatically
select a DN or Line button when going off hook to originate a call.
•Primary DN – The telephone will automatically try to select the PDN button, if
idle or ringing, no matter what the status is of other buttons on the telephone.
•No Preference – The telephone will not select any button when the user goes off
hook or presses the Spkr button. This selection will also disable the telephone’s
Hot Dial Pad feature.
•Primary DN and Idle – The telephone will automatically try to select the PDN
button, if idle or ringing. If the PDN is busy the telephone will select an idle Line
button (14 PDN or Line preference - Line Preference) or another idle DN button
(14 PDN or Line preference - PDN Preference).
•Primary DN and Ringing – The telephone will automatically try to select the
PDN button, if idle or ringing. If the PDN is busy the telephone will select a
ringing Line button (14 PDN or Line preference - Line Preference) or a ringing
DN button (14 PDN or Line preference - PDN Preference).
•Ringing and Idle – The telephone will always answer any ringing call according
to “15 Call Answer Preference” . If a call is not ringing it will select and idle Line
button (14 PDN or Line preference - Line Preference) or idle DN button (14 PDN
or Line preference - PDN Preference).
14 PDN/Line
Preference Offhook preference button Type.
Possible values: CO Key or DN Key (default)
•CO Line buttons - Line buttons (any type CO, Pooled or Group CO line button)
have priority over DN buttons with “13 Off Hook Preference” choices. The
lowest numbered line button on the telephone has priority over other line
buttons for idle selection.
•Primary DN button - DN buttons (any type PDN, Secondary DN or PhDN button)
have priority over Line buttons with “13 Off Hook Preference” choices. The PDN
button has first priority for idle selection, the lowest numbered DN button on the
telephone has priority over other DN buttons for idle selection if the PDN button
is busy.
Note Off hook ringing selections are also based on “15 Call Answer Preference”
choices.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Station
Assignment
5-10 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
15 Ringing Preference Ringing call answer preference.
Possible values: Longest or Call Type (default)
•Longest Ringing - any call type - Calls are answered in order of the longest
ringing line no matter what type of call (FIFO).
•Longest Ringing - by call type priority - Call Type priority is applied to the longest
ringing button.
Call Type Priorities are fixed is software as shown below:
•Emergency Calls
•Hands Free Calls (after it is switched to ringing by the caller).
•ACD calls
•Recalls (Hold recall, Automatic call back, ABR, etc.)
•External Calls (DID, DIT DISA line calls etc.)
•Internal Calls (station, Attendant, Tie line, door phone, etc.)
16 Text Message
Display Select whether to display an LCD text message. Immediate displays the message.
Not immediate does not display the message.
Possible values: Immediate (default) or Not Immediate
17 Call History
Memory Enter the number of calls to be stored in memory for this station.
Possible values: 0~100 (default = 0)
18 DTMF Back Tone Enables audible DTMF when dialing from a DKT to a trunk or Voice Mail port.
Padded dialing mutes the volume level to the caller not the called trunk or VM
device.
Possible values: Padded, DTMF Tone (default) or No Tone
19 Continuous DTMF Enable / Disable Continuous DTMF for DKT2000 and DTK3000 series telephones.
Enabled allows the telephone to send DTMF tones to the far end continuously as
long as the key on the dial pad is held down.
Notes
•For each iES32 PDN, set to ’Not Continuous’, if set to ’Continuous’, outdial
notification to pagers and calls to AMIS nodes will not function properly.
•DKT1000 series telephones do not support continuous DTMF. DKT1000 series
telephones must be set to ’Not Continuous’ or they will misdial.
Possible values: Continuous (default) or Not Continuous
20 Display Language Select the LCD Display Language.
Possible values: English (default), British English or French
21 Adapter Select the Adapter Type (Desktop OAI or Attendant Console).
•BPCI – for USB interface.
•BATI – for PC Attendant Console Interface.
Possible values: None (default), BPCI or BATI
22 Blind Transfer Set Blind Transfer Action (Attendant Type Only).
Possible values: Leave or Separate (default)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Station
Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-11
Station
23 Mail Box Selection Select the method to enter the destination Mailbox for Call Recording. If set to
“Auto” CTX uses the VM ID of the station initiating the record function.
Notes
•The DN assigned as the MSG center in PROG 200 is used to call the VM port or
Hunt group (PROG 200 FK 22).
•When set to “Auto” the VM-ID of the station initiating the record function is sent
to Stratagy ES as the destination mailbox.
•When set to “Manual Input” the user may enter any valid Mailbox followed by
the “#” sign. If the user Presses “#” without additional data the CTX will send the
VMID of the originating station.
Possible values: Auto or Manual (default)
24 MIC Init. Value Turn on the microphone automatically when making a speaker phone call.
Note The microphone must be enabled.
Possible values: On (default) or Off
25 Microphone Enable microphone.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
26 Speaker Mode
Tones Enable telephone to receive Call Waiting (Camp-on) and Ring Over Busy Tone
while on a speaker phone call.
Possible values: Yes (default) or No
27 Ring Over Busy
Cycles Set ROB to ring two times or continuously.
Possible values: Two Cycles or Continuous (default)
Note See PRG200, 26 to enable ROB to be sent to individual telephones.
28 Attd Overflow Dest. Select overflow destination for attendant.
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = none)
29 Trunk Test and
Verify Allow Trunk Tests and Verification.
Possible values: Yes or No (default)
30 Auto Line Hold Enable Automatic Line Hold. This parameter allows a station to “line hop” from one
call to another automatically by placing the first call on hold.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
32 Programming Mode Enable: Allows the telephone to enter the Programming Mode. Disable: Restricts
the telephone from entering the Programming Mode. This parameter is available
only with Strata CTX Release 2.0 MF017 and higher.
CAUTION! Since we added this parameter, you cannot downgrade to
previous versions of CTX because we do not support
downward compatibility of CTX database. If you attempt
downgrading, the entire Program 204 will be lost. Toshiba
recommends keeping the current database for emergency
situations. We guarantee upward compatibility of the database,
so you can upgrade the system without any problems.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Station
Assignment
5-12 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Feature Button Patterns
The following tables show the various feature button patterns available for )% above.
Table 5-1 20 Button (when FB03 value is 20)
PATTERN1 PATTERN2 PATTERN3
FB01 Primary DN Primary DN Primary DN
FB02 CO 1 CO 1 No Data
FB03 CO 2 CO 2 No Data
FB04 CO 3 CO 3 No Data
FB05 CO 4 CO 4 No Data
FB06 CO 5 CO 5 No Data
FB07 CO 6 CO 6 No Data
FB08 CO 7 CO 7 No Data
FB09 CO 8 CO 8 No Data
FB10 CO 9 CO 9 No Data
FB11 CO 10 CO 10 No Data
FB12 CO 11 CO 11 No Data
FB13 CO 12 CO 12 No Data
FB14 CO 13 Single Touch Button No Data
FB15 CO 14 Single Touch Button No Data
FB16 CO 15 Single Touch Button No Data
FB17 CO 16 Single Touch Button No Data
FB18 CO 17 Single Touch Button No Data
FB19 CO 18 Single Touch Button No Data
FB20 Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb No Data
Table 5-2 10 Button (when FB03 value is 10)
PATTERN1 PATTERN2 PATTERN3
FB01 Primary DN Primary DN Primary DN
FB02 CO 1 CO 1 No Data
FB03 CO 2 CO 2 No Data
FB04 CO 3 CO 3 No Data
FB05 CO 4 CO 4 No Data
FB06 CO 5 Single Touch Button No Data
FB07 CO 6 Single Touch Button No Data
FB08 CO 7 Single Touch Button No Data
FB09 CO 8 Single Touch Button No Data
FB10 Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb No Data
Station
Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-13
Station
Table 5-3 14 Button (when FB03 value is 14)
PATTERN1 PATTERN2 PATTERN3
FB01 Primary DN Primary DN Primary DN
FB02 CO 1 No Data No Data
FB03 CO 2 No Data No Data
FB04 CO 3 No Data No Data
FB05 CO 4 No Data No Data
FB06 CO 5 No Data No Data
FB07 No Data No Data No Data
FB08 CO 7 No Data No Data
FB09 CO 8 No Data No Data
FB10 CO 9 No Data No Data
FB11 CO 10 No Data No Data
FB12 CO 11 No Data No Data
FB13 Do Not Disturb No Data No Data
FB14 No Data No Data No Data
Station
Assignment
5-14 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
214 DSS Console Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
This assignment allows up to eight Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles to be assigned to a station. The
assignment is referenced to the stations’s Primary DN.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Assignment.
2. Click on the DSS tab (shown
right).
3. Enter a DN number in the
Primary DN field
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed DSSs.
• Extended List – view a
detailed list of programmed DSSs.
4. Enter the Equipment number in which the DSS(s) is installed.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Prime DN Enter the PDN of the station that is to be associated with the DSS console(s).
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits (default = no value).
01~08 DSS Equipment
No. 1~8 Enter the DSS equipment number as xxyyzz.
Cabinet – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet (CTX100). Select 01 for
Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet (CTX670).
Slot – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots (CTX100).
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots (CTX670).
Example: If the DSS console should be connected to a PDKU or BDKU/BDKS in
cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
If a PDN is assigned to the DSS equipment number it must be deleted, using
PRG201, before attempting to assign the DSS console.
Station
Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-15
Station
Key
Program Number(s): 205, 213, and 215
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1 and 204 page 5-7
The Feature Button assignments enable each button on the telephone to be addressed and coded to
represent a function or feature to be performed. Some feature buttons require additional parameters to
completely define the key (e.g., a Phantom DN needs a directory number, ringing assignment, and the tone
pitch when ringing occurs).
1. Use the “Feature Button Record Sheet” on page D-13 to plan your FB assignments.
2. From the Program Menu, click Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the Key tab (shown below).
Notes
• To Program DSS buttons, Program 214 should be completed.
• To program ADM buttons (ADM 1 or ADM 2 shown below), FB04 Add on Modules in Program 204
must be set to One or Two.
4. Enter one of the following in the Primary DN field:
• Primary DN to program DKT FBs.
• Primary DN plus an ADM number to Program ADM FBs.
• Primary DN plus DSS Key Assignment button to program DSS FBs
...or click one of the following buttons:
• List – view a summary list of programmed DKTs.
• Extended List – view a detailed list of programmed DKTs.
Station
Assignment
5-16 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
• Copy – After entering the source DN in the Primary DN field, click Copy and designate which FB
buttons to copy (click the DKT Phone header to select all). Enter the destination DN and click OK.
(Range is permitted.)
• Cross Copy – This button enables you to copy specific keys from a station’s keypad to desired keys
of other station key pads. This function is available only with CTX WinAdmin R2.1 and above.
Refer to “Cross Copy” on page 5-18 for steps to use this function.
Distinctive Ringing – Release 1.3 and higher software enables you to set different incoming ringing tones
for internal and external calls on a Prime DN. Ten different tones are available. This can be set from
Programs 205, 213 and 215.
➤To set Distinctive Ringing, double click the button
that you want to set distinctive ringing. A dialog
box displays (shown right).
Click the drop-down arrows to set the External and
Internal tone pitches. The possible values are
shown in Table 5-4.
Notes
●You must have the following versions of
processor boards for Distinctive Ringing:
CTX670: BECU1A, V.1C or later.
CTX100: ACTU1A, V.2D or later.
●For any older versions of processor boards,
you can assign only “01” to Tone Pitch for
internal calls and you can assign only “11,”
“13,” “15,” or “17” to Tone Pitch for external
calls.
●Ringing tone pitch has no effect on telephone
volume.
●When programming External Ringing Repeat with a Distinctive Ringing Pitch, we recommend
that you use pitches “11” or “12” and not “17” or “18”.
●Incoming recall tone cannot be changed.
●Calls to Tie lines adopt the internal call pitch.
Table 5-4 Internal and External Call Ringing Tones
Tone No. Frequency and Cadence
01 500 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat
02 1300 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat
11 500/640 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat
12 500/640 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat
13 860/1180 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat
14 860/1180 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat
15 1300/1780 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat
16 1300/1780 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat
17 860/1180 Hz 0.5 sec. On, 1300/1780 Hz 3 sec. Off, repeat
18 860/1180 Hz 0.5 sec. On, 1300/1780 Hz 1 sec. Off, repeat
Station
Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-17
Station
5. Click on the FB to program (the button turns from yellow to red).
6. Click the desired option from the blue parameter buttons on the right.
• Directory No – Assign a Primary DN key, Secondary/Phantom DN, Phantom DN Message Waiting,
or DSS key to this FB. See “Directory Number Sub-parameters” on page 5-19 for more details.
• CO Line – Assign FB as a CO, GCO or a Pooled Line. See “CO Lines Sub-parameters” on
page 5-20 for more details.
• Features – Assign ABR, ACB, DND, Short Flash, Long Flash, Privacy, Privacy Release, BGM Key,
Program Access, Account Code, Application Starting or Split Key feature to this FB.
• Call Control – Activate Speed Dial, Release Button, Release/Answer, Cancel, Source Party,
Destination Party, CLID or Night Transfer from this FB.
• Call Forward – Set Call Forwarding assignments for this FB. Forward All Calls, Forward Busy,
Forward No Answer, Forward Busy No Answer, Forward Ext/All Call, Forward Ext/Busy, Forward
Ext/No Answer and Forward Ext/Busy No Answer are available selections.
• Park Page – Assign Call Park Orbit, All Paging, Group Paging, All Emergency Paging, Individual
Emergency Paging and Paging Answer Feature access to this FB.
• Call Pickup – Assign FB to a Pickup-Group, Pickup-Directed Terminal, Pickup-Directed Group,
Pickup-Directed DN, Pickup-Any External, Pickup-CO Retrieve, Pickup-Local Retrieve, Pickup-
Remote, Pickup-Directed DN Retrieve and Pickup-On Hold and Incoming.
• Door Lock – Enable FB to unlock Door Lock. See “Door Lock Sub-parameters” on page 5-20 for
more details.
• Voice Mail – Enable FB to Record or Pause/Resume Voice Mail.
• Attendant – Assign Out Dial, Attendant Answer, Overflow, Position Busy, Trunk Test, Attendant
Loop or Supervised Loop Key Attendant features to this FB.
• One Touch – Assign FB as a One Touch button. See “Setting the One Touch Button” on page 5-18.
This feature is available only with CTX software release 1.03 or higher and CTX WinAdmin
software 1.17 and higher.
• Split – Assign FB to Split the connected party and the conference master from the conference (for
private call). (Join button is used to reconnect both parties to the conference.) This feature will be
available only with CTX software release 2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin software 2.2 and
higher. The Split button should not be assigned to a DKT2304-CT cordless telephone.
• Blank – Clear FB assignment.
7. Click on one feature in the sub-parameter dialog box. If no other settings are required, the FB displays
an abbreviation for the selected feature.
...or if you select Directory No, CO Lines or Door Lock parameters, additional fields are required. See
the tables that follow for more details. Follow the directions in each pop-up dialog box.
8. To modify an existing feature button, double-click the feature button and make the change in the
appropriate dialog box that displays.
9. Click Submit.
Station
Assignment
5-18 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Cross Copy
This function is available only with CTX WinAdmin Release 2.1 software and above. Use the following
steps to cross copy keys from one station to the keys of another stations key pad:
1. From the Key Page, enter
the Prime DN.
2. Click Submit.
3. Click the Cross Copy
button. The Source and
Target Copy screen displays
(shown right). Enter the
“Copy To” PDNs
...or click Select to select the
target PDN.
4. From the Source DKT,
select key to be copied.
5. Click the Copy Now button.
The Detail report screen
displays.
6. Click Done. The Target
DKT with the copied key
displays.
7. Verify the key copied.
Setting the One Touch Button
Follow the step above 1~8 above to assign an FB as a One Touch button. Then complete the following
steps:
1. Double click the key assigned as One Touch.
2. The following dialog box displays
This dialog box is used to define each button with the One
Touch Data.
3. Enter the One Touch data, then click OK.
Example 1: Setting up a One Touch button to transfer to
Voice Mail.
Select the Cnf/Trn from the white box on the right, CNF
displays in the One Touch Data field. Then type #407 after
CNF displays in the One Touch Data box. It adds Cnf/Trn
#407 in the One Touch Data. Click OK. Then click Submit.
Example 2: To originate a call from the PDN, select the FK
as 01 if the PDN is on the first key, then add the telephone
number next to FK01 in the One Touch Data box.
Cancel clears the changes and takes you back to the previous
page.
Station
Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-19
Station
Directory Number Sub-parameters
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Primary DN 1. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed
Ring2.
2. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
Secondary/Phantom DN 1. Enter DN Number.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
2. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed
Ring2.
3. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
Phantom DN Message
Warning Enter Phantom DN No.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
DSS Key Enter DSS Primary DN No.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
Station
Assignment
5-20 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
CO Lines Sub-parameters
Door Lock Sub-parameters
Station Flexible Button Assignments
Use the “Record Sheets for 10-button and 20-button Telephones” on page D-14 and “Record Sheets for the
DKT3014” on page D-15 to plan your Station Flexible Button Assignments.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
CO 1. Select CO Line #.
Possible values: 1~264 (CTX670), 1~64 (CTX100) (default = no value)
2. Enter Owner DN.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
3. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No RIng, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
4. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
GCO 1. Select GCO No.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
2. Select Index.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
3. Enter Owner DN.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
4. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No RIng, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
5. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
Pooled Line Key 1. Select Pool Line No.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
2. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No RIng, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
3. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Door Unlock Select Door Lock No.
Possible values: 1~10 (default = 1)
Station
Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-21
Station
Timer
Program Number(s): 208
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
Assigns timing parameters to Primary DNs.
1. Complete the “Station Data
Record Sheets” on
page D-18.
2. From the Program Menu
click Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the Timer tab
(shown right).
4. Enter a DN number in the
Primary DN field.
...or select an existing record
by clicking one of the
following buttons:
• List – view a summary
list of programmed
DKTs.
• Extended List – view a detailed list of programmed DKTs.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN to assign existing
Station Timer settings.
5. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Primary DN Enter the Primary DN.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
01 ABR Retry Count Enter the number of retry attempts made by ABR when dialing a busy telephone
number.
Possible values: 5~20 (default = 15)
02 ABR Retry Interval
Timer Select the amount of time (in seconds) ABR waits between dialing attempts.
Possible values: 30~180 (default = 60)
03 ABR Recall Timer Select the number of seconds ABR will call back the station after receiving ring back
tone from the dialed number.
Possible values: 5~60 (default = 20)
04 Hold Recall Timer Select the number of seconds before a call is placed on hold recalls.
Possible values: 0~255 (default = 60)
05 First Interdigit
Timer Select the amount of time a Station has to dial after going off hook before a call is
terminated (ROT is heard).
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 15)
Station
Assignment
5-22 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Emergency Ringdown Assignment
Program Number(s): 216
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
Assigns Emergency Ring Down parameters to Primary DNs.
1. Complete the “Station Data
Record Sheets” on
page D-18.
2. From the Program Menu
click Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the RingDown tab
(shown right).
4. Enter a DN number in the
Primary DN field.
...or select an existing record
by clicking one of the
following buttons:
• List – view a summary
list of programmed
DKTs.
• Extended List – view a detailed list of programmed DKTs.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN to assign existing
Station Timer settings.
5. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
6. Click Submit
06 Second Interdigit
Timer Select the amount of time the system waits between dialed digits before terminating a
call (ROT is heard).
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 5)
07 Ring Xfer No
Answer Timer Select the Ring Transfer Idle station or Busy station (Camp-on) Recall Time (in seconds)
Possible values: 1~600 (default = 32)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 Emergency Ringdown Enable an Emergency Ringdown Number.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
02 Emergency Ringdown
Timer Enter the length of off-hook time that will cause a DN to originate an Emergency
Possible values: 0~60 (default = 0)
03 Destination Enter the destination DN for the Emergency Ringdown.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Station
206 Phantom DN
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-23
Station
206 Phantom DN
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
This command assigns Phantom DN parameters.
1. Complete the “Phantom DN
Record Sheet” on page D-16.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Phantom DN. The
Station Phantom DN screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter a Phantom DN number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed Phantom DNs.
• Copy – Enter the Phantom DN to copy data from, then click Copy and designate a Phantom DN to
copy the data too. Click OK.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Phantom DN Enter Phantom DN.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
01 Owned PDN Set PhantomDN’s Owner Station
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Tone/Voice First Select from Tone first, or Voice first signaling.
Possible values: Tone First (default) or Voice First
04 Display DN Enter the number displayed on the calling telephone that rings this Phantom DN
number.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This number is overridden by the number in Program 209, FB04 (if assigned) and if the
Phantom DN is in a hunt group. When calling from this Phantom DN, the number
displayed on the called telephone appears in order of priority as follows:
This number in Program 209, FB04 (if assigned) and if the PhDN is in a hunt group.
...or this number in Program 200, FB15 (if assigned).
...or the calling telephone’s PDN.
05 System Call Forward Select the System Call Forward value.
Possible values: 0~4 (CTX100), 0~10 (CTX670 Basic),0~32 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Station
206 Phantom DN
5-24 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
06 VM ID Code Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PhDN calls voice
mail; or, when this PhDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (This number is
prefixed by codes in Program 579, ~).
Possible values: Digits 0~9, and #, up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF tones on
direct calls to voice mail from the PhDN; and on calls to the PhDN that forward to voice
mail (see Program 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice).
Note Do not enter a VMID code in this field if this PhDN is associated with a PDN in
a multiple DN hunt group (Program 209, ).
The associated PDN’s VMID code (Program 200, ) will be sent to voice mail.
09 Message Center Enter the Message Waiting Center DN, VM Pilot Number or lowest member of VM hunt
group.
Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
10 User Name Enter user name.
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
11 Display Name Select radio button for user name to be included in the list display of Large LCD
(Directory Assistance)
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Station
209 Hunt Group
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-25
Station
209 Hunt Group
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
This command assigns Station Hunting Group data.
1. Complete the “Hunt Group Record
Sheet” on page D-17.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Hunt Group. The Station
Hunt Group displays.
3. Click on the Group tab (shown
right).
4. Enter a Group Number for an
existing record
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed Hunt Groups.
• Create – Assign a new Hunt Group with custom settings.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Group Number Hunt Group Number
Possible values: 1~90 (CTX100), 1~200 (CTX670 Basic),1~640 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = no value)
01 Hunt Method Select Hunt Method
Possible values: Distributed (for Voice Mail hunt groups) or Circular (for Multiple DN
hunt groups) (default)
02 Pilot Number Enter Pilot Directory Number. This is the number that is dialed to call the hunt group.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value) any type of hunt group
can have a pilot number.
Note Any type of hunt group can have a pilot number. Distributed hunt groups must
have a pilot number. Voice Mail hunt groups should be Distributed with a Pilot
Number. Multiple DN Hunt groups should be Circular with no Pilot Number.
04 Number to Display Enter the number that is displayed when called by, or when calling any member of the
hunt group.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Note This number should be the DH Group Pilot number for Voice Mail hunt groups.
This number could be the PDN of a Multiple DN Hunt group, in which case the
number would override the number assigned in Program 200, FB15 for PDNs
and Program 206, FB04 for Phantom DNs.
05 Pilot No. SCFwd Allows you to assign a System Call Forward pattern to the Pilot Number of a Hunt
Group.
Possible values: 0~4 (CTX100), 0~10 (CTX670 Basic),0~32 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Station
209 Hunt Group
5-26 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
218 Station Hunt Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 209 page 5-25
This program assigns station DNs to Hunt Groups using Program 209, and assigns the rotation order in
which DNs are hunted.
1. Complete the “Hunt Group Record
Sheet” on page D-17.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Hunt Group Assignment.
The Station Hunt Group Assignment
screen displays.
3. Click on the Member tab (shown
right).
4. Enter a Member Number for an
existing record
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed Hunt Groups.
• Add – Assign a new station DN to the Hunt Group number entered above.
• Append – Assign a new DN as the last DN in a Hunt Group’s hunt order.
• Modify – Highlight an existing DN in the Hunt Order and change the station DN assignment.
• Delete – Delete station DN assignment to Hunt Order number.
5. Click Submit.
06 Muitple DN Hunt Enable if hunt group is created for multiple DN operation. Multiple DN hunt groups
should be circular with no pilot number.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
07 DHG Auto Camp-on Whether to execute Automatic Camp On to the Distributed Hunt Group or not.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Should be applied to VM Distributed Hunt Groups so callers automatically camp on to
Voice Mail when all VM ports are busy. Does not apply to Circular or Serial hunt groups.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Hunt Group Number Enter an existing Hunt Group number or use the List, Add, Append, Modify, or Delete
buttons as described above.
Possible values: 1~640 (default = no value)
01 Hunt Order This field assigns a station DNs position within a Hunt Group’s Hunt Order. The Hunt
Order is selected automatically by CTX WinAdmin. Programmers should assign the last
station in the Hunt Order first and assign the first station in the Hunt Order last.
Possible values: 1~560 (default = no value)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Station
Hunt Group Table View
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-27
Station
Hunt Group Table View
Hunt Group Table View
enables you to view all hunt
groups and its members.
➤To access the Hunt Group
Table View
➤Select Station > Hunt
Group Table View.
See “Table Views” on
page 2-6 for table
functionality.
Note This table has more
functions in addition to
the regular
functionality found in
other table views.
The Navigation Bar has the following additional buttons:
• Delete – Click on a row to delete any directory number from a Hunt Group, then click the Delete
button. When the Delete button is active, the Add button and the Delete Group button will not be active.
To unselect a row that is selected (in yellow), click the row again.
• Add – To add directory numbers to a hunt group select the
Hunt group in the table view from the Navigation drop down
in the Navigation bar, then click the Add button.
If no rows are selected, the Add button is active. Click the
Add button to add members to Hunt groups. When you click
the Add button, the Add dialog box displays (shown right).
Select the DN from the Available Directory Numbers box,
then click the Arrow button in the center. This moves the
DN to Hunt Group box on the left. Click Add now to Save
the entry or Cancel to cancel. Clicking Add Now
automatically refreshes the table view.
In the dialog box shown right, if you want 6200 to appear
before 5200, click 6200 on the right, then click 5200 on the
left and then click the arrow in the center.
• Select All and Unselect All – Clicking these buttons, selects
or unselects all groups in a table.
02 DN By selecting the Insert button you can add a new DN to the Hunt Group’s Hunt Order.
Enter the desired DN in the pop-up dialog box.
To modify an existing entry, use the Modify button as described above.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
03 DN Set Type Modify (replace) an existing assignment.
Possible values: Modify (default) or Insert
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Station
Paging Group
5-28 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Paging Group
502 Terminal Paging Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
Assigns Primary DNs to Paging Group(s).
1. From the Program Menu click
Station > Page Group.
2. Enter a DN number in the
Primary DN field.
...or select an existing record by
clicking one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed DKTs.
• Extended List – view a
detailed list of programmed
DKTs.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN(s) to assign existing
Paging Group settings.
3. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Primary DN Enter the Prime DN of the station to be assigned to Paging Groups. A station may
belong to more than one paging group.
Note You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX100 and up
to 120 stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX 670. Any software release
before R1.01, M19 supports only 32 stations in a paging group for all CTX
system types.
Page Group capacity: CTX100 – 4 Page Groups; CTX670 Basic – 6 Page Groups;
CTX670 Expanded – 16 Page Groups
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
PG01~PG16 Check to assign the DN to this paging group. The number of Page Groups that can be
assigned are: 1~4 (CTX100); 1~8 (CTX670 Basic); 1~16 (CTX670 Exp.)
Possible values: On or Off (default)
Note Up to 120 stations may be assigned to a paging group in the Strata CTX 670
All Page Group Check to assign the DN to the All Page Group.
You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX100 and up to 120
stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX 670.
Possible values: On or Off (default)
All Emergency Page
Group Check to assign the DN to the All Emergency Page Group.
You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX100 and up to 120
stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX 670.
Possible values: On or Off (default)
Station
Paging Group Table View
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-29
Station
Paging Group Table View
Paging Group Table View
enables you to view all paging
groups and its members.
➤To access the Paging Group
Table View
➤Select Station > Paging Group
Table View.
See “Table Views” on page 2-6
for table functionality.
For functionality on Delete, Add,
Select All and Unselect All, refer
to “Hunt Group Table View” on
page 5-27
Note The Add button works a
little different on this table.
When you click Add, the Add dialog box displays, select the entry by clicking on it and then click
the Add Now button.
Station
210 Pickup Group
5-30 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
210 Pickup Group
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
The Call Pickup Group assignment specifies which group numbers this station will participate when either
the Group Call Pickup or the Group Directed Call Pickup features are invoked. A user may be assigned to
more than one group.
Pickup Group Table View
Pickup Group Table View
enables you to view all Pickup
groups and its members.
➤To access the Paging Group
Table View
➤Select Station > Pickup
Group Table View.
See “Table Views” on page 2-6
for table functionality.
For functionality on Delete, Add,
Select All and Unselect All, refer
to “Hunt Group Table View” on
page 5-27.
Note The Add button works a
little different on this
table.
When you click Add, the Add dialog box displays, select the entry by clicking on it and then click
the Add Now button.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01~32 Click in the radio button to Indicate which Call Pickup Group(s) this stations is to
participate in. A station can be assigned to more than one group.
Possible values: check = On or unchecked = Off (default)
Note 01~05 are available for CTX100, 01~10 are available for CTX670 Basic,
and 01~32 are available for CTX670 Exp.
Station
Multiple Call Group
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-31
Station
Multiple Call Group
To set up Multiple Call/Delayed Ringing you must have a Multiple Call (MC) Group set in Program 517.
You can register up to 25 calling members for every MC Group in Program 518. You can set each member
to be Immediate, Delayed Ring 1, or Delayed Ring 2. The Delayed Ring times are independently
adjustable (1~180 seconds) for each Multiple Call Group Member.
Important! Immediate Destinations can only be PDNs (Digital and/or Standard Telephones) and
PhDNs.
Delay Destinations can be PDNs of Standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail Hunt
Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
Incoming Call to MC Group
The following can occur when calling members are set as Immediate, Delayed Ring 1, or Delayed Ring 2.
• If the members of a Multiple Call Group are assigned Immediate ring, the call is received at all
destinations immediately. In this case, each destination LCD displays the same incoming call
information.
• If the MC Group destination (member) is assigned to Delayed Ring 1 or Delayed Ring 2, each
destination will start to ring when the delay time runs out. During the delay time the member PDN or
PhDN button will flash red but not ring.
Important! Delay Destinations can be PDNs of Standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail Hunt
Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
• If some MC Group destinations are busy, incoming call rings only idle destinations. However, if the
camp-on feature is in effect, incoming calls will camp-on to busy destinations.
• Members can be assigned to multiple MC Groups.
MCPN Owner Privileges
When you assign members to a multiple calling group, the member assigned to Index 1 in Program 518 is
considered an owner of the group. The owner of the group is the only member entitled to the following
privileges:
• The owner is the only member in the group that can receive Automatic Call Back calls and Message
Waiting Indications.
• The ringing option for the owner is always set to Immediate ring.
• The owner can be a PhDN or PDN.
Member Requirements
The table below has details for members that can and cannot be in a group.
Important! Immediate Destinations can only be PDNs (Digital and/or Standard Telephones) and
PhDNs.
Delay Destinations can be PDNs of Standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail Hunt
Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
Members that can be in a Group Members that cannot be in a Group
PDNs Pilot DNs - ACD, MCP
PhDNs CO Line Access Codes
Station Hunt Group Pilot DNs
Station
Multiple Call Group
5-32 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Call Forward Activation
System and Station Call Forward can be set up for each MC Group. The Call Forward Remote Access
Code is used to activate or de-activate Station Call Forward of MC Group. System Call Forward is
activated/deactivated using CTX WinAdmin. The MC Group can also be set as the destination of System
on Station Call Forward.
517 Multiple Call Group Assignment
Multiple Call/Delayed Ringing which enables you to delay ring to voice mail and auto attendants.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Multiple Calling Group.
2. Click Create. A dialog box displays.
3. Enter a calling group index in the
dialog box.
The calling group index can be 1~16
(CTX100), 1~32 (CTX670 Basic),
and 1~64 (CTX670 Expanded).
4. Click Ok. Parameter 01 MC Group
Pilot Number gets highlighted.
5. Enter the DN of the MC group. This
number should not conflict with an
existing telephone number.
6. Verify and change other parameters.
7. Click Submit. The group index displays on the left of the program name.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Multiple Call Group Number Select a group number.
Possible values: 1~16 (CTX100), 1~32 (CTX670 Basic) and 1~64 (CTX670
Exp.)
01 MC Group Pilot Number Enter the Pilot Directory Number that should be assigned to the Multiple Call
Group. This can be any number 1~5 digits that does not conflict with numbers
in the current system Number Plan.
Possible values: 1~5 digits
02 Ring Delay 1 Timer Set the timer in seconds.
Possible values: 1~180
03 Ring Delay 2 Timer Set the timer in seconds.
Possible values: 1~180
04 System Call Forward Assign a System Call Forward template number to the multiple calling group.
Enter 0 or 1~32.
Possible values: 0~32
05 Voice Mail ID Enter the VM call forward ID digits for the Multiple Calling Group.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits.
Station
Multiple Call Group
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-33
Station
518 Multiple Calling Members Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 517
Use this program to assign members to a group.
1. From the Program Menu, click Station
> Multiple Calling Group.
2. Click the Member tab.
3. Select the Index Number, then enter
the Member DN.
Important! Immediate Destinations
can only be PDNs
(Digital and/or Standard
Telephones) and PhDNs.
Delay Destinations can
be PDNs of Standard
telephone circuits only
and Voice Mail Hunt
Group Pilot Numbers
(not Multiple DN Hunt
Groups).
Note Each group can have up to 25 members. You can have up to 64 groups.
4. Submit is greyed out because the members are automatically submitted as they get added.
Note The buttons on this screen are dynamic. When you select an empty Index number, the Add button
displays. When you select and existing Index number, the Modify and Remove buttons display.
Modify enables you to edit, while Remove deletes the multiple ringing group index number.
Number Type Description
Multiple Calling Group Index Enter a group number.
Possible values: 1~16 (CTX100), 1~32 (CTX670 Basic) and 1~64 (CTX670
Exp.)
01 Member DN Enter the DN of the extension you wish to add.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits
05 Ringing Options Select either: Immediate, Delay 1 or Delay 2.
Station
516 Station Speed Dial
5-34 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
516 Station Speed Dial
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
Up to 100 pre-programmed Speed Dial numbers (up to 32 digits each) can be assigned to each station.
Speed Dial numbers are stored in “Bins” and each station accesses the Speed Dial numbers by entering the
Speed Dial Bin number from their respective stations. The following advanced Speed Dialing features are
available in Strata CTX.
• Speed Dial Bin Linking – Whenever a Speed Dial number exceeds the 32-digit Speed Dial Bin memory
limitation, the digits exceeding the 32 digit limitation are automatically stored into the adjacent Speed
Dial Bin. The entire string is activated by using the primary Speed Dial Bin number.
Note Bin linking is automatic. Any previously programmed data in the “adjacent Speed Dial Bin” as
described above is overwritten. Furthermore, if a number exceeding the maximum allowable dial
digit length is overwritten with a new number which complies to the 32-digit restriction, the excess
digits recorded in the next Bin (from the previous entry) is treated as a unique Speed Dial record.
• Speed Dial Number Nesting – A Speed
Dial number can be nested into another
Speed Dial number. For example, if an
international dialing prefix is used often,
program the prefix in any Speed Dial
Bin. Then in the another Speed Dial Bin,
program the first Bin number + the
number to dial. When the second Speed
Dial Bin is activated, Strata CTX first
retrieves and dials the international
dialing prefix from the first Bin location,
then adds the numbers to dial.
1. From the Program Menu, click Station >
Speed Dial. The Station Speed Dial
screen displays (shown right).
2. Enter Program 516 data.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Primary DN Select the PDN assigned the speed dial number.
01 Speed Dial Bin Enter the station speed dial bin number. A station can have up to 100 speed dial bins.
Possible values: 00~99 (default = no value)
Note Adding bin numbers here will automatically increment the number of speed dial
bins available to the station in increments of 10 speed dial bins. The number of
speed dial bins available to the station can also be assigned and displayed in
Prg 200, 35 - Station SpDial Bins. Example: If bin number 50 is entered here,
50 speed dial bins will automatically be assigned to the station and will also be
displayed in Prg 200, 35.
Station
Station Speed Dial Table View
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-35
Station
Station Speed Dial Table View
Station Speed Dial Table View shows
the entire set up for all speed dial
numbers.
➤To access the System Speed Dial
Table View
➤Select System > System Speed
Dial Table View.
See “Table Views” on page 2-6 for
table functionality.
02 Number This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, # and Pauses (default = no value)
To enter pauses enter Px, where x equals 0~9 (seconds), which is the length of the
pause, 0=10 seconds.
Notes
•If the number being entered exceeds the 32 digits, the next speed dial location will
automatically be appended to create longer numbers.
•Also another speed dial bin can be nested within another bin for dialing common
numbers. If speed dial bin 100 has long distance access digits 1010321, these digits
can be nested in to other speed dial bins by using *100 as the first digits of the other
bins. Example putting *10017145563425 into speed dial bin 150 would cause
SD150 to dial the access digits plus the number 10132117145563425.
•If you are programming from the Telephone the digits * and # have a special
meaning when programming speed dial numbers. The # digit indicates the end of
entry and * is an escape character. To dial the digits * or # as part of the number;
enter ** or *#. To enter pauses enter *0~*9. The second digit represents the number
of seconds for the pause function.
03 Name Enter the LCD Name that displays on LCD dial directories.
Possible values: Up to 8 characters (default = no value)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Station
PDN Table View
5-36 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
PDN Table View
This screen shows the entire
list of available PDNs
(shown right).
➤To access the Station Speed
PDN Table View
Select Station > PDN Table
View.
Note See “Table Views” on
page 2-6 for table
functionality.
ISDN
The following programs assign ISDN data to stations.
Program Number(s): 202 and 217
202 ISDN BRI Station
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
This command assigns ISDN BRI
stations.
1. Complete the “ISDN BRI Station
Record Sheets” on
page D-19.From the Program
Menu, click Station > ISDN >
Basic. The ISDN Basic Station
Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
2. Enter a Primary DN for an
existing record
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed DN’s.
• Create – Assign a new Primary
DN with custom BRI Station
settings.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy to make a new DN assignment with BRI
Station settings copied from the DN entered in the Primary DN field.
• Delete – Enter a ISDN Primary DN to delete and click OK.
Station
ISDN
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-37
Station
• Change DN – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN to assign a new DN to the
ISDN BRI Station.
3. Set up ISDN BRI Station using the Program Detail table below.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Primary DN Enter the PDN. When a required DN is not programmed, the DN is regarded as a new
station. The System assigns default data as defined in 217 ISDN Station Data.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
01 PDN Equipment No. Enter the BRI equipment number assigned to this PDN. This is the cabinet, slot, and
circuit number of the RBUU/RBUS or RBSU/RBSS interface PCB to which the the PDN
is, or should be, assigned. Enter data as xxyyzz:
Example: If the PDN should be a assigned to a BDKU in cabinet 5, slot 2, circuit 3; enter
050203.
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
02 ISDN Channel
Group Enter the ISDN Channel Group number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic)1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 1)
03 ISDN Protocol Select the ISDN protocol. Only Bearer capabilities specified by the protocol can be
entered in this field. The Initial value for ISDN Protocol corresponds to information set in
the hardware level.
Possible values: Nat’l ISDN (default), ETSI, TTC or Nat’l ISDN Nortel
Note National ISDN = North America, ETSI = England and TTC = Japan.
04 Type Connection Select connection type.
Possible values: Point to point (default) or Point to Multi-point
05 BRI Station COS
•Day1 COS
•Day2 COS
•Night COS
Select the BRI Station COS assignments.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
06 BRI Station DRL
•Day1 DRL
•Day2 DRL
•Night DRL
Select the BRI Station DRL assignments.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
07 BRI Station FRL
•Day1 FRL
•Day2 FRL
•Night FRL
Select the BRI Station FRL assignments.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
Station
ISDN
5-38 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
09 BRI Station QPL
•Day1 QPL
•Day2 QPL
•Night QPL
Select the BRI Station QPL assignments.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
08 LCR Group Select the LCR Group number to which this BRI Station belongs.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
10 Speech Capability Enable speech capability. See Table 5-5 on page 39.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
11 3.1 KHz Audio Enable 3.1 KHz audio capability. See Table 5-5 on page 39.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
12 7 KHz Audio Enable 7 KHz audio capability. See Table 5-5 on page 39.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
13 64Kbps
Unrestricted Enable one of the unrestricted capabilities. See Table 5-5 on page 39.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
14 56Kbps
Unrestricted
15 2 x 64Kbps
Unrestricted
16 B Channel
Selection Select originating B Channel method.
Possible values:
•Exclusive – (default) Channel is indicated, and no alternative is acceptable.
•Preferred – Channel is indicated, and any alternative is acceptable.
•Any Channel – Channel is indicated, and any channel is acceptable.
17 Idle B Channel
Selection Choose Idle B Channel selection method.
Possible values: Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or Backward
Terminal (default)
•Select Forward Cyclic (from lowest to highest number of B-channel).
•Select Backward Cyclic (from highest to lowest number of B-channel).
•Select Forward Terminal for the lowest number B-channel (The Low-Low B-channel
selection).
•Select Backward Terminal for the highest number B-channel. (The High-High B-
channel selection)
18 Interdigit Timer 1 Select the Interdigit timer value, to time-out during dial tone.
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 15)
19 Interdigit Timer 2 Interdigit timer value to time-out after the first digit is dialed.
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 5)
20 CESID Enter the CESID value for 911 calls.
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Station
ISDN
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-39
Station
21 Number Voice Calls
Allowed Select the Number of Voice Calls Allowed. If a selection is not made, previously written
data in this field is erased.
Possible values: One or Two (default)
Note If One is selected, the other channel is reserved for Data.
22 Service Tone
Permission Enable Service Tone Permission. Select Disable for modems and faxes.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
23 TGAC Override Enable TGAC Override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
24 Change System
Speed Enable System Speed Dial changing permission.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
25 Network COS Enter the Network COS value. If a selection is not made, previously written data in this
field is erased.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
26 DN2~32 DN8 Add a DN to this BRI Station. When a DN is entered into one of the seven available
fields, default data as defined in 217 ISDN Station Data is applied to the DNs. If a
selection is not made, any previously written data in this field is erased.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
33 Auto OCA Enable OCA to occur automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows calls
to be received.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
34 Originate OCA Enable this station to make OCA calls to other stations.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
38 MW/DND Enable: When this station goes off hook, the station will receive stuttered dial tone when
it has a message waiting indication; and the station will receive a busy tone burst before
dial tone when in the DND mode.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a message waiting or
when it is in the DND mode.
39 Tenant Number Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned. (This feature is
available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and higher.)
Possible values: 1~8
Table 5-5 BRI Bearer Capability of ISDN
Bearer Services Bellcore
Nat’l ISDN ETSI TTC
Circuit Mode
Speech X X X
3.1kHz Audio X X X
7kHz Audio X X
Unrestricted Digital Information
64 kbps X X X
Rate adaptation
from 56 kbps X
2x64 X X
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Station
ISDN
5-40 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
217 ISDN Station Data
Prerequisite Program: 202 page 5-36
Set ISDN Station parameters to define ISDN capabilities.
1. Complete the “ISDN Station Data
Record Sheet” on page D-20.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > ISDN > Station Data.
The ISDN Individual Station Data
Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter a Primary DN for an
existing record
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed Hunt Groups.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy to make a new DN assignment with BRI
Station settings copied from the DN entered in the Primary DN field.
4. Set up ISDN Station Data using the Program Detail table below.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Primary DN Enter Primary DN.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
01 Station Name Enter a name for this station.
Possible values: Up to 9 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Dial Method Select the audible tone when dialing.
Possible values: Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or No Tone
03 System Call Forward Select the System Call Forward assignment for this station.
Possible values: 0~32 (default = 0)
04 CF Password Protect the System Call Forward settings by creating a password.
Possible values: Up to 4 digits (default = no value)
05 Door Phone Override
DND Enable the Door Phone ringing indicator to override Do Not Disturb.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
06 Emerg Call Group Select this station’s emergency call group.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
07 COS Override Code Enable Class of Service override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
08 Display DN Enter the DN to be displayed on the LCD.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
Station
Setup Wizards
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-41
Station
Setup Wizards
There are three Station setup wizards—PDN Range, Multiple DN, and VMID Range. Each of them are
described below.
PDN Range Setup Wizard
This wizard is a programming time saver that reduces the time it takes to create or change Primary
Directory Numbers (PDN) and assign them to phones. The wizard guides the user to create a range of
desired PDNs to be assigned to a range of available station ports.
1. Select Station > Setup Wizard > PDN
Range.
Review the instructions that display
on the Wizard screen (shown right).
09 VMID Code SMDI Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PDN calls voice
mail; or, when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number is
prefixed by codes in Program 579, 11~16).
Possible values: Digits 0~9, and #, up to 10 characters
(default = no value).
Note This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF
tones on direct and forwarded calls to the PDN. See Program 580 for
SMDI or DTMF choice.
12 Name Display Whether to put the user name in the list display.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Station
Setup Wizards
5-42 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
2. Click Start. The Primary DN Setup
Wizard screen displays (shown right).
3. Select the appropriate radio buttons
and enter the data in the other fields.
• Range of associated PDN
equipment.
• Selection to overwrite the existing
PDNs.
4. (Optional) Click Number Plan button
to access Numbering Plan page.
5. (Optional) Click PDN Table View
button to view existing PDN Table.
6. Press Start to create PDNs.
The screen containing the PDN assignments
(shown right) displays.
Note The first available equipment number
(card slot/circuit) is automatically used to
create the first PDN, etc.
Multiple DN Assignment Wizard
Important!
•To avoid conflicts on new installations, you should use this wizard immediately after establishing and
assigning Primary DNs on telephones, especially before you program key strips or hunt groups.
•The wizard can be used to assign Multiple DNs to new stations when adding new station cards.
This wizard substantially reduces CTX installation time when you need multiple DN buttons on
telephones. Multiple DNs are required in most CTX installations.
The wizard automatically programs multiple buttons onto telephones to operate as PDN buttons on the
telephones. This wizard automatically groups the telephone’s PDN button with the Phantom Directory
Number (PhDN) buttons so they all operate like PDNs on the telephone—this simulates Strata DK
multiple PDN operation. You will not have to set Call forward or VMID codes for the PhDNs since they
automatically assume the PDN Call Forward and VMID code assignments.
On these screens you need to specify how many button appearances should appear as PDNs on each
telephone or range of telephones (the number of buttons including the PDNs plus the PhDNs). You should
also specify the starting PhDN and Hunt Group number to be used to set up the multiple DN groups.
Station
Setup Wizards
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-43
Station
Important! Make sure you know exactly how many multiple DNs should be on each telephone before
using this wizard. After running the Multiple DN wizard, deletions or additions to Multiple
DN assignments must be made manually, one-by-one, for each telephone PhDN button and
Multiple DN hunt group. The wizard does not support changing existing Multiple DN
assignments in this version of CTX WinAdmin.
1. Click Station > SetUp
Wizard > Multiple DN.
The Multiple DN
Assignment Wizard
screen displays (shown
right).
2. Click Start. CTX
WinAdmin automatically
assigns the:
• Appropriate number of PhDN buttons onto the telephone. These operate as PDN buttons on the
telephone. PhDNs are assigned in sequence starting with the first button above the PDN.
CAUTION! If other buttons were installed in a PhDN location they will be overwritten.
• Appropriate telephone as the owner of the PhDN buttons, starting with the PhDN you specified.
• PDN of the telephone as the name of the PhDN buttons.
• PDN and appropriate PhDNs of the telephone to the appropriate Multiple DN Hunt group, starting
with Hunt group number you specified.
The screen shown at right displays.
3. Based on your requirements, enter the
necessary fields.
Note The example on this screen shows that
five buttons were entered. This assigns
the PDN plus four PhDNs on the
telephone starting with Key 1~Key 5.
4. Click Start to generate the request.
Station
Setup Wizards
5-44 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
The screen changes to the one shown at
right.
Important!
•This is a report that provides the Multiple
DN assignments that will be sent to the
CTX.
•Ensure that this information is correct
before you click Continue. You can change
the assignments by clicking Back.
5. Click Continue to generate results onto
CTX database.
Note To modify these entries later, you will
have to use the appropriate individual program assignments.
6. Review the configuration screen. This is how
the multiple DNs are assigned in the CTX after
the wizard is done.
7. (Optional) To print the configuration results,
click Print.
8. To exit, select a command from the Program
pane.
VMID Range
This wizard reduces CTX programming time when you need to assign Voice Mail ID (VMID) codes. The
wizard will automatically assign specified VMID codes for a range of Primary DNs, PhDNs, and/or Pilot
DNs.
Specify the range of PDNs, PhDNs, or Pilot DNs that should have VMID code assignments. Then select
the VMID code assignment method.
The three code assignment methods are to assign the VMID to:
• Be the same number as the appropriate DN (PDN, PhDN or Pilot DN).
• Start at specific number and increment by one for each consecutive DN.
• Be the same number for all DNs.
In addition to the above assignments, specific digits including * and # can be added to the front and/or back
of each VMID. This is not for Stratagy codes 91, 92, etc., they are set in Program 579.
You can program a range of VMID codes for PDNs, PhDNs and/or Pilot DNs.
Station
Setup Wizards
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 5-45
Station
1. Select Station > Setup Wizard > VMID Range.
2. The VMID Range Setup
Wizard displays (shown at
right).
3. Click Start. The input screen of the VMID Range
Setup Wizard displays (shown at right).
4. Select the type of VMID that should be assigned
to the PDN, PhDN or Pilot DN. Then select the
assignment method and the digits, if any, to be
added to front and/or end of each VMID.
Note DN range is supported. VMID prefix and/or
suffix are supported.
5. Click Start to submit the settings to the CTX
database.
The result requested displays on the
screen shown at right.
6. (Optional) Click Print to save a hard copy
of the VMID assignment.
Station
Setup Wizards
5-46 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-1
Trunks
Trunks 6
This chapter provides trunk programming information for Strata CTX.
304 Incoming Line Group
Program Number(s): 304
Incoming Line Groups (ILG) is a line selection feature which enables the use of external trunk or private
line groups for incoming service.
1. Complete the “ILG Record Sheet”
on page D-21.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ILG. The Trunk ILG
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter an ILG number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed ILGs.
• Create – Assign a new ILG
with default settings.
• Copy – Enter an ILG in the
Group Number field and click
Copy to make a new ILG
assignment with settings copied from the ILG entered in Group Number.
• Delete – Delete an ILG.
4. Enter Program 304 data.
5. Click Submit.
Trunks
304 Incoming Line Group
6-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
304 Incoming Line Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment is used to configure ILGs only, OLGs are configured in the Outgoing Line Group
Assignment 306. The same line can be placed in an ILG and OLG.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Group Number Enter the group number of the line group that should be configured.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
01 Group Type Select the ILG Type.
Possible values: Analog (default) or ISDN
02 Trunk Type Select the Trunk Type.
Possible values: CO (default) or Tie
03 Service Type Select CO Trunk Service Type.
Possible values: DID or DIT (default)
04 Private Service Type Select the Tie Trunk Service Type. This field is required when Trunk Type is set to
Tie.
Possible values: Standard (default) or QSIG
05 GCO Key Number Select ILG GCO Key Group for DIT mode (see Trunk Type above). The same GCO
cannot belong to different ILGs.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)
06 Pooled Key Number Select ILG Pooled Line Key Group for DIT mode. The same Pooled Line Group
cannot belong to different ILGs.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)
07 COS Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
08 DRL Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
09 FRL Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
10 QPL Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
11 DID Digits Select number of DID digits received from CO.
Possible values: 0~7 (default = 0)
12 Speech/3.1 KHz Select Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.
Possible values: Audio (default) or Speech
13 Ringing Timer Delay 1 Select time to ring the Delay 1 destination.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 12)
Trunks
304 Incoming Line Group
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-3
Trunks
14 Ringing Timer Delay 2 Select time to ring the Delay 2 destination.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 24)
15 Interdigit 1 Timer Select Interdigit 1 timer value.
Possible values: 1~180 sec. (default = 15)
16 Interdigit 2 Timer Select Interdigit 2 timer value.
Possible values: 1~180 sec. (default = 5)
17 Auto Camp-on Select in box to toggle Automatic Camp-on.
Possible values: On (default) or Off
18 Calling Number ID Select Calling Number Identification source.
Possible values: User Provided (default) or Network Provided
19 Intercept Enable Intercept. A call is transferred to a special destination called intercept
position when the destination of a trunk line call is not determined with DID, DIT or
DISA. Intercept is also activated when the destination is determined, but the call
cannot be terminated due to a defect or an incorrect number. If the system has a
simplified attendant console, the Attendant Console is usually specified to terminate
the call. This function ensures termination of a trunk line call.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
20 Send Dial Tone Enable Send Dial Tone.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
21 TGAC Override Enable Trunk Group Access Code (TGAC) override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
22 Network COS Enter the Network COS number.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
23 LCR Group Enter the LCR Group number. Calls from this ILG cannot tandem if this field is not
entered.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
24 Change COS Override
Code Enable authority to change COS Override Code.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
25 Register Speed Dial
Codes Enable authority to create system speed dial codes.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
26 Originator Invoke OCA Enable authority for the originator of a call to invoke OCA when encountering a
busy station.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
27 Senderized Tone Mode Send DTMF tones as a complete number rather than digit-by-digit.
Possible values: Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or Silence
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
306 Outgoing Line Groups
6-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
306 Outgoing Line Groups
Prerequisite Program: None
OLG is a line selection feature which enables the use of external trunk or private line groups for outgoing
service. Assign and configure up to 128 OLGs (the same line can be placed in an OLG and an ILG).
1. Complete the “OLG Record Sheet”
on page D-22.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > OLG. The Trunk Outgoing
Line Groups (OLG) screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter an OLG number in the Group
Number field for an existing record
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed OLGs.
• Create – Assign a new OLG
with default settings.
• Copy – Enter an OLG in the Group Number field and click Copy to make a new OLG assignment
with settings copied from the OLG entered in Group Number.
• Delete – Delete an OLG.
4. Enter Program 306 data.
5. Enter Program 531. See “Destination Restriction Guide Page” on page 9-10 for details.
6. Enter Program 514. See “514 SMDR for OLG Assignment” on page 9-65 for details.
7. Click Submit.
28 Emergency Call Group Used to enable E911 calling across a QSIG network. The QSIG ILG is assigned to
an Emergency Call Group in the same way a station is in Program 200 FB17.
Without this assignment, the call will not attempt to complete to one of the trunks in
the Emergency Group and will result in an abandoned call. See Program 550
Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group Assignment.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
29 Tenant Number Enter the Tenant number to which this DID number should be assigned. (This
feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and
higher.)
Possible values: 1~8.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Group Number Enter the OLG Group number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
306 Outgoing Line Groups
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-5
Trunks
01 Group Type Select the OLG Type.
Possible values: Analog (default) or ISDN
02 Trunk Type Select the Trunk Type.
Possible values: CO (default) or Tie
03 Private Service Type TIE Trunk Service Type.
Possible values: Standard (default) or QSIG
04 GCO Key1 Number Select the first GCO Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)
06 Pooled Key1 Number Select first Pooled Line Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)
07 Pooled Key2 Number Select second Pooled Line Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)
08 COS Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
09 FRL Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
10 QPL Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
11 Speech/3.1 KHz Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.
Possible values: Audio (default) or Speech
12 MOH Source Select MOH Source.
Possible values: Silence, External1~15 (default = External1)
13 Account Codes Enable Trunk forced Account Codes.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
14 Destination
Restriction Enable Destination Restriction.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
15 Credit Cart Calling Enable Credit Card Calling.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
16 Send CESID Enable CESID sending.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
17 QSIG Sending Type Digit sending Mode for QSIG only.
Possible values: Cut Through or Senderized (default = Cut through)
18 Network COS Select Network COS number.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
6-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
300 Trunk Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
Assigns an analog or T1 trunk (line) and its parameters to the system. Click on each tab to navigate through
the programs. The trunks assigned to the equipment display on the left of the screen. The first column
displays the trunks used and the second column displays the equipment. You can also sort based on trunks
and equipment.
Important! You must have Internet Explorer (IE) 6.0 on your PC for the sort to work correctly. If you
have IE 5.0, you can upgrade to IE 6.0 using the Strata CTX CD-ROM. IE 6.0 does not auto-
install from the CD-ROM; run ie6setup.exe from the IE 6.0 folder on the CD-ROM.
1. Complete the “Trunk Assignment
Record Sheet” on page D-23.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > Assignment. The Trunk
Basic Assignments screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter a Trunk Number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed Trunks.
• Create – Assign a new Trunk
with default settings.
• Copy – Enter an Trunk Number and click Copy to make a new Trunk assignment with settings
copied from the OLG entered in Group Number.
• Delete – Delete an Trunk.
4. Enter Trunk Assignment Data.
5. Click Submit.
6. Click the Go Timer/DIT link to view Programs 308 and 310 (see “308 Trunk Timer” on page 6-9 for
details).
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Line Number Enter the Line Number.
Possible values: 1~64 (CTX100), 1~96 (CTX670 Basic),
1~264 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-7
Trunks
01 Line Equipment No. Enter the line equipment number as xxyyzz. Equipment numbers are required when
assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be used to display the equipment
location of existing trunks.
Example: If the trunk should be connected to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2,
circuit 3, enter 050203.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~08
...or zz = T1 Circuit 01~24 (CTX670).
xx = Cabinet 01; yy = Slot 01~8; zz = Circuit 01~08 (CTX100)
(default = no value).
Cabinet numbers:
•CTX100 – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•CTX670 – Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•CTX100 – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
•CTX670 – Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
02 Incoming Line Group Assign the trunk to Incoming Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be members of
one incoming and one outgoing line group.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)
03 Outgoing Line Group Assign the trunk to Outgoing Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be members of
one incoming and one outgoing line group.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)
04 Dial Mode Enter the Dial Mode.
Possible values: DP 10PPS, DP 20PPS or DTMF (default)
•DP 10 PPS = Rotary Dial, 10 PPS
•DP 20 PPS = Rotary Dial, 20 PPS
05 Signaling Enter the signalling type.
Possible values: DID, Loop (default), Ground, Tie, LP (Japan), SR (Japan) or ACU
(UK)
06 Start Method Enter the Start Method. This setting defines the start protocol method used between
the PSTN and this trunk. For DID/Tie trunks.
Possible values: Immediate Start (default), Timing Start or Wink Start
07 Release Supervision Enable Release Supervision from the CO.
Possible values: Received or Not Received (default)
08 Answer Supervision Enable Answer Supervision from the CO.
Possible values: Received or Not Received (default)
09 Trunk Name Enter the trunk name.
Possible values: Up to 14 ASCII characters (default = no value)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
6-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
313 Caller ID
Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-6
This program assigns Caller ID circuits to the CO Line to which the circuit is connected. The ANI, DNIS,
DID formats for TI and analog DID CO Lines are also defined.
1. Complete the “Caller ID
Assignment Record Sheet” on
page D-24.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > Assignment, the click the
Caller ID tab. The Trunk Caller ID
Assignments screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter a Trunk Number in Trunk
Index for an existing record or click
one of the following buttons:
•List – to view a summary list of
programmed Trunks.
• Copy – Enter the Trunk Number
in the Trunk Number field and click Copy to make new Caller ID trunk numbers.
4. Enter Caller ID Assignment data.
5. Click Submit.
10 External Ring Repeat This option determines what ring signal is sent to telephones when a line rings the
telephone. Select CO Ring Repeat (“Supplied” in older versions of software) to use
the ring signal supplied by the CO or Centrex line. Select CTX Ring (“Not Supplied”
in older versions of software) to use the standard ring signal supplied by the CTX.
Important! CTX Ring must be used on all DISA lines for proper ringing operation.
Possible values: CO Ring Repeat (default), CTX Ring
11 DTMF Back Tone Select DTMF Back Tone type.
Possible values: Padded, DTMF Tone (default) or No Tone
12 Hunt Order Change the trunk hunting order sequence for this Trunk.
Possible values: 1~264 or Last One (default = 1)
13 Immediate Cut-Through This option should be enabled on a line only if the talk-path must be established
immediately after seizing a selected outgoing line.
Example, a line connected to a Central Office Ringdown circuit.
Possible values: Enable, Disable (default)
CAUTION! This option will bypass Destination Restriction and E911
digit analysis. Do not enable this option on a line where
these functions are required.
This option is available only on ground and loop, analog or T1 circuits. It should not
be enabled for Tie, DID, ISDN and QSIG lines.
Available with CTX R1.02, MA217 and above software.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-9
Trunks
308 Trunk Timer
Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-6
These commands assign Trunk timers.
1. Complete the “Trunk Timer/DIT
Record Sheet” on page D-27.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > Assignment, then click the
Timer tab. The Trunk Timer and
DIT Assignments screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter Trunk equipment number
field. Enter Program 308 data.
•List – to view a summary list of
programmed Trunks timers.
• Copy – to copy to trunk timer
ports.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunk Number Enter the Trunk Number.
Possible values: 1~64 (CTX100), 1~96 (CTX670 Basic),
1~264 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Signaling Method Specify the format for the interface being used.
Possible values: Nothing (default), ANI/DNIS-MCI, ANI/DNIS-Sprint or CLASS
(Caller ID)
02 Signaling Contents Specify the contents of the ANI/DNIS format.
Possible values: ANI and DNIS, ANI only, DNIS only or DID only (default = no
value).
03 CLASS Equipment No. If the CLASS type is chosen, the trunk must be assigned to a Caller ID circuit. Enter
the RCIU/RCIS equipment number as xxyyzz.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01(CTX100); 01~02 (CTX670 Basic); 01~07
(CTX670 Exp.)
yy = Slot 01~08 (CTX100); 01~10 (CTX670)
zz = Circuit 01~08
Notes
•CLASS equipment numbers are required when assigning a trunk to a RCIU/
RCIS circuit.
•It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing caller ID circuit
to trunk assignments. Example: If the trunk should be connected to a caller ID
circuit (RCIU/RCIS) in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
6-10 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Line No. Enter the trunk equipment number.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~08 or
zz=T1 Circuit 01~24 (CTX670)
xx = Cabinet 01; yy = Slot 01~08; zz = Circuit 01~24 (CTX100)
(default = no value)
Note Equipment numbers are required when assigning a new trunk to the system. It
can also be used to display the equipment location of existing trunks.
01 Auto Release Select the Automatic Release timing.
Possible values: Disable, Detect 95ms or Detect 450ms (default)
Note Select Disable if the CO does not send the automatic release signal to the loop
start trunk.
02 Short Flash Select Short Flash Time
Possible values: 0~15, where 1 = 100msec. (default = 5, which is .5 seconds)
0 = no flash, 1 = .1 sec., 2 = .2 sec. – 15=1.5 sec. 5 is the most
common duration of a hook flash signal
When a telephone initiates the short flash signal to the CO line it is connected to (using
the short Flash feature button or access code #450) the duration of a short flash is
determined by this command. Normally this signal is used to hook flash a centrex line.
The short flash range is 0 to 1.5 seconds in increments of 0.1 seconds.
03 Long Flash Select Long Flash Time.
Possible values: 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30, where 5 = .5 seconds. (default = 5)
When a telephone initiates the long flash signal to the CO line it is connected to (using
the Long Flash feature button or access code #451) the duration of a long flash is
determined by this command. Normally this signal is used to disconnect the line. The
long flash range is 0 to 3 seconds in increments of 0.5 seconds. Possible values: 0=no
flash, 5=.5 sec., 10=1sec. 15=1.5 sec., 20=2 sec., 25=2.5 sec., 30=3 sec.
04 Pause after Flash Pause time after flash: After a flash signal is sent to a CO line, this timer determines
when the line will start to send the dialed digits to the other end.
Possible values: 0~5, 0 = immediately sent, and 1sec.delay to 5sec.delay
(default = 1 second delay before sending digits)
05 Response
Information The response timer is for analog DID/TIE lines that have the “start method” set for
“Timing” in Prg300-06. After a line is seized this timer determines when the line will start
to send the dialed digits to the other end.
Possible values: 0=immediatly sent, and 50msec.delay to 500msec.delay
(default = 500mseconds delay before sending digits)
Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-11
Trunks
310 DIT Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-6
This program assigns DIT Number Analysis Table for DIT trunks. DIT trunks are ground and loop start
trunks.
1. Complete the “Trunk Timer/DIT
Record Sheet” on page D-27.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > Assignment, then click the
DIT tab. The DIT Assignments
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter Trunk equipment number
field. Enter Program 310 data.
•List – to view a summary list of
programmed Trunks timers.
• Copy – to copy to trunk timer
ports.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Line No. Enter the trunk equipment number. Equipment numbers are required when
assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be used to display the equipment
location of existing trunks.
Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3,
enter 050203.
Possible values: xx = cabinet 01~07; yy =slot 01~10; zz = circuit 01~08 or Channel
01~24 (CTX670).
xx = cabinet 01; yy =slot 01~08; zz = circuit 01~24 or Channel
(CTX100)
(default = no value).
Cabinet numbers:
•CTX100 – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•CTX670 – Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•CTX100 – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
•CTX670 – Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
6-12 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
01 Day1 Destination Type
02 Day2 Destination Type
03 Night Destination Type
Select Destination Type for each.
Possible values: : No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem, or Night
Bell
•No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
•Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code
defined in the “Destination Digits” assignment
•DSIA – assigns the line to ring in as a DSIA call. DSIA dial tone will be returned
to the caller.
•Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CTX
processor. Used to call into the system with a CTX WinAdmin PC and modem.
•Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3-
sec.open)
Day1 Destination Digits
Day2 Destination Digits
Night Destination Digits
Enter Destination, Directory Number or Access Codes for each, only if Dialing Digits
is selected as Destination Type.
•If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type, enter the Directory Number that the line
should ring.If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is
the external Page group number.
•If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new page access
code as the leading digits.
•Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route
incoming calls back out to a public or private network number.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
04 MOH Source Select the MOH source for Analog DIT Trunk. The Scroll key must be used to select
MOH sources indicated by 10 or higher.
Possible values: External1~15 (default = External1)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-13
Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing
This command assigns DID number analysis tables to ILGs.
1. Complete the “DID Assignment
Record Sheet” on page D-25.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > DID. The Trunk DID
Assignments screen displays
(shown right).
3. Select an ILG Number.
4. Enter a DID Number in the 01 DID
Number field
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a list of programmed
DIDs.
• Create – Make a new DID assignment using default settings.
• Copy – Enter a DID Number in 01 DID Number and click Copy to make a new DID assignment
with settings copied from the DID Number entered.
• Delete – Delete a DID.
5. Enter DID Assignment data.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
ILG Group Number Select the ILG number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
01 DID Number Enter a DID number.
Possible values: 1~7 digits may include wild card “?” where “?” = 0~9 (default = no
value).
02 MOH Source Set Music On Hold for Analog ISDN DID Trunk
Possible values: Quiet Tone or External 1~15 (default = External 1)
03 GCO Key Group GCO Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)
04 Pool Key Group Pooled Line Key Group
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)
05 Audio Day1 Dst Type
06 Audio Day2 Dst Type
07 Audio Night Dst Type
Select the Destination Type for Audio/Speech calls
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night Bell
Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing
6-14 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Audio Day1 Destination
Audio Day2 Destination
Audio Night Destination
Enter the Destination Directory Number or Access Code.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type enter the Directory Number that the line should
ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is the external
Page group number. If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new
page access code as the leading digits.
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route incoming
calls back out to a public or private network number.
08 Data Day1 Dst Type
09 Data Day2 Dst Type
10 Data Night Dst Type
Select the Destination Type for data calls
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night Bell
Data Day1 Destination
Data Day2 Destination
Data Night Destination
Enter the Destination Directory Number or Access Code.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type enter the Directory Number that the line should
ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is the external
Page group number. If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new
page access code as the leading digits.
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route incoming
calls back out to a public or private network number.
11 DNIS VMID Code Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
Note This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in Program 580, 01. This
code will be replaced, after voice mail answers, by the DTMF code set in
Program 309, 15 DID/DNIS DTMF VMID code - if programmed; therefore, if
using Program 309, 15 code, this VMID code is not necessary.
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly to
voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail before it is
answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that forwards
to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS number or the forwarding DN’s mail
box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN’s VMID mail box.
This Voice Mail box number is added to SMDI packets direct and forwarded DID\DNIS
calls to voice mail as explained above.
12 DNIS Name Enter DNIS name. DNIS names can be assigned from the CTX WinAdmin (not from
programming phones).
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-15
Trunks
15 VM Dial Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Possible values: Digits 0~9, and #. For a pause enter Px, where x=0~9 (seconds),
up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly to
voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail before it is
answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that forwards
to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS number or the forwarding DN’s mail
box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN’s VMID mail box.
This voice mail box number is sent to the VM port, as DTMF digits, after the VM port
answers a DID/DNIS call as explained above. These digits are sent to the VM port if the
CTX is set for SMDI or DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.
16 Tenant Number Enter the Tenant number to which this DID number should be assigned.
Possible values: 1~8.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments
6-16 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
318 DID Intercept Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 304 page 6-2
This command assigns the DID Routing table when DID numbers are undefined or not received.
1. Complete the “DID Intercept
Assignment Record Sheet” on
page D-26.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > DID Intercept.The DID
Intercept Assignments screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter an ILG Number
...or click List to view a summary
list of programmed ILGs.
4. Enter DID Type in the 01 Type field.
5. Enter DID Intercept Assignment
data.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
ILG Number Enter ILG number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp), (default = no value
01 Type Select Routing Type.
Possible values: No DID (default) or Not Determined
02 MOH Source Select Music On Hold
Possible values: External 1~15 (default = External 1)
03 Group CO Destination GCO Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp), (default = 0)
04 Pooled Line Group POOL Line Key Group Number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp), (default = 0)
Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-17
Trunks
05 Audio Day1 Dst Type
06 Audio Day2 Dst Type
07 Audio Night Dst Type
Select the Audio/Speech call Day1 destination type.
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
•No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
•Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code
defined in the “Destination Digits” assignment
•DSIA – assigns the line to ring in as a DSIA call. DSIA dial tone will be returned
to the caller.
•Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CTX
processor. Used to call into the system with a CTX WinAdmin PC and modem.
•Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3-
sec.open)
Audio Day1 Dst. DN
Audio Day2 Dst DN
Audio Night Dst DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
destination type is “Dialing Digits”
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
08 Data Day1 Dst Type
09 Data Day2 Dst Type
10 Data Night Dst Type
Select the data call Day1 destination type
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
•No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
•Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code
defined in the “Destination Digits” assignment
•DSIA – assigns the line to ring in as a DSIA call. DSIA dial tone will be returned
to the caller.
•Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CTX
processor. Used to call into the system with a CTX WinAdmin PC and modem.
•Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3-
sec.open)
Data Day1 Dst DN
Data Day2 Dst DN
Data Night Dst DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
destination type is “Dialing Digits”
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
11 DID/DNIS No. VMID Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value).
Note This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in Program 580, 01.
This code will be replaced, after voice mail answers, by the DTMF code set
in Program 318, 15 DID/DNIS DTMF VMID code - if programmed;
therefore, if using Program 318, 15 code, this VMID code is not necessary.
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly
to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail
before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that
forwards to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS number, or the
forwarding DN's mail box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This Voice Mail box number is added to SMDI packets of direct and forwarded
DID\DNIS calls to voice mail as explained above.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments
6-18 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
12 DID/DNIS Name Enter DNIS Name. DNIS names can be assigned from the CTX WinAdmin (not from
programming phones).
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
15 DID/DNIS No. DTMF
VMID Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Possible values: Digits 0~9, * and #. For a pause enter Px, where x=0~9
(seconds), up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly
to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail
before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that
forwards to voice mail, the mail box number of the DID/DNIS number or the
forwarding DN’s mail box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN’s VMID mail box.
This voice mail box number is sent to the VM port, as DTMF digits, after the VM port
answers a DID/DNIS call as explained above. These digits are sent to the VM port if
the CTX is set for SMDI or DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
Service
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-19
Trunks
Service
Program Number(s): 311 and 319
These commands assign Assigns Direct Inward System Access (DISA) properties.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > Service. The Trunk
Services screen displays (shown
right).
2. Enter Program 311 data.
3. Enter Program 319 data.
4. Click Submit.
311 DISA Security Code
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns DISA parameters.
319 Intercept Treatment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns Intercept positions for Strata CTX Day/Night schedules. Intercept positions are
used when the destination of a trunk line call is not determined with DID or DIT.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 DISA Enabled Enable DISA security code.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
02 DISA Code Enter DISA security code.
Possible values: Up to 15 digits (default = no value)
03 Response Timer Enter the time, in seconds, for Strata CTX to respond to a call.
Possible values: 0~30 (default = 5)
04 Idle Timer Enter the time in seconds to wait for idle DTMF.
Possible values: 0~60 (default = 10)
05 Tie Line Access Enable this feature to allow DISA callers to access Tie lines when they call into the
system. (This feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin
R2.2G.0 and higher.)
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Tenant Number Select the Tenant number for which the Intercept Destinations should be
assigned.
Possible values: 1~8.
Trunks
315 T1 Trunk Card
6-20 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
315 T1 Trunk Card
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
This command assigns T1 Trunk Card Data to the system.
1. Complete the “Trunk Timer/DIT
Record Sheet” on page D-27.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > T1. The T1 Trunk Card
Data Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter T1 card location in Shelf/Slot
field (xxyy). The selected slot
requires a DTU Card.
• xx = Cabinet 01~07
• yy = Slot 01~10
...or click the following buttons:
•List – to view a summary list of programmed Trunks.
• Copy – to T1 trunk equipment.
4. Enter values for Program 315.
5. Click Submit.
01 Day1 Destination Type
02 Day2 Destination Type
03 Night Destination Type
Select Destination Type for each.
Possible values: None (default), Dialing Digits or Night Bell
Day1 Destination
Day2 Destination
Night Destination
Enter Destination for each.
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
•To intercept with a DN use 0~99999
•To intercept with a Network DN use 1~32
•To intercept with Dial Digits Paging 1~16
FIELD DESCRIPTION
T1 Equipment
Location Enter the RDTU PCB equipment location.
Possible values: xx = cabinet 01; yy =slot 03, 05, or 07
...or xx = cabinet 02~07; yy =slot 01, 03, or 05
Cabinet – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet (CTX100).
Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet (CTX670).
Slot – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots
(CTX100).
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots
(CTX670)
(default = no value)
01 Coding Format Select the Coding Format.
Possible values: None, PZC, B8ZS (default) or ZCS
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
DID/DNIS Table View
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-21
Trunks
DID/DNIS Table View
This screen provides the DID/DNIS Table View on the DID command page.
Important! To avoid any errors, you must first set the digit length under Trunk > ILG.
➤To access DID/DNIS table view
➤Click Trunk > DID/DNIS
Table View
...or use Program 309.
See “Table Views” on page 2-6
for table functionality.
Note You can navigate this
table using the ILG and
the DID/DNIS which are
the first and second drop-
downs between the
Previous and Next
buttons.
ISDN
The following program enables set up for ISDN related system settings.
317 ISDN BRI Trunk
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
02 Frame Format Select the Frame Format.
Possible values: SF Mode or ESF Mode (default)
04 Receive PAD Select the Receive PAD values.
Possible values: None, Plus 6 dB, Plus 3 dB, Zero dB (default), Minus 3 dB, Minus
6 dB, Minus 9 dB, Minus 12 dB or Minus 15 dB
05 Send PAD Select the Send PAD values.
Possible values: None, Plus 6 dB, Plus 3 dB, Zero dB (default), Minus 3 dB, Minus
6 dB, Minus 9 dB, Minus 12 dB or Minus 15 dB
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
ISDN
6-22 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
1. This command assigns ISDN BRI
Trunks.
1. Complete the “ISDN BRI Station
Record Sheets” on page D-19. From
the Program Menu, click Trunk >
ISDN > BRI.
2. Enter Channel Group number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed Trunks.
• Create – Assign a new Trunk
with default settings.
• Copy – Enter a Channel Group
number and click Copy to make a new Trunk assignment with settings copied from the Channel
Group you entered.
• Delete – Delete an Trunk.
3. Enter data.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Channel Group Enter the BRI channel Group Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
01 Equipment Number Enter the equipment number xxyyzz to which the ISDN BRI Trunk is to be assigned.
Example: If the RBUU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter 050301 for circuit 1.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~08 or 01~24
(CTX670)
xx = Cabinet 01; yy = Slot 01~08; zz = Circuit 01~04 (CTX100)
(default = no value).
Cabinet numbers:
•CTX100 – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•CTX670 – Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•CTX100 – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
•CTX670 – Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
02 Protocol Select the ISDN protocol. Only Bearer capabilities specified by the protocol can be
entered in this field. The Initial value for ISDN Protocol corresponds to information set
in the hardware level.
Possible values: Nat’l ISDN (default), ETSI, TTC or Nat’l ISDN Nortel
National ISDN = North America, ETSI = England and TTC = Japan.
Trunks
ISDN
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-23
Trunks
03 ILG ILG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls being received.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value).
04 OLG OLG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls being
originated.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value).
06 Bearer Svc - Speech Enable speech capability. See Table 6-1 on page 24.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
07 Bearer Svc - 3.1 KHz
Audio Enable 3.1 KHz audio capability. See Table 6-1 on page 24.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
08 Bearer Svc - 7 KHz
Audio Enable 7 KHz audio capability. See Table 6-1 on page 24.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
09 Bearer Svc -
Unrestricted 64K Enable one of the unrestricted capabilities. See Table 6-1 on page 24.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable bearer capabilities for the channel
group.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
10 Bearer Svc -
Unrestricted 56K
11 Bearer Svc -
Unrestricted 2x64K
12 Outgoing B Ch Select Select originating B Channel method.
Possible values:
•Explicit – Channel is indicated, and no alternative is acceptable.
•Preferred – (default) Channel is indicated, and any alternative is acceptable.
•Any Channel – Channel is indicated, and any channel is acceptable.
13 B Ch Selection Choose Idle B Channel selection method.
Possible values: Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or Backward
Terminal (default = Backward Terminal)
•Select Forward Cyclic (from lowest number to highest number of B-channel).
•Select Backward Cyclic (from highest number to lowest number of B-channel).
•Select Forward Terminal for the lowest numbered B-channel.
Select Backward Terminal for the oldest number B-channel. (The High-High B-
channel selection)
14 Initialize Type Enter the Service Profile Identifier (SPID) type of initialization.
Possible values: User Entry (Auto SPID On), User Entry (Auto SPID Off), Auto SPID
or None (default)
15 Initialization Display Enter the text to be displayed for SPID Initialization.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = User)
16 SPID #1 Enter the SPID value. These fields are required if you selected National ISDN in
Protocol. When no data is entered, any previously entered information is overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 20 ASCII characters (default = No Value)
17 SPID #2
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
ISDN
6-24 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
18 T-Wait Timer Enable the T-Wait Timer. This field is needed if you selected National ISDN in Protocol
above. This timer, used along with the SPID, assigns random initializing SPID times to
prevent BRI interfaces from re-initialize at the same time after a reset or power
outage.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
19 Voice Calls Select the number of simultaneous voice (speech) calls that can exist at the same
time on this interface.
Possible values: One or Two (default)
20 Trunk Subscriber 1 Enter the telephone number for subscriber 1. Telephone number should be consistent
with D channel data. If no data is entered in this field any previously programmed
information is lost.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
21 Trunk Subscriber 2 Enter the telephone number for subscriber number 2. If no data is entered in this field
any previously programmed information is lost.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
Table 6-1 Bearer Capability Table
Bearer Services Bellcore
National ISDN ETSI TTC
Circuit Mode
Speech X X X
3.1 KHz X X X
7 KHz X X
Unrestricted
Digital
Information
64 Kbps X X X
Rate adaptation
from 56 Kbps X
2x64 Kbps X X
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
ISDN
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-25
Trunks
302 PRI and IP QSIG
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
The PRI (RPTU, BPTU) and IP QSIG (BIPU-Q) interface cards need to have a number of assignments for
defining its operation. These include assigning which channels are available for use and the location of the
D-channel or signaling channel. The D-channel exists on the circuit assigned in this command. Also, a
number of optional functional capabilities also need to be enabled or disabled.
For BIPU-Q channel groups, parameters 01~04 must be configured, all other parameters should remain at
default. All parameters should be configured for ISDN. Many of these are normally set to default.
Note PRI ILGs and OLGs are assigned using “Call-by-Call” on page 6-29. Therefore, ILG and OLG must
be set to 0.
1. Complete the “PRI Trunks
Record Sheet” on page D-29.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ISDN > PRI.
3. Enter Channel Group number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – View a summary list of
programmed Trunks.
• Create – Assign a new Trunk
with default settings.
• Copy – Enter an Channel
Group number and click
Copy to make a new Trunk
assignment with settings
copied from the Channel
Group entered.
• Delete – Delete an Trunk
(Trunks 1~128 for CTX670 and 1~32 for CTX100).
4. Enter data.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Channel Group Channel Group Number.
Assign the proper PAD levels to channel groups in Programs 107, 108 and 114.
These levels are critical for ISDN and IP QSIG speech levels, as well as Quality Of
Service. Refer to the CTX Programming Manual guide line to set these levels.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
5722
Trunks
ISDN
6-26 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
01 RPTU Equipment No. Enter the ISDN RPTU, BPTU or BIPU-Q equipment number as xxyyzz.
Possible values: xx = cabinet 01; yy = 03, 05, or 07; zz = Circuit 01
...or xx = cabinet 02~07; yy = 01, 03, or 05; zz = Circuit 01
(default = no value)
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet. CTX670: Select 01 for Base
and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots. CTX670:
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
Note zz = Channel 01 is always used to assign RPTU, BPTU or BIPU-Q
parameters
Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter 050301. Enter the
equipment number xxyyzz to which the ISDN PRI Trunk is to be assigned.
Equipment numbers are required when assigning ISDN RPTU parameters in the
system. They can also be used to display the equipment location of existing RPTU
PCBs.
02 Protocol The Protocol to be followed defines the type of interface expected based upon the
equipment type at the distant end of the connection.
In North America, the choices are 1-Bellcore National ISDN; 4-Bellcore National
ISDN NT; or 5-Q-Sig.
Use IP for BIUP-Q, IP Qsig.
Use QSIG for RPTU/BPTU, PRI Qsig
Possible values: National ISDN, ETSI, TTC, National ISDN Nortel or Q-Sig
(default = None)
03 ILG ISDN and IP Qsig need to have Trunk Group assignments to process the calls
being received. If multiple trunk groups are used within the Channel Group, then
Call-by-Call Services must be used.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~48 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)
04 OLG ISDN and IP Qsig needs to have Trunk Group assignments to process the calls
being originated. If multiple trunk groups are used within the Channel Group, then
Call-by-Call Services must be used.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~48 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)
05 Trunk ID Type Identify whether the communication with the PSTN requires an identifier. Select
Explicit to require an identifier.
Possible values: Implicit (default) or Explicit
06 Trunk ID An identifier must be used as part of the addressing when an “explicit” identified is
used to communicate with the PSTN which channel on which link is used for the
given call. This identifier is assigned by the connected PSTN.
Possible values: 0 ~ 126 (default = 0)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
ISDN
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-27
Trunks
07 D Ch Position PRI includes a 64-kbps D-channel (for transfer of signal information). Select the
channel position to be used for D channel signaling.
Note This field is used only when the span interface speed is 1.5M. If the span
interface speed is 2M the value is fixed at 16.
Possible values: 0 ~ 24 (default = 24)
08~13 Bearer Services:
•Speech
•3.1 KHz Audio
•7 KHz Audio
•Unrestr. 64K
•Unrestr. 56K
•Unrestr. 2x64K
1. Enable the Bearer Capabilities allowed for this PRI Trunk channel group.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
2. Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.
Note In North America, only Channel Number map is used (Channel Number).
See Table 6-2.
Possible values: Channel Number (default) or Slot Number
14~18 Bearer Services:
•Unrestr. 384K
•Unrestr. 1536K
•Unrestr. 1920K
•Restr. Digital
•Video
1. The Bearer Capabilities (384k Unrestricted(H0), 1536k Unrestricted(H11),
1920k Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk Video, and Unrestricted
Multirate) are not used and should remain disabled.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
2. Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.
Note In North America, only Channel Number B map is used. See Table 6-2.
Possible values: Channel Number B (default), Channel Number H, Slot Map B or
Slot Map H
19 Bearer Svc Multirate
Unrestricted The Bearer Capabilities 384k Unrestricted (H0), 1536k Unrestricted (H11), 1920k
Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk Video and Unrestricted Multirate are not
used and should remain disabled. See Table 6-2.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
20 B Ch Selection Method The method used for selecting an idle ‘B’ channel and the reaction if the PSTN
indicates the channel is not available needs to be chosen to originate a call from
CTX.
Possible values: Explicit (default), Preferred or Any Channel
Preferred option is recommended, unless PSTN needs other choice.
21 B-Ch Selection The search method for choosing an idle ‘B’ channel shall also be specified.
Backward Terminal is the normal method with the PSTN following a Forward
Terminal method.
Possible values: Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or
Backward Terminal (default)
22 T1 Time Slot Pattern 1544 Time Slot Pattern.
Possible values: Fixed1 (default), Flexible or Floating
23 E1 Time Slot Pattern 2048 Time Slot Pattern
Possible values: Fixed1 (default), Fixed2 or Flexible
24 T-Wait Timer Specify whether the T-Wait timer is to be enabled or disabled. This field is only
valid for Nat’l ISDN. This should not be enabled for PRI, it is for BRI.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
ISDN
6-28 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
25 RBT on Incoming Call Enable Ringback Tone when terminating a call. This field is only valid for Nat’l
ISDN.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
26 Network Mode Set this span as Master or Slave for Layer 2 of a QSIG PRI. The opposite value
must be set for the node in which this QSIG PRI terminates. This governs call
setup activity and is not related to clock synchronization.
Possible values: Master (default) or Slave
27 Negotiation Priority Sets this span as Side A or Side B for Layer 3 of a QSIG PRI. The opposite value
must be set for the node in which this QSIG PRI terminates.
Possible values: Side A (default) or Side B
28 Layer 1 Short Break
Tolerant If layer 1 is interrupted for less than 90 seconds. CTX will keep the current calls
open. (This feature is available with Strata CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin
R2.2G0 or higher.)
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
29 2-B channel Transfer Enable this option to allow 2-B channel conference on PRI calls. This allows to PRI
channels to be connected in the same conference or Tandem call.
Note This option must also be enabled by PRI provider to allow it to work.
30 Q931 Protocol Timer Sets the Q931 Protocol Timer. If Long is set, T303 is 8s and T301 is 300s.
Table 6-2 Bearer Services Table
Bearer Services Nat’l ISDN ETSI TTC
Circuit
Mode
Speech X X X
3.1 KHz Audio X X X
7 KHz Audio X X
unrestricted digital
information 64 kbps X X X
Rate adaptation from 56
kbps X
2x64 X X
384kbp (H0) X X X
1536kbps (H11) X X X
1920kbps (H12) X
multirate (n x 64 kbps) X
Restricted digital Information X X
Video X X
Packet
Mode Shelf/Slot/Circuit
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
ISDN
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-29
Trunks
Call-by-Call
Program Number(s): 324 and 323
Call-by-Call service allows multiple facilities to share a PRI channel group. Traffic requirements of
different facilities vary at different times, and sharing B channels on a Call-by-Call basis makes it possible
to use fewer B channels to perform an equivalent service to the discrete counterpart.
1. Complete the “324 CBC Time
Zones” on page 6-30.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ISDN > Call by Call. The
ISDN Call by Call Service screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter Channel Group number.
4. Enter Program 323 data.
5. Enter Program 324 data.
6. Click Submit.
323 CBC Service
Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-25
To accomplish CBC services, each facility needs to be defined, its related Line Group assigned and
minimum and maximum values for the services provided. These service parameters may be set for three
different time zones, thus allowing fewer or more services of different types at different times of the day.
Complete the “Call-by-Call Record Sheet” on page D-30.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Channel Group Enter the Channel Group Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Index Enter the CBC Service Index, or click one of the following buttons:
•List – view a summary list of programmed Trunks.
•Create – Assign a new Trunk with default settings.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~48 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
02 Type of Service Select the CBC Service Type.
Note To delete CBC, set this field to 1: No Data.
Possible values: No data (default), POTS, FX, Tie Line (Enbloc), Tie Line (Cut through),
Intra LATA Out WATS, Banded Out WATTS, Inter LATA Out WATS or
INWATS
03 Facility Code Enter the supplied Facility code value from the PSTN. If no data is entered in this field,
any previously entered data is deleted.
Possible values: 00~31(default = no value)
Trunks
ISDN
6-30 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
324 CBC Time Zones
This command assigns Call-by-Call Time Zone.
04 Service Parameter Enter the Service parameters supplied from PSTN. If no data is entered in this field, any
previously entered data is deleted.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
05 Network ID Enter the Network ID code supplied from PSTN (this field is required if you selected
“Inter LATA Out WATS” Type of Service. If no data is entered in this field, any previously
entered data is deleted.
Possible values: 3 to 4 digits (default = no value)
06 ILG Specify the ILG for this facility.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = 0)
07 OLG Specify the OLG for this facility.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = 0)
08 Min Calls Zone 1 Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 0)
09 Max Calls Zone 1 Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 47)
10 Min Calls Zone 2 Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 0)
11 Max Calls Zone 2 Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 47)
12 Min Calls Zone 3 Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 0)
13 Max Calls Zone 3 Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 47)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Channel Group Channel Group Number
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Start Zone 1 Enter the Time Zone Starting Time (hhmm).
Possible values: hh = 00~23, 99 (hour)
mm = 00~59, 99 (minutes)
9999 = delete time zone, (default = no value)
02 Start Zone 2
03 Start Zone 3
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
ISDN
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-31
Trunks
320 B Channel
Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-25
PRI interfaces are purchased on per interface and channel basis. The B channel assignments allow for a
flexible activation of channels to match the subscribed services from the PSTN.
1. Complete the “B Channel Select
Record Sheet” on page D-31.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ISDN > B Channel. The
ISDN B-Channel Assignments
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter the Equipment Number, or
click List to see a summary of
progammed circuits.
4. Click the B Channel numbers that
you want to activate (see Table 6-3
below for T1 and E1 B Channel
default settings).
5. Click Submit.
Table 6-3 B Channel Defaults
B Channel Position 01~15 16 17~23 24 25~31
Span Interface Speed
1.5M (T1) ON ON ON OFF (Dch Pos)
2.0M (E1) ON OFF (Dch Pos) ON ON ON
Trunks
ISDN
6-32 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
316 Shared D Channel
Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-25
The PRI Interface can be extended to include an additional PRI card to expand the total number of
channels to 47 on a Channel Group. This second PRI may optionally offer a backup D channel.
1. Complete the “Shared D Channel
Record Sheet” on page D-32.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ISDN > D Channel. The
Share D Channel Assignment
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter the Channel Group number
(1~128, default = no value), or click
the List button to view a summary
list of programmed Channel
Groups.
4. Enter data.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Channel Group Channel Group Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
01 Equipment Number Enter the ISDN RPTU equipment number as xxyyzz:
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01, yy = 03, 05, or 07 and zz = Channel 01 is always
used to assign RPTU parameters
...or xx = Cabinet 02~10, yy = 01, 03, or 05 and zz = Channel 01 is
always used to assign RPTU parameters
(default = no value)
Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter 050301.
Equipment numbers are required when assigning ISDN RPTU parameters in the system.
It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing RPTU PCBs.
02 Trunk ID An identifier must be used as part of the addressing to communicate with the PSTN
which channel on which link is used the given call. This identifier is assigned by the
connected PSTN.
Possible values: 1~ 126 (default = 1)
03 D-Ch Provided If a backup ‘D’ Channel is to be used, it needs to be enabled.
Possible values: D-channel or No D-channel (default)
04 Backup D-Ch
Position The channel position within the 24 channels must be identified to be used for the ‘D’
channel signaling.
Possible values: 1~24
Trunks
ISDN
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-33
Trunks
Calling Number
Program Number(s): 321 and 322
When calls are made using ISDN services, the telephone number for which the call originates must be
identified to the PSTN.
1. Complete the “Calling Number
Record Sheets” on page D-33.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ISDN > Calling Number.
The ISDN Calling Number
Identification screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter the OLG Number, or click the
List button to view a summary list
of programmed OLGs.
4. Enter Program 321 data.
5. Enter Program 322 data.
6. Click Submit.
321 Calling Number Identification
Prerequisite Program: 306 page 6-4
The Calling Number ID is what is defined as the user supplied Calling Number. This number may be
optionally screened by the PSTN to ensure only calls from valid billable telephone numbers are allowed to
originate calls.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
OLG Number Enter the OLG Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
01 Default Number Enter the telephone number to use by default when originating a call. This is the
number that the PSTN has registered for billing purposes.
Possible values: Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Number Prefix Enter the prefix telephone number for which a DID number will be appended to create a
User Identified telephone number.
Possible values: Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This number may or may not be a billed number, but is used for Caller ID at the distant
end and could be used for returning your call.
03 Number Verification Specify whether the number provided should be screened by the PSTN before the call is
to proceed.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
04 Default Number 2 Enter the second telephone number to use by default when originating a call.
Possible values: Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This is the number that the PSTN has registered for billing purposes. The second
number is for BRI only
Trunks
ISDN
6-34 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
322 Called Number Table
Prerequisite Program: 306 page 6-4
When calls are received from the PSTN, a Called Number is supplied as part of the Setup Message. This
Called Number may be used for directing the call to the appropriate service with Strata CTX.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
OLG Number OLG Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
01 Source Type Specify the type of circuit used for outgoing calls: 1- PDN; 2- GCO; 3- Pooled Line.
Possible values: Primary DN (0~99999), Group CO (1~128) or Pool Line Group
(1~128); (default = no value)
02 Source Number Specify the number of the source type selected (PDN, GCO or Pooled Line).
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
03 DID Number Specify the number of digits received for reaching this service.
Possible values: Up to 7 digits (default = no value)
Note Destination Type and Destination must be entered before a DID number can be
assigned.
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-35
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
This wizard enables you to assign Direct Inward Dialing / Dialed Number Identification Service (DID/
DNIS) to ILGs quickly and easily. The wizard automatically takes you through the different programs and
parameters required.
Follow the steps below to start using the DID/DNIS Wizard.
Step 1: Select or Create DID/DNIS ILG
1. Select Trunk > Setup Wizard >
DID/DNIS.
2. After reading the instructions on
the screen (shown right), click
Start.
Step 1: 304 Select or Create DID/
DNIS ILG screen displays (shown
right).
3. In the 00 DID/DNIS Incoming Line
Group (ILG) field, click Create
...or from the drop-down menu,
select a DID/DNIS ILG to edit.
Note Only DID/DNIS ILGs appear in
the drop-down box.
See table below for screen fields
and field descriptions.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 ILG Type Select analog for RDDU or RDTU interface, or ISDN for RPTU interface.
11 DID/DNIS Digit Length Select the number of digits (1~7) that compose each DID number for this DID/DNIS
ILG. This is the number of DID digits sent from the CO on incoming DID/DNIS. If ANI
digits are sent with DID digits, only set this parameter for the quantity of DID digits
sent.
02 Line Type DID lines should always be set as CO type lines.
03 DID/DIT Service DID lines should always be set as DID service
04 Std/Q-SIG Service DID lines should always be set for “Standard” service
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
6-36 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
4. If you clicked Create in Step 3, the Create New
DID/DNIS ILG screen displays (shown at right).
Fill in the three fields on the screen and click Create Now. The
DID/DNIS Number Range Wizard screen displays with the
new information.
5. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/
DNIS assignments. This table displays assignments for all
DID/DNIS ILGs currently programmed in the CTX. For more
details, see “DID/DNIS Table View” on page 6-21.
6. After creating or selecting a DID/DNIS ILG, click Next.
Step 2: Create or Delete DID/DNIS Numbers for ILG 2
1. From the Step 2: 309 Create or Delete DID/DNIS
Numbers for ILG 2 screen (shown right), click
Create to create a block of DID/DNIS numbers.
The numbers are created in consecutive order.
The Create DID/DNIS Numbers screen displays (shown
right).
• Specify the first number in the DID/DNIS block.
Note The quantity of digits must match the quantity of digits
assigned to the selected ILG (refer back to “DID/DNIS
Digit Length” on the previous screen).
• Specify the DID/DNIS Number block size that should be
created. This is the quantity of DID/DNIS numbers
ordered from the DID/DNIS provider.
• Specify “overwrite existing” or “add to existing” DID/
DNIS numbers. If no DID/DNIS numbers exist, add or
overwrite is OK.
...or click Delete and the delete DID/DNIS number dialog box
displays (shown right). Specify the first and last DID/DNIS
number to delete using the drop-down boxes; or, check mark
Delete all DID/DNIS numbers. Click Delete Now. The
numbers are deleted.
CAUTION! Overwrite erases all existing DID/DNIS numbers currently programmed for the
selected ILG.
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-37
Trunks
2. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. For more details, see
“DID/DNIS Table View” on page 6-21.
3. When finished, click Next.
Step 3: Assign DID/DNIS Number Audio Destinations for ILG 2
1. From the Step 3: 309 Assign DID/DNIS Number
Audio Destinations for ILG 2 screen (shown right),
set the DID/DNIS Number range.
Note This step enables you to assign the ringing
destinations for all DID/DNIS numbers in the
selected ILG. This assignment applies only to
Voice (audio) calls—not to data calls.
2. Specify the range of DID/DNIS numbers for which
ringing assignments should be made. Use the First
Number/Last Number drop-down arrows.
3. Fill in the appropriate fields on this screen (see
field descriptions below).
4. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. For more details, see
“DID/DNIS Table View” on page 6-21.
5. After selecting DID/DNIS ringing destination assignments, click Submit to register them in the CTX
database.
6. After creating DID/DNIS ringing destinations, click Next to assign DID/DNIS Voice Mail ID codes.
These VM codes are optional and are only used if DID/DNIS numbers have unique VM boxes to “call
forward to” or “ring directly to”.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
GCO Key Group If a Group CO Key is selected, all selected DID/DNIS numbers will ring on telephones
that have this key.
Note This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment made in
the Program 304, ILG assignments. Day/Day2/Night period assignments do
not apply, GCO or Pool Keys will ring in all periods.
Pool Key Group If a Pool Key Group is selected, all selected DID/DNIS numbers will ring on
telephones that have this key.
Note This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment made in
the Program 304, ILG assignments. Day/Day2/Night period assignments do
not apply, GCO or Pool Keys will ring in all periods.
Set for Period DID/DNIS ringing assignments can be unique for each CTX time period: Day, Day2
and Night. Select the period(s) in which the destinations should ring. Then select the
destination type.
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
6-38 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Destination Type Select the type of destination:
DISA - to call in and receive DISA dial tone.
Built-in modem - to call in directly to the CTX modem with CTX WinAdmin.
Night Bell - to call in and close the BIOU or ACTU night bell control relay.
Dialing Digits - to call in and:
•Ring PDNs, PhDNs, and/or Pilot Numbers
•Night Ring over External Page - feature access code must be included in the
dialing digits.
•Access outgoing CO lines, Network Nodes and/or LCR to set up tandem calls -
line access codes must be included in the dialing digits.
Notes
•When Dialing Digits is the selected Destination Type, you must set the Dialing
Digit Range below.
•This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment made in this
Program or Program 304, ILG assignments.
Set the Dialing Digits
range Select the method in which dialing digit ringing destinations should be created:
Use DNIS as Destination - the destination digits for each DID/DNIS number will be the
same as the DID/DNIS number. This option is normally used when the DID/DNIS
numbers match the telephone PDNs, PhDNs etc.
Start with - enter the number to which the first selected DID/DNIS number should ring.
Ringing destinations will be assigned consecutively, starting with this number, to each
consecutive DID/DNIS number.
Only Use - all selected DID/DNIS numbers will be assigned to the dialing digits
entered here.
Add to front - these digits will be added in front of each dialing digit number.
Add to End - these digits will be added to the end of each dialing digit number.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 6-39
Trunks
Step 4: Assign DID/DNIS VMID Codes for ILG
1. From the Step 4: Assign DID/DNIS
Number VMID Codes for ILG 2
screen, assign VMID codes for all
DID/DNIS numbers in the selected
ILG. See field descriptions below.
2. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table
View to view existing DID/DNIS
assignments. For more details,
see “DID/DNIS Table View” on page
6-21.
3. After selecting VMID code
assignments, click Submit to register
them in the CTX database.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Set for DID/DNIS Number
range: Specify the range of DID/DNIS numbers for which VMID code assignments should
be made. Use the First Number/Last Number drop down arrows.
Set for: The codes can be set independently for DTMF in band or SMDI Voice Mail
integration.
DTMF VMID Select to set VMID code assignments for DTMF voice mail integration.
SMDI VMID Select to set VMID code assignments for SMDI voice mail integration.
All Select to set VMID code assignments for DTMF and SMDI voice mail integration.
Note DTMF and SMDI Voice Mail integration will not function simultaneously on
CTX.
Set the VMID range Select the method in which VMID codes should be created:
Use DNIS as VMID - the VMID code for each DID/DNIS number will be the same as
the DID/DNIS number.
Start with - enter the VMID that should be assigned to the first selected DID/DNIS
number. VMID codes will be assigned consecutively, starting with this code, to each
consecutive DID/DNIS number.
Only Use - all selected DID/DNIS numbers will be assigned to the VMID code
entered here.
Add to front - these digits will be added in front of each VMID code.
Add to End - these digits will be added to the end of each VMID code.
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
6-40 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 7-1
Attendant
Attendant 7
This chapter provides programming information for Strata CTX Attendants.
404 Attendant Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This program establishes Attendant Groups, distribution methods and alternate destinations.
1. Complete the “Attendant Group
Record Sheet” on page D-34.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Attendant > Group Assignment.
The Attendant Group Assignment
screen displays (shown right).
3. Select the Attendant Group
Member.
...or click one of the following
buttons.
•List – to view data list window.
• Copy – to Attendant group
numbers.
4. Enter Program 404 data.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Attendant Group
Member Select the Attendant Group Member Number.
Possible values: 1(CTX100 & CTX670 Basic), 1~8 (CTX670 Exp.),
(default = no value)
01 Call Distribution Method Select the Call Distribution Method for attendant console.
Possible values: Most Idle First (default), Next Available First or Broadcast
02 Alternate Destination Enter the Alternate Attendant Destination (DN, Network DN or Group Pilot Number).
If no data is entered in this field, any previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
03 Overflow Time Select the Attendant Overflow Time in minutes.
Possible values: 0~180 (default = 30)
Attendant
404 Attendant Group Assignment
7-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
04 Group Overflow
Destination Enter the overflow destination for this attendant group. If no data is entered in this
field, any previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
05 VMID Code SMDI Enter the Attendant’s Voice Mail ID code. If no data is entered in this field, any
previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
07 ICI1~16 ICI10
•ILG1
•ILG2
•ILG3
•ILG4
For 07 ICI1~16 ICI10, select ILG Assignments for ICI Groups.
•Assign the 1st ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
•Assign the 2nd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
•Assign the 3rd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
•Assign the 4th ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
Note Each ILG can only be assigned once in any of the ICI Groups.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = 0)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Attendant
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 7-3
Attendant
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns Emergency Call destinations to Emergency Call groups. There is one group for
each Day mode (Day1, Day2 and Night).
1. From the Program Menu, click
Attendant > Emergency Call. The
Emergency Call screen displays
(shown right).
2. Enter Program 400 data.
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• Insert – assigns the destination
for the selected index.
• Modify – assigns a new
destination to the selected
index.
• Remove – removes the
assigned destination from the
table.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 Day/Night Mode This is a display only field. It is controlled by the Strata CTX system.
Possible values: Day1, Day2, Night (default = no value)
02 Called Number Index This is a display only field. It is controlled by the Strata CTX system.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = no value)
03 Emergency Call
Destination Enter the destination DN for the emergency call.
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Attendant
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment
7-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 8-1
IP Telephone
Programming
IP Telephone Programming 8
All programs and features found in this chapter require CTX Release 2.0 software or higher and
WinAdmin Release 2.1 software or higher. This covers IP and 2B-channel conference programming. For
CTX IP Telephone Programming guidelines, refer to Appendix A – Applications, Tips and Tricks on
page A-1.
150 System IP Data Assignment
Prerequisite Program:
This command assigns IP data to the system.
1. From the Program Menu,
click IP-Telephone > System
IP Data. The Trunk System
IP data Assignment screen
displays (shown right)
2. Enter Program 150 data.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 Automatic Assignment
of Station ID Enable Automatic Assignment of Station ID when the IPT has no station ID. In
program 250, FB04 is the same parameter and is per terminal.
When IPT searches to connect a CTX with no station ID, CTX looks for a PDN
which is set this parameter as “automatic”, and sends the PDN to the IPT and
IPT sets it in the setting of IPT.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
6548
IP Telephone Programming
150 System IP Data Assignment
8-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
02 Terminal
Authentication Enable this parameter if you want to reserve the PDNs on IP Telephones
system wide.
When “enable” is set, terminal authentication by MAC address of IPT is valid.
So if another IPT with the same PDN is connected to the network, CTX rejects
the registration of this IPT because the MAC address of IPT is different.
When “disable” is set, you can move the PDN from a IPT to another IPT and
another IPT can be connected to the CTX.
In program 250 FB05 is the same parameter exists. Program 250 FB05, the
individual IPT setting will override this system wide setting.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
03 Diffserv Enable Diffserv (Differentiated Services) priority control if voice packets on an
IP (internal) Network should be prioritized with priority tagging. Higher priority,
time-critical BIPU\IPT voice traffic can have preferential treatment when other
traffic is running at best effort.
If Diffserv is enabled you must set the '04 TOS Field Type' as DSCP or TOS.
Note: Diffserv is usually not standard feature with most ISPs, contact your ISP
to make arrangements to provide Diffsrv or this feature will not work accurately.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
04 TOS Field Type If '03 Diffserv' is enabled, select DSCP 'Differentiated Service Format' or TOS
'Type Of Service format'.
Then, if TOS is selected, set the packet priority level in '05 TOS Precedence
Type'.
Then, if DSCP is selected, set the packet priority level in '06 DSCP'.
Possible values: Tos (default) or Dscp
05 TOS Precedence Type If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select a packet priority level - where
CRITIC/ESP provides the highest and Routine provides the lowest priority.
If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' make selections in TOS Delay, TOS
Throughput Delay, and TOS Reliability Type.
Possible values: Routine, Priority, Immediate, Flash, Flash Override, or
CriticEsp (default = 0)
TOS Delay Type If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select 'Normal' for most cases.
Possible values: Normal (default) or Low
TOS Throughput Type If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select 'Normal' for most cases.
Possible values: Normal (default) or High
TOS Reliability Type If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select 'Normal' for most cases.
Possible values: Normal (default) or High
06 DSCP If DSCP is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select a priority level from 1~ 64.
Level guidelines:
0,Best effort, default for most non-voice IP traffic.
24, Assured Flow 'AF' or Controlled Load, intended to classify streaming traffic.
40, Expedited Flow 'EF' or Guaranteed, intended to classify high priority traffic.
Possible values: 0~63 (default = 0)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
IP Telephone Programming
150 System IP Data Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 8-3
IP Telephone
Programming
07 IEEE802.1p Enable IEEE802.1p priority control if voice packets on an Ethernet LAN should
be prioritized with priority tagging. Higher priority, time-critical BIPU\IPT voice
traffic can have preferential treatment when other traffic is running at best
effort.
If you enable IEEE802.1p, select which priority level to use (Voice or Best
Effort) in ’08 IEEE802.1p Configuration’ on this screen.
Note All Ethernet devices on the LAN (routers, switches, etc., must support
IEEE802.1p for this feature to work accurately.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
08 IEEE802.1p
Configuration If 07 IEEE802.1p is enabled, select ’Voice’ priority. BIUP\IPT voice packets will
be tagged with the highest priority level.
Note Best Effort is not recommended for VoIP.
Possible values: BestEffort or Voice (default)
09 IP-CTX Identifier Enter a CTX Node ID if more than one CTX Node is on the IP Network. This
can be the same as the Qsig Network Node ID used for this system if it is in a
CTX Qsig. Network - but the two IDs are not related in software logic.
This ID must match the Node ’number’ programmed in the IP telephone using
369Hold-2, FB06
Possible values: Up to 5 digits
10 Tail length of Echo
Canceller Enter the length for echo cancellation. To lessen the echo, select 32MS.
Possible values: 16 msec (default) or 32 msec.
11 BIPU/IPT VQ Mode Set the Voice Quality Mode to control the Gain of IPT and BIPU to the
appropriate level in the existing system environment. This may require some
trial and error testing to find the optimum level.
Possible values: high (default), middle or low
Table 8-1 Program 250 FB05 and Program 150 FB02 Combination Matrix
Program 250 FB05
Enable Disable Don’t Care
Program 150
FB02
Enable Apply Not Apply Apply
Disable Apply Not Apply Not Apply
FIELD DESCRIPTION
IP Telephone Programming
151 BIPU Configuration
8-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
151 BIPU Configuration
This program is used to set up the IP address of the specific BIPU card to support the IP-Telephone. BIPU
card must be assigned before configuring the specific BIPU card.
1. From the Program Menu, click IP-
Telephone > BIPU Configuration.
The BIPU Configuration screen
displays (shown right)
2. Enter Program 151 data.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Cabinet & Slot Number Enter the cabinet and slot number of the BIPU to be configured.
Note: BIPUs must first be installed using PRG100 - System\Card
Assignment.
BIPUs can be installed in the slots listed:
Possible values: Slots 01-08 (CTX100 and CTX670 Basic), 01-06
(CTX670 Exp).
IP Address Enter the BIPU IP Address.
Subnet Address Enter the Subnet Address of the BIPU.
Default Gateway Address Enter the Default Gateway Address of the BIPU card.
Version Number of BIPU This is a read-only field.
6550
IP Telephone Programming
152 Voice Packet Configuration Table Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 8-5
IP Telephone
Programming
152 Voice Packet Configuration Table Assignment
This program assigns timing parameters to Prime DNs.
1. From the Program Menu,
click IP-Telephone > Voice
Packet Configuration. The
Voice Packet
Configuration Table
Assignment screen
displays (shown right)
2. Enter Program 152 data.
3. Click Submit.
Important!
• When setting Voice Packet Configuration Tables on an IP QSIG network, the packet table settings
for each node on an end-to-end connection must be the same.
•Whenever Voice Packet Configuration Table changes are made for IP telephones on IP QSIG nodes,
Toshiba recommends pressing the reset button on the BIPU to assure the changes take effect.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Voice Packet Table
Number Enter the Voice Packet Configuration Table Number (1-256).
Important! The default values in Voice Packet Table 1 are the recommended
values for G.711 codecs. The default values in Voice Packet Table 2
are the recommended values for G.729A codecs. If the codec selected
for an IP telephone in Program 250-08 is switched from the default
G.711 to G.729A, the table used for the IPT is automatically switched
from Table 1 to Table 2 in Program 250-07. However switching back to
the G.711 requires that you manually switch back to the Table 1 default
parameter settings.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX100 & CTX670 Basic)
1~256 (CTX670 Exp.)
01 Voice Packet Trans. Int. Voice Packet Transmission Interval – This is depends on the encoding method G711
or G729A. The default setting are G711: 20msec., G729A: 40msec. 10msec. is only
used to test. So don't use 10ms. Normally the default settings provide the best
quality.
If LAN bandwidth is not enough for these parameters and the problem is resolved to
extend the interval according to the LAN requirement, you can change to
G711:40msec. and G729a: 80msec.
Note 30msec. need not be used.
Possible values: 10 msec (available for testing only up to release 200MF008), 20
msec (default), 30 msec, 40 msec or
80 msec
Select Voice Packet Table
Number 1 or 2. The default
values will appear in the fields.
6719
IP Telephone Programming
152 Voice Packet Configuration Table Assignment
8-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
02 Jitter Buffer Type The default values for the selected codec is recommended. If the voice quality is not
as expected you can change the jitter buffer type of DSP on BIPU.
Possible values: Fixed, Sequential, or Adaptive
The default values are: G.711 = Adaptive,
G.729A = Sequential (recommended).
03 Jitter Buffer Length The default values for the selected codec is recommended. If the voice quality is not
as expected you can change the jitter buffer length.
Possible values: 0~250
The default values are: G.711= 100msec., G.729A=40msec.
04 Max. Acceptable Delay Not available in Release 2.0.
05 Measurement Period Not available in Release 2.0.
06 Packet Loss Ratio Not available in Release 2.0.
07 Packet Loss Threshold If packet loss is more than 10, an error is recorded in the CTX error log and you
cannot talk by IPT. The default value 5 is recommended.
Possible values: 0~10
FIELD DESCRIPTION
IP Telephone Programming
250 IPT Data Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 8-7
IP Telephone
Programming
250 IPT Data Assignment
Program 250 is used to set up the IP address of the specific IP phone card to support IP-Telephone feature.
The IP Phone Prime DN must be assigned using Program 200 before you configure the BIPU card.
1. From the Program Menu, click
IP-Telephone > Station IP Data.
The Station IP Data
Assignment screen displays
(shown right)
2. Enter Program 250 data.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Prime DN Enter the IPT Prime Directory Number (PDN)
Possible values: Up to five digits.
01 Station ID Station ID is set from the IPT to match its PDN in station Program ’369 Hold-2-
FB05’. The station ID is the same as the station PDN unless there is more than one
CTX system having BIPU-Ms on the same network. In this case the station ID for
each IP telephone must contain the CTX Node ID+PDN.
Possible values: Up to five digits.
02 Station IP Address
Type Select the Station IP Address to be static ’fixed’ or dynamic in which case it obtains
an IP address from a DHCP server.
Possible values: Fix or Any (default)
03 Station IP Address Enter the Station static IP Address if a static address is needed per Station IP
Address Type set in 02 above.
04 Automatic assignment
of Station ID Use Automatic when the IPT has no Station ID. Use ’Not Automatic’ when IPT has
station ID in the IPT setting. In Program 150, FB01 is the same parameter for
system.
When ’Don’t Care’ is set, Program 150-01 precedes in Program 250-04.
Enabling Program150-01 is equal to using ’automatic’ in Program 250-04.
Disabling in Program150-01 is equal to ’not automatic’ in Program 250-04. When
IPT requests to connect to a Strata CTX with no station ID, CTX searches for a
PDN that is set in this parameter as ’automatic’, and send the PDN to the IPT, and
IPT records it in the IPT setting.
Possible values: Permitted, NotPermitted or DontCare (default)
6719
IP Telephone Programming
250 IPT Data Assignment
8-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
05 Station Terminal
Authentication Mode Apply this parameter if you want to reserve a PDN for the IP Telephone connected
at the present time. When ’apply’ is set, terminal authentication by MAC address of
IPT is valid. So if other IPT which has the same PDN is connected the network,
CTX rejects the registration of this IPT because the MAC address of IPT is
different. When ’not apply’ is set, you can move the PDN from a IPT to another IPT
and another IPT can be connected to the CTX. When ’don’t care’ is set, terminal
authentication for this telephone is determined by Program 150-02.
The Terminal Authentication setting ’Apply or Not Apply’ in this program overrides
the Terminal Authentication any setting in Program 150-02. Refer to Table 8-1.
Possible values: Apply, NotApply or DontCare (default)
06 Station MAC Address Station Media Access Control (MAC) Address. This address is hard coded uniquely
in each IPT. The MAC will only display if the IPT is connected to the BIPU-M1A and
is operating properly.
Possible values: Up to 12 digits
07 Voice Packet
Configuration Table Index Select the Voice Packet configuration table that should be assigned to this IPT
(The voice tables are configured in Program 152). When the G711 Audio Codec is
selected in 08 codec below, the default values in Program 152-01, Table 1 should
be used. When the G.729A codec is selected in 08 Audio Codec below, the default
values in Program 152-01 Table 2 should be used.
Important! When switching the IP telephone from the G.711 to the G.729 codec
(the first time), the CTX will automatically switch the Voice Packet
Table from Table 1 to Table 2.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX100 and CTX670 Basic)
1~256 (CTX670 Exp.)
08 Audio Codec Select the audio codec that should be used in this IPT.
Possible values: G711(default) or G729A
IP telephones have two built-in codecs:
The G.711codec – provides the highest voice quality but uses the most network
bandwidth (about 115kbps per IPT when in use).
The G.729A codec – provides less voice quality but uses the least amount of
network bandwidth (about 29kbps per IPT when in use).
High traffic or low speed networks may require the IP Telephones to use G729A.
Example
If installing remote IP telephones connected to Cable or DSL lines, the upstream
rate is usually restricted and may not provide a consistent upstream bandwidth
(advertised as 128kbs but is normally less because of traffic) so the G729a codec
would probably be the best choice for this situation.
The Voice Packet Table 'Program 250-07' and the VP Table's Voice packet
parameters 'Prg152' must be set properly for the codec assigned.
09 Display Software
Version Number of IPT This is read-only. If any problem occurs, it is useful to analyze the problem with this
version. The sample of software version is “DIP11NA.” DIP1 represents the IPT
model. 1NA represents software version of IPT. “1N” represents the version of
updatable software and “A” means the version of not-updatable software
(BootROM).
FIELD DESCRIPTION
IP Telephone Programming
BIPU-M and IPT Program Update
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 8-9
IP Telephone
Programming
BIPU-M and IPT Program Update
To start updating the BIPU-M or IPT firmware, the Update firmware files must be stored on FTP Server
(see Appendix E – Software and Firmware Updates on page E-1). You can update the BIPU-M using
WinAdmin. You cannot update BIPU-Q. If you need to update BIPU-Q, return it to Toshiba.
WinAdmin automatically disables the BIPU before any BIPU/IPT program update and preserves the initial
state of the BIPU (idle or disable) after program update is done.
The BIPU program update has two processing options: sequential and simultaneous. If the FTP server is a
CTX (SmartMedia), sequential processing must be used.
The IPT program update is performed sequentially only. A table sorted by BIPU shows a summary of the
IPT selection. You can select multiple IPTs. You can change the selection at any time before the update
process starts. The process flow is as follows:
•The BIPU corresponding to the first group of IPTs is automatically disabled (if its current status is
“idle”)
•IPTs are updated one by one. Up to maximum 128 IPTs can be selected for one Updating process.
•BIPU is re-enabled (if its initial state was “idle”)
These steps are repeated automatically until the entire user selection is processed.
Both the BIPU and IPT update pages have an Abort and Abort All button. The Abort button is available per
item (BIPU, IPT), only when the current processing status allows the abort operation. Aborting the update
process is allowed only in two phases “Getting the update file” and “Resetting.”
The Abort All button is available when an update is in progress. You can click on Abort All to abort all
updates starting with the one is currently processing. If abort operation is not allowed at the time, the
message “Please wait while system has a chance to abort...” appears. All program update processes will be
aborted when this is allowed by CTX.
The synchronization between WinAdmin and CTX is not perfect during this process. WinAdmin sends a
command, then checks for the completion of the command. If you click on Abort at the end of the “Getting
the update file” phase, WinAdmin will abort in the next phase that abort is allowed, which is resetting.
FTP Server Information
CTX SmartMedia
When FTP server is CTX-SmartMedia, the files for BIPU/IPT program update must be stored in
“PROGRAM” folder on SmartMedia. BIPU/IPT screens will automatically fill the Directory field in the
FTP information group using the name “PROGRAM,” and will provide a list box with the files that exist in
this directory on Smart Media.
WinAdmin Machine
When FTP server is a WinAdmin machine, the WinAdmin installation will create a physical directory
under \WinAdmin. named “CTXIPUPDATE.” This is the physical path that you should indicate when
creating “CTXIPUPDATE” virtual directory on the Default FTP Site. The files for BIPU/IPT program
update will be stored in “CTXIPUPDATE” directory on WinAdmin machine. BIPU/IPT pages will
automatically fill the Directory field in the FTP Server information group using the name
“CTXIPUPDATE” and will provide a list box with the files that exist in this directory on WinAdmin
machine.
IP Telephone Programming
BIPU-M and IPT Program Update
8-10 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
External FTP
When FTP server is “External FTP,” not CTX - Smart Media, nor WinAdmin machine, users will have to
provide all the information in the FTP information group.
Important! The External FTP Server must be used if IPT, BIPUs and/or CTX WinAdmin do not have the
same subnet address.
WinAdmin provides an External FTP list page to manage FTP information for “External” FTP servers.
This page can be used to add, modify and remove FTP Server information (user, password, IP address,
directory and file) for External FTP servers or WinAdmin local machine. The information will be stored in
a file on WinAdmin machine and will be provided in selection window when user clicks on “External
FTP” on the BIPU/IPT pages. This eliminates the need to enter the same FTP information for “External
FTP” servers each time the BIPU/IPT program update is run.
BIPU Program Update
Prerequisites
1. Make sure that the networking devices between BIPU and the FTP server meet the requirements for
IP-CTX (min 100Mb/s switching hub(s).
2. Create an account on the machine designated to be the FTP server.
3. Create a FTP virtual directory on the FTP server machine and specify the physical location of the
updated file on the FTP server machine.
4. The FTP server machine IP address should be configured such that is visible by the IPT IP address.
CAUTION! Do not run other updates simultaneously.
Programming
1. From the Program Menu, click
IP-Telephone > BIPU
Program Update. The BIPU
Update screen displays
(shown right)
2. Select card slot to be updated
3. Enter the FTP information.
4. Select BIPU Update option.
5. Click Start to begin the BIPU
update.
IP Telephone Programming
BIPU-M and IPT Program Update
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 8-11
IP Telephone
Programming
External FTP List – Click the
External FTP List button enables
users to store External FTP Server
Information.
IPT Program Update
The IPT program update function consists of retrieving the updated file from an FTP server, updating and
rebooting the selected IPT.
CAUTION! Do not run other updates simultaneously.
Prerequisites
1. Make sure that the networking devices between BIPU, IPT and the FTP server meet the requirements
for IP-CTX (min 100Mb/s switching hub(s)).
2. Create an account on the machine designated to be the FTP server.
3. Create a FTP virtual directory on the FTP server machine and specify the physical location of the
updated file on the FTP server machine.
4. The FTP server machine IP address should be configured such that is visible by the BIPU IP address.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
User Name Enter the user name of the account created on the FTP server.
Password Enter the password for the account created on the FTP server.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the FTP server machine.
Data Directory Enter the name of the FTP virtual directory on the FTP server.
File Name Enter the name of the updated file (“vmlinus”).
IP Telephone Programming
BIPU-M and IPT Program Update
8-12 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Programming
1. From the Program Menu,
click IP-Telephone > IPT
Program Update. The IPT
Program Update screen
displays (shown right)
2. Select BIPU card slot.
3. Select IPTs to be updated.
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 for
multiple BIPU/IPT updates.
5. Enter the FTP information.
6. Click Start to begin the IPT
Program update.
Notes
•All selected IPTs are
updated sequentially.
•Maximum of 128 IPTs can
be selected in one IPT
update process.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
User Name Enter the user name of the account created on the FTP server.
Password Enter the password for the account created on the FTP server.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the FTP server machine.
Data Directory Enter the name of the FTP virtual directory on the FTP server.
File Name Enter the name of the updated file (“apph248.out”).
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-1
Services
Services 9
This chapter covers a variety of services offered by Strata CTX. Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), Voice
Mail, Destination Restriction (DR), Least Cost Routing (LCR), Networking, Station Message Detail
Reporting (SMDR), External Devices, System Parameters and other miscellaneous services are discussed.
Important! Advanced Strata CTX programming topics are covered in this chapter. Programmers should
make sure each section is thoroughly understood before proceeding to programming.
540 Pilot DN Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Pilot DNs are directory numbers that have no physical appearance, they are true virtual numbers. They can
be used in CTI and Voice Mail applications. In ACD Pilot Numbers are used as ACD group numbers. In
Voice Mail applications Pilot DNs are used to call directly to, or transfer calls directly to specific voice
mail boxes – this is done by setting VM as the alternate destination and using the VMID to send the call to
a specific VM box.
Maximum Pilot DNs
CTX100: R1.00 & R1.01 = 5 max./R1.02 = 100 max.
CTX670 Basic: R1.00 & R1.01 = 10 max./R1.02 = 200 max.
CTX670 with BBMS/BEXS: R1.00 & R1.01 = 32 max./R1.02 = 256 max.
1. Complete the “Pilot DN Assignment
Record Sheet” on page D-37.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Pilot DN.
3. Enter a Pilot DN Number
...or click one of the following buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed Pilot DNs.
• Create – Assign a new Pilot DN
with default settings.
• Copy – Enter a Pilot DN number
and click Copy to make a new Pilot
DN assignment with settings copied
from the Pilot DN entered.
• Delete – Enter a Pilot DN and click OK.
4. Enter Program 540 data.
5. Click Submit.
Services
540 Pilot DN Assignment
9-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
.
579 System Voice Mail Data
Prerequisite Program: None
Refer to “Voice Mail Set Up” on page A-1 for all Voice Mail setup steps. This command assigns DTMF/
SMDI Voice Mail interface parameters for the system.
1. Complete the “System Voice Mail
Record Sheet” on page D-38.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Voice Mail > System
Voice Mail Data.
3. Enter Program 579 data.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Pilot DN Pilot DNs are directory numbers that have no physical appearance. They are
true virtual numbers. They can be used in CTI and Voice Mail applications. In
ACD, Pilot Numbers are used as ACD group numbers. In Voice Mail
applications they are used to call directly to or transfer calls directly to specific
voice mail boxes - this is done by setting VM as the alternate destination and
using the VMID to send the call to a specific VM box.
Possible values: Maximum characters for Pilot DNs:
CTX100: R1.00 & R1.01=5 max./R1.02=100 Max..
CTX670 Basic: R1.00 & R1.01=10max./R1.02=200max.
CTX670 with BBMS/BEXS: R1.00 & R1.01=32max./
R1.02=256max
01 Alternate Destination Calls to the Pilot DN will be routed to the Alternate Destination if the Pilot DN is
not available (example: ACD After Shift). If Dialing Digits is selected, enter the
appropriate DN in the Alternate DN assignment.
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits or Night Bell
Alternate DN If Dialing digits is selected as the Alternate Destination, enter the PDN, PhDN
or Hunt Group pilot number to which the call should be routed.
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Voice Mail ID If the Alternate Destination is Voice Mail, enter the Voice Mail ID that should be
sent.
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Services
540 Pilot DN Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-3
Services
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 DID/DNIS VMID
Option Select DN VMID to send the DN’s VMID to voice mail on DID/DNIS calls that are
answered and then transferred to a DN which then forwards to voice mail.
Select DID/DNIS VMID to send the DID/DNIS number’s VMID to voice mail on
DID/DNIS calls that are answered and then transferred to a DN which then
forwards to voice mail.
Possible values: DN VMID (default), DID/DNIS VMID.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN which
then forwards to voice mail, the VMID of the DID/DNIS number (Program 309,
or ) or the VMID of the forwarding DN (Program 200, or 206,
) will be sent to voice mail per this option.
Note The DID/DNIS number’s VMID (Program. 309, or ) is always
sent to voice mail on DID/DNIS calls that ring directly to voice mail or ring
a DN which then forwards to voice mail before it is ever answered.
02 Cancellation Method
for VM MW Select the method used to cancel Voice Mail message waiting indication.
Possible values: Auto and Access Code Cancel or Access Code Cancel
(default)
03 Message Desk
Number Enable to send the SMDI Message Desk Number (001) in the SMDI packet;
otherwise, 000 for a station call or the 3-digit CO line number is sent.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
04 Output of CLASS /
ANI and DNIS Enable to include Caller ID/ANI numbers in SMDR records.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
05 Calling Number
Digits Sent to VM Select how many calling number digits to send to the VM unit.
Possible values: 2~10 digits (default = 10)
Note If 04 Output of CLASS / ANI and DNIS is enabled, this value must be 10.
06 Blank Digits Sent to
VM Send SMDI-Bellcore Standard VM Interface.
Possible values: 1 or 2 (default).
•1 = 1985 (single space)
•2 = 1991 (two spaces).
07 Auto Cancel of VM
and MW1Setting of auto cancel of VM and MW.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
08 DTMF Duration Select VM ID Code and System DTMF Signal Time.
Possible values: 80 ms (default) or 160 ms
09 LCD Control of Voice
Mail Enables Toshiba Proprietary Integration (TPI) for Soft Key Control of VM. TPI and
Soft Key Control of Voice Mail requires Stratagy Enterprise Server Release 3.x or
higher.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
10 Central VM Callback Enter the pilot DN for the centralized voice mail system. If this field is left blank,
the previously stored number will be deleted.
Possible values: Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Services
540 Pilot DN Assignment
9-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
580 Voice Mail Port Data
Prerequisite Program: None
Assign characteristics of individual voice mail ports.
1. Complete the “Voice Mail Port
Data Record Sheet” on page D-39.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Voice Mail > Voice Mail
Port Data.
3. Enter a VM Port DN
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed VM Port DNs.
• Copy – Enter an VM Port DN
value in the field with the same
name. Click Copy to make a
new VM Port DN assignment with settings copied from the Port entered in VM Port DN.
4. Enter Program 580 data.
5. Click Submit.
11 CF - All Call Record Enter DTMF VM-ID prefix string for calls arriving to voice mail via “Call Fwd All
Calls.”
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 91)
12 CF - Busy Record Enter DTMF VM-ID prefix string for calls arriving to voice mail via “Call Fwd Busy.”
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 91)
13 CF - No Answer
Record Enter DTMF VM-ID prefix string for calls arriving at the voice mail via “Call Fwd
No Answer.”
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 91)
14 Direct Call Enter DTMF VM-ID string for a call arriving at the voice mail as a Direct Call.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 91)
15 Retrieve Messages Enter DTMF VM-ID string for calls arriving at the voice mail to retrieve messages.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 92)
16 Voice Main DN Use a VM Pilot DN as a transfer destination.
Possible values: Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
17 Length of VM ID Select the number of characters in VM-ID string.
Possible values: 1~10 (default = 10)
1.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Services
540 Pilot DN Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-5
Services
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 VM Port DN Enter the DN of an individual VM port. For direct transfer to voice mail, enter
the remote Node ID and Pilot DN.
Note Do not enter a Pilot DN. This feature is available only with CTX
Release 1.3 or higher software and with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3
or higher software.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
01 Control Method Specify In-band or SMDI integration. Select SMDI for Remote voice mail.
Possible values: Inband or SMDI (default = no value)
02 Send A/D Tone Select whether Strata CTX sends A or D tone when a station connecting to
voice mail answers or disconnects.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = no value)
03 Send B Tone Enable Strata CTX to send B tones in the event of a Blind Transfer Recall.
Possible values: B Tone, No Tone or B Tone and Extension Number (default
= no value)
04 End-to-end Enable Strata CTX to send DTMF tones to voice mail in response to key
presses from a digital telephone.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = no value)
Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing
9-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing
The Guide Pages and programs that follow control Strata CTX’s Destination Restriction (DR) and Least
Cost Routing (LCR) capabilities.
Programming DR/LCR features in Strata CTX requires an advanced knowledge of telephone
programming. Make sure you have a thorough understanding of the discussion that follows before
attempting to program these features. For details on LCR, see “LCR Overview” on page 9-15.
DR Overview
Strata CTX offers DR as a major expansion of traditional Toll Restriction. Toll Restriction was used to
prevent the unauthorized use of toll prefixes to the PSTN as follows:
• – long distance
• – operator assistance
• – international
Strata CTX has expanded this to include restriction based on any string of dialed digits. Strata CTX can
restrict any string of up to 11 dialed digits including and .
Eleven-digit screening allows control of access to individual telephone numbers in remote Area Codes.
Restriction of and controls user’s access to vertical service codes from the central office such as Camp
On and Call Forwarding.
DR is always applied to calls originated through LCR and may be applied to calls originated through Trunk
Group Access, Individual Trunk Access, CO Key, Group CO Key, Pooled Line Key, and Strata Net private
networking. Special screening tables allow restriction of calls placed through Centrex or PBXs to which
the Strata CTX may be connected.
Each OLG can be programmed to require or not require DR in “306 Outgoing Line Groups” on page 6-4. If
a trunk group requires DR, a table must then be established using “531 DR Screening Table for OLG” on
page 9-31.
DR is controlled by a DR Level (DRL) that is assigned to any station or trunk capable of making an outside
call. Each of the 16 DRLs relate to a DR Table. A DR Table may be an Allow or Deny table and may be
associated with an Exception Table. A Deny Toll Restriction Table contains a list of dial strings that are
prohibited. Its associated Exception Table lists the dial strings within the Deny Table ranges that would be
allowed. For example, a Deny table might deny access to all of Area Code -. Its exception table could
permit access to specific office codes within that area such as --.
Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-7
Services
Basic Operation
The flow chart below describes the basic logic by which calls are connected or rejected as a result of DR.
Facility
dials
outside
number
Access Method
Consult DR/LCR
Screening Table Consult DR/OLG
Screening Table
Digit Manipulation Digit Manipulation
DR Table
Action DR Table
Action
Exception
Table Action Exception
Table Action
Connect to OLG
Reject Call
LCR
DR Applies to
OLG?
Stop
LCR DTA
Yes
No
Allow Deny
Allow
DenyDeny
Allow
Allow Deny
5944
Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing
9-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Tables
Strata CTX uses two or three tables to apply DR:
•Screening Tables. There are two types of screening tables as follows:
• LCR Screening Tables.
• OLG-Specific Screening Tables.
•DR Table or Exception Table to the DR Table.
Screening tables are used in Behind Centrex/PBX operations to detect access codes required by the
Centrex/PBX and processes them appropriately in a way that is transparent to end users.
DR/LCR Screening
DR is applied to all LCR calls using “530 DR LCR Screening Table Assignment” on page 9-30. It analyzes
the digits dialed after the LCR access code (typically ).
Example: A station user dials  ---. The outgoing line will serve as an incoming line
that this user is attempting to forward to his home. The System Administrator has created an LCR/
Screening entry to prevent the forwarding of this line to the users home. With Skip & Apply under DR
action and a Skip Length of 0, the call will be forced to present  to the DR table where the call will be
rejected. Apply under LCR Action ensures that the entire string will be processed by LCR. In this case,
Digit Modification is irrelevant.
DR Screening for OLG Table
An OLG-specific DR Screening Table is used when a call is originated through a Line Key, Pooled Line
Key, Group CO Key, Trunk Group Access Code or Direct Trunk Access Code and a CO line is chosen that
requires DR. The decision to apply DR to an OLG is made in “306 Outgoing Line Groups” on page 6-4. If
the OLG does not require DR, the call is connected to the desired line and all dialed digits, minus the Strata
CTX access code, are sent.
The OLG-specific table performs two functions:
•It manipulates the digits that will be screened by the DR table.
•It creates a Pause Value that ensures that the Centrex or PBX which is the source of the trunk will
receive and interpret the digits correctly. This is used to compensate for older, slower equipment.
Example: A station user dials 81-9-1-617-234-5678 where 81 is the Trunk Group Access Code for a
Centrex trunk group. 9 is the Centrex’ LCR access code. The Skip Length of 1 tells the system how many
of the first digits constitute an access code or other digits that may be ignored. The DR Action of Skip &
Apply tells the system to ignore the 9 and present 16172345678 to the DR Table use in the next step in the
process. The Pause Value of two seconds tells the system that, if it passes the DR Tables and is connected
to a trunk, it is to pause two seconds after outdialing the 9 and before outdialing 16172345678.
Dial String DR Action Skip Length Pause Value
9 Skip & Apply 1 2
Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-9
Services
DR Table
Each DRL is associated with a DR Table that defines the destinations to which a holder of that DRL is
entitled to place a call. Permission may be expressed in Allow or Deny tables depending on the field
technician’s choices. The DR Table is activated by defining the table as Allow or Deny through “523 LCR
Route Plan Schedule Assignment” on page 9-27. The table is then populated one string at a time through
“533 DR Level Table Assignment” on page 9-32. The table may have up to 100 entries. Entries may
include any DTMF character including and .
As soon as Strata CTX finds a match in the table, it acts upon it. Therefore, entering in a Deny table will
deny all 1+ calling to users with that DRL whereas entering - denies calls to the 888 Area Code.
Exceptions can be created in the DRL Exception Table.
DRL Exception Table Assignment – Once a DR Table has been established for a DRL, its exception table
can be created using “534 DRL Exception Table Assignment” on page 9-33. Exceptional DR Tables are
optional. Dial Strings in Exception tables my be as long as 11 digits. If a field technician wanted to deny
access to every office code in the 617 area code except Directory Assistance, he would first create a deny
table that included 617 and then create an associated exception table that allowed 617-555-1212. See the
table below for more examples.
Interaction With Other Features
Behind Centrex Operation
Behind Centrex operation for OLGs is defined in. The CTX will use the values stored here to strip local
and Centrex access codes from the dial string and determine the external number being dialed. This
external number will then be processed according to the DR rules described above.
Note The Centrex to which the OLG is attached may impose its own DRs.
Credit Card Calling
If a valid credit card number is detected, the CTX will not apply DR to a call because the charges for such
a call are applied to the credit card rather than the outgoing line used.
Services
Destination Restriction Guide Page
9-10 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Destination Restriction Guide Page
Use the Destination Restriction (DR) guide pages to program Destination Restriction.
1. From the Program Menu, click Services > DR Guide Page.
The Destination Restriction
Guide Page opening screen
displays (shown right).
2. Click on any Program number to
start using the Guide page.
Note Every Guide Page has Back
and Next buttons to help you
navigate to the previous and
next programs in a group.
The Program at the end of a
group has a Guide Page button
instead of a Next button to
take you to the main
Destination Restriction Guide
Page.
DR Dialing Setup
Program 530 – DR/LCR Screening
table (shown right).
Use this program to define special
dialing codes that are normally
dialed in front of telephone numbers
(example *82, *67). It defines what
DR and LCR action should be
applied after users dial the special
code (“Bypass” or “Skip and
Apply” DR).
Services
Destination Restriction Guide Page
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-11
Services
Programs 531/650 – Centrex/
PBX DR Screening table.
Use this program to define
Centrex/PBX line access codes. It
defines what DR action should be
applied after users dial the
Centrex/PBX line access code
(“Bypass” or “Skip and Apply”
DR). It is also used to assign OLG
to this table and/or enable centres
assume 9 dialing.
Program 117 – Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis (shown right).
Use this program to prevent standard
telephone users from avoiding DR
by sending DTMF tones to the PSTN
before DR analysis is complete. In
LCR applications, it allows calls to
cut through to the PSTN
immediately, so users do not have to
wait for a pause timer to cut through
after dialing a number.
Services
Destination Restriction Guide Page
9-12 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
DR Digit Table Setup
Programs 111/532/533/534 –
DRL Assignments (shown right).
Use this screen to define
Destination Restriction tables for
each DRL. It combines the
following programs into a single
screen for viewing, editing and
copying DR tables.
111 - Used to define if the DRL
allows credit card calling or not.
532 - Used to define each DR
table as an Allow or Deny table.
533 - Used to add or delete digit
strings from DR Exception Tables
and copy selected digit strings
from one DR Exception table to
another DR Exception table.
534 - Used to add or delete digit strings from DR Exception Tables and copy selected digit strings from
one DR Exception table to another DR Exception Table.
DR Class of Service Setup
Program 103 – Class of Service
(COS).
Use this screen to set COS options
that are related to DR and other
outgoing call features.
Services
Destination Restriction Guide Page
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-13
Services
Program 200 – Station Data.
Set the COS options that are
related to DR and other outgoing
call features.
Program 105 – System
Parameters.
Set the system parameters related
to DR and other outgoing call
options.
Program 510 – Class of Service.
Setup override codes for DRLs
and other related features.
Override code digit length must
be defined in Program 105-15,
System Parameters. This feature
is described as “Travelling Class
Override” in the telephone user
guide.
Services
Destination Restriction Guide Page
9-14 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Program 509 – System Speed
Dial DRL level.
Set the DRL, COS, FRL and
OPL level that should be applied
when users dial outgoing calls
using system speed. This must
be enabled in 105-09, system
parameters.
Program 306 – Outgoing Line
Groups.
Set Station options that are
related to DR and other outgoing
call features.
Services
LCR Overview
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-15
Services
LCR Overview
LCR Analysis Process
The flowchart below represents the process by which Strata CTX analyzes dialed digits and makes LCR
decisions. The graphic is divided into four areas each described below. DR and call connection are
described elsewhere in this document and are shown here only for their roles in the LCR process.
Figure 1 LCR Analysis Process Flow
DR
LCR begins with the receipt of a dial string from a facility capable of originating an outgoing call: station,
automated attendant, Tie trunk, DISA trunk, DID trunk, etc. The dial string is identified as an LCR call by
the presence of the LCR Feature Access Code—typically . The LCR Access Code is removed and the
remaining external digits are processed.
DESTINATION RESTRICTION (DR)
CONNECTION
TIME OF DAY
ROUTE ANALYSIS
LCR
Receive
dialed digits
Home
area code
included?
Allow
LCR DR?
Insert home
area code
Stop
Select Routing
Analysis Plan
(1~64)
Dial string
match?
Use Default
Route Plan
Exception
Table?
Get Route
Plan from
Analysis Table
Get Route Plan
from Exception
Table
Route Plan
Schedule
Table
Stop
Check FRL
(1~16)
Time of
Day
Zone 1 Zone 2
Zone 3
Type of
Day
Weekday
Weekend
Holiday
Make LCR
Route Choice
Hunt available
Route
Definition
(1~6)
Apply Digit
Modification
Connect
and
send
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Services
LCR Guide Page
9-16 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Route Analysis
Route Analysis chooses a Route Plan based on the dialed digits. The Routing Analysis Plan becomes the
index into the time/date calculations described in the next section. If the Strata CTX is unable to match the
dial string, it uses the default route plan which assures a route out of the system. If a match is found, Strata
CTX determines if a exception table is associated with the dial string. If the dial string appears in the
exception table, the call is assigned to the Route Plan stored in the exception table. Otherwise, the Route
Plan stored in the initial table is used.
Time of Day
The Strata CTX maintains time and day values for LCR separate from those for the general system. One
day can be divided into three zones, and each day can be categorized as a Weekday, Weekend, or Holiday.
Connection
Selection of a Route Choice Table begins the process of actually connecting the call to an outgoing trunk.
Each Route Choice Table consists of six Route Definitions which operate in terminal hunt fashion to select
an OLG and to apply a digit modification treatment.
LCR Guide Page
1. Complete the “LCR Assignment
Record Sheets” on page D-42.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR Guide Page.
The Least Cost Routing Guide Page
screen displays (shown right).
3. Click on any Program Number to
start using the Guide pages.
Note Every Guide Page has Back and
Next buttons to help you navigate
to the previous and next
programs in a group.
The Program at the end of a
group has a Guide Page button
instead of a Next button to take
you to the main Least Cost
Routing Guide Page.
Services
LCR Guide Page
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-17
Services
LCR Dialing Setup
Program 102 – Flexible Access Codes
Use this program to change the LCR
access code. The default LCR access
code is 9. You can change the default
access code to any number from 0~9, *,
and/or #. Enter an access code number
that does not conflict with the existing
numbering plan.
Program 530 – DR/LCR Screening
Table.
Use this program to define special
dialing codes that are normally dialed in
front of telephone numbers (example
*82, *67). It defines what DR and LCR
action should be applied after users dial
the special code (“Bypass” or “Skip and
Apply” DR).
Program 117 – Public Dial Plan Digit
Analysis.
Use this program to prevent standard
telephone users from circumventing
DR by sending DTMF tones to the
PSTN before DR analysis is
complete. In LCR applications, it
allows calls to cut through to the
PSTN immediately so users do not
have to wait for a pause timer to cut
through after dialing a number.
Services
LCR Guide Page
9-18 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
LCR Route Plan Setup
Program 520 – LCR Local Route Plan
Assignments.
Use this program to select which LCR
route plan is used for local calls.
Programs 521 and 522– Route Plan
Digit Analysis Table.
Use this program to assign Analysis and
Exception digits (digit strings) to route
plan tables.
This screen enables you to view, add
and delete Analysis Digits and
Exception Digits.
Services
LCR Guide Page
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-19
Services
Programs 526 and 525 – Route
Definition and Modified Digits
Assignments.
Use these programs to assign OLG
groups and modified digit tables to
Route Definitions.
Program 524 – Route Choice Table
Assignments.
Use this program to assign Route
Definitions to Route Choice Tables.
Note Double click a row to activate
the Add, Modify and Delete
buttons.
Services
LCR Guide Page
9-20 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Program 523 – LCR Route Schedule
Assignments.
Use this program to define the Route
Schedule for each Route Plan.
Table Buttons on this screen
Notes
•Clicking table buttons display
exclusive and dynamic tables. You
can move these tables anywhere on
the screen by clicking the blue title
bar and dragging it to a desired
location. (See screen below as an
example).
•The tables are dynamic because
you can click on any route plan on
the 523 LCR Route Schedule
Assignment screen and notice the table information change to pertain to that route plan.
•Route/Plan Choice – Click this
button to view route plans and
route choice. This table
combines all information found
in the Route Plan Analysis Digits
table and Route Choice
Definition table on a per Route
Plan basis.
•Route Plan Analysis Digits –
Click this button to view the
Route Plan Analysis table.
•Route Choice Definition – Click
this button to view the Route
Choice Table view.
•Station LCR Group – Click this
button to view Station LCR
Group table.
Route Plan/Choice Table
Services
LCR Guide Page
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-21
Services
LCR Day of Week and Time Zone Setup
Program 528 – LCR Days of the Week
Assignments.
Use this program to assign each day of
the week as a Weekday, Weekend or
Holiday.
Program 529 – LCR Route Time Zone
Assignments.
Use this program to define Route Plan
day types and time zones.
Program 527 – LCR Holiday
Assignments.
Use this program to assign which days
of the year should follow LCR
Holiday routing assignments.
Services
LCR Guide Page
9-22 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
LCR COS and Station Setup
Program 103 – Class of Service.
Use this program to enable or disable
LCR in COS feature sets.
Program 200 – Station Data.
Use this program to assign stations to
COS feature sets and LCR station
groups.
Services
LCR/DR
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-23
Services
LCR/DR
LCR Assignment
Program Number(s): 520, 521 and 522
User access to LCR is determined by programming the following:
•103 COS Assignment – 29 LCR Feature (see page 4-9) enables access to LCR COS.
•200 Station Assignment – 07 LCR Group (see page 5-2) assigns a station to an LCR Group.
•304 ILG Assignment – 23 LCR Group(see page 6-3) assigns an LCR Group to an ILG.
Note Appropriate COS, DRL and FRL assignments must be made to all LCR stations and trunks.
1. Complete the “LCR Assignment
Record Sheets” on page D-36.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR > Assignment.
3. Enter Program 520 data.
4. Enter Program 521 data.
5. Enter Program 522 data.
Note For steps 3~5, complete“LCR
Assignment Record Sheets” on
page D-36.
6. Click Submit.
520 LCR Local Route Plan Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
There are 64 LCR route plans. This assignment is used to select which LCR route plan should be used to
route local calls. The Local Route Plan, which must be defined in the route definition assignment,
determines which CO line group is used for local outgoing calls.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 Local Area Code Enter the area code for the dialing area in which the system is installed. This is
the area code for the Central Office (CO) that provides local CO lines to the
system. If no data is entered in this field, any previously programmed data is
lost.
Possible values: 3 digits (default = no value)
02 Local Route Plan Enter the LCR Route Plan number that should be used to route local calls.
Local calls are made by dialing 7-digit public telephone numbers that do not
require an Area Code. There are 64 LCR Route Plans from which to choose.
Possible values: 1~64 (default = 1)
Services
LCR/DR
9-24 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
521 LCR Route Plan Digit Analysis Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 520 page 9-23
This program builds the basic LCR Analysis Table.
522 LCR Exception Number Route Plans
Prerequisite Program: 521 page 9-24
This command assigns up to 1280 dialed external digit strings to the Route Plan Exception Analysis Table
which assigns each string to 1 of 64 Route Choice Tables. The values expressed here are exceptions to the
values established in Program 521.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Analysis Digits Enter the external digit strings (area codes, toll prefixes, service codes, etc.) to
be assigned to a Route Plan Analysis Table.
Strings may be up to 32 digits long. There Route Plan Analysis Table may
have 1280 members. A digit string can only be in one table at a time.
Possible values: Digits may include wild cards “X” and “N” where X = 0~9 and
N = 2~9 (default = no value).
01 Route Plan Number Enter the Route Plan number to which to assign the Analysis Digits.
Note Entering 0 deletes the Analysis Digits from the table to which they
had been assigned.
Possible values: 0~64 (default = 0)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Exception Digits Enter the external digit strings (area codes, toll prefixes, service codes, etc.) to
be assigned to a Route Plan Exception Analysis Table.
Strings may be up to 32 digits long. The Exception Route Plan Analysis Table
may have 1280 members. A digit string can only be in one table at a time.
Possible values: Digits may include wild cards “X” and “N” where X = 0~9 and
N = 2~9 (default = no value).
01 Exception Table Enter the Route Plan Table in which to assign the Exception Digits.
Note Entering 0 deletes the Exception Digits from the table.
Possible values: 1~64 (default = 0)
Services
LCR/DR
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-25
Services
Route Define
Program Number(s): 524, 525 and 526
Define the participants in the LCR Route Plan.Complete the “Route Choice Definition Record Sheet” on
page D-42.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR > Route
Define.
2. Enter Program 524 data.
3. Enter Program 525 data.
4. Enter Program 526 data.
5. Click Submit.
524 Route Table to Route Definition Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 525 below
This command defines up to six possible Route Definitions for a given Route Table.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Route Choice Table Enter the Route Choice Table to be defined.
Possible values: 1~128
01 Route Definition 1 Enter Route Definitions to be assigned to this Route Table.
Possible values: 1~128, 0 = Delete (default = 1)
02 Route Definition 2
03 Route Definition 3
04 Route Definition 4
05 Route Definition 5
06 Route Definition 6
Services
LCR/DR
9-26 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
525 LCR Route Definition Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 520 page 9-23
This command assigns Route Definitions for LCR. A Route Definition consists of an OLG and a Digit
Modification index.
526 Modified Digits Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 521 page 9-24
This command modifies LCR dialed numbers by deleting digits from and adding digits to the dialed
numbers.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Route Definition Select the Route Definition number.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = no value)
01 OLG Number Select the OLG Number associated with this Route Definition.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = 1)
02 Digit Modification Index Select the Digit Modification number associated with this Route Definition.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = 1)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Digit Modification Index Select the Digit Modification Index used by the LCR Route Choice table to
determine the digit modification treatment to be applied. Leading digits of a
dialed number may be deleted; leading and trailing digits may be added to the
dialed number.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = no value)
01 Delete Digits Select the quantity of digits to be deleted from the beginning of dialed number.
Possible values: 0~10 (default = 0)
02 Add Leading Digits Enter the digit string to be inserted at the beginning of the number.
Possible values: Up to 23 ASCII characters (default = no value)
03 Add Trailing Digits Enter the digit string to be inserted at the end of the number.
Possible values: Up to 23 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Services
LCR/DR
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-27
Services
Route Schedule
Program Number(s): 523 and 528
1. Complete the “Route Schedule
Record Sheets” on page D-35.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR > Route
Schedule.
3. Enter Program 523 data.
4. Enter Program 528 data.
5. Click Submit.
523 LCR Route Plan Schedule Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns Route Plan Schedule Tables for LCR. Each table is a 3-dimensional array of 144
values (3 Types of Day x 3 Times of Day x 16 LCR Groups).
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Route Plan Enter the Route Plan Number to build a schedule indexed by Time of Day,
Type of Day and LCR Group.
Possible values: 1~64 (default = no value)
01 Type of Day Select the Type of Day.
Possible values: Weekday (default), Weekend or Holiday
02 LCR Time of Day Select the Time Zone.
Possible values: Time Zone 1, Time Zone 2 or Time Zone 3 (default = no
value)
03 Station LCR Group Select the Station LCR Group.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
04 Route Choice Table Enter the Route Choice Table Number to be used with this combination of
time, type and LCR group.
Possible values: 1~128, 0 = delete (default = 1)
Services
LCR/DR
9-28 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
528 LCR Public Day of Week Mapping Table
Prerequisite Program: 520 page 9-23
This command defines the days of the week as weekdays, weekend days or holidays for LCR.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 Monday Select the Day Type to assign to this day.
Possible values: Weekday (default), Weekend or Holiday
02 Tuesday
03 Wednesday
04 Thursday
05 Friday
06 Saturday Select the Day Type to assign to this day.
Weekday, Weekend (default) or Holiday
07 Sunday Select the Day Type to assign to this day.
Weekday, Weekend (default) or Holiday
Services
LCR/DR
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-29
Services
Public Holidays and LCR Time Zones
Program Number(s): 527 and 529
1. Complete the “LCR Time Zone Record
Sheets” on page D-37.
2. From the Program Menu, click Services >
LCR/DR > Public Holidays and LCR
Time Zones.
3. Enter Program 527 data.
4. Enter Program 529 data.
5. Click Submit.
527 LCR Holiday Table
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns up to 128 holidays for LCR processing. These assignments are related to the Day
assignments established in Program 523.
529 LCR Route Plan Time Zone Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 520 page 9-23
This command creates a three-dimensional array (Day, Time & LCR Group) for each Route Plan.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Holiday Enter Date (YYYYMMDD). A maximum of 128 dates is allowed.
Possible values: YYYY = Year, MM = Month and DD = Day (default = no
value)
01 Add/Delete Choose to add or delete this date from the holiday table. Expired dates remain
in the table unless deleted.
Possible values: Add or Delete (default)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Route Plan Select the LCR Route Plan Number to assign to this time zone.
Possible values: 1~64 (default = no value)
01 LCR Day Type Select a Day Type for which to define a time zone.
Possible values: Weekday, Weekend or Holiday (default = no value)
02 LCR Time Zone Select a Time Zone.
Possible values: Zone 1, Zone 2 or Zone 3 (default = no value)
03 Start Time Enter the start time for the selected Time Zone (hhmm).
Note Enter your Day Type and Time Zone selections before entering data
in to this field.
Possible values: hh = hour (0-23) and mm = minutes (0-59)
(default = 0000)
Services
LCR/DR
9-30 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
LCR/DR Screening
Program Number(s): 530 and 531
These programs enable and set up screening for DR and LCR.
1. Complete the “DR LCR Screening
Record Sheet” on page D-38.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR > LCR/DR
Screening.
3. Enter Program 530 and 531 data
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed Screened Dial
Strings or Behind Centrex
Access Codes.
• Copy – Enter a Screened Dial
String or Behind Centrex
Access Code in the field with
the corresponding name. Click Copy to make a new assignment.
4. Click Submit.
530 DR LCR Screening Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command screens dialed digits for access codes such as Carrier Identification Codes or Behind
Centrex/PBX access codes. Used only in LCR calls.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Screening Dial String Enter the string of external digits to be screened.
Possible values: Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
01 Add String to Table Add the Screening Dial String to the DR LCR Screening Table.
Possible values: Add or Delete (default)
02 Destination Restriction
Action Select DR Action.
Possible values: Bypass (default) or Skip and Apply
•Bypass – Do not apply DR.
•Skip and Apply – Apply DR to the dialed digits excluding the number of
digits specified in Skip Length.
03 Least Cost Routing
Action Select LCR Action.
Possible values:
•Apply – (default) Apply LCR to all of the external dialed digits.
•Skip and Apply – Apply LCR to the dialed digits excluding the number of
digits specified in Skip Length.
Services
LCR/DR
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-31
Services
531 DR Screening Table for OLG
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns DR Screening Table for an OLG. Up to four codes may be assigned per line group. Used for
outgoing calls other than LCR.
04 Digit Modification
Action Select Digit Modification application.
Possible values:
•Apply – (default) Apply Digit Modification from the first digit.
•Retain – Retain the skipped digits and apply Digit Modification starting from
the next digit specified by Skip Length.
•Discard – Discard the skipped digits and apply Digit Modification starting
from the next digit specified by Skip Length.
05 Skip Length Specify the number of digits at the beginning of the dial string to be ignored
before DR, Digit Modification, or LCR is applied.
Possible values: 0~5, 0 = delete (default = 0)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Outgoing Line Group Enter the OLG Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Behind Centrex Access
Code Enter the access code expected by an attached Centrex PBX.
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Add or Delete Code Add or Delete the Code entered above. Leaving the field empty removes an
existing code. Activation requires entries in OLG Group number and 01 Behind
Centrex Access Code above.
Possible values: Add or Delete (default)
03 DR Action for Centrex Apply DR to the dialed digits.
Possible values:
•Bypass (default) – does not apply DR.
•Skip and Apply– applies DR to the dialed digits excluding the number of
digits specified in Skip Length.
04 Skip Length Enter the number of leading digits to be ignored by DR.
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
05 Pause Length Enter the length of the pause to be inserted between dialing digits.
Possible values: 0~10 (default = 0)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Services
LCR/DR
9-32 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Destination Restriction
Program Number(s): 532, 533, 534 and 111
Assign DR features for the Strata CTX.
1. Complete the “DR Record Sheets” on
page D-39.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR > Destination
Restriction.
3. Enter 00 DR Level (DRL).
4. Enter Program 532 data.
5. Enter Program 533 data. Click List to
view a summary list of programmed
Dial Strings.
6. Enter Program 534 data. Click List to
view a summary list of programmed
Dial Strings.
7. Enter Program 111 data.
8. Click Submit.
532 DR Table Allow/Deny Definition
Prerequisite Program: 533 below.
Specify the DR Table Type using this command.
533 DR Level Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This program adds or deletes entries in the DR Table associated with the DRL entered in Step 3 above.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 DRL Number Select the DRL Number.
Possible values: 1 ~ 16 (default = no value).
01 Type of Table Specify whether this DR Table is an Allow Table or Deny Table.
Possible values: Allow or Deny (default).
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Destination Restriction
Level Choose the DRL.
Possible values: 1 ~ 16 (default = no value)
01 Dial String Enter the string of dialed digits to be allowed or denied. Wild cards (X and N)
can only be assigned through CTX WinAdmin, not the programming phones.
Possible values: 1~7 digits (default = no value)
02 Add/Delete Add or delete the string entered in 01 Dial String above to the DR Table.
Possible values: Add or Delete (default)
Services
LCR/DR
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-33
Services
534 DRL Exception Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 533 above
This program assigns a DRL Exception Table to an existing DRL table. If the DRL Table is an allow table,
its Exception Table must be a deny table and vice versa.
111 DR Level
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables credit card calling for a DRL.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Destination Restriction
Level Enter the DRL for which you want to populate an Exception Table.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = no value)
01 Dial String Add the dial string you wish to be treated as an exception.
Possible values: 1~ 7 digits may include wild cards “X” and “N” where X =
0~9 and N = 2~9.(default = no value)
02 Add/Delete Add or delete the string entered in 01 DR Exception Table above to the DR
Exception Table.
Possible values: Add or Delete (default)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
DRL Number Enter the DRL number.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = no value)
01 Credit Card Calling Enable Credit Card Calling for this DRL.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Services
LCR/DR
9-34 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
DRL Table View
The DRL table view enables you to view all programmed DRLs. This table is a read only table.
➤To access the DRL table view
➤From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR > DRL Table
View.
See “Table Views” on page 2-6 for table
functionality.
Centrex/PBX Screening Table View
The Centrex/PBX Screening Table View enables you to the Centrex/PBX Screening table.
➤To access the Centrex/PBX Screening Table View
➤From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR >Centrex/PBX
Screening Table View.
See “Table Views” on page 2-6 for
table functionality.
7020
Services
LCR/DR
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-35
Services
Account Codes
Program Number(s): 570, 506 and 571
Assign Account Code data to Strata CTX.
1. Complete the “Strata Net Private
Networking” on page 9-39.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR > Account
Codes.
3. Enter Program 570 data.
4. Enter Program 506 data. Click List
to view a summary list of
programmed Account Codes.
5. Enter Program 571 data.
6. Click Submit.
570 Account Code Digit Length
Prerequisite Program: None.
Accounting Codes need to be specified for the number of digits that are expected to be used for registering
a number. This allows dialing within Strata CTX to proceed automatically once the correct account code is
dialed. The following numbers are then dialed digits used for making the phone call.
A second length is provided to allow the number of digits to be used for verification of the code to be less
than the total code entered; thus, the code may contain two parts, one required and one part optional to the
user.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 Verified Digit Length The Verified Digit Length sets a number of digits to verify with a pre-set list.
This number may be the same or smaller than the account code digits set to be
entered for creating a complete accounting code.
Note This field is not changed, when “506 Verified Account Codes” on
page 9-36 are registered.
Possible values: 4~15 (default = 4)
02 Registered Digit Length The Registered Digit Length sets a number for the digits to be entered to make
a complete accounting code entry.
Note The Registered Digit Length ( ) must be greater than or equal to
the Verified Digit Length ( ).
Possible values: 4~15 (default = 6)
Services
LCR/DR
9-36 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
506 Verified Account Codes
Prerequisite Program: 570 page 9-35
This program adds or deletes entries in the DR Table associated with the DRL entered in Step 3 on 9-32.
571 Exception Numbers for Forced Account Codes
Prerequisite Program: 506 page 9-36
Up to four telephone numbers can be programmed as exceptions to the forced and /or verified account code
entries (including 911). These special codes enable numbers to bypass the verification process and proceed
unhindered.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Account Code Enter a valid accounting code that the user will be expected to dial. Digits 0~9
can be used.
Note The Account Code is set to the same digit length as the Verified Digit
Length in Program 570 above.
Possible values: Up to 15 ASCII characters (default = no value)
01 Verified Flag The Account Code Flag determines whether the number entered is to be used
as a verified account code or not. Some applications may allow users to dial an
accounting code which changes the restriction level for the call allowing it to be
placed.
Possible values: Set or No Set (default)
Note To delete a Verified Account Code set this field to No Set.
02 DRL The DRL assigned to an accounting code allows users to override their
stations assigned DRL enabling a call to be placed.
Possible values: 0~16 (default = 0)
03 FRL The FRL assigned to an accounting code enables users to override the station
assigned FRL.
Possible values: 0~16 (default = 0)
04 Network COS Assign the Network COS to be used by this accounting code.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 Exception Number 1 Enter a Forced Account Code Exception.
Possible values: Up to 4 digits
Exception 1 default = 911
Exception 2~4 default = no value
Note One of the assigned exception numbers should be 911. Exception
Numbers for Forced Account Code fields cannot be duplicated.
02 Exception Number 2
03 Exception Number 3
04 Exception Number 4
Services
LCR/DR
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-37
Services
509 DR Override by System Speed Dial
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns the COS, DRL, FRL and QPL values used by DR Override by Speed Dial.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR > DR Override
by System Speed Dial.
2. Select the COS, DRL, FRL and
QPL override values.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 Override COS Select the override COS value.
Possible values: 1~32 (default =1)
02 Override DRL Select the override DRL value.
Possible values: 1~16 (default =1)
03 Override FRL Select the override FRL value.
Possible values: 1~16 (default =1)
04 Override QPL Select the override QPL value.
Possible values: 1~16 (default =1)
Services
LCR/DR
9-38 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
510 COS Override Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns Class of Service Overrides and their parameters (COS, FRL, DRL, QPL).
1. Complete the “COS Override Code
Record Sheet” on page D-40.
2. From the Program Menu, click Services
> System Param > COS Override.
3. Enter Program 510 data or Select a COS
Override Index and click Copy to copy
settings from the selected COS Override
Index.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 COS Override Index Select the COS Override index.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = no value)
01 COS Override Code Select the COS Override Code as entered by users. If no data is entered in this
field, any previously entered data is erased.
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Set COS Select COS number for this override code.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
03 Set DRL Select DRL number for this override code.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
04 Set FRL Select FRL number for this override code.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
05 Set QPL Select QPL number for this override code.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
06 Set Network COS Select Network COS index for this override code.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
Services
Networking
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-39
Services
Networking
Strata CTX enables networking of resources using Strata Net Private Networking. Read the following
discussion before programming Strata CTX networking features.
Strata Net Private Networking
The Strata CTX introduces robust private networking, Strata Net, to the Toshiba family of
telecommunications products. Based on an international standard, QSIG, Strata Net will allow multiple
Strata CTX systems to share voice mail systems and attendants, share features and a coordinated
numbering plan and route calls simply and easily throughout the enterprise. Strata Net is distinguished
from CTX Basic Networking which provides interconnection of nodes through conventional, E&M Tie
lines.
QSIG
Toshiba has adopted QSIG as the basis for Strata Net. QSIG is an open, international standard for
networking PBXs. It was begun in 1994 with a memo of understanding between twelve leading PBX
manufacturers. The QSIG Handbook can be found on the web at http://www.qsig.ie/. The standards were
developed and are maintained by the European Computer Manufacturers Association (ECMA), an
international, Europe-based industry association founded in 1961 and dedicated to the standardization of
information and communication systems. ECMA may be found on the web at http://www.ecma.ch.
QSIG is an intelligent and powerful signalling system, providing great flexibility in terms of network
architecture. Any network node can establish routes to 128 other nodes and segmented networks can grow
beyond that. New nodes can be added to the network as business needs dictate. The use of QSIG does not
impose the use of a specific network topology and it can be used with any network configuration: meshed,
star, main and satellite, etc.
Toshiba, like most of its competitors, has chosen to implement QSIG over Primary Rate Interface. Strata
Net supports QSIG Basic Call Control that allows it to interoperate with other PBXs that conform to the
QSIG standard.
Node ID
The basic logical element in Strata Net routing is the Node ID. It functions similarly to the address in a
packet data network. As a call is routed through the network, each node examines the leading received
digits for a Node ID defined in its Flexible Numbering Plan. After first discerning a Node ID, the Strata
CTX then determines whether the Node ID is for itself or for a remote node. If it is a remote Node ID, the
call goes through a routing process that selects an OLG, manipulates the digits and sends the call to the
next node in the network. If the call contains the local Node ID, the Strata CTX manipulates the number
according to the Overlap Code and delivers the call to a local station, trunk or feature.
The Node ID is one to six digits long. The Strata CTX knows that a Node ID to which an Overlap Code has
been assigned is for the local node and that all others are for the remote nodes.
Strata Net bases its routing decisions exclusively on the Node ID and makes no attempt to analyze or
restrict the remaining dialed digits. These remaining digits are not processed until delivered to the
destination Strata Net node. This provides a simple, powerful tool because the programmer does not need
to consider local conditions in transit nodes and does not need to fear interference with the call regardless
of the path it takes through the network.
Services
Networking
9-40 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Network Directory Number
A Network Directory number consists of two elements: the Node ID and the local directory number. A
Node ID is a string of 1 to 6 digits that identifies one node on the network. A Network DN may be a simple
concatenation of the two elements in which the complete Node ID precedes the complete extension or the
two elements may overlap. In the event of an overlap, an Overlap Code identifies the digits to be
substituted for the received Node ID.
The Node ID allows a call to route through multiple Strata Net nodes until its destination node recognizes
it as a local call. Local Node IDs are programmed using Command 656 “Node ID.” Remote Node IDs are
programmed in Command 651 “Network Routing Plan Analysis” to define the appropriate outgoing route
to the desired destination. Digits received after the Node ID are passed on to the distant node without
analysis.
One node may have up to four Node IDs. A unique Overlap Code is programmed for each Node ID. The
Overlap Code allows the programmer to control the number of digits to be dialed for network calls and to
create a coordinated dialing scheme across the network. If the Network DN is to be a simple concatenation
with no overlap, the Overlap Code field is left blank. All Node IDs, local and remote, must be defined as
such in the Flexible Numbering Plan.
The following are examples of linked and overlapped Node IDs.
Linked:
•Node ID = 789
•Extension = 2345
•Overlap Code = BLANK
•Network DN = 7892345
Overlapped:
•Node ID = 789
•Network DN = 789345
•Overlap Code = 2
•Local Extension = 2345
This simple, powerful, logical tool will support large, complex networks. It is the means by which a
Coordinated Numbering Plan can be established across all Strata Net nodes including existing systems
with established numbering plans.
Network Feature Access Code
The Network Feature Access Code is similar to the Network DN but is used to access features in a remote
Strata Net node. Features may include routing features, such as Trunk Group Access and Least Cost
Routing, or user features such as Message Waiting and Paging.
The Network FAC format is:
Node ID (1~6 digits) + Local FAC (1~5 digits) + Parameters (unlimited).
For example,   access’ Node ID 789 and uses that node’s LCR () to dial directory
assistance in Boston.
Given their variability, Network Faces are usually processed without Overlap Codes. If a Node ID with an
Overlap Code has been established for local extensions, it cannot be used for feature access; a separate
Node ID must be established. If no Overlap Codes are used, one Node ID will serve for all purposes.
Services
Networking
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-41
Services
Digit Manipulation
Digit Manipulation is the term for the altering of an original string of dialed digits in order to re-route a call
or connect it to a specific service. Digit Manipulation is usually applied to the leading digits in the string
which appear left-most in written form. Strata Net uses two forms of manipulation: Overlap Codes,
described above, for inbound calls and Network Digit Modification Tables for outbound calls. The
Network Digit Modification Tables contain up to 64 treatments in each of which as many as 10 leading
digits may be deleted and as many as 23 leading digits substituted. These 64 treatments may be applied to
any of 64 Route Definitions.
Traveling Class Mark
Calling privileges, restrictions and priorities may be imposed across Strata Net using the Traveling Class
Mark. The Traveling Class Mark accompanies all calls across the network. When the call reaches its
terminating node, that node uses the Traveling Class Mark to determine whether the originator of the call is
entitled to the dialed facility. The mark is a single information element linked from the following:
•Network Class of Service
•Network DR Level
•Network Facility Restriction Level
•Network Queuing Priority Level
All nodes contain tables to translate between local and network DR Levels, Facility Restriction Levels and
Queuing Priority Levels. DRL, FRL and QPL each require two tables: one to translate from the local level
to the network level for outgoing calls and one to translate from network to local level for incoming calls.
Network Class of Service is an exception for two reasons. First, at the originating node, each station is
assigned a Network Class of Service; there is no translation. The terminating node does contain a table to
translate the received Network Class of Service to a local Class of Service but it adds parameters to the
local Class of Service before determining how to process the call. Those parameters are:
•Permission for Off-Hook Call Announce
•Ability to register System Speed Dial numbers in the terminating node
•Ability to register Class of Service Override in the terminating node and
•Trunk Group Override Access
Time of day considerations are handled at the originating node. If a call originates in a node that is in Night
Mode and terminates in another node, it will deliver the Night Mode values regardless of the condition of
the terminating node.
Path Replacement
Known also as Route Optimization and Release Link, Path Replacement makes the most efficient use of
talk paths between network nodes. For example, if a series of transfers around the network results in a
conversation between two stations in the same node, all of the tie line circuits are released and a simple
station-to-station call is established in the one node. This efficiency reduces the number of facilities to be
provided and improves transmission quality by minimizing the number of links over which loss could
occur.
Path Replacement applies to:
•Call Transfer
•Ring Transfer
•Station Call Forward
•System Call Forward
Services
Networking
9-42 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Coordinated Numbering Plan
A Coordinated Numbering Plan rationalizes the dialing patterns required of network users and relieves
them of the need to know complicated access codes to navigate the network. The basic mechanism is the
Network Directory Number described above. The combination of Node ID and Directory Number appear
to the user as simple extension dialing. The ability to overlap the two components reduces the number of
dialed digits. If it is necessary to preserve legacy extension ranges at individual nodes, a Network Access
Code can be used to resolve numbering conflicts with other nodes.
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Strata Net generates call records for incoming or outgoing calls from the nodes in which they originated or
terminated. For example, if a station user in Node 3 makes an outside call that is routed through transit
Node 2 to gateway Node 1 for connection to the public network, Nodes 1 and three generates SMDR
records; Node 2 does not.
The record in Node #3 will include the Network DN of the calling station, the dialed digits and the OLG
number and Channel Group number used to access Node #2. The record in Node #1 will include the ILG
number and Channel Group number of the Strata Net trunk on which the call was received and the PSTN
trunk to which it was connected. The record format and conditions are the same as for a single node system
using the new format adopted for Strata CTX.
Station-to-station calls across Strata Net are considered internal calls and do not generate SMDR records in
any nodes. Abandoned Call SMDR records are only generated for incoming calls over local trunks.
Unforced account codes are generated from the node in which they originated. Forced account codes are
included in the records of the node that required them. Similarly, the node which provides DISA services is
responsible for checking the DISA Security code and for generating the SMDR record. The remote node
and the transit node will not generate the SMDR record.
Plowable buffers are usually attached to each network node and polled by a central call accounting system.
If the buffer is not available, the Strata CTX will buffer up to 1000 records. Equipment numbers, time
stamps and call type designations assist the call accounting system in associating records for the same call
from different nodes.
Services
Networking
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-43
Services
Centralized Voice Mail
Users in multiple network nodes may use the services of a single voice mail system attached to one node.
The network transmits the Voice Mail ID (VMID) for remote stations and the calling conditions under
which the call is being directed to voice mail (Call Forward All Calls, Busy, etc.). The centralized voice
mail system can control message waiting indications and provide automated attendant services throughout
the network through its integration with a single node.
Centralized Voice Mail requires a Coordinated Numbering Plan throughout the network for proper
operation. The Coordinated Numbering Plan allows the voice mail to interact with the entire network as if
it were on large PBX. Basic operations include:
•Forward to Voice Mail – A forwarded, busy or unanswered extension may forward across the network
to the voice mail unit. Centralized Voice Mail notifies the voice mail of the source and calling
conditions and the voice mail returns the greeting of the original target extension. Notification of
calling conditions requires SMDI integration.
•Message Retrieval – A user can press the a Message button on his phone and be directed to a voice mail
system connected to his own or a remote node. The call will be correctly identified as a retrieval for the
correct VMID and the user will be prompted for his security code. The same operation may be
programmed for PhDNs in Station Programming.
•Message Waiting – The voice mail system can control message waiting indications in distant switches
by accessing the remote node via Node ID, registering the Message Waiting Feature Access Code and
specifying the desired station.
•Automated Attendant – Automated attendant calls to the voice mail may be transferred to stations or
services in distant nodes using the Network Directory Number. If the automated attendant transfers the
call to a busy destination, it can activate Call Transfer with Camp-on across the network simply by
hanging up.
Not all Stratagy features available to a single switch are available to remote Strata Net nodes. This is a
result of the local node being directly integrated to the voice mail system. The following table shows the
availability of voice mail features across the Strata Net.
Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems – Refer to “Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems” on
page A-3.
Centralized Attendant
It is possible for one Attendant to serve an entire Strata Net. Station users anywhere in the network can
simply dial to reach the centralized attendant. Calls to the attendant are identified with calling number
and name. Incoming trunk calls to any node in the network can be routed to one attendant and then
extended anywhere in the network.
Stratagy Feature Attached Node Remote Node
Message Lamp Control X X
Forward to Voice Mail X X
Message Retrieval X X
Automated Attendant X X
Call Record X X
Soft Keys X X (R1.3 and higher)
Transfer Direct to Voice Mail X X (R1.3 and higher)
Services
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)
9-44 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)
Network BLF is an indication on the CTX Attendant Console and Digital Telephones that an extension is
Busy, Idle or in DND over different nodes. With software release 1.3 and higher, the Primary CTX can
read the BLF information from the remote CTXs.
In order to use Network BLF, the CTX Attendant Console and Digital Telephones must have access to each
CTX by LAN/WAN and requires the IP addresses of each node/CTX. Figure 2 is a BLF/DSS networking
flow diagram. It shows you the types of connections required between the BLF servers, the Strata CTXs
and the CTX Attendant Console.
Figure 2 BLF/DSS Networking
Note The Node ID must be independent of the Station DNs for Network BLF to work.
LAN
Att.
Console 2 Att.
Console 3 Att.
Console 4
Att.
Console 1
LAN
CTX-1
(Primary) CTX-2
(Remote)
6876
CTX-3
(Remote)
Telephone BLF or DSS information from the Remote CTXs is shared with
Primary CTX over the WAN/LAN. The CTXs share trunk information over QSIG.
WAN
QSIG
(RPTU)
WAN
QSIG
(RPTU)
Services
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-45
Services
Network Attendant Console BLF
Follow these steps to program Network BLF and Figure 9-1:
Figure 9-1 Network BLF Example
Important! See steps for programming Network BLF from CTX WinAdmin and CTX Attendant Console
on the following pages.
Remote
(CTX100)
Program 916 - Set
IP Address = 192.168.16.44
Program 803 - Log. Device
= 400 (BLF), Port 11
Progra 801 - BLF Server
Port = 6000
Program 916 - Set IP
Address = 192.168.17.43
Program 803 - Log. Device
= 400 (BLF), Port 11
Program 801 - BLF Server
Port = 6000
Program 916 - Set IP
Address = 192.168.18.53
Program 803 - Log. Device
= 400 (BLF), Port 11
Program 801 - BLF Server
Port = 6000
QSIG QSIG
Primary
(CTX670-1)
Remote
(CTX670-2)
6879
LAN / Switch / Hub LAN / Switch / Hub LAN / Switch / Hub
IP-NetworkIP-Network
Program 656
Node ID: 16
Program 656
Node ID: 17
Program 656
Node ID: 18
Services
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)
9-46 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Step 1: Program Network BLF from WinAdmin for CTX Attendant Console
Perform the all of the following steps on the local CTX first, then repeat them on each of the remote CTXs.
1. Create the Node ID in “102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3.
Note If you have already created the Node ID using QSIG, skip Step 1 and go to the next step.
2. Set up the IP address of the primary CTX using Program “916 IP Configuration” on page 10-14.
3. From the Program menu, select Services > Networking > Node ID to set the Primary Node ID. Refer to
“656 Node ID Assignment” on page 9-54.
4. From the Program menu, select System > I/O Device. Refer to Program “803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port
Assignments” on page 4-28.
• 00 Logical Device No. = 400 (BLF)
• 01 Device Connection = LAN
• 02 Device Port No. = 11
5. Define the LAN Device port number (11 in the example above). Select System > I/O Device, select the
LAN Device tab. Refer to “801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment” on page 4-30. Make the
following selections:
• 00 LAN Port No. = 11
• 01 Protocol = TCP
• 02 PC Operation Type = Server
• 03 Data Flow = Asynchronization
• 04 Server Port No. = 6000
• 05~08 Client IP 1-4 No. = Default
• 09 Client Port No. = Default
• 10 Read Retry No. = 1
• 11 Write Retry No. = 1
Services
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-47
Services
Step 2: From CTX Attendant Console Set up BLF Network
Important! Complete Step 1:“Program Network BLF from WinAdmin for CTX Attendant Console” on
page 9-46 before you begin the following steps.
1. Click Administration view.
2. Select the BLF Network Control
tab.
3. Enter the IP addresses of primary
and remote CTXs.
4. Enter the Port Number (6000).
5. In the Name field, enter the Node
Identified. For example, names
such as Dallas, Chicago, etc.,
depending on where the remote
CTXs are located.
6. Enter the Refresh rate. This is the
frequency that the software will
poll the remote site.
7. Click Add.
8. Enter the data for the other nodes,
then click OK.
Notes
•When you make the directory in the CTX Attendant Console and when entering user information, add
the Node ID as prefix to the extension.
•When you start the CTX Attendant Console for the first time, a dialog box appears that requires the IP
addresses and Port numbers of each CTX.
6599
Services
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)
9-48 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Network DSS/BLF for Digital Telephones
Follow these steps to program Network BLF/DSS and Figure 9-2:
Figure 9-2 Network BLF Example
Important! See steps for programming Network BLF from CTX WinAdmin on the following pages
Remote
(CTX100)
Program 916 - Set
IP Address = 192.168.16.44
Program 803 - Log. Device
= 400 (BLF), Port 11
Progra 801 - BLF Server
Port = 6000
Program 670 - Assign
Remote Nodes Data
Program 916 - Set IP
Address = 192.168.17.43
Program 803 - Log. Device
= 400 (BLF), Port 11
Program 801 - BLF Server
Port = 6000
Program 670 - Assign
Primary & Remote Node
Data CTX100
Program 916 - Set IP
Address = 192.168.18.53
Program 803 - Log. Device
= 400 (BLF), Port 11
Program 801 - BLF Server
Port = 6000
Program 670 - Assign
Primary & Remote Node
Data CTX670
QSIG QSIG
Primary
(CTX670-1)
Remote
(CTX670-2)
6877
LAN / Switch / Hub LAN / Switch / Hub LAN / Switch / Hub
IP-NetworkIP-Network
Program 656
Node ID: 16
Program 656
Node ID: 17
Program 656
Node ID: 18
Services
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-49
Services
➤Programming Network BLF from WinAdmin for Digital Telephones
Perform the all of the following steps on the local CTX first, then repeat them on each of the remote CTXs.
1. Create the Node ID in “102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3.
Note If you have already created the Node ID using QSIG, skip Step 1 and go to the next step.
2. Set up the IP address of the primary CTX using Program “916 IP Configuration” on page 10-14.
3. From the Program menu, select Services > Networking > Node ID to set the Primary Node ID. Refer to
“656 Node ID Assignment” on page 9-54.
4. From the Program menu, select System > I/O Device. Refer to Program “803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port
Assignments” on page 4-28.
• 00 Logical Device No. = 400 (BLF)
• 01 Device Connection = LAN
• 02 Device Port No. = 11
5. Define the LAN Device port number (11 in the example above). Select System > I/O Device, select the
LAN Device tab. Refer to “801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment” on page 4-30. Make the
following selections:
• 00 LAN Port No. = 11
• 01 Protocol = TCP
• 02 PC Operation Type = Server
• 03 Data Flow = Asynchronization
• 04 Server Port No. = 6000
• 05~08 Client IP 1-4 No. = Default
• 09 Client Port No. = Default
• 10 Read Retry No. = 1
• 11 Write Retry No. = 1
6. Verify the DSS refresh time in System > System Timer, FB 23 – System Timer Network DSS Refresh
Timer. Refer to “104 System Timer” on page 4-10.
7. From each remote CTX, repeat steps 1~6 to set up Network BLF.
Services
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)
9-50 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Network DSS (R1.3 and higher)
When you set up Network DSS, you assign the DSS numbers in the primary CTX first. Then, once you
network the remote CTXs, they will use the DSS numbers set in the primary CTX.
An example of how to set up Network DSS is shown in Figure 9-3. In this example, if CTX670-1 is the
primary/host site, then CTX670-2 and CTX100 become remote sites.
Figure 9-3 Network DSS Example
Important! See steps for programming Network DSS from CTX WinAdmin on the following page.
Remote
(CTX100)
Program 916 - Set
IP Address = 192.168.16.44
Program 803 - Log. Device
= 500 (DSS), Port 12
Progra 801 - BLF Server
Port = 3000
Program 670 - Assign
Remote Nodes Data
Program 916 - Set IP
Address = 192.168.17.43
Program 803 - Log. Device
= 500 (DSS), Port 12
Program 801 - BLF Server
Port = 3000
Program 670 - Assign
Primary & Remote Node
Data CTX100
Program 916 - Set IP
Address = 192.168.18.53
Program 803 - Log. Device
= 500 (DSS), Port 12
Program 801 - BLF Server
Port = 3000
Program 670 - Assign
Primary & Remote Node
Data CTX670
QSIG QSIG
Primary
(CTX670-1)
Remote
(CTX670-2)
6878
LAN / Switch / Hub LAN / Switch / Hub LAN / Switch / Hub
IP-NetworkIP-Network
Program 656
Node ID: 16
Program 656
Node ID: 17
Program 656
Node ID: 18
Services
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-51
Services
➤Program Network DSS from WinAdmin
1. Create the Node ID in “102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3.
Note If you have already created the Node ID using QSIG, skip Step 1 and go to the next step.
2. Set up the IP address of the primary CTX using Program “916 IP Configuration” on page 10-14.
3. From the Program menu, select Services > Networking > Node ID to set the Primary Node ID. Refer to
“656 Node ID Assignment” on page 9-54.
4. Program the CTI Port for Network DSS. From the Program menu, select System > I/O Device. Refer to
“803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments” on page 4-28.
• 00 Logical Device No. = 500 (DSS)
• 01 Device Connection = LAN
• 02 Device Port No. = 12
5. Define the LAN Device port number (12 in the example above). Select System > I/O Device, select the
LAN Device tab. Refer to “801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment” on page 4-30. Make the
following selections:
• 00 LAN Port No. = 12
• 01 Protocol = UDP
• 02 PC Operation Type = Server
• 03 Data Flow = Asynchronization
• 04 Server Port No. = 3000
• 05~08 Client IP 1-4 No. = Default
• 09 Client Port No. = Default
• 10 Read Retry No. = 1
• 11 Write Retry No. = 1
• Select FB01 Protocol to UDP and FB04 Server Port No. to 3000. FB04 is the DSS Server Port. All
other parameter can have defaults.
6. Make sure the Remote Node IP address and Network DSS port Number are consistent. From the
Program Menu, select Services > Networking > Remote Node Data Assignment (Program 670).
7. In Program 670, enter the parameters as follows:
Remote Node ID = 17. (This is a QSIG Node ID. In the example above these Node IDs are 16, 17
and 18.
Remote Node IP Address = IP address of the remote CTX. Using Node 17 in this example, the IP
address is 192.168.1.43.
Remote Node Port No. = 3000. This port number is the Network DSS port number. The Network DSS
port number can be any available port. All Network DSS ports should also be the same, i.e; 3000 in the
above example.
8. Verify the DSS refresh time in System > System Timer, FB 23 – System Timer Network DSS Refresh
Timer. Refer to “104 System Timer” on page 4-10.
9. Assign the DSS Remote Node feature key using Program 205, 213 and 215. Refer to “Key” on
page 5-15. DSS button can have up to seven digits, so Node ID can be included. Before R1.3 five digits
were the maximum allowed in a DSS button.
10. From each remote CTX, repeat steps 1~9 to set up Network DSS.
Services
Network Feature Content
9-52 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Network Feature Content
The following is a list of Strata CTX features that operate across multi-node Strata Net connections.
* Features that can be limited by Network Class of Service.
•Account Codes Forced/Voluntary/Verified* •Do Not Disturb *
•Automatic Busy Redial* •Do Not Disturb Override*
•Automatic Camp-on •Door Lock Control
•Automatic Release of CO •E911
•Call Forward •Executive Override*
•Call Park Orbits Park and Page •External Ring Repeat
•Call Transfer •Flexible Numbering
•Call Transfer With Camp-on* •Intercept
•Call Waiting •Least Cost Routing *
•Caller Identification •Message Waiting
•Class Of Service •Offhook Camp-on*
•Conference On Hold •Outgoing Call
•Conferencing •Recall Treatment
•Consultation Hold Manual •Speed Dial System/Station
•Credit Card Calling* •Station CO Line Access
•Day/Night Modes* •Station To Station Connection
•Dial For Quick Launch •System Call Forward
•Dialed Number Identification Service •Tandem CO Line Connection
•Digital PAD •DR
•Direct Inward Dialing •Toll Restriction Override by System Speed
Dial
•Direct Inward System Access •Traveling Class Of Service
•Direct Inward Termination •Trunk Access*
•Directory Number Presentation •Trunk Group Access*
•DISA Security Code Revision*
Services
Configuration
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-53
Services
Configuration
RPTU2 PCB
The Strata CTX uses a new Primary Rate Interface PCB that can terminate either a Strata Net connection
or a public PRI: the RPTU-2A. The RPTU-2A is backwardly compatible with the RPTU-1A for standard
ISDN operation. The mode of operation (standard or QSIG) is controlled by a programming parameter
named “Private Service Type.” This parameter must be chosen in establishing both incoming and OLGs.
Circuits
Two Strata Net nodes are connected to each other by a full or fractional DS1. The QSIG basic call
convention will select one DS0 to act as the “D” channel and the remainder as “B” channels. This allows
the interconnecting DS1(T-1) to act as a Primary Rate Interface. The appropriate command set is in new
firmware on the card to allow Strata CTX for signal according to CPE-to-CPE rules which differ from
CPE-to-PSTN rules. Fractional DS1s may consist of 8, 12 or 16 channels including the “D” channel.
The most common type of interconnection is a leased DS-1 from a Common Carrier such as the primary
telephone company or long distance provider. DS1s may also be created across fiber optics, Frame Relay
equipment, IP networks or other transport media using dealer-supplied equipment as long as they conform
to the following specifications.
•1.544 MBPS
•B8ZS
•ESF
Nodes may also be connected directly over two copper pairs to a maximum distance of 738 feet. See the
Strata CTX Installation and Maintenance Manual for pin configurations and other details.
Strata Net Programming Overview
Follow the sequences below to program Strata Net.
Step 1: Basic Incoming Network Calls
1. Establish the Node ID as part of the Flexible Numbering Plan (Program 102).
Note Node ID is located under 01 Feature Name as “Node ID (CTX network number prefix).”
2. Establish up to four Local Node IDs (Program 656) for the primary node. Each Node ID can have a
unique Overlap Code.
3. Process the digit string as manipulated by the Overlap Code from Flexible Numbering Plan. The
resulting number can be an extension call, feature activation, or tandem call.
Step 2: Basic Outgoing Network Calls
1. Establish the Node ID as part of 102 Flexible Numbering Plan.
2. Use Program 651 Routing Plan Analysis Table Assignment to associate each Remote Node ID with a
Private Route Choice table which will provide up to six routing choices to the desired node.
3. Use Program 653 to define a Private Route Choice table. The table should contain up to six Route
Definitions. The system steps through these Route Definitions in terminating hunt fashion to find a
route to the desired private networking node.
4. Use Program 654 to define a Private Route Definition consisting of an OLG and a pointer into the
Private Digit Modification table.
5. Use Program 655 to set up Private Digit Modification tables containing up to 64 entries. Each entry
specifies the number of leading digits to be deleted from the dialed number and the dial string to be
added as leading digits.
Services
656 Node ID Assignment
9-54 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
656 Node ID Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 102 page 4-3
This program assigns up to four Network Node IDs to process incoming network calls. Each Node ID has
an overlap code. Strata CTX will substitute the Overlap Code for the Node ID before processing the call
further. A Network Directory Number consists of a Node ID and the desired node.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Networking > Node ID.
2. Enter Program 656 data.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 Primary Node ID
Enter the Primary Node ID for this node. This Node ID identifies the node
used for administering Strata Net.
Possible values: Up to 6 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Primary Overlap Code
Enter the Overlap Code associated with the Primary Node ID. An Overlap
Code is the string of digits that replaces the Node ID to continue call
processing.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Node ID 2 Enter Node ID 2 for this node.
Possible values: Up to 6 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Overlap Code 2 Enter Overlap Code for Node ID 2.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
03 Node ID 3 Enter Node ID 3 for this node.
Possible values: Up to 6 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Overlap Code 3 Enter Overlap Code for Node ID 3.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
04 Node ID 4 Enter Node ID 4 for this node.
Possible values: Up to 6 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Overlap Code 4 Enter Overlap Code for Node ID 4.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Services
670 Remote Node Data Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-55
Services
670 Remote Node Data Assignment
This command assigns the Remote node data (requires R1.3 and higher).
1. From the Program Menu,
click Services >
Networking > Remote
Node Data.
2. Enter Program 670 data.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Remote Node ID Enter the Remote Node ID for this node.
Possible values: Up to 6 digits (default = no value)
Remote Node IP Address Enter the remote node IP address.
Possible values: Up to 15 digits (default = no value)
Remote Node Port Number Enter remote node port number.
Possible values: 0~65535 (default = no value)
Services
651 Private Routing Plan Analysis
9-56 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
651 Private Routing Plan Analysis
Prerequisite Program: 656 page 9-54 and 306 page 6-4
Assigns the Node IDs to Route Choice Tables for Private Networking.
1. Complete the “Private Routing Plan
Analysis Table Record Sheet” on
page D-48.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Networking > Route
Plan Analysis.
3. Enter the Node ID number (six digit
numeral) to add to the Private
Routing Plan Analysis Table.
Click List to see a summary list of
programmed Node IDs or click
Copy to copy data from an existing
Node ID.
4. Select the Private Route Choice
Table in which to add the Node ID entered in Step 3 above. Possible values are 1~64, 0 = Delete and
default = 0.
5. Click Submit.
Private Route Choice Definition
Program Number(s): 653, 654 and 655
Use these command to define Private Network Routing parameters.
1. Complete the “Route Choice
Definition Record Sheet” on
page D-49.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Networking > Route
Choice Definition.
3. Enter Program 653, 654 and 655
data.
4. Select the Private Network.
5. Click Submit.
Services
Private Route Choice Definition
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-57
Services
653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Use this command to define a Private Route Choice Table. A Private Route Choice Table contains up to six
Route Definitions. The system will step through these Route Definitions in terminating hunt fashion to find
a route to the desired private networking node. There may be up to 64 Route Choice Tables.
654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Use this command to define a Private Route Definition. A Private Route Definition consists of an OLG and
a pointer into the Private Digit Modification Table that contains the dialed digits to be deleted and/or
inserted before being communicated to the distant node.
655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns Digit Modification Tables for Private Networking.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Pvt Ntwk Route Choice
Table Number
Select the Private Network Route Choice Table Number.
Possible values: 1~64 (default = no value)
01~06 Route Definition
Tables
Select Route Definition Tables 1~6 to be used for this Private Network Route
Choice.
Possible values: 1~64, 0 = delete (default)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Private Network Route
Definition Select the number of the Private Route Definition to be defined or deleted.
Possible values: 1~64 (default = no value)
01 Outgoing Line Group Select the OLG to be used by this route.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.), 0 = delete (default = 0)
02 Digit Modification Table Select the Digit Modification Table to be used by this route.
Possible values: 1~64, 0 = delete (default)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Private Network Digit
Modification Table Select the Private Network Digit Modification Table to be defined.
Possible values: 1~64 (default = no value)
01 Deleted Digits Select the number of leading digits to be deleted.
Possible values: 1~10, 0 = delete (default)
02 Insert Leading Digits Select the leading digits to be inserted.
Possible values: Up to 23 digits (default = no value)
Services
Mapping
9-58 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Mapping
Program Number(s): 657, 658, 659 and 660
The following programs map network and primary COS, DRL, FRL and QPL settings to each other.
1. Complete the “Network Mapping
Record Sheets” on page D-50.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Networking > Mapping.
3. Enter Program 657 data.
4. Enter Program 658 data.
5. Enter Program 659 data.
6. Enter Program 660 data.
7. Click Submit.
657 Network COS Mapping Table
Prerequisite Program: None
This table maps a Network COS received as part of a Traveling Class Mark to a local Class of Service for
access to local services. There is no translation of Outgoing Network COS.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Ntwk COS Enter the Network COS to be mapped.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = no value)
01 Local COS Enter the Local COS to be used in place of the received Network COS.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = no value)
02 Off-hook Call Announce Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can activate OCA.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
03 System Speed Dial
Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can use a System
Speed Dial number to make an outgoing call.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
04 COS Override
Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can use Class of
Service Override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
05 TGAC Override
Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can override local
Trunk Group Access Control. Typically an attendant function.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Services
661 Network DN Table Assignment
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-59
Services
658/659/660 Network DRL/FRL/QPL Mapping Tables
Prerequisite Program: None
These commands are used to establish two mapping tables to equate local DRLs, FRLs and QPLs with
network DRLs, FRLs and QPLs for both outbound and inbound network calls.
661 Network DN Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This program assigns the PDN, PhDN or
Pilot DNs to a CTX node ID. This include
all DNs in all CTX nodes on the CTX
network, except the DNs in the node you
are currently programming (This feature is
available with CTX R2.2 or higher and
CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and higher.).
This enables someone in one node to call
an extension in another node, without
having to dial the node ID number. The
caller dials the extension and the system
appends the Node ID. This function is
transparent to the caller and the dialed
party. (See Example.)
➤In Program 661, enter a Network DN,
followed by it’s node MD. Repeat this process for each DN.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Type Select the Network DRL/FRL/QPL type.
Possible values: Outbound or Inbound (default = no value)
•Outbound – maps a local DRL/FRL/QPL to a Network DRL/FRL/QPL.
•Inbound – maps a Network DRL/FRL/QPL to a local DRL/FRL/QPL.
Network DRL/FRL/QPL Enter the Network DRL/FRL/QPL (for outbound) you want to map to a Local
DRL/FRL/QPL.
Possible values: DRL/FRL/QPL1~DRL/FRL/QPL16 (default = 1~16)
Local DRL/FRL/QPL Enter the Local DRL/FRL/QPL (for inbound) you want to map to the Network
DRL/FRL/QPL selected in the Network DRL/FRL/QPL field above.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1~16)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Network DN Enter the PDN, PhDN or Pilot DNs that should be assigned to a CTX Node ID. This
include all DNs in all CTX Nodes on the CTX network, except the DNs in the node
you are currently programming.
Possible values: Five ASCII characters max. (Default = No Data)
01 Node ID Enter the CTX Node ID that should be assigned to the DN.
Possible values: Six ASCII characters max. (Default = No Data)
6958
Services
219 Network DSS Notify Data Delete
9-60 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Example
Refer to the illustration below and this example: When programming the DNs for telephones in Node
10, enter the DNs and their node ID numbers for DNs in nodes 11 and 12 into the Network DN table,
Program 661.
Notes
• If the same DN exists in more than one Node (i.e., DN 400), it should not be placed in the Node ID tables
of any node. The user must dial the Node ID where the DN is located, plus the DN to call the DN.
• When using Network DN tables for CTX networking, assign the Primary Node ID in Program 656, but
do not assign overlap codes.
The networking tables shows the DN numbers and node ID that have been assigned in this table.
219 Network DSS Notify Data Delete
This program lets you disable the DSS function for the node ID entered in this screen.
Important! Don’t use this program unless requested by Toshiba Technical Support.
1. From the Program Menu, click Services > Networking > Network DSS Notify Data Delete.
2. Enter the Node ID of the Network DSS key Notify Data to be deleted.
Node 11
6995
202200
400301
300400
Node 10
201
400
QSIG/Non-QSIG
QSIG/Non-QSIG
QSIG/Non-QSIG
302
Node 12
DN Node
202 11
300 11
201 12
302 12
Node 10
Network DN
Table (Prog. 661)
DN Node
200 10
202 11
300 11
Node 12
Network DN
Table (Prog. 661)
DN Node
200 10
301 10
201 12
302 12
Node 11
Network DN
Table (Prog. 661)
6959
Services
Strata Net QSIG Over IP
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-61
Services
Strata Net QSIG Over IP
To use programs 671 and 672, refer to “Strata Net over IP Programming Guidelines” on page A-13.
671 IP Address Convert Table
1. From the Program Menu, click Services
> Networking > Network Over IP.
2. Enter Program 671 data.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Remote Node ID Enter the Node ID of the remote CTX that the primary CTX should route to in
the IP Private Network.
Possible values: Up to six digits.
01 BIPU-Q IP Address
Route 1 Enter the IP Address of the remote BIPU-Q IP that should be routed to first.
Possible values: 0~255
02 BIPU-Q IP Address
Route 2 Enter the IP Address of the remote BIPU-Q IP that should be used if all
channels in the first BIPU-Q route is busy or disabled.
Possible values: 0~255
03 BIPU-Q IP Address
Route 3 Enter the IP Address of the remote BIPU-Q IP that should be used if all
channels in BIPU-Q Route 1 and 2 are busy or disabled.
Possible values: 0~255
04 BIPU-Q IP Address
Route 4 Enter the IP Address of the remote BIPU-Q IP that should be used if all
channels in BIPU-Q Route 1, 2 and 3 are busy or disabled.
Possible values: 0~255
05 BIPU-Q IP Address
Route 5 Enter the IP Address of the remote BIPU-Q IP that should be used if all
channels in BIPU-Q Route 1, 2, 3 and 4 are busy or disabled.
Possible values: 0~255
06 BIPU-Q IP Address
Route 6 Enter the IP Address of the remote BIPU-Q IP that should be used if all
channels in BIPU-Q Route 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are busy or disabled.
Possible values: 0~255
Services
Strata Net QSIG Over IP
9-62 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
672 Node ID Detail Information
This command assigns the parameters to the is used by BIPU-Q1As at the remote nodes connecting to the
BIPU-Q1A in the local node over IP Private Networking.
Important!
• These parameters must match all nodes on the IP network.
• When setting Node ID assignments on an IP QSIG network, the Node ID assignment settings for
each node on an end-to-end connection must be the same.
• Whenever Node ID assignment change are made for IP telephones or IP QSIG Node IDs, Toshiba
recommends pressing the reset button on the BIPU to assure the changes take effect.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Networking >
Network Over IP.
2. Click Detailed Info tab.
3. Enter Program 672 data.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Remote Node ID Node ID of remote CTX connected to this CTX with BIUP-Q, IP networking.
Possible values: Up to six digits.
01 IP Protocol Type Select the desired IP protocol to be used by the BIUP-Q1A at the remote
node. This parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection
on the IP network.
Possible values: IPQSIG (default), H.323 (Do not use; H.323 is not available)
02 Voice Packet Table Select the desired voice packet configuration table number (programmed in
this CTX) to be used by the BIUP-Q1A at the remote node. Voice Packet
tables are configured in Program 152
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX100 and CTX670 Basic)
1~256 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 1)
Services
Strata Net QSIG Over IP
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-63
Services
03 TCP Connection
Release Select whether to release TCP connection when the Call was released. TCP
release should be enabled for normal IP calling operation.
This parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the
IP network.
Possible values: Enable (default) or disable
Notes
•If disabled, the TCP connection is connected continually.
•This parameter is normally used with its default, which means TCP
connection is established and released for each call. If only two nodes on
Strata Net over IP network, this parameter should be set to Disable which
means TCP connection is always established.
04 H.323 Fast Connection e Fast connection should be enabled for H.323 protocol only when the remote
end has this this option enabled. This should be disabled for IP Qsig. Protocol
Possible values: Enable (default) or disable
05 Channel Negotiation Select whether channel negotiation for Call Control is applied or not. This
parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the IP
network. This programming is applied only to H.323 protocol.
Possible values: Enable or disable (default)
06 Audio Codec Select the desired audio codec type. Important, G.711 must be used for
transmission of end-to-end DTMF signaling. G.711 provides the highest voice
quality but requires the most bandwidth.
This parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the
IP network.
Possible values: G711(default) or G729A
07 DTMF Translation Select of whether DTMF translation by the Control Channel is enabled or not.
This parameter should be enabled when using G.729A codecs and disable if
using G.711 codecs for end-to-end DTMF signaling.
This parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the
IP network.
Possible values: Enable or disable (default)
08 E911 Priority If E911 calls originated from this CTX should be sent over the IP network to the
selected remote node, enter the E911 priority assignment that should be used
for the selected remote node. Assign 0 or 1~5.
Assign 1, the highest priority, to the remote node that has the main CAMA or
ISDN E911 connection.; 2~5 reduces the E911prioity with 5 providing the
lowest priority - these priorities should be used for alternate network routing of
E911 calls.
If E911calls should not be sent over the IP network to the selected node,
assign 0 as the E911 priority.
Note If two or more remote nodes have the same priority, E911calls will route
to the CTX with the lowest node number.
Possible values: 0 (default) or 1~5
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Services
Strata Net QSIG Over IP
9-64 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Miscellaneous
The Strata CTX system can monitor SMDR, Call History and Behind Centrex. Use the following programs
to set up these services.
SMDR
The following enable programming for SMDR, Call History and Behind Connection settings.
Program Number(s): 512, 513 and 514
The following programs assigns system-wide SMDR parameters.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Miscellaneous >
SMDR.
2. Enter Program 512 data.
3. Enter Program 513 data.
4. Enter Program 514 data.
5. Click Submit.
512 SMDR for System Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This table translates a Network COS received as part of a Traveling Class Mark to a local Class of Service
for access to local services. There is no translation of Outgoing Network COS.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 Caller ID Field Include Caller ID records in SMDR.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
02 B-Record for
Abandoned Call Generate B Record for an abandoned call.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
03 Automatic Number
Identification (ANI) Include ANI in SMDR record.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
04 Authorization Code Include authorization codes in SMDR records.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
05 End-of-Record CR Include a Carriage Return (CR) at the end of an SMDR record.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
Services
Strata Net QSIG Over IP
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-65
Services
513 SMDR for ILG Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This program assigns SMDR parameters for ILGs.
514 SMDR for OLG Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns SMDR parameters for OLGs.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Incoming Line Group
(ILG) Specify the ILG for which to set SMDR parameters.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Generate SMDR
Records Enable to generate records for this ILG
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
02 DNIS Field Indication Check to include DNIS information in records for this ILG.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
03 B Record for Incoming
Call Enable B Record generation for incoming calls with or without incoming SMDR
being enabled.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
04 Abandoned Call Record
Output Enable record generation for abandoned calls. Incoming SMDR must be
turned on. Abandoned call records will be generated whether or not incoming
SMDR has been set.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
05 Display Transferred Call
Records Select whether to charge a transferred call to the source or destination party.
Possible values: Source (default) or Destination
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Outgoing Line Group
(OLG) Specify the OLG for which to set SMDR parameters.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
02 Outgoing Records Generate records for outgoing calls. SMDR Record Display must be Enabled.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
03 Charged Station Apply the SMDR record of a transferred call to its source or its destination.
Possible values: Source (default) or Destination
Services
Strata Net QSIG Over IP
9-66 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
577 Caller History
Prerequisite Program: None
Accounting Codes need to be specified for the number of digits that are expected to be used for registering
the number. This allows the dialing within the system to proceed automatically once the correct account
code is dialed, the following numbers are then dialed digits used for making the phone call. A second
length is provided to allow the number of digits to be used for verification of the code to be less than the
total code entered, thus the code may contain two parts, one required and one part optional to the user.
1. Complete the “Call History Record
Sheet” on page D-51.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Miscellaneous > Behind
Connection.
3. Click Submit.
650 Behind Centrex Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This feature allows Strata CTX to connect to the station side of a PBX or Centrex using a physical loop
trunk interface. DR and Least Cost Routing may need to account for access codes required by the PBX or
Centrex before connecting to the public network.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Ckt Type/Number Enter the Circuit Type and number. See the Table 9-1 below.
Possible values: Up to 6 digits (default = no value)
01 Primary DN Enter Station DN to store call history data.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
Table 9-1 Circuit Type Code Definitions
Circuit Name Circuit Type Circuit Number Example
DN 1 0~99999 (DN) if DN is 200, value is 1200
CO 2 1~264 (Trunk Number) if CO is 30, value is 230
GCO 3 1~128 (GCO Key Group Number) if GCO is 50, value is 350
POOL 4 1~128 (POOL Key Group Number) if POOL is 80, value data is 480
Services
Strata Net QSIG Over IP
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-67
Services
1. Complete the “Behind Centrex
Assignment Record Sheet” on page D-52
below.
2. From the Program Menu, click Services >
Miscellaneous > Behind Centrex
Assignment.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 OLG Number Select OLG that is attached to a Centrex (or other PBX).
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Behind Centrex Enable Behind Centrex Operation for this OLG.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
02 Assume 9 Enable the Assume 9 feature.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Services
External Devices
9-68 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
External Devices
Door Phones
Program Number(s): 507, 576 and 508
This command assigns Door Phone parameters.
1. Complete the “Door Phone
Assignment Record Sheet” on
page D-53.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > External Device > Door
Phones.
3. Enter Door Phone Number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – View a summary list of
programmed Door Phones.
• Create – Assigns a new Door
Phone with default settings.
• Copy – Copies settings from an
existing Door Phone.
• Delete – Deletes a Door Phone.
4. Enter remaining Program 507 data.
5. Enter Program 576 data.
6. Enter Program 508 data.
7. Click Submit.
507 Door Phone Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment configures Door Phone Control Boxes (DDCBs) and Door Phones (MDFBs). DDCBs can
be connected to ADKU, PDKU and/or BDKU interface PCBs. Up to three MDFBs can be connected to
one DDCB. A Door lock control relay may be assigned to the B output of the DDCB in place of a MDFB
door phone (see “508 Door Lock Control Assignment” on page 9-70).
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Door Phone Number Enter the door phone number.
Possible values: 1~6 (CTX100), 1~9 (CTX670 Basic),
1~24 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
Door phone numbering for both CTX100 and CTX670 is as follows:
•DDCB 1 provides door phone numbers 1~3, 2 can be a door phone or door
lock.
•DDCB 2 provides door phone numbers 4~6, 5 can be a door phone or door
lock.
Services
External Devices
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-69
Services
Door phone numbering for CTX670 only is as follows:
•DDCB 3 provides door phone numbers 7~9, 8 can be a door phone or door
lock.
•DDCB 4 provides door phones 10~12, 11can be a door phone or door lock.
•DDCB 5 provides door phones 13~15, 14 can be a door phone or door lock.
•DDCB 6 provides door phones 16~18, 17 can be a door phone or door lock.
•DDCB 7 provides door phones 19~21, 20 can be a door phone or door lock.
•DDCB 8 provides door phones 22~24, 23 can be a door phone or door lock.
DDCBs are numbered by the system automatically by DDCB Equipment (Shelf/
Slot/Circuit). DDCB1 is assigned to the lowest DDCB Equipment and DDCB2 to
the next lowest, etc.
If DDCB Circuit B is set to Door Lock, a Door Phone cannot be set.
01 DDCB Equipment No. Enter the DDCB equipment number to which the Door phone should be assigned.
Possible values: xx = cabinet 01 (CTX100), 01~02 (CTX670 Basic), 01~07
(CTX670 Exp.);
yy = slot 01~8 (CTX100) 01~10 (CTX670);
zz = circuit 01~16 (default = no value)
Example: If the DDCB interface should be connected to a PDKU or BDKU/BDKS
in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Notes
•This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the BDKU/BDKS or PDKU
interface PCB to which the DDCB is to be connected.
•If a PDN is assigned to the DDCB equipment number it must be deleted, using
Program 201, before attempting to assign the DDCB console.
Cabinet numbers:
•CTX100 – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•CTX670 – Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•CTX100 – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
•CTX670 – Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
02 Tenant Number Select the Tenant Number for which the door phone should ring over external
page in the system Night mode.
Possible values: 1~2 (CTX100); 1~8 (CTX670); (default = 1)
04 Ring Duration Select the time that the door phone should ring destination devices when the door
phone button is pressed. The ring time can be 3 to 30 seconds set in 3 second
intervals - each 3 second interval provides one ring to the destination. Destination
devices include selected DNs and Page groups.
Possible values: 3~30 (default = 9)
05 LCD Name Display Enter the Door Phone name that should display on LCD telephones when the
door phone rings the telephones; or, when the telephone calls the door phone.
Possible values: Up to 16 characters (default = no value)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Services
External Devices
9-70 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
576 Door Phone Night Ring Over External Page
This assignment sets the Page Group that should ring during the system Night Mode when a door phone
button is pressed. The assignment can be made for Tenant 1 only.
508 Door Lock Control Assignment
This assignment is used to configure up to 10 door lock control relays. The contacts of these relays are
used to control electrical door locks. One door lock relay can be assigned to each of the eight Door Phone
Control Boxs (DDCB, Port -B) and/or one to each of the two BIOU PCBs (any one of the four control
relays).
Note If a door lock is assigned to a DDCB, the second jack (Port B) will provide the door lock relay
contacts. This jack can not be used to connect an MDFB door phone.
06 Day1 Destination
07 Day2 Destination
08 Night Destination
Select the type of destination that should ring when the door phone button is
pressed during the system Day1, Day2 or Night mode.
Possible values: None (default), DN or
Paging Group 1~4 (CTX100); 1~8 (CTX670 Basic); 1~16
(CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the Destination Number. If the ring destination type is a PDN or PhDN, enter
the directory number. If the ring destination type is Page, enter the Page Group
number.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Tenant Number Select the system Tenant number to be assigned Door Phone to Page Group/
Night Ringing.
Possible values: 1(CTX100 and CTX670) (default = no value)
01 Page Group Number Select the system Page Group number that should ring for the selected Tenant
when a door phone button is pressed during the system Night Mode.
Possible values: 0~4 (CTX100), 0~8 (CTX670 Basic), 0~16 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Door Lock Number Enter the door lock control number to configure.
Possible values: 1~4 (CTX100); 1~5 (CTX670 Basic);
1~10 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Interface Type Enter the system Page Group number that should ring for the selected tenant
when a door phone button is pressed during the system Night Mode.
Possible values: None (default), BIOU or DDCB
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Services
External Devices
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-71
Services
02 BIOU Relay Number Assign BIOU control relay as a Door Lock Relay. This relay activates when the
Door Lock button is pressed or a Door Lock access code is dialed.
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
BIOU1 provides control relays 1~4
BIOU2 provides control relays 5~8.
Note The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this
relay operation BIOU2 is installed as default in a virtual equipment
position Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20, in Program 100. To install an
actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the programming
telephone to remove the virtual BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2
in Cabinet 01/slot 01~08 in the normal manner. BIOU relay functions are
assigned in “515 View BIOU Control Relay Assignments” on page 9-72.
This field is required if you selected BIOU in 01 Interface Type above.
03 DDCB Equipment No. Enter the DDCB equipment number to which the Door Lock should be assigned.
This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the BDKU/BDKS or PDKU
interface PCB to which the DDCB is to be connected.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01 (CTX100), 01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)
yy = Slot 01~08 (CTX100), 01~10 (CTX670);
zz = Circuit 01~16 (default = no value)
Example: If the DDCB interface should be connected to a PDKU or BDKU/BDKS
in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Notes
•This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the BDKU/BDKS or PDKU
interface PCB to which the DDCB is to be connected.
•If a PDN is assigned to the DDCB equipment number it must be deleted,
using PRG201, before attempting to assign the DDCB console.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Services
External Devices
9-72 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
515 View BIOU Control Relay Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1, and 105 page 4-12
This assignment is used to view functions of the four control relays on each BIOU PCB set in Program 105
12 Night Relay and 18 Night Bell Relay; Program 508 Door Lock Control Assignment; and Program 503
19 BGM Mute Relay. The system allows up to two BIOU PCBs to provide a total of eight control relays.
The control relays can be configured as an external BGM mute control, Night Bell control, Night Mode
Control, and Door Lock Control.
Notes
•BIOU-1 relays are identified as Control Relays 1~4.
•BIOU-2 relays are identified as Control Relays 5~8.
1. From the Program Menu, click Services >
External Device > BIOU Relay Type.
2. Enter Program 515 data.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 BIOU (1 or 2) Enter the BOIU PCB number.
Possible values: 1 or 2 (default = no value)
Note BIOU 1 and BIOU 2 are assigned in Program 100 - Card Assignment.
01 BIOU Relay 1 or 5
02 BIOU Relay 2 or 6
03 BIOU Relay 3 or 7
04 BIOU Relay 4 or 8
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 1 or BIOU2, control relay 5:
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 2 or BIOU2, control relay 6:
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 3 or BIOU2, control relay 7:
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 4 or BIOU2, control relay 8:
Possible values: Not Use, Ext Paging, Night Bell, Night Relay or Door Lock
(default = no value)
•NOT USE – if the relay is not used.
•PAGE MUTE – External BGM mute control activates during an external page
(see “503 Paging Devices Group Assignments” on page 9-73).
•NIGHT BELL – Night Bell control activates during the system Night Mode only
when incoming CO lines ring (see “102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3).
•NIGHT RELAY – Night Mode Control activates continuously during the system
Night Mode (see “105 System Data” on page 4-12).
•DOOR LOCK – Door Lock Control activates when a telephone's Door Unlock
button is pressed (see “508 Door Lock Control Assignment” on page 9-70).
Services
External Devices
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 9-73
Services
503 Paging Devices Group Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 502 page 5-28
Assigns BIOU Page Zone Relays to Page Groups.
1. Complete the “Paging Device Group
Assignment Record Sheet” on page D-54.
2. From the Program Menu, click Services >
External Device > Paging Devices.
3. Enter 00 Zone Relay Number.
4. Check the Paging Groups that you wish to
activate.
5. Select the external generic relay number.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Zone Relay Number Select the BIOU Page Zone relay that should be assigned to the Page Groups
below. This relay activates whenever the selected Page Group is paged.
•BIOU1 = Zone Relays 1~4.
•BIOU2 = Zone Relays 5~8.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = no value)
01 PG 1~16 PG 16
17 All Page Group
18 All Emergency Page
Group
Check the box if the selected BIOU Page Zone Relay should activate with this
Page Group.
Possible values: On or Off (default)
19 BGM Mute Relay Assign BIOU generic relay as the BGM mute relay. This relay activates
whenever the external page is in use
•BIOU1 = Generic Relays 1~4.
•BIOU2 = Generic Relays 5~8.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 0)
Note The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this
relay operation,BIOU2 is installed, as default, in a virtual equipment
position - Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20, in Program 100. To install
an actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the
programming telephone to remove the virtual BIOU2 and then install
the actual BIOU2 in Cabinet 01 Slot 01~08 in the normal manner.
Services
550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group
9-74 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group
Prerequisite Program: Program 105
This command assigns OLGs to the Enhanced
911 Emergency Call Group.
1. Complete the “Emergency Call Group
Assignment Record Sheet” on page D-55.
2. From the Program Menu, click Services >
Enhanced 911.
3. Select Program 550 data.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
00 Emergency Call Group
Number Specify the Emergency Call Group.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = no value)
01 OLG1~08 OLG8 Specify the first through eighth OLG to be chosen for an E911 call.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no data)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 10-1
Operation
Operation 10
This chapter discusses CTX WinAdmin’s operational programming functions.
System Setup
Program Number(s): 900, 901, 902 and 915
These programs enable programmers to simulate system Power Off/On, initialize Strata CTX, check
software versions and set system clock and date.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > System Setup.
2. Click Restart CTX to reset Strata
CTX
...or click Initialize CTX to delete
programmed data and revert to
default settings.
3. 901 CTX Version data is for
viewing only.
4. Set Strata CTX date and time.
5. Click Submit.
Operation
System Setup
10-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
900 CTX Restart
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to reset hardware and initializes or restores programmed data.
CAUTION! Both commands will drop all existing calls.
Important! Choosing Initialize CTX without installing a SmartMedia Card deletes all programmed data
and returns your Strata CTX to factory default settings. All previously programmed data is
lost (See “Restoring Data from SmartMedia” on page 10-2).
Restoring Data from SmartMedia
When initializing with Initialize CTX, you can restore custom data that was previously programmed and
stored on a SmartMedia card. To do so, follow the steps below.
1. Insert a SmartMedia card that contains the Progdata folder with the default.dat file. The default.dat
file contains your custom settings and can be created by running Data Backup. See “910 Data Backup”
on page 10-13.
2. Run System Initialization by clicking Initialize CTX.
Notes
•Restoring data from the SmartMedia card may take an hour or more.
•During the restore process, the telephone LCD may display date and time data. This does not
necessarily indicate completion of the restore process.
•To verify completion of the restore process access the Programming Mode from a telephone and enter
your password. If the system enables you to continue, the data restore process is complete.
3. Remove the SmartMedia card and restart the CTX again after restoring system data. This is necessary
to reset BIBU-M, BIPU-Q, QSIG, ISDN and other advanced features.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Restart CTX Clicking on this button initializes a System Power Off/Power On sequence to reset
hardware. This is also known as an Initialize Level 2.
Initialize CTX Clicking on this button invokes an Initialize Level 1 sequence which erases
programmed data and enters default data into the Strata CTX System.
If a Toshiba SmartMedia is installed in the available slot, using this option restores
data from backed up data from the SmartMedia (see Restoring Data from
SmartMedia below).
Operation
System Setup
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 10-3
Operation
901 Display Version
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to view the Active and Standby software versions installed on the Strata CTX
system processor.
902 Set Time and Date
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to change the system clock in Strata CTX.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
System Type Displays the system that is connected.
Possible values: CTX670, CTX100 (Active only).
Active Software Displays the software versions.
These fields indicate the following:
A = Indicates software for USA, Canada or Mexico.
Rx.xx = Indicates the CTX release level.
M0011.00 = The software version number.
Note The Active software does not always have to be the same as the Standby
software, although the Active and Standby software versions may be the
same when you receive it from Toshiba.
Standby Software
DTMF, BBMS, BEXS,
BSIS, Ethernet, and
Modem
The check marks in these boxes indicate the hardware that is installed on the Strata
CTX processor.
Notes
•On the CTX100:
•Ethernet means AETS is installed on ACTU.
•Modem means AMDS is installed on ACTU.
•DTMF means ARCS is installed on ACTU.
DREC Version Indicates the DTMF/ABR software.
IPL Version Indicates basic boot-up software version.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
CTX Date Set Strata CTXs current date.
•Select current date (YYYYMMDD).
Possible values: YYYY = Year, MM = Month and DD = Day
•Current Day of Week will display once the Year, Month and Day parameters
have been entered.
Possible values: Sunday ~ Saturday (Read only) (default = no value).
•Leap Year will display based on the year entered.
Possible values: Leap, Leap Next x, where x = 1, 2 or 3. X. is the number of
years since the previous leap year (Read only) (default = no
value).
CTX Time Set Strata CTXs current time (hhmmss).
Possible values: hh = hour, mm = minutes and ss = seconds (default = no value).
Operation
908 SmartMedia
10-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
915 Regional Selection
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to select the country.
908 SmartMedia
This program enables you to format and perform file management tasks on a SmartMedia card while it is
installed in the CTX processor.
SmartMedia Card
The SmartMedia card is a small memory card that is used in digital cameras, MP3 players etc. It is
available in most retail stores that sell digital cameras, personal computers supplies, etc. The capacities of
standard SmartMedia cards are 32MB, 64MB and 128MB.
Notes
•32MB or 64MB must be used for Strata CTX maintenance functions.
•The Strata CTX does not use Compact Flash or other similar types of small storage devices.
Functions
A SmartMedia Card(s) is required for most of the important Strata CTX maintenance functions such as:
• Saving (Backup) and re-loading the programmed database of a particular Strata CTX system.
• Saving Event trace data files for troubleshooting problems.
• Updating or upgrading the Strata CTX operating software version.
Administration and Use
• SmartMedia card read/writer installed in or connected to a PC can be used to perform a basic format
and administer SmartMedia files. (SmartMedia card read/writers are available in most computer supply
retail stores. They come with USB, PCI, floppy disk, and other types of PC interfaces).
• When the SmartMedia card is used to perform one of its functions, it is installed in the SmartMedia slot
of the Strata CTX processor. It must be first formatted for Strata CTX operation by running Forced
Format (program 908).
• The Strata CTX format will create five special folders. These folders and how to use them are explained
below and in, Chapter –Maintenance.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Country Select Country.
Possible values: USA, Canada and Mexico.
Operation
908 SmartMedia
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 10-5
Operation
1. Install the SmartMedia Card into
the SmartMedia slot of the Strata
CTX processor.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > SmartMedia.
3. Click one of the following:
• Normal Format – creates any
CTX SmartMedia folder that
does not exist already. Existing
folders are not overwritten by
this procedure.
• Forced Format – erases any
existing folders and files. All
existing data is overwritten. It
then creates the five Strata
CTX folders. See “CTX
SmartMedia Folders” on page 10-6 for more information.
• Unmount – copies the CTX event and alarm log files from the CTX processor buffers (RAM) to the
SmartMedia card and then clears the buffers. It then stops CTX from writing to the SmartMedia
Card so it can be removed without damaging it.
CAUTION! Always run unmount before removing the SmartMedia card. Failure to comply can
cause damage to the card.
• Transfer – copies the CTX event and alarm log files from the CTX processor buffers (RAM) to the
SmartMedia card and then clears the buffers.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Operation Displays the procedure selected.
Possible values: Normal Format, Forced Format, Unmount and Transfer.
Completion Displays the progress and status of the procedure selected.
Possible values: Processing or Complete
CTX SmartMedia
Folder Contains files in the CTX SmartMedia Folder.
Possible values: Files listed under Admlog, Errlog, Evnttrce, Progdata, and
Program folders.
Local Folder You must manually create a new folder on your PC under ctx folder > WinAdmin >
Ctmc > Ctmc_Local > SmartMedia > New Folder
The created folders will be available in the Local Folder drop-down box. You can
store CTX SmartMedia files on these folders (See details below).
Operation
908 SmartMedia
10-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Smart Media Card FTP File Management
1. The Smart card files can be copied from the Smart media card to your CTX WinAdmin PC and vice
versa using the CTX WinAdmin Smart Media FTP function. The Smart Media card must be installed in
the CTX processor and formatted using Program 908 before it can be used. After it is installed and
formatted the CTX will automatically store files under the Admlog, Errolog and Evnttrce folder of the
Smart Media card - see CTX Smart Media folders below for details.
2. New folders must be created (with your own chosen names) on the CTX WinAdmin PC using Windows
Explorer before you can use the Smart Media FTP screen. The folders must be created under the
following path which already exists on the CTX WinAdmin PC:
CTX>WinAdmin>Ctmc_Local>SmartMedia>Your Folder Name.
3. After the SM card has been formatted and your folders have been created on the CTX WinAdmin PC
you can manage files as described below:
• Download: Copy files from the CTX Smart Media Card to your CTX WinAdmin PC.
• From the CTX Smart Media drop down, select the CTX Smart Media folder and file(s) that should
be copied to the CTX WinAdmin PC.
• From the Local Folder drop down, select the CTX WinAdmin PC folder to which the files should be
copied to - then click on Download.
• Upload: Copy files from the CTX WinAdmin PC to the CTX Smart Media card
• From the Local Folder drop down, select the CTX WinAdmin PC Smart Media folder and file(s)
that should be copied to the CTX Smart Media card.
• From the CTX Smart Media Folder drop down, select the CTX Smart Media folder to which the
files should be copied to - then click on Upload.
• Delete SM File: Delete files stored on the CTX Smart Media card.
• From the CTX Smart Media drop down, select the CTX Smart Media folder and file(s) that should
be deleted - them click Delete SM file.
CTX SmartMedia Folders
Running the Normal and Forced options of this program creates five folders on the SmartMedia card as
follows:
•Admlog – The Admlog folder saves a history of CTX Administration (programming) command entries
in xxx.SNP and xxx.DKT files. SNP files provide a log of CTX WinAdmin entries and DKT files
provide a log of programming Telephone entries.
•Errlog – System error logs are saved into this folder. See Maintenance chapter, Event Trace Control
Programs 903, 904 and 905 to set up trace.
•Evnttrce – CTX WinAdmin Event Trace files are saved into this folder.
•Progdata – Your Strata CTX programmed settings are all saved in this folder. When a backup is
performed, Strata CTX saves programmed data to the Progdata folder as a default.dat file.
Note To perform the backup function you must first delete any existing default.datfiles to allow CTX to
create a new default.dat file.
•Program – The operating software of the Strata CTX is saved in this folder as a nhs.prg file.
Operation
911 Remote Program Update
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 10-7
Operation
SmartMedia Errors
Any error causes the SmartMedia LED to flash (0.25sec ON – 0.25sec OFF continuous), except if the
SmartMedia Volume Label is UPDATE; in this case the SmartMedia LED will always flash.
SmartMedia LED Specification
SmartMedia LED, located near the SmartMedia slot on the CTX processor, is lit when the following
occurs:
• When the SmartMedia is accessed for read and write.
• When the errors are detected. See above for the detail of errors.
• When SmartMedia is inserted into the slot, SmartMedia LED blinks once. This is because the system
accesses the media to read the house keeping data. When it does not blink, it means that the
SmartMedia is not detected by the system at all. If the blink does not stop, it means that any of above
error is detected or the SmartMedia volume label is UPDATE.
911 Remote Program Update
Prerequisites
The following are the prerequisites to Remote Update:
• The SmartMedia card must be installed in the system with a Backup of the current database
(default.dat) file.
• Activation of the new software requires a Clear-reboot operation that will drop all existing calls and
will take the system out of service from 10 minutes to an hour or more, depending on the system size.
• Requires a different system software Update file (provided on the Toshiba FYI site), depending on the
type of CTX system and the type of Update that will be performed.
CTX Software Update Files
Each Strata CTX system type has two Software Update files: one for CTX WinAdmin Remote Update and
another file for Local Update (to use with the Programming Telephone procedure).
CAUTION! Using the wrong file in either case will cause the Update to fail.
CTX Software Identification
Refer to the table below to identify CTX software release and builds in software file names or when
verifying CTX software versions. For example, if the software ID is MA228, this means MA2 is equal to
CTX Release 1.02 and nn is the software build 28.
CTX Release Software ID
R1.00 and R1.01 = M01nn
R1.02 = MA2nn
R1.03 = MA3nn
R1.3 = ME0nn
R2.0 = MF0nn
nn = Software build level/number
Operation
911 Remote Program Update
10-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Step 1: Download and Extract CTX Software
The latest released version of CTX system software Update files are posted on the Toshiba FYI site
http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com. To download the software files, follow the procedure below.
Step 1A: To download CTX System Software Files from FYI
1. From the Toshiba FYI website, click on Technical Services > Software (Strata Systems). The files are
located under the heading “CTX System Software.”
2. Double-click the appropriate link.
CTX100 MXnnn Software (Remote Update)
...or CTX670 MXnnn Software (Remote Update)
3. When the Toshiba Software License Agreement screen displays, click the Agree button. The File
Download dialog box displays.
4. Select the “Save this program to disk” radio button, then click OK. The Save As screen displays.
5. Save the file to an appropriately named folder that identifies the system type and software version, then
click Save.
Step 1B: Extract Downloaded Files
1. After the file download is complete, select the Open or Open Folder button on the Download Complete
screen to extract/open the files now, or select the Close button to extract the files later.
Notes
●The WinZip Self-Extractor screen displays if you selected the Open or Open Folder button.
●If you selected Close, double-clicking the .exe file later will bring up the WinZip Self-Extractor
screen.
These files are the Remote Update self extracting .exe files:
• CTX100_R_MXnnn.exe (for CTX100 Remote Update file)
• CTX670_R_MXnnn.exe (for CTX670 Remote Update file)
2. In the “Unzip to folder:” field, make sure the path leads to the correct folder as shown below. If the path
is incorrect, click the Browse button to navigate to the appropriate path, then click the Unzip button.
3. Verify the unzip folder path for Remote Update: C:\Ctx\WinAdmin\Ctmc\Ctmc_local\Upload
4. Verify the unzipped files or folders for Remote Update: “CTX100_R_MXnnn” or
“CTX670_R_MXnnn”
Note The files can also be extracted to a temporary folder and the copied to the appropriate SmartMedia
PROGRAM folder or CTX WinAdmin Upload folder. The extracted (decompressed) files will be
approximately 15MB.
Operation
911 Remote Program Update
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 10-9
Operation
Step 2: Perform CTX WinAdmin Remote Program Update
This program enables you to send the new CTX system software to the CTX processor standby memory
(CTX670) or SmartMedia card (CTX100) while the system is in use without interrupting service. After the
new software is loaded into memory it can be activated at any time.
CAUTION!Activation of the new software requires a Clear-reboot operation that will drop all
existing calls and take the system out of service from 10 minutes to an hour or more.
CTX WinAdmin will automatically go back to the login screen. After Clear-reboot,
you must wait until the system initializes the new software and reloads the database.
After the CTX database is reloaded, you must reconnect CTX WinAdmin to the
Strata CTX and verify that the new software is loaded.
➤To get started
1. At the CTX site, install a SmartMedia card in the CTX670 or CTX100 processor. All existing files on
this SmartMedia card should be saved on a PC just in case they are needed later.
Notes
●A SmartMedia card volume label is not necessary for CTX670 or CTX100 remote update. If you
use a volume label, it cannot be PRGUPDATE or PRGRESCUE0, PRGRESCUE01, etc.
●The SmartMedia card is used to back up the customer’s latest system data (default.dat) which will
automatically reload after the software update process is complete (see Step 7 on 10-10).
●For CTX100 systems only, CTX WinAdmin loads the Program Update files onto the SmartMedia
card before making the Update software active on the ACTU processor.
●For CTX670, CTX WinAdmin loads the Program Update files onto the Standby Flash memory of
the BECU/BBCU processor before making the update software active.
2. Make sure the Remote Update folder containing the Update files (xx.nhs) is placed properly in CTX
WinAdmin Upload folder, for example
C:\Ctx\WinAdmin\Ctmc\Ctmc_local\Upload\CTX100_R_MXnnn, then you may proceed with the
Remote Update procedure.
Operation
911 Remote Program Update
10-10 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
➤To perform the Update
1. Connect the CTX WinAdmin PC to the Strata CTX system that should be updated via LAN or modem.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > Program Update. The
Program Update screen displays.
3. Complete Step 1 on the Program
Update screen by clicking on
SmartMedia (blue hyperlink).
This takes you to Program 908 –
Format/Unmount SmartMedia screen.
4. On the “Format/Unmount SmartMedia
screen,” click the Forced Format
button to format the SmartMedia card.
5. Go back to the Program Update screen
(from Program Menu, click Operation
> Program Update).
6. Complete Step 2 on the screen by clicking on Data Backup.
7. Click the green “Back Up” button to start the back up. The CTX will store the programmed data
(default.dat file) on the PROGDATA folder of the SmartMedia card.
8. After completing Data Backup, go back to the Program Update screen (from Program Menu, click
Operation > Program Update) and complete Step 3. For field descriptions refer to the table “Program
Update Screen Field Descriptions” on page 10-12
9. From the “Upload From Folders” drop-down menu on the Program Update screen, select the Remote
Update folder for the CTX100 or CTX670 to be updated.
10. Click on Start Remote Program Update. CTX service will not be interrupted during this process.
CAUTION!Do not change the CTX Admin screen after the Update process has begun. Changing
the screen, touching the keyboard etc., will cause the process to stop and fail. If for
any reason the Update process stops, you must reconnect and start the process over.
Notes
●CTX WinAdmin will send approximately 200~300 files to the Strata CTX. This will not interrupt
service on the Strata CTX.
●CTX WinAdmin indicates the status of the Remote Update process in the “Files Uploaded” box
and status toolbar. Remote Update can take from 15 minutes to more than one hour, depending on
the transmission speed of the connection (i.e; LAN or modem speed).
●After all files have been sent to the CTX completing this step of the Update process, a message
displays to indicate the new system software has been sent to the CTX processor memory
successfully (to the CTX670 standby side of flash memory or CTX100 SmartMedia PROGRAM
folder).
Operation
911 Remote Program Update
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 10-11
Operation
11.From the message screen that displays after the Remote Program Update files have been sent to the
CTX, click OK or Cancel.
Clicking OK starts the Clear-reboot process and activates the new software immediately.
Clicking Cancel enables you to activate the software later. To activate the new software later, go to the
Program Update screen and click the Clear-reboot button.
Important! Keep the SmartMedia card installed on the Strata CTX processor to allow the programmed
data to be restored automatically following the Remote Update and Clear-reboot process.
Note After clicking Clear-reboot CTX WinAdmin disconnects from the CTX. Wait 15 minutes to an hour
or more before re-connecting CTX WinAdmin to the CTX. The CTX must first initialize the new
software and reload the customer database.
CAUTION!The Clear-reboot process drops all calls and takes the Strata CTX out of service from
10 minutes to an hour, depending on the size of the Backup data file.
After Clear-reboot is complete, the Strata CTX runs on the new software version
(this is now the active side of flash memory). The Backup data has been restored
from the SmartMedia card to the Strata CTX processor memory. On the CTX670
only, the original software version is on the standby side of flash memory.
Do not turn CTX670 power off/on at this time. You must first switch the Active
software from “Trial” to “Normal”.
If the system power is turned off/on while the Active side of flash memory is in the
Trial mode, the original software will switch back to Active and the new software
will switch back to Standby. This is to provide an automatic method of switching
back to the original software version if the new version is causing problems.
12. After the CTX restarts and is functioning, re-established communication between CTX WinAdmin and
the CTX. Then go to Operation > System Setup and check that the new software is loaded on the
Active side of the processor flash RAM.
13. CTX670 only: If the CTX670 system is operating correctly, go to the Program Update screen and
switch the Active Software to “Normal” by clicking the green “Set Normal” button.
14. From the Program Menu, click Operation > System Setup screen and click the green “Restart CTX”
button or turn the Strata CTX power off/on. CTX WinAdmin will return to the Login screen.
This is necessary to reset BIPU-M, BIPU-Q, QSIG, ISDN and other advanced features.
CAUTION!Restarting CTX or turning the power off/on will drop all existing calls.
15. Test the system to verify that the new software is running properly by checking dial tone, making
incoming and outgoing calls, internal and external calls and all other peripherals, such as voice mail,
etc., are working correctly.
Operation
911 Remote Program Update
10-12 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Important!
●If power is turned off/on or if the Strata CTX is re-started before switching the Active software from
“Trial” to “Normal”, the CTX670 will switch the old software back to Active.
●It is your responsibility to verify the system is working correctly after Remote Update is complete.
Notes
●If the new version of software is not performing properly, on the CTX670 only, you can activate
the old version of software again by initiating a Clear-reboot.
●Clear-reboot swaps the active and standby sides of flash memory. You must always install a
SmartMedia card containing a copy of the current back up data before initiating a Clear-reboot or
all programmed data will be erased.
●If the CTX100 system is not working properly with the new software, you must reinstall the
original software using this Update procedure.
Table 10-1 Program Update Screen Field Descriptions
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Upload from Folder Select the Strata CTX type.
Possible values: CTX100_R_MXnnn, CTX670_R_MXnnn.
Version Number Software version number displays. Example: A102MXnnn00. See CTX Software
Identification.
Number of Files Displays number of files that have to be uploaded. This file is static.
Files Uploaded Displays number of files uploaded. This is a dynamic field and will change during
the process.
Operation
Completion View operation status.
Copied blocks View number of blocks copied.
Possible values: 0~65536 (default = 0)
Total Blocks View total blocks to be updated.
Possible values: 0~65536 (default = 0)
Active Side ID Active Side Number.
Possible values: 0 or 1 (default = 0)
Active Side Status Software status display.
Possible values: Normal (default), Trial, Fault, Don’t care or Error
Standby Side Status Standby Backup Type. This field will display only when connected to a CTX670. It
will not display when connected to CTX100.
Possible values: Normal (default), Trial, Fault, Don’t Care or Error
Operation
910 Data Backup
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 10-13
Operation
910 Data Backup
Prerequisite Program: 908 on page 4
This program enables you to backup programmed data from Strata CTX to a SmartMedia Card.
1. Install the SmartMedia Card into the designated slot of the Strata CTX processor.
Note The SmartMedia card must be
formatted by Strata CTX and
the “Progdata” folder must be
empty (no Default.dat file)
2. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > Data Backup.
3. Select the Backup button. Click
Cancel to interrupt the selected
function.
4. Click Backup.
5. The Progress field displays the
progress of the selected function.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Backup Select one of the following buttons. When performing a Backup, you must use a
formatted SmartMedia card.
•Backup – Backup Strata CTX data to SmartMedia card. This creates a
Default.dat file under the Progdata folder of the SmartMedia card.
Notes
•Default.dat is the name of the file that is created and it contains all Strata
CTX programmed data. It is not default data. It is data that is currently
programmed in the Strata CTX.
•The Progdata folder on the SmartMedia card must be empty before trying to
backup data. You can use FTP to copy and delete an existing default.dat file.
•Cancel – Cancel the Backup/Restore function.
Completion Current Status of Backup.
Possible values: Completed successfully, Not completed.
Operation
916 IP Configuration
10-14 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
916 IP Configuration
Prerequisite Program: None
This program displays Network Communication IP address configuration. This program applies to the
Strata CTX Network (NIC) jack connection only. It does not apply to the CTX maintenance modem. To
change TCP/IP settings see “Step 2B: Set Up IP Address of CTX NIC” on page 3-7.
1. From the Program Menu, click Operation >
IP Configuration.
2. The following Strata CTX default address
displays:
• IP Address – a.b.c.d
where a.b.c.d = 0~255. This IP Address is
for the NIC/Ethernet only. (default =
192.168.254.253).
•192.168.255.254 is the Strata CTX
modem fixed IP address for Dial-up
connections. Do not enter this IP address
on this screen.
• Subnet Mask – e.f.g.h
where e.f.g.h = 0~255 (default =
255.255.255.0). Octet “h” in SubNet
Mask cannot be the same as octet “d” in
the IP address.
• Default Gateway (default = 0.0.0.0).
3. Select another program from the Program Menu.
Operation
FTP User Accounts
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 10-15
Operation
FTP User Accounts
Prerequisite Program: None
This program establishes up to four FTP users for the built-in Strata CTX FTP server function located on
the Strata CTX processor. These Strata CTX FTP accounts allow FTP access to the Strata CTX
SmartMedia card. This allows administration of the Strata CTX SmartMedia folders and files.
1. From the Program Menu, click Operation >
FTP User Account.
2. Select the FTP Index. Up to four FTP Users
can be established.
3. Assign the FTP User’s Account Name.
4. Assign the FTP User a Password.
5. Enter the default folder that this FTP account
is to access. This should be /0/ which is the
root folder of the Strata CTX SmartMedia
card.
6. Click Submit.
Note FTP User Accounts are stored in memory
on the Strata CTX processor and are
intentionally deleted for security when the
Strata CTX is powered off/on or initialized.
Operation
File Information
10-16 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
File Information
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to view lists of Alarm and Administration files stored on the Strata CTX
SmartMedia card. See “908 SmartMedia” on page 10-4 for more information about these files.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > File Information.
2. Select from one of the following
options
...or click List to see a summary list
of Files already programmed into
the system. View the file name
index, number, name, and creation
and modification dates under each
of the categories listed below.
• Error Alarm Files.
• Error Alarm Expansion Files.
• SNMP Administrator Files
(CTX WinAdmin log).
• DKT Administrator Files
(Programming telephone log).
Note For a detailed description on Trace function go to “Trace Function” on page 14-8.
Operation
Community Name
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 10-17
Operation
Community Name
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to create and set up a Community Name (or passwords) to allow access to
specific Strata CTX systems.
1. From the Program Menu, click Operation >
Community Name.
2. Select the Index Number to assign to the
Community or click one of the following
buttons:
• Remove – highlight an existing community
from the table and click this button to
remove the selected community from the
index.
• Modify – highlight an existing community
from the table and click this button to
modify the IP Address, Privileges and
Administrator Level settings for this
community.
3. Enter the remaining fields.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Community Name Enter the Community name. The Community Name is a password that is stored in
the Strata CTX. To communicate with a Strata CTX, the CTX WinAdmin PC must
send a legal community name to the CTX when attempting to connect. The default
community name stored in the CTX is communityName (case sensitive). The Strata
CTX can store up to 10 community names.
IP Address Enter the IP Address of the Community Name. Each community name is associated
with an IP Address. This IP address is stored in the CTX with its associated
community name.
Possible values: a.b.c.d.; a = 0~255, b = 0~255, c = 0~255, d = 0~255
Notes
•To allow any CTX WinAdmin PC to connect to the Strata CTX with a particular
community name, enter  as the IP address for that Community Name.
•To allow only a specific CTX WinAdmin PC to connect to the CTX with a
particular community name, enter the static IP address of that PC for that
community name.
Privileges Select User Privilege Levels. These privileges are to assign the community name or
IP address to an internal Strata CTX level.
Possible values: Read (default) or Write
Note Read – The user cannot modify Strata CTX data regardless of the CTX
WinAdmin User level 1~4.
Write – The user can modify Strata CTX data according to the CTX
WinAdmin user level 1~4.
Operation
909 MAC Address
10-18 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
909 MAC Address
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to view the Media Access Control (MAC) Address assigned to your Strata CTX
System processor PCB. The MAC address is a unique serial number that is electronically coded in the
CTX processor memory at the factory – it cannot be changed. The MAC Address is also printed on the
back of the processor card that is used for the CTX670 (Processor Part Number BBCU1A) and CTX100
(Processor Part Number ACTU1A). A MAC Address must be converted to the applicable serial number
utilized in Internet FYI for License code generation.
1. From the Program Menu, click Operation >
MAC Address.
2. Review your system serial number.
Note The serial number is printed on the
invoice and bar code of the product
shipment.
3. MAC Address displays as shown to the
right. AABBCCDDEEFF = 0~9, A~F
(Hexadecimal values).
4. Click another program from the Program
Menu.
Administrator Level Select Administrator Level. This level is to assign the community name or IP
address to an internal Strata CTX access level.
Possible values: Super User (default) or Ordinary User
Notes
•Super User – Strata CTX allows the user access to all Strata CTX commands.
Super Users can only view ordinary user community names and their own
community name but not other Super User community names.
•Ordinary User – Strata CTX allows the user access to all Strata CTX programs
except 900 Initialization/Restart and 911 Update. Ordinary users can only view
their own community name.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Operation
Trap Destinations
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 10-19
Operation
Trap Destinations
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to setup Trap IPs.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > Trap IP Setup.
2. Select a Trap IP Index number or
click Add to add a Trap IP index.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Community Name Enter the Name of the Community.
Possible values: Alpha characters (default = no value).
IP Address Enter the IP Address for remote connection.
Possible values: a.b.c.d.; a = 0~255, b = 0~255, c = 0~255, d = 0~255
Operation
License Control
10-20 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
License Control
Program Number(s): 913 and 914
The following programs enable you to issue and maintain License Activation settings for CTX WinAdmin
users.
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to issue new licenses.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > License Control.
2. Issue a License by cutting and pasting
or manually entering the 60-character
string in the License Code text box.
Note If you are not adding the License
Code to CTX WinAdmin
immediately, copy and save the code
onto a disk. Save code in Notepad
using Fixedsys font.
3. Click one of the following buttons:
• Issue – to issue the License Code.
• Cancel Issue – to cancel the License
Code issue.
4. Activate the License entered above by selecting the delay timer.
5. Click one of the following buttons:
• Activate – for license activation.
• Cancel Activate – to cancel license activation.
Note Cancel Issue (step 3) and Cancel Activate buttons work only in Standby mode.
License Issue
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables System Administrators to issue Licenses for CTX WinAdmin users.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Status Status applies to both License issue and License Activate. Displays Licensing
Status.
Possible values: Not yet, Issue Stand by, Issue Finished, Cancel Issue, Activate
Stand by, Activate Finished or Cancel Activate
License Code Cut and paste the License code text string or manually enter the License Code (six
characters per box).
Possible values: 60 characters.
Note The License Code will have to be generated from Toshiba’s FYI website
(http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com). After obtaining the License code from FYI save
it as a Text file. Cut and paste the License code obtained from Toshiba’s
FYI website. The License Code is made up of the MAC Address and the
number of ports. The License Code that is generated for a particular MAC
Address is only good for the processor that contains that MAC Address.
Operation
License Information
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 10-21
Operation
License Activate
Prerequisite Program: 913 above
This program enables activation of CTX WinAdmin licenses issued in Program 913.
License Information
The following programs enable you to set up Licensing details for CTX WinAdmin users.
Prerequisite Program: None
1. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > License Information.
2. View Licensing details for this
Strata CTX account.
This view is read-only
information.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Delay Timer Select Activation Delay Timer in hours.
Possible values: 0~24 (default = 0)
Notes
•Enter 0 to issue or activate the license immediately or 1~24 to set the automatic
delay activation feature, where 1 = 1 hour delay; 2 = 2 hour delay, etc.
•After the license is activated, use the License Information screen below to check
that all Ports and features have been activated properly.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
CTX Release Number This is the Basic Release Number of CTX software. To view the Active Software
Version, go to Operations/System Setup.
Number of Serial
Ports This identifies the number of serial ports licensed on the BSIS.
One license is needed for each SMDR and SMDI device connected to BSIS.
(Programs 803 and 804 assigns BSIS ports).
StrataNet QSIG
Networking This license must be enabled on each CTX in a QSIG Network.
System Type This identifies the type of CTX system to which CTX WinAdmin is currently
connected.
Operation
License Information
10-22 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Number Of Attendant
Consoles This identifies the number of Attendant Consoles licensed. One license
is required for each Attendant Console. A CTI Session License is also
required for each Attendant Console (see Number of CTI Sessions).
Processor\Cabinet
Configuration This identifies the CTX Processor hardware size
Small: ACTU, supports CTX100 Base + Expansion cabinet and CTX670.
ACTU2A-S, supports the CTX100-S.
BBCU\BECU without BBMS\BEXS, supports CTX670 Base + one Expansion
cabinet.
Large CTX670: BBCU\BECU with BBMS\BEXS, supports CTX670 Base + six
Expansion cabinets
Number Of DTMF
Receivers This identifies the number of DTMF receivers licensed. The ARCS
Subassembly is required on the CTX100 processor, no additional hardware
is required for CTX670.
Number of Ports This identifies the number of Line circuits, Station circuits and ISDN B channels
licensed.
Station circuits use a license only when a PDN, DDS, BATI or Door Phone is
assigned to the circuit.
Analog and T1 line circuits use a license only when a line number is assigned to the
circuit or B-channel.
ISDN B-Channels use a license when assigned in PRI and BRI assignments.
Number of CTI
Sessions This identifies the number of licensed CTI sessions. Each Attendant Console, the
ACD or OAISYS Sever and each third party CTI application requires one CTI
session license. (Command 803 assigns CTI sessions).
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 11-1
Maintenance
Maintenance 11
This chapter discusses CTX WinAdmin’s maintenance functions.
Quality Of Service
Note This program is not available at this time.
This program enables you to collect information measurement of the call via IP Telephone by a specific IP
Station.
There are five call records can be collected by each request.
➤From the Program Menu, click
Maintenance > Quality of
Service. The Quality of Service
screen displays (shown right)
Trace Function
To analyze Strata CTX problems efficiently, Toshiba needs to get the event trace data and ISDN trace data.
These data sets enable analysis of the problems Strata CTX may experience. It is helpful for
troubleshooting problems that are difficult to duplicate.
Please contact Toshiba Technical Support to coordinate the running of the procedures that appear in this
section. Technical Support will walk you through the required steps.
Trace Data
By running traces when tests are conducted on your Strata CTX system, you ensure that data are being kept
in the event your system encounters a problem. This data can be sent to Toshiba Tech Support for analysis
and troubleshooting.
Maintenance
Trace Function
11-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Strata CTX can collect the following trace data:
•Error Log (including crash dump)
•Event Trace
•ISDN L3 trace
Event traces can be performed by running Program 903 “Event Trace Control” on page 11-3, through
Program 908 “Format/Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103.
Error Log
When Strata CTX detects an error, the information is stored automatically without executing a program.
However, if the system locks up, you must restart the system to save the data to SmartMedia.
Start/Stop/Store Trace Data
Whenever you execute a test, start recording the trace data by enabling the Event Trace Control (Program
903). See page 11-3. If you use ISDN extensions or trunks, please record ISDN trace data by starting “904
ISDN Trace Location” on page 11-4.
➤To test and retrieve trace data
Note This procedure requires use of optional SmartMedia reading hardware and software or FTP
management with a personal computer. See “908 SmartMedia” on page 10-4.
1. Start your test. If a problem occurs, stop the trace (please refer to the Event Trace Control and 904
ISDN Trace Location program instructions in this manual).
2. Verify the results by running the same test(s) again. If the problem can be duplicated the information
contained in the trace data becomes more useful.
3. Unmount data to SmartMedia using “Format/Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103.
4. Remove the SmartMedia card from Strata CTX. Use caution. The SmartMedia device can be damaged
if removed incorrectly.
5. Insert the SmartMedia card into your SmartMedia reader.
6. Locate the Evnttrce folder and save all files ending with .sdt and .mdt to your PCs hard drive.
7. Locate the Crash Dump in the errlog folder. File extensions are .exp and .mnl and append to your hard
drive.
8. E-mail the files to your Toshiba support person.
If you start recording trace data after a problem occurs, the previous data is overwritten. Make sure the
required data files are stored to SmartMedia and saved to disk prior to starting another trace.
The following table shows you how much SmartMedia card memory is allocated to each directory. System
traffic load will determine how much data is stored in the Evnttrace log.
Table 11-1 SmartMedia card file allocation size in Mega Bytes
SmartMedia Type 16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB
Errlog 2MB 4MB 8MB 24MB
Evnttrce 4MB 12MB 32MB 64MB
Admlog 2MB 8MB 16MB 32MB
Progdata 8MB 8MB 8MB 8MB
Program 0MB 0MB 0MB 0MB
Total 16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB
Maintenance
Event Trace Control
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 11-3
Maintenance
Event Trace Control
Program Number(s): 903, 904, 905 and 906
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to trace message events occurring in Strata CTX. Program Numbers 903, 904,
905 and 906 are consolidated in one CTX WinAdmin screen (shown below).
1. Install the SmartMedia Card into the
designated slot of the Strata CTX
processor.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Maintenance > Event Trace Control.
3. Enter Program 903 data.
4. Enter Program 904 data
5. Enter Program 905 data.
6. Enter Program 906 data.
7. Trace data displays in the dialog
boxes.
903 Start/Stop Trace
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Start/Stop Trace Click in the appropriate button to Start or Stop Message Trace. Start Trace
indicates that the system’s trace data collection process has begun. Stop indicates
the trace data collection process is terminated
Before removing the SmartMedia card run Program 908. See “908 SmartMedia” on
page 10-4.
Possible values: Start Trace or Stop Trace (default)
Size Set the trace data size. Toshiba recommends leaving this parameter at the default
setting which provides approximately 15 minutes of trace data.
Possible values: 1~256 bytes with 1 unit = 16 bytes (default = 2)
Category Select Trace data type to be stored.
Possible values: Call Processing, Maintenance, and Call Processing and
Maintenance (default)
Maintenance
Event Trace Control
11-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
904 ISDN Trace Location
ISDN protocol event trace collection conditions are established using this program.
Note This trace can be performed on BSU and PTU cards only.
905 All ISDN Trunk Trace Selection
906 Change Trace Side
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Cabinet/Slot/Port Enter the Equipment Location to be traced (xxyyzz).
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~04
Trace Kind Select the trace collection level.
Possible values: LLCI Trace, Layer 2, Layer 2 & Layer 3 Trace, State Transitions
Trace, ERRORS Trace, Layer 2 Trace.
Trace Level Select the extent to which the trace collects information.
Possible values: No Trace (default), Brief or Extensive
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trace all ISDN Trunks Select whether to trace all ISDN PRI and BRI trunks.
Possible values: On (default) or Off
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Trace side Select Trace side change.
Possible values: Message Trace (default), ISDN Trace or Both
Maintenance
Error Alarm Log
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 11-5
Maintenance
Error Alarm Log
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to trace errors and alarms in Strata CTX.
1. Install the SmartMedia Card into
the designated slot of the Strata
CTX processor.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > Maintenance > Error/
Alarm Logs.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Start Date Enter the date (YYMMDD) and time (hhmmss) on which to start the log.
Possible values: YY = Year, MM = Month and DD = day (default = no value)
hh = Hour, mm = Minutes and ss = seconds (default = no value)
End Date Enter the date and time on which to end the log.
Possible values: YY = Year, MM = Month and DD = day (default = no value)
hh = Hour, mm = Minutes and ss = seconds (default = no value)
Start Rank Code Prioritize by selecting a Rank Code.
Possible values: 1~99 (default = no value)
End Rank Code Organize by selecting an End Rank Code.
Possible values: 1~99 (default = no value)
Error Code This field logs the number of error codes.
Possible values: 0~9999999999 (default = 0)
Org. Code This field reflects the Error origination code.
Possible values: 1~10 (default = no value)
Search Number Displays the search sequence.
Possible values: 1~1000 (default = 0)
Search Result Number This field displays the Search result number.
Possible values: 1 or 2 (default = no value)
Normal Log This field displays the log information.
Expand Log This field displays details of the logged data.
Maintenance
907 System Admin Log
11-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
907 System Admin Log
Prerequisite Program: None
Use this command to Start/Stop the System Admin Log. When running this program, make sure to insert
the SmartMedia card into the appropriate slot.
1. Insert the SmartMedia Card into the
designated slot of the Strata CTX processor.
2. From the Program Menu, click Maintenance
> System Admin Log.
3. Click to Start or Stop the System Admin
Log.
4. Click the Checking System Admin Log
Completion Status button to view progress
of this operation.
Note When CTX670 stops logging data, it
automatically sends data to the
SmartMedia card. Run the Unmount
command (Program 908) before
removing the SmartMedia card to ensure complete data transfer.
Memory Access Operation
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to manipulate memory settings.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Maintenance > Memory Access.
2. Click the Read Memory or Write
Memory button to access memory.
3. Enter the memory Address to be
accessed.
4. Select size of memory to access (1~256,
default = no value).
5. Click one of the following buttons:
• New – click this button to create a
new Memory Access filename.
• Open – click this button to open an
existing Memory Access file.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click Save to save Memory Access file.
Note The Content box displays the contents of the memory address selected.
Search Result Search results are displayed in this field.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Maintenance
Components
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 11-7
Maintenance
Components
Prerequisite Program: None
The following programs enable you to monitor the status of individual Strata CTX slots and ports.
This is the main system slot/port monitor. The Components screen allows each cabinet card slot and each
card slot port to be monitored, enabled or disabled. The card slot and port failure codes are provided in the
Table below.
➤From the Program Menu, click
Maintenance > Components >
Cabinets 1~7.
Auto Fault Detection/Disable
When an error occurs in hardware resources used for a station or line, the Strata CTX system will make
them busy. In this case the Strata CTX system will automatically disable the card slot or card port (circuit
or channel). The Component Status/Control screen will indicate the card or port failure status with
“Disabled by Fault xx” where xx is the status code in the table below. When a digital telephone is disabled
the telephone’s LCD will display “Make Busy”. The station or line PCB can be disabled temporarily to
perform maintenance or parts replacements as well.
Note The port or slot to which your programming phone is connected cannot be set to Make Busy.
The table on the next page states the possible error codes that can be displayed in the Status column of the
Main Components screen shown above.
Maintenance
Components
11-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Manual Disable/Enable
The components screen enables you to enable or disable any card slot or port.
• When disabled by Disable or Forced Disable, line or stations are made busy and the status will display
“disable by cmd” on the screen. On the telephone LCD, it will display “Make busy.”
•Disable will disable an idle port or slot and cause ports/slots that are in use to go to Pending Disable
– which go to Make Busy after they go idle. Disable waits till a call clears to disable it.
•Forced Disable will disable an idle port or a port that is in-use (the call will be disconnected).
•Enable – removes the Make Busy condition if the slot or port is manually disabled.
Note You cannot enable a slot or port if the system automatically disabled it. The status on the screen will
display “Disabled by Fault.”
Table 11-2Status Column Error Codes
Component Type Status Code Description
Expansion Cabinet CP Cabinet power failure
Line/Station/Option PCB CR Card PCB set in Program 100, but not installed
Port (ISDN) IL ISDN loss of signal
Port (ISDN) IF ISDN frame sync failure
Port (ISDN) IA ISDN AIS
Port (ISDN-U) UM ISDN-U maintenance mode
Port (ISDN-U) UE ISDN-U Eoc maintenance mode
Port (ISDN-U) UA ISDN-U Act
Port (ISDN-U) UB ISDN-U aib
Port (T1) TY T1 Yellow alarm
Port (T1) TB T1 Blue alarm
Port (T1) TF T1 Frame sync. failure
Port (DKT) DO Digital Telephone not connected.
Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03 12-1
Tools and Profile
Tools and Profile 12
This chapter discusses Tools and Profile to customize and manage your Strata CTX System.
Tools
The download tool provided in CTX WinAdmin enables you to download databases stored in system
memory into a CTX WinAdmin folder named “Download”. These downloaded databases can then be
viewed in your PC to check for errors or other anomalies. The downloaded commands are saved as files on
the C: drive or on whichever drive Strata CTX WinAdmin is installed, in this path:
CTX\WinAdmin\ctmc\ctm c_Local\DownLoad. They may be opened and viewed using Excel, Word or
some other application.
Download
Prerequisite Program: None
1. From the Program Menu, click
Tools > Download.
2. A list of all CTX WinAdmin
programs displays as shown to
the right.
3. Click on the program to be
downloaded. Selected
programs are highlighted in
green and the word “Selected”
displays to the right as shown
in the figure to the right. The
following buttons are also
available:
• Clear All – click this button
to clear all previously
selected files.
• Select All – click this button
to select all programs for downloading.
4. Click the Start Downloading button in the top right corner of the display.
5. The system notifies you when the download is complete.
Tools and Profile
Profile
12-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03
Profile
The Programs included in the Profile menu enables you to change GUI display settings in CTX WinAdmin
and change the system IP Address.
Customize
Prerequisite Program: None
Customize the look and feel of CTX WinAdmin using this program.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Profile > Customize.
2. Select your customized settings.
3. Click Save Changes.
User Management
For information on User Management, refer to Chapter 2 “User Management” on page 3-19.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
ASP Idle Time CTX WinAdmin is designed to automatically log off any inactive users after the time
set in this field.
Possible values: Maximum = 999 minutes (Default = 120 minutes)
Note Set the ASP Idle time to 999 when using long CTX WinAdmin sessions in a
secure environment.
Back Ground Color Select the background Color from the scroll down menu.
Possible values: Aqua, Yellow, Sky Blue, Light Sky Blue, Light Blue, Medium
Spring Green, Light Green, Powder Blue, Light Goldenrod Yellow
(default), Misty Rose, Lavender.
Group Name Color Select the color in which to display the Group Name (see figure above).
Possible values: Black, White, Dim Grey (default), Red, Dark Red, Blue, Indigo,
Navy, Purple, Maroon, Teal, Fuchsin, Dark Green.
Label Color Select the color with which to display the field name text.
Possible values: Black (default), White, Dim Grey, Red, Dark Red, Blue, Indigo,
Navy, Purple, Maroon, Teal, Fuchsin, Dark Green.
726+,%$ Telecommunication Systems Division
November 2003
Part 3: Telephone Button Programming
Digital Business Telephone Systems
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-1
Telephone Button
Programming
Telephone Button Programming 13
This chapter discusses the button programming interface provided with Strata CTX. This chapter also
includes Button Programming examples, procedures, and tables to program 100~800 series programs. This
chapter has tables that list programs sequentially by program number. Tables found below a program table
contain required information for the above program.
Important! If you do not program button sequences correctly, the DKT LCD will display an error code.
Refer to Appendix B – System Error Codes.
Record Sheet Overview
Fill out the Appendix D – Record Sheets (see Figure 13-1 as an example), then enter this data using a
20-button LCD digital (DKT) telephone.
6378
66 BETA
Station
Assignment
DKT Parameters Record Sheet
PDN: _____________________
Station Type Ext. Ring Repeat Continuous DTMF Ring Over Busy Cycles
Key Strip Pattern Not Used Display Language Attd. Overflow Dest.
Key Strip Type Ringing Line Preference Adapter Trunk Test and Verify
Add-on Modules Off-hook Preference Blind Transfer Auto Line Hold
Tone/Voice First Ringing Preference. Mail Box Selection
OCA Type Text Message Display MIC Init. Value
Handsfree MIC C all History Memory Microphone
Handsfree Tone DTMF Back Tone Speaker Mode Tones
PDN: _____________________
Station Type Ext. Ring Repeat Continuous DTMF Ring Over Busy Cycles
Key Strip Pattern Not Used Display Language Attd. Overflow Dest.
Key Strip Type Ringing Line Preference Adapter Trunk Test and Verify
Add-on Modules Off-hook Preference Blind Transfer Auto Line Hold
Tone/Voice First Ringing Preference. Mail Box Selection
OCA Type Text Message Display MIC Init. Value
Handsfree MIC C all History Memory Microphone
Handsfree Tone DTMF Back Tone Speaker Mode Tones
PDN: _____________________
Station Type Ext. Ring Repeat Continuous DTMF Ring Over Busy Cycles
Key Strip Pattern Not Used Display Language Attd. Overflow Dest.
Key Strip Type Ringing Line Preference Adapter Trunk Test and Verify
Add-on Modules Off-hook Preference Blind Transfer Auto Line Hold
Tone/Voice First Ringing Preference. Mail Box Selection
OCA Type Text Message Display MIC Init. Value
Handsfree MIC C all History Memory Microphone
Handsfree Tone DTMF Back Tone Speaker Mode Tones
PDN: _____________________
Station Type Ext. Ring Repeat Continuous DTMF Ring Over Busy Cycles
Key Strip Pattern Not Used Display Language Attd. Overflow Dest.
Record Sheet
Provides a list of
available features. The
sheet is used to record
the assignment of
features or the operation
of each program. Each
sheet provides space to
record data. This data
will be referred to when
programming the
system.
Figure 13-1 System Record Sheet Sample
Telephone Button Programming
Telephone Button Overview
13-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Telephone Button Overview
Strata CTX programmers can access programming mode from any DKT LCD telephone, except DKTs
connected to an RDSU. A 20-button telephone (shown below) is required to ensure full access to all
programming parameters. The telephone button programming interface enables limited programming
capabilities over ranges of stations or trunks.
Note Telephones connected to an RDSU cannot be used to program Strata CTX.
Figure 13-2 shows the telephone button pad for the DKT3020-series digital telephone or IPT1020-SD.
Figure 13-2 DKT3010/3020 and IPT1020-SD Button Telephones
6929
Msg Spdial
RedialMic
Spkr Cnf/Trn Hold
FB01
FB02
FB03
FB04
FB05
FB06
FB07
FB08
FB09
FB10
FB11
FB12
FB13
FB14
FB15
FB16
FB17
FB18
FB19
FB20
FB01
FB02
FB03
FB04
FB05
FB06
FB07
FB08
FB09
FB10
Page
Mode
Scroll Feature
FB buttons for 20-button phones
IPT1020-SD, DKT3020-S, DKT3020-SD
FB buttons for
10-button phones
DKT3010-S, DKT3010-SD
Vol
ZQ
Telephone Button Programming
Telephone Button Overview
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-3
Telephone Button
Programming
Telephone Button Commands
1. Use the following buttons to execute the commands:
•+ROG – Enter.
•3DJH/6FUROO – Scroll up or down.
•6SNU – This delimiter moves cursors between sub-parameter values.
•9RO▲ – Escape. 9RO▲ displays as on the LCD. Press 9RO▲ to program or in dialing
sequences.
•9RO▼ – Back space for line editing.
•+ROG – Cancel.
• – Use this button between values to specify a range of objects to be programmed (e.g., 1001*1005
enables programming of stations 1001 through 1005).
• – Use this button between values to specify a set of objects to be programmed (e.g.,
1001**1005**1012 enables programming of stations 1001, 1005 and 1012).
• Off-hook – lift and replace the handset to immediately exit programming mode.
2. Keep the following in mind as you maneuver through Strata CTX programs.
• Default and/or current settings are displayed on the telephone LCD with an asterisk.
• Some Strata CTX Programs have more than 20 programmable parameters. To toggle from
parameters )%~)% and )%~)% press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button after entering Program
Mode.
• To view parameter options on your telephone LCD, press the desired )% button and press the 6FUROO
or 3DJH button.
• Each parameter shows a number to the left (e.g., 2:DISABLE). Program the desired parameter by
pressing the number button (in this example ) that corresponds to your desired parameter.
• To enter data, use the number keys.
• To submit your program entry press +ROG. To confirm a submitted entry, press +ROG again.
• To exit a program press +ROG.
• To enter the character in your data string press the 9RO▲ and the button simultaneously. An
sign appears in your LCD. Press the button, then enter the remaining data.
• If you get an error code, press +ROG (twice) to continue programming. See “System Error Codes” on
page B-1 for error code details.
Programming Parameters
Programs can have between one and 40 programmable parameters, each represented by the )%QQbuttons.
The LEDs light up for each )%QQ button that features a programmable parameter. Each parameter is
programmed by entering values into the LCD from the telephone button pad.
1. At the SELECT PARAM prompt, press the appropriate )%QQ button.
2. Enter the appropriate value from the telephone button pad using the Parameter Fields tables supplied
with each program.
3. Press +ROG to submit.
4. Press another )%QQ button to program more parameters
...or press +ROG again to program.
Telephone Button Programming
Telephone Button Overview
13-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Programming Sub-parameters
Some commands enable programming of Sub-parameters to further refine Strata CTX settings. Internet or
Network IP addresses are entered using sub-parameter data. IP addresses are displayed as four three-digit
values, or Octets, separated by “periods” (e.g., 192.168.255.253). Your programming telephone’s LCD
is only capable of displaying the IP information three digits, or one Octet, at a time.
For example, selecting )% in Program 916 displays the first Octet, 192, on the LCD. To view or change
the next Octet (in this example 168) in the IP Address, press the 6SNU button. Pressing 6SNU again,
displays the following Octet (in this example 255).
The following is an example from Program 200, )%. )% is broken down into three sub-parameters as
follows COS DAY1, COS DAY2 and COS NIGHT.
1. At the SELECT PARAM prompt, press )%.
2. At the COS DAY1= prompt, enter a value from 1~32.
3. Press 6SNU.
4. At the COS DAY2= prompt, enter a value from 1~32.
5. Press 6SNU.
6. At the COS NIGHT= prompt, enter a value from 1~32.
7. Press +ROG to submit.
8. Press another )%QQ button to program more parameters
...or press +ROG again to program a new DN.
Note To change one of the sub-parameters, you must proceed through all three sub-parameters before
pressing +ROG. For example, to change the value of COS DAY1, you must change the COS DAY1
value, then press 6SNU twice, and finally, press +ROG.
Telephone Button Programming
Button Programming Examples
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-5
Telephone Button
Programming
Button Programming Examples
The following examples show you how to use the Strata CTX button programming interface. Toshiba
highly recommends the use of Strata CTX WinAdmin to meet the demands of your telephone system
programming.
Suppose a customer needed to assign a DKT Station to a PDN. Based on the “Identify Program
Sequences” on page 1-12, you can immediately identify the Program numbers and sequence required to
complete this basic task. Login to the Button Programming Mode using the directions on Page -7 and
follow the steps below.
Program 100
Reference “Program 100” on page 11. For this example, an eight station BDKU PCB is assigned to
Slot 01/Cabinet 01 (xxyy).
1. Enter programming mode. See “Step 1: Enter Program Mode on page 13-7."
2. At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
3. At the EQUIP= prompt enter  (xxyy) and press +ROG.
“Program 100” on page 11 tells us that a three digit PCB code (nnn) is required. From the table, “PCB
Codes” on page 13-12, we can derive that the PCB code for a BDKU is “017.” Furthermore, the
“Program 100” table shows us the button sequence required for programming a BDKU in the fourth
row of the table.
4. Press )%. Enter  and press +ROG.
“Program 100” on page 11 also informs us that an “n” value is required to complete the PCB
assignment. These “n” values are listed in the column titled “Value(s).” When you look in the fourth
row of the “Value(s)” column there are five “n” value choices. For this example, select “2. 8 DKT no
OCA.”
5. Press )%. Enter and press +ROG twice.
6. Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
Program 200
Reference “200 Series Programs” on page 13-28. A DKT assignment (DN = 1000) is made to Circuit 01,
Slot 01, and Cabinet 01 for the BDKU card installed in Step 1 above.
1. Enter programming mode. See “Step 1: Enter Program Mode on page 13-7."
2. At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
3. At the DN= prompt enter  (n) and press +ROG.
4. Press )%. At the EQUIP= prompt enter  (xxyyzz) and press +ROG.
5. Press )%. Press to select a DKT and press +ROG.
6. Press )%. Press to select Extension as the Circuit Type and press +ROG.
For this example, only the above )%s need to be assigned. Press +ROG again before proceeding to the
next step.
7. Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
Note Additional assignments can be made to fine tune this DKT assignment. If specific assignments are
not made, the system automatically assigns the default value.
Telephone Button Programming
Button Programming Examples
13-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Program 204
Reference “Program 204” on page 34 and review Summary column field descriptions. This program
enables you to setup the DKT parameters.
1. Enter programming mode. See “Step 1: Enter Program Mode on page 13-7."
2. At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
3. At the DN= prompt enter  (n) and press +ROG.
4. Press )%. Press to select a Extension and press +ROG.
5. Press )%. Press to select Pattern 3 for this DKT and press +ROG.
For this example, we are using a 20-button DKT. There are three button patterns to choose from for
each type of digital telephone.
Only the above )%s need to be assigned. Press +ROG again before proceeding to the next step.
6. Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
Note Additional assignments can be made to fine tune DKT parameters. See Summary column for field
descriptions and default values. If specific assignments are not made, the system automatically
assigns the default value.
Program 205
Reference “Program 205” on page 38 and “Feature/Button Code Parameter Assignments” on page 13-40.
This program assigns features and parameters to the FB buttons on your DKT telephone. In this example,
the )% button on your DKT will be programmed to act as a GCO button.
1. Enter programming mode. See “Step 1: Enter Program Mode on page 13-7."
2. At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
3. At the DN= prompt enter  (n) and press +ROG.
4. Press )%. Enter  to assign a GCO and press 6SNU.
To select the n1, n2, n3, n4 and n5 values required in “Program 205” on page 38, see “GCO” in the
table titled “Feature/Button Code Parameter Assignments” on page 13-40.
5. Enter to assign a GCO number and press 6SNU.
6. Enter to assign a GCO index and press 6SNU.
7. Enter to enable immediate ringing for this GCO and press 6SNU.
8. Enter to assign a soft ring tone to this GCO and press 6SNU.
9. Enter  to assign an Owner DN to this GCO number and press +ROG twice.
10.Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
Note Press +ROG again to exit Button Programming Mode.
Program 208
Reference “Program 208” on page 45. This program assigns timing parameters to Primary DNs.
1. Enter programming mode. See “Step 1: Enter Program Mode on page 13-7."
2. At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
3. At the DN= prompt enter  (n) and press +ROG.
4. Press )%. Press  to set the number of ABR attempts and press +ROG.
Telephone Button Programming
Button Programming Procedure
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-7
Telephone Button
Programming
5. Press )%. Press  to set ABR to attempt redials in 60 second increments and press +ROG.
6. Press )%. Press  to set the ABR Recall Timer and press +ROG.
7. Press )%. Press  to set the Hold Recall Timer and press +ROG.
8. Press )%. Press  to set the First Interdigit Timer and press +ROG.
9. Press )%. Press to set the Second Interdigit Timer and press +ROG.
10.Press )%. Press  to set the Ring Transfer No Answer Timer and press +ROG twice.
11. Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
Now that you are more familiar with the Strata CTX button programming interface, begin programming
your Strata CTX system starting with Step 1 below.
Button Programming Procedure
Step 1: Enter Program Mode
Enter the button sequence displayed below to enter the CTX670 programming interface from a DKT
station.
1. Log in by pressing: +ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
2. At the PASSWORD= prompt, enter your password. Default is .
3. Press+ROG.
Step 2: Enter Program Number
1. At the PROG= prompt enter the three digit program code (e.g., ) and press +ROG.
2. Programmable parameters are identified by the FB LEDs that are illuminated on the DKT. Go to
“Choose a Button Sequence” on page 13-7 Press on the related )%QQ button to program a parameter.
...or if there are no illuminated FB LEDs, continue to Step 3.
Step 3: Enter FB00 Parameters
)% parameters designate a specific station, trunk, or circuit to be programmed. The )% prompt (e.g.,
EQUIP=, DN=, INDEX=, etc.) appears automatically in the LCD screen.
1. At the )% prompt, enter the desired value using the telephone number pad.
2. Press +ROG.
Step 4: Choose a Button Sequence
➤Select the button sequences based on the programs required for programming the Strata CTX from the
Telephone. For 100~900 series programs, refer to pages 11~96.
Program Listings
This table is a list of programs found in this chapter.
Program
Number Program Name
100 Card Slot Assignment
102 Flexible Access Codes
Telephone Button Programming
Button Programming Procedure
13-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
103 Class of Service
104 System Timers
105 System Parameters
106 Day/Night Mode Day of Week Mapping
107 PAD Table Assignment
108 PAD Group Assignment
109 Music on Hold
110 Password Assignment
111 Destination Restriction Level
112 Day/Night Mode Calendar
113 Day/Night Mode Daily Schedule
114 PAD Conference Table Assignment
115 Advisory Messages
116 Data Initialize
117 Public Dial Plan Digit
200 Station Data
201 Station Delete
202 ISDN BRI Station
203 Change DN
204 DKT Parameters
205 DKT Feature Keys
206 Phantom DNs
207 One Touch Assignment
208 Station Timer Assignments
209 Hunting Group Assignments
210 Group Call Pickup
213 ADM Feature Keys
214 DSS Console Assignment
215 DSS Feature Keys
216 Emergency Ringdown Assignment
217 ISDN Station Data
218 Station Hunt Group Assignment (Member Assignments)
300 Trunk Assignment
301 Trunk Delete
302 PRI Trunks
303 ISDN Trunk Delete
304 Incoming Line Group Assignment
305 ILG Delete
306 Outgoing Line Group Assignment
307 OLG Delete
308 Trunk Timers
309 Direct Inward Dialing
310 DIT Assignment
311 MOH Source
Program
Number Program Name
Telephone Button Programming
Button Programming Procedure
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-9
Telephone Button
Programming
312 DID Delete
313 Caller ID Assignment
315 T1 Trunk Card
316 Shared D Channel
317 ISDN BRI Trunk
318 DID Intercept Assignment
319 Intercept Treatment
320 B Channel Position ISDN Primary Trunk
321 Calling Number Identification
322 ISDN Calling Number Table
323 Call by Call Service
324 CBC Time Zones
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment
404 Attendant Group Assignment
500 System Call Forward Assignment
501 System Speed Dial Assignment
502 Terminal Paging Group Assignment
503 Paging Devices Group Assignment
504 System Call Forward Operation Status
506 Verified Account Codes
507 Door Phone Assignment
508 Door Lock Control Assignment
509 DR Override by System Speed Dial
510 COS Override Assignment
512 SMDR for System Assignment
513 SMDR for ILG Assignment
514 SMDR for OLG Assignment
515 View BIOU Control Relay Assignment
516 Station Speed Dial
520 LCR Local Route Plan
521 LCR Route Plan Digit Analysis Assignment
522 LCR Exception Number Route Plans
523 LCR Route Plan Schedule Assignment
524 Route Table to Route Definition Assignment
525 LCR Route Definition Assignment
526 Modified Digits Table Assignment
527 LCR Holiday Table Assignment
528 LCR Public Day of Week Mapping Table
529 LCR Route Plan Time Zone Assignment
530 DR LCR Screening Table Assignment
531 DR Screening Table for OLG
532 DR Table Allow/Deny Definition
533 DR Level Table Assignment
534 DRL Exception Table Assignment
Program
Number Program Name
Telephone Button Programming
Button Programming Procedure
13-10 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Programming Tables
The programming tables in this chapter appear sequentially, beginning with the 100 series programs and
ending with the 900 series programs. Tables immediately following a program table are provided for
reference. For example, the PCB Code table shown after the Program 100 table gives important PCB codes
needed in Program 100.
540 Pilot DN Assignment
541 Pilot DN Delete
550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group Number
570 Account Code Digit Length
571 Exception Numbers for Forced Account Codes
573 Delete Door Phone
576 Door Phone Night Ring Over External Page
577 Caller History
579 System Voice Mail Data
580 Voice Mail Port Data
650 Behind Connection Assignment
651 Private Routing Plan Analysis Table Assignment
653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment
654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment
655 Private Digit Modification Table Assignment
656 Node ID Assignment
657 Network COS Mapping Table Assignment
658/659/660 Network DRL Mapping Tables
801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment
803 IO Logical Device Assignment
804 RS232C Data Assignment
900 System Initialize
901 Display Version
902 Set Time and Date
903 Event Trace Control
904 ISDN Trace Location
905 All ISDN Trunk Trace
906 Event Trace Side Change
907 System Admin Log
908 Format/Unmount SmartMedia
909 MAC Address (System Serial Number)
910 Data Backup
911 Program Update
912 Make Busy Control
915 Regional Selection
916 IP Configuration
Program
Number Program Name
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-11
Telephone Button
Programming
100 Series Programs
Table 13-1 Program 100
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
100 Card Slot Assignment
,
100-00 Card Slot Assignment
xxyy,
xx =
yy =
Cabinet: 01~02 (Basic
CTX670 and CTX100)
01~07 Expanded CTX670
Slot: 01~8 (CTX100)
01-10 (CTX670)
Equipment Number
100-01 PCB Type
, nnn, ,
nnn = 3 digit PCB Code (See
table below). Valid Codes:
000, 001, 002, 005, 006,
009, 010, 011, 013.
Assign one of the following:
• BIOU1 or BIOU2 Page/MOH/BGM Relay Control.
• RSTU or PSTU w/ 8 standard phones.
• All Analog CO Line OCBs.
• BVPU with 4 VoIP circuits.
• RBSU/RBSS with 4 BRI S/T interface.
• Delete PCB
100-02 PDKU/RDTU/RPTU
Options
, nnn, ,
, n, ,
nnn =
n =
3 digit PCB Code. Valid
Codes: 017, 018
1. None
2. DKT no OCA or 8 Ch
3. DKT w/ OCA or 16 Ch
4. 24 Ch (n/a for PDKU)
5. 30 Ch (n/a for PDKU)
Assign one of the following:
• PDKU with OCA toggle
• RDTU or RPTU, T1 or PRI Channel
100-03 BDKU/BDKA Options
, nnn, ,
, n, ,
nnn =
n =
3 digit PCB Code Valid
Codes: 003, 007, 014
1. None
2. 8 DKT no OCA
3. 8 DKT w/ OCA
4. 16 DKT no OCA
5. 16 DKT w/ OCA
Assign BDKU or BDKS
100-04 BRI TEI Options
, nnn, ,
, n, ,
nnn =
n =
3 digit PCB Code. Valid
Codes: 012, 013, 015, 016
1. None
2. 8 DKT no OCA
3. 8 DKT w/ OCA
4. 16 DKT no OCA
5. 16 DKT w/ OCA
Assign RBUU/RBUS or RBSU/RBSS.
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
13-12 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Note These three-digit Feature Index Numbers should not be confused with the Program 205 three-digit
Button Codes.
Table 13-2 PCB Codes
Code PCB Type Assigned
Name Circuit/Type Code PCB Type Assigned
Name Circuit/Type
000 None No Card or
Delete Card n/a 011 EMU REMU
BVPU 4 Circuits
001 COU RCOU
RGLU2
4 Loop Lines
8 Gnd./Loop Lines 012 BSU RBSU 2 S/T interfaces
002 STU RSTU2 8 Stations 013 BSU_BSS RBSU+RBSS 4 S/T interfaces
003 DKU PDKU2
RWIU
8 Stations
8 or 32 wireless 014 PTU RPTU 8, 16 and 24 PRI Lines
004 Not used n/a n/a 015 BUU RBUU 2 U Interfaces
005 8COU RCIOU+RCOS 8 Loop CO Lines 016 BUU_BUS RBUU+RBUS 4 U Interfaces
006 DDU RDDU 4 DID Lines 017 NEW_DKU_8 BDKU1 8 Stations
007 DTU RDTU2 8, 16, 24 and 30 channel
T1 018 NEW_DKU_16 BDKU1+BDKS1 16 Stations
008 DSU RDSU 4 Standard Ports
4 Digital Ports 019 IOU1 BIOU Page/MOH/BGM Relay
009 CIU RCIU2 4 or 8 Circuit Caller ID 020 IOU2 BIOU Page/MOH/BGM Relay
010 MCU RMCU 2 or 4 E911 CAMA Lines
Table 13-3 Program 102
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
102 Flexible Access Plan
,
Assigns feature access codes, individual line access codes and
outgoing line group (OLG) access codes to the Flexible Numbering
Plan.
Does not include PDNs, PhDNs, Pilot numbers, or Hunt Group pilot
numbers.
102-00
Access Code
n, ,
n = Up to 5-digit Flexible
Numbering Plan
Enter the digits to be dialed (0~9,#,*) to access a Feature or an
Outgoing Line Group (OLG).
To delete, select ‘No Data‘ in ‘01 Feature Name‘. Conflict with an
assigned DN will produce an error.
102-01 , nnn, nnn = 3 digit Feature Code (551
should be selected for a
Flexible Numbering OLG)
Select the Feature to which the access code is being assigned.
Note To assign an access code to an Outgoing Line Group (OLG),
select “Line Group access code - one access code for each
OLG.” To assign the prefix digit(s) for the access code of
individual lines, select “Line access code - leading digit(s) to
access individual lines.” Example: If #7 is selected as the line
access prefix, the users will dial #7xxx to access an individual
line (where xxx is the line number).
102-02 , n1, , n1 = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670
Expanded)
Enter the Outgoing Line Group number to which the OLG access
code is being assigned.
Table 13-4 Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings
Flexible Numbering Feature Feature
Index Default
Access Code Programmed
Value
No Data
ABR - Activate 150
ABR - Cancel 151
Call Park Orbits - Activate 170
Call Park Orbits - Park Answer (Retrieve Parked Call) 173
System Orbit Number 174
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-13
Telephone Button
Programming
DND -Local Activation 180
DND -Local Cancellation 181
DND -Remote Activation 182
DND -Remote Cancellation 183
Door Lock Control -Unlock 190
Door Phones -Call 191
Flash -short 200
Flash -long 210
Group Paging -Invoke All Group Paging 220
Group Paging -Invoke Individual Group Paging 230
Answer for External Group Paging 232
Emergency Page -Invoke All Emergency Paging 240
Emergency Page -Invoke Individual Emergency Paging 250
Originate Call by Terminal Speed Dial (Index: 00-99) 260
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 000-099) 261
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 100-199) 262
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 200-299) 263
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 300-399) 264
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 400-499) 265
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 500-599) 266
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 600-699) 267
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 700-799) 268
Register Speed Dial 269
Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Activation 340
Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Activation 341
Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Activation 342
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Activation 343
Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Activation 350
Call Forward CF-B; External Call) - Activation 351
Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Activation 352
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Activation 353
Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Remote Activation 360
Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Remote Activation 361
Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation 362
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation 363
Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Remote Activation 370
Call Forward (CF-B; External Call) - Remote Activation 371
Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Remote Activation 372
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Remote Activation 373
Call Forward (Any Call) - Cancellation 380
Call Forward (External Call) - Cancellation 390
Call Forward (Any Call) - Remote Cancellation 400
Call Forward (External Call) - Remote Cancellation 410
Change Password for Remote Activation/Cancellation 420
Input Account Code 530
Change DISA Security Code 540
Table 13-4 Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)
Flexible Numbering Feature Feature
Index Default
Access Code Programmed
Value
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
13-14 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Outgoing Call by Directing Individual Trunk 550
Outgoing Call by Directing Outgoing Line Group 551
Three Way Conferencing (Override to Tandem Connection) 560
Enter User Programming Mode 570
LCR -Outgoing Call 580
Set Voice Mail Message Waiting (activate MW without ringing for VM) 591
Release Received Message Waiting 592
Release Sent Message Waiting (Cancel MW without ringing for VM)) 593
MW Answer access code (Retrieve Received Message Waiting) 594
Cancel ACB 600
Start BGM 610
Stop BGM 611
Start BGM for External Paging Device 612
Stop BGM for External Paging Device 613
Built-in modem 630
Night Ring Answer 640
Travelling Class Override Code Input Number 650
Change Travelling Class Override Code 651
Activate System Call Forward 670
Cancel System Call Forward 671
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Group Pickup 680
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Terminal 681
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Group 682
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed DN 683
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Any External Call 684
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed CO Retrieve 685
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Local Retrieve 686
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Remote Retrieve 687
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed DN Retrieve 688
Transfer to Voice Mail 690
Repeat Last Number Dialed 700
Volume Control for BEEP 710
Change LCD Display Language 720
Advisory Message - Activation 730
Advisory Message - Cancellation 731
Emergency Call 740
Attendant Console Group Access Code 750
Private Network Access Code 760
Node ID (Coordinated Directory Number Prefix) 770
Substitution of Dial * 780
Substitution of Dial # 781
Originate Call with Sub Address -Outgoing Call/Internal Call 782
Application starting access code 800
System Date Adjust Code (Release 1.02, MA227 or higher) 910
System Time Adjust Code (Release 1.02, MA227 or higher) 911
Table 13-4 Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)
Flexible Numbering Feature Feature
Index Default
Access Code Programmed
Value
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-15
Telephone Button
Programming
Table 13-5 Programs 103~107
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
103 Class Of Service
,
Class of Service assignments are a registration of feature capabilities
the user is entitled to use. Each assignment is defined as Enabled or
Disabled for privileges/permissions granted. Privileges enable users
to perform a feature while permissions allow others to use some
feature when calling your phone.
103-00 COS Number
n, ,
n = 1~32 (COS Number) Class of Service assignments are made for user’s of telephones,
attendant consoles, and incoming calls based upon the line the call
arrives or in some cases on a call-by-call basis when using DISA or
Tie Line with QSIG interfaces. For telephone users, the class of
service assignments are made for each of the Day/Night Modes to
allow different services during different parts of the day.
103-01
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to invoke Automatic Busy Redial after dialing a busy
outside destination.
103-02
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
If enabled, stations with this COS will not forward when calling
stations that have System or Station Call Forward activated. This
includes when dialing from the dial pad or DSS button located on the
telephone or DSS console.
103-03
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Allows a call transferred by this station to camp on to a busy
destination.
103-04
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
The privilege to change the DISA Security Code.
103-05
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Allows a caller to override the Do Not Disturb status of a called party.
103-06 DND Override -
Called Party
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Allows calling parties with DND Override privileges to override this
station's DND status.
103-07 Do Not Disturb
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to place this phone in Do Not Disturb.
103-08 Remote Set/Reset
DND
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
The privilege of setting/resetting Do Not Disturb on other phones.
103-09 Executive Override
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
The privilege to invoke an Executive Override on a call.
103-10 Executive Override
Allowed
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Permission for others to use Executive Override when calling this
station.
103-11 Offhook Camp-on
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to use Off-hook Camp-on when encountering a busy
destination.
103-12 Group Pickup
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to pick up a call ringing on a station in one's own group.
103-13 Directed Station
Pickup
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to pick a specified ringing station.
103-14 Directed Group Call
Pickup
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to pick up a ringing station in a specified group.
103-15 Directed DN Call
Pickup
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to pick a specified DN.
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
13-16 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
103-16 Ext Call Pickup
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to pick up any incoming trunk call.
103-17 Directed CO Call
Pickup
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to pick up a specified incoming trunk call.
103-18 Remote Retrieve Call
Pickup
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to retrieve any call placed on Hold on a designated
terminal (PDN).
103-19 DN Retrieve Call
Pickup
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to retrieve a held call on another DN.
103-20 Handsfree Override
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Permission for others to change this phone from Ringing to Hands
Free Answerback.
103-21 Privacy Override
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
The privilege to override a private call.
103-23 Invoke Emergency
Page
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to use the Emergency Page feature.
103-24 Join Feature
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to use the Join feature (Attendant Feature).
103-25 Through Dialing
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to perform Through Dialing (Attendant Feature).
103-26 Tandem CO
Connection
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
The privilege to set up a Trunk-to-Trunk connection.
103-27 Day/Night Control
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
The privilege to change Day/Night Mode.
103-28 Ext BGM Control
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
The privilege to turn on/off background music over external speakers.
103-29 LCR Feature
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to use Least Cost Routing.
103-30 Individual Trunk
Access
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to dial individual trunk access codes to access specific
lines.
103-31 Trunk Access Allowed
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to access trunk groups by trunk access codes.
103-32 Forced Account
Codes
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable
2. Disable
The privilege to use Forced Account Codes for placing external calls.
103-33 Verified Account
Codes
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable
2. Disable
The privilege to have Account Codes verified before an external call
is placed.
103-34 Allow Short Hook
Flash
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to use a Short Flash signal over outside lines.
103-35 Allow Long Hook
Flash
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
The privilege to use a Long Flash signal over outside lines.
Table 13-5 Programs 103~107 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-17
Telephone Button
Programming
103-36 Allow Hook Flash
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
The privilege to receive hook flash over CO Lines and to allow
telephones to hook flash.
103-37 Automatic Line Hold
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
The privilege to have an active call automatically held when
accessing another line.
103-38 Can Originate OCA
, n1,
n1 = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Permission for others to call this station using Off-hook Call
Announce.
104 System Timers
,
System timers set a variety of times to control calls and features for
the system.
104-01 ACB Callback Timer
, n,
n = 5~180 sec.
(default = 30)
The Automatic Callback timer sets the time (5 ~ 180 seconds) that the
callback will be attempted before being cancelled.
104-02 ACB Cancel Recall
Timer
, n,
n = 5~180 sec.
(default = 30)
The Automatic Callback overall timer sets the time (5 ~ 180 minutes)
that a callback can be registered. Once the timer expires, the callback
will be cancelled.
104-03 Park Recall Timer
, n,
n = 10~600 sec.
(default = 120)
The Park timer sets the length of time (10 ~ 600 seconds) a call can
remain in Park prior to a recall to the station that initiated the Park.
104-04 Camp-on Timer
, n,
n = 5~15 sec.
(default = 10)
The Camp-on timer sets the time (5 ~ 60 seconds) needed to remain
off-hook prior to Camp-on being automatically activated.
104-05 SMDR Valid Call
Timer
, n,
n = 0~180 sec.
(default = 1)
The SMDR Answer timer sets a default time (0 ~ 180 seconds) for
when an outgoing call will be considered to be answered for SMDR
reporting when a true answer signal is not returned from the public
network. Setting the time short will include calls that may not be
completed, setting the time too long may exclude short calls that are
answered and terminated in a short time.
104-06 Tandem Connection
#1
, n,
n = 0~3600 sec.
(default = 300)
For Trunk-to-trunk connections which neither CO Line has release
supervision, a timer (0 ~ 3600 seconds) is needed to release the call
if no user monitoring has taken place.
Also used for CO line to RSTU port connections in which the CO line
has no supervision and the
device connected to the RSTU port does not hang up automatically
(see Prg200, PB34).
104-07 Tandem Connection
#2
, n,
n = 0~180 sec.
(default = 30)
The Trunk-to trunk User Input Timer provides a time (0 ~ 180
seconds) to allow an external user to dial a digit to extend the
disconnect time when the connection is unsupervised. This feature
is used primarily with DISA service.
104-08 Call Forward No Ans
Time
, n,
n = 1~180 sec.
(default = 20)
The System Call Forward No Answer timer (1 ~ 180 seconds)
specifies the time period that a phone will ring prior to invoking the
Call Forward operation.
104-09 Dial Input Timer
, n,
n = 0~60 sec.
(default = 20)
Time system will wait for the beginning of DTMF input.
104-10 Delay 1 Ringing Timer
, n,
n = 1~60 sec.
(default = 12)
The Delayed Ringing 1 timer specifies the time (1 ~ 60 seconds) to
wait before applying ringing to the designated phones.
104-11 Delay 2 Ringing Timer
, n,
n = 1~60 sec.
(default =240)
The Delayed Ringing 2 timer specifies the time (1 ~ 60 seconds) to
wait before applying ringing to the designated phones.
104-12 Door Unlock Timer
, n,
n = 1~30 sec.
(default = 6)
The Door Unlock Timer specifies the length of time (1 ~ 30 seconds)
the electrical signal is sent to the door for releasing the lock.
104-13 9+11 Judgement
Timer
, n,
n = 1~30 sec.
(default = 5)
The 9+11 Inter-digital timer provides a timing value (1 ~ 30 seconds)
for the system to wait for additional digits to be dialed looking for the
911 or 9+911 dialed codes for treatment using the E911 procedures
rather than normal dialing treatment.
Table 13-5 Programs 103~107 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
13-18 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
104-14 Emergency Call Timer
, n,
n = 10~180 sec.
(default = 30)
The Emergency Call timer sets a time (10 ~ 180 seconds) for
advancing the call to the next station in a list of destinations for the
call.
104-15 ABR Busy Detection
Time
, n,
n = 1~30 sec.
(default = 5)
The Destination Busy Detection timer sets the time (1 ~ 30 seconds)
to wait while looking for a busy condition on an external call. If
detected, it will trigger the initiation of the Automatic Busy Redial
cycle.
104-16 Lost Call Timer
, n,
n = 1~600 sec.
(default = 180)
The Lost Call timer sets the time (1 ~ 600 seconds) that a failed
transfer recall will ring on the originating station prior to attempting to
recall a secondary location.
104-17 Lost Call Final Timer
, n,
n = 1~600 sec.
(default = 180)
The Lost Call Final timer sets the time (1 ~ 600 seconds) that a failed
transfer recall will ring on the secondary location before being
automatically disconnected.
104-18 DTMF Tone Sending
Time
, n,
n = 1. 80 ms (default)
2. 160 ms
The DTMF tone sending duration (1-80 msecs, 2-160 msecs) for
dialing on CO Lines.
104-19 Auto Disconnect
, n,
n = 0~60 sec.
(default = 0)
Time after which an unsupervised trunk may be automatically
released.
104-23 System Timer
Network DSS Refresh
Timer
n = 20~180 sec. (default = 30) Select Network DSS Refresh Timer (20 -180 seconds). The time
interval when all Network DSS settings are refreshed system wide.
Note DSS button LEDs change state immediately when the status
of the DSS button changes - regardless of this timer value.
104-24 Outgoing Number
Display Timer
n = 1~120 sec. (default = 10) This timer sets how long dialed numbers will display on telephone
LCDs for outgoing line calls.
105 System Parameters
,
This command assigns the system parameters.
105-01 Executive Override
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Break in warning tone of Executive Override Enable or Disable.
105-02 Station MOH
, n, ,
n = 1. Quiet Tone
2. External 1 (default)
3. External 2
4. External 3
5. External 4
6. External 5
7. External 6
8. External 7
9. External 8
10. External 9
11. External 10
12. External 11
13. External 12
14. External 13
15. External 14
16. External 15
Music On Hold selection of Private Line and Station.
105-03 Ringing Transfer
, n, ,
n = 1. RBT (default)
2. MOH
Tones for the transferred party after the ringing transfer takes place.
105-04 Transfer Privacy
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Transfer Privacy enabled: CO line buttons that have multiple
appearances will only flash and ring on the transferred-to telephone;
the same CO line button on other telephones will be red-busy.
Transfer Privacy Disabled: CO line buttons that have multiple
appearances will flash and ring on all telephones that have the CO
line button appearance.
105-05 Privacy Override
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Privacy Override Attendant Monitor warning Enable or Disable.
Table 13-5 Programs 103~107 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-19
Telephone Button
Programming
105-06 Credit Card Code
, n, ,
n = Up to 32 digits Enter the number dialed to initiate a Credit Card Call. This is normally
“0” in the USA.
105-07 Credit Card Digits
, n, ,
n = 1~66 digits Minimum Dial Digits required for Credit Card Calling. This should be
the quantity of digits in a credit card number. If this quantity of digits is
not dialed when making credit card calls, the caller will be
disconnected. This is to insure that the call is charged to a credit card.
DRL tables in Program 111 and OLGs in Program 306 must be
enabled with credit card calling for this feature to be active. Users
must be assigned to a DRL table enable with credit card calling and
call out on a credit card calling enabled OLG for this featured to be
applied to the call.
105-08 E911 Service
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Offer of E911 Service.
105-09 DR Override by SSD
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Destination Restriction Override by System Speed Dial.
105-10 Auto Station Release
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Automatic Station Release.
105-11 ISDN SPID
, n, ,
n = 1. Operable
2. Not Operable (default)
Operation when Auto SPID or User Entry Of SPID fails.
105-12 Night Mode Relay
, n, ,
n = 0~8 Assign BIOU Relay (1~8) as the Night Relay - this relay activates
when the
system is in the Night Mode.
BIUO1 provides relays 1 to 4.
BIUO2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5.
For this relay operation, a virtual BIOU2 is installed, as
default, in a virtual equipment position - Cabinet 2 slot 5.
(Cab. 02 slot 05, PCB code 20, in program 100). To install an
actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the
programming telephone. To remove the virtual BIOU2 and
then install the actual BIOU2 in Cab. 01/slot 01~08 in the
normal manner.
105-13 BGM External Paging
, n, ,
n = 0~4 (CTX100)
0~8 (CTX670 Basic)
0~16 (CTX100 Expanded)
Set the External Page Group Number that includes the external
paging zones to which BGM will be sent. See PRG503.
105-14 Lost Call Destination
, n, ,
n = Up to 5 digits Set Lost Call Destination.
105-15 COS Override Code
, n, ,
n = 1~8
(default = 1)
Class of Service Override Code Digits.
105-16 Multi-Conference
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Conference connection of many member for Analog Internal Call and
Outgoing Call.
105-17 Caller Number
Display
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Caller number display preferentially.
Table 13-5 Programs 103~107 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
13-20 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
105-18 Night Bell Relay
, n, ,
n = 0~8
(default = 0)
Assign BIOU Relay (1~8) as the Night Relay - this relay activates
when the
system is in the Night Mode.
BIOU1 provides relays 1 to 4.
BIOU2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5.
For this relay operation, a virtual BIOU2 is installed, as
default, in a virtual equipment position - Cabinet 2 slot 5.
(Cab. 02 slot 05, PCB code 20, in program 100). To install an
actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the
programming telephone. To remove the virtual BIOU2 and
then install the actual BIOU2 in Cab. 01/slot 01~08 in the
normal manner.
105-19 Display Preference
, n, ,
n = 1. DNIS (default)
2. Caller ID
Whether to display DNIS or Caller ID.
105-20 Transit Counter
, n, ,
n = 0~128
(default = 1)
The Networking Transit Counter limits the number of nodes through
which a QSIG call can pass before being terminated as a lost call.
105-21 Primary Clock
, xxyyzz, ,
xx = Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter data as xxyyzz.
zz=channel 01 if clock source is RPTU or RDTU
zz=channel 01, 02, 03 , or 04 if clock source is RBUU/RBUS or RBSU
Example: If the Primary Clock Source should be a assigned to an
RPTU in cabinet 5, slot 2, enter 050201.
Cabinet numbers:
•CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
•CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.
yy = Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)
zz = Circuit (01~30)
105-22 Secondary Clock
, xxyyzz, ,
xx = Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter data as xxyyzz:
zz=channel 01 if clock source is RPTU or RDTU
zz=circuit 01, 02, 03 , or 04 if clock source is RBUU/RBUS or RBSU
Example: If the Secondary Clock Source should be a assigned to an
RBUU in cabinet 5, slot 2, circuit 2; enter 050202.
Cabinet numbers:
•CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
•CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.
yy = Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)
zz = Circuit (01~30)
105-23 Call History Prefix 1
, n, ,
n = 1. add (default)
2. not add
Whether prefix 1 is added or not in callback of Call History Feature.
105-24 Emergency Digits
Sent
, n, ,
n = Up to 5 digits
(default = 911)
Default = “911” for North America. Enter alternative emergency
dialing strings up to 5 digits as required by local conditions.
105-25 DP Make Ratio
, n, ,
n = 1. DPMakeRatio33
2. DPMakeRatio40
(default)
Dial pulse Make/Break ratio can be set to 33% or 40%. The default
value is 40%.
Table 13-5 Programs 103~107 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-21
Telephone Button
Programming
105-26 Call Button Jumping
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
If enabled, line calls move from a telephone DN button to a line button
after they are answered. After the call is answered, the DN button is
cleared to receive another call. With this operation the DN acts as an
answer button for the telephone. This operation only applies if the line
that is answered has a CO, GCO, or Pooled line button appearance
on the telephone. If disabled, line calls remain on the DN after they
are answered.
106 Day/Night Mode Day
of Week Mapping
,
The Day of the Week schedule defines each day as the type of day
the schedule shall follow. These types of days are called Work Day,
Non-work Day, and Holiday. Each day of the week can be classified.
106-00 Tenant Number n = Enter 1~8 Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be
configured.
106-01 Monday n = 1. Work Day (default)
2. Non-Work
3. Holiday
Enter the type of day to follow for daily schedule. 1- Work Day; 2-
Non-Work Day; or 3- Holiday.
106-02 Tuesday n = 1. Work Day (default)
2. Non-Work
3. Holiday
Enter the type of day to follow for daily schedule. 1- Work Day; 2-
Non-Work Day; or 3- Holiday.
106-03 Wednesday n = 1. Work Day (default)
2. Non-Work
3. Holiday
Enter the type of day to follow for daily schedule. 1- Work Day; 2-
Non-Work Day; or 3- Holiday.
106-04 Thursday n = 1. Work Day (default)
2. Non-Work
3. Holiday
Enter the type of day to follow for daily schedule. 1- Work Day; 2-
Non-Work Day; or 3- Holiday.
106-05 Friday n = 1. Work Day (default)
2. Non-Work
3. Holiday
Enter the type of day to follow for daily schedule. 1- Work Day; 2-
Non-Work Day; or 3- Holiday.
106-06 Saturday n = 1. Work Day
2. Non-Work (default)
3. Holiday
Enter the type of day to follow for daily schedule. 1- Work Day; 2-
Non-Work Day; or 3- Holiday.
106-07 Sunday n = 1. Work Day
2. Non-Work (default)
3. Holiday
Enter the type of day to follow for daily schedule. 1- Work Day; 2-
Non-Work Day; or 3- Holiday.
107 PAD Table
Assignment
,
Assigns additional Sender and Receiver pad values to pad groups in
the pad table.
107-01 Sender PAD Device
Number
, n,
See “PAD Table” on
page 13-22.
n = Up to 3 digits
101~106 (CTX100)
101~110 (CTX670 Basic)
101~132 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter Sender Pad Device Number from Pad Table.
107-02 Receiver PAD Device
Number
, n1,
n1 = Up to 3 digits
101~106 (CTX100)
101~110 (CTX670 Basic)
101~132 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter Receiver Pad Device Number from Pad Table.
107-03 PAD Loss
, n2, ,
n2 = 1. 6 dB Net Gain
2. 3 dB Net Gain
3. 0 dB
4. 3 dB Net Loss
5. 6 dB Net Loss
6. 9 dB Net Loss
7. 12 dB Net Loss
8. 15 dB Net Loss
Enter Pad Value (See PAD Table below). The value shown shows the
net effect.
Note To pad is to insert loss; therefore, negative loss equals net
gain.
Table 13-5 Programs 103~107 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
13-22 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Table 13-6 PAD Table
PAD Device Number 12345678910 101 102
:
PAD Device Number
Receiver (Listener)
Analog Telephone
DKT
Analog Trunk
T1 Trunk
ISDN Station
ISDN Trunk
CONF Bridge
Music Source
Ext. Paging
IPT
PAD Group 1
PAD Group 2
:
Sender (Speaker)
1Analog Telephone 000666X
1-0000
2DKT 0006660-0000
3Analog Trunk 006666X
1-6000
4T1 Trunk 6660000-6300
5ISDN Station 6660000-6300
6ISDN Trunk 6660000-6300
7Conference Bridge (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) 0 0 0
8Music Source 000000000000
9Ext. Paging 006666000000
10 IPT -60-6000-6--6000
101 PAD Group 120 0 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 0 0
102 PAD Group 23333333333330
::
131 PAD Group 31
132 PAD Group 32
Notes
1. “X” data set for PAD Conference table Assignment
2. For IP QSIG only. The default values for PAD Group 1 is 0dB. dB is the value for attenuation level.
3. For PRI QSIG only.
Table 13-7 Program 108
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
108 PAD Group
Assignment
,
This program permits the addition of up to 32 devices to the Pad
Table to deal with exceptions to the default table.
108-00 PAD Group Device
Type.
xyyyyy,
xyyyy
y
Up to 6 digits
x = Device Type
yyyyy = Device number
Enter the Device Type(x) and Device number(y). Refer to the table
below.
108-01 PAD Group Number.
, n1, ,
n1 = 0~6 (CTX100)
0~10 (CTX670 Basic)
0~32 (CTX670 Expanded)
Enter the PAD Group Number.
Table 13-8 PAD Group Device Type Examples
Device Name Device
Type Device Number Example
DKT, SLT, ISDN, Station 10~99999 (PDN) if DKT device = 200, value = 1200.
ISDN Trunk 21~128 (Channel Group Number) if Channel Group # = 10, value = 210.
Analog Trunk, T1 Trunk 31~264 (Trunk Number) if Trunk # = 120, value = 3120.
Conference Bridge 4none (Conference Bridge is only one) value = 4.
Music Source 51~15 (Music Port) if Music port = 8, value = 58.
External Paging Device 61~8 (Zone Relay Number) if External Paging Device = 3, value = 63.
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-23
Telephone Button
Programming
Table 13-9 Programs 109~114
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
109 Music on Hold.
,
This command assigns external Music on Hold (MOH) and
Background Music (BGM) sources.
109-01 MOH/BGM #1
(BECU)
, n,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Enable this assignment if MOH source #1 is connected to the system
processor MOH RCA jack.
109-02 MOH/BGM #2
(BIOU1-J1)
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable this assignment if MOH source #2 is connected to BIOU-1,
MOH RCA jack (J1).
109-03 MOH/BGM #3
(BIOU1-J2)
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable this assignment if MOH source #3 is connected to BIOU-1,
MOH RCA jack (J2).
109-04 MOH/BGM #4
(BIOU1-J3)
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable this assignment if MOH source #4 is connected to BIOU-1,
MOH RCA jack (J3).
109-05 MOH/BGM #5
(BIOU2-J1)
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable this assignment if MOH source #5 is connected to BIOU-2,
MOH RCA jack (J1).
109-06 MOH/BGM #6
(BIOU2-J2)
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable this assignment if MOH source #6 is connected to BIOU-2,
MOH RCA jack (J2).
109-07 MOH/BGM #7
(BIOU2-J3)
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable this assignment if MOH source #7 is connected to BIOU-2,
MOH RCA jack (J3).
109
08~15
MOH/BGM #8
(RSTU)
, xxyyzz,
, n,
xx = Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the RSTU equipment number to which MOH/BGM source #8 or
#9~#15 are connected. Enter data as xxyyzz:
Example: If the MOH/BGM source should be a assigned to an RSTU
in cabinet 5, slot 2, circuit 3; enter 050203.
Note A PDN can not be assigned to an RSTU equipment number if
it is to be a MOH circuit. If a PDN is assigned to the circuit
that will connect to a MOH/BGM source, you must first delete
it using PRG201
Cabinet numbers:
•CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
•CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.
yy = Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670
zz = Circuit 01~08
110 Password
Assignment.
,
The system has two passwords levels. Logging into the system with
the Level 1 password allows you to administer all system programs
while the level 2 password provides restricted program
administration.
110-00 Password Level
n,
n = 1. Unrestricted Admin
2. Restricted Admin
Enter the digit 1 or 2 for the password level. Enter 1 to set the
unrestricted administration password. Enter 2 to set the restricted
administration password.
Note Level 2 users can administer all programs, but are restricted
from initializing the CTX and from updating the CTX software.
110-01 Password
, n1, ,
n1 = Up to 16 digits Enter a 1~16 digit password for the selected level. Each level can
have only one password.
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
13-24 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
111 Destination
Restriction Level
,
This command establishes a Destination Restriction Level (DRL).
111-00 DRL Number
n,
n = 1~16 Enter the DRL number (1~16)
111-01 Credit Card Calling
, n1, ,
n1 = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable or Disable Credit Card Calling for this DRL
112 Day/Night Mode
Calendar
,
The Calendar will override the current Day of the Week setting with
the type of day specified in the calendar. Thus a Working Day or a
Non-working Day can be changed to a Holiday based upon the
calendar.
112-00 Tenant n = 1~8 Enter the Tenant to schedule for Day/Night mode calendar.
112-01 Calendar Day
, YYYYMMDD,
YYYY = Year Enter the calendar day to be treated individually as an exception to
the Day of Week treatment. Maximum table size is 128. Format:
YYYYMMDD
MM = Month
DD = Day
112-02 Working Day Type
, n, ,
n = 1. Delete (default)
2. Work Day
3. Non-Working Day
4. Holiday
Enter the Day Type to override the Weekly Mapping.
113 Day/Night Mode Daily
Schedule
,
The Day/Night Mode daily schedule defines the times for the start of
the Work Day, Non-work Day, and Holiday for each of the modes
(Day, Day2. Night).
113-00 Tenant Number n = Enter 1~8 Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be
configured.
113-01 Day1 Mode/Work Day
, hhmm,
hh =
mm =
hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete
Enter the start time for Day1 Mode for the Work type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.
113-02 Day2 Mode/Work Day
, hhmm,
hh =
mm =
hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete
Enter the start time for Day2 Mode for the Work type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.
113-03 Night Mode/Work Day
, hhmm,
hh =
mm =
hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete
Enter the start time for Night Mode for the Work type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.
113-04 Day1 Mode/Non-Work
Day
, hhmm,
hh =
mm =
hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete
Enter the start time for Day1 Mode for the Non-work type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.
113-05 Day2 Mode/Non-Work
Day
, hhmm,
hh =
mm =
hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete
Enter the start time for Day2 Mode for the Non-work type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.
113-06 Night Mode/Non-Work
Day
, hhmm,
hh =
mm =
hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete
Enter the start time for Night Mode for the Non-work type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.
113-07 Day1 Mode/Holiday
, hhmm,
hh =
mm =
hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete
Enter the start time for Day1 Mode for the Holiday type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.
113-08 Day2 Mode/Holiday
, hhmm,
hh =
mm =
hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete
Enter the start time for Day2 Mode for the Holiday type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.
Table 13-9 Programs 109~114 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-25
Telephone Button
Programming
113-09 Night Mode/Holiday
, hhmm, ,
hh =
mm =
hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete
Enter the start time for Night Mode for the Holiday type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.
114 PAD Conference
Table Assignment
,
Assigns PAD values for combinations of analog trunks and
telephones in conference.
114-01 No. of Conference
Trunks
, n,
n = 0~6
0~8
1. 6 dB Net Gain
2. 3 dB Net Gain
3. 0 dB
4. 3 dB Net Loss
5. 6 dB Net Loss
6. 9 dB Net Loss
7. 12 dB Net Loss
8. 15 dB Net Loss
Enter the number of analog trunks in the conference.
114-02 No. of Conference
Telephones
, n1,
n1 = 0~8 Enter the number of analog telephones in the conference.
114-03 PAD Conference
Value
, n2, ,
n2 = 1. 6 dB Net Gain
2. 3 dB Net Gain
3. 0 dB
4. 3 dB Net Loss
5. 6 dB Net Loss
6. 9 dB Net Loss
7. 12 dB Net Loss
8. 15 dB Net Loss
Enter the desired PAD value for the combination of analog trunks and
telephones specified in 01 and 02 above. See “PAD Conference
Table” on page 13-25.
Table 13-10 PAD Conference Table
Number of
Trunks
Number of Analog Telephones
012345678
0 000003366
1 00003336
2 3333366
3 666669
499999
5 9999
6 9 9 9
Table 13-11 Program 116
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
116 Data Initialize
,
This program is used to initialize the tables of selected programs in
the Strata CTX system.
116-01 , n, ,
See “Data Initialize
Programs” on
page 13-26.
n = 3 digit Program Number
(100~999)
Enter Program Number to be initialized.
Table 13-9 Programs 109~114 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
13-26 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Table 13-12 Data Initialize Programs
Program
Number Program Name Page #
500 System Call Forward Assignment 74
520 LCR Local Route Plan Assignment 82
521 LCR Route Plan Digit Analysis Assignment 83
522 LCR Exception Number Route Plans 83
523 LCR Route Plan Schedule Assignment 83
524 Route Table to Route Definition Assignment 84
525 LCR Route Definition Assignment 84
526 Modified Digits Table Assignment 84
527 LCR Holiday Table 84
529 LCR Route Plan Time Zone Assignment 85
530 DR LCR Screening Table Assignment 85
531 DR Screening Table for OLG 86
533 DR Level Table Assignment 86
534 DRL Exception Table Assignment 87
651 Private Routing Plan Analysis 91
653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment 91
654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment 92
655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment 92
Table 13-13 Program 117
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
117 Public Dial Plan Digit
,
This command is used to prevent users from circumventing
Destination Restriction by sending tones directly to the PSTN before
DR analysis is complete. It defines the number of digits expected in
PSTN numbers beginning with identified sequences. For example, a
number starting with the toll prefix “1” would be expected to be 11
digits long. Calls will be cut through to the public network only after
the expected number of digits have been received.
117-00 Prefix Number
n, ,
n = Up to 7 digits
(Wild Cards n and x)
The initial, identifying external digits. 1 to 7 digits may include wild
cards “x” and “n” where x = 0~9 and n = 2~9.
117-01 Digits to Follow
, n1, ,
n1 = 1~64 The total number of digits in a number beginning with the Prefix
Number above.
Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-27
Telephone Button
Programming
120 Tenant Data
Assignment
,
This program enables you to select an Attendant or Night Bell to ring
when dialing 0 in Day 1, Day 2 or Day 3 mode for up to eight different
Tenants. You can also assign the general purpose relay to the Night
Bell in this program.
120-00 Tenant Number
n, ,
n = 1~8. No Data (Default) Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be
configured.
120-01,
120-02,
120-03
Dial 0 Call Day 1, 2, or
3 Dst Type
, n=1 or 3,
or (see next row)
n = 1. No Data (default)
2. Dialing Digits (see
“n=2“ below)
3. Night Bell
Select to call an Attendant or select to ring the Night Bell when dialing
the Tenant Attendant Access Code in the Day1, Day 2, or Day 3
mode for this Tenant.
The Tenant Attendant Access Code must be assigned in Prg 102. If it
should be “0,” the Attendant Console Group Access Code, which is
“0,” must be deleted.
, n= (Dialing
Digits), .
DEST=enter values.
DEST
=
Up to 32 digits for each
Day Mode selected
(default = noData)
Enter the PDN of the Attendant (BATI) to ring when dialing Tenant
Attendant Access Code in Day, Day2, or Day 3 mode.
120-04 Night Mode Relay
, n,
n = BIOU 1 = relay 1~4
BIOU 2 = relays 5~8
ACTU = relay 5
Enter the General Purpose relay number assigned to the Night Bell.
BIOU relays 1~8. This operation activates the relay continuously
when the system is in the night mode.
120-05 Night Bell Relay
, n,
n = BIOU 1 = relay 1~4
BIOU 2 = relays 5~8
ACTU = relay 5
Enter the General Purpose relay number assigned to the Night Bell.
BIOU relays 1~8. This operation activates the relay when a CO line or
DID rings when the system is in night mode. The CO or DID line must
be assigned to ring the night bell.
Table 13-13 Program 117
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
13-28 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
200 Series Programs
Table 13-14 Programs 200~202
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
200 Station Data
,
This command assigns stations to the system.
200-00 Primary DN
n,
n = Up to 5 digits Primary DN (enter an existing PDN or enter a PDN you wish to create
for a new station).
200-01 PDN Equipment
Number
, xxyyzz,
xx = Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the PDN equipment number (xxyyzz). This is the cabinet, slot,
and circuit number of the ADKU, BDKU/BDKS, PDKU, or RSTU
interface PCB to which the the PDN is, or should be assigned.
Example: If the PDN should be a assigned to a BDKU in cabinet 5,
slot 2, circuit 3; enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
•CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
•CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.
yy = Slot (01~10)
zz = Circuit (01~16)
200-02 Station Type
, n,
n = 1. DKT
2. SLT
Station Type.
Note Select SLT to set up voice mail.
200-03 Circuit Type
, n,
n = 1. Extension
2. Voice Mail
3. Announce (Not used in
USA or Canada)
Extension: Should be assigned to PDNs the are associated with
Digital or Standard telephones
Voice Mail: Should be assigned to PDNs associated with Voice Mail
RSTU circuits.
200-04 Station COS
•Day1 COS
•Day2 COS
•Night COS
, n, , n,
, n,
n = 1~32 COS for Day1.
COS for Day2.
COS for Night.
200-05 Station DRL
•Day1 DRL
•Day2 DRL
•Night DRL
, n, , n,
, n,
n = 1~16 DRL for Day1 (Used for Credit card calling).
DRL for Day2.
DRL for Night.
200-06 Station FRL
•Day1 FRL
•Day2 FRL
•Night FRL
, n, , n,
, n,
n = 1~16 FRL for Day1.
FRL for Day2.
FRL for Night.
200-07 LCR Group
, n,
n = 1~16 Station LCR Group Number.
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-29
Telephone Button
Programming
200-08 Station QPL
•Day1 QPL
•Day2 QPL
•Night QPL
, n, , n,
, n,
n = 1~16 QPL for Day1.
QPL for Day2.
QPL for Night.
200-09 Station Name
, n,
n = Up to 8 digits Station Name to be displayed on LCD (Cannot be entered from DKT
in R1).
200-10 Call Waiting Tone for
Offhook Camp-on
, n,
n = 1. None
2. Singular
3. Continuous
Call Waiting Tone of Offhook Camp-on.
200-11 Dialing Progress Tone
, n,
n = 1. Dial Tone
2. Entry Tone
3. Quiet Tone
Type of Tone to hear after dialing LCR access code.
200-12 System Call Forward
Group Number
, n,
n = 0~4 (CTX100)
0~10 (CTX670 Basic)
0~32 (CTX670 Exp.)
System Call Forward group number.
200-13 Call Pickup
, n,
n = 1. Permitted
2. Group Only
3. Not Permitted
The station privilege to activate Call Pickup.
200-14 Bearer Capability –
3.1KHz
, n,
n = 1. Audio
2. Speech
ISDN Bearer Capability the PSTN is expecting from non ISDN
stations. 3.1kHzAudio or Speech.
200-15 Display DN
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits The number displayed on the calling telephone that rings this PDN
number. The number displayed on the called telephone when calling
from any DN on this telephone.
This number will be overridden by PRG209, 04 (if assigned) and if the
PDN is in a hunt group.
200-16 Caller Emergency
Service Identification
(CESID)
, n,
n = Up to 16 digits E911 Calling Party Information identifier for this station (CESID).
Note CESID should be 10 digits or less for Centralized Automatic
Message Accounting (CAMA) E911 trunk. PRI E911 allows
pot 16 digits.
200-17 Emergency Call
Group
, n,
n = 1~8 The Emergency call group that this station belongs to.
200-18 Remote CF/DND
Password
, n,
n = Up to 4 digits Password to remotely set or cancel DND or station Call Forward from
another CTX station, or for Call Forward only, from a external DISA
line.
Note DND can not be set/canceled remotely from a DISA line.
200-19 VMID Code SMDI
, n,
n = Up to 16 digits Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this
PDN calls voice mail, or when this PDN is called and then forwards to
voice mail ( this number is prefixed by codes in Program 579, 11~16).
Valid entries: digits 0~9, * and #, maximum 10 characters.
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or
DTMF tones on direct calls to voice mail from the PDN and on calls to
the PDN that forward to voice mail (see Program 580 for SMDI or
DTMF choice).
200-22 Message Waiting to
VM Port
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits Message Waiting Center DN.
Table 13-14 Programs 200~202 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
13-30 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
200-23 Travelling COS
Change
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Privilege to change the Travelling Class of Service Override Code.
200-24 TGAC Override
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Trunk Group Access Code Over Ride (for Attendant console) (Not
available in R1).
200-25 Service Tones
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Disable Services Tone for Data Privacy. Service tone, such a Call
Waiting Tone, should be disabled for modems, FAXes, and similar
devices.
200-26 Call Waiting and ROB
Tone
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Enable/Disable the station to receive Call Waiting (Campon) and Ring
Over Busy Tone. CW tone is always two beeps. ROB tone can be two
beeps or continuous as set in PRG 204, 27.
200-27 Name Display
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Privilege to put the user name in the list display of Large LCD
(Directory Assistance)
200-28 Door Ovr DND
, n,
n = 1. Override
2. Do not Override
Enable DND override by door phone.
200-29 Emergency Ringdown
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Enable Emergency ringdown.
200-30 Change System
Speed Dial
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Privilege to use System Speed Dial.
200-31 Network COS
, n,
n = 1~32 Network COS number.
200-32 Auto OCA
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
OCA occurs automatically when making a call to a busy station that
allows OCA calls to be received.
200-33 Originate OCA
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
The privilege to make OCA calls to other stations.
200-34 RSTU Supervision
, n,
n = 1. Received
2. Not Received
Devices connected to RSTU circuits that do not automatically hang
up, and connect to CO lines that do not provide disconnect
supervision, should be set with “Not Received.” This enables the auto
disconnect Tandem timer in PRG 104, PB06 for these types of
Connections.
200-35 Station Speed Dial
Bins
, n,
n = 0~100 The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station
(maximum=100 per station).
200-39 CO Park & Hold
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Enabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of
the parked line that appear on other stations will be on hold. This will
allow the other stations to press the CO or GCO button to pickup the
parked call.
Disabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of
the parked line that appear on other stations will appear busy. This
will prevent the other stations to press the CO or GCO button to
pickup the parked call.
200-40 Stutter Dial Tone
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
This feature is available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software
and with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.
Enable: This station will receive stuttered dial tone when it has a
station-to-station or Voice Mail message waiting, or if DND is set. This
feature is available with Strata CTX R1.3 software.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a
station-to-station or Voice Mail message waiting, or if DND is set.
Table 13-14 Programs 200~202 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-31
Telephone Button
Programming
200-41 Activate Message
Waiting
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
This feature is available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software
and with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.
Enable: This station is allowed to activate station-to-station message
waiting on other stations by dialing the other station number plus 7, 8
or 9; or, by pressing the Msg key. This feature is available with Strata
CTX R1.3 software.
Disable: This station cannot activate station-to-station message
waiting on other stations by dialing the station number plus 7, 8 or 9.
Notes
•When disabled, digital telephones are still allowed to activate
station-to-station message waiting by pressing the Msg button.
•This parameter does not apply to Voice Mail ports to use the
special Message Waiting access codes.
201 Station Delete
,
This command deletes stations.
201-01 Primary DN
, n, ,
PDN or PhDN to be deleted.
202 ISDN BRI Station
,
This command assigns ISDN BRI Stations.
202-00 Primary DN
n, .
n = Up to 5 digits ISDN BRI circuit Prime Directory Number.
202-01 Equipment
, xxyyzz,
xx = Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the BRI equipment number assigned to this PDN. This is the
cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the RBUU/RBUS or RBSU/RBSS
interface PCB to which the the PDN is, or should be, assigned. Enter
data as xxyyzz:
Example: If the PDN should be a assigned to a BDKU in cabinet 5,
slot 2, circuit 3; enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
•CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
•CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.
yy = Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)
zz = Circuit (01~04)
202-02 ISDN Channel Group
, n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~48 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Channel Group Number.
202-03 ISDN Protocol
, n,
n = 1. National ISDN
2. ETSI
3. TTC
4. National ISDN - Nortel
Protocol
202-04 Type Connection
, n,
n = 1. Point to Point
2. Point to Multi Point
Connection format
202-05 BRI Station COS
•Day1 COS
•Day2 COS
•Night COS
, n, , n,
, n,
n = 1~32 COS for Day1
COS for Day2
COS for Night
Table 13-14 Programs 200~202 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
13-32 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
202-06 BRI Station DRL
•Day1 DRL
•Day2 DRL
•Night DRL
, n, , n,
, n,
n = 1~16 DRL for Day1
DRL for Day2
DRL for Night
202-07 BRI Station FRL
•Day1 FRL
•Day2 FRL
•Night FRL
, n, , n,
, n,
n = 1~16 FRL for Day1
FRL for Day2
FRL for Night
202-08 LCR Group
, n,
n = 1~16 LCR Group Number
202-09 BRI Station QPL
•Day1 QPL
•Day2 QPL
•Night QPL
, n, , n,
, n,
n = 1~16 QPL for Day1
QPL for Day2
QPL for Night
202-10 Speech Capability
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Enable Bearer Capability Speech. See “BRI Bearer Capability of
ISDN” on page 13-34.
202-11 3.1 KHz Audio
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Enable Bearer Capability 3.1kHzAudio. See “BRI Bearer Capability of
ISDN” on page 13-34.
202-12 7 KHz Audio
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Enable Bearer Capability 7kHzAudio. See “BRI Bearer Capability of
ISDN” on page 13-34.
202-13 64Kbps Unrestricted
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Enable Bearer Capability unrestricted digital Information 64kbps. See
“BRI Bearer Capability of ISDN” on page 13-34.
202-14 56Kbps Unrestricted
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Bearer Capability unrestricted digital Information 56kbps.
202-15 2 x 64Kbps
Unrestricted
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Bearer Capability unrestricted digital Information 2x64kbps.
202-16 B Channel Selection
, n,
n = 1. Exclusive
2. Preferred
3. Any Channel
B Channel selected originating method.
202-17 Idle B Channel
Selection
, n,
n = 1. Forward Cyclic
2. Backward Cyclic
3. Forward Terminal
4. Backward Terminal
Idle B Channel selection method.
202-18 Interdigit Timer 1
, n,
n = 1~180 Interdigit1 Timer
202-19 Interdigit Timer 2
, n,
n = 1~180 Interdigit2 Timer
202-20 CESID
, n,
n = Up to 16 digits Enter the Caller Emergency Services Identification (CESID) for E911
calls.
202-21 Number Voice Calls
Allowed
, n,
n = 1. One
2. Two
Voice Call Allowed Number for Interface.
Table 13-14 Programs 200~202 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-33
Telephone Button
Programming
202-22 Service Tone
Permission
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Service Tone Permission.
202-23 TGAC Override
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
TGAC Override.
202-24 Change System
Speed
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Permission to register System Speed Dial.
202-25 Network COS
, n,
n = 1~32 Network COS index.
202-26 Additional DN2
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits Additional DN2.
202-27 Additional DN3
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits Additional DN3.
202-28 Additional DN4
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits Additional DN4.
202-29 Additional DN5
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits Additional DN5.
202-30 Additional DN6
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits Additional DN6.
202-31 Additional DN7
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits Additional DN7.
202-32 Additional DN8
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits Additional DN8.
202-33 Auto OCA
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
OCA occurs automatically when making a call to a busy station that
allows calls to be received.
202-34 Originate OCA
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
The privilege to make OCA calls to other stations.
202-35 Station SpDial Bins
, n,
n = 1~100 (in intervals of 10) The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station
(maximum=100).
202-38 MW Stutter Dial Tone
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Enable: This station will receive stuttered dial tone when it has a
station-to-station or Voice Mail message waiting.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a a
station-to-station or Voice Mail message waiting.
202-39 Tenant Number
, n, ,
n = 1~8 (default = 1) Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned.
Table 13-14 Programs 200~202 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
13-34 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Table 13-15 BRI Bearer Capability of ISDN
Bearer Services Bellcore
Nat’l ISDN ETSI TTC
Circuit Mode
Speech X X X
3.1kHz Audio X X X
7kHz Audio X X
Unrestricted Digital Information
64 kbps X X X
Rate adaptation
from 56 kbps X
2x64 X X
Table 13-16 Programs 203~204
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
203 Change DN
,
This command changes DN.
203-00 Primary DN
n,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter DN to change.
203-01 Enter new DN
, n1, ,
n1 = Up to 5 digits Enter new DN.
204 DKT Parameters
,
This command assigns DKT digital telephone data.
204-00 Primary DN
n,
n = Up to 5 digits Primary DN
204-01 Station Type
, n,
n = 1. Extension
2. Attendant
For CTX R1 this must be set to “Extension.” The “Attendant” option is
not available for this release.
204-02 Key Strip Pattern
, n,
n = 1. Pattern1
2. Pattern2
3. Pattern3
4. None
Default key strip patterns for digital telephones. The selected Pattern
is applied to the “Key Strip Type” parameter (DKT3014 uses only
Pattern 1 or None).
•None - applies PDN to button 01 and blank to all other buttons.
•Pattern 1 - applies PDN to button 01, plus line buttons and DND.
•Pattern 2 - applies PDN to button 01, plus line buttons, One-
Touch buttons and DND.
•Pattern 3 - applies PDN to button 01 and blank to all other
buttons.
204-03 Key Strip Type
, n,
n = 1~24 Apply 1, 3, 10, 14, or 20 button keystrip type to digital telephones.
•1 and 3 button keystrips apply to DKT2001 and DKT3001.
•10 button keystrips apply to DKT2010 and DKT3010.
•14 button keystrips apply to the Large LCD DKT3014
•20 button keystrips apply to DKT2020 and DKT3020.
204-04 Add on Modules
, n,
n = 1. None
2. One Unit
3. Two Units
The Number of Add-on Modules assigned to this station.
204-05 Tone 1st /Voice 1st
, n,
n = 1. Tone
2. Voice
Set PDN to have Tone First or Voice First signaling when called.
For each iES32 PDN, set to “Tone First”, if set to Voice First iES32 will
not answer.
204-06 OCA Type
, n,
n = 1. Handset
2. Speaker
Select the OCA type. This field must be programmed with Auto OCA
Originate below.
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-35
Telephone Button
Programming
204-09 Handsfree MIC
Setting
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
If you call a station configured for Voice First signalling, you can use
this parameter to enable the called parties microphone from your
DKT.
204-10 Handsfree Tone
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
If you call a DKT configured for Voice First signalling, you can use this
parameter to send a splash tone to the called party.
204-11 Ext. Ring Repeat
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Enable repetitive ringing for incoming CO/PBX/Centrex signals.
Disabling this parameter defaults to standard CO ringing pattern
(1 second on/3 seconds Off).
204-13 Ringing Line
Preference
, n,
n = 1. Idle
2. Ringing
3. Prime
4. No Preference
5. Prime and Idle
6. Prime and Ringing
7. Ringing and Idle
Select Off Hook Preference.
When a digital telephone user goes off hook, presses the Spkr Button
or dials a digit while the telephone is idle (Hot Dial Pad), the
telephone will select an idle PDN or Line button, or answer an
incoming call, according to the preferences set in this command.
This command works in conjunction with the “14 PDN/Line
preference” and “15 Call Answer Preference” programs. The possible
values are described as follows:
•Idle – The telephone will select and idle DN or Line button
depending on the “14 PDN or Line preference” choice. In either
case priority is always the lowest numbered button that is idle.
The telephone will not answer ringing calls automatically.
•Ringing – The telephone will answer a ringing call (any PDN,
secondary DN, PhDN, or any Line type button) by call type or
longest ringing button depending on the “15 Call Answer
Preference” choice. The telephone will not automatically select a
DN or Line button when going off hook to originate a call.
•Primary DN – The telephone will automatically try to select the
PDN button, if idle or ringing, no matter what the status is of other
buttons on the telephone.
•No Preference – The telephone will not select any button when
the user goes off hook or presses the Spkr button. This selection
will also disable the telephone’s Hot Dial Pad feature.
•Primary DN and Idle – The telephone will automatically try to
select the PDN button, if idle or ringing. If the PDN is busy the
telephone will select an idle Line button (14 PDN or Line
preference - Line Preference) or another idle DN button (14 PDN
or Line preference - PDN Preference).
•Primary DN and Ringing – The telephone will automatically try to
select the PDN button, if idle or ringing. If the PDN is busy the
telephone will select a ringing Line button (14 PDN or Line
preference - Line Preference) or a ringing DN button (14 PDN or
Line preference - PDN Preference).
•Ringing and Idle – The telephone will always answer any ringing
call according to “15 Call Answer Preference” . If a call is not
ringing it will select and idle Line button (14 PDN or Line
preference - Line Preference) or idle DN button (14 PDN or Line
preference - PDN Preference).
204-14 Off-hook Preference
, n,
n = 1. CO Key
2. DN Key
Offhook preference button Type. Off hook ringing selections are also
based on “15 Call Answer Preference” choices.
•CO Line buttons - Line buttons (any type CO, Pooled or Group
CO line button) have priority over DN buttons with “13 Off Hook
Preference” choices. The lowest numbered line button on the
telephone has priority over other line buttons for idle selection.
•Primary DN button - DN buttons (any type PDN, Secondary DN or
PhDN button) have priority over Line buttons with “13 Off Hook
Preference” choices. The PDN button has first priority for idle
selection, the lowest numbered DN button on the telephone has
priority over other DN buttons for idle selection if the PDN button
is busy.
Table 13-16 Programs 203~204 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
13-36 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
204-15 Ringing Preference
, n,
n = 1. Longest
2. Call Type
Ringing call answer preference.
•Longest Ringing - any call type - Calls are answered in order of
the longest ringing line no matter what type of call (FIFO).
•Longest Ringing - by call type priority - Call Type priority is
applied to the longest ringing button.
Call Type Priorities are fixed in software as shown below:
1. Emergency Calls
2. Hands Free Calls (after it is switched to ringing by the caller).
3. ACD calls
4. Recalls (Hold recall, Automatic call back, ABR, etc.)
5. External Calls (DID, DIT DISA line calls etc.)
6. Internal Calls (station, Attendant, Tie line, door phone, etc.)
204-16 Text Message Display
, n,
n = 1. Immediate
2. Not Immediate
Select whether to display an LCD text message.
•Immediate - displays the message.
•Not immediate - does not display the message.
204-17 Call History Memory
, n,
n = 0~100 Enter the number of calls to be stored in memory for this station.
204-18 DTMF Back Tone
, n,
Not Used, has no effect on system operation
204-19 Continuous DTMF
, n,
n = 1. Continuous
2. Not Continuous
Enable / Disable Continuous DTMF.
For each iES32 PDN, set to “not Continuous”, if set to “Continuous”,
outdial notification to pagers and calls to AMIS nodes will not function
properly.
Possible values: Enable, Disable
204-20 Display Language
, n,
n = 1. English
2. British English
3. French
Select the LCD Display Language.
204-21 Adapter
, n,
n = 1. None
2. BPCI
3. BATI
Select the Adapter Type (Desktop OAI or Attendant Console).
•None (default), BPCI or BATI
•BPCI – for USB interface.
•BATI – for PC Attendant Console Interface.
204-22 Blind Transfer
, n,
n = 1. Leave
2. Separate
Set Blind Transfer Action (Attendant Type Only).
204-23 Mail Box Selection
, n,
n = 1. Auto
2. Manual
Select the method to enter the destination Mailbox for Call Recording.
If set to “Auto” CTX uses the VM ID of the station initiating the record
function.
Notes
•The DN assigned as the MSG center in PROG 200 is used to call
the VM port or Hunt group (PROG 200 FK 22).
•When set to “Auto” the VM-ID of the station initiating the record
function is sent to Stratagy ES as the destination mailbox.
•When set to “Manual Input” the user may enter any valid Mailbox
followed by the “#” sign. If the user Presses “#” without additional
data the CTX will send the VMID of the originating station.
204-24 MIC Init. Value
, n,
n = 1. On
2. Off
Turn on the microphone automatically when making a speaker phone
call. The microphone must be enabled.
204-25 Microphone
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Enable microphone.
204-26 Speaker Mode Tones
, n,
n = 1. Yes
2. No
Enable telephone to receive Call Waiting (Camp-on) and Ring Over
Busy Tone while on a speaker phone call.
Table 13-16 Programs 203~204 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-37
Telephone Button
Programming
Feature Button Patterns
The following tables show the various feature button patterns available for )% above.
204-27 Ring Over Busy
Cycles
, n,
n = 1. Two Cycles
2. Continuous
Set ROB to ring two times or continuously.
Note See PRG200, 26 to enable ROB to be sent to individual
telephones.
204-28 Attd Overflow Dest.
, n,
n = Up to 32 digits Select overflow destination for attendant.
204-29 Trunk Test and Verify
, n,
n = 1. Yes
2. No
Allow Trunk Tests and Verification.
204-30 Auto Line Hold
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Enable Automatic Line Hold. This parameter allows a station to “line
hop” from one call to another automatically by placing the first call on
hold.
Table 13-17 20 Button (when FB03 value is 20)
PATTERN1 PATTERN2 PATTERN3 PATTERN4
FB01 Primary DN Primary DN Primary DN
None
FB02 CO 1 CO 1
No Data
FB03 CO 2 CO 2
FB04 CO 3 CO 3
FB05 CO 4 CO 4
FB06 CO 5 CO 5
FB07 CO 6 CO 6
FB08 CO 7 CO 7
FB09 CO 8 CO 8
FB10 CO 9 CO 9
FB11 CO 10 CO 10
FB12 CO 11 CO 11
FB13 CO 12 CO 12
FB14 CO 13
Single Touch Button
FB15 CO 14
FB16 CO 15
FB17 CO 16
FB18 CO 17
FB19 CO 18
FB20 Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb
Table 13-16 Programs 203~204 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
13-38 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Table 13-18 10 Button (when FB03 value is 10)
PATTERN1 PATTERN2 PATTERN3 PATTERN4
FB01 Primary DN Primary DN Primary DN
None
FB02 CO 1 CO 1
No Data
FB03 CO 2 CO 2
FB04 CO 3 CO 3
FB05 CO 4 CO 4
FB06 CO 5
Single Touch Button
FB07 CO 6
FB08 CO 7
FB09 CO 8
FB10 Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb
Table 13-19 14 Button (when FB03 value is 14)
PATTERN1 PATTERN2 PATTERN3 PATTERN4
FB01 Primary DN Primary DN Primary DN
None
FB02 CO 1
No Data No Data
FB03 CO 2
FB04 CO 3
FB05 CO 4
FB06 CO 5
FB07 No Data
FB08 CO 7
FB09 CO 8
FB10 CO 9
FB11 CO 10
FB12 CO 11
FB13 Do Not Disturb
FB14 No Data
Table 13-20 Program 205
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
205 DKT Feature Keys.
,
The Feature Key assignment allows each key on the telephone to be
addressed and assigned a code representing the function to be
performed. Some feature keys require additional parameters to
completely define the key. For example, a Phantom DN needs a
directory number, ringing assignment, and the tone pitch when ringing
occurs.
205-00 Primary DN
n,
n = 0~99999 Enter a Primary DN number to program FBs.
Note FB04 Add on Modules in Program 204 must be set to One or
Two.
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-39
Telephone Button
Programming
205-01 Key Number
~
Press the desired FB to program.
Note On the 14-button telephones, the left side buttons are
FB01~FB07 and the right side buttons are FB11~FB17.
Code
n,
n = Select Desired Feature Code. See “Flexible Button Assignment
Feature Code Table” on page 13-41.
100 - PDN
110 - PhDN
120 - CO
130 - GCO
140 - Pooled Line Button
540 - Door Lock Cancel
560 - PhDN Message Waiting
610 - DSS Button
900 - Start Application
Parameter 1
n1, see Note
Note For Feature
Code 560,
610 and 900,
make your
selection and
push Spkr for
further
options.
n1 = See “Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40.
This Parameter is required for all Feature Codes.
Parameter 2
n2, see Note
Note For Feature
Code 100,
make your
selection and
push Spkr for
further
options.
n2 = See “Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40.
This Parameter is required for all Feature Codes except Feature
Codes 560, 610 and 900.
Parameter 3
n3, see Note
Note For Feature
Code 110 and
140, make
your selection
and push
Spkr for
further
options.
n3 = See “Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40.
This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 110, 120, 130 and 140
only.
Parameter 4
n4, see Note
Note For Feature
Code 120,
make your
selection and
push Spkr for
further
options.
n4 = See “Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40.
This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 120 and 130 only.
Parameter 5
n5, see Note
Note For Feature
Code 130,
make your
selection and
push Spkr for
further
options.
n5 = See “Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40.
This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 130 only.
Table 13-20 Program 205
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
13-40 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Table 13-21 Feature/Button Code Parameter Assignments
Feature Button
Code Sub-parameters Description Values LCD Prompt
PDN Parameter 1 Set ring pattern. 1. No Ring
2. Immediate
3. Delay 1
4. Delay 2
Parameter 2 Set ring tone. Enter a value of 1~4. PITCH=
PhDN Parameter 1 Set PhDN. Maximum 5 digit number. DN=
Parameter 2 Set ring pattern. 1. No Ring
2. Immediate
3. Delay 1
4. Delay 2
Parameter 3 Set ring tone. Enter a value of 1~4. PITCH=
CO Parameter 1 Set CO number. Enter a value of 0~264. LINE NO=
Parameter 2 Set ring pattern. 1. No Ring
2. Immediate
3. Delay 1
4. Delay 2
Parameter 3 Set ring tone. Enter a value of 1~4. PITCH=
Parameter 4 Owner DN. Max 5 characters OWNER DN=
GCO Parameter 1 Set GCO number. Enter a value of 0~128. GCO NO=
Parameter 2 GCO Index. Enter a value of 0~128. INDEX=
Parameter 3 Set ring pattern. 1. No Ring
2. Immediate
3. Delay 1
4. Delay 2
Parameter 4 Set ring tone. Enter a value of 1~4. PITCH=
Parameter 5 Owner DN. Max 5 characters OWNER DN=
Pooled Line
Button
Parameter 1 Pooled Line
number.
Enter a value from 0~128. POOL NO=
Parameter 2 Set ring pattern. 1. No Ring
2. Immediate
3. Delay 1
4. Delay 2
Parameter 3 Set ring tone. Enter a value of 1~4. PITCH
Door Lock
Cancel
Parameter 1 Door Lock number. Enter a value from 1~10. NUMBER=
PhDN
Message
Waiting
Parameter 1 Set PhDN number. Max 5 characters. PH DN=
DSS Button Parameter 1 DSS Button PDN
number. Up to 7
digits with CTX
Release 1.3 or
higher software. Up
to 5 digits for
releases earlier than
1.3.
You cannot set the same
DN in DSS Key for one
station.
PDN=
Start
Application
Parameter 1 Enter Application
number.
Enter a value between
0~99.
APL NO=
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-41
Telephone Button
Programming
Table 13-22 Flexible Button Assignment Feature Code Table
Feature Buttons Code
No Data/Delete Code
Account Code (Frequently used codes)
Attendant Console Group Access Code n/a
Automatic Attendant (The extension terminal having the simplified attendant console attribute
must set at least the ATT-ANSWER button)
•Answer
•Overflow
Automatic Busy Redial
Automatic Callback Cancel
BGM
Call Forward
•All Call
•All Call (Remotely)
•Busy (External Call Activation)
•Busy CF-A (External Call Activation)
•No Answer
•No Answer (External Call Activation)
•Busy No Answer
•Busy No Answer (External Call Activation)
Call Handling
•Cancel
•Release
•Destination Party
•Release/Answer
•Privacy
•Privacy Release
•Source Party
Call Park
•System Orbit
Call Pickup
•Incoming - Group Pickup
•Incoming - Directed Terminal Pickup
•Incoming - Directed Group Pickup
•Incoming - Directed DN Pickup
•On hold - Local Retrieve
•On hold - Remote Retrieve
•On hold - Outside line Retrieve
•On hold - Directed DN Retrieve
•On hold and Incoming - Any External Call
•On hold and Incoming -
Calling Number Identification (CLID)
Dialing
•Dial Out
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
13-42 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Door Lock Cancel
Flash - Short
Flash - Long
•Attendant
•Supervised
Microphone Cut Off (MCO)
Message Waiting
•Phantom (PhDN) Message Waiting
Night Transfer
Paging
One Touch Button
•Page All Groups
•Page Individual Groups
•Emergency Page - Individual Group
•Emergency Page - All Groups
•Answer Feature
Position Busy
Programming Mode (Enter User Programming Mode)
Split (Conference Split)
Speed Dial (register Speed Dial)
Start Application
Trunk Test
Voice Mail
•Auto Voice Mail Playback
•Auto Voice Mail Record
Notes
1. T = Telephone type PCB
2. L = CO line type PCB
3. = Allowed T1/PRI slots
4. The Base cabinet allows Speaker OCA and DIU data with PDKU in all slots; expansion
cabinets provide these features in slots S_01~S_06 only.
5. Last available slot: B1C=S108, B2C=206, B3C=310, and B5C=510.
Table 13-23 Programs 206
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
206 Phantom DN
,
This command assigns PhantomDN parameters.
206-00 Phantom DN
n,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter Phantom DN.
206-01 Owned PDN
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits Set PhantomDN’s Owner Station
206-02 Tone/Voice First
, n,
n = 1. Tone First (default)
2. Voice First Select from Tone first, or Voice first signaling.
206-03 Handsfree
Answerback
, n,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Whether to regard an incoming call as a hands free call
Table 13-22 Flexible Button Assignment Feature Code Table (continued)
Feature Buttons Code
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-43
Telephone Button
Programming
Program 207
Note Use Program 207 only for CTX software versions R1.03 and above.
Assign the Feature button as a One Touch button using the following programs before using Program 207.
• Use Program 205 to assign DKT’s feature button as a One Touch button
• Use Program 213 to assign the Add-on Module feature button as a One Touch button
• Use Program 215 to assign DSS Console feature button as a One Touch button
206-04 Display DN
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter the number displayed on the calling telephone that rings this
Phantom DN number.
This number is overridden by the number in Program 209, FB04 (if
assigned) and if the Phantom DN is in a hunt group. When calling
from this Phantom DN, the number displayed on the called telephone
appears in order of priority as follows:
This number in Program 209, FB04 (if assigned) and if the PhDN is in
a hunt group.
...or this number in Program 200, FB15 (if assigned).
...or the calling telephone’s PDN.
206-05 System Call Forward
, n,
n = 0~4 (CTX100)
0~10 (CTX670 Basic)
0~32 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Select the System Call Forward value.
206-06 VM ID Code
, n,
n = Up to 16 digits Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this
PhDN calls voice mail; or, when this PhDN is called and then forwards
to voice mail (This number is prefixed by codes in Program 579,
~).
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or
DTMF tones on direct calls to voice mail from the PhDN; and on calls
to the PhDN that forward to voice mail (see Program 580 for SMDI or
DTMF choice).
Note Do not enter a VMID code in this field if this PhDN is
associated with a PDN in a multiple DN hunt group (Program
209, ).
The associated PDN’s VMID code (Program 200, ) will be sent
to voice mail.
206-09 Message Center
, n,
n = Up to 16 digits Enter the Message Waiting Center DN, VM Pilot Number or lowest
member of VM hunt group.
206-11 Display Name
, n, ,
n = Up to 16 digits Select radio button for user name to be included in the list display of
Large LCD (Directory Assistance).
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
207 Single Touch Button
Data Assignments
,
Assigns timing parameters to Primary DNS.
207-00 Primary DN
n,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter Primary DN of DKT.
207-01 Feature Key Number
, n,
n = 1~2860 Enter the feature number of the one touch button that registers the
operating data.
207-02 Registration Data
(See details below)
, n,
n = Up to 64 digits Registration of the operating data.
Table 13-23 Programs 206 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
13-44 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
1. FB00 – Primary DN.
2. FB01 – The button that you assign as the One Touch Button on the DKT.
You can assign the One Touch Button from the DKT for the DKT FB key, Add-on Module FB key and
also DSS Console FB key. Follow the steps and examples below to assign One Touch Buttons for each
of the following.
➤To assign the One Touch Button for the DKT
➤The data is 1~24. Example: FB1 is 1, FB20 is 20.
➤To assign the One Touch Button for the Add-on Module
➤Use four digits (1yzz) to assign the single touch button for the Add-on Module.
1 is for Add-on Module.
y is the location of Add-on Module (1 or 2)
zz is the feature button for the Add-on Module (01~20). zz is equal to two digits.
Example 1: FB01 for Add-on Module 1 is 1101
Example 2: FB20 for Add-on Module 2 is 1220
➤To assign the One Touch Button for the DSS Console
➤Use four digits (2yzz) to assign the single touch button for the DSS Console.
2 is for the DSS console
y is the location of DSS console (1~8 )
zz is the feature button for DSS console ( 01~60 ). zz is equal to two digits.
Example 1: FB01 for DSS console 1 is 2101
Example 2: FB20 for DSS console 8 is 2860
3. FB02 – The Information data for One Touch Button
From the programming DKT.
Note You will have to use the ESC code when programming the DKT. The table below gives you One
Touch Data Entry sequences.
Table 13-24 One Touch Data Entry Sequences
Data for Single Touch Button Setting code from DKT Display Data
1~9, 0 1~9, 0 1~9, 0
[Vol Up] + &
#[Vol Up] + #&#
Mode [Vol Up] + [Mode] &SK01
Page [Vol Up] + [Page] &SK02
Scroll [Vol Up] + [Scroll] &SK03
Feature [Vol Up] + [Feature] &SK04
Msg [Vol Up] + [Msg] &MSG
Mic [Vol Up] + [Mic] &MIC
Spkr [Vol Up] + [Spkr] &SPK
Spdial [Vol Up] + [Spdial] &SPD
Redial [Vol Up] + [Redial] &RDL
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-45
Telephone Button
Programming
Example for Setting the data of Single Touch Button from Programming DKT
1. Choose Program 207 and press +ROG key.
2. Choose Primary DN number and press +ROG Key.
3. Press )% and input digits for FB and press +ROG key. In this case 12.
4. Press )% and Press [9RO8S][)%].
Cnf/Trn [Vol Up] + [Cnf/Trn] &CNF
Vol Up [Vol Up] + [Vol Up] &UP
Vol Down [Vol Up] + [Vol Down] &DWN
DKT’s FB [Vol Up] + [FB on DKT] &FByy (yy=01-24)
ADM’s FB [Vol Up] + [FB on ADM] &ADxyy (x=1,2 yy=01-20)
DSS’s FB [Vol Up] + [FB on DSS] &DSxyy (x=1-8 yy=01-60)
Note & means ESC code
Table 13-25 Programs 208~218
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
208 Station Timer
Assignments
,
Assigns timing parameters to Primary DNS.
208-00 Primary DN
n,
n = 1~640 Enter the Primary DN.
Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
208-01 ABR Retry Count
, n,
n = 5~20
(default = 15)
Enter the number of retry attempts made by ABR when dialing a busy
telephone number.
208-02 ABR Retry Interval
Timer
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits
(default = 60)
Select the amount of time (in seconds) ABR waits between dialing
attempts.
208-03 ABR Recall Timer
, n,
n = Up to 9 digits
(default = 20)
Select the number of seconds ABR will call back the station after
receiving ring back tone from the dialed number.
208-04 Hold Recall Timer
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits
(default = 60)
Select the number of seconds before a call is placed on hold recalls.
208-05 First Interdigit Timer
, n,
n = 0~32
(default = 15)
Select the amount of time a Station has to dial after going off hook
before a call is terminated (ROT is heard).
208-06 Second Interdigit
Timer
, n,
n = 0~180
(default = 5)
Select the amount of time the system waits between dialed digits
before terminating a call (ROT is heard).
208-07 Ring Xfer No Answer
Timer
, n, ,
n = 0~600
(default = 32)
Select the Ring Transfer Idle station or Busy station (Camp-on) Recall
Time (in seconds).
Table 13-24 One Touch Data Entry Sequences (continued)
Data for Single Touch Button Setting code from DKT Display Data
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
13-46 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
209 Station Hunting Group
,
This command assigns Station Hunting Group data.
209-00 Group Number
n,
n = Up to 3 digits
1~90 (CTX100)
1~200 (CTX670 Basic)
1~640 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = no value)
Hunt Group Number.
209-01 Hunt Method
, n,
n = 1. Serial
2. Circular (for Multiple
DN hunt groups)
(default)
3. Distributed (for Voice
Mail hunt groups)
Select Hunt Method.
209-02 Pilot Number
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter Pilot Directory Number. This is the number that is dialed to call
the hunt group.
Note Any type of hunt group can have a pilot number. Distributed
hunt groups must have a pilot number. Voice Mail hunt
groups should be Distributed with a Pilot Number. Multiple
DN Hunt groups should be Circular with no Pilot Number.
209-04 Number to Display
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter the number that displays when called by, or when calling any
member of the hunt group.
Note This number should be the DH Group Pilot number for Voice
Mail hunt groups. This number could be the PDN of a Multiple
DN Hunt group, in which case the number would override the
number assigned in Program 200, FB15 for PDNs and
Program 206, FB04 for Phantom DNs.
209-05 Pilot No. SCF
, n,
n = 0~4 (CTX100)
0~10 (CTX670 Basic)
0~32 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Allows you to assign a System Call Forward pattern to the Pilot
Number of a Hunt Group.
209-06 Multiple DN Hunt
, n,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Enable if hunt group is created for multiple DN operation. Multiple DN
hunt groups should be circular with no pilot number.
209-07 DHG Auto Camp-on
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Whether to execute Automatic Camp On to the Distributed Hunt
Group or not.
Should be applied to VM Distributed Hunt Groups so callers
automatically camp on to Voice Mail when all VM ports are busy.
Does not apply to Circular or Serial hunt groups.
210 Group Call Pickup
,
The Call Pickup Group assignment specifies which group numbers
this station will participate when either the Group Call Pickup or the
Group Directed Call Pickup features are invoked. A user may be
assigned to more than one group.
210-00 Primary DN
n,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter the Primary DN.
210-
01~32
Group 1~32
, n, ,
n = 1. Yes
2. No (default)
Indicate whether this station is to participate in this Call Pickup group.
Note 01~05 are available for CTX100, 01~10 are available for
CTX670 Basic, and 01~32 are available for CTX670 Exp.
213 ADM Feature Keys
,
The Feature Key assignment allows each key on the telephone to be
addressed and assigned a code representing the function to be
performed. Some feature keys require additional parameters to
completely define the key. For example, a Phantom DN needs a
directory number, ringing assignment, and the tone pitch when ringing
occurs.
213-00 PDN+ADM
yyyyyx,
yyyyy
=
x =
Primary DN (0~99999)
ADM (1 or 2)
Enter a Primary DN plus an ADM number to Program ADM FBs.
Note FB04 Add on Modules in Program 204 must be set to One or
Two.
Table 13-25 Programs 208~218 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-47
Telephone Button
Programming
213-01 Key Number
~
Press the desired FB to program.
Code
n,
n = 1~20 Select Desired Feature Code. See the Feature Code Table 13-22 on
page 41.
100 - PDN
110 - PhDN
120 - CO
130 - GCO
140 - Pooled Line Button
540 - Door Lock Cancel
560 - PhDN Message Waiting
610 - DSS Button
900 - Start Application
Parameter 1
n1, see Note
Note For Feature
Code 560,
610 and 900,
make your
selection and
push
.
n1 = See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.
This Parameter is required for all Feature Codes.
Parameter 2
n2, see Note
Note For Feature
Code 100,
make your
selection and
push
.
n2 = See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.
This Parameter is required for all Feature Codes except Feature
Codes 560, 610 and 900.
Parameter 3
n3, see Note
Note For Feature
Code 110 and
140, make
your selection
and push
.
n3 = See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.
This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 110, 120, 130 and 140
only.
Parameter 4
n4, see Note
Note For Feature
Code 120,
make your
selection and
push
.
n4 = See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.
This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 120 and 130 only.
Parameter 5
n5, see Note
Note For Feature
Code 130,
make your
selection and
push
.
n5 = See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.
This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 130 only.
Table 13-25 Programs 208~218 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
13-48 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
214 DSS Console
Assignment
,
This assignment allows up to eight Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Consoles to be assigned to a station. The assignment is referenced
to the stations’s Primary DN.
214-00 Primary DN
n,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter the Prime Directory Number of the station that is to be
associated with the DSS console(s).
214-
01~08
DSS 1~DSS 8
~, xxyyzz,
,
xx =
yy =
zz =
Cabinet (01~07)
Slot (01~10)
Circuit (01~08)
Enter the DSS equipment number as xxyyzz.
•Cabinet – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet (CTX100).
Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet (CTX670).
•Slot – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots
(CTX100).
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
Example: If the DSS console should be connected to a PDKU or
BDKU/BDKS in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Note If a PDN is assigned to the DSS equipment number it must
be deleted, using PRG201, before attempting to assign the
DSS console.
215 DSS Feature Keys
,
The Feature Key assignment allows each key on the telephone to be
addressed and assigned a code representing the function to be
performed. Some feature keys require additional parameters to
completely define the key. For example, a Phantom DN needs a
directory number, ringing assignment, and the tone pitch when ringing
occurs.
215-00 PDN+DSS
yyyyyx,
yyyyy = Primary DN (0~99999) Enter a Primary DN plus DSS Key Assignment button to program
DSS FBs.
Note FB04 Add on Modules in Program 204 must be set to One or
Two.
x = DSS (1~8)
Table 13-25 Programs 208~218 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-49
Telephone Button
Programming
215-01 DSS Key Number
~
Press the desired FB to program on your DSS.
Code
n,
n = Select Desired Feature Code. See “Flexible Button Assignment
Feature Code Table” on page 13-41.
100 - PDN
110 - PhDN
120 - CO
130 - GCO
140 - Pooled Line Button
540 - Door Lock Cancel
560 - PhDN Message Waiting
610 - DSS Button
900 - Start Application
Parameter 1
n1, see Note
Note For Feature
Code 560,
610 and 900,
make your
selection and
push
.
n1 = See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.
This Parameter is required for all Feature Codes.
Parameter 2
n2, see Note
Note For Feature
Code 100,
make your
selection and
push
.
n2 = See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.
This Parameter is required for all Feature Codes except Feature
Codes 560, 610 and 900.
Parameter 3
n3, see Note
Note For Feature
Code 110 and
140, make
your selection
and push
,.
Otherwise.
push .
n3 = See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.
This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 110, 120, 130 and 140
only.
Parameter 4
n4, see Note
Note For Feature
Code 120,
make your
selection and
push
.
n4 = See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.
This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 120 and 130 only.
Parameter 5
n5, see Note
Note For Feature
Code 130,
make your
selection and
push
.
n5 = See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.
This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 130 only.
Table 13-25 Programs 208~218 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
13-50 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
216 Emergency Ringdown
Assignment.
,
Assigns Emergency Ring Down parameters to Primary DNs.
216-00 Primary DN
n,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter the Primary DN.
216-01 Emergency Ringdown
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable an Emergency Ringdown Number.
216-02 Emergency Ringdown
Timer
, n,
n = 5~60
(default = 0)
Enter the length of off-hook time that will cause a DN to originate an
Emergency
216-03 Destination
, n, ,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter the destination DN for the Emergency Ringdown.
217 ISDN Station Data
,
ISDN stations need a set of parameters to be set to define its
capabilities. These include a Name when calling display phones, Call
of Service settings, etc.
217-00 Primary DN
n,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter Primary DN.
217-01 Station Name
, n, ,
n = Up to 9 digits Enter a name for this station.
217-02 Dial Method
, n, ,
n = 1. Dial Tone (default)
2. Entry Tone
3. No Tone
Select the audible tone when dialing.
217-03 System Call Forward
, n, ,
n = 0~32
(default = 0)
Select the System Call Forward assignment for this station.
217-04 CF Password
, n, ,
n = Up to 4 digits Protect the System Call Forward settings by creating a password.
217-05 Door Phone Override
DND
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable the Door Phone ringing indicator to override Do Not Disturb.
217-06 Emergency Call
Group
, n, ,
n = 1~8
(default = 1)
Select this station’s emergency call group.
217-07 COS Override Code
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable Class of Service override.
217-08 Display DN
, n, ,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter the DN to be displayed on the LCD.
217-09 VMID Code SMDI
, n, ,
n = Up to 10 digits
Digits 0~9, * and #
Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this
PDN calls voice mail; or, when this PDN is called and then forwards to
voice mail (this number is prefixed by codes in Program 579, 11~16).
Note This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI
packets or DTMF tones on direct and forwarded calls to the
PDN. See Program 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice.
217-12 Name Display
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable Whether to put the user name in the list display.
218 Station Hunt Group
Assignment
,
This assignment configures station DNs to hunt groups and assigns
the order of rotation in which the DNs are hunted.
218-00 Hunt Group Number
n,
n = 1~640 Enter an existing Hunt Group number or use the List, Add, Append,
Modify, or Delete buttons as described above.
Table 13-25 Programs 208~218 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-51
Telephone Button
Programming
218-01 Hunt Order
, n, ,
n = 1~560 This field assigns a station DNs position within a Hunt Group’s Hunt
Order. Programmers should assign the last station in the Hunt Order
first and assign the first station in the Hunt Order last.
218-02 DN
, n, ,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter a new DN to the Hunt Group’s Hunt Order.
218-03 DN Set Type
, n, ,
n = 1. Modify
2. Insert
Modify (replace) an existing assignment.
219 Network DSS Key
Notify Data Delete
,
This program lets you disable the DSS function for the node ID
entered in this screen.
219-00 Network DSS Node
ID
n,
n = Important! Don’t use this program unless requested by Toshiba
Technical Support.
Enter the Node ID of the Network DSS key Notify Data to be deleted.
Table 13-25 Programs 208~218 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
13-52 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
300 Series Programs
Table 13-26 Programs 300~302
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
300 Trunk Assignment
,
This command assigns an analog or T1 trunk (line) and its
parameters to the system.
300-00 Line Number
n,
n = 1~64 (CTX100)
1~96 (CTX670 Basic)
1~264 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the Line Number.
300-01 Line Equipment No.
, xxyyzz,
xx = Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the line equipment number as xxyyzz. Equipment numbers are
required when assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be
used to display the equipment location of existing trunks.
Example: If the trunk should be connected to an RCOU in cabinet
shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
•CTX100 – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•CTX670 – Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•CTX100 – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
•CTX670 – Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.
yy = Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)
zz = Circuit (01~04)
...or zz = T1 Circuit 01~24
(CTX670).
300-02 Incoming Line Group
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Assign the trunk to Incoming Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be
members of one incoming and one outgoing line group.
300-03 Outgoing Line Group
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Assign the trunk to Outgoing Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be
members of one incoming and one outgoing line group.
300-04 Dial Mode
, n,
n = 1. Rotary Dial 10PPS
2. Rotary Dial 20PPS
3. DTMF (default)
Enter the Dial Mode.
•DP 10 PPS = Rotary Dial, 10 PPS
•DP 20 PPS = Rotary Dial, 20 PPS
300-05 Signaling
, n,
n = 1. DID
2. Loop (default)
3. Ground
4. Tie
5. LP (Japan)
6. SR (Japan)
7. ACU (UK)
Enter the signalling type.
300-06 Start Method
, n,
n = 1. Immediate Start
(default)
2. Timing Start
3. Wink Start
Enter the Start Method. This setting defines the start protocol method
used between the PSTN and this trunk. For DID/Tie trunks.
300-07 Release Supervision
, n,
n = 1. Received
2. Not Received (default)
Enable Release Supervision from the CO.
300-08 Answer Supervision
, n,
n = 1. Received
2. Not Received (default)
Enable Answer Supervision from the CO.
300-09 Trunk Name n = Up to 14 digits Enter the trunk name.
Note This function is accessible only through CTX WinAdmin.
300-10 External Ring Repeat
, n,
n = 1. Supplied (default)
2. Not Supplied
Supply the External Ringing Signal pattern to stations. For behind
PBX/Centrex trunks.
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-53
Telephone Button
Programming
300-11 DTMF Back Tone
, n,
n = 1. Padded
2. DTMF Tone (default)
3. No Tone
Select DTMF Back Tone type.
300-12 Hunt Order
, n,
n = 1~999
(default = 1)
Change the trunk hunting order sequence for this Trunk.
300-13 Immediate Cut-
Through
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
This option should be enabled on a line only if the talk-path must be
established immediately after seizing a selected outgoing line.
Example, a line connected to a Central Office Ringdown circuit.
CAUTION! This option will bypass Destination Restriction
and E911 digit analysis. Do not enable this
option on a line where these functions are
required.
This option is available only on ground and loop, analog or T1 circuits.
It should not be enabled for Tie, DID, ISDN and QSIG lines.
Available with CTX R1.01, M22 and above software.
302 PRI Trunks
,
The PRI and IP QSIG interface cards need to have a number of
assignments for defining its operation. These include which channels
are available for use and the location of the D channel or signaling
channel. A number of optional functional capabilities also need to be
enabled or disabled.
302-00 Channel Group
n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~48 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Channel Group Number
302-01 RPTU Equipment No.
, xxyyzz,
xx = Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the ISDN RPTU equipment number as xxyyzz.
Note zz = Channel 01 is always used to assign RPTU parameters
Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter
050301.Enter the equipment number xxyyzz to which the ISDN PRI
Trunk is to be assigned.
Equipment numbers are required when assigning ISDN RPTU
parameters in the system. It can also be used to display the
equipment location of existing RPTU PCBs.
yy = Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)
zz = Circuit 01
302-02 Protocol
, n,
n = 1. Nat’l ISDN
2. ETSI
3. TTC
4. Nat’l ISDN - Nortel
5. QSIG
The Protocol to be followed defines the type of interface expected
based upon the equipment type at the distant end of the connection.
302-03 ILG
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~48 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Primary ISDN needs to have Trunk Group assignments to process
the calls being received. If multiple trunk groups are used within the
Channel Group, then Call-by-Call Services must be used.
302-04 OLG
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~48 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Primary ISDN needs to have Trunk Group assignments to process
the calls being originated. If multiple trunk groups are used within the
Channel Group, then Call-by-Call Services must be used.
302-05 Trunk ID Type
, n,
n = 1. Implicit
2. Explicit
Identify whether the communication with the PSTN requires an
identifier. Select Explicit to require an identifier.
302-06 Trunk ID Number
, n,
n = 0~126
(default = 0)
An identifier must be used as part of the addressing when an “explicit”
identified is used to communicate with the PSTN which channel on
which link is used for the given call. This identifier is assigned by the
connected PSTN.
Table 13-26 Programs 300~302 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
13-54 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
302-07 D Ch Position
, n,
n = 1~24
(default = 24)
PRI includes a 64-kbps D-channel (for transfer of signal information).
Select the channel position to be used for D channel signaling.
Note This field is used only when the span interface speed is 1.5M.
If the span interface speed is 2M the value is fixed at 16.
302-
08~13
Bearer Services:
•Speech
•3.1 KHz Audio
•7 KHz Audio
•Unrestr. 64K
•Unrestr. 56K
•Unrestr. 2x64K
~, n, ,
n1,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Enable the Bearer Capabilities allowed for this PRI Trunk channel
group.
n1 = 1. Channel Number
2. Slot Map
Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.
Note In North America, only Channel Number map is used
(Channel Number).
302-
14~18
Bearer Services:
•Unrestr. 384K
•Unrestr. 1536K
•Unrestr. 1920K
•Restr. Digital
•Video
~, n, ,
n1,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
The Bearer Capabilities (384k Unrestricted(H0), 1536k
Unrestricted(H11), 1920k Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk
Video, and Unrestricted Multirate) are not used and should remain
disabled.
n1 = 1. Channel Number B
2. Channel Number H
3. Slot Map B
4. Slot Map H
Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.
Note In North America, only Channel Number B map is used.
302-19 Bearer Service
Multirate Unrestricted
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
The Bearer Capabilities 384k Unrestricted (H0), 1536k Unrestricted
(H11), 1920k Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk Video and
Unrestricted Multirate are not used and should remain disabled.
302-20 B Ch Selection
Method
, n,
n = 1. Exclusive
2. Preferred
3. Any
The method used for selecting an idle ‘B’ channel and the reaction if
the PSTN indicates the channel is not available needs to be chosen
to originate a call from CTX.
Preferred option is recommended, unless PSTN needs other choice.
302-21 B Ch Selection
, n,
n1 = 1. Forward Cyclic
2. Backward Cyclic
3. Forward Terminal
4. Backward Terminal
The search method for choosing an idle ‘B’ channel shall also be
specified. Backward Terminal is the normal method with the PSTN
following a Forward Terminal method.
302-22 T1 Time Slot Pattern
, n,
n = 1. Fixed1 (default)
2. Fixed2
3. Flexible
1544 Time Slot Pattern.
302-23 E1 Time Slot Pattern
, n,
n = 1. Fixed1 (default)
2. Fixed2
3. Flexible
2048 Time Slot Pattern.
302-24 T-Wait Timer
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Specify whether the T-Wait timer is to be enabled or disabled. This
field is only valid for Nat’l ISDN.
302-25 RBT on Incoming Call
, n,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Enable Ringback Tone when terminating a call. This field is only valid
for Nat’l ISDN.
302-26 Network Mode
, n,
n = 1. Master
2. Slave (default)
Set this span as Master or Slave for Layer 2 of a QSIG PRI. The
opposite value must be set for the node in which this QSIG PRI
terminates. This governs call setup activity and is not related to clock
synchronization.
302-27 Negotiation Priority
, n,
n = 1. Side A (default)
2. Side B
Sets this span as Side A or Side B for Layer 3 of a QSIG PRI. The
opposite value must be set for the node in which this QSIG PRI
terminates.
302-28 Layer 1 Short Break
Tolerant
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Sets this span as Side A or Side B for Layer 3 of a QSIG PRI. The
opposite value must be set for the node in which this QSIG PRI
terminates. (Not used in U.S.A. Used in the UK.)
Table 13-26 Programs 300~302 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-55
Telephone Button
Programming
302-29 29 2-B channel
Transfer
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable
Enable this option to allow 2-B channel conference on PRI calls. This
allows to PRI channels to be connected in the same conference or
Tandem call.
Note This option must also be enabled by PRI provider to allow it
to work.
302-30 30 Q931 Protocol
Timer
, n,
n = 1. Normal
2. Long
Sets the Q931 Protocol Timer. If Long is set, T303 is 8s and T301 is
300s.
Table 13-27 Bearer Services Table
Bearer Services Nat’l ISDN ETSI TTC
Circuit
Mode
Speech X X X
3.1 KHz Audio X X X
7 KHz Audio X X
unrestricted digital
information 64 kbps X X X
Rate adaptation from 56
kbps X
2x64 X X
384kbp (H0) X X X
1536kbps (H11) X X X
1920kbps (H12) X
multirate (n x 64 kbps) X
Restricted digital Information X X
Video X X
Packet
Mode Shelf/Slot/Circuit
Table 13-28 Programs 303~315
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
303 ISDN Trunk Delete
,
This command deletes ISDN Trunks.
303-00 Channel Group
Number
n, ,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~48 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the channel group number to delete.
304 Incoming Line Group
Assignment
,
This assignment is used to configure ILGs only, OLGs are configured
in the Outgoing Line Group Assignment 306. The same line can be
placed in an ILG and OLG.
304-00 Group Number
n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the group number of the line group that should be configured.
Table 13-26 Programs 300~302 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
13-56 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
304-01 Group Type
, n,
n = 1. Analog (default)
2. ISDN
Select the ILG Type.
304-02 Trunk Type
, n,
n = 1. CO (default)
2. Tie
Select the Trunk Type.
304-03 Service Type
, n,
n = 1. DID
2. DIT (default)
Select CO Trunk Service Type.
304-04 Private Service Type
, n,
n = 1. Standard (default)
2. QSIG
Select the Tie Trunk Service Type. This field is required when Trunk
Type is set to Tie.
304-05 GCO Key Number
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Select ILG GCO Key Group for DIT mode (see Trunk Type above).
The same GCO cannot belong to different ILGs.
304-06 Pooled Key Number
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Select ILG Pooled Line Key Group for DIT mode. The same Pooled
Line Group cannot belong to different ILGs.
0~128 (CTX670), 0~32 (CTX100) (default = 0)
304-07 COS
, n, , n,
, n,
n = 1~32
(default = 1)
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
304-08 DRL
, n, , n,
, n,
n = 1~16
(default = 1)
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
304-09 FRL
, n, , n,
, n,
n = 1~16
(default = 1)
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
304-10 QPL n = 1~16
(default = 1)
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
304-11 DID Digits
, n,
n = 0~7
(default = 0)
Select number of DID digits received from CO.
304-12 Speech/3.1 KHz
, n,
n = 1. Audio (default)
2. Speech
Select Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.
304-13 Ringing Timer Delay 1
, n,
n = 0~60 sec.
(default = 12)
Select time to ring the Delay 1 destination.
304-14 Ringing Timer Delay 2
, n,
n = 0~60 sec.
(default = 24)
Select time to ring the Delay 2 destination.
304-15 Interdigit 1 Timer
, n,
n = 1~180 sec.
(default = 15)
Select Interdigit 1 timer value.
304-16 Interdigit 2 Timer
, n,
n = 1~180 sec.
(default = 5)
Select Interdigit 2 timer value.
304-17 Auto Camp-on
, n,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Select in box to toggle Automatic Camp-on.
304-18 Calling Number ID
, n,
n = 1. User Provided
(default)
2. Network Provided
Select Calling Number Identification source.
Table 13-28 Programs 303~315 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-57
Telephone Button
Programming
304-19 Intercept
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable Intercept. A call is transferred to a special destination called
intercept position when the destination of a trunk line call is not
determined with DID, DIT or DISA. Intercept is also activated when
the destination is determined, but the call cannot be terminated due to
a defect or an incorrect number. If the system has a simplified
attendant console, the attendant console is usually specified to
terminate the call. This function ensures termination of a trunk line
call.
304-20 Send Dial Tone
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable Send Dial Tone.
304-21 TGAC Override
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable Trunk Group Access Code (TGAC) override.
304-22 Network COS
, n,
n = 1~32
(default = 1)
Enter the Network COS number.
304-23 LCR Group
, n,
n = 1~16
(default = 1)
Enter the LCR Group number. Calls from this ILG cannot tandem if
this field is not entered.
304-24 Change COS
Override Code
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable authority to change COS Override Code.
304-25 Register Speed Dial
Codes
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable authority to create system speed dial codes.
304-26 Originator Invoke
OCA
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable authority for the originator of a call to invoke OCA when
encountering a busy station.
304-27 Senderized Tone
Mode
, n,
n = 1. Dial Tone (default)
2. Entry Tone
3. Silence
Send DTMF tones as a complete number rather than digit-by digit.
304-28 Emergency Call
Group
, n, ,
n = 1~8
(default = 1)
Used to enable E911 calling across a QSIG network. The QSIG ILG is
assigned to an Emergency Call Group in the same way a station is in
Program 200 FB17. Without this assignment, the call will not attempt
to complete to one of the trunks in the Emergency Group and will
result in an abandoned call. See Program 550 “Enhanced 911
Emergency Call Group” on page 13-87.
304-29 Tenant Number
, n, ,
n = 1~8 (default = 1) Enter the Tenant number to which this DID should be assigned.
305 ILG Delete
,
This command deletes Incoming Line Groups.
305-00 ILG Number
n, ,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the ILG number to delete.
306 Outgoing Line Group
Assignment
,
OLG is a line selection feature which enables the use of external
trunk or private line groups for outgoing service. Assign and configure
up to 128 OLGs (the same line can be placed in an OLG and an ILG).
306-00 Group Number
n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the OLG Group number.
306-01 Group Type
, n,
n = 1. Analog (default)
2. ISDN
Select the OLG Type.
306-02 Trunk Type
, n,
n = 1. CO (default)
2. Tie
Select the Trunk Type.
Table 13-28 Programs 303~315 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
13-58 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
306-03 Service Type
, n,
n = 1. Standard (default)
2. QSIG
TIE Trunk Service Type.
306-04 GCO Key1 Number
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Select the first GCO Key Group number.
306-06 Pooled Key1 Number
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Select first Pooled Line Key Group number.
306-07 Pooled Key2 Number
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Select second Pooled Line Key Group number.
306-08 COS
, n, , n,
, n,
n = 1~32
(default = 1)
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
306-09 FRL
, n, , n,
, n,
n = 1~16
(default = 1)
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
306-10 QPL
, n, , n,
, n,
n = 1~16
(default = 1)
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
306-11 Speech/3.1 KHz
, n,
n = 1. Audio (default)
2. Speech
Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.
306-12 MOH Source
, n,
n = 1. Quiet Tone
2. External 1 (default)
3. External 2
4. External 3
5. External 4
6. External 5
7. External 6
8. External 7
9. External 8
10. External 9
11. External 10
12. External 11
13. External 12
14. External 13
15. External 14
16. External 15
Select MOH Source.
306-13 Account Codes
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable Trunk forced Account Codes.
306-14 Destination
Restriction
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable Destination Restriction.
306-15 Credit Cart Calling
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable Credit Card Calling.
306-16 Send CESID
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable CESID sending.
306-17 QSIG Sending Type
, n,
n = 1. Cut through (default)
2. Senderized
Digit sending Mode for QSIG only.
Table 13-28 Programs 303~315 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-59
Telephone Button
Programming
306-18 Network COS
, n, ,
n = 1~32
(default = 1)
Select Network COS number.
307 OLG Delete
,
This command deletes Outgoing Line Groups.
307-00 OLG Number
n, ,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the OLG number to delete.
308 Trunk Timers
,
Assigns trunk timers for analog and T1 trunks.
308-00 Trunk Equipment No.
xxyyzz,
xx = Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the trunk equipment number.
Note Equipment numbers are required when assigning a new trunk
to the system. It can also be used to display the equipment
location of existing trunks.
yy = Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)
zz = Circuit 01~24
308-01 Auto Release
, n, ,
n = 1. Disable
2. Detect 95ms
3. Detect 450ms (default)
Select the Automatic Release timing.
Note Select Disable if the CO does not send the automatic release
signal to the loop start trunk.
308-02 Short Flash
, n, ,
n = 0~15, where 1 = 100msec.
(default = 5, which is .5
seconds)
0 = no flash
Select Short Flash Time. When a telephone initiates the short flash
signal to the CO line it is connected to (using the short Flash feature
button or access code #450) the duration of a short flash is
determined by this command. Normally this signal is used to hook
flash a centrex line. The short flash range is 0 to 1.5 seconds in
increments of 0.1 seconds.
308-03 Long Flash
, n,
n = 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30,
where 5 = .5 seconds.
(default = 20)
Select Long Flash Time. When a telephone initiates the long flash
signal to the CO line it is connected to (using the Long Flash feature
button or access code #451) the duration of a long flash is determined
by this command. Normally this signal is used to disconnect the line.
The long flash range is 0 to 3 seconds in increments of 0.5 seconds.
308-04 Pause after Flash
, n,
n = 0~5, 0 = immediately sent,
and 1sec.delay to
5sec.delay
(default = 1 second delay
before sending digits)
Pause time after flash: After a flash signal is sent to a CO line, this
timer determines when the line will start to send the dialed digits to
the other end.
308-04 Response Timer
, n,
n = 0~3000 The response timer is for analog DID/TIE lines that have the “start
method” set for “Timing” in Program 300-06. After a line is seized this
timer determines when the line will start to send the dialed digits to
the other end.
Possible Values 0=immediatly sent, and 50msec.delay to
500msec.delay. (default=500mseconds delay before sending digits).
309 Direct Inward Dialing
,
This command assigns DID Number Analysis Table to ILG.
309-00 ILG Number
n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Select the ILG number.
309-01 DID Number
, n,
n = 1~7 digits may include wild
card “?” where “?” = 0~9
Enter a DID number.
Table 13-28 Programs 303~315 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
13-60 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
309-02 MOH Source
, n,
n = 1. Quiet Tone
2. External 1 (default)
3. External 2
4. External 3
5. External 4
6. External 5
7. External 6
8. External 7
9. External 8
10. External 9
11. External 10
12. External 11
13. External 12
14. External 13
15. External 14
16. External 15
Set Music On Hold for Analog ISDN DID Trunk
309-03 GCO Key Group
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
GCO Key Group number.
309-04 Pool Key Group
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Pooled Line Key Group
309-
05~07
Audio Day1/Day2/
Night Destination
Type
~, n,
n = 1. No Data (default)
2. Dialing Digits
3. DISA
4. Built-in modem
5. Night Bell
Select the Destination Type for Audio/Speech calls.
Audio Day1/Day2/
Night Destination
Digits
n1,
n1 = Up to 32 digits Enter the Destination Directory Number or Access Code. If Dialing
Digits is the Destination Type enter the Directory Number that the line
should ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx,
where xx is the external Page group number. If the default page
access code #31 was changed, use the new page access code as the
leading digits.
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered
to route incoming calls back out to a public or private network number.
309-
08~10
Data Day1/Day2/
Night Destination
Type
~, n,
n = 1. No Data (default)
2. Dialing Digits
3. DISA
4. Built-in modem
5. Night Bell
Select the Destination Type for Audio/Speech calls.
Data Day1/Day2/
Night Destination
Digits
n1,
n1 = Up to 32 digits Enter the Destination Directory Number or Access Code. If Dialing
Digits is the Destination Type enter the Directory Number that the line
should ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx,
where xx is the external Page group number. If the default page
access code #31 was changed, use the new page access code as the
leading digits.
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered
to route incoming calls back out to a public or private network number.
Table 13-28 Programs 303~315 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-61
Telephone Button
Programming
309-11 DNIS VMID Code
, n,
n = Up to 10 digits Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/
DNIS number.
Note This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in
Program 580, 01. This code will be replaced, after voice mail
answers, by the DTMF code set in Program 309, 15 DID/
DNIS DTMF VMID code - if programmed; therefore, if using
Program 309, 15 code, this VMID code is not necessary.
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call
that rings directly to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN
that forwards to voice mail before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a
DN that forwards to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS
number or the forwarding DN’s mail box number will be sent to voice
mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM
general greeting and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM
will go to the DN’s VMID mail box.
This Voice Mail box number is added to SMDI packets direct and
forwarded DID\DNIS calls to voice mail as explained above.
309-12 DNIS Name
, n,
n = Up to 16 digits Enter DNIS name. DNIS names can be assigned from the CTX
WinAdmin (not from programming phones).
309-15 VM Dial
, n, ,
n = Digits 0~9, * and #. For a
pause enter Px, where
x=0~9 (seconds), up to 10
characters (default = no
value).
Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/
DNIS number.
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call
that rings directly to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN
that forwards to voice mail before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a
DN that forwards to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS
number or the forwarding DN’s mail box number will be sent to voice
mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM
general greeting and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM
will go to the DN’s VMID mail box. This voice mail box number is sent
to the VM port, as DTMF digits, after the VM port answers a DID/
DNIS call as explained above. These digits are sent to the VM port if
the CTX is set for SMDI or DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.
309-16 Tenant Number
, n, ,
n = 1~8 (default = 1) Enter the Tenant number to which this DID should be assigned.
310 DIT Assignment
,
This command assigns DIT Number Analysis Table for DIT trunks.
DIT trunks are ground and loop start trunks.
310-00 Line Equipment No.
xxyyzz,
xx = Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the trunk equipment number. Equipment numbers are required
when assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be used to
display the equipment location of existing trunks.
Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5,
slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
•CTX100 – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•CTX670 – Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•CTX100 – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
•CTX670 – Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.
yy = Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)
zz = Circuit 01~24
Table 13-28 Programs 303~315 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
13-62 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
310-
01~03
Day1/Day2/Night
Destination Type
~, n,
n = 1. No Data (default)
2. Dialing Digits
3. DISA
4. Built-in Modem
5. Night Bell
Select Destination Type for each.
•No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the
system.
•Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or
access code defined in the “Destination Digits” assignment
•DISA – assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call. DISA dial tone
will be returned to the caller.
•Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem
on the CTX processor. Used to call into the system with a CTX
WinAdmin PC and modem.
•Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse
(one-sec. close/3-sec. open)
Day1/Day2/Night
Destination Digits
n1,
n1 = Up to 32 digits Enter Destination, Directory Number or Access Codes for each, only
if Dialing Digits is selected as Destination Type.
•If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type, enter the Directory
Number that the line should ring.If the line should ring over
external page, enter #31xx, where xx is the external Page group
number.
•If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new
page access code as the leading digits.
•Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be
entered to route incoming calls back out to a public or private
network number.
310-04 MOH Source
, n, ,
n = 1. Silence
2. External 1 (default)
3. External 2
4. External 3
5. External 4
6. External 5
7. External 6
8. External 7
9. External 8
10. External 9
11. External 10
12. External 11
13. External 12
14. External 13
15. External 14
16. External 15
Select the MOH source for Analog DIT Trunk. The Scroll key must be
used to select MOH sources indicated by 10 or higher.
311 DISA Security Codes
,
This command assigns DISA parameters.
311-01 DISA Enabled
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable DISA security code.
311-02 DISA Code
, n,
n = Up to 15 digits Enter DISA security code.
311-03 Response Timer
, n,
n = 0~30
(default = 5)
Enter the time, in seconds, for Strata CTX to respond to a call.
311-04 Idle Timer
, n,
n = 0~60
(default = 10)
Enter the time in seconds to wait for idle DTMF.
311-05 Tie Line Access
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default) Enable this feature to allow DISA callers to access Tie lines when
they call into the system.
313 Caller ID Assignment
,
This program assigns Caller ID circuits to the CO Line to which the
circuit is connected. The ANI, DNIS, DID formats for TI and analog
DID CO Lines are also defined.
313-00 Trunk Number
n, ,
n = 1~64 (CTX100)
1~96 (CTX670 Basic)
1~264 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the Trunk Number.
Table 13-28 Programs 303~315 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-63
Telephone Button
Programming
313-01 Signalling Method
, n,
n = 1. None (default)
2. ANI/DNIS-MCI
3. ANI/DNIS-Sprint
4. CLASS (Caller ID)
Specify the format for the interface being used.
313-02 Signalling Contents
, n,
n = 1. ANI and DNIS (default)
2. ANI only
3. DNIS only
4. DID only
Specify the contents of the ANI/DNIS format.
313-03 CLASS Equipment
Position
, xxyyzz,
xx = Cabinet 01 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)
If the CLASS type is chosen, the trunk must be assigned to a Caller
ID circuit. Enter the RCIU/RCIS equipment number as xxyyzz.
Notes
•CLASS equipment numbers are required when assigning a trunk
to a RCIU/RCIS circuit.
•It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing
caller ID circuit to trunk assignments. Example: If the trunk should
be connected to a caller ID circuit (RCIU/RCIS) in cabinet shelf 5,
slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
yy = Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)
zz = Circuit 01~08
315 T1 Trunk Card
,
This command assigns T1 Trunk Card Data to the system.
315-00 T1 Equipment
Location
xxyy,
xxyy xx = Cabinet 01,
yy = slot 01, 03, 05, or 07
Enter the RDTU PCB equipment location as xxyy:
Example: If the RDTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter
0503.
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
...or xx = Cabinet 02~07,
yy = slot 01, 03, or 05
315-01 Coding Format
, n,
n = 1. None
2. PZC
3. B8ZS (default)
4. ZCS
Select the Coding Format.
315-02 Frame Format
, n,
n = 1. None
2. SF mode
3. ESF mode (default)
Select the Frame Format.
315-03 Time Slots n = 1. None
2. 8 Time Slots (default)
3. 16 Time Slots
4. 24 Time Slots
Set the number of Time Slots to be used.
315-04 Receive PAD
, n, ,
n = 1. None
2. Plus 6 dB
3. Plus 3 dB
4. Zero dB (default)
5. Minus 3 dB
6. Minus 6 dB
7. Minus 9 dB
8. Minus 12 dB
9. Minus 15 dB
Select the Receive PAD values.
Table 13-28 Programs 303~315 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
13-64 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
315-05 Send Pad
, n,
n = 1. None
2. Plus 6 dB
3. Plus 3 dB
4. Zero dB (default)
5. Minus 3 dB
6. Minus 6 dB
7. Minus 9 dB
8. Minus 12 dB
9. Minus 15 dB
Select the Send PAD values.
Table 13-29 Programs 316~317
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
316 Shared D Channel
,
The PRI Interface can be extended to include an additional PRI card
to expand the total number of channels to 47 on a Channel Group.
This second PRI may optionally offer a backup D channel.
316-00 Channel Group
n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~48 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Channel Group Number.
316-01 Equipment Number
, xxyyzz,
xx =
yy =
zz =
xx = Cabinet 01, yy = 03,
05, or 07 and zz = Channel
01 is always used to assign
RPTU parameters
Enter the ISDN RPTU equipment number as xxyyzz:
Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter
050301.
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots..
or
xx = Cabinet 02~10,
yy = 01, 03, or 05 and
zz = Channel 01 is always
used to assign RPTU
parameters
316-02 Trunk ID
, n,
n = 0~126
(default = 1)
An identifier must be used as part of the addressing to communicate
with the PSTN which channel on which link is used the given call.
This identifier is assigned by the connected PSTN.
316-03 D Channel Provided
, n,
n = 1. D-Channel
2. No D-Channel (default)
If a backup ‘D’ Channel is to be used, it needs to be enabled.
316-04 Backup D Channel
Position
, n, ,
n = 1~128
(default = 24)
Channel Group Number.
317 ISDN BRI Trunk
,
The following program enables set up for ISDN related system
settings.
317-00 Channel Group
n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~48 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the BRI channel Group Number.
Table 13-28 Programs 303~315 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-65
Telephone Button
Programming
317-01 Equipment Number
, xxyyzz,
xx =
yy =
zz =
CTX670
Cabinet (01~07)
Slot (01~10)
Circuit (01~08 or 01~24)
Enter the equipment number xxyyzz to which the ISDN BRI Trunk is
to be assigned.
Example: If the RBUU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter
050301 for circuit 1.
Cabinet numbers:
•CTX100 – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•CTX670 – Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•CTX100 – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
•CTX670 – Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.
or
CTX100
Cabinet (01)
Slot (01~08)
Circuit (01~04)
317-02 Protocol
, n,
n = 1. National ISDN
2. ETSI
3. TTC
4. National ISDN Nortel
Select the ISDN protocol. Only Bearer capabilities specified by the
protocol can be entered in this field. The Initial value for ISDN
Protocol corresponds to information set in the hardware level.
National ISDN = North America, ETSI = England and TTC = Japan.
317-03 ILG
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
ILG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls
being received.
317-04 OLG
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
OLG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls
being originated.
317-05 Connection Format
, n,
n = 1. Point to Point
2. Point to Multi Point
Identify connection format with the PSTN is 1- Point-to-Point or 2-
Point-to-Multipoint.
317-06 Bearer Svc - Speech
, n,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Enable speech capability.
317-07 Bearer Svc - 3.1 KHz
Audio
, n,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Enable 3.1 KHz audio capability.
317-08 Bearer Svc - 7 KHz
Audio
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable 7 KHz audio capability.
317-09 Bearer Svc -
Unrestricted 64K
, n,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Enable one of the unrestricted capabilities.
317-10 Bearer Svc -
Unrestricted 56K
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
317-11 Bearer Svc -
Unrestricted 2x64K
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
317-12 Outgoing B Ch Select
, n,
n = 1. Explicit
2. Preferred (default)
3. Any Channel
Select originating B Channel method.
•Explicit – Channel is indicated, and no alternative is acceptable.
•Preferred – (default) Channel is indicated, and any alternative is
acceptable.
•Any Channel – Channel is indicated, and any channel is
acceptable.
Table 13-29 Programs 316~317 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
13-66 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
317-13 B Ch Selection
, n,
n = 1. Forward Cyclic
2. Backward Cyclic
(default)
3. Forward Terminal
4. Backward Terminal
Choose Idle B Channel selection method.
•Select Forward Cyclic (from lowest number to highest number of
B-channel).
•Select Backward Cyclic (from highest number to lowest number
of B-channel).
•Select Forward Terminal for the lowest numbered B-channel.
Select Backward Terminal for the oldest number B-channel. (The
High-High B-channel selection)
317-14 Initialize Type
, n,
n = 1. User Entry Of SPID
Auto SPID ON
2. User Entry Of SPID
Auto SPID OFF
3. Auto SPID
4. None (default)
Enter the Service Profile Identifier (SPID) type of initialization.
317-15 Initialization Display
, n,
n = Up to 4 digits
(default = User)
Enter the text to be displayed for SPID Initialization.
317-16 SPID #1
, n,
n = Up to 20 digits Enter the SPID value. These fields are required if you selected
National ISDN in Protocol. When no data is entered, any previously
entered information is overwritten.
317-17 SPID #2
, n,
n = Up to 20 digits
317-18 T-Wait Timer
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable the T-Wait Timer. This field is needed if you selected National
ISDN in Protocol above. This timer, used along with the SPID,
assigns random initializing SPID times to prevent BRI interfaces from
re-initialize at the same time after a reset or power outage.
317-19 Voice Calls
, n,
n = 1. One
2. Two (default)
Select the number of simultaneous voice (speech) calls that can exist
at the same time on this interface.
317-20 Trunk Subscriber 1
, n,
n = Up to 10 digits Enter the telephone number for subscriber 1. Telephone number
should be consistent with D channel data. If no data is entered in this
field any previously programmed information is lost.
317-21 Trunk Subscriber 2
, n, ,
n = Up to 10 digits Enter the telephone number for subscriber number 2. If no data is
entered in this field any previously programmed information is lost.
Table 13-30 Bearer Capability Table
Bearer Services Bellcore
National ISDN ETSI TTC
Circuit Mode
Speech X X X
3.1 KHz X X X
7 KHz X X
Unrestricted
Digital
Information
64 Kbps X X X
Rate adaptation
from 56 Kbps X
2x64 Kbps X X
Table 13-29 Programs 316~317 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-67
Telephone Button
Programming
Table 13-31 Programs 318~320
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
318 DID Intercept
Assignment
,
This command assigns the DID Routing table when DID numbers are
undefined or not received.
318-00 ILG Number
n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter ILG number.
318-01 Type
, n,
n = 1. No DID
2. Not Determined
Select Routing Type.
318-02 MOH Source
, n,
n = 1. Quiet Tone
2. External 1 (default)
3. External 2
4. External 3
5. External 4
6. External 5
7. External 6
8. External 7
9. External 8
10. External 9
11. External 10
12. External 11
13. External 12
14. External 13
15. External 14
16. External 15
Select Music On Hold
318-03 GCO Destination
, n,
0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
GCO Key Group number.
318-04 Pooled Line Group
, n,
0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
POOL Line Key Group Number.
318-
05~07
Audio Day1/Day2/
Night Dst Type
~, n,
n = 1. No Data (default)
2. Dialing Digits
3. DISA
4. Built-in modem
5. Night Bell
Select the Audio/Speech call Day1 destination type.
•No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the
system.
•Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or
access code defined in the “Destination Digits” assignment
•DISA – assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call. DISA dial tone
will be returned to the caller.
•Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem
on the CTX processor. Used to call into the system with a CTX
WinAdmin PC and modem.
•Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse
(one-sec.close/3-sec.open)
Audio Day1/Day2/
Night Dst DN
n1,
n1 = Up to 32 digits Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only
required if the destination type is “Dialing Digits”
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
13-68 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
318-
08~10
Data Day1/Day2/
Night Dst Type
~, n,
n = 1. No Data (default)
2. Dialing Digits
3. DISA
4. Built-in modem
5. Night Bell
Select the data call Day1 destination type
•No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
•No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the
system.
•Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or
access code defined in the “Destination Digits” assignment
•DISA – assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call. DISA dial tone
will be returned to the caller.
•Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem
on the CTX processor. Used to call into the system with a CTX
WinAdmin PC and modem.
•Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse
(one-sec.close/3-sec.open)
Data Day1/Day2/
Night Dst DN
n1,
n1 = Up to 32 digits Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only
required if the destination type is “Dialing Digits”
318-11 VMID for DNIS No.
, n,
n = Up to 10 digits Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/
DNIS number.
This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in Program 580,
01. This code will be replaced, after voice mail answers, by the DTMF
code set in Program 318, 15 DID/DNIS DTMF VMID code - if
programmed; therefore, if using Program 318, 15 code, this VMID
code is not necessary.
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call
that rings directly to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN
that forwards to voice mail before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a
DN that forwards to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS
number, or the forwarding DN's mail box number will be sent to voice
mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM
general greeting and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM
will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This Voice Mail box number is added to SMDI packets of direct and
forwarded DID\DNIS calls to voice mail as explained above.
318-12 DNIS Name
, n, ,
n = Up to 16 digits Enter DNIS Name. DNIS names can be assigned from the CTX
WinAdmin (not from programming phones).
318-15
, n, ,
n = Digits 0~9, * and #. For a
pause enter Px, where
x=0~9 (seconds), up to 10
characters (default = no
value).
Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/
DNIS number.
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call
that rings directly to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN
that forwards to voice mail before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a
DN that forwards to voice mail, the mail box number of the DID/DNIS
number or the forwarding DN's mail box number will be sent to voice
mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM
general greeting and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM
will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This voice mail box number is sent to the VM port, as DTMF digits,
after the VM port answers a DID/DNIS call as explained above.
These digits are sent to the VM port if the CTX is set for SMDI or
DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.
Table 13-31 Programs 318~320 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-69
Telephone Button
Programming
319 Intercept Treatment
,
This command assigns Intercept positions for Strata CTX Day/Night
schedules. Intercept positions are used when the destination of a
trunk line call is not determined with DID or DIT
319-00 Tenant Number n = Enter 1~8 Select the Tenant number for which the Intercept Destinations will be
configured.
01
02
03
Day1 Destination
Day2 Destination
Night Destination
~, n, ,
n1, ,
n = 1. None (default)
2. Dialing Digits
3. Night Bell
Select Destination Type for each.
n1 = Up to 32 digits Enter Destination for each.
•To intercept with a DN use 0~99999
•To intercept with a Network DN use 1~32
•To intercept with Dial Digits Paging 1~16
320 B Channel
,
PRI interfaces are purchased on per interface and channel basis. The
‘B’ channel assignments allow for a flexible activation of channels to
match the subscribed services from the Public Service Telephone
Network.This command allows you to enable or disable each B
channel on selected RPTU PCBs.
320-00 RPTU Equipment No.
xxyyzz,
xx =
yy =
zz =
xx = cabinet 01
yy = 03, 05, or 07
zz = Channel 01 is always
used to assign RPTU
parameters
Enter the ISDN RPTU equipment number.
Equipment numbers are required when assigning ISDN RPTU
parameters in the system. It can also be used to display the
equipment location of existing RPTU PCBs.
Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter
050301.
or
xx = cabinet 02~10
yy = 01, 03, or 05
zz = Channel 01 is always
used to assign RPTU
parameters
320-
01~23
B Channel
~, n, ,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Assign each ‘B’ channel as enabled or disabled for each channel on
the interface. The assignments must match exactly to the
subscription from the PSTN.
Table 13-31 Programs 318~320 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
13-70 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Table 13-32 B Channel Defaults
B Channel Position 01~15 16 17~23 24 25~31
Span Interface Speed
1.5M (T1) ON ON ON OFF (Dch Pos)
2.0M (E1) ON OFF (Dch Pos) ON ON ON
Table 13-33 Programs 321~324
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
321 Calling Number
Identification
,
The Calling Number ID is what is defined as the user supplied Calling
Number. This number may be optionally screened by the PSTN to
ensure only calls from valid billable telephone numbers are allowed to
originate calls.
321-00 OLG Number
n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the OLG Number.
321-01 Default Number
, n,
n = Up to 10 digits Enter the telephone number to use by default when originating a call.
This is the number that the PSTN has registered for billing purposes.
321-02 Number Prefix
, n,
n = Up to 10 digits Enter the prefix telephone number for which a DID number will be
appended to create a User Identified telephone number. This number
may or may not be a billed number, but is used for Caller ID at the
distant end and could be used for returning your call.
321-03 Number Verification
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable Specify whether the number provided should be screened by the
PSTN before the call is to proceed.
321-04 Default Number 2
, n, ,
n = Up to 10 digits Enter the second telephone number to use by default when
originating a call. This is the number that the PSTN has registered for
billing purposes. The second number is for BRI only
322 CNIS Presentation
And Special Number
Assignment
,
When calls are sent to the PSTN with Calling Number Identification
Service (CNIS), the CTX can supply special CNIS information as part
of the Setup Message. This program may be used for sending a
unique number based on the source directing the call to the Strata
CTX PRI.
322-00 OLG Number
n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
OLG Number.
322-01 Source Type
, n,
n = 1. Primary DN (0~99999)
2. Group CO (1~128)
3. Pooled Line Group
(1~128)
Specify the type of circuit used for outgoing calls: 1- PDN; 2- GCO; 3-
Pooled Line.
322-02 Source Number
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits
GCO and POOL:
1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Specify the number of the source type selected (PDN, GCO or
Pooled Line).
Note Entries for this field depend on the Destination Type chosen.
There are no default values for this field (default = no value).
•PDN: 0~99999
•GCO: 1~128
•POOL: 1~128
322-03 Special Number
Assignments
, n, ,
n = Up to 7 digits Specify the number to be sent when calling out from the source (max.
seven digits). This number is appended to Program 321 FB02.
Note Destination Type and Destination must be entered before a
DID number can be assigned.
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-71
Telephone Button
Programming
323 CBC Service
,
To accomplish CBC services, each facility needs to be defined, its
related Line Group assigned and minimum and maximum values for
the services provided. These service parameters may be set for three
different time zones, thus allowing fewer or more services of different
types at different times of the day.
323-00 Channel Group
n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~48 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the Channel Group Number.
323-01 Index
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~48 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the CBC Service Index, or click one of the following buttons:
•List – view a summary list of programmed Trunks.
•Create – Assign a new Trunk with default settings.
323-02 Type of Service
, n,
n = 1. No Data (default)
2. POTS
3. FX
4. Tie line (Enbloc)
5. Tie line (Cut throuogh)
6. Intra LATA Out WATS
7. Banded Out WATS
8. Inter LATA Out WATS
9. INWATS
Select the CBC Service Type.
Note To delete CBC, set this field to 1: No Data.
323-03 Facility Code
, n,
n = 00~31 Enter the supplied Facility code value from the PSTN. If no data is
entered in this field, any previously entered data is deleted.
323-04 Service Parameter
, n,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter the Service parameters supplied from PSTN. If no data is
entered in this field, any previously entered data is deleted.
323-05 Network ID
, n,
n = 3~4 digits Enter the Network ID code supplied from PSTN (this field is required if
you selected “Inter LATA Out WATS” Type of Service. If no data is
entered in this field, any previously entered data is deleted.
323-06 ILG
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Specify the ILG for this facility.
323-07 OLG
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Specify the OLG for this facility.
323-08 Min Calls Zone 1
, n,
n = 0~47
(default = 0)
Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.
323-09 Max Calls Zone 1
, n,
n = 0~47
(default = 47)
Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.
323-10 Min Calls Zone 2
, n,
n = 0~47
(default = 0)
Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.
323-11 Max Calls Zone 2
, n,
n = 0~47
(default = 0)
Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.
323-12 Min Calls Zone 3
, n,
n = 0~47
(default = 0)
Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.
323-13 Max Calls Zone 3
, n, ,
n = 0~47
(default = 0)
Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.
Table 13-33 Programs 321~324 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs
13-72 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
324 CBC Time Zones
,
This command assigns Call-by-Call Time Zone.
324-00 Channel Group
n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~48 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Channel Group Number
324-01 Start Zone 1
, hhmm,
hh =
mm =
hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete
Enter the Time Zone Starting Time (hhmm).
324-02 Start Zone 2
, hhmm,
324-03 Start Zone 3
, hhmm, ,
Table 13-33 Programs 321~324 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
400 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-73
Telephone Button
Programming
400 Series Programs
Table 13-34 Programs 400~404
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
400 Emergency Call
Destination
Assignment
,
This command assigns Emergency Call destinations to Emergency
Call groups. There is one group for each Day mode (Day1, Day2 and
Night).
400-01 Day/Night Mode
, n,
n = 1. Day 1
2. Day 2
3. Night
This is a display only field. It is controlled by the Strata CTX system.
400-02 Called Number Index
, n,
n = 1~4 This is a display only field. It is controlled by the Strata CTX system.
400-03 Emergency Call
Destination
, n,
n = Up to 32 digits Enter the destination DN for the emergency call.
400-04 Action
, n, ,
n = 1. Modify (default)
2. Insert
Choose whether you are replacing an existing Emergency Number
Index or inserting one in the list. If inserting, the new entry will
assume the specified index. The remaining indices will be increased
by one and the last one, 4, will be deleted.
404 Attendant Group
Assignment
,
This program establishes Attendant Groups, distribution methods and
alternate destinations.
404-00 Attendant Group
Member
n,
n = 1 (CTX100 & CTX670
Basic)
1~8 (CTX670 Exp.)
Select the Attendant Group Member Number.
404-01 Call Distribution
Method
, n,
n = 1. Most Idle First
(default)
2. Next Available First
3. Broadcast
Select the Call Distribution Method for attendant console.
404-02 Alternate Attendant
Destination
, n,
n = Up to 32 digits Enter the Alternate Attendant Destination (DN, Network DN or Group
Pilot Number). If no data is entered in this field, any previous entries
are overwritten.
404-03 Overflow Time
, n,
n = 0~180
(default = 30)
Select the Attendant Overflow Time in minutes.
404-04 Group Overflow
Destination
, n,
n = Up to 32 digits Enter the overflow destination for this attendant group. If no data is
entered in this field, any previous entries are overwritten.
404-05 VMID Code SMDI
, n,
n = Up to 10 digits Enter the Attendant’s Voice Mail ID code. If no data is entered in this
field, any previous entries are overwritten.
404-
07~16
ICI1~ ICI10
~, n, ,
n, , n, , n,
,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
•For 07 ICI1~16 ICI10, select ILG Assignments for ICI
Groups.ILG1
•Assign the 1st ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
•Assign the 2nd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
•Assign the 3rd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
•Assign the 4th ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
Note Each ILG can only be assigned once in any of the ICI Groups.
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
13-74 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
500 Series Programs
Table 13-35 Programs 500~577
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
500 System Call Forward
Assignment
,
This assignment is used to configure up to 32 system call forward
patterns. Station DNs are assigned to these patterns in the station
COS assignments.
Note The Administrator programs the condition of transfer by
setting Call Type, Period and Telephone Status. Destinations
1 and 2 should be programmed after transfer conditions are
set.
500-00 SCF Number
n,
n = 1~4 (CTX100)
1~10 (CTX670 Basic)
1~32 (CTX670 Exp.)
Select the SCF pattern number to configure.
500-01 Call Type
, n,
n = 1. CO Loop Ground
2. DID
3. Tie
4. Ring Transfer
5. Internal
Select the type of call that should forward in this pattern.
Note Each 500-01 call type must be the same telephone status.
Also, all calls must be the same Call Forward type.
500-02 Period
, n,
n = 1. Day
2. Day2
3. Night
Select the system time period in which this SCF pattern should
operate.
500-03 Telephone Status
, n,
n = 1. Busy
2. Off No Answer
3. Busy No Answer
4. DND
Select the telephone DN status that should cause this SCF pattern to
operate.
Note Each 500-01 call type must be the same telephone status.
Also, all calls must be the same Call Forward type.
500-04 Destination 1
, n, ,
n = Up to 32 digits Select the first destination to which the call should forward.
501 System Speed Dial
Assignment
,
System Speed Dial consists of up to 800 pre-programmed numbers
each containing up to 32 digits. If the number being entered exceeds
the 32 digits, the next speed dial location will automatically be
appended to create longer numbers. One other speed dial location
can be nested within the number for dialing a common routine with
the number (see “516 Station Speed Dial” on page 5-31 for more
information about nesting).
501-00 Speed Dial Bin
n,
n = 000~799 Enter the speed dial bin location.
501-01 Number
, n,
n = Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, #
and Pauses
This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.
Note To enter pauses enter Px, where x equals 1~9 (seconds),
which is the length of the pause.
501-02 Name
, n, ,
n = Up to 8 digits This is the Name that appears on Telephone LCD dial directories.
Note This feature is available in CTX WinAdmin and Strata
DKT30xxSD only.
502 Terminal Paging
Group Assignment
,
Assigns Primary DNs to Paging Group(s).
502-00 Primary DN
n,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter the Primary DN of the station to be assigned to Paging Groups.
A station may belong to more than one paging group.
Note You can have upto 72 paging groups in the Strata CTX100
and upto 120 paging groups in the Strata CTX670. Any
software release before R1.01, M19 supports only 32 paging
groups for all systems.
502-
01~16
PG01~PG16
~, n,
n = 1. On
2. Off (default)
Activate the Paging Group(s) this station belongs too. The number of
DNs that can be assigned are 1~4 (CTX100), 1~8 (CTX670 Basic),
1~16 (CTX670 Exp.)
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-75
Telephone Button
Programming
502-17 All Page Group
, n,
n = 1. On
2. Off (default)
Enter this station in all Paging Groups.
502-18 All Emergency Page
Group
, n, ,
n = 1. On
2. Off (default)
Enter this station in all Emergency Paging Groups.
503 Paging Devices
Group Assignment
,
Assigns BIOU Page Zone Relays to Page Groups.
503-00 Zone Relay Number
n,
n = 1~8
•BIOU1 = 1~4
•BIOU2 = 5~8
Select the BIOU Page Zone relay that should be assigned to the
Page Groups below. This relay activates whenever the selected Page
Group is paged.
•BIOU1 = Zone Relays 1~4.
•BIOU2 = Zone Relays 5~8.
503-
01~16
PG01~PG16
~, n,
n = 1. On
2. Off (default)
Turn on if the selected BIOU Page Zone Relay should activate with
this Page Group.
503-17 All Page Group
, n,
n = 1. On
2. Off (default)
503-18 All Emergency Page
Group
, n,
n = 1. On
2. Off (default)
503-19 BGM Mute Relay
, n, ,
n = 0~8 (default = 0)
•BIOU1 = 1~4
•BIOU2 = 5~8
Assign BIOU generic relay as the BGM mute relay. This relay
activates whenever the external page is in use
•BIOU1 = Generic Relays 1~4.
•BIOU2 = Generic Relays 5~8.
Note The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5.
For this relay operation,BIOU2 is installed, as default, in a
virtual equipment position - Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20,
in Program 100. To install an actual BIOU2 and disable the
ACTU built-in relay, use the programming telephone to
remove the virtual BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2 in
Cabinet 01 Slot 01~08 in the normal manner.
504 System Call Forward
Operation Status
,
This command assigns System Call Forward Type for the pattern.
504-00 SCF Number
n,
n = 1~4 (CTX100)
1~10 (CTX670 Basic)
1~32 (CTX670 Exp.)
Select the SCF pattern number to configure.
504-01 Telephone Status
, n, ,
n = 1. No Data (default)
2. Busy
3. No Ans
4. Busy No Ans
5. DND
Select the status or state in which the telephone should be for this
system call forward pattern to activate.
Notes
•Each 500-01 call type must be the same telephone status. Also,
all calls must be the same Call Forward type.
•Telephone status must be the same as telephone status selected
in 500-03.
506 Verified Account
Codes
,
This program adds or deletes entries in the DR Table associated with
the DRL.
506-00 Account Code
n,
n = Up to 15 digits Enter a valid accounting code that the user will be expected to dial.
Digits 0~9 can be used.
Note The Account Code is set to the same digit length as the
Verified Digit Length in Program 570 above.
Table 13-35 Programs 500~577 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
13-76 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
506-01 Verified Flag
, n,
n = 1. Set
2. No Set (default)
The Account Code Flag determines whether the number entered is to
be used as a verified account code or not. Some applications may
allow users to dial an accounting code which changes the restriction
level for the call allowing it to be placed.
Note To delete a Verified Account Code set this field to No Set.
506-02 DRL
, n,
n = 0~16
(default = 0)
The DRL assigned to an accounting code allows users to override
their stations assigned DRL enabling a call to be placed.
506-03 FRL
, n,
n = 0~16
(default = 0)
The FRL assigned to an accounting code enables users to override
the station assigned FRL.
506-04 Network COS
, n, ,
n = 1~32
(default = 1)
Assign the Network COS to be used by this accounting code.
507 Door Phone
Assignment
,
This assignment configures Door Phone Control Boxes (DDCBs) and
Door Phones (MDFBs). DDCBs can be connected to ADKU, PDKU
and/or BDKU interface PCBs. Up to three MDFBs can be connected
to one DDCB. A Door lock control relay may be assigned to the B
output of the DDCB in place of a MDFB door phone.
507-00 Door Phone Number
n,
n = 1~6 (CTX100)
1~9 (CTX670 Basic)
1~24 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the door phone number. Door phone numbering for both
CTX100 and CTX670 is as follows:
•DDCB 1 provides door phone numbers 1~3, 2 can be a door
phone or door lock.
•DDCB 2 provides door phone numbers 4~6, 5 can be a door
phone or door lock.
Door phone numbering for CTX670 only is as follows:
•DDCB 3 provides door phone numbers 7~9, 8 can be a door
phone or door lock.
•DDCB 4 provides door phones 10~12, 11can be a door phone or
door lock.
•DDCB 5 provides door phones 13~15, 14 can be a door phone or
door lock.
•DDCB 6 provides door phones 16~18, 17 can be a door phone or
door lock.
•DDCB 7 provides door phones 19~21, 20 can be a door phone or
door lock.
•DDCB 8 provides door phones 22~24, 23 can be a door phone or
door lock.
DDCBs are numbered by the system automatically by DDCB
Equipment (Shelf/Slot/Circuit). DDCB1 is assigned to the lowest
DDCB Equipment and DDCB2 to the next lowest, etc.
If DDCB Circuit B is set to Door Lock, a Door Phone cannot be set.
Table 13-35 Programs 500~577 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-77
Telephone Button
Programming
507-01 DDCB Equipment No.
, xxyyzz,
xx = Cabinet 01 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the DDCB equipment number to which the Door phone should
be assigned.
Example: If the DDCB interface should be connected to a PDKU or
BDKU/BDKS in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Notes
•This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the BDKU/BDKS or
PDKU interface PCB to which the DDCB is to be connected.
•If a PDN is assigned to the DDCB equipment number it must be
deleted, using Program 201, before attempting to assign the
DDCB console.
Cabinet numbers:
•CTX100 – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•CTX670 – Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•CTX100 – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
•CTX670 – Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.
yy = Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)
zz = Circuit 01~16
507-02 Tenant Number
, n,
n = 1~2 (CTX100)
1~8 (CTX670) (default = 1)
Select the Tenant Number for which the door phone should ring over
external page in the system Night mode.
507-03 Connection Status n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Check the box if the door phone is physically connected to the DDCB.
507-04 Ring Duration
, n,
n = 3~30
(default = 9)
Select the time that the door phone should ring destination devices
when the door phone button is pressed. The ring time can be 3 to 30
seconds set in 3 second intervals - each 3 second interval provides
one ring to the destination. Destination devices include selected DNs
and Page groups.
507-05 LCD Name Display
, n,
n = 1~16 Enter the Door Phone name that should display on LCD telephones
when the door phone rings the telephones; or, when the telephone
calls the door phone.
507-06 Day1 Destination
, n, , n1,
n = 1. None (default)
2. DN
3. Paging Group
1~4 (CTX100)
1~8 (CTX670 Basic)
1~16 (CTX670 Exp.)
1. Select Destination Type – Select the type of destination that
should ring when the door phone button is pressed during the
system Day1, Day2 or Night mode.
2. Enter the Destination Number – If the ring destination type is a
PDN or PhDN, enter the directory number. If the ring destination
type is Page, enter the Page Group number.
n1 = Up to 5 digits
507-07 Day2 Destination
, n, , n1,
n = 1. None (default)
2. DN
3. Paging Group
1~4 (CTX100)
1~8 (CTX670 Basic)
1~16 (CTX670 Exp.)
1. Select Destination Type – Select the type of destination that
should ring when the door phone button is pressed during the
system Day1, Day2 or Night mode.
2. Enter the Destination Number – If the ring destination type is a
PDN or PhDN, enter the directory number. If the ring destination
type is Page, enter the Page Group number.
n1 = Up to 5 digits
507-08 Night Destination
, n, , n1,
,
n = 1. None (default)
2. DN
3. Paging Group
1~4 (CTX100)
1~8 (CTX670 Basic)
1~16 (CTX670 Exp.)
1. Select Destination Type – Select the type of destination that
should ring when the door phone button is pressed during the
system Day1, Day2 or Night mode.
2. Enter the Destination Number – If the ring destination type is a
PDN or PhDN, enter the directory number. If the ring destination
type is Page, enter the Page Group number.
n1 = Up to 5 digits
Table 13-35 Programs 500~577 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
13-78 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
508 Door Lock Control
Assignment
,
This assignment is used to configure up to 10 door lock control relays.
The contacts of these relays are used to control electrical door locks.
One door lock relay can be assigned to each of the eight Door Phone
Control Boxes (DDCB, Port B) and/or one to each of the two BIOU
PCBs (any one of the four control relays).
Note If a door lock is assigned to a DDCB, the second jack (Port B)
will provide the door lock relay contacts. This jack can not be
used to connect an MDFB door phone.
508-00 Door Lock Number
n,
n = 1~4 (CTX100)
1~5 (CTX670 Basic)
1~10 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the door lock control number to configure.
508-01 Interface Type
, n,
n = 1. None (default)
2. BIOU
3. DDCB
Enter the system Page Group number that should ring for the
selected tenant when a door phone button is pressed during the
system Night Mode.
508-02 BIOU Relay Number
, n,
n = 0~8 (default = 0)
•BIOU1 provides control
relays 1~4
•BIOU2 provides control
relays 5~8.
Assign BIOU control relay as a Door Lock Relay. This relay activates
when the Door Lock button is pressed or a Door Lock access code is
dialed.
Note The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5.
For this relay operation BIOU2 is installed as default in a
virtual equipment position Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20, in
Program 100. To install an actual BIOU2 and disable the
ACTU built-in relay, use the programming telephone to
remove the virtual BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2 in
Cabinet 01/slot 01~08 in the normal manner. BIOU relay
functions are assigned in “Program 515” on page 80. This
field is required if you selected BIOU in 01 Interface Type
above.
508-03 DDCB Equipment No.
, n, ,
n = Cabinet 01 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)
Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)
Circuit 01~16
Enter the DDCB equipment number to which the Door Lock should be
assigned. This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the ADKU,
BDKU/BDKS or PDKU interface PCB to which the the DDCB is to be
connected.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
XX=cabinet 01~07; YY=slot 01~10; ZZ=circuit 01~16
Example: If the DDCB interface should be connected to a ADKU,
PDKU or BDKU/BDKS in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter
050203.
Note If a PDN is assigned to the DDCB equipment number it must
be deleted, using PRG201, before attempting to assign the
DDCB console.
Cabinet numbers:
•CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
•CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.
509 DR Override by
System Speed Dial
,
This command assigns the COS, DRL, FRL and QPL values used by
DR Override by Speed Dial.
509-01 Override COS
, n,
n = 1~32
(default =1)
Select the override COS value.
509-02 Override DRL
, n,
n = 1~16
(default =1)
Select the override DRL value.
509-03 Override FRL
, n,
n = 1~16
(default =1)
Select the override FRL value.
Table 13-35 Programs 500~577 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-79
Telephone Button
Programming
509-04 Override QPL
, n, ,
n = 1~16
(default =1)
Select the override QPL value.
510 COS Override
Assignment
,
Assigns Class of Service Overrides and their parameters (COS, FRL,
DRL, QPL).
510-00 COS Override Index
n,
n = 1~16 Select the COS Override index.
510-01 COS Override Code
, n,
n = Up to 8 digits Select the COS Override Code as entered by users. If no data is
entered in this field, any previously entered data is erased.
510-02 Set COS
, n,
n = 1~32
(default = 1)
Select COS number for this override code.
510-03 Set DRL
, n,
n = 1~16
(default = 1)
Select DRL number for this override code.
510-04 Set FRL
, n,
n = 1~16
(default = 1)
Select FRL number for this override code.
510-05 Set QPL
, n,
n = 1~16
(default = 1)
Select QPL number for this override code.
510-06 Set Network COS
, n, ,
n = 1~32
(default = 1)
Apply this override code to Network COS index
512 SMDR for System
Assignment
,
Assigns system-wide SMDR parameters.
512-01 Caller ID Field
, n,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Include Caller ID records in SMDR.
512-02 B Record for
Abandoned Call
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Generate B Record for an abandoned call.
512-03 ANI
, n,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Include ANI in SMDR record.
512-04 Authorization Code
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Include authorization codes in SMDR records.
512-05 End-of-Record CR
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Include a Carriage Return (CR) at the end of an SMDR record.
513 SMDR for ILG
Assignment
,
This program assigns SMDR parameters for ILGs.
513-00 ILG
n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Specify the ILG for which to set SMDR parameters.
513-01 Generate SMDR
Records
, n,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Enable to generate records for this ILG
513-02 DNIS Field Indication
, n,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Check to include DNIS information in records for this ILG.
513-03 B Record for
Incoming Call
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable B Record generation for incoming calls with or without
incoming SMDR being enabled.
Table 13-35 Programs 500~577 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
13-80 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
513-04 Abandoned Call
Record Output
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable record generation for abandoned calls. Incoming SMDR must
be turned on. Abandoned call records will be generated whether or
not incoming SMDR has been set.
513-05 Display Transferred
Call Records
, n, ,
n = 1. Source (default)
2. Destination
Select whether to charge a transferred call to the source or
destination party.
514 SMDR for OLG
Assignment
,
This command assigns SMDR parameters for OLGs.
514-00 OLG
n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Specify the OLG for which to set SMDR parameters.
514-01 SMDR Record
Display
, n,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Enable SMDR Record Display.
514-02 Outgoing Records
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Enable to generate records for outgoing calls. SMDR Record Display
must be on.
514-03 Outgoing Records
, n, ,
n = 1. Source (default)
2. Destination
Enable to apply the SMDR record of a transferred call to its source or
its destination.
515 View BIOU Control
Relay Assignment
,
This assignment is used to view functions of the four control relays on
each BIOU PCB set in Program 105 12 Night Relay and 18 Night Bell
Relay; Program 508 Door Lock Control Assignment; and Program
503 19 BGM Mute Relay. The system allows up to two BIOU PCBs to
provide a total of eight control relays. The control relays can be
configured as an external BGM mute control, Night Bell control, Night
Mode Control, and Door Lock Control.
Notes
•BIOU-1 relays are identified as Control Relays 1~4.
•BIOU-2 relays are identified as Control Relays 5~8.
515-00 BIOU (1 or 2)
n,
n = 1 or 2 Enter the BOIU PCB number.
Note BIOU 1 and BIOU 2 are assigned in Program 100 - Card
Assignment.
515-01 BIOU Relay 1 or 5
, n,
n = 1. Not Use (default)
2. Ext Paging
3. Night Bell
4. Night Relay
5. Door Lock
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 1 or BIOU2, control relay 5:
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 2 or BIOU2, control relay 6:
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 3 or BIOU2, control relay 7:
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 4 or BIOU2, control relay 8:
•NOT USE – if the relay is not used.
•PAGE MUTE – External BGM mute control activates during an
external page (see “Program 503” on page 75).
•NIGHT BELL – Night Bell control activates during the system
Night Mode only when incoming CO lines ring (see “Program
102” on page 12).
•NIGHT RELAY – Night Mode Control activates continuously
during the system Night Mode (see “Program 105” on page 18).
•DOOR LOCK – Door Lock Control activates when a telephone's
Door Unlock button is pressed (see “Program 508” on page 78).
515-02 BIOU Relay 2 or 6
, n,
515-03 BIOU Relay 3 or 7
, n,
515-04 BIOU Relay 4 or 8
, n, ,
Table 13-35 Programs 500~577 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-81
Telephone Button
Programming
516 Station Speed Dial
,
Up to 100 pre-programmed Speed Dial numbers (up to 32 digits
each) can be assigned to each station. Speed Dial numbers are
stored in “Bins” and each station accesses the Speed Dial numbers
by entering the Speed Dial Bin number from their respective stations.
The following advanced Speed Dialing features are available in Strata
CTX.
•Speed Dial Bin Linking – Whenever a Speed Dial number
exceeds the 32-digit Speed Dial Bin memory limitation, the digits
exceeding the 32 digit limitation are automatically stored into the
adjacent Speed Dial Bin. The entire string is activated by using
the primary Speed Dial Bin number.
Note Bin linking is automatic. Any previously programmed data in
the “adjacent Speed Dial Bin” as described above is
overwritten. Furthermore, if a number exceeding the
maximum allowable dial digit length is overwritten with a new
number which complies to the 32-digit restriction, the excess
digits recorded in the next Bin (from the previous entry) is
treated as a unique Speed Dial record.
•Speed Dial Number Nesting – A Speed Dial number can be
nested into another Speed Dial number. For example, if an
international dialing prefix is used often, program the prefix in any
Speed Dial Bin. Then in the another Speed Dial Bin, program the
first Bin number + the number to dial. When the second Speed
Dial Bin is activated, Strata CTX first retrieves and dials the
international dialing prefix from the first Bin location, then adds
the numbers to dial.
516-00 PDN
n,
n = Up to 5 digits Select the PDN assigned the speed dial number.
516-01 Speed Dial Bin
, n,
n = 00~99 Enter the station speed dial bin number. A station can have up to 100
speed dial bins.
Note Adding bin numbers here will automatically increment the
number of speed dial bins available to the station in
increments of 10 speed dial bins. The number of speed dial
bins available to the station can also be assigned and
displayed in Program 200, 35 - Station SpDial Bins. Example:
If bin number 50 is entered here, 50 speed dial bins will
automatically be assigned to the station and will also be
displayed in Program 200, 35.
516-02 Number
, n,
n = Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, #
and Pauses
This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.
To enter pauses enter Px, where x equals 0~9 (seconds), which is the
length of the pause, 0=10 seconds.
Notes
•If the number being entered exceeds the 32 digits, the next speed
dial location will automatically be appended to create longer
numbers.
•Also another speed dial bin can be nested within another bin for
dialing common numbers. If speed dial bin 100 has long distance
access digits 1010321, these digits can be nested in to other
speed dial bins by using *100 as the first digits of the other bins.
Example putting *10017145563425 into speed dial bin 150 would
cause SD150 to dial the access digits plus the number
10132117145563425.
•If you are programming from the Telephone the digits * and #
have a special meaning when programming speed dial numbers.
The # digit indicates the end of entry and * is an escape
character. To dial the digits * or # as part of the number; enter **
or *#. To enter pauses enter *0~*9. The second digit represents
the number of seconds for the pause function.
516-03 Name
, n, ,
n = Up to 8 characters Enter the LCD Name that displays on LCD dial directories.
Note This feature is available in CTX WinAdmin and Strata
DKT30xxSD only.
Table 13-35 Programs 500~577 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
13-82 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
517 Multiple Calling Group
Assignment
,
This feature is available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software
and with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.
517-00 Multiple Call Group
Number
n,
n = 1~16 (CTX100),
1~32 (CTX670 Basic)
1~64 (CTX670 Exp.)
Select a group number.
517-01 MC Group Pilot
Number
, n,
n = 1~5 digits Enter the Pilot Directory Number that should be assigned to the
Multiple Call Group. This can be any number 1~5 digits that does not
conflict with numbers in the current system Number Plan.
517-02 Ring Delay 1 Timer
, n,
n = 1~180 Set the timer in seconds.
517-03 Ring Delay 2 Timer
, n,
n = 1~180 Set the timer in seconds.
517-04 System Call Forward
, n,
n = 0~32 Assign a System Call Forward template number to the multiple calling
group. Enter 0 or 1~32.
517-05 Voice Mail ID
, n, ,
n = Up to 10 digits Enter the VM call forward ID digits for the multiple calling group
518 Multiple Calling
Members Assignment
,
This feature is available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software
and with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.
This program assigns members to a group.
518-01 Multiple Calling Group
Index
, n,
n = 1~16 (CTX100), 1~32
(CTX670 Basic) and 1~64
(CTX670 Exp.)
Enter a group number.
518-02 Member Index
Number
, n,
n = Up to 32 digits Enter the DN of the extension you wish to add.
518-03 Member Type
, n,
n = No Data
Dialing Digits
Enter Dialing Digits to make the extension ring.
518-04 Member DN
, n,
n = Up to 32 digits Enter the DN of the extension you wish to add.
518-05 Ringing Options
, n, ,
n = Immediate
Delay 1
Delay 2
Select either: Immediate, Delay 1 or Delay 2.
520 LCR Local Route Plan
Assignment
,
There are 64 LCR route plans. This assignment is used to select
which LCR route plan should be used to route local calls. The Local
Route Plan, which must be defined in the route definition assignment,
determines which CO line group is used for local outgoing calls.
520-01 Local Area Code
, n,
n = 3 digits Enter the area code for the dialing area in which the system is
installed. This is the area code for the Central Office (CO) that
provides local CO lines to the system. If no data is entered in this
field, any previously programmed data is lost.
520-02 Local Route Plan
, n, ,
n = 1~64
(default = 1)
Enter the LCR Route Plan number that should be used to route local
calls. Local calls are made by dialing 7-digit public telephone
numbers that do not require an Area Code. There are 64 LCR Route
Plans from which to choose.
Table 13-35 Programs 500~577 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-83
Telephone Button
Programming
521 LCR Route Plan Digit
Analysis Assignment
,
This program builds the basic LCR Analysis Table.
521-00 Analysis Digits
n,
n = Up to 11 digits
Wild Card uses and
where = 0~9 and = 2~9
Enter the external digit strings (area codes, toll prefixes, service
codes, etc.) to be assigned to a Route Plan Analysis Table.
Strings may be up to 32 digits long. There Route Plan Analysis Table
may have 1280 members. A digit string can only be in one table at a
time.
521-01 Route Plan Number
, n, ,
n = 0~64
(default = 0)
Enter the Route Plan number to which to assign the Analysis Digits.
Note Entering 0 deletes the Analysis Digits from the table to which
they had been assigned.
522 LCR Exception
Number Route Plans
,
This command assigns up to 1280 dialed external digit strings to the
Route Plan Exception Analysis Table which assigns each string to 1
of 64 Route Choice Tables. The values expressed here are
exceptions to the values established in Program 521.
522-00 Exception Route Plan
Table
n,
n = Up to 11 digits
Wild Card uses and
where = 0~9 and =
2~9
Enter the external digit strings (area codes, toll prefixes, service
codes, etc.) to be assigned to a Route Plan Exception Analysis Table.
Strings may be up to 32 digits long. The Exception Route Plan
Analysis Table may have 1280 members. A digit string can only be in
one table at a time.
522-01 Exception Route Plan
, n, ,
n = 1~64
(default = 0)
Enter the Route Plan Table in which to assign the Exception Digits.
Note Entering 0 deletes the Exception Digits from the table.
523 LCR Route Plan
Schedule Assignment
,
This command assigns Route Plan Schedule Tables for LCR. Each
table is a 3-dimensional array of 144 values (3 Types of Day x 3
Times of Day x 16 LCR Groups).
523-00 Route Plan
n,
n = 1~64 Enter the Route Plan Number to build a schedule indexed by Time of
Day, Type of Day and LCR Group.
523-01 Type of Day
, n,
n = 1. Weekday
2. Weekend
3. Holiday
Select the Type of Day.
523-02 LCR Time of Day
, n,
n = 1. Time Zone1
2. Time Zone2
3. Night
Select the Time Zone.
523-03 Station LCR Group
, n,
n = 1~16
(default = 1)
Select the Station LCR Group.
523-04 Route Choice Table
, n, ,
n = 1~128
(default = 1)
Enter the Route Choice Table Number to be used with this
combination of time, type and LCR group.
Table 13-35 Programs 500~577 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
13-84 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
524 Route Table to Route
Definition Assignment
,
This command defines up to six possible Route Definitions for a given
Route Table.
524-00 Route Choice Table
n,
n = 1~128
0 = Delete
Enter the Route Choice Table to be defined.
524-01 Route Definition 1
, n,
n = 1~128
0 = Delete (default = 1)
Enter Route Definitions to be assigned to this Route Table.
524-02 Route Definition 2
, n,
n = 1~128
0 = Delete (default = 1)
Enter Route Definitions to be assigned to this Route Table.
524-03 Route Definition 3
, n,
n = 1~128
0 = Delete (default = 1)
Enter Route Definitions to be assigned to this Route Table.
524-04 Route Definition 4
, n,
n = 1~128 Enter Route Definitions to be assigned to this Route Table.
524-05 Route Definition 5
, n, ,
n = 1~128 Enter Route Definitions to be assigned to this Route Table.
525 LCR Route Definition
Assignment
,
This command assigns Route Definitions for LCR. A Route Definition
consists of an OLG and a Digit Modification index.
525-00 Route Definition
n,
n = 1~128 Select the Route Definition number.
525-01 OLG Number
, n,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 1)
Select the OLG Number associated with this Route Definition.
525-02 Digit Mod Index
, n, ,
n = 1~128
(default = 1)
Select the Digit Modification number associated with this Route
Definition.
526 Modified Digits Table
Assignment
,
This command modifies LCR dialed numbers by deleting digits from
and adding digits to the dialed numbers.
526-00 Digit Modification
Index
n,
n = 1~128 Select the Digit Modification Index used by the LCR Route Choice
table to determine the digit modification treatment to be applied.
Leading digits of a dialed number may be deleted; leading and trailing
digits may be added to the dialed number.
526-01 Delete Digits
, n,
n = 0~10
(default = 0)
Select the quantity of digits to be deleted from the beginning of dialed
number.
526-02 Add Leading Digits
, n,
n = Up to 23 digits Enter the digit string to be inserted at the beginning of the number.
526-03 Add Trailing
, n, ,
n = Up to 23 digits Enter the digit string to be inserted at the end of the number.
527 LCR Holiday Table
Assignment
,
This command assigns up to 128 holidays for LCR processing. These
assignments are related to the Day assignments established in
Program 523.
527-00 Holiday
YYYYMMDD,
YYY
Y =
MM =
DD =
Year
Month
Day
Enter Date (YYYYMMDD). A maximum of 128 dates is allowed.
527-01 Add/Delete
, n, ,
n = 1. Add
2. Delete (default)
Choose to add or delete this date from the holiday table. Expired
dates remain in the table unless deleted.
Table 13-35 Programs 500~577 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-85
Telephone Button
Programming
528 LCR Public Day of
Week Mapping Table
,
This command defines the days of the week as weekdays, weekend
days or holidays for LCR.
528-01 Monday
, n,
n = 1. Weekday (default)
2. Weekend
3. Holiday
Select the Day Type to assign to this day.
528-02 Tuesday
, n,
n = 1. Weekday (default)
2. Weekend
3. Holiday
528-03 Wednesday
, n,
n = 1. Weekday (default)
2. Weekend
3. Holiday
528-04 Thursday
, n,
n = 1. Weekday (default)
2. Weekend
3. Holiday
528-05 Friday
, n,
n = 1. Weekday (default)
2. Weekend
3. Holiday
528-06 Saturday
, n,
n = 1. Weekday (default)
2. Weekend
3. Holiday
Select the Day Type to assign to this day.
528-07 , n, , n = 1. Weekday (default)
2. Weekend
3. Holiday
Select the Day Type to assign to this day.
529 LCR Route Plan Time
Zone Assignment
,
This command creates a three-dimensional array (Day, Time & LCR
Group) for each Route Plan.
529-00 Route Plan Time
Zone
n,
n = 1~64 Select the LCR Route Plan Number to assign to this time zone.
529-01 Day Type for Time
Zone
, n,
n = 1. Weekday
2. Weekend
3. Holiday
Select a Day Type for which to define a time zone.
529-02 Time Zone
, n,
n = 1. Zone1
2. Zone2
3. Zone3
Select a Time Zone.
529-03 Time Zone Start Time
, hhmm, ,
hh =
mm =
hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)
(default = 0000)
Enter the start time for the selected Time Zone (hhmm).
Note Enter your Day Type and Time Zone selections before
entering data in to this field.
530 DR LCR Screening
Table Assignment
,
This command screens dialed digits for access codes such as Carrier
Identification Codes or Behind Centrex/PBX access codes. Used only
in LCR calls.
530-00 Screening Dial String
n,
n = Up to 7 digits Enter the string of external digits to be screened.
530-01 Add String to Table
, n,
n = 1. Add
2. Delete (default)
Add the Screening Dial String to the DR LCR Screening Table.
530-02 DR Action
, n,
n = 1. Bypass (default)
2. Skip and Apply
Select DR Action.
•Bypass – Do not apply DR.
•Skip and Apply – Apply DR to the dialed digits excluding the
number of digits specified in Skip Length.
Table 13-35 Programs 500~577 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
13-86 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
530-03 LCR Action
, n,
n = 1. Apply (default)
2. Skip and Apply
Select LCR Action.
•Apply – (default) Apply LCR to all of the external dialed digits.
•Skip and Apply – Apply LCR to the dialed digits excluding the
number of digits specified in Skip Length.
530-04 Digit Modification
Action
, n,
n = 1. Apply (default)
2. Retain
3. Discard
Select Digit Modification application.
•Apply – (default) Apply Digit Modification from the first digit.
•Retain – Retain the skipped digits and apply Digit Modification
starting from the next digit specified by Skip Length.
•Discard – Discard the skipped digits and apply Digit Modification
starting from the next digit specified by Skip Length.
530-05 Skip Length
, n, ,
n = 0~5
0 = delete (default = 0)
Specify the number of digits at the beginning of the dial string
to be ignored before DR, Digit Modification, or LCR is applied.
531 DR Screening Table
for OLG
,
Assigns DR Screening Table for an OLG. Up to four codes may be
assigned per line group. Used for outgoing calls other than LCR.
531-00 OLG
n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the OLG Number.
531-01 Behind Centrex
Access Code
, n,
n = Up to 8 digits Enter the access code expected by an attached Centrex PBX.
531-02 Add or Delete Code
, n,
n = 1. Add
2. Delete (default)
Add or Delete the Code entered above. Leaving the field empty
removes an existing code. Activation requires entries in OLG Group
number and 01 Behind Centrex Access Code above.
531-03 DR Action for Centrex
, n,
n = 1. Bypass (default)
2. Skip and Apply
Apply DR to the dialed digits.
•Bypass (default) – does not apply DR.
•Skip and Apply– applies DR to the dialed digits excluding the
number of digits specified in Skip Length.
531-04 Skip Length
, n,
n = 0~8
(default = 0)
Enter the number of leading digits to be ignored by DR.
531-05 Pause Insertion
, n, ,
n = 0~10
(default = 0)
Enter the length of the pause to be inserted between dialing digits.
532 DR Table Allow/Deny
Definition
,
Specify the DR Table Type using this command.
532-00 DRL Number
n,
n = Up to 8 digits Select the DRL Number.
532-01 Table Type
, n1, ,
n1 = 1. Allow
2. Deny (default)
Specify whether this DR Table is an Allow Table or Deny Table.
533 DR Level Table
Assignment
,
This program adds or deletes entries in the DR Table associated with
the DRL entered in above.
533-00 DRL Number
n,
n = Up to 16 digits Enter the DRL for which you want to populate an Exception Table.
533-01 Dial String
, n1,
n1 = 1~ 7 digits may include
wild cards “X” and “N”
where X = 0~9 and N =
2~9.
Add the dial string you wish to be treated as an exception.
533-02 Add or Delete
, n2, ,
n2 = 1. Add
2. Delete (default)
Add or delete the string entered in 01 DR Exception Table above to
the DR Exception Table.
Table 13-35 Programs 500~577 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-87
Telephone Button
Programming
534 DRL Exception Table
Assignment
,
This program assigns a DRL Exception Table to an existing DRL
table. If the DRL Table is an allow table, its Exception Table must be a
deny table and vice versa.
534-00 DRL Number
n,
n = Up to 8 digits Enter the DRL for which you want to populate an Exception Table.
534-01 Dial String
, n1,
n1 = 1~ 7 digits may include
wild cards “X” and “N”
where X = 0~9 and N =
2~9.
Add the dial string you wish to be treated as an exception.
534-02 Add/Delete
, n2, ,
n2 = 1. Add
2. Delete (default)
Add or delete the string entered in 01 DR Exception Table above to
the DR Exception Table.
540 Pilot DN Assignment
,
Pilot DNs are directory numbers that have no physical appearance,
they are true virtual numbers. They can be used in CTI and Voice Mail
applications. In ACD Pilot Numbers are used as ACD group numbers.
In Voice Mail applications Pilot DNs are used to call directly to, or
transfer calls directly to specific voice mail boxes – this is done by
setting VM as the alternate destination and using the VMID to send
the call to a specific VM box.
540-00 Pilot DN
n,
n = Up to 8 digits Pilot DNs are directory numbers that have no physical appearance.
They are true virtual numbers. They can be used in CTI and Voice
Mail applications. In ACD, Pilot Numbers are used as ACD group
numbers. In Voice Mail applications they are used to call directly to or
transfer calls directly to specific voice mail boxes - this is done by
setting VM as the alternate destination and using the VMID to send
the call to a specific VM box.
Maximum characters for Pilot DNs:
•CTX100: R1.00 & R1.01=5 max./R1.02=100 Max
•CTX670 Basic: R1.00 & R1.01=10max./R1.02=200max
•CTX670 with BBMS/BEXS: R1.00 & R1.01=32max./
R1.02=256max
540-01 After Shift Type
, n,
n = 1. No Data (default)
2. Dialing Digits
3. Night Bell
Calls to the Pilot DN will be routed to the Alternate Destination if the
Pilot DN is not available (example: ACD After Shift). If Dialing Digits is
selected, enter the appropriate DN in the Alternate DN assignment.
540-02 After Shift Destination
, n,
n = Up to 32 digits If Dialing digits is selected as the Alternate Destination, enter the
PDN, PhDN or Hunt Group pilot number to which the call should be
routed.
540-03 Voice Mail ID
, n, ,
n = Up to 16 digits If the Alternate Destination is Voice Mail, enter the Voice Mail ID that
should be sent.
541 Pilot DN Delete
,
This command enables you to delete Pilot DNs.
541-01 Delete Pilot DN
n, ,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter the Pilot DN Number that you wish to delete.
550 Enhanced 911
Emergency Call
Group
,
This command assigns OLGs to the Enhanced 911 Emergency Call
Group.
550-00 Emergency Call
Group Number
n,
n = 1~8 Specify the Emergency Call Group.
550-
01~08
OLG1~OLG8
~, n, ,
n = 0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Specify the first through eighth OLG to be chosen for an E911 call.
Table 13-35 Programs 500~577 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
13-88 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
570 Account Code Digit
Length
,
Accounting Codes need to be specified for the number of digits that
are expected to be used for registering a number. This allows dialing
within Strata CTX to proceed automatically once the correct account
code is dialed. The following numbers are then dialed digits used for
making the phone call.
A second length is provided to allow the number of digits to be used
for verification of the code to be less than the total code entered; thus,
the code may contain two parts, one required and one part optional to
the user..
570-01 Verified Digit Length
, n,
n = 4~15
(default = 4)
The Verified Digit Length sets a number of digits to verify with a pre-
set list. This number may be the same or smaller than the account
code digits set to be entered for creating a complete accounting code.
Note This field is not changed, when “Program 506” on page 75
are registered.
570-02 Registered Digit
Length
, n, ,
n = 4~15
(default = 6)
The Registered Digit Length sets a number for the digits to be entered
to make a complete accounting code entry.
Note The Registered Digit Length ( ) must be greater than or
equal to the Verified Digit Length ( ).
571 Exception Numbers
for Forced Account
Codes
,
Up to four telephone numbers can be programmed as exceptions to
the forced and /or verified account code entries (including 911).
These special codes enable numbers to bypass the verification
process and proceed unhindered.
571-01 Exception Number 1
, n,
n = Up to 4 digits
Exception 1 default = 911
Exception 2~4 default = no
value
Enter a Forced Account Code Exception.
Note One of the assigned exception numbers should be 911.
Exception Numbers for Forced Account Code fields cannot
be duplicated.
571-02 Exception Number 2
, n,
571-03 Exception Number 3
, n,
571-04 Exception Number 4
, n, ,
573 Delete Door Phone
,
This command deletes door phone.
573-00 Door Phone
n, ,
n = 1~6 (CTX100)
1~9 (CTX670 Basic)
1~24 (CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the number of the door phone that is to deleted.
576 Door Phone Night
Ring Over External
Page
,
This command assigns a Page Group to ring during system Night
Mode when a door phone button is pressed. The assignment can be
made independently for each Tenant.
576-00 Tenant Number
n,
n = 1~2 (CTX100)
1~8 (CTX670)
Select the system Tenant number to be assigned Door Phone to
Page Group/Night Ringing.
576-01 Page Group Number
, n, ,
n = 0~4 (CTX100)
0~8 (CTX670 Basic)
0~16 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
Select the system Page Group number that should ring for the
selected Tenant when a door phone button is pressed during the
system Night Mode.
577 Caller History
,
This command assigns which station stores Caller ID information for
PDN,CO,GCO and POOL line buttons
577-00 Circuit Type/Number
n,
n = Up to 6 digits Enter the Circuit Type and number. See the Table 13-36 on page 89
below.
577-01 Primary DN
, n, ,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter Station DN to store call history data.
Table 13-35 Programs 500~577 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-89
Telephone Button
Programming
Table 13-36 Circuit Type Code Definitions
Circuit Name Circuit Type Circuit Number Example
DN 1 0~99999 (DN) if DN is 200, value is 1200
CO 2 1~264 (Trunk Number) if CO is 30, value is 230
GCO 3 1~128 (GCO Key Group Number) if GCO is 50, value is 350
POOL 4 1~128 (POOL Key Group Number) if POOL is 80, value data is 480
Table 13-37 Programs 579~580
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
579 System Voice Mail
Data
,
This command assigns DTMF/SMDI Voice Mail interface parameters
for the system.
579-01 VM ID to DID/DNIS
Association
, n,
n = 1. DN VMID (default)
2. DID/DNIS VMID
Select DN VMID to send the DN’s VMID to voice mail on DID/DNIS
calls that are answered and then transferred to a DN which then
forwards to voice mail.
Select DID/DNIS VMID to send the DID/DNIS number’s VMID to
voice mail on DID/DNIS calls that are answered and then transferred
to a DN which then forwards to voice mail.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a
DN which then forwards to voice mail, the VMID of the DID/DNIS
number (Program 309, or ) or the VMID of the
forwarding DN (Program 200, or 206, ) will be sent to
voice mail per this option.
Note The DID/DNIS number’s VMID (Program. 309, or
) is always sent to voice mail on DID/DNIS calls that
ring directly to voice mail or ring a DN which then forwards to
voice mail before it is ever answered.
579-02 Cancellation Method
for VM MW
, n,
n = 1. Auto and Access Code
Cancel
2. Access Code Cancel
(default)
Select the method used to cancel Voice Mail message waiting
indication.
579-03 Message Desk
Number
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable to send the SMDI Message Desk Number (001) in the SMDI
packet; otherwise, 000 for a station call or the 3-digit CO line number
is sent.
579-04 Output of CLASS, ANI
and DNIS
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Enable to include Caller ID/ANI numbers in SMDR records.
579-05 Calling Number Digits
Sent to VM
, n,
n = 2~10
(default = 10)
Select how many calling number digits to send to the VM unit.
Note If 04 Output of CLASS / ANI and DNIS is enabled, this value
must be 10.
579-06 Blank Digits Sent to
VM
, n,
n = 1. 1985
2. 1991 (default)
Send SMDI-Bellcore Standard VM Interface.
•1 = 1985 (single space)
•2 = 1991 (two spaces).
579-07 Auto Cancel of VM
and MW
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Setting of auto cancel of VM and MW.
579-08 DTMF Duration
, n,
n = 1. 80 ms (default)
2. 160 ms
Select VM ID Code and System DTMF Signal Time.
579-09 LCD Control of Voice
Mail
, n,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Enables Toshiba SMDI+ and integration for LCD control of VM. To
enable this feature you must have Stratagy Enterprise Server
Release 3.x or higher.
Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs
13-90 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
579-10 Central VM Callback
, n,
n = Up to 7 digits Enter the pilot DN for the centralized voice mail system. If this field is
left blank, the previously stored number will be deleted.
579-11 CFWD All Call Record
, n,
n = Up to 4 digits
(default = 91)
Enter DTMF VM-ID prefix string for calls arriving to voice mail via
“Call Fwd All Calls.
579-12 CFWD Busy Record
, n,
n = Up to 4 digits
(default = 91)
Enter DTMF VM-ID prefix string for calls arriving to voice mail via
“Call Fwd Busy.”
579-13 CFWD No Answer
Record
, n,
n = Up to 4 digits
(default = 91)
Enter DTMF VM-ID prefix string for calls arriving at the voice mail via
“Call Fwd No Answer.”
579-14 Direct Call
, n,
n = Up to 4 digits
(default = 91)
Enter DTMF VM-ID string for a call arriving at the voice mail as a
Direct Call.
579-15 Retrieve Messages
, n,
n = Up to 4 digits
(default = 91)
Enter DTMF VM-ID string for calls arriving at the voice mail to retrieve
messages.
579-16 Voice Main DN
, n,
n = Up to 7 digits
(default = 91)
Use a VM Pilot DN as a transfer destination.
579-17 Length of VM ID
, n, ,
n = 1~10
(default = 91)
Select the number of characters in VM-ID string.
580 Voice Mail Port Data
,
Assign characteristics of individual voice mail ports.
580-00 VM Port DN
n,
n = Up to 5 digits Enter the DN of an individual VM port. For direct transfer to voice
mail, enter the remote Node ID and Pilot DN.
Note Do not enter a Pilot DN. This feature is available only with
CTX Release 1.3 or higher software and with CTX WinAdmin
Release 1.3 or higher software.
580-01 Control Method
, n,
n = 1. Inband/DTMF
2. SMDI
(default = no value)
Specify In-band or SMDI integration. Select SMDI for Remote voice
mail.
580-02 Send A/D Tone
, n,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Select whether Strata CTX sends A or D tone when a station
connecting to voice mail answers or disconnects.
580-03 Send B Tone
, n,
n = 1. B Tone
2. No Tone (default)
3. B Tone and Extension
Number
Enable Strata CTX to send B tones in the event of a Blind Transfer
Recall.
580-04 End-to-end
, n, ,
n = 1. Enable (default)
2. Disable
Enable Strata CTX to send DTMF tones to voice mail in response to
key presses from a digital telephone.
Table 13-37 Programs 579~580 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
600 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-91
Telephone Button
Programming
600 Series Programs
Table 13-38 Programs 650~660
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
650 Behind Centrex
Assignment
,
Assigns parameters for operation behind Centrex or another PBX
650-00 OLG Number
n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
Specify OLG Number that is attached to a Centrex or another PBX.
(1~128 Expanded; 1~47 Basic)
650-01 Behind Centrex
, n,
n = 1:Enable
2:Disable (default)
Enable or disable Behind Centrex operation for this OLG.
650-02 Assume 9
, n,
n = 1:Enable
2:Disable (default)
Check to turn on the Assume 9 feature.
650-03 Pause Timer
(Seconds)
, n,
n = 0~5
(default = 0)
Enter the number of seconds (0~5) the CTX will wait for second dial
tone from Centrex/PBX.
651 Private Routing Plan
Analysis Table
Assignment
,
Assigns Node IDs to Route Choice Tables for Private Networking
651-00 Node ID
n, .
n = Up to 6-digits. Enter the Node ID to be associated with a Private Route Choice Table
Number.
651-01 Private Network
Route Choice Table
Number
, n, ,
n = 0~64, 0 = Delete Note Enter the Private Route Choice Table Number to be
associated with this Node ID. Entering “0” deletes the Node
ID.
653 Private Route Choice
Table Assignment
,
Use this command to define a Private Network Route Choice Table. A
Private Network Route Choice Table contains up to six Route
Definitions. The system will step through these Route Definitions in
terminating hunt fashion to find a route to the desired Private Network
networking node. There may be up to 64 Route Choice Tables.
653-00 Private Network
Route Choice Table
Number.
n, ,
n = 1~64, 0 = delete Enter the Private Network Route Choice Table Number (1~64).
653-
01~06
~, n, ,
n = 0~64, 0 = delete Enter the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, last Route Definition Table to
be used for for this Private Network Route Choice. Entering “0” will
delete an existing entry.
654 Private Route
Definition Table
Assignment
,
Use this command to define a Private Network Route Definition. A
Private Network Route Definition consists of an Outgoing Line Group
(OLG) and a pointer into the Private Network Digit Modification Table
that contains the dialed digits to be deleted and/or inserted before
being communicated to the distant node.
654-00 Private Network
Route Definition
n,
n = 1~64 Enter the number of the Private Network Route Definition (1~64) to be
defined or deleted.
654-01 OLG
, n,
n = 1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
0 = delete
Enter the OLG to be used by this route definition.(1~128 Expanded;
1~47 Basic)
Telephone Button Programming
600 Series Programs
13-92 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
654-02 Digit Modification
Table
, n, ,
n = 0~64, 0 = delete Enter the Digit Modification Table Number (1~64) to be used by this
route definition.
655 Private Digit
Modification Table
Assignment
,
The Private Network Digit Modification table may contain up to 64
entries. Each entry specifies the number of leading digits to be
deleted from the dialed number and the dial string to be inserted as
leading digits. The inserted dial string may have up to 23 digits.
655-00 Private Digit
Modification Table
n,
n = 1~64 Enter the Private Network Digit Modification Table (1~64) to be
defined.
655-01 Private Digit
Modification Digit To
Be Deleted
, n,
n = 1~10, 0 = delete Enter the number of leading digits to be deleted (1~10).
655-02 Insert Leading Digits
, n, ,
n = Up to 23 digits Enter the leading digits to be inserted. A numerical string up to 23
digits.
656 Node ID Assignment
,
Assigns up to 4 Network Node IDs to this node for processing
incoming network calls. Each Node ID has an overlap code. The CTX
will substitute the Overlap Code for the Node ID before processing
the call further. A Network Directory Number consists of a Node ID
and the desired extension in that node. Node ID must first be
established in CMD102.
656-01 Primary Node ID
Primary Overlap Code
, n,
n = Up to 6 digits Enter the Primary Node ID for this node. This Node ID identifies the
node for administration. Node ID must first be established in Program
102.
n = Up to 4 digits Enter the Overlap Code associated with the Primary Node ID. An
Overlap Code is the string of digits that will replace the Node ID for
further call processing.
656-02 Node ID 2
Overlap Code 2
, n, , n1,
n = Up to 6 digits Enter Node ID 2 for this node. Node ID must first be established in
CMD102.
n1 = Up to 4 digits Enter the Overlap Code associated with Node ID 2. An Overlap Code
is the string of digits that will replace the Node ID for further call
processing.
656-04 Node ID 3
Overlap Code 3
, n, , n1,
n = Up to 6 digits Enter the Overlap Code associated with Node ID 3. An Overlap Code
is the string of digits that will replace the Node ID for further call
processing.
n1 = Up to 4 digits Enter Node ID 4 for this node. Node ID must first be established in
CMD102.
656-05 Node ID 4
Overlap Code 4
, n, , n1,
,
n = Up to 6 digits Enter the Overlap Code associated with Node ID 4. An Overlap Code
is the string of digits that will replace the Node ID for further call
processing.
n1 = Up to 4 digits The privilege to pick a specified DN.
Table 13-38 Programs 650~660 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
600 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-93
Telephone Button
Programming
657 Network COS
Mapping Table
Assignment
,
This table translates a Network COS received as part of a Traveling
Class Mark to a local Class of Service for access to local services.
There is no translation of Outgoing Network COS.
Network COS
n,
n = 1~32 Enter the Network COS to be translated (1~32).
657-01 Local COS
, n,
n = 1~32 Enter the Local COS to be used in place of the received Network
COS (1~32).
657-02 Off-hook Call
Announce
, n,
n = 1. Enable
2. Disable (default)
Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can activate
Off-Hook Call Announce.
657-03 System Speed Dial
, n,
Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can use a
System Speed Dial number to make an otherwise restricted outgoing
call.
657-04 COS Override
, n,
Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can use
Class of Service Override.
657-05 TGAC Override
, n, ,
Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can override
local Trunk Group Access Control. Typically an attendant function.
658/
659/
660
Network DRL
Mapping Tables
,
This command is used to establish two mapping tables to equate
local DRLs with network DRLs for both outbound and inbound
network calls.
Type
n,
n = 1. Outbound
2. Inbound
Choose “Outbound” to equate the DRL of the local originator to a
Network DRL. Choose “Inbound” to equate a received Network DRL
with a local DRL for local termination.
Network DRL/FRL/
QPL
, n,
n = 1~16 Enter the local DRL/FRL/QPL you want to map to Network DRL/FRL/
QPL 1~DRL/FRL/QPL 16. This value can be different depending on
the type of table chosen above.
661 Network DN Table
,
This program assigns the PDN, PhDN or Pilot DNs to a CTX node ID.
This include all DNs in all CTX nodes on the CTX network, except the
DNs in the node you are currently programming.
661-00 Network DN
n,
n = Five ASCII characters max.
(Default = No Data)
Enter the PDN, PhDN or Pilot DNs that should be assigned to a CTX
Node ID. This include all DNs in all CTX Nodes on the CTX network,
except the DNs in the node you are currently programming.
661-01 Node ID
, n,
n = Six ASCII characters max.
(Default = No Data)
Enter the CTX Node ID that should be assigned to the DN.
Table 13-38 Programs 650~660 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
800 Series Programs
13-94 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
800 Series Programs
Table 13-39 Programs 801~803
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
801 Network Jack LAN
Device Assignments
,
This screen assigns the LAN parameters for the PC applications
connected to the BECU Network Jack through a LAN or Hub.
801-00 LAN Port Number
n,
n = 1~12 (default = no value) Enter the port number of the LAN device to be assigned. Refer to
Program 803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments.
Notes
•Program the local port number for LCD Control of Voice Mail
•Use the same Device Port No. (11) for Network BLF.
•Use 10 for Network TPI
•Use 12 for Network DSS
Network BLF and DSS are available only with CTX Release 1.3 or
higher software and with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher
software.
801-01 Protocol
, n,
n = 1. TCP (default)
2. UDP
Select communication Protocol.
Note Select UDP for Network DSS.
801-02 PC Operation Type
, n,
n = 1. Server (default)
2. Client
Enter the application PC type: Server or Client.
801-03 Data Flow
, n,
n = 1. Synchronization
2. Asynchronization
(default)
Enter the data flow protocol that should take place between the CTX
and PC. If the PC is a CTX, CTI application assign “Asynchronization”
to data flow.
801-04 Server Port Number
, n,
n = 0~65535 (default = 0) Enter the Server Port Number and proceed to 07 Read Retry
Number. This field is required if Server was selected in 02 PC
Operation Type above. If not, leave this field blank and proceed to 05
Client IP Address.
Note Use 6000 for Network BLF, 3000 for Network DSS, and 5000
for Network TPI.
801-05 Client IP Address
, n,
n = 0~255 (default = 0) Enter the Client LAN IP Address. This field is required if Client was
selected in 02 PC Operation Type above.
0~255 for each octet (default = 0)
Enter IP address of Stratagy iES32 or SES.
801-06
801-07
801-08
801-09 Write Retry Number
, n,
n = 0~65535 (default = 0) Enter the Client Port number. This field is required if Client was
selected in 02 PC Operation Type above.
801-10 Write Retry Number
, n,
n = 0~10 (default = 1) Set the Read Retry counter to (1~10).
801-11 Write Retry Number
, n, ,
n = 0~10 (default = 1) Set the Write Retry counter to (1~10).
803 IO Logical Device
Assignment
,
This screen is used to assign:
1. SMDR and SMDI to logical device and BSIS, RS-232 port
numbers.
2. CTX WinAdmin, ACD sever, and Attendant Console to BECU,
Network Jack logical device and LAN port numbers.
803-00 Logical Device
Number
n,
n = 100 = SMDR
300 or 301 = SMDI
200~208 = CTI LAN
Devices of PCs (default =
no value)
400 = BLF
500 = DSS
Enter the 3-digit logical device number for SMDR, SMDI, and LAN
device or PC application. See “Device Table” on page 13-95
SMDR: 100
SMDI: 300 or 301
CTI LAN devices or PCs can be assigned to any of the 9 LAN devices
numbers available: 200~208.
Telephone Button Programming
800 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-95
Telephone Button
Programming
803-01 Device Connection
, n,
n = 1. None (default)
2. LAN
3. RS-232
1. Enter RS-232 for SMDR or SMDI devices or PCs. These devices
are connected to BSIS, RS-232 ports.
2. Enter LAN for CTX WinAdmin, ACD Server, and Attendant Console
PC. These devices are connected to the BECU Network Jack directly
or via a HUB or LAN.
803-02 Device Port Number
, n,
n = 1~4 (for RS-232)
1~9 (for LAN)
11 (for BLF Networking)
(default = 1)
1. SMDR and SMDI devices can be assigned to any BSIS, RS-232
Port: 1~4 (one port per device)..
2. LAN devices and PCs can be assigned to LAN logical Port (1~9)
according to their logical device number assignments as shown:
LAN Port1=device200
LAN Port2=device201
LAN Port3=device202
LAN Port4=device203
LAN Port5=device204
LAN Port6=device205
LAN Port7=device206
LAN Port8=device207
Table 13-40 Device Table
Logical
Device Logical Device
Serial Number
Physical Device Define I/O
Logical
Device
Number
LAN PPP RS-232C Smart
Media
SMDR 0 - - OK - 100
CTI
0 OK - - - 200
1 OK - - - 201
2 OK - - - 202
3 OK - - - 203
4 OK - - - 204
5 OK - - - 205
6 OK - - - 206
7 OK - - - 207
8 OK - - - 208
SMDI 0 OK - OK - 300
1 OK - OK - 301
Table 13-39 Programs 801~803 (continued)
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
13-96 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
900 Series Programs
These programs are organized based on functions versus program numbers.
System Initialize
This program enables you to reset hardware and initializes, or restores programmed data.
Program Number(s): 900
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
Table 13-41 Program 804
Button Sequence Value(s) Summary
804 RS232C Data
Assignment
,
Use this screen to setup the RS-232 serial Ports on the BSIS
interface PCB.
804-00 BSIS Port
n,
n = 1~4 (default = no value) Enter the BSIS PCB port number.
804-01 Port Speed
, n,
n = 1. 300
2. 1200
3. 2400
4. 4800
5. 9600 (default)
6. 19200
7. 38400
8. 57600
This is the data speed of BSIS port in bits per second (bps).
Note The total combined maximum speed of BSIS ports cannot
exceed 57,600 bps.
804-02 Port Parity
, n,
n = 1. None
2. Even
3. Odd (default)
This is the parity error checking methods used by the BSIS port.
804-03 Data Bits
, n,
n = 1. 7 Bits (default)
2. 8 Bits
This is the number of data bits used for each data block.
804-04 Flow Control
, n,
n = 1. None (default)
2. Flow
This is the type of flow control used between the BSIS port and the
SMDI or SMDR device. Must be set to “FLOW” in order for the CTX to
buffer call records.
804-05 Wait Timer
, n, ,
n = 0~255
(default = 30 seconds)
Maximum time to wait for connection.
1. 0 means wait permanently
2. Timer value can be 1-255 seconds.
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt
Initialize Level 01 Press or to select the initialize level.
Level 1 – Erases programmed data and
enters default data or backed up data if a
SmartMedia Card is installed (see Note).
Level 2 – Simulates System Power Off/Power
On operation to reset hardware.
1. Initialize Level 1
2. Initialize Level 2
1:Restart with
Clear Data
2:Restart
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-97
Telephone Button
Programming
➤To access programming parameters
1. Press )% to choose Initialize Level 1 or 2.
2. Press +ROG twice to initialize.
Important! Choosing Initialize Level 1 without installing a SmartMedia Card deletes all programmed
data and returns your Strata CTX to factory default settings. All previously programmed
data is lost.
Restoring Data from SmartMedia
When initializing with Level 1 you can restore custom data that was previously programmed and stored on
a SmartMedia card. To do so, follow the steps below.
1. Install a SmartMedia card that contains the Prgdata directory with the default.dat file. The
default.dat file contains your custom settings and can be created by running Data Backup. See
“Data Backup” on page 13-105.
Important! A CTX default.dat database can only be restored to a CTX software version that is the
same or higher than the CTX software version on which the default.dat file was created.
Examples: A default.dat created on CTXR2.0 MF029 can be restored on an R2.0
MF030, MF031 and higher R2.1MG0XX, R2.2 MF0XX (XX = 01~99, but it cannot be
restored on R2.0 MF012, MF011 and lower, or R1.X ME0XX, MD0XX, etc.
2. After installing the SmartMedia card, run System Initialization using Initialize Level 1.
Restoring data from the SmartMedia card may take an hour or more. To verify completion of the restore
process access, the Programming Mode from a telephone and enter your password. If the system
enables you to continue, the data restore process is complete.
Note During the restore process, the telephone LCD may display date and time data. This does not
necessarily indicate completion of the restore process.
Display Version
This program enables you to view current software versions for the Strata CTX system and installed
options.
• Active – As the name implies, this is the current active software operating the Strata CTX system.
• Standby – This is a software version released prior to the active version. It acts as a backup in the event
problems are experienced by the Active version.
Program Number(s): 901
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
13-98 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
1. Press )% to view current Strata CTX software version. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH key to move the
display left or right.
2. Press )% to view backup Strata CTX software version.
3. Press +ROG, then +ROG to return to the PROG=prompt.
4. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.
Reading the Version Code
The figure below is an example of the Strata CTX software version code.
Figure 13-3 Version Code
•Product ID – This is the first character in the version code string. “N” designates CTX670 and “S”
CTX100.
•Country Code – “A” identifies the country (USA, Canada, Mexico).
•CTX Release Level – This string of numbers identifies the Strata CTX Release level (NA101=R1.01,
NA102=R1.02, NA103=R1.03, etc).
•CTX Software Version – This string of characters identifies the current software version. For the
example above, the software is called “M00XX, MA2XX, MA3XX, etc,” where XX is the version
number.
•DTMF Version – This three character string identifies the existence of DTMF and ABR circuits and
the version. The “D” designation indicates that DTMF is being applied to the Strata CTX while “09”
indicates the DTMF version number.
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt
Version
Number
Active
01 Display Active side software version and
installed options.
As the name implies, this is the current active
software operating the CTX system.
6~31 digits Installed Version
Version
Number
Standby
(CTX670 only).
02 Display Standby side software version and
installed options.
This is a software version released prior to
the active version. It acts as a backup in the
event problems are experienced by the
Active version.
Installed Version
NA101M00XXP1D12BXSEM.00
NA102MA2XXP1D12BXSEM.00
NA103MA3XXP1D12BXSEM.00
CTX
Software
Version
IPL
Version
CTX
Release
Level
6499
Product ID
Country
Code
Installed
Equipment ID
- Release 1.01
- Release 1.02
- Release 1.03
DTMF
Version
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-99
Telephone Button
Programming
•Installed Equipment ID – There are five characters, each referencing a unique equipment
identification value assigned to hardware installed in your Strata CTX system. If the particular
hardware is not installed a “-” displays. The following are the equipment identifier designations.
• B – BBMS is installed.
• X – BEXS is installed.
• S – BSIS is installed.
• E – The Ethernet is installed.
• M – The Modem is installed.
Set Time and Date
This program enables you to change the system clock in Strata CTX.
Program Number(s): 902
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
1. Press )% to enter current Strata CTX Date. See table above for format.
2. Press +ROG to program.
3. Press )% to enter current Strata CTX time. See table above for format.
4. Press +ROG to program.
5. Press +ROG to submit, then +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
6. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.
Event Trace Control
This program enables you to trace message events occurring in Strata CTX.
Program Number(s): 903
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: Install SmartMedia card
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt
Date 01
Enter current system date in this field.
yymmdd format
yy = current year
mm = current month
dd = current day
DATE=
Time 02
Enter the current time in this field.
hhmmss format
hh = current hour
mm = current minute
ss = current second
TIME=
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
13-100 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
1. Press )% to enable Start or Stop trace. Use the number key pad to make your selection.
2. Press +ROG.
Notes
●Start indicates the trace was previously started and is currently running.
●Stop indicates the trace is not running and all trace buffer data was transferred to SmartMedia.
3. Press )% to enter trace file size. To change the setting, use the number Dial Pad.
4. Press +ROG.
5. Press )% to set trace category. To view setting options, press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button.
6. Press +ROG twice to execute. Wait for the PROG=prompt to display before proceeding.
7. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.
Note When CTX 670 stops logging data, it automatically sends data to the SmartMedia card. A new trace
file is stored on SmartMedia under the Evnttrace directory. Run the Unmount command (Program
908) before removing the SmartMedia card to ensure complete data transfer.
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt
Trace State 01 Enter or to Start or Stop Message
Trace. Stopping the trace outputs data to
the SmartMedia card. Wait for the
prompt on the LCD before proceeding.
Before removing the SmartMedia card run
Program 908. See “Format/Unmount
SmartMedia” on page 13-103.
1:Start
2:Stop
1:START
2:STOP
Trace Size 02 Set the trace data size. Toshiba
recommends leaving this parameter at the
default setting which provides
approximately 15 minutes of trace data.
1~256 (in bytes)
1 unit = 16 bytes.
default = 2
SIZE=
Trace Category 03 Trace data type to be stored. 1:Call Processing
2:Maint and Admin
3:Both of the above
1.CP
2.M&A
3.CP+M&A (default)
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-101
Telephone Button
Programming
ISDN Trace Location
This program enables set up of ISDN protocol event trace collection conditions.
Program Number(s): 904
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
At the EQUIP= prompt enter the Shelf, Slot and Port numbers.
Notes
•Shelf, Slot and Circuit number is entered in “XXYYZZ” format where Shelf is a two digit value from
01~07 corresponding to the Strata CTX Cabinet number, Slot is a two digit value from 01~10
corresponding to the Strata CTX Cabinet’s PCB slot number and Circuit is a two digit value from
01~04 corresponding to the Strata CTX PCB Slot’s circuit number.
•Always use circuit 01 for RPTU.
1. Press )% to run a LLCI Trace. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed
options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
2. Press )% and set CCL3 Trace Level. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed
options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
3. Press )% and set L2L3 Trace Level. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed
options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
4. Press )% and set STATE Trace Level. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or
Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
5. Press )% and set ERRORS Trace Level. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or
Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
6. Press )% and set L2 Trace Level. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed
options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
7. Press +ROG to execute.
8. Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
9. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt
LLCI 01 Level of collecting LLCI values. 1:None (no
information)
2:Brief (important
information)
3:Detailled (all
information)
1:NON
2:BRIEF
3:DETAILED
Layer 3 02 Level of collecting Layer 3 messages.
Layer 2 and 3 03 Level of collecting Layer 2 and Layer 3
messages.
State Transitions 04 Level of collecting State Transitions.
Errors 05 Level of collecting errors.
Layer 2 States 06 Level of collecting Layer 2 States.
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
13-102 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
All ISDN Trunk Trace
Program start/stop of packaged detailed collection of event trace functions. This program is only available
in the telephone button programming mode.
Program Number(s): 905
Prerequisite Program: “Format/Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103, “ISDN Trace Location” on page 13-101,
“ISDN Trace Location” on page 13-101 and “Event Trace Control” on page 13-99
Reference: Install SmartMedia card
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
1. Press )%.
2. Select , or to turn on or off.
3. Press +ROG twice to execute.
4. Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
5. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.
Event Trace Side Change
This program enables you to manage your ISDN protocol trace. This program is only available in the
telephone button programming mode.
Program Number(s): 906
Prerequisite Program: “Format/Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103
Reference: Install SmartMedia card
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
1. Press )%.
2. Select , , or to select parameter.
3. Press +ROG to execute.
4. Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
5. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt
Trace All ISDN
Trunks 01 Output All ISDN Trunk Events to
SmartMedia.
1:On (default)
2:Off
1:ON
2:OFF
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt
Side Change 01
Enter desired parameter number.
1:Message
2:ISDN
3:Message+ISDN
1:MESSAGE
2:ISDN
3:MESSAGE+ISDN
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-103
Telephone Button
Programming
Note When the CTX 670 stops logging data, it automatically sends data to the SmartMedia card. Run the
Unmount command (Program 908) before removing the SmartMedia card to ensure complete data
transfer.
System Admin Log
Use this command to Start/Stop the System Admin Log.
Program Number(s): 907
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: Install SmartMedia card
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
1. Press )%. To run System Admin Log press +ROG (twice). You are sent to the PROG= prompt.
2. To Stop the log, press )% and press on the dial pad.
3. Press +ROG twice and wait for the 352*= prompt to appear before proceeding.
Note When the CTX 670 stops logging data, it automatically sends data to the SmartMedia card. Run the
Unmount command (Program 908) before removing the SmartMedia card to ensure complete data
transfer.
Format/Unmount SmartMedia
This program enables Administrators to format a SmartMedia card from Strata CTX WinAdmin or the
telephone button pad.
Note Strata CTX WinAdmin cannot view SmartMedia files directly. Additional hardware is required to
view the contents of the SmartMedia card.
Program Number(s): 908
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt
Admin Log On/Off 01 Enter or to Start or Stop Admin Log. 1:Start
2:Stop
1:START
2:STOP
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
13-104 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
.
1. Press )% to enter parameter. Enter ~ as your command choice. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to
make your selection.
2. Press +ROG to confirm and +ROG again to execute.
3. Wait for the PROG=prompt to appear before proceeding.
4. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.
Strata CTX SmartMedia Directories
Running the Normal and Forced options of this program creates five directories on the SmartMedia card as
follows:
•Admlog – The Admlog folder saves
•Errlog – System error logs are saved into this folder.
•Evnttrce – Strata CTX WinAdmin Event Trace files are saved into this folder.
•Progdata – Your Strata CTX programmed settings are all saved in this folder.
•Program – The operating software and default data of the Strata CTX is saved in this folder.
When a backup is performed, Strata CTX saves programmed data to the Progdata folder.
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt
Control 01 Choose SmartMedia card formatting method:
Normal – creates any Strata CTX SmartMedia
directory that does not exist already. Exiting
directories are not overwritten by this procedure.
Forced – erases any existing directories and files.
All existing data is overwritten. See Strata CTX
SmartMedia Directories for more information.
Unmount – writes data into SmartMedia Card.
Always run unmount before removing the
SmartMedia card to prevent damage to the card.
Transfer – writes data from static RAM to
SmartMedia Card.
1:Normal
2:Forced
3:Unmount
4:Transfer
1:NORMAL
2:FORCED
3:UNMOUNT
4:TRANSFER
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-105
Telephone Button
Programming
MAC Address (System Serial Number)
This program enables you to display your CTX 670 System Serial Number.
Program Number(s): 909
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
1. Press )% to view parameter. The MAC Address is view only and cannot be changed.
2. Press +ROG (twice) to exit to the 352*= prompt.
3. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.
Data Backup
This program enables you to Back up system data to a SmartMedia card.
Program Number(s): 910
Prerequisite Program: “Format/Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt
MAC Address 01 Display System Serial Number. 12 digits MAC Address
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt
Backup Function 01 Start and Stop system backup.
Note Restore function is not operational
and should never be executed.
Use System Initialize (Program
900) Level 1 to restore system
backup.
1:Backup
2:Restore (Do not
use. See Note on
left).
3:Cancel
1:BACKUP
2:RESTORE
3:CANCEL
Numbers 02 The number of data blocks. This number
varies depending on the amount of
programming the system contains.
Variable ALL NO=
Current Number 03 This number increments as the backup
progresses. When the backup is complete
this number should match the total number
of data blocks displayed in Numbers
()%).
Variable CUR NO=
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
13-106 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Note Before running this program, make sure the SmartMedia card is properly formatted. See “Format/
Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103 for more details.
1. Press )% to enter your Backup choice. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view your selection
options.
2. Press . )% and )% should blink green.
3. Press +ROG to execute. Press +ROG again to Cancel. This program stops running if you exit
programming mode from your telephone.
➤To view Backup progress
1. While the program is running ()% and )% blink green), press )% to view the total number of
files to be transferred.
2. Press )% to view the current file number that is being transferred.
3. The Backup is complete when )% blinks intermittently.
4. To verify success, push )%. Your telephone LCD should indicate *1.ALL_OK.
5. Press +ROG to exit.
Note Do not press the +ROG button. Pressing the +ROG button restarts the Backup procedure.
To Restore data from the SmartMedia card to Strata CTX, see “System Initialize” on page 13-96.
Program Update
This program enables you to update the Strata CTX programs.
Program Number(s): 911
Prerequisite Program: Format SmartMedia Card
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
Backup State 04 All_Ok – Backup completed with no errors.
Partial_Ok – Backup has completed with
errors.
NG – Backup has failed.
Cancel – Cancel Backup.
Importing – Program data is being
restored.
Exporting – Program data is being sent out.
1:normal end all
2:normal end part
3:abnormal end
4:cancel
5:importing
6:exporting
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt
Update Function 01 Enter 1 or 2 to identify the type of Update
intended.
Select 3 to cancel a running update.
1:Update
2:Reboot
3:Cancel
1:Update
2:Reboot
3:Cancel
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-107
Telephone Button
Programming
Note Before running this program, make sure the SmartMedia card is properly formatted. See “Format/
Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103 for more details.
1. Press )% to enter your Backup choice. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view your selection
options.
2. Press . )% and )% should blink green.
3. Press +ROG to execute. Press +ROG again to Cancel. This program stops running if you exit
programming mode from your telephone.
Make Busy Control
When an error occurs in hardware resources used for a station or a line fails, this feature makes them busy.
The station or line PCB can be disabled temporarily to perform maintenance or parts replacements as well.
This program is only available in the telephone button programming mode.
Program Number(s): 912
Prerequisite Program: Format SmartMedia Card
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
At the CABINET= prompt enter the Shelf number.
Total Blocks 02 View total blocks to be updated (total blocks
will vary depending on software versions). 0~65536 (CTX670)
0~128 (CTX100)
default = 0
n/a
Copied Blocks 03 View number of blocks copied. 0~65536 (CTX670)
0~128 (CTX100)
default = 0
n/a
Active Side Status 04 Backup Type Display 1:Normal
2:Trial
3:Fault
4:Don’t Care
5:Error
1:Normal
2:Trial
3:Fault
4:Don’t Care
5:Error
Stand by Side Status 05 Stand by Backup Type 1:Normal
2:Trial
3:Fault
4:Don’t Care
5:Error
1:Normal
2:Trial
3:Fault
4:Don’t Care
5:Error
Active Side Number 06 Active Side Number. 0 or 1
default = 0 ACT SIDE=
Status 07 View Backup Status. 1:Idle
2:Running
3:Success
4:Error
1:Idle
2:Running
3:Success
4:Error
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
13-108 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Note The Shelf number is entered in “XX” format where Shelf is a two digit value from 01~07
corresponding to the Strata CTX Cabinet number. See “Program Button LEDs” below for a
description of the LED display.
1. Press )%~)% to enter your Make Busy selection for the appropriate Slot in the Cabinet entered in
Access Sequence above.
Note The slot to which your programming phone is connected can not be set to Make Busy.
2. Press +ROG to execute.
3. Press +ROG again to return to CABINET= prompt.
4. Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
5. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.
Program Button LEDs
The LED blink pattern indicates the following:
• Red continuous blinking – PCB experienced a Make Busy status error.
• Red continuous illumination – PCB Make Busy Status mode is on.
• Green continuous blinking – PCB Make Busy Status mode is stand by.
• Green intermittent blinking – PCB Make Busy Status mode is idle.
FB Name FB Summary Value
Equipment 00 Enter Cabinet Number 01~07 (value=xx)
Slot #1 01
Enter or
1: Set make busy
2: Clear make busy
Slot #2 02
Slot #3 03
Slot #4 04
Slot #5 05
Slot #6 06
Slot #7 07
Slot #8 08
Slot #9 09
Slot #10 10
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 13-109
Regional Selection
Set Operating region for your Strata CTX. This assignment sets built-in core LSI hardware parameters that
are not changeable with jumpers or switches. These parameters must be set unique for each country and
affect system operation.
Program Number(s): 915
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
1. Press )%. Enter ~. Press +ROG.
2. Press +ROG (twice).
3. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt
Region 01 Set region number. 0~2 are valid entries for
North American Operations.
0~31 (USA = 0,
Canada = 1, and
Mexico = 2).
REGION=
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
13-110 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
IP Configuration
This program enables you to set up Network Communication Protocols.
Program Number(s): 916
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter  and press +ROG.
Notes
•The LCD only displays three of the twelve IP address digits at a time. Press the 6SNU button to view
the remaining digits.
•The IP Address is the static IP address of the Strata CTX processor NIC/Ethernet connection only. The
PPP IP address for the Strata CTX processor modem is always 192.168.255.254 and cannot be
changed.
1. Press )% to view the current TCP/IP Address 1 (press )% to view the current Subnet Mask
Address 1, or press )% to view Default Gateway Address 1).
Press +ROG.
2. Enter first IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 3.
3. Press 6SNU button and enter second IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 4.
4. Press 6SNU button and enter third IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 5.
5. Press 6SNU button and enter fourth IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 6.
6. Press +ROG.
7. Press )% to configure the remaining parameters.
8. Press +ROG.
9. After all parameters are entered press +ROG to submit the new settings.
10.You are automatically returned to the PROG= prompt.
11.Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.
FB Name FB Summary Value
IP Address 01 Enter IP Address 1.
192 = First IP Address Octet
168 = Second IP Address Octet
254 = Third IP Address Octet
253 = Fourth IP Address Octet
0~255
default = 
Subnet Mask 02 Enter Subnet Mask Address 1. 0~255
default = 
Default Gateway 03 Enter Default Gateway 1. 0~255
default = 
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 14-1
Maintenance
Maintenance 14
This chapter provides Strata CTX maintenance procedures that can be activated from the programming
telephone. For SmartMedia, refer to “Format/Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103.
Data Backup
1. Format the SmartMedia using “Format/Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103 (Program 908).
2. Insert the formatted SmartMedia into Strata CTX.
3. Backup data using “Data Backup” on page 13-105 (Program 910). LED indicators should show the
following:
•)%~)% solid red light.
•)% intermittent green.
4. Press )% and choose Backup by pressing on the telephone button pad.
CAUTION! Never use Restore (2). It is not valid for current versions of CTX software and could
result in corrupt databases and system mis-operation.
5. Press +ROG. Backup for programmed data starts. The LED indicator )% consistently blinks green
during back up. After back up is complete, )% will flash inconsistently slower.
CAUTION! Do not press +ROG while Backup is being performed.
6. Press +ROG twice to exit programming.
Backup Progress and Completion Indicators
You can monitor Backup progress by pressing the )% or )% buttons as follows. See “Data Backup”
on page 13-105 for more details.
• If the value displayed in the LCD is increasing each time )% is pressed, the Backup is proceeding
successfully.
• When the value displayed in the LCD for )% and )% are the same, the Backup process is
complete.
•When the )% LED returns to an intermittent green, Backup is complete.
•Press
)%to verify Backup is completed. If the LCD displays *1:ALL_OK the Backup was successful.
Maintenance
Restoring Programmed Data
14-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Restoring Programmed Data
To restore data from a Backup performed onto SmartMedia, follow the directions below:
1. Insert the SmartMedia card that has the system’s default.dat file (under the PROGDATA folder) into the
Strata CTX SmartMedia slot.
2. Run Program 900 “System Initialize” on page 13-96, Level 1 (ALL DATA CLEAR). See programming
steps below.
Restoring data takes anywhere from 10 minutes to one hour for completion, depending on the size of
the database (default.dat file).
3. When the programming telephone LCD becomes active, enter the programming mode and enter your
password.
Restore is complete if the system accepts the password and enables you to enter programming mode.
4. Remove the SmartMedia card and restart the CTX again after restoring system data. This is necessary
to reset BIBU-M, BIPU-Q, QSIG, ISDN and other advanced features.
Local Update
The following procedures are required for both systems Local Update, i.e; Strata CTX100 and CTX670.
Prerequisites for CTX100 and CTX670 Local Update
The following are the prerequisites for Local Update:
• The SmartMedia card must be installed in the system with a Backup of the current database
(default.dat) file.
• Activation of the new software requires a Clear-reboot operation that will drop all existing calls and
will take the system out of service from 10 minutes to an hour or more, depending on the system size.
• Requires a different system software Update file (provided on the Toshiba FYI site), depending on the
type of CTX system and the type of Update that will be performed.
CTX Software Update Files
Each Strata CTX system type has two Software Update files: one for CTX WinAdmin Remote Update and
another file for Local Update (to use with the Programming Telephone procedure).
CAUTION! Using the wrong file in either case will cause the Update to fail.
CTX Software Identification
Refer to the table below to identify CTX software release and builds in software file names or when
verifying CTX software versions.
CTX Release Software ID
R1.00 and R1.01 = M01nn
R1.02 = MA2nn
R1.03 = MA3nn
R1.3 = ME0nn
R2.0 = MF0nn
R2.1 = MG0nn
nn = Software build level/number
Maintenance
Local Update
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 14-3
Maintenance
Step 1: Download and Extract CTX Software
The latest released version of CTX system software Update files are posted on the Toshiba FYI site
http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com. To download the software files, follow the procedure below.
Step 1A: To Download CTX System Software Files from FYI
1. From the Toshiba FYI website, click on Technical Services > Software (Strata Systems). The files are
located under the heading “CTX System Software.”
2. Double-click the appropriate link.
CTX100 System Software: CTX100 MXnnn Software (Local Update)
CTX670 System Software: CTX670 MXnnn Software (Local Update)
3. When the Toshiba Software License Agreement screen displays, click the Agree button. The File
Download dialog box displays.
4. Select the “Save this program to disk” radio button, then click OK. The Save As screen displays.
5. Save the file to an appropriately named folder that identifies the system type and software version, then
click Save.
Step 1B: Extract Downloaded Files
1. After the file download is complete, select the Open or Open Folder button on the Download Complete
screen to extract/open the files now, or select the Close button to extract the files later.
Notes
●The WinZip Self-Extractor screen displays if you selected the Open or Open Folder button.
●If you selected Close, double-clicking the .exe file later will bring up the WinZip Self-Extractor
screen.
These files are the self extracting .exe files:
• CTX100_L_MXnnn.exe (for CTX100 Local Update file)
• CTX670_L_MXnnn.exe (for CTX670 Local Update file)
2. In the “Unzip to folder:” field, make sure the path leads to the correct folder as shown below. If the path
is incorrect, click the Browse button to navigate to the appropriate path, then click the Unzip button.
3. Verify the unzip folder path for Local Update: SmartMedia Drive:\PROGRAM
4. Verify the unzipped files or folders for Local Update of the Strata CTX100 and CTX670 the file name
is the same “nhs.prg”.
The files can also be extracted to a temporary folder and the copied to the appropriate SmartMedia
PROGRAM folder or CTX WinAdmin Upload folder. The extracted (decompressed) files will be
approximately 15MB.
Maintenance
Local Update
14-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
Step 2: Choose Strata CTX100 or CTX670 for Local Update
Choose one of the following:
• Strata CTX100 Local Update
• Strata CTX670 Local Update
Strata CTX100 Local Update
The Update process is used to change the Strata CTX software version and restore programmed data. The
new software is first loaded on the SmartMedia card. It is then transferred to the Strata CTX100 processor
flash RAM. The Strata CTX100 programmed data is then restored.
Step 1: Prepare SmartMedia Card with Backup of Customer Database
This SmartMedia card will contain a back up of the Strata CTX programmed data (default.dat).
1. Insert a SmartMedia card into the CTX, format it, and then back up the customer database onto the
SmartMedia card using the Backup Data procedure (see the “Data Backup” on page 14-1).
This operation writes the default.dat file under the PROGDATA directory to the SmartMedia card.
2. Remove the SmartMedia card from the CTX and physically label it “Strata CTX Backup data.”
Step 2: Prepare SmartMedia Card with a Copy of New CTX Software
This SmartMedia card will contain the new Strata CTX software file (nhs.prg) used to Update the system
software:
1. Obtain the Strata CTX operating software file (nhs.prg) from Toshiba FYI and store it on an
appropriately named folder on your PC – see the Download and Extract CTX Software procedure on
page 1.
2. Insert a SmartMedia card into Strata CTX processor SmartMedia socket and activate the Forced Format
command using Program 908; then Unmount SmartMedia using Program 908.
3. Remove the formatted SmartMedia card from the CTX and Install the SmartMedia card into a PC
SmartMedia reader/writer.
4. Copy the new Strata CTX software file named “nhs.prg” into SmartMedia card PROGRAM folder.
Note It is not necessary to create a SmartMedia Card Volume label for CTX100 Update. However, if you
create a volume label, do not use PRGUPDATE, PRGRESCUE0, or PRGRESCUE01 as volume
labels.
5. Pull out the SmartMedia card and physically label it “CTX100, MXnnn” or whatever software version
you are updating to.
Note After completing Steps 1 and 2 above you should have two SmartMedia cards:
•One card containing the CTX backed up database file: PROGDATA\default.dat
•One card containing the CTX software update file: PROGRAM\nhs.prg
Maintenance
Local Update
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 14-5
Maintenance
Step 3: Update CTX100 Software
CAUTION! This operation will take the system out of service for 10 minutes to an hour or more
depending on the CTX database.
1. Insert the SmartMedia card containing PROGRAM\nhs.prg file into the Strata CTX processor
SmartMedia socket.
2. From the programming telephone enter Program 911, and press +ROG. Press )% and dial
(UPDATE) and then press +ROG.
CAUTION! Pressing +ROGtwice will cause the Update to fail
After a short pause the Strata CTX will begin to upload the software from the SmartMedia card to the
processor flash RAM causing the following:
• If FB07-LED is flashing green, it indicates that the Update process is in progress.
• If FB07-LED is flashing red, it indicates an error. This could be caused by a corrupt or incorrect
nhs.prg file or a defective SmartMedia card. Make sure the file is a CTX100 nhs.prg file and not
CTX670 file.
• You can now check the Update progress using FB02 (Total) and FB03 (Copied) to view data block
status. Periodically switch between FB02 and FB03 to view the data blocks.
• When all the data blocks are copied, the Strata CTX stops normal processing and all telephone
LCDs go blank.
•The processor Heartbeat LED is on steady red.
•The processor SmartMedia LED turns on flashing rapidly at first, then flashes slowly and finally
stops flashing.
•The above will last about five to 10 minutes.
•When the Update is complete the system begins to operate normally with default data.
3. Use Program 901 to check that the new software version of CTX software has been loaded. If you
cannot enter the Program Mode the new software may still be loading.
4. Remove the SmartMedia card (which contains PROGRAM/nhs.prg file) from the CTX processor.
Step 4: Restart and Restore Strata CTX100 Backup Data
1. Insert the SmartMedia labeled “Strata CTX Backup data” which you previously made at the start of this
procedure. This card contains PROGDATA/default.dat file.
2. From the programming telephone enter Program 900. Press )% and dial (ALL DATA CLEAR)
and then press +ROG (twice). The Strata CTX will restart (initialize) on the new software and restore the
backed up program data. The time required for this operation will vary from a few minutes to 30
minutes or more depending on the size of the database.
Step 5: Confirm Software is Updated and Backup Data is Restored
1. When the telephone LCDs display and system dial tone is available, try to log in to the Programming
Mode from digital telephone. (If Update/Restore is finished, you can log in).
2. From the programming telephone check the Strata CTX version number using Program 901.
Maintenance
Local Update
14-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
3. Turn the CTX100 power off for 5 seconds and then back on to reset QISG, ISDN and other advanced
features.
4. Test the system to verify that the new software is running properly by checking dial tone, making
incoming and outgoing calls, internal and external calls and all other peripherals, such as voice mail,
etc., are working correctly.
5. Toshiba recommends that the SmartMedia card containing the customer data remains installed on the
CTX processor. This enables you to make and back up changes using CTX WinAdmin remotely.
Important! It is your responsibility to verify the system is working correctly after local Update is
complete.
Strata CTX670 Local Update
The Update process is used to change the Strata CTX software version and restore programmed data. The
new software is first copied from the SmartMedia card to the standby side of the Strata CTX670 processor
flash RAM. Then the new software on the Standby flash RAM is switched to the active mode and the
original software is switched to the Standby mode for a trial run.
After swapping the software version making the new software “Active,” the Strata CTX restores the
programmed data. If the system functions properly, the trial operation can be set to normal operation; if
there are problems you can switch the original software back to Active.
A CTX default.dat database can only be restored to a CTX software version that is the same or higher
than the CTX software version on which the default.dat file was created.
Examples:
• A default.dat created on CTXR2.0 MF013 can be restored on an R2.0 MF013, MF014 and higher.
• R2.2 MF0XX, R2.1MG0XX (XX = 01~99), cannot be restored on R2.0 MF012, MF011 and lower, or
R1.X ME0XX, MD0XX, etc.
Step 1: Prepare SmartMedia Card with a Backup of the Customer Database
This SmartMedia card will contain a Backup of the Strata CTX programmed data (default.dat).
1. Insert a SmartMedia card into the CTX, format it, and then back up the customer database onto the
SmartMedia card using the Backup Data procedure (see “Data Backup” on page 14-1).
This operation writes the default.dat file under the PROGDATA directory to the SmartMedia card.
2. Remove the SmartMedia card from the CTX and physically label it “Strata CTX Backup data.”
Step 2: Prepare SmartMedia Card with a Copy of the New CTX Software
This SmartMedia card will contain the new Strata CTX software file (nhs.prg) used to Update the system
software.
1. Obtain the Strata CTX operating software file (nhs.prg) from Toshiba FYI and store it on an
appropriately named folder on your PC – see “Download and Extract CTX Software” on page 14-3.
2. Insert a SmartMedia card into Strata CTX processor SmartMedia socket and activate the Forced Format
command using Program 908; then Unmount SmartMedia using Program 908.
3. Remove the formatted SmartMedia card from the CTX and install the SmartMedia card into a PC
SmartMedia reader/writer.
4. Copy the new Strata CTX software file named “nhs.prg” into SmartMedia card PROGRAM folder.
5. Create a SmartMedia Card Volume label “PRGUPDATE” on CTX670 Update SmartMedia card as
shown:
Maintenance
Local Update
Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03 14-7
Maintenance
• Select and right mouse click the appropriate SmartMedia drive, for example, drive E or G in some
computers.
• Click Properties.
• Under General tab, in the Label field enter label name (in this case PRGUPDATE).
6. Pull out the SmartMedia card and physically label it “CTX670, MXnnn” or whatever software version
you are updating to.
Note After completing Steps 1 and 2 above you should have two SmartMedia cards:
•One card containing the CTX backed up database file: PROGDATA\default.dat
•One card having the volume label “PRGUPDATE” and containing the CTX software Update
file: PROGRAM\nhs.prg
Step 3: Update CTX670 software
1. Insert the SmartMedia card containing PROGRAM\nhs.prg file into the Strata CTX processor
SmartMedia socket.
2. From the programming telephone enter Program 911, and press +ROG. Press )% and dial
(UPDATE) and then press +ROGonce. Pressing +ROGtwice will cause the Update to fail. This will not
interrupt the CTX system operation.
• If FB07-LED is flashing green, it indicates that the Update process is in progress.
• If FB07-LED is flashing red, it indicates an error. This could be caused by a corrupt or incorrect
nhs.prg file or a defective SmartMedia card. Make sure it is a CTX670 nhs.prg file and not a
CTX100 file.
• You can now check the Update progress using FB02 (Total) and FB03 (Copied) to view data block
status. Periodically switch between FB02 and FB03 to view the data blocks.
• When FB07-LED is solid green with periodic short blinks, it indicates the first part of Update
completed successfully (2 to 10 minutes).
3. After FB07 is on solid green with a periodic wink, press +ROG, while in Program 911. Press )% and
dial (TRIAL) and then press +ROG. This will change the status of the Standby Flash Memory to trial.
4. Pull out the SmartMedia card labeled PRGUPDATE (which includes PROGRAM/nhs.prg file).
5. Insert the SmartMedia CARD labeled “Strata CTX Backup data” into processor/ SmartMedia socket.
The SmartMedia LED on the processor begins to blink.
The “Strata CTX Backup data” SmartMedia card is the card you previously made that includes the
Strata CTX programmed data in the default.dat file under the PROGDATA folder. If this is not done
before starting Clear-reboot, all programmed data will be lost.
The next operation will take the system out of service for 10 minute to an hour depending on the size of
the CTX database.
6. From the programming telephone enter Program 911 and press +ROG; Press )% and dial
(CLRREBOOT) and then press +ROG. This will Clear-reboot the system to switch the new software
version from standby to active and restore Backup data.
CAUTION! This operation will take the system out of service for 10 minutes to an hour or more
depending on the CTX database. Do not skip any steps or Update will fail.
Notes
Maintenance
Trace Function
14-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03
●If CLRREBOOT is activated without the Backup data SmartMedia card installed, the active and
standby software is swapped and the system default program data is restored.
●The Strata CTX processor heartbeat LED stops flashing and all telephones become inactive. After
a few minutes the Strata CTX initializes and starts up with new version of software as active and
the original software as standby, and then restores the backed up program data from the
SmartMedia card default.dat file (the processor SmartMedia LED flashes while it restores the
program data to the processor RAM).
●After CLRREBOOT has completed the new version of CTX System software will be active in
Trial mode.
●If system power is turned off/on while the Active side of flash memory is in the Trial mode, the
original software switches back to active and the new software will switch back to Standby. This is
to provide an automatic method of switching back to the original software version if the new
version is causing problems.
7. Confirm that the software is updated and the Backup data is restored by verifying/doing the following:
• Make sure the processor SmartMedia LED is off.
• Log in to Programming Mode from a digital telephone. If you cannot log in, it means the data
restore process is not completed.
• From the programming telephone, in Program 901 make sure that the new Strata CTX system
software version number is on the active side. FB01 shows the new system software version number
on the active side, and FB02 shows the original software version number on standby side.
8. Set the Active side of flash RAM from “Trial” to “Normal” as follows:
• From the programming telephone, enter Program 911 and press +ROG. Press )% and dial
(NORMAL), then press +ROG. The new software is on the active side running in Normal mode.
• If Strata CTX power is turned off/on before the Active side is switched to “Normal”, the Strata CTX
will automatically perform a CLRREBOOT and make the old software active.
Note The active side switches from “Trial” to “Normal” automatically after 24 hours if it is not done
manually using Program 911.
9. Remove the SmartMedia card and turn the CTX670 power off for 5 seconds and then back on to reset
BIPU-M, BIPU-Q, QISG, ISDN and other advanced features.
10.Test the system to verify that the new software is running properly by checking dial tone, making
incoming and outgoing calls, internal and external calls and all other peripherals, such as voice mail,
etc., are working correctly.
11.Toshiba recommends that the SmartMedia card containing the customer data remains installed on the
CTX processor. This enables you to make and Backup changes using CTX WinAdmin remotely.
Important! It is your responsibility to verify the system is working correctly after local Update is
complete.
Trace Function
To analyze Strata CTX problems efficiently, Toshiba needs to get the event trace data and ISDN trace data.
These data sets enable analysis of the problems Strata CTX may experience. It is helpful for
troubleshooting problems that are difficult to duplicate.
Please contact Toshiba Technical Support to coordinate the running of the trace procedures. Technical
Support will walk you through the required steps.
726+,%$ Telecommunication Systems Division
November 2003
Part 4: Appendices
Digital Business Telephone Systems
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 A-1
Applications, Tips and
Tricks
Applications, Tips and Tricks A
Voice Mail Set Up
The following steps/program sequences are provided as a guideline to programming System Voice Mail
settings.
Note Enter programming mode before step 1. Refer to “Enter Program Mode” on page 13-7. Press +ROG
each time you want to save your settings and press  before you move to the next step.
Analog Ports
1. Program 100 “Card Slot Assignment” on page 13-11. Assign the PCB for Voice Mail ports (RSTU).
2. Program 200 “Station Data” on page 13-28. Verify FB1~FB4.
• FB03 Circuit Type – Assigns Voice Mail to be assigned to PDNs associated with Voice Mail RSTU
circuits.
• FB15 Display DN – DN to be displayed and assigned to Hunt Group. Manually assign DNs and
equipment.
3. Program 209 “Station Hunting Group” on page 13-46. Voice Mail Group is determined by the Hunt
Group.
4. Program 218 “Station Hunt Group Assignment” on page 13-50.
5. Program 579 “System Voice Mail Data” on page 13-89. Complete FB01~FB17.
Notes
●FB10 Central Message Callback – Enter the node ID and hunt group for voice mail. Used for
centralized voice mail SMDI only.
●DTMF – Message Waiting Call Back DN across QSIG TIE lines. DTMF integration uses the number
that displays in Program 200, field 15.
6. Program 580 “Voice Mail Port Data” on page 13-90. This is the collection of all ports.
7. Program 803 “IO Logical Device Assignment” on page 13-94. You can add members to the hunt group.
Assign BSIS RS-232 port for SMDI.
Note System only provides Code 300 for SMDI. Code 301 is not supported.
8. Program 804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port setup.
9. Program 309 “Direct Inward Dialing” on page 13-59.
• FB11 DNIS VMID Code
• FB15 DID/DNIS Number DTMF VMID
10.Program 318 “DID Intercept Assignment” on page 13-67.
• FB11 VMID for DNIS Number
• FB15 DID/DNIS Number DTMF VMID
Applications, Tips and Tricks
Voice Mail Set Up
A-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Digital Ports
1. Program the following initial settings:
•Program 100 – Set cabinet slot PCB type to “BDKU/BDKS 16 DKTs without Spkr OCA”.
•Program 200 – Assign stations to the slot and assign as voice mail. For example, 200~215 (for 16
ports). Set “Display DN” as the pilot number of the Voice Mail Hunt Group. This value should be
the same as “Number to Display” in Program 209.
•Program 204 – Change station’s parameters to Tone First, Adapter: BPCI. Set “Continuous DTMF”
to “Not Continuous.” Copy the changes to all voice mail stations.
2. Install and program serial card BSIS in the Strata CTX.
Note TPI is required for iES32. A BSIS card must be installed in the Strata CTX.
3. Install a serial cable between the BSIS card and the Stratagy (see CTX wiring diagrams in Strata CTX
Installation and Maintenance Manual, Peripheral Installation chapter).
4. Specify CTX BSIS output port # and set the port type to be “300 SMDI #0” and “RS-232”.
5. Set the port attributes to:
•Baud rate: 9600
•Data Bits: 8
•Parity: none
•Flow control: 1
•Wait timer: 0
Note Refer to Programs 803, 804, 579 and 580.
6. Program 579 “System Voice Mail Data” on page 13-89. Complete FB01~FB17.
7. Program 580 – Set all CTX voice mail ports as SMDI integration.
8. Program Station Hunting Programs 209 and 218
Telephone Station Ports
1. Program 200 Station Data.
• FB19 VMID Code SMDI – Voice Mail ID number to send in SMDI and DTMF in-band integration
for forwarded and direct calls.
• FB22 MW to VM Port – Message Waiting center DN.
2. Program 579 System Voice Mail Data.
• Complete 11~15. See “Program 579” on page 13-89.
3. Program 204 DKT Parameters.
• FB23 Mailbox Selection – Used for the Voice Recording Feature. Uses the VM ID from Program
200 if set to Auto or allows the user to enter any valid mailbox on Stratagy followed by .
4. Program 206 Phantom DN.
• FB06 VM ID Code – Voice Mail ID number to send in SMDI and DTMF in-band integration for
forwarded and direct calls.
• FB09 Message Center – Message Waiting center DN.
Applications, Tips and Tricks
Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 A-3
Applications, Tips and
Tricks
Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems
More than one voice mail system can be connected to one network node and one or more voice mail
systems can be connected to multiple nodes. Access, integration and message waiting are controlled on a
call-by-call basis according to parameters assigned to individual extensions. There is nothing to prevent a
single DKT from having access to four voice mail systems, each connected to a remote node.
The Primary DN and three PhDNs are each programmed with independent voice mail destinations, Voice
Mail IDs and Record and Playback codes. Figure A-1 is an example for networking multiple voice mail
systems to enable Soft keys. A similar set up can be used for enabling other voice mail features.
Figure A-1 Voice Mail Networking
Call Record and Soft Keys
A station can record conversations with another station or external line in a specific mail box in Voice Mail
(VM) using the Record function button. You can replay the recorded conversation using the Message
Waiting button or using the voice mail menu.
Networking for Call Record and Soft Keys is available only with WinAdmin Release 1.3 and higher
software and with CTX software 1.2 MD series or higher. You must have a Stratagy ES/IES R4 or higher.
Step 1: Set up Station Message Desk Interface (SMDI) for Local and Remote CTXs
1. From the Program menu, select System > I/O Device. Program 803 – SMDR SMDI CTI Port
Assignments screen displays.
2. Enter/Select the following:
• FB00 Logical Device No. = select 300 SMDI #0.
• FB01 Device Connection = LAN.
•Device Port No. = 1~9.
3. Click LAN Device tab. Program 801 Network Jack Lan Device Assignments screen displays.
4. Enter the LAN data:
• 00 LAN Port No. = 1~9
• 01 Protocol = TCP
VM
LAN
QSIG (RPTU)
Speech, VM-ID
QSIG (RPTU)
Speech, VM-ID
SoftKey
Operation
SoftKey
Operation
LAN
LAN
SMDI+
RS232C
SMDI+
SMDI+
SMDI
STU I/F
(speech path)
6579
Strata CTX
Strata CTX
Strata CTX
Applications, Tips and Tricks
Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems
A-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
• 02 PC Operation Type = Client
• 03 Data Flow = Asynchronization
• 04 Service Port No. = 0 (default)
• 05~08 Client IP 1-4 No. = 192.168.254.250
• 09 Client Port No. = 5000
• Client IP No. = Stratagy IP Address
• 10 Read Retry No. = 1
• 11 Write Retry No. = 1.
5. Click Submit.
Step 2: Set up Remote CTX
1. From the Program menu, select Services > Voice Mail > Voice Mail Port Data. Program 580 – VM Port
Data displays.
2. Enter the appropriate fields. Refer to “580 Voice Mail Port Data” on page 9-4.
3. Select Station > Assignment. Program 200 – Station Data screen displays.
4. Enter the Prime DN. For Call Record, enter the Node ID and Pilot number of the local CTX (where the
voice mail is located).
5. In FB22 – MW to VM Port, enter the local CTX IP address for call recording. For Remote CTXs,
assign message center including Node IP for TPI integration. This parameter enables Call Record
function too.
Note Refer to “Voice Mail Set Up” on page A-1 for regular voice mail set up.
Step 3: Set up QSIG Between All Nodes
Use the following programs to set up QSIG:
1. “304 Incoming Line Group Assignment” on page 6-2.
2. “306 Outgoing Line Groups” on page 6-4.
3. “302 PRI and IP QSIG” on page 6-25
4. “102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3
5. “651 Private Routing Plan Analysis” on page 9-56
6. “653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment” on page 9-57
7. “654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment” on page 9-57
8. “655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment” on page 9-57
9. “656 Node ID Assignment” on page 9-54
For all other voice mail set up steps refer to “Voice Mail Set Up” on page A-1.
Applications, Tips and Tricks
Strata CTX BRI Video Conferencing Programming
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 A-5
Applications, Tips and
Tricks
Strata CTX BRI Video Conferencing Programming
The table below shows the programs required to program a PRI line to ring to a RBSU interface to allow
for Video Conferencing capabilities.
The following may differ in your system: card slot assignments, trunk groups, channel groups and BRI
station numbers.
The following program changes are required once the system has been installed and initialized.
Programs Description
Program 100 Card Assignment
105=RPTU and 107=RBSU S/T Interface with each two TIE’s
Program 105 System Data
Primary Clock, FB21=RPTU card slot, 10501
Program 304 Incoming Line Groups
ILG=1, FB1=ISDN, FB2=CO, FB3=DID, FB4=Standard
Program 306 Outgoing Line Groups
OLG=1, FB1=ISDN, FB2=CO/DID, FB3=Standard
Program 309 Direct Inward Dialing
ILG=1, FB1=3000, FB5 through FB10=Dialing Digits with Destination Digits 3000
Program 302 PRI Trunks
Channel Group=1, FB1=010501, FB2=Nat’l ISDN, FB3=1, FB4=1, FB7=24,
FB 8=Enable, FB9=Enable, FB11=Enable, FB12=Enable, FB19=Enable
Program 320 “B” Channels
FB00=010501, FB1 through FB23=Enable
Program 202 ISDN BRI Station
Prime DN=3000, FB1=010701, FB2=2, FB3=Nat’l ISDN, FB4=Point to Multi-Point,
FB13=Enable, FB14=Enable
Prime DN=3001, FB1=010702, FB2=3, FB3=Nat’l ISDN, FB4=Point to Multi-Point,
FB13=Enable, FB14=Enable
Prime DN=3002, FB1=010703, FB2=4, FB3=Nat’l ISDN, FB4=Point to Multi-Point,
FB13=Enable, FB14=Enable
Prime DN=3003, FB1=010704, FB2=5, FB3=Nat’l ISDN, FB4=Point to Multi-Point,
FB13=Enable, FB14=Enable
Note FB2 must be a different channel group for each BRI station and cannot
conflict with PRI channel group.
Applications, Tips and Tricks
CTX IP Telephone Programming Guidelines
A-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
CTX IP Telephone Programming Guidelines
Use the following guidelines to program your CTX IP Telephone.
Basic CTX IP Setup Using WinAdmin
1. Select System > Card Assignments (Program 100) to set the BIPU-M PCBs in the appropriate slots.
BIPU-M card can only be installed in 16 channel card slots:
CTX100 slots 1~8; CTX670 Base slots 1~8; and CTX670 Expansion slots 1~6
Note If the CTX is initialized (Program 900-01) after the BIPU-M is installed, the CTX assigns the BIPU-
M, code 021, to the appropriate card slots automatically.
2. Select IP Telephone > BIPU Configuration (Program151) to set BIPU-M IP address (check with the
Network Administrator for IP Address, subnet mask, etc.). The BIPU version number will be displayed
when the BIPU is operating and is connected on the same network as WinAdmin PC.
Note If the CTX is initialized (Program 900-01) after the BIPU-M is installed, the CTX assigns the BIPU-
M default parameters as shown in Table 1-6 on page 1-5.
3. Select Station > Assignments > Basic to assign PDNs to IP telephones (BIPU equipment numbers) if
this was not done during CTX system initialization. The WinAdmin PDN Range wizard can also be
used to assign PDNs to the BIPU channels.
Note Currently IPT PDNs are listed as DKT, they will be listed as IPT in a future version of WinAdmin.
IP telephones are programmed exactly like DKTs, so any Program command used for DKTs can be
used for IPTs.
4. Select IP Telephone > Station IP Data (Program 250). Set “05 Station Terminal Authentication Mode”
to apply if the PDN assigned to a particular IP Telephone should be linked (reserved for) to that
telephone’s MAC address. Each telephone has a unique hard coded MAC address. This prevents other
IP telephones from using the reserved PDN when an IP telephone is moved.
Note If IPT Authentication is applied/not applied in Program 250-05, it will override the IPT
Authentication setting in Program 150-02.
5. If multiple CTX systems with BIPU-Ms are connected to the IP network, Select IP Telephone > System
IP Data (Program 150), and set “09 IP CTX Identifier.”
Enter a CTX Node identifier if more than one CTX Node is on the IP Network. This can be the same as
the QSIG Network Node ID used for this system if it is in a CTX QSIG. Network - but the two IDs are
not related in software logic.
This ID must match the Node number programmed in the IP telephone using 369Hold-2, FB06 6.
6. Run all other CTX programs necessary to customize the features required for each IP Telephone. All
programs used to program Digital Telephones also apply to IP Telephones (Program 205 keystrips, 213
Add-on-Modules, Program 204 DKT Parameters, etc.).
Applications, Tips and Tricks
IPT1020-SD Telephone Network Settings
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 A-7
Applications, Tips and
Tricks
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection setup
1. Install the IP telephones using instructions in the IPT chapter of the CTX Installation and Maintenance
manual.
2. From each IP Telephone, set its network connection parameters using the “369Hold” program mode
(refer to the instructions that follow).
Notes
●Some IP telephones parameters must be set from each individual IPT using “369Hold” programming.
These parameters remain stored in the IP telephone even if the telephone is unplugged. This allows the
telephone to be moved to different locations without reprogramming.
●Other IPT parameters must be set in IP Telephone > Station IP data (Program 250) in WinAdmin.
Initially, the parameters in WinAdmin are normally kept at defaults.
IPT1020-SD Telephone Network Settings
This section explains how to enter data for your IPT1020-SD telephone. Before you begin, make sure that
you have the following information: IP address, subnet mask number, router address, Station ID, CTX
Strata Net node number, IP address for the BIPU-M, etc.
Notes
You may want to enter a period or backspace when performing the following steps. While in programming
mode [Press ++++ROG (simultaneously) to enter programming mode], you can use these buttons for
the following functions:
•Press
to enter a period.
•Press
9RO ▼ to backspace.
•Press
6SNU to cancel entry and start over.
Applications, Tips and Tricks
IPT1020-SD Telephone Network Settings
A-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
IPT-to-IP Network Connection Instructions
1. Press ++++ROG (simultaneously).
2. Press , then press +ROGto select the Network Setting Mode.
3. Press )% to see if the DHCP server is in use or not. Press one of the following:
: manual setting, then press +ROG.
: auto setting by DHCP server, then press +ROG.
4. If Step 3 above is set for manual setting, then press )%. Enter the IP address for this IPT and press
+ROG. To enter the period in an IP address, press the button on your dialpad (e.g., if the IP address is
“192.168.1.241,” press ).
5. Press )%. Enter the subnet mask number and press +ROG. (e.g., if the subnet mask address is
“255.255.255.0, press ).
6. If the IPT is connected to a router or other gateway device and if Step 3 above is set for manual setting,
then press )%. Enter the router address, then press +ROG.
7. Press )%. Enter a Station ID for the IPT and press +ROG. This is usually your telephone’s primary
number (PDN), which must be set in CTX Program 200.
8. Press )% to enter the node number of the CTX node that contains the BIPU-M to which this IPT
interfaces, then press +ROG. This FB setting is for CTX networked systems only. This node number
must match the IP CTX Identifier number set in Program 150-09.
9. Press )% for BIPU IP address mode. Press one of the following:
: manual setting, then press +ROG. Press )% and enter the BIPU IP address, then press +ROG.
(e.g., if the BIPU IP address is “192.168.1.241,” enter it in this format ).
: auto setting by broadcast, then press +ROG.
: auto setting by multicast (IPT doesn’t support multicast setting in this first release), then press +ROG.
Press +ROG again to set all the above data.
10. Go off-hook and hang up. The IPT will search for the BIPU-M, initialize and then set the IP address
(from 20 sec. to 60 sec.). Time, Date and PDN displays on LCD when the information is set.
Note See “IP Telephone Start Up Sequence”below for an explanation of the LCDs that you will see
during this procedure.
Applications, Tips and Tricks
IPT1020-SD Telephone Network Settings
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 A-9
Applications, Tips and
Tricks
IP Telephone Start Up Sequence
After the IP telephone network setting has been programmed, the following displays occur after the IP
telephone is hung-up:
Action LCD Indication Remarks
1. IPT
initializes.
2. IPT
searches
for IP
address.
Possible errors:
•IP address is
not set.
•No DHCP
server, etc.
If error occurs, IP address setting is carried out
continuously.
3. IPT
searches
for BIPU.
Retries every 10 seconds.
Possible errors:
•BIPU is not
found “time
out.”
•BIPU is not
found (Station
ID automatic
setting).
•BIPU is not
found
(StationID
manual setting)
•Multicast
address is
not
registered (BIPU IP address setting mode is
automatic setting by multicast)
•BIPU IP
address is not
registered
(BIPU IP address setting mode is manual
setting.
4. Registering
to BIPU When registering fails, IPT retries by starting at
Step 2 again.
Error message:
“Exxx” is error
number.
5. Registering
completion
- normal
action.
LCD data is indicated from
CTX. Example:
INITIALIZING
PLEASE WAIT
IPADDRESS SETTING...
IPADDRESS SETTING...
CAN’T SET IPADDRESS
SEARCHING BIPU
SEARCHING BIPU
BIPU NOT FOUND
SEARCHING BIPU
CAN’T GET STATIONID
SEARCHING BIPU
STATION ID UNMATCH
NOT EXIST MULTICAST ADDR
NOT EXIST BIPU ADDRESS
REGISTERING IPT...
REGISTERING IPT...
CAN’T REGISTER IPT:EXXX
NO. 205
FEB 28 THURSDAY
Applications, Tips and Tricks
IPT1020-SD Telephone Network Settings
A-10 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Viewing IPT1020-SD Terminal Information
1. Press ++++ROG (simultaneously).
2. Press , then press +ROG.
3. Press )% to view IPT firmware version (application and boot versions, read only).
4. Press )% to view IPT MAC address (read only).
5. Go off-hook and hang up.
Initializing the IPT1020-SD (Optional)
CAUTION! If you initialize, the IP telephone network settings return to default.
1. Press ++++ROG (simultaneously).
2. Press 9RO ▲++ROG.
3. Press )% to initialize the telephone’s IP network connection settings (LED On = initialize,
LED Off = don’t initialize). See “IPT-to-IP Network Connection Instructions”below for details.
4. Press +ROG again to complete the initialization process.
5. Go off-hook and hang up.
Applications, Tips and Tricks
IP Telephone Quality of Service (QoS) Programming
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 A-11
Applications, Tips and
Tricks
IP Telephone Quality of Service (QoS) Programming
Deploying many IP telephones on a data LAN can have some unexpected pitfalls if the network does not
have the bandwidth and speed required to handle VoIP traffic. To prevent delay, jitter, and data loss for
VoIP traffic and to retain the performance of your other business-critical network applications a network
Voice Readiness Assessment should completed before installing VoIP.
Important! Voice Readiness Assessments are the responsibility of the installing TSD dealer. Toshiba is
not responsible for supporting problems which occur because the network on which the IP
telephones are installed does not meet VoIP packet requirements.
CTX IP provides a number of adjustable tuning parameters dealing with sharing of network resources,
collectively referred to as Quality of Service (QoS). Some CTX IP voice quality and packet priority
parameters that can be adjusted are described below:
General QoS Adjustments
The CTX provides parameters that can be adjusted to improve IP voice quality. These are normally kept at
default but may be adjusted as necessary to modify IP voice quality. Set each item individually and then
test for voice quality improvements each time a parameter is changed.
1. In WinAdmin, select IP Telephone > Station IP Data (Program 250) “08 Audio Codec” and select the
codec that should be enabled for individual IP telephones.
The G711 provides the best voice quality but requires the most network bandwidth. Usually G.729A is
used when IP telephones are connected remotely.
2. In WinAdmin, select IP Telephone > System IP data (Program 150) and select the 11 BIPU/IPT VQ
mode setting.
3. You can assign a Voice Packet Table to individual IP telephones in IP Telephone > Station IP Data
(Program 250–07) Voice Packet Table. In WinAdmin, select IP Telephone > Voice Packet
Configuration (Program 152) and configure up to 256 different tables (see below).
Voice Packet Configuration Table (Program 152)
Normally the default table settings are used. If experiencing voice quality problems, set each item
individually and then test for voice quality improvements each time a parameter is changed. The default
settings are shown below. The tables in this program must be assigned to individual IP telephones in IP
Telephone > Station IP Data (Program 250) for them to be used by the CTX.
Important!
• When setting Voice Packet Configuration Tables on an IP QSIG network, the packet table settings
for each node on an end-to-end connection must be the same.
• Whenever Voice Packet Configuration Table changes are made for IP telephones on IP QSIG nodes,
Toshiba recommends pressing the reset button on the BIPU to assure the changes take effect.
Voice Packet Configuration Parameters defaults:
• Voice Packet Transmission Interval – 20 msec
• Jitter buffer type – adaptive
• Jitter buffer length – 100 (smooth out packet playback)
• Maximum acceptable delay – 200 (not adjustable in CTX R2.0)
• Packet loss threshold – 5
• Packet loss ratio – 5 (not adjustable in CTX R2.0).
• Measurement period – 1000 (not adjustable in CTX R2.0).
Applications, Tips and Tricks
IP Telephone Quality of Service (QoS) Programming
A-12 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Priority Control Adjustments
This VoIP feature provides a framework in which voice traffic flowing on the network is prioritized over
other types of traffic. CTX supports two industry standard types of Priority control: IEEE802.1p and
Diffserv (Differentiated Services). These options should be enabled simultaneously so the voice packets
remain prioritized through the whole network path. IEEE802.1p prioritizes voice packets on the Ethernet
(LAN) level and DiffServ prioritizes voice packets that pass through the internet, intranet, etc.
Important! Priority Control processing has two requirements for it to work accurately. All network
Ethernet equipment connected to the BIPU LAN (routers, switches, etc.) must be in compli-
ance with IEEE802.1p voice packet prioritization. When going through a network provider
(ISP, etc.), the provider must support the DiffServ feature - contact your ISP for this service.
➤To setup priority control from WinAdmin
1. Select IP Telephone > System IP Data
2. For Ethernet level (LAN) voice packet priority control.
Enable 07 IEEE802.1p
Set 08 IEEE802.1p. Configuration and set “voice” or “best effort”, voice provides a higher level of
priority.
3. For IP level (Internet) voice packet priority control. Enable 03 DiffServ
Set 04 TOS Field Type (TOS -Type Of Service or DSCP - Differentiated Service code point)
Note The most common type used is TOS
If set to “TOS”
Set 05 “TOS Precedence type” (CRITIC/ECP ~ Routine) where CRITIC has the highest priority.
Set “TOS Delay type” (Normal or Low) – Low is the best service setting
Set “TOS Throughput” (Normal or High) – High is the best service setting
Set “TOS Reliability” (Normal or High) – High is the best service setting
IF set to “DSCP”
Set “06 DSCP” from 1~64, Basic setting should be one of the following:
0 = Best effort, The default setting for most IP traffic.
24 = Assured flow (AF) or Controlled Load, intended to classify streaming traffic.
40 = Expedited Flow (EF) or Guaranteed, intended to classify high priority traffic. Used by VoIP
gateways to mark VoIP traffic.
Applications, Tips and Tricks
Strata Net over IP Programming Guidelines
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 A-13
Applications, Tips and
Tricks
Strata Net over IP Programming Guidelines
Use the following steps/programs to program Strata Net over IP.
1. Assign the BIPU-Q card using Program 100 (System > Card Assignments).
2. Use Program 151 to set up the BIPU IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway (IP Telephone >
BIPU Configuration).
3. Program ILG and OLG using Programs 304 and 306 (Trunk > ILG, OLG).
4. Program the Channel group using Program 302 [Trunk > ISDN > PRI (IP Protocol)].
5. After assigning an IP channel group in Program 302, assign the PAD levels to the PAD Groups 1 or 2 in
Program 107 (System > PAD Table) using the “PAD Table” on page 4-23.
6. After assigning the PAD level to the PAD Table in Program 107, assign the IP channel group to the PAD
group in Program 108 (System > PAD Table). Use ISDN trunk as the device type for IP Channel Group
Assignments.
Important! These PAD values in steps 5 and 6 must be set properly to avoid low volume levels.
7. Assign network IDs for all nodes using Program 102 (System > Flexible Access Codes).
8. Program networking using Programs 651~656 (Services > Networking > Route Plan Analysis).
9. Setup Strata Net over IP routing using Programs 671 and 672 (Services > Networking > Network Over
IP). See example below.
10.If voice quality is low on Strata Net over IP calls, change defaults in Program 152 for parameters
FB01~FB04.
11.Use Program 320 (Trunk > ISDN > B Channel) to control the number of channels to be used. This may
be necessary to limit the number of simultaneous calls allowed over the IP network. The IP network
bandwidth determines how many simultaneous calls can be supported. As a general guideline one
Strata Net over IP call requires a minimum of 36 kbps bandwidth.
Important! The BIPU IP address must be set in Program 151. If the BIPU-Q1A has a private IP address,
IP QSIG communication must be over a Virtual Private Network (VPN) connection. To avoid
needing VPN for this IP connection, assign a Global IP address to the BIPU-Q1A interface.
Example
Figure 2 Strata Net over IP Routing
CTX system 6833
CTX system
BIPU-Q1A
Node 11
192.168.11.100
This BIPU IP
address* must be
set in PRG151.
This BIPU IP
address* must be
set in PRG151.
CTX system
Node 13
BIPU-Q1A
192.168.13.102
Node 12
BIPU-Q1A
Router
LAN LAN
LAN
Router
Router
This BIPU IP
address* must be
set in PRG151.
192.168.12.101
IP-Network
See Important note above.
*
Applications, Tips and Tricks
Strata Net over IP Programming Guidelines
A-14 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
➤To program the configuration in the above figure using programs 671 and 672
The steps below show you how to setup Node 11 to route to remote Nodes 12 and 13.
1. With WinAdmin connected to Node 11, go to Program 672 (Services > Networking > Network Over
IP > Detail Info tab). Parameters for all Remote Nodes connected to Node 11 are pre-set in this
program.
2. Select Node 12 and verify all parameters are set to defaults.
3. Select Node 13 and verify all parameters are set to defaults.
4. With WinAdmin connected to Node 11, go to Program 671 (Services > Networking > Network Over
IP > IP Route tab). The IP addresses of BIPU-Qs connected to Node 11 are set in this program.
5. Select Node 12 and enter its BIPU-Q IP address (192.168.12.101) into IP Address Route 1.
6. Select Node 13 and enter its BIPU-Q IP address (192.168.13.102) into IP Address Route 1.
Notes
●The IP addresses used in this example are only examples, check with the facility network
administrator for the IP addresses that should be used in your installation.
●If a remote node has more than one BIPU-Q installed, its IP address would be entered in Route 2.
A maximum of six remote BIPU-Qs can be assigned in each remote node. Route 1 will be used
until all channels are busy, or not working, in which case Routes 2~6 will be used in sequentially.
7. Repeat Steps 1~6 with WinAdmin connected to Node 12 to set up Remote Nodes 11 and 13.
8. Repeat Steps 1~6 with WinAdmin connected to Node 13 to set up Remote Nodes 11 and 12.
Applications, Tips and Tricks
Echo Cancellation and Volume Level Adjustments
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 A-15
Applications, Tips and
Tricks
Echo Cancellation and Volume Level Adjustments
Dealing with Echo Problems in General
The first step in isolating echo problems is to find the source. Usually only one party hears echo. If that’s
the case, the echo source is the far end – if you hear echo, it is coming from the other party’s side.
Example: if your local gateway is causing echo, you will not hear it because there is no delay in signals that
may bounce back to you. However, as the echo causing gateway is moved further away, echo becomes
more noticeable because the delay in the sound that is returned increases. Once you find out which end of
the network is causing the echo, check for devices such as cheap headsets or conference telephones – these
devices allow the earphone or speaker output to be feed back into the microphone to cause echo. Other
devices that cause echo are two-wire to four-wire converters and digital-to-analog gateways.
Echo Caused by Older CTX Analog PCBs
To provide optimum voice quality of IP telephones on Strata CTX systems, there are some compatibility
requirements that need to be followed when using analog CO line cards in the system.
• It is highly recommended to only use RCOU3A, RCOS3A, REMU1A (four-wire, not two-wire),
RDDU2A, and RGLU3A analog CO line interfaces in IP telephone applications. These PCBs provide
optimum speech quality for IPT1020-SD IP telephone connections.
• Do not use RCOU1A, RCOS1A, REMU1A (two-wire), RDDU1A, RGLU1A, or RGLU2A analog CO
line interfaces in IP telephone applications. These PCBs will work but will cause IP telephone users to
experience unacceptable voice quality and echo return loss.
Echo Reduction Adjustments
The items listed below can be adjusted to help eliminate echo. The below items will need to be tweaked,
case by case with trial and error, for each situation.
1. In WinAdmin, select IP Telephone > System IP data (Program 150-10); use “Tail length of Echo
Canceller” (set to different options and test).
2. In WinAdmin, select System > PAD table (Program 107) pad table; use IPT selection and reduce the
volume (increase Net Loss) to reduce the echo. This setting is a compromise between the acceptable
echo and volume loss levels (set to different options and test).
3. The IP telephone user taps the telephone Vol key (up or down), while on a call to cancel echo on a call-
by-call basis.
4. If using a Headset, the user can adjust the IP Telephone headset transmit volume level. In some cases,
lowering the headset transmit level can reduce echo.
Applications, Tips and Tricks
Echo Cancellation and Volume Level Adjustments
A-16 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Setting the IPT1020-SD Headset Transmit Volume
1. Press ++++ROG (simultaneously).
2. Press .
3. Press the Feature Buttons to turn the LEDs On/Off for the desired volume transmission level (see Table
A-14).
4. Press FB4 for handset voice output in speakerphone mode (LED On = with, LED Off = without).
5. Press +ROG to set the above data.
6. Go off-hook and hang up.
Table A-14 Volume Level Transmitted from Headset Microphone
LEDS Transmit Level
FB3 FB2 FB1
ON ON ON Level 7 (max.)
ON ON OFF Level 6
ON OFF ON Level 5
ON OFF OFF Level 4
OFF ON ON Level 3 (initial value)
OFF ON OFF Level 2
OFF OFF ON Level 1
OFF OFF OFF Level 0 (min.)
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 B-1
System Error Codes
System Error Codes B
The following Error Code Tables are needed when programming Strata CTX670 using the button
programming method. Error Codes display on the programming DKT’s LCD.
Note The following error codes only appear when using the telephone button programming method.
These tables are provided for reference only. CTX WinAdmin will feature error codes in a future
release.
Common Error Code Table
Program Code Error Descriptions
Common
1 Invalid Program number.
2 Invalid value.
3
Invalid parameter designation
•Input parameter range error.
•Required sub-parameter data was not entered.
4 Invalid FB button pressed.
5The time allotted to enter a modification in the desired field has been
exceeded.
6
Invalid parameter entry
•Incorrect characters entered
•Input method is wrong
7Some settings carried out using the range function may not have been
programmed correctly.
16 Identification error
17 Required parameter is not entered.
18 Required parameter does not exist.
System Error Codes
System Programming Error Codes
B-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
System Programming Error Codes
Program Code FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
100
33 The entered Cabinet/Slot value is out of range.
33 The entered PCB Type is out of range.
33 In CTX100, the Card Type Code other than ASTU (STU) was
assigned into S109.
33 In CTX670, the equipment entered is S109 or S110.
In CTX100, the equipment entered is S110.
49 Deleting a Card (000) – Programmed station and/or trunk
data must be deleted before a card can be deleted.
49 Changing Card Type Code – Card Type cannot be changed.
Delete the existing Card Type before entering a new Card
Type.
49 The designated BIOU is already in use.
49 IOU card cannot be deleted because the Control Relay is
assigned to that card.
49 The PCB cannot be assigned to the designated equipment
position.
49 “004” is not assigned as Card Type Code.
50 One of the required parameters (PCM Highway, BDKU Type
or TEI Assignment) has not been assigned.
50 The PCM highway value entered is not applicable for the
desired PCB assignment. PCB parameters are required for
PDKU or BDKU, RDTU, RDSU, RPTU.
50 The Channel Type value entered is not applicable for the
desired PCB assignment. PCB parameters are required for
PDKU or BDKU, RDTU, RDSU, RPTU.
50 The TEI Type value entered is not applicable for the desired
PCB assignment. PCB parameters are required for PDKU or
BDKU, RDTU, RDSU, RPTU.
54 The number of MF2U cards exceeds the system limit.
102
33 The entered Feature Code is out of range.
33 The OLG entered is out of range.
49 An invalid OLG number was entered in OLG Number field
when assigning a Flexible Numbering Feature code of 551.
50 “0” is not a valid OLG Number.
51 Flexible Numbering Plan values cannot be repeated. The
value entered cannot be registered (e.g., If 1234 is registered,
123 cannot be registered).
52 The value entered conflicts with an existing extension and
cannot be registered.
103 - See “Common Error Code Table” on page B-1.
System Error Codes
System Programming Error Codes
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 B-3
System Error Codes
104 - See “Common Error Code Table” on page B-1.
105
33 The entered Clock value is out of range.
33 The Paging Group No. entered is out of the range.
49 The BIOU general relay number value conflicts with existing
parameter assignments.
49 The entered circuit number is not the clock source port.
80 The Paging Group No. entered does not exist in the system.
106 - See “Common Error Code Table” on page B-1.
107 33 The entered Pad device number is invalid.
96 The number of Pad groups exceed the system capacity.
108
33 The entered Device Type is out of range.
33 The PAD group entered is out of the range.
80 The Device number entered does not exist in the system.
109
33 The entered equipment is out of range.
49 The equipment which the card type was assigned was not
entered.
50 The entered equipment is registered as MOH already.
80 A BIOU circuit with other data such as door phone, etc. is
assigned in MOH/BGM 1~7.
80 A circuit with a non-STU circuit is designated in MOH/BGM
8~16.
110 16 Identification error: A super user password cannot be checked
if you are logged in with a general user level password.
111 - See “Common Error Code Table” on page B-1.
112 33 The entered date is out of range.
98 Allowable number of Working Day Type has been exceeded.
113 33 The entered time value is out of range.
114 - See “Common Error Code Table” on page B-1.
115 - See “Common Error Code Table” on page B-1.
116 33 The Program Number entered is invalid.
117
32 An invalid character exists in the entered value.
51 The inputted analysis number is using in a part of the other
analysis number.
118 Incorrect Master ID code.
119 Common error. See Common Error Code table.
150 32 Incorrect value. The values should be numerals only.
Program Code FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
System Programming Error Codes
B-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
151
19 Unable to change the selected BIPU configurations during
updates of selected BIPUs or IPTs to prevent the flash
memory of BIPU from being broken.
33 The equipment number entered is out of the range.
49 Slot card type entered is other than BIPU card.
52 The IP address entered is a global IP address already
assigned to CTX or another BIPU. This restriction is only
applied to the duplication of global IP addresses.
152 33 You cannot use 1:10msec in this release.
153 - Common error. See Common Error Code table.
Program Code FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 B-5
System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
Program Code FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
200
33 The entered Shelf/Slot/Circuit value is out of range.
33 The entered System Call Forward index is out of the range.
49 The selected PDN(s) conflicts with an existing PDN(s)
assignments for the selected circuit.
49 Station Type cannot be changed.
49 The desired DN does not exist.
51 The entered value conflicts with an existing numbering
scheme.
52 The entered value conflicts with an existing ISDN assignment
etc.
54 The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.
80 The DN does not exist.
80 A PCB without “DKT/SLT setting allowed” is designated for a
PCB connecting the selected ISDN extensions.
96 The allowed number of extensions has been exceeded.
98 The quantity of station speed dial bins entered exceeds the
system's capacity.
201
50 The DN entered is the DN that is used as the administration
terminal.
FB which this error occur : FB01
51 The entered number is not the extension number.
52 The entered number is not the extension number.
80 The entered value is not a valid extension.
202
33 The equipment number entered is out of the range.
49 PCB assignment is not set for the ISDN card connecting
selected extensions.
49 The entered equipment is using as other ISDN extension.
49 An ISDN trunk channel group conflict has been detected.
49 Although the P-P connection was selected, an additional DN
is registered.
49 The desired value conflicts with existing ISDN extensions.
51 - The Primary DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
numbering scheme.
51 The desired value conflicts with existing number schemes.
52 A DN used for DKT extensions is designated.
System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
B-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
202
52 The additional ISDN extension number cannot be registered.
The number is already in use by a DKT extensions, etc.
54 The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.
80 The DN entered is invalid.
80 A PCB without ISDN extension settings allowed’ is designated
for the PCB connecting the ISDN extension(s) selected.
96 The number of channel group exceeds the system capacity
when ISDN station is registered.
96 The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.
98 The quantity of station speed dial bins entered exceeds the
system’s capacity.
203
33 The new DN is not assigned.
49 The new DN value conflicts with an existing value DN, PhDN,
etc.
51 - The Primary DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
numbering scheme.
51 The new DN value conflicts with an existing numbering
scheme value.
52 The new DN value conflicts with existing group extensions.
80 The new DN value does not exist.
204
33 The Call History memory size entered is wrong.
49 The number of attendant consoles exceed the number
specified in the system.
52 DKT is not assigned to DN (ISDN, etc.).
80 The DN entered is an extension number that does not exist.
98 Allowable Feature Button number is exceeded.
98 Allowable Call History Memory size is exceeded.
205
33
100
110
120
130
140
Sub-parameters must be assigned.
33 120 The line number entered is out of range for the system’s
capacity.
33 130 The GCO key group/index entered is out of the range.
33 140 The POOL group entered is out of the range.
33 530 The BGM number entered is out of the range.
Program Code FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 B-7
System Error Codes
205
33 540 The door lock number entered is out of the range.
33 900 The application number entered is out of the range.
48 Required parameter for each Feature Code is not entered.
49 110 Two or more PhDNs with the same value are registered to
one extension.
49
700
790
800
810
820
830
Only Feature Code(s) allowed for Attendant Console is
registered.
49 610 Two or more DSSs with the same value are registered to one
extension.
49
120
130
560
610
While assigning sub-parameters to a DN: A DN was selected
that does not exist in the system.
51 The Primary DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
numbering scheme.
51 110 The Primary DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
numbering scheme.
51 120
130 When assigning an Owner DN to a CO or GCO, the related
CO or GCO buttons are not assigned to the respective FB(s)
of the owner’s extension.
52 The Primary DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
numbering scheme.
52 110 The Secondary/PhDN entered is already used in ISDN
extenstion(s), etc.
52 120
130 The CO or GCO Owner DN entered does not exist.
80 The PrimeDN does not exist in the system.
82 The sub-parameter values assigned to the FB are invalid.
82 120 The line number entered does not exist.
96 110
130
140
The maximum allowable value for GCO, POOL, or PhDN has
been exceeded.
98 The quantity of Flexible keys programmed exceeds the
system’s capacity.
Program Code FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
B-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
206
33 The System Call Forward index entered is out of the range.
49 An invalid DN was selected. The entered PDN is not related
to this Phantom DN.
51 - Phantom DN entered is invalid (the entered value is used as a
part of an existing extension number or numbering plan).
51 An invalid DN was selected (the entered value is used as a
part of an existing extension number or numbering plan).
52 - The Phantom DN entered conflicts with an existing DKT
extension.
52 The entered DN conflicts with an existing DKT extension, or
numbering plan, etc.
80 A Phantom DN that does not exist in the system has been
selected.
207 33 The feature key entered is not a “Single Touch Button”.
208
51 An invalid DN was selected (the entered value is used as a
part of an existing extension number or numbering plan).
52 The entered DN conflicts with an existing numbering plan.
80 The DN entered is an extension number that does not exist in
the system.
209
33 The System Call Forward index entered is out of the range.
49 If Hunt Method field is set to Distribute, the incoming
destination Pilot Number must be assigned.
50 If Hunt Method is set to Distribute, Pilot Number must be
assigned.
51 The entered value conflicts with an existing number or
numbering plan.
52 The entered value conflicts with an existing DKT extension.
80 The designated Hunt Group number does not exist in the
system.
96 The assigned Hunt Group number, exceeds the system
capacity.
210
51 The entered DN does not exist in the system (The entered
value is used in an extension number or numbering plan).
52 The entered value is used in the numbering plan.
80 The entered Prime DN does not exist in the system.
96 - The Pickup group number entered is out of the range for the
system's capacity.
211 80 - The hunting group number entered (FB00) is a number that
does not exist in the system.
Program Code FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 B-9
System Error Codes
213
33
100
110
120
130
140
The sub-parameters for Feature Code (Key Number) must be
assigned.
33 - 120 The line number entered is out of range for the system’s
capacity.
33 - 130 The GCO key group/index entered is out of the range.
33 - 140 The POOL group entered is out of the range.
33 - 530 The BGM number entered is out of the range.
33 - 540 The door lock number entered is out of the range.
33 - 900 The application number entered is out of the range.
48 Essential sub-parameter values must be entered.
49 110 Two or more PhDNs with the same value are registered to
one extension.
49
700
790
800
810
820
830
The feature code(s) allowed to attendant console only is
registered.
49 610 Two or more DSSs with the same value are registered to one
extension.
49
120
130
560
610
The entered DN does not exist in the system.
51 - The Prime DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
numbering scheme.
51 110 The secondary/PhDN entered cannot be registered. The
number conflicts with an existing number scheme.
51 120
130
When setting an owner extension to the additional information
of CO, GCO, the said CO, GCO keys are not assigned to the
Feature Buttons of the owner extension.
52 - The Primary DN entered conflicts with an existing DKT
extension.
52 110 The secondary/PhDN entered cannot be registered. The
number conflicts with an existing ISDN extension(s), etc.
52 120
130 The CO or GCO Owner DN entered does not exist.
80 The specified Prime DN does not exist in the system.
Program Code FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
B-10 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
213
82 The additional information assigned to the Feature Button is
invalid.
82 - 120 The line number entered does not exist.
96 110
130
140
The allowable number of GCO, POOL or PhDn has been
exceeded.
98 - The quantity of Flexible buttons programmed exceeds the
system’s capacity.
214
33 The equipment number entered is out of the range.
49 The designated circuit is already in use.
50 Multiple DSSs cannot be assigned to the same Shelf/Slot/
Circuit.
51 The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).
52 The entered value conflicts with an existing numbering plan.
80 The designated Prime DN does not exist in the system.
80 The designated PCB and extension combination is not
allowed.
96 The number of DSS consoles entered exceeds the system’s
capacity.
98 The number of DSS buttons entered exceeds the system’s
capacity. This error can occur with PB1~PB8
215 33 The add-on module number is out of the range.
33
100
110
120
130
140
The sub-parameters for Key Number field must be assigned.
33 - 120 The line number entered is out of range for the system’s
capacity.
33 - 130 The GCO key group/index entered is out of the range.
33 - 140 The POOL group entered is out of the range.
33 - 530 The BGM number entered is out of the range.
33 - 540 The door lock number entered is out of the range.
33 - 900 The application number entered is out of the range.
48 Essential sub-parameter values must be entered.
49 110 Two or more PhDNs with the same value are registered to
one extension.
Program Code FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 B-11
System Error Codes
49
700
790
800
810
820
830
The feature code(s) allowed to attendant console only is
registered.
49 610 Two or more DSSs with the same value are registered to one
extension.
49
120
130
560
610
The entered DN does not exist in the system.
51 The Primary DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
numbering scheme.
51 110 The secondary/phantom DN entered cannot be registered.
The number conflicts with an existing number scheme.
51 120
130
When setting an owner extension to the additional information
of CO, GCO, the said CO, GCO keys are not assigned to the
Feature buttons of the owner extension.
52 - The Primary DN entered conflicts with an existing DKT
extension.
52 110 The secondary/PhDN entered cannot be registered. The
number conflicts with an existing ISDN extension(s), etc.
52 120
130 The CO or GCO Owner DN entered does not exist.
80 The specified PrimeDN does not exist in the system.
82 The additional information assigned to the Feature Button is
invalid.
82 - 120 The line number entered does not exist.
96 The allowable number of GCO, POOL or PhDn has been
exceeded.
98 - The number of Flexible buttons programmed exceeds the
system’s capacity.
216
51 The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).
52 The entered DN conflicts with an existing ISDN extension(s),
etc.
80 The designated Prime DN does not exist in the system.
Program Code FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
B-12 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
217
33 The Node ID entered is over maximum digits, or Node ID was
not entered.
51 The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).
52 The entered DN is not designated as an ISDN extension in
Program 202.
80 The designated DN does not exist in the system.
218
49
49 The DN entered is already assigned to another Hunt Group. A
DN can only be in one Hunt Group.
51 The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).
52 The entered DN conflicts with an existing numbering plan.
80 The entered Hunt Group number does not exist in the system.
80 The entered DN does not exist in the system.
82 The number of Hunt Group assignments has exceeded the
system capacity.
96 The allowable number of Hunt Group member assignments
has been exceeded.
98 More than 560 DNs are designated for members of one
hunting group.
219 33 The Node ID entered is over maximum digits, or Node ID was
not entered.
250
32 The MAC address entered includes invalid characters. The
valid characters are numerals and alphabet A(a) to F(f).
49 Despite that “1:Fix” is selected in FB02, the fixed IP address
for this IPT is not registered in the system.
50 Despite that “1:Fix” is selected in FB02, the fixed IP address
is not set in FB03.
51 The DN entered is not an IPT. (This number entered conflicts
with a value of an existing numbering plan.) FB which this
error occur : FB00
52 IPT is not assigned to this DN (DKT etc.).
FB which this error occur : FB00
80 The DN entered is an extension number that does not exist in
the system.
FB which this error occur : FB00
Note For FBs in Program 205, 213 and 215, codes shows the entered Feature Code.
Program Code FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 B-13
System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes
Program Code Occurred
FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
300
33 The equipment number entered is out of the range.
33 The ILG entered is out of the range.
33 The OLG entered is out of the range.
33 The hunting order entered is out of the range.
49
When modifying previously assigned equipment:
•The designated PCB Type does not allow CO trunk
assignments.
•The designated circuit does not allow CO trunk
assignments.
49 The ISDN ILG number is designated for analog trunks or the
entered ILG number does not exist in the system.
49 “0” was entered in ILG when OLG was not registered.
49 The OLG entered is not registered in the system.
49 The ISDN OLG number is designated for analog trunks or the
entered OLG number does not exist in the system.
49 “0” was entered in OLG when ILG was not registered.
49 A conflict exists between the ILG number and the OLG
number trunk type.
54 The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.
80 A trunk number that does not exist in the system has been
selected.
80 The entered ILG number does not exist in the system.
80 The entered OLG number does not exist in the system.
96 Allowable number of trunks has been exceeded.
96 The line number entered exceeds the system's capacity.
301
33 The trunk number entered is out of the range.
80 A trunk number that does not exist in the system has been
selected.
System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes
B-14 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
302
33 The equipment number entered is out of the range.
33 The ILG entered is out of the range.
33 The entered OLG is out of the range.
48 Dch position is not set to 16. When setting the time slot
pattern for a 2048 kbps interface, this value must be set to 16.
49 The type of ILG or OLG entered in not an ISDN.
49 The ILG or OLG entered does not exist in the system.
49 When the equipment is moved, the number of the PCM
highway in the moved equipment is different from the current
equipment.
49 - The ILG entered is not registered in the system.
FB which this error occur : FB03
49 - The OLG entered is not registered in the system.
FB which this error occur : FB03
49 When the card type is “PTU1F”, the protocol type entered
should be “Bellcore” or “Bellcore Northern Telecom”.
49 When the card type is “PTU”, the protocol type entered is
“ETSI”.
49 The card type is not “IPU-Q” when IP is selected.
49 The card type is not “PTU” or “PTU1F” when TTC or QSIG is
selected.
49 When the card type is “PTU1F”, the inputted D channel
position is not 16.
49 D channel position must assign “0” when the card type is
“IPU-Q”.
49 D channel position must not be assigned “0” when the card
type is not “IPU-Q”.
50 The T-Wait Timer can only be enabled if the Protocol is set to
National ISDN.
52 The entered Channel Group conflicts with an existing ISDN
extension(s), etc.
54 The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.
80 The entered Channel Group number does not exist in the
system.
80 An ISDN trunk cannot be assigned to the designated Shelf/
Slot/Circuit.
80 The designated ILG does not exist in the system.
80 The designated OLG does not exist in the system.
96 The number of allowable Channel Groups has been
exceeded when a new ISDN trunk assignment is made.
Program Code Occurred
FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 B-15
System Error Codes
303
33 The channel group entered is out of the range.
52 The entered Channel Group number conflicts with an existing
ISDN extension(s).
80 The entered Channel Group number does not exist.
304
49 The Group Type and Trunk Type are assigned based on the
ILG settings found in ILG field of Program 300 and in ILG field
of Program 302.
49 The entered Pool Key Number cannot be assigned. It belongs
to another ILG number.
49 The entered GCO Key Number cannot be assigned. It
belongs to another ILG number.
49 The digit of DID number cannot change when DID number is
already registered.
80 The entered ILG does not exist in the system.
96 The allowable number of GCO or POOL Key Number has
been exceeded.
96 The number of ILGs exceed the system capacity.
305
33 The ILG entered is out of the range.
49 The entered ILG number cannot be deleted. Trunk
relationships assigned in Programs 300 and 302 must deleted
first.
80 The entered ILG does not exist in the system.
306
49 The Group Type and Trunk Type are assigned based on the
OLG settings found in ILG field of Program 300 and in ILG
field of Program 302.
49 The entered Pool Key Number cannot be assigned. It belongs
to another OLG number.
49 The entered GCO Key Number cannot be assigned. It
belongs to another ILG number.
80 The entered OLG does not exist in the system.
96 The allowable number of OLG Group Number has been
exceeded.
96 The allowable number of GCO or POOL Key Number has
been exceeded.
307
33 The OLG entered is out of the range.
49 The entered OLG number cannot be deleted. Trunk
relationships assigned in Programs 300 and 302 must be
deleted first.
80 The entered OLG does not exist in the system.
Program Code Occurred
FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes
B-16 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
308
33 The entered equipment value is invalid.
33 Wrong assignment intervals.
80 The designated trunk equipment does not exist in the system.
309
33 The pause assignment is wrong.
48 No incoming destination number is entered for the parameter
required.
49 The entered DID conflicts with an existing wild card PCB. The
allowable number of DID assignments including a wild card
PCB is exceeded.
49 The selected GCO conflicts with an existing ILG number.
49 The selected Pool Line Group conflicts with an existing ILG
number.
51 The entered ILG number does not exist in the system.
51 The length of entered DID value exceeds the allowable
contract digit number.
80 The entered GCO key group does not exist in the system.
82 The selected ILG number does not exist in the system. The
number of ILGs exceed the system capacity.
96 The number of allowable GCO or POOL key group
assignments has been exceeded.
98 The allowable number of DID assignments has been
exceeded.
310
33 The entered equipment value is invalid.
48 No incoming destination number is assigned for the required
parameter.
80 The entered circuit is not set to support the designated trunk.
311 49 Although DISA security is set to Necessary, no DISA code
has been assigned.
312
49 The entered DID number is not assigned to an ILG.
49 The DID Number entered is invalid.
80 DID Number entered does not exist in the system.
82 The entered ILG number does not exist in the system.
313
33 The trunk number entered is out of the range.
33 The entered equipment value is invalid.
49
When Signalling Method field is set to CLASS:
•The Signalling Contents field value must be assigned
•The CLID Equipment Number Position circuit for the CIU
must be entered.
80 The entered trunk number does not exist in the system.
Program Code Occurred
FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 B-17
System Error Codes
315
“NONE” entered in any field is invalid.
33 The entered equipment value is invalid.
49 The PCB installed in the designated Shelf/Slot must be a
RDTU.
316
33 The channel group entered is out of the range.
33 RPTU Equipment Number entered is invalid.
49 When the equipment is moved, the number of the PCM
highway in the moved equipment is different from the current
equipment.
49 If the Span Interface speed is set to a value not equal to 1.5M,
the Dch position is modified.
52 The entered channel group number conflicts with an existing
ISDN extension(s).
54 The equipment number entered is out of range.
80 The entered channel group number does not exist in the
system.
80 The entered circuit must be an assigned ISDN.
317
33 The entered equipment value is invalid.
33 The ILG entered is out of the range.
33 The OLG entered is out of the range.
49 “0” was entered in ILG when OLG was not registered.
49 The entered ILG/OLG values do not have ISDN assignments.
49 The OLG entered is not registered in the system.
49 “0” was entered in OLG when ILG was unregistered.
50 The T-Wait Timer can only be enabled if the Protocol is set to
National ISDN.
52 The entered channel group number conflicts with an existing
ISDN extension(s).
54 The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.
80 The entered channel group number does not exist in the
system.
80 The entered circuit must be an assigned ISDN.
80 The entered ILG number does not exist in the system.
80 The entered OLG number does not exist in the system.
96 The allowable channel group assignments exceed the system
capacity.
Program Code Occurred
FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes
B-18 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
318
33 The pause assignment is wrong.
48 No incoming destination number is assigned for the required
parameter.
49 The selected GCO conflicts with an existing ILG number.
49 The selected Pool Line Group conflicts with an existing ILG
number.
80 The entered GCO key group does not exist in the system.
82 The selected ILG number does not exist in the system.
82 The selected ILG number does not exist in the system. The
number of ILGs exceed the system capacity.
96 The number of allowable GCO or POOL key group
assignments has been exceeded.
319 33 The destination number entered is wrong.
48 The destination number is not assigned.
320
33 The entered equipment value is invalid.
54 The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.
80 The circuit for the designated PCB must be an assigned ISDN
primary trunk.
321 33 The OLG entered is out of the range.
80 The entered OLG number does not exist in the system.
322
33 The Group CO or Pool Line Group Destination is out of range
(1~128).
80 The entered OLG number does not exist in the system.
80 The designated extension number does not exist in the
system.
80 The entered GCO value does not exist in the system.
80 The entered POOL value does not exist in the system.
82 The OLG entered is out of the range.
96 The allowable system DID assignments has been exceeded.
Program Code Occurred
FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 B-19
System Error Codes
323
18 Select the Type of Service for CBC.
33 The Incoming Line Group entered is invalid.
33 The Outgoing Line Group entered is invalid.
49
The same value is designated to the Type of Service, Facility
Code, Service Parameters, and Network ID fields that
correspond to the same channel group and different line
service index.
49 The entered values in Channel Group and Index fields are not
valid CBC assignments. Select NODATA in Type of Service
field to delete CBC setting.
49 When an INWATS ILG is assigned in ILG field an Out WATS
Type of Service cannot be assigned.
49 If OUTWATS service is selected for Type of Service, an OLG
value must be assigned.
49 The selected ILG conflicts with an existing ILG number.
49 When an Out WATS OLG is assigned in OLG field an
INWATS Type of Service cannot be assigned.
49 Make a selection in OLG field.
49 The selected OLG conflicts with an existing ILG number.
49 The assigned minimum Bch value (Minimum Calls Zones
1~3) exceeds the related (Maximum Calls Zones 1~3)
maximum Bch value.
49 The assigned minimum Bch value (Minimum Calls Zones
1~3) exceeds the related (Maximum Calls Zones 1~3)
maximum Bch value.
323
49 The B channel entered is invalid.
49 The OLG entered does not exist in system.
49 The entered ILG/OLG values are not assigned ISDNs.
50 Make a Service Type selection for field 02.
52 The entered channel number conflicts with an existing ISDN
extension(s), etc.
80 The entered channel group number does not exist in the
system.
82 The Channel Group entered does not exist in the system.
82 The allowable number of assigned channel groups has been
exceeded.
96 The number of allowable CBCs has been exceeded.
Program Code Occurred
FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Attendant Position Programming Error Codes
B-20 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Attendant Position Programming Error Codes
324
33 The channel group entered is out of the range.
33 The time entered is invalid.
52 The entered channel number conflicts with an existing ISDN
extension(s), etc.
80 The entered channel group number does not exist in the
system.
Program Code Occurred
FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
400 50 If the Called Number Index is not assigned, Call Destination
must be set to insert.
404
33 The Attendant group number entered is out of the range.
33 The ILG entered is out of the range.
80 The entered Attendant group number does not exist in the
system.
80 The designated ILG does not exist in the system.
Program Code Occurred
FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 B-21
System Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes
Program Code Occurred FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
500
32 A character that is not permitted is included in the Destination
number.
50
Although 2nd destination has been assigned, you cannot
remove the 1st destination.
You cannot assign the 2nd destination without the 1st
destination.
50 A value must be assigned to Destination 1if an assignment
was made in Destination 2.
82 The entered System Call Forward number does not exist in
the system.
96 - System Call Forward Index number exceeds the system
capacity.
501
32 A character that is not permitted is included in the entered
Speed Dial number.
33 The entered Speed Dial number is out of range.
33 The pause assignment is wrong.
502
51 The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).
52 The entered number conflicts with an existing numbering
plan.
80 The entered extension does not exist. The entered Attendant
Console does not exist.
96 - The Page group number entered exceeds the system’s
capacity.
98 The number of allowable Device number per paging group
has been exceeded.
503
49 The entered External Generic Relay number conflicts with an
existing device, such as a door lock, etc.
80 IOU card is not registered in the system.
96 The Page group number entered exceeds the system’s
capacity.
98 Device Number per paging group is exceeded.
504 33 The System Call Forward index entered is out of the range.
506
53 Account Code cannot be verified.
80 Account code confirmation digit does not coincide. (It is larger
than the value that was registered by Program 570.)
98 The Account code number exceeds the system’s capacity.
System Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes
B-22 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
507
33 The DDCB Equipment number entered is invalid.
33 The destination number value is out of range (when
destination type is Paging Group).
33 The allowable number of Paging Groups have been
exceeded.
33 The entered Ring Duration is invalid.
49 Door Phone number entered conflicts with an existing Door
Phone number.
49 The equipment assigned in DDCB Equipment Number is
already in use.
49 The entered value conflicts with an existing DKT extension.
50 The destination number is not registered.
52 The entered Circuit conflicts with an existing door lock.
80 The entered Door Phone number does not exist in the
system.
80 The PCB Type designated for this circuit must be a DKU.
82 The entered Door Phone number does not exist in the
system.
96 The allowable number of Door Phones has been exceeded.
508
33 The entered equipment value is invalid.
49 The designated BIOU PCB circuit is used by another device
(Night Bell, etc.), or two or more door locks are designated for
the same BIOU PCB.
49 The PCB Type designated for this DDCB circuit must be a
PDKU or BDKU.
49 The DDCB Equipment number entered conflicts with an
existing door lock.
52 Other devices (DKT extensions, door phones, etc.) are
designated for the specified DDCB circuit.
96 The allowable number of Door Locks has been exceeded.
509 - No error occurs for this command except for common errors.
510 49 The specified COS Override Code digit is invalid.
512 - No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
513 33 The ILG entered is out of the range.
80 ILG number enter does not exist.
514 33 The OLG entered is out of the range.
80 The entered OLG number does not exist.
515 - No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
Program Code Occurred FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 B-23
System Error Codes
516
32 A character that is not permitted is used in the Speed Dial
number.
50 The allowable number of Speed Dial Bins has been
exceeded.
51 The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).
52 The entered value conflicts with an existing numbering plan.
80 The entered PrimeDN does not exist.
98 The allowable Short-dial number has been exceeded.
517
18 Multiple Calling Pilot DN is not assigned.
48 Cannot delete Multiple Calling Pilot DN.
51 The Multiple Calling Pilot DN entered is using in a part of the
numbering plan, extension number, etc.
52 The Multiple Calling DN entered is an already existing DN .
52 The Multiple Calling Pilot DN entered already exists.
518
32 ISDN station cannot be assigned to the destination number.
52 Cannot delete Multiple Calling Pilot DN.
49 The Multiple Calling Pilot DN entered is using in a part of the
numbering plan, extension number, etc.
52 The plural trunk access number can not assign in the same
Multiple Calling Group.
80 Cannot assign the destination number because the Multiple
Calling Group does not exist.
48 The destination type and the destination number must be
assigned at the same time.
82 The Multiple Calling Group entered is out of the range.
519 33 The Multiple Calling Group entered is out of the range.
80 The Multiple Calling Group entered does not exist.
520 - No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
521
51 The Route Plan Number must be complete to be registered to
the Route Plan Table.
98 The allowable number of participants in the Route Plan Table
has been exceeded.
522
51 The Exception Route Plan Number must be complete to be
registered to the Route Plan Table.
98 The allowable number of participants in the Route Plan Table
has been exceeded.
523 - No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
524 - No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
Program Code Occurred FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes
B-24 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
525
33 The OLG entered is out of the range.
49 Both the OLG Number and the Digit Modification Index must
be entered.
50 Digit Modification Index value cannot be 0.
526 32 The value entered is not permitted.
527
33 The entered date is out of range.
98 The public holiday number entered exceeds the system’s
capacity.
528 - No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
529 33 The entered time is out of range.
530
32 A character(s) that is not permitted is included in the specified
code.
51 DR LCR Table codes cannot be repeated. The value entered
cannot be registered (e.g., If 1234 is registered, 123 cannot
be registered).
80 The code is not registered in the screening table.
531
32 A character(s) that is not permitted is included in the specified
code.
51 LCR OLG Access codes cannot be repeated. The value
entered cannot be registered (e.g., If 1234 is registered, 123
cannot be registered).
82 The allowable number of LCR OLG Access codes has been
exceeded.
82 The OLG entered is out of the range.
98 The allowable number of DR sharing tables has been
exceeded.
532 - No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
533
32 A character(s) that is not permitted is included in the specified
code.
51 Dial Strings cannot be repeated. The value entered cannot be
registered (e.g., If 1234 is registered, 123 cannot be
registered).
98 The allowable number of DRLs has been exceeded.
534
32 A character(s) that is not permitted is included in the specified
code.
51 To add a DRL to the DR Exception Table, the DRL number
must be complete.
98 The allowable number of participants in the DR Exception
Table has been exceeded.
535 32 The value entered is not permitted.
Program Code Occurred FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 B-25
System Error Codes
540
48 An incoming destination number must be entered when After
Shift Type field is set to Dialing Digits.
51 The entered value conflicts with an existing number scheme.
52 The entered DN conflicts with an existing DKT, ISDN
extension, etc.
80 The entered DN does not exist.
541
20 A character(s) that is not permitted is included in the specified
code.
52 The entered DN conflicts with an existing DKT, ISDN
extension, etc.
80 The entered DN does not exist.
550
33 The OLG entered is out of the range.
49 Two or more OLG numbers with the same value exist in the
same group.
80 The entered OLG number does not exist.
551 32 The value entered is not permitted.
570
49 Registered Digit Length cannot be less than the Verified Digit
Length.
50 Registered Digit Length cannot be less than the Verified Digit
Length.
571 49 The same account code cannot be repeated.
50 The same account code cannot be repeated.
573 33 The door phone number entered is out of the range.
80 The entered Door Phone does not exist.
576
33 The tenant number entered is not “1”.
33 The paging group number entered is out of the range.
80 The entered Paging Group does not exist.
577
33 The entered circuit type is out of range.
33 The Ckt Type number entered, CO, GCO or POOL is invalid.
51 The entered circuit number is invalid.
52 The entered circuit number is invalid.
80 The Device installed in the Circuit does not existed in the
system.
80 The entered station number does not exist.
579 - No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
580 52 The entered DN is not a VM extension.
80 No error occurs for this command except for common errors.
Program Code Occurred FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
System Error Codes
Networking Programming Error Codes
B-26 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Networking Programming Error Codes
Program Code Occurred
FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
650 33 The OLG entered is out of the range.
80 An OLG number has not been assigned in system.
651 98 The allowable number of Node ID assignments has been
exceeded.
653 - No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
654 33 The OLG entered is out of the range.
655 - No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
656 49 The entered Overlap Code already exists.
657 - No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
658 - No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
659 - No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
660 - No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
670 33 The Node ID entered is out of the range.
51 The Node ID entered is using a part of the registered Node ID.
671 33 The Node ID entered is out of the range.
51 The Node ID entered is using a part of the registered Node ID.
672 33 The Node ID entered is out of the range.
51 The Node ID entered is using a part of the registered Node ID.
673 50 The Node ID entered is not registered.
System Error Codes
Equipment Programming Error Codes
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 B-27
System Error Codes
Equipment Programming Error Codes
Program Code Occurred
FB Sub-
parameter Error Descriptions
801
49 Server Port Number must be entered when PC Operation
Type is set to Server, or Client Port Number must be entered
when PC Operation Type is set to Client.
49 If a CTI value (200~208) is assigned to the Logical Device in
Program 803, then Data Flow must be set to
Asynchronization.
49 When PC Operation Type is set to Client, the Client Port
Number cannot be deleted.
49 When PC Operation Type is set to Server, the Server Port
Number cannot be deleted.
50 When “Server” is selected, the Server Port number (FB04) is
not able to assign “0”. When “Client” is selected, the
connecting port number (FB06) is not able to assign “0”.
50 When “Server” is selected, the Server Port number (FB04) is
not able to assign “0”.
50 When “Client” is selected, the connecting port number (FB06)
is not able to assign “0”.
80 The values assigned in Program 803 conflict with related I/O
Logical and Physical Device assignments.
803
49 The selected port conflicts with existing devices, such as CTI,
etc.
50 The Physical Device assignment conflicts with existing serial
number assignments.
804 80 The values assigned in Program 803 conflict with related I/O
Logical and Physical Device assignments.
System Error Codes
Equipment Programming Error Codes
B-28 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 C-1
Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference C
This chapter is helps you cross-reference programs from Strata DK to CTX and vice versa. For example,
Program 03 of the DK is similar to Program 100 of the Strata CTX. Only programs that have similar
functions have been listed in these tables. The first table lists Strata DK program numbers in ascending
order and the next table, “Strata CTX to Strata DK” on page C-15 lists Strata CTX program numbers in
ascending order.
Strata DK to Strata CTX
The following numerical listing gives you the Strata DK program numbers and names. It cross-references
Strata CTX programs that are similar.
Strata DK Strata CTX
Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary Prg
No. Program Name FB
No. Summary
00 Software Check Code 1, 2 Level 1 Security Code,
Level 2 Security Code 110 Password Assignment 1 Password
03 Flexible PCB Cabinet
and Slot Assignments - Set PCB Code 100 Card Slot Assignment 1 Card Type
05 Flexible Access Code
Numbering - set Access Code 102 Flexible Numbering
Plan Assignment 1 Feature Code
*09
[PDN],[PhDN],DH,
ACD or Modem DID
Ext. Assignments
N/A Set DID Extension
Number 309 Direct Inward Dialing
Assignment
5
(1)Destination Type
(Day1,audio/speech)
(2)Destination
6
(1)Destination Type
(Day2,audio/speech)
(2)Destination
7
(1)Destination Type
(Night,audio/speech)
(2)Destination
8
(1)Destination Type
(Day1,data)
(2)Destination
9
(1)Destination Type
(Day2,data)
(2)Destination
10
(1)Destination Type
(Night,data)
(2)Destination
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX
C-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
10
System Assignments,
Part 3 of 3 LED 10-13 SMDI Station Number
Digit Length
579 Voice Mail Data for
System Assignment
5
Setting of caller
number digits sent to
VM unit
Part 2 of 3
LED 04
Voice Mail Message
Waiting Cancel Via Dial
#64/Automatic
7Setting of auto cancel
of VM and MW
LED 06
Voice Mail Identification
Code, Dual Multi-
frequency (DTMF)
Signal Time
8Dial sending time at
Voice Mail port
10-1 System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3
LED 07 Ring Transfer of CO
Line Allowed 103 Class of Service
Assignment 3
Whether to activate
Call Transfer With
Campon
LED 01 Tone First/Voice First 204 DKT Data Assignment 5 Tone first / Voice first
signaling
LED 01 Tone First/Voice First 206 Phantom DN
Parameter Assignment 2Tone first / Voice first
signaling
LED 03 Dial Pulse (DP) Make
Ratio 105 System Timer
Assignment 25 The assignment of
Dial Pulse Make Ratio
LED 04
Dual-tone Multi-
frequency (DTMF)
Signal Time
104 System Timer
Assignment 18
Dial sending time on
external line and
extension station
LED 06 CO Line Repeat
Ringing 204 DKT Data Assignment 11
Whether to activate
External Ringing
Repeat (Enable/
Disable)
LED 10
System Speed Dial
Override, Toll
Restriction
105 System Timer
Assignment 9
Destination
Restriction Override
by System Speed
Dial. Enable/Disable
LED 11 ABR Redial Time 104 System Timer
Assignment 15
Destination busy
detection time when
recalling the analog
external line
LED 11 ABR Redial Time 208 Station Timer
Assignment 3Automatic Busy
Redial’s Recall Timer
LED 12 Automatic Busy Redial
(ABR) Cycles 208 Station Timer
Assignment 1
Automatic Busy
Redial’s Retry Count
when Outgoing Call
Strata DK Strata CTX
Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary Prg
No. Program Name FB
No. Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 C-3
Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference
10-2 System Assignments,
Part 2 of 3
LED 16 Executive Override
Warning Tone
105 System Data
Assignment
1
Break in warning tone
of Executive Override
Enable or Disable
LED 05 Music-on-hold or Ring
Back Tone 3
Tones for the
transferred party after
the ringing transfer
takes place
LED 14 Privacy Override
Warning Tone 5
Privacy Override/
Attendant Monitor
warning Enable/
Disable
LED 11,
20
Dual-tone Multi-
Frequency (DTMF)
Tone, Padded Tone
Return
300 Trunk Assignment 11 DTMF Back Tone
10-3 System Assignments,
Part 3 of 3
LED 20 VM SMDI Message
desk Number
579 Voice Mail Data for
System Assignment
3Setting of output of
Message Desk No
LED 08 Call ID / Automatic
Number ID 4
Setting of output of
Class, ANI and DNIS
information
LED 09 SMDI Bellcore
Standard Version 6Set Blank Number for
VM unit
10-4 ACD/ISDN Parameters
LED 11 PRI ISDN Timer 302 ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment 24 T-WAIT
LED 12 BRI T-WAIT Timer 317 ISDN Basic Trunk
Assignment 18 T-WAIT
11 ACD Timing
Assignments 9 Call Disconnect Timer 104 System Data
Assignment 19 Automatic disconnect
timer
*11-0 E911/CAMA Trunk
Assignments LED 11 CAMA Operation
Enabled/Disabled 105 System Data
Assignment 8 offer of E911 Service
*11-2 CAMA Trunk Group
Hunting Assignment
Second
parameter
Hunt to CAMA Trunk
Group 550
Enhanced 911
Emergency Call Group
Assignment
1-8
OLG associated with
Emergency Call
Group Number
*11-5 CAMA Digits Send on
911 Calls N/A Set sending digits for
E911 105 System Data
Assignment 24 The sending dialing
digits as E911
*11-6 E911 Interdigital Timer - E911 Interdigital Timer 104 System Timer
Assignment 13 Dialed 9 and 11
Judgment Timer
*11-8
911 Special [DN]
Notification
Assignments
N/A Set [PDN],[PhDN] port
number 400 Emergency Call
Destination Assignment 2
Called Number of
Emergency Call(DN,
Pilot Number,Private
Number)
12 System Assignments,
Basic Timing
Code 9
K4RCU3/RRCS DTMF
Inter-digital Release
Time
104 System Timer
Assignment 9
Timer to permit dial
input for the
telephone and trunk
using DTMF
Code 4 Flashing Timing
308 Trunk Timer
Assignment
2 Short Flash Time
Code 4 Flashing Timing 3 Long Flash Time
Code 5 Pause After Flash 4 Pause time after flash
12-1 System Assignments,
Basic Timing N/A Standard Telephone
Ring Down Timer 216 Emergency Ring Down
Assignment 2
Emergency Ring
Down Timer setting of
an originating
terminal
Strata DK Strata CTX
Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary Prg
No. Program Name FB
No. Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX
C-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
*12 CESID Station
Information N/A Set CESID
200 Station Assignment 16 CESID
202 ISDN Basic Station
Assignment 20 CESID
13 Defining the Message
Center N/A Set Message Center 200 Station Assignment 22 Voice Mail to
Message Waiting
*13
Station To CAMA
Trunk Group
Assignment
N/A E911 Station CAMA
Trunk Number
200 Station Assignment 17 Emergency call group
of extension terminal
217 ISDN Individual Station
Data Assignment 6Emergency call group
of extension terminal
14-6 After Shift Service
Destination
Second
parameter Destination 540 ACD Pilot DN
Assignment 1
(1)After Shift Forward
Type
(2)After Shift Forward
Destination
15 Ground/Loop/Tie/DID
Line Options
5Tandem Line
Connection 103 Class of Service
Assignment 26 Tandem CO Line
Connection
Code 1,
Code 2
CO/DID/Tie Line Signal
CO/DID/Tie Dial Pulse
Rate
300 Trunk Assignment 4 Dial Mode
Code 7 Forced Account Code 306 Outgoing Line Group
Assignment 13
Set Trunk forced
Account Code need/
no need
Code 4 Automatic Release
Time 308 Trunk Timer
Assignment 1
Detect Automatic
Release / Calling
Party Control, and
detection time
16 Assign CO Line
Groups LED 01-20 Set CO Line 300 Trunk Assignment
2
Incoming Line Group.
Port became of
member that ILG
3
Outgoing Line Group.
Port became of
member that OLG
*16 ISDN Trunk Group
Type Assignment N/A Set Trunk Group Type
304 Incoming Line Group
Assignment 1 Analog/ISDN Type
306 Outgoing Line Group
Assignment 1 Analog/ISDN Type
17 DID/Tie Line Options
LED 02 Wink/Immediate 300 Trunk Assignment 6 Start Method
LED 03 DID Camp-on/Busy
304 Incoming Line Group
Assignment
17 Automatic Campon
on/off
LED 04 DID/Tie Second Dial
Tone Option 20 Called Dial Tone send
on/off
Strata DK Strata CTX
Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary Prg
No. Program Name FB
No. Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 C-5
Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference
28
DSS Console/
Attendant Telephone
Assignments
N/A Set DSS Console 214 DSS Console
Assignment
1Input DSS1 card slot
position
2Input DSS2 card slot
position
3Input DSS3 card slot
position
4Input DSS4 card slot
position
5Input DSS5 card slot
position
6Input DSS6 card slot
position
7Input DSS7 card slot
position
8Input DSS8 card slot
position
29
DSS Console and
Number Button
Assignments
LED 01-20 Set Feature Code 215 DSS Key Assignment 1-60
(1) Feature Code
(2)parameter1
(3)parameter2
(4)parameter3
(5)parameter4
(6)parameter5
*29 Add-on Modules
Button Assignments
01,02 The number of Add-on
Modules 204 DKT Data Assignment 4 Number of Add-on
Modules
LED 01-20 Set Feature Code 213 Add on Module Key
Assignment 1-20
(1) Feature Code
(2)parameter1
(3)parameter2
(4)parameter3
(5)parameter4
(6)parameter5
30 Station Class of
Service
LED 06 Automatic Busy
Redial(ABR) Access
103 Class of Service
Assignment
1Automatic Busy
Redial required
LED 10 Change DISA Security
Code 4 Change DISA Codes
LED 17 Do Not Disturb(DND)
Override 5DND Override -
Calling Party
6DND Override -
Called Party
9
Privilege as the
originator of
Executive Override
LED 18 Executive Override 21 Privacy Override
privilege
LED 08 Forced Account Code 32 Originator forced
Account Code
LED 14 Verify Account Code 33 Verified Account
Codes
Strata DK Strata CTX
Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary Prg
No. Program Name FB
No. Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX
C-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
30 Station Class of
Service
LED 16 Change Toll Restriction
Travelling Class Code
200 Station Assignment
23
Permission to
Change of Travelling
Class Override Code
LED 05 Speed Dial 30 Change System
Speed Dial
LED 07 Off-hook Call Announce
(OCA) Automatic 32 Automatic OCA
LED 05 Speed Dial 202 ISDN Basic Station
Assignment 24 Change System
Speed Dial
LED 03 Microphone Button On
at Start of Call 204 DKT Data Assignment
24 Set Microphone initial
value
LED 02 Mic Button - Locked/
Momentary 25 Set use or no use of
the microphone
*30 Telephone Group Page
Assignments
LED 01 Page Group A
502 Terminal Paging Group
Assignment 1~16 Paging Group
Number
LED 02 Page Group B
LED 03 Page Group C
LED 04 Page Group D
LED 05 Page Group E
LED 06 Page Group F
LED 07 Page Group G
LED 08 Page Group H
31 Station Class of
Service
LED 18
Executive and Privacy
Override Blocking
(Modem) 103 Class of Service
Assignment
10
Allowed or not
allowed as the
overridden party of
Executive Override
LED 10
All Call Page Allowed-
Digital and Electronic
Telephones
23 Whether to invoke
Emergency Paging
LED 05-08 Voice Mail (VM) Groups
1-4
209,
218 Voice Mail Hunt Group Message Center Hunt
for Voice Mail Port
LED 14
Off-hook Call Announce
(OCA) Handset or
Speaker
204 DKT Data Assignment
6Type of OCA if OCA
is allowed
LED 01 Handsfree Disabled 9
Whether to turn the
microphone ON or
OFF when a hands
free call is started
LED 02 Handsfree No Warning 10
Whether to ring a
splash tone when a
hands free call is
started. Enable or
Disable
LED 11 Busy Override (BOV)
Tone 27 Ring Over Busy
repetition timers
Strata DK Strata CTX
Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary Prg
No. Program Name FB
No. Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 C-7
Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference
31 Station Class of
Service
LED 10 All Call Page Allowed 502 Terminal Paging Group
Assignment 17 All Page Group
LED 15
Toshiba Stratagy,
Stratagy DK and/or VP
Integration (A Tone/D
Tone)
580 Voice Mail Data
Assignment
2
whether to send A,D
tone or not send for
Voice Mail
LED 19,
20
19:Toshiba Stratagy/
Stratagy DK/VP (B No
Station)
20:Toshiba Stratagy/VP
(B+Station Number)
3
whether to send only
B Tone, Not Send, or
B Tone and Extension
Number for Voice Mail
LED 17 End-to-end Signal RCV
(VM) 4
whether send End to
End Signal or not
send for Voice Mail
Port
LED 03
Off-hook Call
Announce(OCA)
Enabled (Receive)
103 Class of Service
Assignment 38 Can Originate OCA
*31 Group Pick up
Assignments
LED
01~20 Pickup Group 1~20 210 Call Pickup Group
Assignment 1~20 Pickup Group 1~32
32 Automatic Preference N/A set Automatic
Preference type 204 DKT Data Assignment 13 Programmed with one
of the preference type
33 [PDN]/[PhDN]Station
Hunting N/A - 209 Station Hunting Group
Assignment 1 Hunt Method
33 [PDN]/[PhDN] Station
Hunting N/A Set Station Hunting
member 218 Station Hunting Group
Members Assignment
2Set Hunting Group
Member DN
3DN set type(modify/
insert)
*33 [PhDN] Owner
Telephone Assignment N/A Set Owner Station
Logical Port No. 206 Phantom DN
Parameter Assignment 1 Owner PDN
34 Hold Recall Timing N/A Set Recall Timing 208 Station Timer
Assignment 4 On-hold recall timer
35 Station Class of
Service LED 17 Continuous DTMF
Tones Off 204 DKT Data Assignment 19 Set Continuous
DTMF
37 Ring Transfer (Camp-
on) Recall Time N/A Set Ring Transfer
Recall Time 208 Station Timer
Assignment 7No Answer Timer of
Ringing Transfer
*37 Park Recall Timing - PARK TIME=Seconds 104 System Timer
Assignment 3Park timer
38
Digital and Electronic
Telephone Keystrip
Type
N/A The appropriate code 204 DKT Data Assignment 2 Feature Key Pattern
*38 Standard Telephone
Ring-Down Destination N/A Set Destination Port
No. 216 Emergency Ring Down
Assignment 3Emergency Ring
Down Destination
39 Flexible Button
Assignments LED 01-20 Set Feature 205 Station Feature Key
Assignment 1-20
(1) Feature Code
(2)parameter1
(3)parameter2
(4)parameter3
(5)parameter4
(6)parameter5
Strata DK Strata CTX
Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary Prg
No. Program Name FB
No. Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX
C-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
41 Station Outgoing Call
Restriction
Restrict stations from
making outgoing calls
306 FRL 9 Assign FRL.
200 FRL Assignments 6
*41-1
T1 Span Frame and
Line Code
Assignments
LED 02 T1 Span Line Code
Assignments
315 T1 Trunk Card Data
Assignment
1 Coding Format
LED 01 2 Set frame format
*41-3
T1 Span Transmit
Level Pad
Assignments
N/A Set Transmit Pad 5 Set send PAD value
*41-4
T1 Span Receive
Level Pad
Assignments
N/A Set Receive Pad 4 Set receive PAD
value
*42 Clock Source
1 Set Primary Clock
105 System Data
Assignment
21 Primary Clock Source
2 Set Secondary Clock 22 Secondary Clock
Source
43 0 + Credit Card Dialing
Option LED 01-20 restrict/not restrict 111 Destination Restriction
Level Assignment 1Credit Card Calling
Enable/Disable
*43-1 D-Channel Control and
NFAS Assignments N/A D-Channel Circuit No. 302 ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment 7 D channel position.
*43-3 D-Channel Control and
NFAS Assignments N/A
Network PRI Interface
PRI Interface ID Code 302 ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment 6 I/f ID Number
Network PRI Interface
Assignment 316
DCH Shared ISDN
Primary Trunk
Assignment
2 I/f ID Number
44-1-
8
Toll Restriction/
Traveling Class
Override Codes
- Toll Restriction Code 510 Class Of Service
Override Assignment 1 COS Override Code
*44
BRI Service Profile
Identifier (SPID)
Parameters
N/A SPID Type,
SPID Value 317 ISDN Basic Trunk
Assignment
14 SPID Initialize Type
15 Display for ISDN
SPID Initialize Type
16 SPID Value1
17 SPID Value2
*45-2
*45-3
LCR/Toll Restriction
Bypass for Special
Numbers that Do Not
Begin with */#
LCR/Toll Restriction
Bypass For Special
Numbers that Begin
with */#
-Digit Code
Digit String 530
Toll Restriction / LCR
Screening Table
Assignment
1
Toll Restriction / LCR
table Code(set / no
set)
2 Toll Restriction Action
3Least Cost Routing
Action
46-2
46-6
Toll Restriction
Allowed/Denied Area
Codes by Class
Toll Restriction
Allowed/Denied Local
Office Codes Assigned
by Class
Third
parameter Area Codes 533 Toll Restriction Table
Assignment
1 Dial String
2 Add/Delete codes
47
Toll Restriction
Exception Office
Codes Assigned by
Area Codes
- Office Codes 534
Exceptional Toll
Restriction Table
Assignment
1 Exception Dial Strings
2 Add/Delete codes
50-1 LCR Parameters LED 01 Enable System LCR 103 Class Of Service
Assignment 29 LCR feature
availability
Strata DK Strata CTX
Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary Prg
No. Program Name FB
No. Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 C-9
Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference
50-2 LCR Home Area Code - Set Home Area Code 520 LCR Parameters
Assignment 1 Local Area Code
*50
Caller ID Circuit
Assignments to CO
Line PCBs
N/A Set Caller ID circuit
number 313 Caller ID Assignment 3 Class Equipment No.
53
LCR Schedule
Assignments for LCR
Plans
First
parameter LCR Plan 523
LCR Route Plan
Schedule Table
Assignment
2 LCR Time of Day
Second
parameter Schedule 3 Station LCR Group
Number
Third
parameter
LCR Station Group
Number 524
LCR Route Table to
Route Definition
Assignment
1LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.1
Fourth
parameter
Route Definition
Numbers (First Pick) 2LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.2
Fourth
parameter
Route Definition
Numbers (Second Pick) 3LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.3
Fourth
parameter
Route Definition
Numbers (Third Pick) 4LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.4
Fifth
parameter
Route Definition
Numbers (Fourth Pick) 5LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.5
6LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.6
529
LCR Route Plan
Schedule Table Time
Zone Assignment
2 LCR Time Zone
Fourth
parameter Start Time 3 set Start Time for
Time Zone
54 LCR Route Definition
Tables
First
parameter LCR Plan No.
525 LCR Route Definition
Table Assignment
1Outgoing Line Group
- Number
Second
parameter
Route Definition
Numbers
2Digit Modification
Index
55 LCR Modified Digits - Modified Digits Table 525 LCR Route Definition
Table Assignment 2Digit Modification
Index
55-0
Delete Number of
Digits From the Front
of Dialed
Second
parameter Quantity of Digits 526 LCR Digit Modification
Table Assignment 1 Digits to be deleted
55-1
Add Digits Before and/
or After the Dialed
Number
Third
parameter Digits added 526 LCR Digit Modification
Table Assignment 2 Add Leading Digits
55-2
Add Digits Before and/
or After the Dialed
Number
Third
parameter Digits added 526 LCR Digit Modification
Table Assignment 3 Add Trailing Digits
56 LCR Station Group
Assignments
Second
parameter Set LCR Station Group
200 Station Assignment 7 Station LCR Group
Number
202 ISDN Basic Station
Assignment 8 LCR Group Number
58-1 DK424 Attendant
Console Series
First
parameter
Attendant Console
Overflow Timer 404 Attendant Group
Assignment 3 Overflow Timer
Strata DK Strata CTX
Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary Prg
No. Program Name FB
No. Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX
C-10 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
58-5
Attendant Console
Overflow Destination
Assignments
Second
parameter Overflow Destination 204 DKT Data Assignment 28 Overflow destination
of attendant
58-5 DK424 Attendant
Console Series
Second
parameter
Attendant Console
Overflow Destination
Assignment
404 Attendant Group
Assignment 4Overflow destination
of attendant group
60-1 SMDR Data Output
Options LED 01
Caller ID, ANI and
DNIS data will be sent
from the system SMDR
port
512 SMDR For System
Assignment 1Caller ID field
indication
60-1 SMDR Data Output
Options LED 01
Caller ID, ANI and
DNIS data will be sent
from the system SMDR
port.
512 SMDR For System
Assignment 3 ANI field indicate
60-1 SMDR Data Output
Options LED 01
Caller ID, ANI and
DNIS data will be sent
from the system SMDR
port
513 SMDR For ILG
Assignment 2 DNIS field indication
60-2 SMDR Threshold Time 2 SMDR Threshold Time 104 System Timer
Assignment 5Valid Call timer on
SMDR
60-3 SMDR Incoming/
Outgoing Calls -SMDR Output when a
call is completed 513 SMDR For ILG
Assignment 3
Output of SMDR
record for the
incoming call
60-3 SMDR Incoming/
Outgoing Calls -SMDR Output when a
call is completed 514 SMDR For OLG
Assignment 2
Output of SMDR
record for the
outgoing call
60-4
Forced/Voluntary
Account Code Digit
Length
-
Forced/Voluntary
Account Code Digit
Length
570 Account Code Digit
Length Assignment 1
Forced/Voluntary
Account Code
Verified Digit Length
60-7 Credit Card Call Digit
Length -Credit Card Call Digit
Length 105 System Data
Assignment 7Minimum Dial Digits
of Credit Card Calling
*60 BRI Line/Station
Operation Assignment LED 01-04 Set TE/NT 317 ISDN Basic Trunk
Assignment 1BRI Equipment
Number
*61 Analog Trunk Service
for ISDN 1 Bearer Service
304 Incoming Line Group
Assignment 12
Bearer Capability
3.1kHzAudio or
Speech
306 Outgoing Line Group
Assignment 11 Number of DID digits
received from CO.
*62 Non-ISDN Station
Bearer Service 1 Bearer Service 200 Station Assignment 14
Bearer Capability
3.1kHzAudio /
Speech
*64-2 Number of DID/DNIS
Digits for Trunk Groups
Third
parameter
Number of DID
Incoming Call Digits per
Trunk Group
304 Incoming Line Group
Assignment 11 DID Contract Beam
Count
*66-1 Channel Group
Number Parameters
Second
parameter Set Channel Group No. 302 ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment
1Create Channel
Group Number
3Set ILG
4Set OLG
Strata DK Strata CTX
Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary Prg
No. Program Name FB
No. Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 C-11
Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference
*66-2
Call-by-Call Trunk
Group Codes and
Network ID
323 Call By Call Service
Assignment 6 Incoming Line Group
323 Call By Call Service
Assignment 7 Outgoing Line Group
Second
parameter Set Facility Code
323 Call By Call Service
Assignment
3 Facility code Value
Third
parameter Set Service Parameters 4 Service Parameters
323 Call By Call Service
Assignment 2 Kind of Line Service
*66-3 Channel Group/Trunk
Parameters LED 03-06 Trunk Group Type 302 ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment 1Set ISDN Trunk
Group Number
*66-4
Call-by-Call Trunk
Group Codes and
Network ID
N/A Set Network ID Code 323 Call By Call Service
Assignment 5Network ID
*67-2
Call Types for ISDN
Trunk Group
Supported
LED 01 “Set
“”Speech”Speech””“ 302 ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment 8
(1)Bearer Capability
Speech.
(2)Channel identifier
number slot map,
channel type for
Speech
LED 02 “Set “”3.1 kHz
Audio”Audio”” 302 ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment 9
(1)Bearer Capability
3.1kHzAudio.
(2)Channel identifier
number slot map,
channel type. for
3.1kHz Audio
LED 03 “Set “”64 kbps.
Data”Data””“ 302 ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment 11
(1)Bearer Capability
unrestricted digital
Information 64kbps.
(2)Channel identifier
number slot map,
channel type for
unrestricted digital
Information 64kHz.
LED 04
“Set “”56 kbps.
Data”Data””Data”Data””
”
302 ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment 12
(1)Bearer Capability
unrestricted digital
Information 56kbps.
(2)Channel identifier
number slot map,
channel type for
unrestricted digital
Information 56kHz
*67-3 Call Types for ISDN
Trunk Groups N/A Set Minimum number of
B-channels reserved 323 Call By Call Service
Assignment
8Minimum number of
Bch in Time Zone1
10 Minimum number of
Bch in Time Zone2
12 Minimum number of
Bch in Time Zone3
Strata DK Strata CTX
Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary Prg
No. Program Name FB
No. Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX
C-12 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
*67-4
ISDN Trunk Groups
Maximum Channel
Reservation
N/A Set Maximum number
of B-channels reserved 323 Call By Call Service
Assignment
9Maximum number of
Bch in Time Zone1
11 Maximum number of
Bch in Time Zone2
13 Maximum number of
Bch in Time Zone3
*67-5 Multiple Time Zone
Settings N/A Set Start Time for Time
Zone 324 Call By Call Time Zone
Assignment
1Start time of Time
Zone1
2Start time of Time
Zone2
3Start time of Time
Zone3
*68-1 Calling Number ID First
Parameter
Trunk Group
321
ISDN Calling Number
Identification
Assignment
1Default calling
Number
1. Outgoing
2. Outgoing Status
Change
3. Incoming
*69-1 CNIS
First
Parameter Station Port
321 ISDN Calling Number OLG Number
Second
Parameter Channel Group
Third
Parameter Index Number
*69-2 CNIS Special Number
First
Parameter Index Number
322 CNIS Presentation
Special Number
1 Source Type
Second
Parameter Calling Party Number 2 Source Number
3 Calling Party Number
69 Verify Account Codes - Verify Account Codes 506 Verified Account Code
Assignment 1
Whether set or no set
as Verified Account
Code
71-4 DNIS N/A
DNIS and ANI Only
Lines Voice Mail ID
Assignments
309 Direct inward dialing
assignment 11 Voice Mail ID of DNIS
71-5 DNIS N/A DNIS Number Name
Display 309 Direct inward dialing
assignment 12 Destination Name of
DNIS
77-1
Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU
LED 20 Door Lock Time 104 System Timer
Assignment 12 Electric door lock
unlocking time
Strata DK Strata CTX
Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary Prg
No. Program Name FB
No. Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 C-13
Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference
77-1
Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU.
LED 05 MOH/NT Relay 109 External Music On Hold
Source Assignment
1
Set External Music
On Hold1 on ACTU/
BECU connected or
not connected
2
Set External Music
On Hold2 on BIOU1
connected or not
connected
3
Set External Music
On Hold3 on BIOU1
connected or not
connected
4
Set External Music
On Hold4 on BIOU1
connected or not
connected
5
Set External Music
On Hold5 on BIOU2
connected or not
connected
6
Set External Music
On Hold6 on BIOU2
connected or not
connected
7
set External Music On
Hold7 on BIOU2
connected or not
connected
77-1
Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU.
LED 07 Door Lock Relay/
External Page Relay 508 Door Lock Control
Assignment 2Set Relay Number of
BIOU
LED 08
Door Phone Ring On
External Page in Night
mode
576
Door Phone Ring On
External Paging In
Night Mode
Assignment
1
Set External Paging
Group for termination
in Night Mode
LED 16-19
Port Number/Door
Phone/Lock Control
Units
507 Door Phone
Assignment 0
DDCB Equipment
Number that connects
to Door Phone
LED 16-19
Port Number/Door
Phone/Lock Control
Units
507 Door Phone
Assignment 1Deleted Door Phone
Number
77-2
Door Phone Busy
Signal/Door Lock
Assignments
LED 20 Door Phone Ring Count 507 Door Phone
Assignment 4 Ring Duration
LED
04,08,12,1
6
Door Lock Assignments 508 Door Lock Control
Assignment 3DDCB Equipment
Number
79,
*79
Door Phone Ringing,
Door Phone to [DN]
Flashing Assignments
LED 1-
12(79) Door Phone Number
507 Door Phone
Assignment
6(1)Destination Type of
DAY1
LED 1-
12(79) Door Phone Number 6 (2)Destination
Number of DAY1
81-83
Ground/LOOP Start/
CO Line Station
Ringing
LED 01-20 Set Ringing Station at
DAY 310
Direct Inward
Termination
Assignment
1
(1)Destination Type
(Day1)
(2)Destination
Strata DK Strata CTX
Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary Prg
No. Program Name FB
No. Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX
C-14 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
84-86
Ground/LOOP Start/
CO Line Station
Ringing
LED 01-20 Set Ringing Station at
DAY2 310
Direct Inward
Termination
Assignment
2
(1)Destination Type
(Day2)
(2)Destination
87-89
Ground/LOOP Start/
CO Line Station
Ringing
LED 01-20 Set Ringing Station at
NIGHT 310
Direct Inward
Termination
Assignment
3
(1)Destination Type
(Night)
(2)Destination
Legend: N/A = Not Applicable
Strata DK Strata CTX
Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary Prg
No. Program Name FB
No. Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 C-15
Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK
The following numerical listing gives you the Strata CTX program numbers and titles and cross-reference
Strata DK programs that are similar.
Note Only programs having a similar Strata DK program have been listed in the table below.
Strata CTX Strata DK
Prg
No. Program Name FB
No Summary Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary
100 Card Slot Assignment 1 Card Type 03 Flexible PCB Cabinet
and Slot Assignments - Set PCB Code
102 Flexible Numbering
Plan Assignment 1 Feature Code 05 Flexible Access Code
Numbering - set Access Code
103 Class of Service
Assignment
1Automatic Busy
Redial 30 Station Class of
Service LED 06 Automatic Busy
Redial(ABR) Access
3Call Transfer With
Campon 10-1 System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3 LED 07 Ring Transfer of CO
Line Allowed
4Changing DISA
Security Code
30 Station Class of
Service
LED 10 Change DISA Security
Code
5DND Override -
Calling Party LED 17 Do Not Disturb(DND)
Override
6DND Override - Called
Party
9 Executive Override LED 18 Executive Override
10 Overridden party of
Executive Override 31 Station Class of
Service LED 18
Executive and Privacy
Override Blocking
(Modem)
21 Privacy Override 30 Station Class of
Service LED 18 Executive Override
23 Emergency Paging 31 Station Class of
Service LED 10
All Call Page Allowed-
Digital and Electronic
Telephones
26 Tandem CO Line
Connection 15 Ground/Loop/Tie/DID
Line Options 5Tandem Line
Connection
29 LCR feature 50-1 LCR Parameters LED 01 Enable System LCR
32 Forced Account Code 30 Station Class of
Service
LED 08 Forced Account Code
33 Account Code Verify LED 14 Verify Account Code
38 Can originate OCA 31 Station Class of
Service LED 03
Off-hook Call
Announce(OCA)
Enabled (Receive)
104 System Timer
Assignment
3 Park timer *37 Park Recall Timing - PARK TIME=Seconds
5Valid call timer on
SMDR 60-2 SMDR Threshold Time 2 SMDR Threshold Time
9
Timer to permit dial
input for the telephone
and trunk using DTMF
12 System Assignments,
Basic Timing Code 9
K4RCU3/RRCS DTMF
Inter-digital Release
Time
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK
C-16 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
104 System Timer
Assignment
12 Door lock unlock timer 77-1
Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU
LED 20 Door Lock Time
13 9+11 Judgment Timer 11-6 E911 Interdigital Timer - E911 Interdigital Timer
15
Destination busy
detection time when
recalling the analog
external line 10-1 System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3
LED 11 ABR Redial Time
18
Dial sending time on
external line and
extension station
LED 04
Dual-tone Multi-
frequency (DTMF)
Signal Time
19 Automatic disconnect
timer 11 ACD Timing
Assignments 9 Call Disconnect Timer
105 System Data
Assignment
1Warning tone of
Executive Override
10-2 System Assignments,
Part 2 of 3
LED 16 Executive Override
Warning Tone
3
Tones for the
transferred party after
the ringing transfer
takes place
LED 05 Music-on-hold or Ring
Back Tone
5
Privacy Override/
Attendant Monitor
warning
LED 14 Privacy Override
Warning Tone
7Minimum Dial Digits of
Credit Card Calling 60-7 Credit Card Call Digit
Length -Credit Card Call Digit
Length
8 E911 Service *11-0 E911/CAMA Trunk
Assignments LED 11 CAMA Operation
Enabled/Disabled
9
Destination Restriction
Override by System
Speed Dial.
10-1 System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3 LED 10
System Speed Dial
Override, Toll
Restriction
21 Primary Clock Source
*42 Clock Source
1 Set Primary Clock
22 Secondary Clock
Source 2 Set Secondary Clock
24 E911 digits *11-5 CAMA Digits Send on
911 Calls N/A. Set sending digits for
E911
25 Dial Pulse Make Ratio 10-1 System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3 LED 03 Dial Pulse (DP) Make
Ratio
109
External Music on
Hold Source
Assignment
1External Music On
Hold1 on BCTU 77-1
Peripheral Options
(Door Phones) RSIU/
RSIS/RMDS, PIOU/
PIOUS/IMDU, PEPU
LED 05 MOH/NT Relay
2External Music On
Hold2 on BIOU1
Strata CTX Strata DK
Prg
No. Program Name FB
No Summary Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 C-17
Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference
109
External Music on
Hold Source
Assignment
3External Music On
Hold3 on BIOU1.
77-1
Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU
LED 05 MOH/NT Relay
4External Music On
Hold4 on BIOU1.
5External Music On
Hold5 on BIOU2
6External Music On
Hold6 on BIOU2
7External Music On
Hold7 on BIOU2
110 Password
Assignment 1 Password 00 Software Check Code 1, 2 Level 1 Security Code,
Level 2 Security Code
111
Destination
Restriction Level
Assignment
1 Credit Card Calling 43 0 + Credit Card Dialing
Option LED 01-20 Restrict/Not Restrict
200 Station Assignment
22 Message Waiting to
Voice Mail 13 Defining the Message
Center N/A Set Message Center
7Station LCR Group
Number 56 LCR Station Group
Assignments
Second
Parameter Set LCR Station Group
14 Bearer Capability
3.1kHzAudio / Speech *62 Non-ISDN Station
Bearer Service 1 Bearer Service
15 Display DN - The same parameter
does not exist in DK424 --
16 CESID *12 CESID Station
Information N/A Set CESID
17 Emergency call group
of extension terminal *13 Station To CAMA Trunk
Group Assignment N/A E911 Station CAMA
Trunk Number
22
Message Waiting
Center Port for Voice
Mail Port
13 Defining the Message
Center LED 05-08 Voice Mail (VM)
Groups 1-4
23
Permission to Change
of Travelling Class
Override Code
30 Station Class of
Service LED 16 Change Toll Restriction
Travelling Class Code
30 Change System
Speed Dial 30 Station Class of
Service LED 05
System Speed Dial
(SSD) (Only Port 000
can change SSD)
32 Automatic OCA 30 Station Class of
Service LED 07
Off-hook Call
Announce (OCA)
Automatic
202 ISDN Basic Station
Assignment
8 LCR Group Number 56 LCR Station Group
Assignments
Second
Parameter Set LCR Station Group
20 CESID *12 CESID Station
Information N/A Set CESID
24 Change System
Speed Dial
Station Class of
Service LED 05 Speed Dial (Only Port
000 can change SSD)
Strata CTX Strata DK
Prg
No. Program Name FB
No Summary Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK
C-18 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
204 DKT Data
Assignment
2 Feature Key Pattern 38
Digital and Electronic
Telephone Keystrip
Type
N/A The appropriate code
4Number of Add-on
Modules *29 Add-on Modules Button
Assignments 1,2 The number of Add-on
Modules
5Tone first / Voice first
signaling 10-1 System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3 LED 01 Tone First/Voice First
6 Type of OCA 31 Station Class of
Service LED 14
Off-hook Call
Announce (OCA)
Handset or Speaker
9
Microphone ON or
OFF when a hands
free call is started
31 Station Class of
Service LED 01 Handsfree Disabled
10
Whether to ring a
splash tone when a
hands free call is
started.
31 Station Class of
Service LED 02 Handsfree No Warning
11
Activate External
Ringing Repeat
(Enable/Disable)
10-1 System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3 LED 06 CO Line Repeat
Ringing
13 Off hook preference
type 32 Automatic Preference N/A set Automatic
Preference type
19 Set Continuous DTMF 35 Station Class of
Service LED 17 Continuous DTMF
Tones Off
24 Set Microphone initial
value 30 Station Class of
Service LED 03 Microphone Button On
at Start of Call
25 Enable/Disable the
microphone 30 Station Class of
Service LED 02 Mic Button - Locked/
Momentary
27 Ring Over Busy
repetition timers 31 Station Class of
Service LED 11 Busy Override (BOV)
Tone
28 Overflow destination
of attendant 58-5
Attendant Console
Overflow Destination
Assignments
Second
Parameter Overflow Destination
205 Station Feature Key
Assignment 1-20
The Feature Key
assignment allows
each key on the
telephone to be
addressed and
assigned a code
representing the
function to be
performed. Some
feature keys require
additional parameters
to completely define
the key.
39 Flexible Button
Assignments LED 01-20 Set Feature
206
Phantom DN
Parameter
Assignment
1 Owner PDN *33 [PhDN] Owner
Telephone Assignment N/A Set Owner Station
Logical Port No.
2Tone first / Voice first
signaling 10-1 System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3 LED 01 Tone First/Voice First
9
Message Waiting
Center Port for Voice
Mail Port
31 Station Class of
Service LED 05-08 Voice Mail (VM)
Groups 1-4
Strata CTX Strata DK
Prg
No. Program Name FB
No Summary Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 C-19
Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference
208 Station Timer
Assignment
1
Automatic Busy
Redial’s Retry Count
when Outgoing Call
10-1 System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3 LED 12 Automatic Busy Redial
(ABR) Cycles
3Automatic Busy
Redial’s Recall Timer 10-1 System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3 LED 11 ABR Redial Time
4 On-hold recall timer 34 Hold Recall Timing N/A Set Recall Timing
7No Answer Timer of
Ringing Transfer 37 Ring Transfer (Camp-
on) Recall Time N/A Set Ring Transfer
Recall Time
209 Station Hunting
Group Assignment 1 Hunt Method 33 [PDN]/[PhDN]Station
Hunting N/A -
210 Call Pickup Group
Assignment 1~20 Pickup Group 1~20 *31 Group Pick up
Assignments LED 01~20 Pickup Group 1~20
213 Add on Module Key
Assignment 1-20
The Feature Key
assignment allows
each key on the
telephone to be
addressed and
assigned a code
representing the
function to be
performed. Some
feature keys require
additional parameters
to completely define
the key.
*29 Add-on Modules Button
Assignments LED 01-20 Set Feature Code
214 DSS Console
Assignment
1DSS1 card slot
position
28
DSS Console/
Attendant Telephone
Assignments
N/A Set DSS Console
2DSS2 card slot
position
3DSS3 card slot
position
4DSS4 card slot
position
5DSS5 card slot
position
6DSS6 card slot
position
7DSS7 card slot
position
8DSS8 card slot
position
215 DSS Key Assignment 1-60
The Feature Key
assignment allows
each key on the
telephone to be
addressed and
assigned a code
representing the
function to be
performed. Some
feature keys require
additional parameters
to completely define
the key.
29
DSS Console and
Number Button
Assignments
LED 01-20 Set Feature Code
Strata CTX Strata DK
Prg
No. Program Name FB
No Summary Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK
C-20 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
216 Emergency Ring
Down Assignment
2Emergency Ring
Down Timer setting of
an originating terminal
12-1 System Assignments,
Basic Timing N/A Standard Telephone
Ring Down Timer
3*38
Standard Telephone
Ring-Down Destination N/A Set Destination Port
No.
217
ISDN Individual
Station Data
Assignment
6Emergency call group
of extension terminal *13 Station To CAMA Trunk
Group Assignment N/A E911 Station CAMA
Trunk Number
218
Station Hunting
Group Members
Assignment
2Hunting Group
Member DN 33 [PDN]/[PhDN] Station
Hunting N/A Set Station Hunting
member
3 DN set type
300 Trunk Assignment
2Incoming Line Group
Assignment 16 Assign CO Line Groups LED 01-20 Set CO Line
3Outgoing Line Group
Assignment
4 Dial Mode 15 Ground/Loop/Tie/DID
Line Options
Code 1
Code 2
CO/DID/Tie Line Signal
CO/DID/Tie Dial Pulse
Rate
6 Start Method 17 DID/Tie Line Options LED 02 Wink/Immediate
11 DTMF Back Tone 10-2 System Assignments,
Part 2 of 3 LED 11, 20
Dual-tone Multi-
Frequency (DTMF)
Tone, Padded Tone
Return
302 ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment
1Create Channel
Group Number *66-1 Channel Group
Number Parameters
Second
Parameter Set Channel Group No.
3Set ILG
4 Set OLG
6 PSTN ID Number *43-3 D-Channel Control and
NFAS Assignments N/A
Network PRI Interface
PRI Interface ID Code
7 D channel position. D-Channel Circuit No.
8
(1) Bearer Capability
Speech.
*67-2
Call Types for ISDN
Trunk Group Supported LED 01 “Set “”Speech”
(2) Channel identifier
number slot map/
channel type for
Speech
LED 01 “Set “”Speech”“
9
(1) Bearer Capability
3.1kHzAudio. LED 02 "Set ""3.1 kHz
Audio”Audio”"
(2) Channel identifier
number slot map/
channel type for
3.1kHz Audio.
LED 02 "Set ""3.1 kHz Audio""
11
(1) Bearer Capability
unrestricted digital
Information 64kbps.
LED 03 "Set ""64 kbps. Data""
Strata CTX Strata DK
Prg
No. Program Name FB
No Summary Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 C-21
Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference
302 ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment
11
(2) Channel identifier
number slot map/
channel type for
unrestricted digital
Information 64kHz
*67-2 Call Types for ISDN
Trunk Group Supported
LED 03 "Set ""64 kbps. Data""
12
(1) Bearer Capability
unrestricted digital
Information 56kbps.
LED 04 "Set ""56 kbps. Data""
12
(2) Channel identifier
number slot map,
channel type for
unrestricted digital
Information 56kHz
LED 04 "Set ""56 kbps. Data""
302 ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment 24 T-WAIT Timer 10-4 ACD/ISDN Parameters LED 11 PRI ISDN Timer
304 Incoming Line Group
Assignment
1 Analog/ISDN Type *16 ISDN Trunk Group
Type Assignment N/A Set Trunk Group Type
11 Number of DID Digits
received from CO *64-2 Number of DID/DNIS
Digits for Trunk Groups
Third
Parameter
Number of DID
Incoming Call Digits
per Trunk Group
12
Bearer Capability
3.1kHzAudio or
Speech
*61 Analog Trunk Service
for ISDN 1 Bearer Service
17 Automatic Campon
17 DID/Tie Line Options
LED 03 DID Camp-on/Busy
20 Called Dial Tone send LED 04 DID/Tie Second Dial
Tone Option
306 Outgoing Line Group
Assignment
1 Analog/ISDN Type *16 ISDN Trunk Group
Type Assignment N/A Set Trunk Group Type
11 Bearer Capability
3.1kHzAudio / Speech *61 Analog Trunk Service
for ISDN 1 Bearer Service
13 Set Trunk forced
Account Code 15 Ground/LOOP/Tie/DID
Line Options Code 7 Forced Account Code
308 Trunk Timer
Assignment
1
Detect Automatic
Release / Calling
Party Control, and
detection time
15 Ground/LOOP/Tie/DID
Line Options Code 4 Automatic Release
Time
2 Short Flash Time
12 System Assignments,
Basic Timing
Code 4 Flashing Timing
3 Long Flash Time Code 4 Flashing Timing
4 Pause time after flash Code 5 Pause After Flash
309 Direct Inward Dialing
Assignment
5
(1) Destination Type
(Day1,audio/speech)
*09
[PDN], [PhDN], DH,
ACD or Modem DID
Ext. Assignments
N/A Set DID Extension
Number
(2) Destination
6
(1) Destination Type
(Day2,audio/speech)
(2) Destination
7
(1) Destination Type
(Night,audio/speech)
(2) Destination
Strata CTX Strata DK
Prg
No. Program Name FB
No Summary Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK
C-22 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
309 Direct Inward Dialing
Assignment
8
(1) Destination Type
(Day1,data)
*09
[PDN], [PhDN], DH,
ACD or Modem DID
Ext. Assignments
N/A Set DID Extension
Number
(2) Destination
9
(1) Destination Type
(Day2,data)
(2) Destination
10
(1) Destination Type
(Night,data)
(2) Destination
11 Voice Mail ID of DNIS 71-4 DNIS N/A
DNIS and ANI Only
Lines Voice Mail ID
Assignments
12 Destination Name of
DNIS 71-5 DNIS N/A DNIS Number Name
Display
310
Direct Inward
Termination
Assignment
1
(1) Destination Type
(Day1) 81-83
Ground/LOOP Start/
CO Line Station
Ringing
LED 01-20 Set Ringing Station at
DAY
(2) Destination
2
(1) Destination Type
(Day2) 84-86
Ground/LOOP Start/
CO Line Station
Ringing
LED 01-20 Set Ringing Station at
DAY2
(2) Destination
3
(1) Destination Type
(Night) 87-89
Ground/LOOP Start/
CO Line Station
Ringing
LED 01-20 Set Ringing Station at
NIGHT
(2) Destination
313 Caller ID Assignment 3 Class Equipment
Number *50
Caller ID Circuit
Assignments to CO
Line PCBs
N/A Set Caller ID circuit
number
315 T1 Trunk Card Data
Assignment
1 Coding Format *41-1
T1 Span Frame and
Line Code
Assignments
LED 02 T1 Span Line Code
Assignments
2 Set frame format *41-1
T1 Span Frame and
Line Code
Assignments
LED 01 T1 Span Framing
Assignments
4 Set receive PAD value *41-4 T1 Span Receive Level
Pad Assignments N/A Set Receive Pad
5 Set send PAD value *41-3 T1 Span Transmit
Level Pad Assignments N/A Set Transmit Pad
316
DCH Shared ISDN
Primary Trunk
Assignment
2 I/f ID Number *43-3 D-Channel Control and
NFAS Assignments N/A Network PRI Interface
Assignment
317 ISDN Basic Trunk
Assignment
1BRI Equipment
Number *60 BRI Line/Station
Operation Assignment LED 01-04 Set TE/NT
14 SPID Initialize Type
*44
BRI Service Profile
Identifier (SPID)
Parameters
N/A SPID Type,
SPID Value
15 Display for ISDN SPID
Initialize Type
16 SPID Value1
17 SPID Value2
18 T-WAIT 10-4 ACD/ISDN Parameters LED 12 BRI T-WAIT Timer
Strata CTX Strata DK
Prg
No. Program Name FB
No Summary Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 C-23
Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference
321
ISDN Calling Number
Identification
Assignment
1Default calling
Number *68-2 Outbound CNIS
Parameters N/A Set CPN
321
ISDN Calling Number
Identification
Assignment
1 OLG Number
*68-1 Calling Number ID First
Parameter
Trunk Group
1. Outgoing
2. Outgoing Status
Change
3. Incoming
*69-1 CNIS
First
Parameter Station Port
Second
Parameter Channel Group
322 CNIS Presentation
Special Number
1 Source Type
*69-2 CNIS Special Number
First
Parameter Index Number
2 Source Number Second
Parameter Calling Party Number
3 Calling Party Number
323 Call by Call Service
Assignment
2 Kind of Line Service *66-3 Channel Group/Trunk
Parameters LED 03-06 Trunk Group Type
3 Facility code Value *66-2
Call-by-Call Trunk
Group Codes and
Network ID
N/A Set Facility Code
4 Service Parameters *66-2
Call-by-Call Trunk
Group Codes and
Network ID
N/A Set Service
Parameters
5 Network ID *66-4
Call-by-Call Trunk
Group Codes and
Network ID
N/A Set Network ID Code
6 Incoming Line Group *66-1 Channel Group
Number Parameters N/A Set Channel Group No.
7 Outgoing Line Group *66-1 Channel Group
Number Parameters N/A Set Channel Group No.
8Minimum number of
Bch in Time Zone1 *67-3 Call Types for ISDN
Trunk Groups N/A Set Minimum number
of B-channels reserved
9Maximum number of
Bch in Time Zone1 *67-4
ISDN Trunk Groups
Maximum Channel
Reservation
N/A Set Maximum number
of B-channels reserved
10 Minimum number of
Bch in Time Zone2 *67-3 Call Types for ISDN
Trunk Groups N/A Set Minimum number
of B-channels reserved
11 Maximum number of
Bch in Time Zone2 *67-4
ISDN Trunk Groups
Maximum Channel
Reservation
N/A Set Maximum number
of B-channels reserved
12 Minimum number of
Bch in Time Zone3 *67-3 Call Types for ISDN
Trunk Groups N/A Set Minimum number
of B-channels reserved
13 Maximum number of
Bch in Time Zone3 *67-4
ISDN Trunk Groups
Maximum Channel
Reservation
N/A Set Maximum number
of B-channels reserved
Strata CTX Strata DK
Prg
No. Program Name FB
No Summary Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK
C-24 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
324 Call by Call Time
Zone Assignment
1Start time of Time
Zone1
*67-5 Multiple Time Zone
Settings N/A Set Start Time for Time
Zone
2Start time of Time
Zone2
3Start time of Time
Zone3
400
Emergency Call
Destination
Assignment
2
Called Number of
Emergency Call(DN,
Pilot Number,Private
Number)
*11-8
911 Special [DN]
Notification
Assignments
N/A Set [PDN],[PhDN] port
number
404 Attendant Group
Assignment
3 Overflow Timer 58-1 DK424 Attendant
Console Series
First
Parameter
Attendant Console
Overflow Timer
4Overflow destination
of attendant group 58-5 DK424 Attendant
Console Series
Second
Parameter
Attendant Console
Overflow Destination
Assignment
502 Terminal Paging
Group Assignment
1
Paging Group Number *30 Telephone Group Page
Assignments
LED 01 Page Group A
2 LED 02 Page Group B
3 LED 03 Page Group C
4 LED 04 Page Group D
5 LED 05 Page Group E
6 LED 06 Page Group F
7 LED 07 Page Group G
8 LED 08 Page Group H
17 All Page Group 31 Station Class of
Service LED 10 All Call Page Allowed
506 Verified Account
Code Assignment 1
Whether set or no set
as Verified Account
Code
69 Verify Account Codes - Verify Count Codes
507 Door Phone
Assignment
1
DDCB Equipment
Number which
connects to Door
phone
77-1
Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU
LED 16-19
Port Number/Door
Phone/Lock Control
Units
4 Ring Duration 77-2
Door Phone Busy
Signal/Door Lock
Assignments
LED 20 Door Phone Ring
Count
6
(1) Destination Type of
DAY1 "79, *79
Door Phone Ringing,
Door Phone to [DN]
Flashing Assignments
LED 1-
12(79) -Door Phone Number
(2) Destination
Number of DAY1
508 Door Lock Control
Assignment
2Set Relay Number of
BIOU 77-1
Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU
LED 07 Door Lock Relay/
External Page Relay
3DDCB Equipment
Number 77-2
Door Phone Busy
Signal/Door Lock
Assignments
LED
04,08,12,16
Door Lock
Assignments
510 Class of Service
Override Assignment 1 COS Override Code 44-1-8
Toll Restriction/
Traveling Class
Override Codes
- Toll Restriction Code
Strata CTX Strata DK
Prg
No. Program Name FB
No Summary Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 C-25
Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference
512 SMDR for System
Assignment
1Caller ID field
indication 60-1 SMDR Data Output
Options LED 01
Caller ID, ANI and
DNIS data will be sent
from the system SMDR
port
3 ANI field indicate
513 SMDR for ILG
Assignment
2 DNIS field indication 60-1 SMDR Data Output
Options LED 01
Caller ID, ANI and
DNIS data will be sent
from the system SMDR
port
3
Output of SMDR
record for the
incoming call
60-3 SMDR Incoming/
Outgoing Calls -SMDR Output when a
call is completed
514 SMDR for OLG
Assignment 2
Output of SMDR
record for the outgoing
call
60-3 SMDR Incoming/
Outgoing Calls -SMDR Output when a
call is completed
520 LCR parameters
Assignment 1 Local Area Code 50-2 LCR Home Area Code - Set Home Area Code
523 LCR Route Plan
Schedule Assignment
2<input Key>
select Time zone 53
LCR Schedule
Assignments for LCR
Plans
First
parameter LCR Plan
Second
parameter Schedule
3Station LCR Group
Number
Third
parameter
LCR Station Group
Number
524
LCR Route Table to
Route Definition
Assignment
1LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.1
53
LCR Schedule
Assignments for LCR
Plans
Fourth
parameter
Route Definition
Numbers (First Pick)
2LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.2
Fourth
parameter
Route Definition
Numbers (Second
Pick)
3LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.3
Fourth
parameter
Route Definition
Numbers (Third Pick)
4LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.4
Fifth
parameter
Route Definition
Numbers (Fourth Pick)
5LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.5
6LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.6
525 LCR Route Definition
Table Assignment
1Outgoing Line Group -
Number 54 LCR Plan Number
First
parameter CO Line Group
Second
parameter
Route Definition
Number
2Digit Modification
Index 55 LCR Modified Digits
Table - Modified Digits Table
526
LCR Digit
Modification Table
Assignment
1 Digits to be deleted 55-0
Delete Number of
Digits From the Front of
Dialed
Second
parameter Quantity of Digits
2 Add Leading Digits 55-1
Add Digits Before and/
or After the Dialed
Number
Third
parameter Digits added
3 Add Trailing Digits 55-2
Add Digits Before and/
or After the Dialed
Number
Third
parameter Digits added
Strata CTX Strata DK
Prg
No. Program Name FB
No Summary Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK
C-26 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
529
LCR Route Plan
Schedule Table Time
Zone Assignment
2 LCR select Time zone
53
LCR Schedule
Assignments for LCR
Plans
Fourth
parameter Start Time
3Start time for Time
Zone
530
Toll Restriction/LCR
screening Table
Assignment
1
Toll Restriction / LCR
table Code(set / no
set)
*45-2
*45-3
LCR/Toll Restriction
Bypass for Special
Numbers that Do Not
Begin with */#
LCR/Toll Restriction
Bypass For Special
Numbers that Begin
with */#
-Digit Code
Digit String
2 Toll Restriction Action
3Least Cost Routing
Action
533 Toll Restriction Table
Assignment
1 Dial String
46-2
46-6
Toll Restriction
Allowed/Denied Area
Codes by Class
Toll Restriction
Allowed/Denied Local
Office Codes Assigned
by Class
Third
parameter Area Codes
2 Add/Delete Codes Third
parameter Area Codes
534
Exceptional Toll
Restriction Table
Assignment
1 Exception Dial String
47
Toll Restriction
Exception Office Codes
Assigned by Area
Codes
- Office Codes
2 Add/Delete codes
540 ACD Pilot DN
Assignment 1
(1) After Shift Forward
Type 14-6 After Shift Service
Destination
Second
parameter Destination
(2) After Shift Forward
Destination
550
Enhanced 911
Emergency Call
Group Assignment
1-8
OLG associated with
Emergency Call
Group Number
*11-2 CAMA Trunk Group
Hunting Assignment
Second
parameter
Hunt to CAMA Trunk
Group
570 Account Code Digit
Length Assignment 1
Forced/Voluntary
Account Code Verified
Digit Length
60-4
Forced/Voluntary
Account Code Digit
Length
-
Forced/Voluntary
Account Code Digit
Length
573 Door Phone Delete 1 Deleted Door Phone
Number 77-1
Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU
LED 16-19
Port Number/Door
Phone/Lock Control
Units
576
Door Phone Ring on
External Paging in
Night Mode
Assignment
1
Set External Paging
Group for termination
in Night Mode
77-1
Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU
LED 08
Door Phone Ring On
External Page in Night
mode.
Strata CTX Strata DK
Prg
No. Program Name FB
No Summary Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 C-27
Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference
579 Voice Mail Data for
System Assignment
3Setting of output of
Message Desk No
10-3
System Assignments,
Part 3 of 3
LED 20 VM SMDI Message
desk Number
4
Setting of output of
Class, ANI and DNIS
information
LED 08 Call ID / Automatic
Number ID
5
Setting of caller
number digits sent to
VM unit
10 LED 10-13 SMDI Station Number
Digit Length
6Set Blank Number for
VM unit 10-3 LED 09 SMDI Bellcore
Standard Version
7Setting of auto cancel
of VM and MW
10 System Assignments,
Part 2 of 3
LED 04
Voice Mail Message
Waiting Cancel Via Dial
#64/Automatic
8Dial sending time at
Voice Mail port LED 06
Voice Mail
Identification Code,
Dual Multi-frequency
(DTMF) Signal Time
580 Voice Mail Data for
System Assignment
2
Whether send A,D
tone or not send for
Voice Mail
31 Station Class of
Service
LED 15
Toshiba Stratagy,
Stratagy DK and/or VP
Integration (A Tone/D
Tone)
3
Whether Send Only B
Tone, Not Send, or B
Tone and Extension
Number for Voice Mail
LED 19, 20
19:Toshiba Stratagy/
Stratagy DK/VP (B No
Station)
20:Toshiba Stratagy/
VP (B+Station
Number)
4
Whether send End to
End Signal or not
send for Voice Mail
Port
LED 17 End-to-end Signal RCV
(VM)
Legend: N/A = Not Applicable
Strata CTX Strata DK
Prg
No. Program Name FB
No Summary Prg
No. Program Name Parameter Summary
Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK
C-28 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-1
Record Sheets
Record Sheets D
System
Card Assignment Record Sheets
The following record sheets are designed for both CTX WinAdmin and button programming users. PCB
Code and Options are provided for Button Programmers only.
CTX670 Base Cabinet 1: Location – Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number B101 B102 S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108
PCB Name BECU BBCU
PCB Code (FB01)n/a n/a
Options
FB02 n/a n/a
FB03 n/a n/a
FB04 n/a n/a
Line/Channel Number n/a n/a
Port Station Number n/a n/a
Notes
•The designated BECU slot is B101 and the BBCU slot is B102.
•Slot S101 is designated for PDKU, BDKU or BDKU/BDKS.
CTX670 Expansion Cabinet 2: Location – Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number S_01 S_02 S_03 S_04 S_05 S_06 S_07 S_08 S_09 S_10
PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
Options
FB02
FB03
FB04
Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number
CTX670 Expansion Cabinet 3: Location – Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number S_01 S_02 S_03 S_04 S_05 S_06 S_07 S_08 S_09 S_10
PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
Options
FB02
FB03
FB04
Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number
Record Sheets
System
D-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Notes
• RDTU, RPTU and RWIU (up to 16 handsets) allowed slots are: S_01, S_03, S_05 and S_07. The
adjacent slot must be vacant to reach maximum capacity.
• RWIU slots for up to 32 handsets are S105 and S_07. Up to three adjacent slots must be vacant to reach
maximum capacity.
• All Base Cabinet slots support Speaker OCA. Speaker OCA is supported in slots S_01~S_06 for
Expansion Cabinets.
CTX670 Expansion Cabinet 5: Location – Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number S_01 S_02 S_03 S_04 S_05 S_06 S_07 S_08 S_09 S_10
PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
Options
FB02
FB03
FB04
Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number
CTX670 Expansion Cabinet 6: Location – Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number S_01 S_02 S_03 S_04 S_05 S_06 S_07 S_08 S_09 S_10
PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
Options
FB02
FB03
FB04
Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number
CTX670 Expansion Cabinet 7: Location – Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number S_01 S_02 S_03 S_04 S_05 S_06 S_07 S_08 S_09 S_10
PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
Options
FB02
FB03
FB04
Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number
Record Sheets
System
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-3
Record Sheets
Card Assignment Record Sheet – Strata CTX 100
CTX100: Location – Local/Remote ___________
CTX100 Base Cabinet CTX 100 Expansion Cabinet
Slot Number S_01 S_02 S_03 S_04 S_05 S_06 S_07 S_08
PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
Options FB02
FB03
FB04
Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number
AMDS
AETS
BSIS
ASTU
Record Sheets
System
D-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
COS Record Sheet
COS Assignment Code:_________
Service Name Enable Disable Service Name Enable Disable
Auto Busy Redial DN Retrieve Call Pickup
Call Forward Override Handsfree Override
Call Transfer w/ Camp-on Privacy Override
Change DISA Codes Invoke Emerg Page1
1. Not used in Release 1.
DND Override - Calling Party Join Feature
DND Override - Called Party Through Dialing
Do Not Disturb Tandem CO Connection
Remote Set/Reset DND Day/Night Control
Executive Override Ext BGM Control
Executive Override Allowed LCR Feature
Offhook Camp-on Individual Trunk Access
Group Pickup Trunk Access Allowed
Directed Station Pickup Forced Account Codes
Directed Group Call Pickup Verified Account Codes
Directed DN Call Pickup Allow Short Hook Flash
Ext Call Pickup Allow Long Hook Flash
Directed CO Call Pickup Allow Hook Flash
Remote Retrieve Call Pickup Can Originate OCA
Record Sheets
System
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-5
Record Sheets
System Data Record Sheet
Service Name Values Service Name Values
01 Executive Override 15 COS Override Code
02 Station MOH Source 16 Multi-Conference
03 Ring Transfer Tone 17 Call Number Display
04 Transfer Privacy Not Used 18 Night Bell Relay
05 Privacy Override 19 Display Preference
06 Credit Card Code 20 Transit Counter
07 Credit Card Digits 21 Primary Clock
08 E911 Service 22 Secondary Clock
09 DR Override by SSD 23 Call History Prefix 1
10 Auto Station Release 24 Emergency Digits Sent
11 ISDN SPID 25 DP Make Ratio
12 Night Mode Relay 26 Call Button Jumping
13 BGM External Paging 14 Lost Call Destination
Record Sheets
System
D-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
System Call Forward Record Sheets
Program 500 Values Program 504 Values
00 SCF
Number 01 Call Type 02 Period 03
TelStatus 04
Destination 1 05
Destination 2 01
TelephoneStatus
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Record Sheets
System
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-7
Record Sheets
System Speed Dial Record Sheet
00 Speed
Dial Bin 01 Number 02 Name 00 Speed
Dial Bin 01 Number 02 Name
Record Sheets
System
D-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Day/Night Mode Record Sheet
Program 112 Values Program 106 Values
Calender Day 01 Working Day Type Day Work Day, Non-Work Day or
Holiday
01 Monday
02 Tuesday
03 Wednesday
04 Thursday
05 Friday
06 Saturday
07 Sunday
Program 113 Values
Type of Day Day 1
Mode Day 2
Mode Night
Mode
Work Day
Non-Work Day
Holiday
Record Sheets
System
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-9
Record Sheets
SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments
Service Name Values
00 Logical Device Number
SMDR
SMDI
LAN
BLF
DSS
01 Device Connection RS232
LAN
Device Port Number
RS232
LAN
BLF
DSS
Record Sheets
System
D-10 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
BSIS RS-232 Serial Port Setup
Service Name Values
00 BSIS Port (1~4)
01 Port Speed
02 Port Parity
03 Data Bits
04 Flow Control
05 Wait Timer
Record Sheets
Station
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-11
Record Sheets
Station
Basic Station Record Sheets
Primary DN: _____________________
01 PDN Equipment No.
08 QPL
Day 1 17 Emerg Call Group 31 Network COS
02 Station Type Day 2 18 Remote CF/DND PW 32 Auto OCA
03 Circuit Type Night 19 VMID Code SMDI 33 Originate OCA
04 COS
Day 1 07 LCR Group 20 MW to VM Port 34 RSTU Supervision
Day 2 09 Station Name 23 Travel COS Change 35 Station Sp Dial Bins
Night 10 Call Waiting Tone 24 TGAC Override
05 DRL
Day 1 11 Dialing Progress Tone 25 Service Tones
Day 2 12 System Call Forward 26 CW and ROB Tone
Night 13 Call Pickup 27 Name Display
06 FRL
Day 1 14 Bearer Capability 28 Door over DND
Day 2 15 Display DN 29 Emerg Ringdown
Night 16 CESID 30 Chg Sys Speed
Primary DN: _____________________
01 PDN Equipment No.
08 QPL
Day 1 17 Emerg Call Group 31 Network COS
02 Station Type Day 2 18 Remote CF/DND PW 32 Auto OCA
03 Circuit Type Night 19 VMID Code SMDI 33 Originate OCA
04 COS
Day 1 07 LCR Group 20 MW to VM Port 34 RSTU Supervision
Day 2 09 Station Name 23 Travel COS Change 35 Station Sp Dial Bins
Night 10 Call Waiting Tone 24 TGAC Override
05 DRL
Day 1 11 Dialing Progress Tone 25 Service Tones
Day 2 12 System Call Forward 26 CW and ROB Tone
Night 13 Call Pickup 27 Name Display
06 FRL
Day 1 14 Bearer Capability 28 Door over DND
Day 2 15 Display DN 29 Emerg Ringdown
Night 16 CESID 30 Chg Sys Speed
Primary DN: _____________________
01 PDN Equipment No.
08 QPL
Day 1 17 Emerg Call Group 31 Network COS
02 Station Type Day 2 18 Remote CF/DND PW 32 Auto OCA
03 Circuit Type Night 19 VMID Code SMDI 33 Originate OCA
04 COS
Day 1 07 LCR Group 20 MW to VM Port 34 RSTU Supervision
Day 2 09 Station Name 23 Travel COS Change 35 Station Sp Dial Bins
Night 10 Call Waiting Tone 24 TGAC Override
05 DRL
Day 1 11 Dialing Progress Tone 25 Service Tones
Day 2 12 System Call Forward 26 CW and ROB Tone
Night 13 Call Pickup 27 Name Display
06 FRL
Day 1 14 Bearer Capability 28 Door over DND
Day 2 15 Display DN 29 Emerg Ringdown
Night 16 CESID 30 Chg Sys Speed
Primary DN: _____________________
01 PDN Equipment No.
08 QPL
Day 1 17 Emerg Call Group 31 Network COS
02 Station Type Day 2 18 Remote CF/DND PW 32 Auto OCA
03 Circuit Type Night 19 VMID Code SMDI 33 Originate OCA
04 COS
Day 1 07 LCR Group 20 MW to VM Port 34 RSTU Supervision
Day 2 09 Station Name 23 Travel COS Change 35 Station Sp Dial Bins
Night 10 Call Waiting Tone 24 TGAC Override
05 DRL
Day 1 11 Dialing Progress Tone 25 Service Tones
Day 2 12 System Call Forward 26 CW and ROB Tone
Night 13 Call Pickup 27 Name Display
06 FRL
Day 1 14 Bearer Capability 28 Door over DND
Day 2 15 Display DN 29 Emerg Ringdown
Night 16 CESID 30 Chg Sys Speed
Record Sheets
Station
D-12 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
DKT Parameters Record Sheet
Primary DN: _____________________
01 Station Type 11 Ext. Ring Repeat 19 Continuous DTMF 27 Ring Over Busy Cycles
02 Key Strip Pattern 12 Not Used 20 Display Language 28 Attd. Overflow Dest.
03 Key Strip Type 13 Off Hook Line Preference 21 Adapter 29 Trunk Test and Verify
04 Add-on Modules 14 PDN/Line Preference 22 Blind Transfer 30 Auto Line Hold
05 Tone/Voice First 15 Ringing Preference. 23 Mail Box Selection
06 OCA Type 16 Text Message Display 24 MIC Init. Value
09 Handsfree MIC 17 Call History Memory 25 Microphone
10 Handsfree Tone 18 DTMF Back Tone 26 Speaker Mode Tones
Primary DN: _____________________
01 Station Type 11 Ext. Ring Repeat 19 Continuous DTMF 27 Ring Over Busy Cycles
02 Key Strip Pattern 12 Not Used 20 Display Language 28 Attd. Overflow Dest.
03 Key Strip Type 13 Off Hook Line Preference 21 Adapter 29 Trunk Test and Verify
04 Add-on Modules 14 PDN/Line Preference 22 Blind Transfer 30 Auto Line Hold
05 Tone/Voice First 15 Ringing Preference. 23 Mail Box Selection
06 OCA Type 16 Text Message Display 24 MIC Init. Value
09 Handsfree MIC 17 Call History Memory 25 Microphone
10 Handsfree Tone 18 DTMF Back Tone 26 Speaker Mode Tones
Primary DN: _____________________
01 Station Type 11 Ext. Ring Repeat 19 Continuous DTMF 27 Ring Over Busy Cycles
02 Key Strip Pattern 12 Not Used 20 Display Language 28 Attd. Overflow Dest.
03 Key Strip Type 13 Off Hook Line Preference 21 Adapter 29 Trunk Test and Verify
04 Add-on Modules 14 PDN/Line Preference 22 Blind Transfer 30 Auto Line Hold
05 Tone/Voice First 15 Ringing Preference. 23 Mail Box Selection
06 OCA Type 16 Text Message Display 24 MIC Init. Value
09 Handsfree MIC 17 Call History Memory 25 Microphone
10 Handsfree Tone 18 DTMF Back Tone 26 Speaker Mode Tones
Primary DN: _____________________
01 Station Type 11 Ext. Ring Repeat 19 Continuous DTMF 27 Ring Over Busy Cycles
02 Key Strip Pattern 12 Not Used 20 Display Language 28 Attd. Overflow Dest.
03 Key Strip Type 13 Off Hook Line Preference 21 Adapter 29 Trunk Test and Verify
04 Add-on Modules 14 PDN/Line Preference 22 Blind Transfer 30 Auto Line Hold
05 Tone/Voice First 15 Ringing Preference. 23 Mail Box Selection
06 OCA Type 16 Text Message Display 24 MIC Init. Value
09 Handsfree MIC 17 Call History Memory 25 Microphone
10 Handsfree Tone 18 DTMF Back Tone 26 Speaker Mode Tones
Primary DN: _____________________
01 Station Type 11 Ext. Ring Repeat 19 Continuous DTMF 27 Ring Over Busy Cycles
02 Key Strip Pattern 12 Not Used 20 Display Language 28 Attd. Overflow Dest.
03 Key Strip Type 13 Off Hook Line Preference 21 Adapter 29 Trunk Test and Verify
04 Add-on Modules 14 PDN/Line Preference 22 Blind Transfer 30 Auto Line Hold
05 Tone/Voice First 15 Ringing Preference. 23 Mail Box Selection
06 OCA Type 16 Text Message Display 24 MIC Init. Value
09 Handsfree MIC 17 Call History Memory 25 Microphone
10 Handsfree Tone 18 DTMF Back Tone 26 Speaker Mode Tones
Primary DN: _____________________
01 Station Type 11 Ext. Ring Repeat 19 Continuous DTMF 27 Ring Over Busy Cycles
02 Key Strip Pattern 12 Not Used 20 Display Language 28 Attd. Overflow Dest.
03 Key Strip Type 13 Off Hook Line Preference 21 Adapter 29 Trunk Test and Verify
04 Add-on Modules 14 PDN/Line Preference 22 Blind Transfer 30 Auto Line Hold
05 Tone/Voice First 15 Ringing Preference. 23 Mail Box Selection
06 OCA Type 16 Text Message Display 24 MIC Init. Value
09 Handsfree MIC 17 Call History Memory 25 Microphone
10 Handsfree Tone 18 DTMF Back Tone 26 Speaker Mode Tones
Record Sheets
Station
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-13
Record Sheets
Feature Button Record Sheet
PDN Button
Number Button
Name Button
Code
PDN,
Phantom DN,
CO, GCO, PL
Sub-parameter Settings
12345
Record Sheets
Station
D-14 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Record Sheets for 10-button and 20-button Telephones
PDN No. ______ 10 ❏
20 ❏DSS ❏
ADM ❏PDN No. ______ 10 ❏
20 ❏DSS ❏
ADM ❏PDN No. ______ 10 ❏
20 ❏DSS ❏
ADM ❏PDN No. ______ 10 ❏
20 ❏DSS ❏
ADM ❏
Location: Location: Location: Location:
Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code
10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20
09 19 09 19 09 19 09 19
08 18 08 18 08 18 08 18
07 17 07 17 07 17 07 17
06 16 06 16 06 16 06 16
05 15 05 15 05 15 05 15
04 14 04 14 04 14 04 14
03 13 03 13 03 13 03 13
02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12
01 11 01 11 01 11 01 11
PDN No. ______ 10 ❏
20 ❏DSS ❏
ADM ❏PDN No. ______ 10 ❏
20 ❏DSS ❏
ADM ❏PDN No. ______ 10 ❏
20 ❏DSS ❏
ADM ❏PDN No. ______ 10 ❏
20 ❏DSS ❏
ADM ❏
Location: Location: Location: Location:
Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code
10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20
09 19 09 19 09 19 09 19
08 18 08 18 08 18 08 18
07 17 07 17 07 17 07 17
06 16 06 16 06 16 06 16
05 15 05 15 05 15 05 15
04 14 04 14 04 14 04 14
03 13 03 13 03 13 03 13
02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12
01 11 01 11 01 11 01 11
PDN No. ______ 10 ❏
20 ❏DSS ❏
ADM ❏PDN No. ______ 10 ❏
20 ❏DSS ❏
ADM ❏PDN No. ______ 10 ❏
20 ❏DSS ❏
ADM ❏PDN No. ______ 10 ❏
20 ❏DSS ❏
ADM ❏
Location: Location: Location: Location:
Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code
10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20
09 19 09 19 09 19 09 19
08 18 08 18 08 18 08 18
07 17 07 17 07 17 07 17
06 16 06 16 06 16 06 16
05 15 05 15 05 15 05 15
04 14 04 14 04 14 04 14
03 13 03 13 03 13 03 13
02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12
01 11 01 11 01 11 01 11
Record Sheets
Station
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-15
Record Sheets
Record Sheets for the DKT3014
PDN No. _______ PDN No. _______ PDN No. _______ PDN No. _______
Location: Location: Location: Location:
Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code
07 14 07 14 07 14 07 14
06 13 06 13 06 13 06 13
05 12 05 12 05 12 05 12
04 11 04 11 04 11 04 11
03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10
02 09 02 09 02 09 02 09
01 08 01 08 01 08 01 08
PDN No. _______ PDN No. _______ PDN No. _______ PDN No. _______
Location: Location: Location: Location:
Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code
07 14 07 14 07 14 07 14
06 13 06 13 06 13 06 13
05 12 05 12 05 12 05 12
04 11 04 11 04 11 04 11
03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10
02 09 02 09 02 09 02 09
01 08 01 08 01 08 01 08
PDN No. _______ PDN No. _______ PDN No. _______ PDN No. _______
Location: Location: Location: Location:
Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code
07 14 07 14 07 14 07 14
06 13 06 13 06 13 06 13
05 12 05 12 05 12 05 12
04 11 04 11 04 11 04 11
03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10
02 09 02 09 02 09 02 09
01 08 01 08 01 08 01 08
PDN No. _______ PDN No. _______ PDN No. _______ PDN No. _______
Location: Location: Location: Location:
Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code
07 14 07 14 07 14 07 14
06 13 06 13 06 13 06 13
05 12 05 12 05 12 05 12
04 11 04 11 04 11 04 11
03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10
02 09 02 09 02 09 02 09
01 08 01 08 01 08 01 08
PDN No. _______ PDN No. _______ PDN No. _______ PDN No. _______
Location: Location: Location: Location:
Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code
07 14 07 14 07 14 07 14
06 13 06 13 06 13 06 13
05 12 05 12 05 12 05 12
04 11 04 11 04 11 04 11
03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10
02 09 02 09 02 09 02 09
01 08 01 08 01 08 01 08
Record Sheets
Station
D-16 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Phantom DN Record Sheet
Phantom DN 01 Owned PDN
02 Tone/Voice 1st
04 Display DN 05 System
Call Forward
Voice Mail
Tone Voice 06 ID 09 Message
Center 10 User Name 11 Display
Name
Record Sheets
Station
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-17
Record Sheets
Hunt Group Record Sheet
Program 209 Values Program 218 Values
Group
Number
01 Hunt
Method 02 Pilot
Number 04 Number to
Display
05 Pilot
No.
SCFwd
06
Multiple
DN Hunt
07 DHG
Auto
Camp-on
01 Hunt
Order 02 DN
03 DN Set
Type
Dist Circ Mod Ins
Record Sheets
Station
D-18 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Station Data Record Sheets
Program 208 Values Program 210 Values (Enter a Check to turn “ON”)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Prime
DN
ABR
Retry
Count
ABR
Retry
Interval
ABR
Recall Hold
Recall
1st
Inter
digit
2nd
Inter
digit
Ring
Xfer
Ans
Program 216 Values Program 502 Values (Enter a Check to turn “ON”) Program 516 Values
Prime
DN
01 02 03
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
All
Page
Grp
All
Emerg
Page
01 Speed
Dial Bin 02 Number 03 Name
Emerg
Ring
down
Ring
down
Timer Dest
Record Sheets
Station
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-19
Record Sheets
ISDN BRI Station Record Sheets
Primary DN: _____________________
01 Equipment
07 FRL
Day 1 14 56Kbps Unrestricted 25 Network COS
02 ISDN Ch Grp Day 2 15 2x64Kbps Unrestricted 26 Additional DN2
03 ISDN Protocol Day 3 16 B Channel Selection 27 Additional DN3
04 Type Connection
09 QPL
Day 1 17 Idle B Ch Selection 28 Additional DN4
05 COS
Day 1 Day 2 18 Interdigit Timer 1 29 Additional DN5
Day 2 Day 3 19 Interdigit Timer 2 30 Additional DN6
Day 3 08 LCR Group 20 CESID 31 Additional DN7
06 DRL
Day 1 10 Speech Capability 21 Voice Calls Allowed 32 Additional DN8
Day 2 11 3.1 KHz Audio 22 Svc Tone Permission 33 Auto OCA
Day 3 12 7 KHz Audio 23 TGAC Override
13 64Kbps Unrestricted 24 Ch Sys Speed
Primary DN: _____________________
01 Equipment
07 FRL
Day 1 14 56Kbps Unrestricted 25 Network COS
02 ISDN Ch Grp Day 2 15 2x64Kbps Unrestricted 26 Additional DN2
03 ISDN Protocol Day 3 16 B Channel Selection 27 Additional DN3
04 Type Connection
09 QPL
Day 1 17 Idle B Ch Selection 28 Additional DN4
05 COS
Day 1 Day 2 18 Interdigit Timer 1 29 Additional DN5
Day 2 Day 3 19 Interdigit Timer 2 30 Additional DN6
Day 3 08 LCR Group 20 CESID 31 Additional DN7
06 DRL
Day 1 10 Speech Capability 21 Voice Calls Allowed 32 Additional DN8
Day 2 11 3.1 KHz Audio 22 Svc Tone Permission 33 Auto OCA
Day 3 12 7 KHz Audio 23 TGAC Override
13 64Kbps Unrestricted 24 Ch Sys Speed
Primary DN: _____________________
01 Equipment
07 FRL
Day 1 14 56Kbps Unrestricted 25 Network COS
02 ISDN Ch Grp Day 2 15 2x64Kbps Unrestricted 26 Additional DN2
03 ISDN Protocol Day 3 16 B Channel Selection 27 Additional DN3
04 Type Connection
09 QPL
Day 1 17 Idle B Ch Selection 28 Additional DN4
05 COS
Day 1 Day 2 18 Interdigit Timer 1 29 Additional DN5
Day 2 Day 3 19 Interdigit Timer 2 30 Additional DN6
Day 3 08 LCR Group 20 CESID 31 Additional DN7
06 DRL
Day 1 10 Speech Capability 21 Voice Calls Allowed 32 Additional DN8
Day 2 11 3.1 KHz Audio 22 Svc Tone Permission 33 Auto OCA
Day 3 12 7 KHz Audio 23 TGAC Override
13 64Kbps Unrestricted 24 Ch Sys Speed
Primary DN: _____________________
01 Equipment
07 FRL
Day 1 14 56Kbps Unrestricted 25 Network COS
02 ISDN Ch Grp Day 2 15 2x64Kbps Unrestricted 26 Additional DN2
03 ISDN Protocol Day 3 16 B Channel Selection 27 Additional DN3
04 Type Connection
09 QPL
Day 1 17 Idle B Ch Selection 28 Additional DN4
05 COS
Day 1 Day 2 18 Interdigit Timer 1 29 Additional DN5
Day 2 Day 3 19 Interdigit Timer 2 30 Additional DN6
Day 3 08 LCR Group 20 CESID 31 Additional DN7
06 DRL
Day 1 10 Speech Capability 21 Voice Calls Allowed 32 Additional DN8
Day 2 11 3.1 KHz Audio 22 Svc Tone Permission 33 Auto OCA
Day 3 12 7 KHz Audio 23 TGAC Override
13 64Kbps Unrestricted 24 Ch Sys Speed
Record Sheets
Station
D-20 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
ISDN Station Data Record Sheet
Primary DN
01 Station Name
02 Dial Method
03 System CF
04 CF Password
05 Door Phone Override
06 Emerg Call Croup
07 COS Override
08 Display DN
09 VMID Code SMDI\DTMF
12 Name Display
Record Sheets
Trunks
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-21
Record Sheets
Trunks
ILG Record Sheet
Program 304 Values
ILG: _____________________
01 Group Type
08 DRL
Day 1 11 DID Digits 20 Send Dial Tone
02 Trunk Type Day 2 12 Speech/3.1KHz 21 TGAC Override
03 Service Type Night Ringing
Timer
13 Delay 1 22 Network COS
04 Private Svc Type
09 FRL
Day 1 14 Delay 2 23 LCR Group
05 GCO Key Number Day 2 Interdigit
Timer
15 Timer 1 24 Change COS Ovr Code
06 Pooled Key Number Night 16 Timer 2 25 Reg Speed Dial Codes
07 COS
Day 1
10 QPL
Day 1 17 Auto Camp-on 26 Originator Invoke OCA
Day 2 Day 2 18 Calling Number ID 27 Senderized Tone Mode
Night Night 19 Intercept 28 Emergency Call Group
Program 513 Values
01 Generate SMDR
Records 02 DNIS Field
Indication 03 B Record for
Incoming Call 04 Abandoned Call
Record Output 05 Display Xsferred
Call Records
Program 304 Values
ILG: _____________________
01 Group Type
08 DRL
Day 1 11 DID Digits 20 Send Dial Tone
02 Trunk Type Day 2 12 Speech/3.1KHz 21 TGAC Override
03 Service Type Night Ringing
Timer
13 Delay 1 22 Network COS
04 Private Svc Type
09 FRL
Day 1 14 Delay 2 23 LCR Group
05 GCO Key Number Day 2 Interdigit
Timer
15 Timer 1 24 Change COS Ovr Code
06 Pooled Key Number Night 16 Timer 2 25 Reg Speed Dial Codes
07 COS
Day 1
10 QPL
Day 1 17 Auto Camp-on 26 Originator Invoke OCA
Day 2 Day 2 18 Calling Number ID 27 Senderized Tone Mode
Night Night 19 Intercept 28 Emergency Call Group
Program 513 Values
01 Generate SMDR
Records 02 DNIS Field
Indication 03 B Record for
Incoming Call 04 Abandoned Call
Record Output 05 Display Xsferred
Call Records
Program 304 Values
ILG: _____________________
01 Group Type
08 DRL
Day 1 11 DID Digits 20 Send Dial Tone
02 Trunk Type Day 2 12 Speech/3.1KHz 21 TGAC Override
03 Service Type Night Ringing
Timer
13 Delay 1 22 Network COS
04 Private Svc Type
09 FRL
Day 1 14 Delay 2 23 LCR Group
05 GCO Key Number Day 2 Interdigit
Timer
15 Timer 1 24 Change COS Ovr Code
06 Pooled Key Number Night 16 Timer 2 25 Reg Speed Dial Codes
07 COS
Day 1
10 QPL
Day 1 17 Auto Camp-on 26 Originator Invoke OCA
Day 2 Day 2 18 Calling Number ID 27 Senderized Tone Mode
Night Night 19 Intercept 28 Emergency Call Group
Program 513 Values
01 Generate SMDR
Records 02 DNIS Field
Indication 03 B Record for
Incoming Call 04 Abandoned Call
Record Output 05 Display Xsferred
Call Records
Record Sheets
Trunks
D-22 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
OLG Record Sheet
Group Number: _____________________
01 Group Type
08 COS
Day 1 11 Speech 3.1KHz
02 Trunk Type Day 2 12 MOH Source
03 Pvt Service Type Night 13 Account Code
GCO
Number
04 Key 1
09 FRL
Day 1 14 DR
05 Key 2 Day 2 15 Credit Card Calling
Pool
Number
06 Key 1 Night 16 Send CESID
07 Key 2
10 QPL
Day 1 17 QSIG Sending Type
Day 2 18 Network COS
Night
Group Number: _____________________
01 Group Type
08 COS
Day 1 11 Speech 3.1KHz
02 Trunk Type Day 2 12 MOH Source
03 Pvt Service Type Night 13 Account Code
GCO
Number
04 Key 1
09 FRL
Day 1 14 DR
05 Key 2 Day 2 15 Credit Card Calling
Pool
Number
06 Key 1 Night 16 Send CESID
07 Key 2
10 QPL
Day 1 17 QSIG Sending Type
Day 2 18 Network COS
Night
Group Number: _____________________
01 Group Type
08 COS
Day 1 11 Speech 3.1KHz
02 Trunk Type Day 2 12 MOH Source
03 Pvt Service Type Night 13 Account Code
GCO
Number
04 Key 1
09 FRL
Day 1 14 DR
05 Key 2 Day 2 15 Credit Card Calling
Pool
Number
06 Key 1 Night 16 Send CESID
07 Key 2
10 QPL
Day 1 17 QSIG Sending Type
Day 2 18 Network COS
Night
Group Number: _____________________
01 Group Type
08 COS
Day 1 11 Speech 3.1KHz
02 Trunk Type Day 2 12 MOH Source
03 Pvt Service Type Night 13 Account Code
GCO
Number
04 Key 1
09 FRL
Day 1 14 DR
05 Key 2 Day 2 15 Credit Card Calling
Pool
Number
06 Key 1 Night 16 Send CESID
07 Key 2
10 QPL
Day 1 17 QSIG Sending Type
Day 2 18 Network COS
Night
Group Number: _____________________
01 Group Type
08 COS
Day 1 11 Speech 3.1KHz
02 Trunk Type Day 2 12 MOH Source
03 Pvt Service Type Night 13 Account Code
GCO
Number
04 Key 1
09 FRL
Day 1 14 DR
05 Key 2 Day 2 15 Credit Card Calling
Pool
Number
06 Key 1 Night 16 Send CESID
07 Key 2
10 QPL
Day 1 17 QSIG Sending Type
Day 2 18 Network COS
Night
Record Sheets
Trunks
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-23
Record Sheets
Trunk Assignment Record Sheet
Trunk
01 Trunk
Equipment
Number
02 ILG
03 OLG
04 Dial Mode
05 Signal
06 Start
Method
07 Release
Supervision
08 Answer
Supervision
09 Trunk
Name
10 External
Rng Repeat
11 DTMF
Back Tone
12 Hunt Order
Record Sheets
Trunks
D-24 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Caller ID Assignment Record Sheet
Trunk Number 01 Signal Method 02 Signal Content 03 CLID Equip
Record Sheets
Trunks
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-25
Record Sheets
DID Assignment Record Sheet
ILG ________________ Audio Destination Type Data Destination Type
01 DID Num 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID 12 DNIS NAME
ILG ________________ Audio Destination Type Data Destination Type
01 DID Num 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID 12 DNIS NAME
ILG ________________ Audio Destination Type Data Destination Type
01 DID Num 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID 12 DNIS NAME
ILG ________________ Audio Destination Type Data Destination Type
01 DID Num 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID 12 DNIS NAME
ILG ________________ Audio Destination Type Data Destination Type
01 DID Num 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID 12 DNIS NAME
ILG ________________ Audio Destination Type Data Destination Type
01 DID Num 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID 12 DNIS NAME
ILG ________________ Audio Destination Type Data Destination Type
01 DID Num 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID 12 DNIS NAME
ILG ________________ Audio Destination Type Data Destination Type
01 DID Num 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID 12 DNIS NAME
ILG ________________ Audio Destination Type Data Destination Type
01 DID Num 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID 12 DNIS NAME
Record Sheets
Trunks
D-26 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
DID Intercept Assignment Record Sheet
ILG Number ___________ Audio Destination Data Destination
01 Type 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS 12 DNIS Name
ILG Number ___________ Audio Destination Data Destination
01 Type 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS 12 DNIS Name
ILG Number ___________ Audio Destination Data Destination
01 Type 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS 12 DNIS Name
ILG Number ___________ Audio Destination Data Destination
01 Type 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS 12 DNIS Name
ILG Number ___________ Audio Destination Data Destination
01 Type 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS 12 DNIS Name
ILG Number ___________ Audio Destination Data Destination
01 Type 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS 12 DNIS Name
ILG Number ___________ Audio Destination Data Destination
01 Type 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS 12 DNIS Name
ILG Number ___________ Audio Destination Data Destination
01 Type 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS 12 DNIS Name
ILG Number ___________ Audio Destination Data Destination
01 Type 05 Day 1 06 Day 2 07 Night 08 Day 1 09 Day 2 10 Night
02 MOH Source Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest Type Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS 12 DNIS Name
Record Sheets
Trunks
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-27
Record Sheets
Trunk Timer/DIT Record Sheet
Program 308 Values Program 310 Values
Trunk Equip No. 01 Auto
Release 02 Short
Flash 03 Long
Flash 04
Pause 05
Response
01 Day 1 Destination 02 Day 1 Destination 03 Night Destination 04 MOH
Type Destination Type Destination Type Destination
Record Sheets
Trunks
D-28 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
ISDN BRI Record Sheet
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number 07 3.1KHz Audio 12 Outgoing B Channel 17 SPID 2
02 Protocol 08 7KHz 13 B CH Selection 18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG 09 Unrestricted 64K 14 Initialize Type 19 Voice Calls
04 OLG 10 Unrestricted 56K 15 Initialization Display 20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech 11 Unrestricted 2x64K 16 SPID 1 21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number 07 3.1KHz Audio 12 Outgoing B Channel 17 SPID 2
02 Protocol 08 7KHz 13 B CH Selection 18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG 09 Unrestricted 64K 14 Initialize Type 19 Voice Calls
04 OLG 10 Unrestricted 56K 15 Initialization Display 20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech 11 Unrestricted 2x64K 16 SPID 1 21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number 07 3.1KHz Audio 12 Outgoing B Channel 17 SPID 2
02 Protocol 08 7KHz 13 B CH Selection 18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG 09 Unrestricted 64K 14 Initialize Type 19 Voice Calls
04 OLG 10 Unrestricted 56K 15 Initialization Display 20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech 11 Unrestricted 2x64K 16 SPID 1 21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number 07 3.1KHz Audio 12 Outgoing B Channel 17 SPID 2
02 Protocol 08 7KHz 13 B CH Selection 18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG 09 Unrestricted 64K 14 Initialize Type 19 Voice Calls
04 OLG 10 Unrestricted 56K 15 Initialization Display 20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech 11 Unrestricted 2x64K 16 SPID 1 21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number 07 3.1KHz Audio 12 Outgoing B Channel 17 SPID 2
02 Protocol 08 7KHz 13 B CH Selection 18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG 09 Unrestricted 64K 14 Initialize Type 19 Voice Calls
04 OLG 10 Unrestricted 56K 15 Initialization Display 20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech 11 Unrestricted 2x64K 16 SPID 1 21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number 07 3.1KHz Audio 12 Outgoing B Channel 17 SPID 2
02 Protocol 08 7KHz 13 B CH Selection 18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG 09 Unrestricted 64K 14 Initialize Type 19 Voice Calls
04 OLG 10 Unrestricted 56K 15 Initialization Display 20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech 11 Unrestricted 2x64K 16 SPID 1 21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number 07 3.1KHz Audio 12 Outgoing B Channel 17 SPID 2
02 Protocol 08 7KHz 13 B CH Selection 18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG 09 Unrestricted 64K 14 Initialize Type 19 Voice Calls
04 OLG 10 Unrestricted 56K 15 Initialization Display 20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech 11 Unrestricted 2x64K 16 SPID 1 21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number 07 3.1KHz Audio 12 Outgoing B Channel 17 SPID 2
02 Protocol 08 7KHz 13 B CH Selection 18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG 09 Unrestricted 64K 14 Initialize Type 19 Voice Calls
04 OLG 10 Unrestricted 56K 15 Initialization Display 20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech 11 Unrestricted 2x64K 16 SPID 1 21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number 07 3.1KHz Audio 12 Outgoing B Channel 17 SPID 2
02 Protocol 08 7KHz 13 B CH Selection 18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG 09 Unrestricted 64K 14 Initialize Type 19 Voice Calls
04 OLG 10 Unrestricted 56K 15 Initialization Display 20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech 11 Unrestricted 2x64K 16 SPID 1 21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Record Sheets
Trunks
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-29
Record Sheets
PRI Trunks Record Sheet
Channel Group: __________________________
Enable/
Disable Ch
Method Enable/
Disable Ch Method
En Dis Ch Slt En Dis CB CH SB SH
01 RPTU Equip 08 Speech 14 Unrestricted 384K 21 B Ch Select
02 Protocol 09 3.1KHz Audio 15 Unrestricted 1536K 22 T1 Time Slot
03 ILG 10 7KHz Audio 16 Unrestricted 1920K 23 E1 Time Slot
04 OLG 11 Unrestricted 64K 17 Restricted Digital 24 T-Wait Timer
05 Trunk ID Type 12 Unrestricted 56K 18 Video 25 RBT on Incoming
06 Trunk ID 13 Unrestricted 2x64K 19 Multirate Unrest. 26 Network Mode
07 D Ch Position 20 B Ch Sel Method 27 Negotiation Priority
Channel Group: __________________________
Enable/
Disable Ch
Method Enable/
Disable Ch Method
En Dis Ch Slt En Dis CB CH SB SH
01 RPTU Equip 08 Speech 14 Unrestricted 384K 21 B Ch Select
02 Protocol 09 3.1KHz Audio 15 Unrestricted 1536K 22 T1 Time Slot
03 ILG 10 7KHz Audio 16 Unrestricted 1920K 23 E1 Time Slot
04 OLG 11 Unrestricted 64K 17 Restricted Digital 24 T-Wait Timer
05 Trunk ID Type 12 Unrestricted 56K 18 Video 25 RBT on Incoming
06 Trunk ID 13 Unrestricted 2x64K 19 Multirate Unrest. 26 Network Mode
07 D Ch Position 20 B Ch Sel Method 27 Negotiation Priority
Channel Group: __________________________
Enable/
Disable Ch
Method Enable/
Disable Ch Method
En Dis Ch Slt En Dis CB CH SB SH
01 RPTU Equip 08 Speech 14 Unrestricted 384K 21 B Ch Select
02 Protocol 09 3.1KHz Audio 15 Unrestricted 1536K 22 T1 Time Slot
03 ILG 10 7KHz Audio 16 Unrestricted 1920K 23 E1 Time Slot
04 OLG 11 Unrestricted 64K 17 Restricted Digital 24 T-Wait Timer
05 Trunk ID Type 12 Unrestricted 56K 18 Video 25 RBT on Incoming
06 Trunk ID 13 Unrestricted 2x64K 19 Multirate Unrest. 26 Network Mode
07 D Ch Position 20 B Ch Sel Method 27 Negotiation Priority
Channel Group: __________________________
Enable/
Disable Ch
Method Enable/
Disable Ch Method
En Dis Ch Slt En Dis CB CH SB SH
01 RPTU Equip 08 Speech 14 Unrestricted 384K 21 B Ch Select
02 Protocol 09 3.1KHz Audio 15 Unrestricted 1536K 22 T1 Time Slot
03 ILG 10 7KHz Audio 16 Unrestricted 1920K 23 E1 Time Slot
04 OLG 11 Unrestricted 64K 17 Restricted Digital 24 T-Wait Timer
05 Trunk ID Type 12 Unrestricted 56K 18 Video 25 RBT on Incoming
06 Trunk ID 13 Unrestricted 2x64K 19 Multirate Unrest. 26 Network Mode
07 D Ch Position 20 B Ch Sel Method 27 Negotiation Priority
Channel Group: __________________________
Enable/
Disable Ch
Method Enable/
Disable Ch Method
En Dis Ch Slt En Dis CB CH SB SH
01 RPTU Equip 08 Speech 14 Unrestricted 384K 21 B Ch Select
02 Protocol 09 3.1KHz Audio 15 Unrestricted 1536K 22 T1 Time Slot
03 ILG 10 7KHz Audio 16 Unrestricted 1920K 23 E1 Time Slot
04 OLG 11 Unrestricted 64K 17 Restricted Digital 24 T-Wait Timer
05 Trunk ID Type 12 Unrestricted 56K 18 Video 25 RBT on Incoming
06 Trunk ID 13 Unrestricted 2x64K 19 Multirate Unrest. 26 Network Mode
07 D Ch Position 20 B Ch Sel Method 27 Negotiation Priority
Record Sheets
Trunks
D-30 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Call-by-Call Record Sheet
Program 323 Values Program 324 Values
Ch Group 01 Index 02 Type
of
Service
03 Fac
Code 04 Service
Param 05 Network
ID 06 ILG 07 OLG
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Start
Zone
1
Start
Zone
2
Start
Zone
3
08
Min 09
Max 10
Min 11
Max 12
Min 13
Max
Record Sheets
Trunks
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-31
Record Sheets
B Channel Select Record Sheet
Channel Group: _____________________ (Enter a check mark to indicate activated B Channels)
01 B Ch 02 B Ch 03 B Ch 04 B Ch 05 B Ch 06 B Ch
07 B Ch 08 B Ch 09 B Ch 10 B Ch 11 B Ch 12 B Ch
13 B Ch 14 B Ch 15 B Ch 16 B Ch 17 B Ch 18 B Ch
19 B Ch 20 B Ch 21 B Ch 22 B Ch 23 B Ch
Channel Group: _____________________ (Enter a check mark to indicate activated B Channels)
01 B Ch 02 B Ch 03 B Ch 04 B Ch 05 B Ch 06 B Ch
07 B Ch 08 B Ch 09 B Ch 10 B Ch 11 B Ch 12 B Ch
13 B Ch 14 B Ch 15 B Ch 16 B Ch 17 B Ch 18 B Ch
19 B Ch 20 B Ch 21 B Ch 22 B Ch 23 B Ch
Channel Group: _____________________ (Enter a check mark to indicate activated B Channels)
01 B Ch 02 B Ch 03 B Ch 04 B Ch 05 B Ch 06 B Ch
07 B Ch 08 B Ch 09 B Ch 10 B Ch 11 B Ch 12 B Ch
13 B Ch 14 B Ch 15 B Ch 16 B Ch 17 B Ch 18 B Ch
19 B Ch 20 B Ch 21 B Ch 22 B Ch 23 B Ch
Channel Group: _____________________ (Enter a check mark to indicate activated B Channels)
01 B Ch 02 B Ch 03 B Ch 04 B Ch 05 B Ch 06 B Ch
07 B Ch 08 B Ch 09 B Ch 10 B Ch 11 B Ch 12 B Ch
13 B Ch 14 B Ch 15 B Ch 16 B Ch 17 B Ch 18 B Ch
19 B Ch 20 B Ch 21 B Ch 22 B Ch 23 B Ch
Channel Group: _____________________ (Enter a check mark to indicate activated B Channels)
01 B Ch 02 B Ch 03 B Ch 04 B Ch 05 B Ch 06 B Ch
07 B Ch 08 B Ch 09 B Ch 10 B Ch 11 B Ch 12 B Ch
13 B Ch 14 B Ch 15 B Ch 16 B Ch 17 B Ch 18 B Ch
19 B Ch 20 B Ch 21 B Ch 22 B Ch 23 B Ch
Channel Group: _____________________ (Enter a check mark to indicate activated B Channels)
01 B Ch 02 B Ch 03 B Ch 04 B Ch 05 B Ch 06 B Ch
07 B Ch 08 B Ch 09 B Ch 10 B Ch 11 B Ch 12 B Ch
13 B Ch 14 B Ch 15 B Ch 16 B Ch 17 B Ch 18 B Ch
19 B Ch 20 B Ch 21 B Ch 22 B Ch 23 B Ch
Channel Group: _____________________ (Enter a check mark to indicate activated B Channels)
01 B Ch 02 B Ch 03 B Ch 04 B Ch 05 B Ch 06 B Ch
07 B Ch 08 B Ch 09 B Ch 10 B Ch 11 B Ch 12 B Ch
13 B Ch 14 B Ch 15 B Ch 16 B Ch 17 B Ch 18 B Ch
19 B Ch 20 B Ch 21 B Ch 22 B Ch 23 B Ch
Record Sheets
Trunks
D-32 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Shared D Channel Record Sheet
Ch Group 01 Equipment
Number 02 Trunk ID 03 D Ch Provided
Record Sheets
Trunks
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-33
Record Sheets
Calling Number Record Sheets
Program 321 Values Program 322 Values
OLG Number 01 Default
Number 02 Number
Prefix 03 Number
Verification 04 Default
Number 2 01 Destination
Type 02 Destination 03 DID
Number
Record Sheets
Attendant
D-34 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Attendant
Attendant Group Record Sheet
00 Attendant Group
Member 01 Call Dist Method 02 Alternate Destination 03 Overflow Time 04 Group Overflow Destination 05 Voice Mail ID
ICI1 ICI2 ICI3 ICI4 ICI5 ICI6 ICI7 ICI8 ICI9 ICI10
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
Record Sheets
IP Telephone Programming
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-35
Record Sheets
IP Telephone Programming
System IP Data Assignment
Service Name Values Service Name Values
01 Automatic Assignment of Station ID 02 Terminal Authentication
03 Diffserv 04 TOS Field Type
05 TOS Precedence Type TOS Delay Type
TOS Throughput Type TOS Reliability Type
06 DSCP 07 IEEE802.1p
08 IEEE802.1p Configuration 09 IP-CTX Identifier
10 Tail Length of Echo Canceller 11 BIPU/IPT VQ Mode
Record Sheets
IP Telephone Programming
D-36 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Station IP Data Assignment
Service Name Values
Prime DN
01 Station ID
02 Station IP Address Type
03 Station IP Address
04 Automatic assignment of Station ID
05 Station Terminal Authentication Mode
06 Station MAC Address
07 Voice Packet Configuration Table Index
08 Audio Codec
09 Display Software Version Number of IPT
Record Sheets
Services
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-37
Record Sheets
Services
Pilot DN Assignment Record Sheet
Pilot DN After Shift 03 Voice Mail ID
01 Type 02 Destination
Record Sheets
Services
D-38 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
System Voice Mail Record Sheet
System Name:________________ System Type:__________________ Date:_______________________
01 VM ID to DID/DNIS 07 Auto Cancel 13 CF No Answer Record
02 Cancellation Method 08 DTMF Duration 14 Direct Call
03 Message Desk No. 09 LCD Control of VM 15 Retrieve Messages
04 CLASS Output 10 Central VM Callback 16 Voice Mail DN
05 Calling Number Digits 11 CF All Call Record 17 Length of VMID
06 Blank Digits 12 CF Busy Record
Record Sheets
Services
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-39
Record Sheets
Voice Mail Port Data Record Sheet
00 VM Port DNs 01 Control
Method 02 Send A/D
Tone 03 Send B
Tone 04 End-to-end
Record Sheets
Services
D-40 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Routing Definition Record Sheets
Program 524 Values Program 525 Values
00 Route Choice Table 01 Rte 1 02 Rte 2 03 Rte 3 04 Rte 4 05 Rte 5 06 Rte 6 00 Route
Definition 01 OLG
Number 02 Digit Mod
Index
Program 526 Values
00 Digit Mod
Index 01 Delete
Digits
02 Add
Leading
Digits
03 Add
Trailing Digits
Record Sheets
Services
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-41
Record Sheets
Route Schedule Record Sheets
Program 528 Values
Mon Tues Wed Thur Fri Sat Sun
Program 523 Values
LCR Group 1 LCR Group 2 LCR Group 3 LCR Group 4 LCR Group 5 LCR Group 6 LCR Group 7 LCR Group 8
Day Type Day Type Day Type Day Type Day Type Day Type Day Type Day Type
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
Rte Choice Rte Choice Rte Choice Rte Choice Rte Choice Rte Choice Rte Choice Rte Choice
LCR Group 9 LCR Group 10 LCR Group 11 LCR Group 12 LCR Group 13 LCR Group 14 LCR Group 15 LCR Group 16
Day Type Day Type Day Type Day Type Day Type Day Type Day Type Day Type
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
Rte Choice Rte Choice Rte Choice Rte Choice Rte Choice Rte Choice Rte Choice Rte Choice
Record Sheets
Services
D-42 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
LCR Assignment Record Sheets
Program 520 Values Program 521 Values
01 Local Area Code 00 Analysis Digits
02 Local Route Plane 01 Route Plan Number
Program 522 Values
00 Exception Digits
01 Exception Table
Record Sheets
Services
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-43
Record Sheets
LCR Time Zone Record Sheets
Program 527 Values
00 Holiday 00 Holiday 00 Holiday 00 Holiday
Date Desc Date Desc Date Desc Date Desc
Program 529 Values
00 Route
Plan 01 Day
Type 02 Time
Zone 03 Start
Time 00 Route
Plan 01 Day
Type 02 Time
Zone 03 Start
Time
Record Sheets
Services
D-44 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
DR LCR Screening Record Sheet
Program 530 Values
00 Screening
Dial String
01 Add String 02 DR
Action 03 LCR
Action 04 Digit Mod
Action 05 Skip
Length
Add Delete
Program 531
00 OLG 01 Behind Centrex
Access Code
02 Code 03 DR Action
for Centrex 04 Skip Length 05 Pause
Length
Add Del
Record Sheets
Services
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-45
Record Sheets
DR Record Sheets
Program 532 Values Program 533 Values Program 534 Values
00 DRL 01 Type 01 Dial
String
02 Action 01 DRE
Table
02 Action
Allow Deny Add Delete Add Delete
Program 111 Values
DRL Number Credit Card Calling DRL Number Credit Card Calling
Enable Disable Enable Disable
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Record Sheets
Services
D-46 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
COS Override Code Record Sheet
00 COS
Override
01 COS
Override
Code
02 Set
COS 03 Set
DRL 04 Set
FRL 05 Set
QPL 06 Network COS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Record Sheets
Services
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-47
Record Sheets
Node ID Assignment Record Sheet
01 Primary
Node ID 03 Node ID 2 04 Node ID 3 05 Node ID 4
Local
Nodes
Overlap
Codes
Record Sheets
Services
D-48 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Private Routing Plan Analysis Table Record Sheet
00 Node ID 01 Route
Choice
Table 00 Node ID 01 Route
Choice
Table 00 Node ID 01 Route
Choice
Table
Record Sheets
Services
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-49
Record Sheets
Route Choice Definition Record Sheet
Program 653 Values Program 654 Values Program 655 Values
00 Route
Choice Table
Route Definition Tables 00 Route
Definition 01 OLG 02 Digit
Mod 00 Digit
Mod Table 01 Delete
Digits 02 Insert Digits
01 02 03 04 05 06
Record Sheets
Services
D-50 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Network Mapping Record Sheets
Program 657 Values Program 658
Values Program 659
Values Program 660
Values
Network
COS Local
COS 02
OCA 03
Sys SD 04 COS
Override 05 TGAC
Override Table Type:
_______ Table Type:
_______ Table Type:
_______
DRL1 FRL1 QPL1
DRL2 FRL2 QPL2
DRL3 FRL3 QPL3
DRL4 FRL4 QPL4
DRL5 FRL5 QPL5
DRL6 FRL6 QPL6
DRL7 FRL7 QPL7
DRL8 FRL8 QPL8
DRL9 FRL9 QPL9
DRL10 FRL10 QPL10
DRL11 FRL11 QPL11
DRL12 FRL12 QPL12
DRL13 FRL13 QPL13
DRL14 FRL14 QPL14
DRL15 FRL15 QPL15
DRL16 FRL16 QPL16
Record Sheets
Services
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-51
Record Sheets
Call History Record Sheet
Circuit Type 01 PDN Circuit Type 01 PDN Circuit Type 01 PDN
Record Sheets
Services
D-52 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Behind Centrex Assignment Record Sheet
00 OLG Number 01 Behind
Centrex 02 Assume
903 Pause
Timer 00 OLG Number 01 Behind
Centrex 02 Assume
903 Pause
Timer
Record Sheets
Services
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-53
Record Sheets
Door Phone Assignment Record Sheet
Program 507 Values Program 576 Values
00 Door Phone
Number 01 DDCB
Equipment 02 Tenant
Number 04 Ring
Duration 05 LCD
Name
06 Day 1 07 Day 2 08 Night 00 Tenant
Number 01 Page
Group
Dest Num Dest Num Dest Num
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Program 508 Values
00 Door
Lock 01
Interface 02 BIOU
Relay 03 DDCB
Equip
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Record Sheets
Services
D-54 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Paging Device Group Assignment Record Sheet
00 Zone
Relay
Paging Groups (Enter Check to turn On) 17 Include in All
Paging Group 18 All Emerg
Page Group 19 Ext Generic
Relay Number
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Record Sheets
Services
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 D-55
Record Sheets
Emergency Call Group Assignment Record Sheet
00 E-Call
Group
OLG Number
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 0 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Record Sheets
Services
D-56 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 E-1
Software and Firmware
Updates
Software and Firmware Updates E
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures
These procedures provide the steps for updating IP telephones and BIPU firmware. The procedures apply
to IPT1020-SD telephones and BIPU-M interface PCBs. Use CTX WinAdmin version 2.1D or above to
perform updates. Before you start the update procedure, store the update files on a File Transfer Protocol
(FTP) server. The FTP server can be:
• CTX SmartMedia card
• WinAdmin PC using Windows virtual ftp
• An External Server (required if IP telephones are not in the same network domain (subnet) as the BIPU
interface)
The methods below are written based on CTX WinAdmin 2.1F.03. Screens may vary if you have
WinAdmin 2.1D. To perform an update you can use one of the following methods:
Important! Download the appropriate DIPXXXX and BIPUXXX IP firmware update files from TSD
FYI, click Technical Services > Software (Strata Systems) > CTX IP Firmware.
Method 1: Update from CTX SmartMedia Card
Prerequisites
1. Requires a WinAdmin PC and CTX SmartMedia card for BIPU and IPT program updates.
2. Do not connect the WinAdmin PC directly to the Strata CTX processor network jack (see Figure E-3).
3. All connections must be through the network (see Figure E-3).
4. The BIPU must have the same subnet address as the Strata CTX and CTX WinAdmin – both must be in
the same domain.
CAUTION! Do not unplug BIPU, press the BIPU reset button, or turn off the CTX power during
the BIPU program update process. Any of these operations will damage the BIPU
kernel software and require the BIPU software restoration process to enable the BIPU
to function. Restoration can only be done at a Toshiba TSD repair facility.
Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures
E-2 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Figure 3 FTP Server (SmartMedia card) Network Connection
BIPU Update
Important! Complete all “Prerequisites” on page E-1 before you do the following.
➤From the WinAdmin PC or External SmartMedia read\write device
1. “Force format” a SmartMedia card using WinAdmin.
2. Copy the BIPUXXX update file under the SM card PROGRAM folder (XXX is the BIPU firmware
version level).
Note The firmware update files can be obtained from TSD FYI, click Technical Services > Software
(Strata Systems) > CTX IP Firmware.
➤To perform the BIPU update from the WinAdmin PC
1. Select Operations > SmartMedia to Make sure the BIPUXXX file is stored on the SM card under the
PROGRAM directory.
Important! The BIPUs and IPTs will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and return to
the idle state when Update is complete (if they were in the idle state when the Update was
started).
2. Select IP Telephone > BIPU Program Update, then select the BIPU card slot.
Note Only BIPU-M can be updated. Only BIPU-M card slots will be shown with WinAdmin 2.1F or
higher. The BIPU type selection is not required.
3. Select CTX Internal (SmartMedia) radio button.
An ftp Name and Password is inserted automatically. The IP address of the CTX processor
(SmartMedia card) is also inserted automatically.
4. Data Directory box will be “PROGRAM”.
5. From File Name drop down box select “BIPUXXX”.
6. Click Start and observe the update status: Getting Updated file\Updating\Finished
Updating\Resetting\idle.
Notes
●It could take 1 to 5 minutes to update the BIPU
●If an error occurs, recheck file names, locations etc. and try again.
7. After the update is complete, select BIPU Configuration, and check the BIUP version numbers to verify
they have been updated properly.
WinAdmin Menu
IP Telephone:
BIPU Program update
IPT Program update
WinAdmin PC
CTX Smart Media Card
Program (directory):
BIPUXXX (file)
DIPXXXX (file)
CTX Processor BIPU
IPT
1
IPT
16
IP Network-WAN, LAN, VPN, Internet server, VPN Router or Switch Box etc. (not a HUB)
6784
Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 E-3
8. Press the BIPU reset button for proper initialization.
IP Telephone Update
Important! Complete all “Prerequisites” on page E-1 before you do the following.
➤From the WinAdmin PC or External SmartMedia read\write device
1. Store the update files on the SM card.
2. “Force format” a SmartMedia card using WinAdmin
3. Copy the DIPXXXX update file under the SmartMedia card PROGRAM folder (XXXX is the IP
Telephone firmware version level).
➤From the WinAdmin PC perform the update
1. Select Operations > SmartMedia. Check that the DIPXXXX file is stored on the SM card under the
PROGRAM directory.
Important! The BIPUs and IPTs will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and return to
the idle state when Update is complete (if they were in the idle state when the Update was
started).
2. Select IP Telephone > IPT Program Update. Select the IPT PDN to be updated.
3. Select CTX Internal (SmartMedia) radio button.
4. An ftp Name and Password is inserted automatically.
5. The IP address of the CTX processor (SM card) is inserted automatically.
6. Data Directory box will be: PROGRAM
7. From File Name drop down box select: DIPXXXX
8. Click Start and observe the update status: Getting Updated file\Updating\Finished
Updating\Resetting\idle.
Notes
●It could take 30 seconds to 2 minutes to update the IP telephone.
●If an error occurs, recheck file names, locations etc. and try again.
9. Select IP telephone > Station Data, check the IPT version number to verify that all IPTs have been
updated properly.
➤To check the IP telephone firmware version directly from an IP telephone
1. Simultaneously press +ROG buttons on the IP Telephone.
2. At the SELECT = prompt, press then press +ROG.
3. At the Select function key prompt, press )%, the IP telephone will be displayed.
Notes
●The WinAdmin PC cannot be connected directly to the CTX processor network jack.
●All connections must be through the network.
Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures
E-4 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Method 2: Update From a FTP Directory on the
WinAdmin PC
Prerequisites
1. Install the “File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service” component under “Internet Information Services” on
the WinAdmin PC. This is not installed by default when installing IIS in Windows XP or 2000. See “To
create a Virtual FTP directory on the WinAdmin PC” below.
2. Create an FTP virtual directory and path to C:\CTX\WinAdmin\CTXIPUPDATE. The drive letter must
be the drive on which WinAdmin is installed. This can be done automatically by running the
“CreateFTPVdir” executable file provided by Toshiba. See “To create a Virtual FTP directory on the
WinAdmin PC” below.
➤To create a Virtual FTP directory on the WinAdmin PC
Setup the Virtual FTP server function on the WinAdmin PC for IP Updates. These procedures were written
using Microsoft Windows XP, there may be some variance when using Windows 2000.
1. Install the MS Windows component FTP on your PC.
Using the Windows XP or 2000 professional installation CR-ROM, install the FTP Service on the
WinAdmin PC.
To verify FTP Service is installed, it should be located under: Control Panel > Administrative Tools >
Internet Information Services (IIS).
2. Go to CTXIpScripts and run "CreateFTPdir". This creates a virtual directory.
To get the “CreateFTPVdir” file go to C:\ctx\WinAdmin\CTXIpScripts.
➤Download the IP Firmware files and store them on the WinAdmin PC
1. Download the appropriate DIPXXXX and BIPUXXX firmware update files from TSD FYI, click
Technical Services > Software (Strata Systems) > CTX IP Firmware.
2. Copy the DIPXXXX and BIPUXXX to the CTXIPUPDATE folder on the WinAdmin PC
(C:\ctx\WinAdmin\CTXIPUPDATE\. These files will be accessed during the IP update processes.
Notes
●Make sure the WinAdmin PC is not connected directly to the CTX processor network jack (see the
figure below).
Make all connections through the network (see the figure below).
●Make sure the IP Telephones have the same subnet address as the CTX and WinAdmin - both must be
in the same domain.
CAUTION! Do not unplug BIPU, press the BIPU reset button or turn off the CTX power during the
BIPU program update process. Any of these operations will damage the BIPU kernel
software and require the BIPU software restoration process to allow the BIPU to
function.
Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 E-5
Figure 4 FTP Server (WinAdmin PC) Network Connection
BIPU Update
Important! Complete all “Prerequisites” on page E-4 before you do the following.
➤Copy the BIPUXXX file into the WinAdmin PC CTXIPUPDATE directory.
Notes
●The directory location should be C:\Ctx\W inAdmin\CTXIPUPDATE. The drive letter must be
the drive on which WinAdmin is installed.
●(XXX in the BIPU file name is the BIPU firmware version level).
➤From the WinAdmin PC perform the BIPU update
Important! The BIPUs and IPTs will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and return to
the idle state when Update is complete (if they were in the idle state when the Update was
started).
1. Select IP Telephone > BIPU Program Update.
2. Select the BIPU card slot(s).
Note Only BIPU-M can be updated. Only BIPU-M card slots will be shown with WinAdmin 2.1F or
higher. The BIPU type selection is not required.
3. Select Local WinAdmin (radio button)
4. Enter the Windows User login Name and Password.
Note If in doubt, create a new Window logon User Name and password and use it in Step 5.
5. The IP address of the WinAdmin PC is inserted automatically.
6. Select to update BIPUs one at a time or simultaneously.
7. Data Directory will be: CTXIPUPDATE
8. From File Name drop down box select: BIPUXXX
9. Click Start and observe the update status: Getting Updated file\Updating\Finished
Updating\Resetting\idle.
Notes
●It could take 1 to 5 minutes to update the BIPU
●If an error occurs, recheck file names, locations etc. and try again.
10. After the update is complete, select IP Telephone > BIPU Configuration. Check the BIUP version
numbers to verify they have been updated properly.
WinAdmin Menu
IP Telephone:
BIPU Program update
IPT Program update
WinAdmin PC
WinAdmin PC
C:\CTX\WinAdmin\
CTXIPUPDATE (directory):
BIPUXXX (file)
DIPXXXX (file)
BIPU
CTX
Processor
IPT
1
IPT
16
IP Network-WAN, LAN, VPN, Internet server, VPN Router or Switch Box etc. (not a HUB)
6785
Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures
E-6 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
11. Press the BIPU reset button for proper initialization.
IP Telephone Update
Important! Complete all “Prerequisites” on page E-4 before you do the following.
➤Copy the DIPXXXX file into the WinAdmin PC CTXIPUPDATE directory.
Notes
●The directory location should be C:\Ctx\W inAdmin\CTXIPUPDATE The drive letter must be
the drive on which WinAdmin is installed.
●(XXXX in the DIP file name is the firmware version level of the IP telephone).
➤From the WinAdmin PC perform the update
Important! The BIPUs and IPTs will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and return to
the idle state when Update is complete (if they were in the idle state when the Update was
started).
1. Select IP Telephone > IPT Program Update.
2. Select the IPT PDN(s) to be updated.
3. Select Local WinAdmin (radio button).
4. Enter the Windows user login Name and Password.
Note If in doubt, create a new Window logon User Name and password and use it in Step 6.
5. The IP address of the WinAdmin PC is inserted automatically.
6. Data Directory will be: CTXIPUPDATE
7. From File Name drop down box select: DIPUXXX
8. Click Start and observe the update status: Getting Updated file\Updating\Finished
Updating\Resetting\idle.
Notes
●It could take 30 seconds to 2 minutes to update the IP telephone
●If an error occurs, recheck file names, locations etc. and try again.
9. Select IP telephone > Station Data. Check the IPT version number to verify that all IPTs have been
updated properly.
10. To check the IP telephone firmware version directly from an IP telephone.
• Simultaneously press the +ROG buttons on the IP Telephone.
• At the SELECT = prompt, press then press +ROG.
• At the Select function key prompt, press )%, the IP telephone will be displayed.
• To exit this mode, go off and on hook.
Notes
●The WinAdmin PC cannot be connected directly to the CTX processor network jack.
●All connections must be through the network.
Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 E-7
Method 3: Update from an External FTP Server
Prerequisites
1. An FTP server must be connected on the same network domain as the IP telephones. The WinAdmin
PC, CTX processor and BIPU must be in the same domain but it does not have to be the domain that
supports the IP telephones and FTP server.
2. The WinAdmin PC cannot be connected directly to the CTX processor network jack. All connections
must be through the network (see Figure E-5 below).
CAUTION! Do not unplug BIPU, press the BIPU reset button or turn off the CTX power during the
BIPU program update process. Any of these operations will damage the BIPU kernel
software and require the BIPU software restoration process to allow the BIPU to
function.
Figure 5 FTP Server (External Server) Network Connection
Note The WinAdmin PC cannot be connected directly to the CTX processor network jack - all
connections must be through the network.
BIPU Update
Important! Complete all “Prerequisites” on page E-7 before you do the following.
➤Store the IP update files on the external ftp sever
1. Create an ftp directory and name it CTXIPUPDATE.
2. Copy the BIPUXXX update files to CTXIPUPDATE directory (XXX is the BIPU firmware version
level).
WinAdmin Menu
IP Telephone:
BIPU Program update
IPT Program update
WinAdmin PC
External ftp server PC
CTXIPUPDATE (directory):
BIPUXXX (file)
DIPXXXX (file)
BIPU
CTX
Processor
IPT
1
IPT
16
Domain B: IP Network-WAN, LAN, VPN,
Internet server, VPN Router or Switch Box etc.
(not a HUB).
Domain A: CTX Network-WAN, LAN, VPN,
Internet server, VPN Router or Switch Box etc.
(not a HUB).
6786
Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures
E-8 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
➤From the WinAdmin PC perform the BIPU update
Important! The BIPUs and IPTs will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and return to
the idle state when Update is complete (if they were in the idle state when the Update was
started).
1. Select IP Telephone > BIPU Program Update.
2. Select the BIPU card slot and BIPU-M card type.
Note Only BIPU-M can be updated. Only BIPU-M card slots will be shown with WinAdmin 2.1F or
higher. The BIPU type selection is not required.
3. Select Other (radio button).
4. Enter the ftp user login Name and Password.
5. Enter the IP address external ftp server.
6. From Data Directory box enter: CTXIPUPDATE
7. From File Name box enter: BIPUXXX
8. Click Start and observe the update status: Getting Updated file\Updating\Finished
Updating\Resetting\idle.
Notes
●It could take 1 to 5 minutes to update the BIPU
●If an error occurs, recheck file names, locations etc. and try again.
9. After the update is complete, select IP Telephone > BIPU Configuration. Check the BIUP version
numbers to verify they have been updated properly.
10. Press the BIPU reset button for proper initialization.
IP Telephone Update
Important! Complete all “Prerequisites” on page E-7 before you do the following.
➤Store the IP update files on the external ftp sever
1. Create an ftp directory and name it CTXIPUPDATE
2. Copy the DIPUXXXX update files to CTXIPUPDATE directory (XXX is the BIPU firmware version
level).
➤From the WinAdmin PC perform the update
Important! The BIPUs and IPTs will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and return to
the idle state when Update is complete (if they were in the idle state when the Update was
started).
1. Select IP Telephone > IPT Program Update.
2. Select the IP PDN to be updated.
3. Select Other (radio button)
4. Enter the external server ftp user login Name and Password.
5. Enter the IP address external ftp server.
6. From Data Directory box enter: CTXIPUPDATE
Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures
Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03 E-9
7. From File Name box enter: DIPXXXX
8. Click Start and observe the update status: Getting Updated file\Updating\Finished
Updating\Resetting\idle.
Notes
●It could take 1 to 5 minutes to update the BIPU
●If an error occurs, recheck file names, locations etc. and try again.
9. After the update is complete, select IP Telephone > IP Telephone Data. Select the IP telephone Prime
DN to check that the firmware version level has been updated properly.
➤To check the IP telephone firmware version directly from an IP telephone
1. Simultaneously press the +ROG buttons on the IP Telephone.
2. At the SELECT = prompt, press then press +ROG
3. At the Select function key prompt, press )%, the IP telephone will be displayed.
4. To exit this mode, go off and on hook.
Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures
E-10 Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/03 IN-1
Index
Index
Numerics
100 series programs,13-11
200 series programs,13-28
300 series programs,13-52
400 series programs,13-73
500 series programs,13-74
600 series programs,13-91
900 series programs,13-96
A
account code digit length,13-88
account codes,9-35
ADM feature keys,13-46
advisory message default code table,4-33
attendant,5-17
attendant group assignment,13-73
B
B channel,13-69
backup,14-1
behind connection assignment,13-91
BIOU,2-2
BIPU program update,8-9
BIPU update,E-2, E-5, E-7
button programming examples,13-5
program 100,13-5
program 200,13-5
program 204,13-6
program 205,13-6
program 208,13-6
button sequence,13-7
C
call control,5-17
call forward,5-17, 13-13
no answer timer,4-10
override,4-8, 13-15
call pickup,5-17, 5-30, 13-14
call transfer with camp-on,13-15
called number table,13-70
caller history,13-88
caller ID,6-8
caller ID assignment,13-62
card slot assignment,13-11
CBC table,13-71
CBC time zones,13-72
Centrex/PBX screening table view,9-34
class of service,13-15
CO line,2-3, 5-17
CO lines sub-parameters,5-20
communicating with Strata CTX,3-14
community name,10-17
component status/control,11-7
copy,5-16
COS override assignment,13-79
country code,13-98
credit card calling,9-12
cross copy,5-16, 5-18
CTX processor NIC interface TCP/IP,2-8
CTX release level,13-98
CTX SmartMedia directories,10-6
CTX WinAdmin
application software,2-3
auto-programming to start-up,2-1
command table link,2-5
communicating with Strata CTX,3-14
internet access,2-1
LAN network,3-5
planning,2-9
program for first time,2-9
system requirements,2-9
toolbar,2-4
D
D channel,13-64
data backup,14-1
data initialize,13-25
data initialize programs,4-34
Index
E~I
IN-2 Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/03
date adjust code,4-6, 13-14
day of week mapping,13-21
day/night mode,13-21, 13-24
default feature access codes,2-9
destination restriction,9-32, 9-34
destination restriction level,13-24
destination restriction overview,9-6
destination restriction/least cost routing,9-6
device table,4-29
dial number plan,4-2
DID,6-13
intercept assignment,13-67
DID/DNIS table view,6-21
digit manipulation,9-41
direct inward dialing,13-59
directory number,5-17
directory number sub-parameters,5-19
DISA codes,13-15
DISA security codes,13-62
distinctive ringing,5-16
DIT,6-11
DIT assignment,13-61
DKT
feature keys.,13-38
DKT parameters,13-34
DN,13-34, 13-51
DND
local activation,13-13
local cancellation,13-13
remote activation,13-13
remote cancellation,13-13
DND override,13-15
DNIS VMID code,13-61
door lock,5-17
door lock control assignment,13-78
door phone
delete,13-88
night ring over external page,13-88
door phone assignment,13-76
DR LCR screening table assignment,13-85
level table assignment,13-86
screening table for OLG,13-86
table allow/deny definition,13-86
DR guide page,9-10
DR Class of Service Setup,9-12
DR Dialing Setup,9-10
DR Digit Table Setup,9-12
DR override by system speed dial,13-78
DRL exception table assignment,13-87
DRL table view,9-34
DSS
console assignment,13-48
feature keys,13-48
DTMF version,13-98
E
emergency call destination assignment,7-3, 13-73
emergency ringdown,13-50
enhanced 911 emergency call group,13-87
error alarm log,11-5
error codes,B-1
error log,11-2
event trace control,11-3
event trace side change,13-102
exception numbers for forced account codes,13-88
extended list,5-6
external devices,9-68
F
FB00 parameters,13-7
feature button pattern assignments
10 button table,5-12, 13-38
14 button table,5-13, 13-38
20 button table,5-12, 13-37
feature/button code sub-parameter assignments,13-40
file information,10-16
flexible access codes,4-3
flexible access plan,13-12
flexible button assignment feature code table,13-41
flexible numbering default settings,4-4
flexible numbering plan default settings table,13-12
FTP external,8-10
FTP user accounts,10-15
G
group call pickup,13-46
H
hardware
requirements,3-1
hunt group,5-25
hunt group table view,5-27
I
I/O device,4-28
ILG Delete,13-57
incoming line group assignment,13-55
initial setup,2-1, 2-9
installed equipment ID,13-99
Index
L~P
Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/03 IN-3
Index
integration
TPI,A-2
intercept,6-3
intercept treatment,13-69
IO logical device assignment,13-94
IP configuration,13-110
IP QSIG,13-53
IP telephone update,E-3, E-6, E-8
IPT program update,8-11
ISDN
bearer capability,13-34
BRI station,13-31
BRI trunk,13-64
station data,13-50
trunk delete,13-55
trunk trace,13-102
ISDN bearer capability,5-39
L
LCR
exception number route plans,13-83
holiday table assignment,13-84
local route plan assignment,13-82
public day of week mapping table,13-85
route definition assignment,13-84
route plan digit analysis assignment,13-83
route plan schedule assignment,13-83
route plan time zone assignment,13-85
LCR assignment,9-23
LCR guide page,9-16
LCR Dialing Setup,9-17
LCR Route Plan Setup,9-18
LCR time zones,9-29
LCR/DR screening,9-30
license control,10-20
license information,10-21
local update,14-2, 14-4
M
MAC address,13-105
maintenance,11-1, 14-1
error alarm log,11-5
error log,11-2
start/stop/store trace date,11-2
system admin log,11-6
make busy control,13-107
mapping,9-58
memory access operation,11-6
modified digits table assignment,13-84
multiple call group,5-31~5-32
multiple call groups,5-32
music on hold,4-26, 13-23
N
network COS mapping table assignment,13-93
network directory number,9-40
network DN table assignment,9-59, 13-93
network DRL mapping tables,13-93
network feature access code,9-40
network jack LAN device assignments,13-94
networking,9-39
call record and soft keys,A-3
centralized attendant,9-43
centralized voice mail,9-43
configuration,9-53
multiple voice mail systems,A-3
node ID,9-39
node ID assignment,13-92
numerical program listing,C-15
O
off-hook,13-3
off-hook preference,13-35
OLG delete,13-59
one touch,5-17
one touch button,5-18
outgoing line group assignment,13-57
Overview,2-1
P
PAD
conference table assignment,13-25
conference value table,4-24
device number table,4-23
group device types,4-24, 13-22
PAD Table,13-22
paging devices group assignment,13-75
paging group table view,5-29
parameter selection record sheet,D-13
park page,5-17
password assignment,13-23
PCB codes,13-12
PDN,13-40
PDN table view,5-36
phantom DN,13-42
PhDN,13-40
pickup group,5-30
pickup group table view,5-30
pilot DN assignment,13-87
planning,2-9
Index
P~P
IN-4 Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/03
private digit modification table assignment,13-92
private route choice definition,9-56
private route choice table assignment,13-91
private route definition table assignment,13-91
private routing plan analysis table assignment,13-91
product ID,13-98
profile,3-19, 12-2
program listings,13-7
numerical,C-15
programming parameters,13-3
programming sub-parameters,13-4
Programs
100 card slot assignment,4-1, 13-11
102 flexible access codes,4-3, 9-17
102 flexible numbering plan,13-12
103 class of service,4-8, 9-12, 9-22, 13-15
104 system timers,4-10, 13-17
105 system data,4-12, 9-13, 13-18
106 day/night mode of week mapping,4-20, 13-21
107 PAD table assignment,4-22, 13-21
108 PAD group assignment,4-23, 13-22
109 music on hold,4-26, 13-23
110 password assignment,4-25, 13-23
111 destination restriction level,9-12, 9-33, 13-24
112 day/night mode calendar,4-20, 13-24
113 day/night mode daily schedule,4-21, 13-24
114 PAD conference table assignment,4-24,
13-25
115 advisory messages,4-33
116 data initialize,4-34, 13-25
117 public dial plan digit analysis,4-7, 9-11, 9-17,
13-26
120 tenant data assignment,4-35, 13-27
150 system IP data assignment,8-1
151 BIPU configuration,8-4
152 voice packet configuration table
assignment,8-5
200 station data,5-1, 9-13, 9-22, 13-28
201 station delete,13-31
202 ISDN BRI station,5-36, 13-31
203 change DN,13-34
204 DKT parameters,5-7, 13-34
205 DKT feature keys,5-15, 13-38
206 phantom DN,5-23, 13-42
207 single touch button data assignments,13-43
208 station timer assignments,13-45
209 station hunting groups,5-25, 13-46
210 group call pickup,5-30, 13-46
213 ADM feature keys,5-15, 13-46
214 DSS console assignment,5-14, 13-48
215 DSS feature keys,5-15, 13-48
216 emergency ringdown assignment,13-50
217 ISDN station data,5-40, 13-50
218 station hunt group assignment,5-26, 13-50
219 network DSS key notify data delete,13-51
219 network DSS notify data delete
assignment,9-60
250 station IP data assignment,8-7
300 trunk assignment,6-6, 13-52
302 PRI and IP QSIG,6-25, 13-53
303 ISDN trunk delete,13-55
304 incoming line group assignment,6-1~6-2,
13-55
305 ILG number,13-57
306 outgoing line group,9-14
306 outgoing line group assignment,6-4, 8-1,
13-57
307 OLG delete,13-59
308 trunk timer,6-9
308 trunk timers,13-59
309 direct inward dialing,6-13, 13-59
310 DIT assignment,6-11, 13-61
311 DISA security codes,6-19, 13-62
313 caller ID,6-8
313 caller ID assignment,13-62
315 T1 trunk card,6-20, 13-63
316 shared D channel,6-32, 13-64
317 ISDN BRI trunk,6-21, 13-64
318 DID intercept assignment,6-16, 13-67
319 intercept treatment,6-19, 13-69
320 B channel,6-31, 13-69
321 calling number identification,6-33, 13-70
322 called number table,6-34, 13-70
323 CBC service,6-29, 13-71
324 CBC time zones,6-30, 13-72
400 emergency call destination assignment,7-3,
13-73
404 attendant group assignment,7-1, 13-73
500 system call forward assignment,4-15, 13-74
501 system speed dial assignment,4-18, 13-74
502 terminal paging group assignment,5-28,
13-74
503 paging devices group assignment,9-73, 13-75
504 system call forward operation status,4-16,
13-75
506 verified account codes,9-36, 13-75
507 door phone assignment,9-68, 13-76
508 door lock control assignment,9-70, 13-78
509 DR override by system speed dial,9-14, 9-37,
13-78
Index
P~P
Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/03 IN-5
Index
510 COS override assignment,9-13, 9-38, 13-79
512 SMDR for system assignment,9-64, 13-79
513 SMDR for ILG assignment,9-65, 13-79
514 SMDR for OLG assignment,9-65, 13-80
515 view BIOU control relay assignment,9-72,
13-80
516 station speed dial,5-34, 13-81
517 multiple call group assignment,5-32
517 multiple calling group index,13-82
518 multiple calling members assignment,5-33,
13-82
520 LCR local route plan assignment,9-23, 13-82
520 LCR local route plan assignments,9-18
521 LCR route plan digit analysis
assignment,9-18, 9-24, 13-83
522 LCR exception number route plan,9-18, 9-24,
13-83
523 LCR route plan schedule assignment,9-20,
9-27, 13-83
524 route table to route definition
assignment,9-19, 9-25, 13-84
525 LCR route definition assignment,9-19, 9-26,
13-84
526 modified digits table assignment,9-19, 9-26,
13-84
527 LCR holiday table assignment,9-21, 9-29,
13-84
528 LCR days of the week assignments,9-21
528 LCR public day of week mapping table,9-28,
13-85
529 LCR route plan time zone assignment,9-21,
9-29, 13-85
530 DR LCR screening table assignment,9-10,
9-17, 9-30, 13-85
531 DR screening table for OLG,9-11, 9-31, 13-86
532 DR table allow/deny definition,9-12, 9-32,
13-86
533 DR Level table assignment,9-12
533 DR level table assignment,9-32, 13-86
534 DR level exception table assignment,9-12
534 DRL exception table assignment,9-33, 13-87
540 pilot DN assignment,9-1, 13-87
541 pilot DN delete,13-87
550 enhanced 911 emergency call group,9-74,
13-87
570 account code digit length,9-35, 13-88
571 exception numbers for forced account
codes,9-36, 13-88
573 delete door phone,13-88
576 door phone night ring over external
page,9-70, 13-88
577 caller history,9-66, 13-88
579 system voice mail data,9-2, 13-89
580 voice mail port data,9-4, 13-90
650 behind centrex assignment,9-11, 9-66, 13-91
651 private routing plan analysis table
assignment,9-56, 13-91
653 private route choice table assignment,9-57,
13-91
654 private route definition table
assignment,9-57, 13-91
655 private digit modification table
assignment,9-57, 13-92
656 node ID assignment,9-54, 13-92
657 network COS mapping table
assignment,9-58, 13-93
658 network DRL mapping table,9-59
658/659/660 network DRL mapping tables,9-59,
13-93
661 network DN table assignment,9-59, 13-93
670 remote node data assignment,9-55
671 IP address conversion table,9-61
672 node ID detail information,9-62
801 network jack LAN device assignments,4-30,
13-94
803 IO logical device assignment,13-94
803 SMDR SMDI CTI port assignments,4-28
804 BSIS RS-232 serial port setup,4-32, 13-96
900 CTX restart,10-2
900 system initialize,13-96
901 display version,10-3, 13-97
902 set time and date,10-3, 13-99
903 event trace control,11-3, 13-99
904 ISDN trace location,11-4, 13-101
905 all ISDN trunk trace,13-102
906 event trace side change,11-4, 13-102
907 system admin log,11-6, 13-103
908 format/unmount smartmedia,13-103
908 smart media,10-4
909 MAC address,10-18, 13-105
910 data backup,13-105
911 program update,10-9, 13-106
911 remote program update,10-7
912 make busy control,13-107
913 license issue,10-20
914 license activate,10-21
915 regional selection,10-4, 13-109
916 IP configuration,10-14, 13-110
BIPU program update,8-9
IPT program update,8-11
Index
Q~S
IN-6 Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/03
public dial plan digit,13-26
public holidays,9-29
Q
QSIG,6-2, 6-5, 6-28, 9-39, 13-54, 13-58
R
record sheet overview,13-1
record sheets
attendant group (404),D-34
B channel selection (320),D-31
basic station (200),D-11
behind centrex (550),D-52
BSIS RS-232 serial port setup (804),D-10
call history (577),D-51
call-by-call (323/324),D-30
caller ID assignment (313),D-24
calling number (321/322),D-33
card assignment for Strata CTX100 (100),D-3
card assignment for Strata CTX670 (100),D-1
COS (103),D-4
COS override (510),D-46
day/night mode (112/106/113),D-8
DID assignment (309),D-25
DID intercept assignment (318),D-26
DKT parameters (204),D-12
door phone assignment (507/508/576),D-53
DR (532/533/534/111),D-45
DR/LCR screening (530/531),D-44
E911 emergency call group (550),D-55
feature button (205/213/215),D-13
flexible numbering plan (102),4-4
hunt group (209/218),D-17
ILG (304/513),D-21
ISDN BRI station (202),D-19
ISDN BRI trunk (317),D-28
ISDN data (217),D-20
LCR assignments (520/521/522),D-42
LCR time zone (527/529),D-43
network mapping (657/658/659/660),D-50
node ID assignment (656),D-47~D-48
paging devices group assignment (503),D-54
phantom DN (206),D-16
pilot DN assignment (540),D-37
PRI trunk (302),D-29
route choice definition (653/654/655),D-49
route definition (524/525/526),D-40
route schedule record sheets (523/528),D-41
shared D channel (316),D-32
SMDR SMDI CTI Port assignments (803),D-9
station data (208/210/216/502/516),D-18
system call forward (500/504),D-6
system data (105),D-5
system speed dial (501),D-7
system voice mail (579),D-38
trunk assignment (300),D-23
trunk timer (310),D-27
voice mail port data (580),D-39
regional selection,13-109
remote program update,10-7
ring tone, distinct,5-16
ringing preference,13-36
route define,9-25
route schedule,9-27
route table to route definition assignment,13-84
RS232C data assignment,13-96
S
service,6-19
setup
analog trunk,2-12
ISDN PRI,2-13~2-14
station,2-12
T1 trunk,2-13
setup wizards
multiple DN assignment,5-42
PDN range,5-41
trunk DID/DNIS,6-35
VMID range,5-44
single touch button data assignments,13-43
slot assignment worksheet,D-1
SmartMedia,8-9
format/unmount,13-103
restoring data,13-97
SmartMedia card,10-4
SMDR,9-64
for ILG assignment,13-79
for OLG Assignment,13-80
SMDR for system assignment,13-79
software version,13-98
speed dial,4-18, 5-34
start/stop/store trace data,11-2
station
data,13-28
extended list,5-6
hunt group assignment,13-50~13-51
PDN,2-3
PDN selective copy,5-6
PDN table view,5-36
speed dial,5-34, 13-81
Index
T~V
Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/03 IN-7
Index
speed dial table view,5-35
timer assignments,13-45
Strata CTX100 update,14-2, 14-4
Strata Net
private networking,9-39
programming overview,9-53
system
admin log,13-103
call forward,4-15
call forward assignment,13-74
date,4-4
initialize,13-96
integration,A-2
parameters,13-18
speed dial,4-18, 13-74
speed dial table view,4-19
time,4-4
timers,13-17
voice mail data,13-89
system call forward
operation status,13-75
T
T1 trunk card,13-63
table views,2-6
Centrex/PBX screening table view,9-34
DID/DNIS,6-21
DRL table view,9-34
hunt group table view,5-27
paging group table view,5-29
PDN table view,5-36
pickup group table view,5-30
station speed dial table view,5-35
system call forward table view,4-17
system speed dial table view,4-19
tables
B channel defaults,13-70
bearer capability table,13-66
bearer services table,13-55
BRI bearer capability of ISDN,13-34
circuit type code definitions,13-89
data initialize programs,13-26
device table,13-95
feature button patterns
10 button,13-38
14 button,13-38
feature/button code sub-parameter
assignments,13-40
flexible numbering plan default settings,13-12
numerical program listings
Strata CTX to Strata DK),C-15
Strata DK to Strata CTX,C-1
PAD conference table,13-25
PAD group device type examples,13-22
PAD table,13-22
telephone button commands
programming sub-parameters,13-3
telephone button overview,13-2
telephone button pad record sheets,D-14~D-15
tenant data,4-35
tenant data assignment,13-27
terminal paging group,13-74
time adjust code,4-6, 13-14
time and date,13-99
tools and profile,12-1
download,12-1
Toshiba proprietary integration,A-2
trace function,14-8
trace functions,11-1
transfer with camp,13-15
trap IP setup,10-19
traveling class mark,9-41
trunk
assignment,13-52
timers,13-59
trunk timer,6-9
trunks
PRI,13-53
U
unrestricted digital information,13-34
update
local update,14-2
program update,13-105~13-106
remote update,10-7
Strata CTX100 local update,14-4
Strata CTX670 local update,14-6
update methods
CTX SmartMedia card,E-1
external FTP server,E-7
FTP directory,E-4
user management,3-19, 12-2
V
verified account codes,13-75
version code,13-98
view BIOU control relay assignment,13-80
voice mail,5-17, A-1
port data,13-90
Index
W~W
IN-8 Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/03
W
WinAdmin configuration,12-2
worksheets
10-button and 20-button telephones,D-14~D-15
parameter selection,D-13
slot assignment,D-1

Navigation menu